Manual Basic Reference Guide

Basic Reference Guide

iii

Table of Contents Disclaimer ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3

Contact address ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3

About program ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3

About documentation ................................................................................................................................................................ 4

Installation ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4

Installation options..................................................................................................................................................................... 4

System requirements ................................................................................................................................................................ 6

Demo version ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6

Uninstalling program ................................................................................................................................................................. 6

Running the program .................................................................................................................................................................... 6

Starting program ........................................................................................................................................................................ 6

Program files and folders .......................................................................................................................................................... 7

Upgrade from other products ........................................................................................................................................................ 8

Upgrade from EPW ................................................................................................................................................................... 8

Terminology .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9

Co-ordinate systems ................................................................................................................................................................... 10

Introduction to co-ordinate systems ........................................................................................................................................ 10

Global co-ordinate system ....................................................................................................................................................... 10

User-defined co-ordinate system ............................................................................................................................................ 10

Entity co-ordinate systems ...................................................................................................................................................... 10

Point definition co-ordinate systems ....................................................................................................................................... 12

Conventions for applied physical quantities ................................................................................................................................ 13

Input quantities conventions .................................................................................................................................................... 13

Output quantities conventions ................................................................................................................................................. 14

Units ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 14

Introduction to units ................................................................................................................................................................. 14

Length units ............................................................................................................................................................................. 14

Angle units ............................................................................................................................................................................... 17

Layout and operation overview ................................................................................................................................................... 19

User interface .............................................................................................................................................................................. 19

Introduction to user interface ................................................................................................................................................... 19

Title bar ................................................................................................................................................................................... 19

Status bar ................................................................................................................................................................................ 20

Menu bar ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20

Tree menu window .................................................................................................................................................................. 21

Command line ......................................................................................................................................................................... 23

Property table .......................................................................................................................................................................... 25

Progress bar ............................................................................................................................................................................ 26

User Interface Skins ................................................................................................................................................................ 27

Toolbars .................................................................................................................................................................................. 27

Application windows ................................................................................................................................................................ 29

Property window ...................................................................................................................................................................... 34

Database managers ................................................................................................................................................................ 39

Language of program .................................................................................................................................................................. 45

Language of the program ........................................................................................................................................................ 45

User level .................................................................................................................................................................................... 45

Basic Reference Guide

iv

Level of the user interface ....................................................................................................................................................... 45

Application options ...................................................................................................................................................................... 46

Workspace settings ................................................................................................................................................................. 46

Environment settings ............................................................................................................................................................... 46

Graphic templates settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 47

Directories settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 47

Project settings ........................................................................................................................................................................ 48

Protection settings ................................................................................................................................................................... 48

Adjusting the application options ............................................................................................................................................. 49

Project settings ........................................................................................................................................................................... 49

Basic project settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 49

Display style settings ............................................................................................................................................................... 53

Scales ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 57

Advanced settings ................................................................................................................................................................... 59

Selections ................................................................................................................................................................................... 61

Introduction to selections......................................................................................................................................................... 61

Making a selection ................................................................................................................................................................... 61

Removing the entities from selection ...................................................................................................................................... 67

Making a selection based on a specific property .................................................................................................................... 67

Adjusting the filter for selections.............................................................................................................................................. 68

Modifying a selection ............................................................................................................................................................... 68

Applying a selection ................................................................................................................................................................ 68

Clearing a selection ................................................................................................................................................................. 69

Saving and reading a selection ............................................................................................................................................... 69

Selections versus editing of properties ................................................................................................................................... 73

Controlling the selection-versus-editing process ..................................................................................................................... 73

Selections of slabs with openings ........................................................................................................................................... 74

Activity ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 75

Introduction to activity.............................................................................................................................................................. 75

Activity types ........................................................................................................................................................................... 75

Switching the activity On or Off ............................................................................................................................................... 76

Activity according to layers ...................................................................................................................................................... 76

Activity according to current selection ..................................................................................................................................... 76

Activity according to working plane ......................................................................................................................................... 76

Activity according to clipping box ............................................................................................................................................ 77

Inverting the activity ................................................................................................................................................................. 77

Controlling the display style of inactive members ................................................................................................................... 77

Clipping box ................................................................................................................................................................................ 77

Introduction to clipping box...................................................................................................................................................... 77

Defining a new clipping box..................................................................................................................................................... 77

Defining the clipping box around the working plane ................................................................................................................ 77

Defining the clipping box around an entity .............................................................................................................................. 78

Defining the clipping box around the model ............................................................................................................................ 78

Using the clipping box ............................................................................................................................................................. 78

Adjusting the clipping box in the setting table ......................................................................................................................... 79

Adjusting the clipping box using the mouse ............................................................................................................................ 79

Moving the clipping box ........................................................................................................................................................... 80

Layers ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 80

Introduction to layers ............................................................................................................................................................... 80

Table of Contents

v

Layers manager ...................................................................................................................................................................... 80

Defining a new layer ................................................................................................................................................................ 81

Applying defined layers ........................................................................................................................................................... 81

Displaying and hiding a layer .................................................................................................................................................. 82

Ignoring selected layers in calculation .................................................................................................................................... 82

User co-ordinate system (UCS) .................................................................................................................................................. 83

Introduction to a user co-ordinate system ............................................................................................................................... 83

Adjusting a user co-ordinate system ....................................................................................................................................... 83

Editing a user co-ordinate system ........................................................................................................................................... 84

Using a user co-ordinate system ............................................................................................................................................. 87

Working plane ............................................................................................................................................................................. 88

Introduction to a working plane ............................................................................................................................................... 88

Adjusting a working plane ....................................................................................................................................................... 88

Cursor SNAP modes ................................................................................................................................................................... 88

Introduction to SNAP modes ................................................................................................................................................... 88

Grid SNAP modes ................................................................................................................................................................... 89

Object SNAP modes ............................................................................................................................................................... 89

Adjusting a SNAP mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 89

Adjusting the temporary one-step SNAP mode ...................................................................................................................... 90

Dot grid ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 90

Introduction to a dot grid.......................................................................................................................................................... 90

Adjusting dot grid parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 91

Using the dot grid .................................................................................................................................................................... 91

Line grid ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 92

Introduction to a line grid ......................................................................................................................................................... 92

Types of line grid ..................................................................................................................................................................... 92

Line grid manager ................................................................................................................................................................... 93

Creating a new line grid........................................................................................................................................................... 94

Adjusting line grid parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 94

Adjusting the display style of line grid ..................................................................................................................................... 95

Displaying and hiding a line grid.............................................................................................................................................. 96

Using a line grid ....................................................................................................................................................................... 96

Editing an existing line grid...................................................................................................................................................... 97

Window pop-up menu ................................................................................................................................................................. 97

Introduction to window pop-up menu ...................................................................................................................................... 97

Functions of the pop-up menu ................................................................................................................................................ 97

Using the window pop-up menu .............................................................................................................................................. 99

Adjusting the viewpoint (view direction + zoom) ......................................................................................................................... 99

Introduction to view adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... 99

Adjusting the view ................................................................................................................................................................... 99

Limiting the view .................................................................................................................................................................... 101

Adjusting the view numerically .............................................................................................................................................. 102

Adjusting perspective projection............................................................................................................................................ 103

Special view settings ............................................................................................................................................................. 103

View parameters ....................................................................................................................................................................... 103

Introduction to view parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 103

Overview of view parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 103

Adjusting the view parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 112

Predefined view parameters settings .................................................................................................................................... 114

Basic Reference Guide

vi

Drawing of input data with eccentricity .................................................................................................................................. 115

Lights ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 119

Regeneration of view ................................................................................................................................................................ 120

Introduction to regeneration of view ...................................................................................................................................... 120

Redrawing the active graphical window ................................................................................................................................ 120

Calculator .................................................................................................................................................................................. 120

Calculator .............................................................................................................................................................................. 120

Cleaner ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 121

Removing unnecessary data from the project ....................................................................................................................... 121

Coordinate information .............................................................................................................................................................. 121

Information about coordinates of selected points .................................................................................................................. 121

Introduction to materials ............................................................................................................................................................ 123

Material types ............................................................................................................................................................................ 123

Material properties .................................................................................................................................................................... 123

Materials manager .................................................................................................................................................................... 123

Specifying the materials for the project ..................................................................................................................................... 124

Defining a new code-specific material ...................................................................................................................................... 125

Defining a new user-defined code-specific material ................................................................................................................. 125

Defining a new general material ............................................................................................................................................... 126

Editing the defined material ...................................................................................................................................................... 126

Copying the defined material .................................................................................................................................................... 126

Changing the defined material .................................................................................................................................................. 126

Deleting the defined material .................................................................................................................................................... 127

Reviewing the defined material parameters ............................................................................................................................. 127

Introduction to cross-sections ................................................................................................................................................... 129

Sectional characteristics and other properties .......................................................................................................................... 129

Overview of sectional characteristics and parameters .......................................................................................................... 129

Sectional characteristics........................................................................................................................................................ 129

Calculation of sectional characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 130

Other cross-section parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 132

Sectional characteristics calculated by FEM ......................................................................................................................... 134

Cross-section types .................................................................................................................................................................. 137

Geometric shapes ................................................................................................................................................................. 137

Thin-walled cross-sections .................................................................................................................................................... 137

Steel rolled cross-sections .................................................................................................................................................... 138

Welded steel cross-sections.................................................................................................................................................. 139

Welded hollow cross-sections ............................................................................................................................................... 140

Haunch cross-sections .......................................................................................................................................................... 141

Built-up steel cross-sections.................................................................................................................................................. 141

Multi-material built-up cross-sections .................................................................................................................................... 142

Concrete cross-sections ........................................................................................................................................................ 143

Timber cross-sections ........................................................................................................................................................... 143

Bridge cross-sections ............................................................................................................................................................ 143

Numerical cross-section ........................................................................................................................................................ 144

General cross-section ........................................................................................................................................................... 144

Defining a new cross-section .................................................................................................................................................... 144

Cross-section manager ......................................................................................................................................................... 144

General procedure for the definition of a new cross-section ................................................................................................. 145

Selecting the cross-section type............................................................................................................................................ 146

Table of Contents

vii

Specifying sectional parameters and properties ................................................................................................................... 147

Reviewing the calculated sectional characteristics ............................................................................................................... 148

Importing the cross-sections from another project ................................................................................................................ 149

Modifying an existing cross-section .......................................................................................................................................... 151

Editing a cross-section .......................................................................................................................................................... 151

Deleting a cross-section ........................................................................................................................................................ 151

Copying a cross-section ........................................................................................................................................................ 152

Replacing a cross-section ..................................................................................................................................................... 152

General cross-section ............................................................................................................................................................... 152

General cross-section ........................................................................................................................................................... 152

Examples of a general cross-section .................................................................................................................................... 152

Rules for general cross-sections ........................................................................................................................................... 154

Type of partial sections in the general cross-section ............................................................................................................ 154

General cross-section editor ................................................................................................................................................. 156

Creating a new general cross-section ................................................................................................................................... 162

Adjusting the properties......................................................................................................................................................... 168

Modifying the existing general cross-section ........................................................................................................................ 170

Defining a parametric cross-section ...................................................................................................................................... 172

Elements of a model ................................................................................................................................................................. 179

Nodes ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 179

Introduction to nodes ............................................................................................................................................................. 179

Types of nodes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 180

Defining a new node .............................................................................................................................................................. 181

Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node ...................................................................................................................... 181

Deleting the nodes ................................................................................................................................................................ 181

Beams ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 182

Introduction to beams ............................................................................................................................................................ 182

Common beam parameters................................................................................................................................................... 182

Buckling parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 184

Beam types ........................................................................................................................................................................... 184

Defining a new beam ............................................................................................................................................................. 191

Slabs ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 194

Slab types .............................................................................................................................................................................. 194

Defining a new slab ............................................................................................................................................................... 214

Defining a new shell .............................................................................................................................................................. 225

Defining a new membrane .................................................................................................................................................... 232

Geometric manipulations....................................................................................................................................................... 232

Auxiliary lines ............................................................................................................................................................................ 243

Lines ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 243

Lines from text ....................................................................................................................................................................... 243

General solids ........................................................................................................................................................................... 243

General solids ....................................................................................................................................................................... 243

Defining a new general solid ................................................................................................................................................. 243

Editing the existing general solid ........................................................................................................................................... 247

Geometrical manipulations with general solids ..................................................................................................................... 247

Boolean operations with general solids ................................................................................................................................. 247

Conversion of general components to structural members ................................................................................................... 249

Catalogue blocks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 253

Introduction to catalogue blocks ............................................................................................................................................ 253

Basic Reference Guide

viii

Overview of catalogue blocks ............................................................................................................................................... 253

Catalogue block types ........................................................................................................................................................... 253

Defining a new catalogue block ............................................................................................................................................ 258

User blocks ............................................................................................................................................................................... 262

Introduction to user blocks .................................................................................................................................................... 262

Using the user blocks ............................................................................................................................................................ 262

Moving the entities .................................................................................................................................................................... 264

Introduction to moving of entities........................................................................................................................................... 264

General rules for move of entities ......................................................................................................................................... 265

Moving the geometric entities................................................................................................................................................ 266

Moving the additional data entities ........................................................................................................................................ 270

Copying the entities .................................................................................................................................................................. 271

Introduction to copying of entities .......................................................................................................................................... 271

Making a single copy via menu function ............................................................................................................................... 271

Making a single copy via window pop-up menu .................................................................................................................... 271

Making multiple copies via menu function ............................................................................................................................. 272

Deleting the entities .................................................................................................................................................................. 273

Introduction to deleting of entities ......................................................................................................................................... 273

Deleting the user-selected entities ........................................................................................................................................ 273

Deleting invalid entities .......................................................................................................................................................... 274

Editing the entity properties ...................................................................................................................................................... 274

Introduction to editing of entity properties ............................................................................................................................. 274

Editing the beam properties in its property dialogue ............................................................................................................. 274

Editing the beam properties in the property window ............................................................................................................. 274

Adjusting the buckling parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 275

Modifying the shape and dimensions........................................................................................................................................ 275

Types of geometric manipulations......................................................................................................................................... 275

Treatment of linked nodes in manipulation functions ............................................................................................................ 276

Editing the shape in the property window ............................................................................................................................. 277

Editing the shape using Drag&Drop feature .......................................................................................................................... 277

Manipulations with whole entities .......................................................................................................................................... 278

Manipulations with lines ........................................................................................................................................................ 279

Manipulations with polylines .................................................................................................................................................. 281

Manipulations with curves ..................................................................................................................................................... 283

Connecting and disconnecting the entities ............................................................................................................................... 286

Introduction to connecting and disconnecting of entities ....................................................................................................... 286

Defining a new connection of two entities ............................................................................................................................. 286

Inserting a linked node for future connection of an entity ...................................................................................................... 287

Defining a new connection of intersecting entities ................................................................................................................ 287

Modifying the connection of two entities ............................................................................................................................... 287

Modifying the connection of intersecting entities ................................................................................................................... 288

Deleting the connection of two entities .................................................................................................................................. 288

Deleting the connection of intersecting entities ..................................................................................................................... 289

Truing of slabs and walls .......................................................................................................................................................... 289

Alignment of slabs ................................................................................................................................................................. 289

Alignment procedure ............................................................................................................................................................. 290

Parameters controlling the alignment of the structure ........................................................................................................... 291

Openings in beams ................................................................................................................................................................... 296

Opening in webs of beams .................................................................................................................................................... 296

Table of Contents

ix

Structural model ........................................................................................................................................................................ 302

Introduction to structural model ............................................................................................................................................. 302

Parameters of structural model ............................................................................................................................................. 302

Defining the structural model................................................................................................................................................. 306

Displaying the structural model ............................................................................................................................................. 307

Modifying the structural model .............................................................................................................................................. 307

Regenerating the structural model ........................................................................................................................................ 307

Manual input of end cut ......................................................................................................................................................... 307

Structural shape of 2D members........................................................................................................................................... 310

Introduction to model data ........................................................................................................................................................ 313

Supports .................................................................................................................................................................................... 313

Types of supports .................................................................................................................................................................. 313

Defining a new support.......................................................................................................................................................... 324

Hinges (pins) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 326

Beams ................................................................................................................................................................................... 326

Slabs ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 328

Rigid arms ................................................................................................................................................................................. 330

Rigid arms ............................................................................................................................................................................. 330

Defining a new rigid arm........................................................................................................................................................ 330

Defining a new line rigid arm ................................................................................................................................................. 331

Modifying the existing model data ............................................................................................................................................. 331

Changing the parameters of model data ............................................................................................................................... 331

Moving the model data .......................................................................................................................................................... 332

Copying the model data ........................................................................................................................................................ 332

Deleting the model data ........................................................................................................................................................ 333

Absences .................................................................................................................................................................................. 333

Introduction to absences ....................................................................................................................................................... 333

The principle of Absences ..................................................................................................................................................... 333

Creating a project allowing for absences .............................................................................................................................. 333

Absence groups .................................................................................................................................................................... 334

Defining a new absence ........................................................................................................................................................ 334

Absence on a 1D member..................................................................................................................................................... 334

Absences in a support ........................................................................................................................................................... 335

Associating the absence group with a load case .................................................................................................................. 335

Displaying the required Absence group ................................................................................................................................ 335

Editing the existing absence.................................................................................................................................................. 336

Deleting the existing absence ............................................................................................................................................... 336

Beam nonlinearity ..................................................................................................................................................................... 336

Defining a new beam nonlinearity ......................................................................................................................................... 336

Editing the existing beam nonlinearity ................................................................................................................................... 336

Types of nonlinearity ............................................................................................................................................................. 336

Introduction to loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 343

Load types ................................................................................................................................................................................ 343

Introduction to load types ...................................................................................................................................................... 343

Point force in node ................................................................................................................................................................ 343

Point force on beam .............................................................................................................................................................. 344

Line force on beam ................................................................................................................................................................ 345

Line force on slab edge ......................................................................................................................................................... 346

Surface load on slab.............................................................................................................................................................. 347

Basic Reference Guide

x

Moment load in node ............................................................................................................................................................. 348

Moment load on beam........................................................................................................................................................... 348

Line moment load on beam ................................................................................................................................................... 349

Line moment on slab edge .................................................................................................................................................... 349

Thermal load on beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 349

Temperature distribution curve.............................................................................................................................................. 350

Thermal load on slab ............................................................................................................................................................. 352

Translation of support............................................................................................................................................................ 353

Translation of a point on beam .............................................................................................................................................. 355

Rotation of support ................................................................................................................................................................ 356

Rotation of a point on beam .................................................................................................................................................. 356

Longitudinal strain ................................................................................................................................................................. 357

Flexural strain ........................................................................................................................................................................ 357

Slab displacement and curvature .......................................................................................................................................... 357

Pond load - water accumulation ............................................................................................................................................ 360

Soil pressure and water pressure.......................................................................................................................................... 362

Pressure load ........................................................................................................................................................................ 364

Internal forces not calculated in the model ............................................................................................................................ 365

Dynamic loads ....................................................................................................................................................................... 368

Free loads ............................................................................................................................................................................. 369

Load direction ........................................................................................................................................................................... 377

Direction of loads ................................................................................................................................................................... 377

Defining a new load .................................................................................................................................................................. 378

Defining a new point load in a node ...................................................................................................................................... 379

Defining a new point load on a beam .................................................................................................................................... 379

Defining a new line load on a beam ...................................................................................................................................... 379

Defining a new thermal load on a beam ................................................................................................................................ 379

Defining a new line load on slab edge .................................................................................................................................. 380

Defining a new surface load on a slab .................................................................................................................................. 380

Defining a new thermal load on slab ..................................................................................................................................... 380

Defining a new free point load ............................................................................................................................................... 380

Defining a new free line load ................................................................................................................................................. 380

Defining a new free surface load ........................................................................................................................................... 380

Defining a new slab displacement ......................................................................................................................................... 380

Fast definition of specific load types ..................................................................................................................................... 381

Modifying the existing load ........................................................................................................................................................ 381

Changing the load parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 381

Moving the load ..................................................................................................................................................................... 381

Copying the load ................................................................................................................................................................... 381

Deleting the load ................................................................................................................................................................... 381

Editing the shape of free load................................................................................................................................................ 382

Load cases ................................................................................................................................................................................ 382

Introduction to load cases ..................................................................................................................................................... 382

Load case manager............................................................................................................................................................... 382

Defining a new load case ...................................................................................................................................................... 382

Defining the load case parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 383

Using the load case ............................................................................................................................................................... 384

Dynamic load cases .............................................................................................................................................................. 385

Load groups .............................................................................................................................................................................. 390

Table of Contents

xi

Introduction to load groups .................................................................................................................................................... 390

Load group manager ............................................................................................................................................................. 390

Defining a new load group..................................................................................................................................................... 390

Using the load group ............................................................................................................................................................. 391

Load case combinations ........................................................................................................................................................... 391

Introduction to load case combinations ................................................................................................................................. 391

Types of load case combinations .......................................................................................................................................... 392

Load case combination manager .......................................................................................................................................... 393

Defining a new combination .................................................................................................................................................. 395

Exploding the load case combination .................................................................................................................................... 395

Combination key .................................................................................................................................................................... 396

Example ................................................................................................................................................................................ 396

Load case combinations according to EC ............................................................................................................................. 400

Load case combinations to ČSN ........................................................................................................................................... 404

Load case combinations to NEN ........................................................................................................................................... 405

Advanced combinations of load cases .................................................................................................................................. 407

Result classes ........................................................................................................................................................................... 408

Introduction to result classes ................................................................................................................................................. 408

Result class manager ............................................................................................................................................................ 408

Defining a new result class .................................................................................................................................................... 408

Using the result class ............................................................................................................................................................ 409

Load generators ........................................................................................................................................................................ 410

Introduction to load generators ............................................................................................................................................. 410

Wind generator ...................................................................................................................................................................... 410

Snow generator ..................................................................................................................................................................... 419

Combined wind and snow generator ..................................................................................................................................... 422

Plane load generator ............................................................................................................................................................. 424

Pond water ............................................................................................................................................................................ 429

Span loads ................................................................................................................................................................................ 434

Introduction to spans ............................................................................................................................................................. 434

What is the span .................................................................................................................................................................... 435

Types of spans ...................................................................................................................................................................... 435

Work with spans .................................................................................................................................................................... 439

Predefined load ......................................................................................................................................................................... 443

Introduction to predefined loads ............................................................................................................................................ 443

Predefined load manager ...................................................................................................................................................... 443

Defining a new predefined load ............................................................................................................................................. 444

Editing the predefined load.................................................................................................................................................... 444

Applying the predefined load ................................................................................................................................................. 445

Input and display conventions for predefined load ................................................................................................................ 445

Mobile load ................................................................................................................................................................................ 446

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 446

Brief introduction to the theory .............................................................................................................................................. 447

Loading track ......................................................................................................................................................................... 450

Unit loads .............................................................................................................................................................................. 451

Load systems ........................................................................................................................................................................ 453

Generated load cases ........................................................................................................................................................... 455

Calculation and evaluation .................................................................................................................................................... 457

Load patterns (train load) ...................................................................................................................................................... 459

Basic Reference Guide

xii

Introduction to calculation ......................................................................................................................................................... 465

Checking the data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 465

Introduction to check of data ................................................................................................................................................. 465

Parameters of data check ..................................................................................................................................................... 465

Performing the check of data ................................................................................................................................................ 466

Collision between entities ...................................................................................................................................................... 466

Generating the FE mesh ........................................................................................................................................................... 468

Parameters of FE mesh ........................................................................................................................................................ 468

Previewing the FE mesh ....................................................................................................................................................... 469

Mesh refinement .................................................................................................................................................................... 470

Calculation types ....................................................................................................................................................................... 472

General calculation parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 472

Static linear calculation.......................................................................................................................................................... 472

Static nonlinear calculation.................................................................................................................................................... 472

Dynamic natural vibration calculation .................................................................................................................................... 473

Dynamic forced harmonic vibration ....................................................................................................................................... 473

Harmonic band analysis ........................................................................................................................................................ 474

Dynamic seismic calculation ................................................................................................................................................. 477

Buckling analysis ................................................................................................................................................................... 477

Nonlinear stability calculation ................................................................................................................................................ 478

Soil-in calculation parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 478

Non uniform damping in dynamic calculation ........................................................................................................................ 478

Performing the calculation ........................................................................................................................................................ 483

Adjusting the calculation parameters .................................................................................................................................... 483

Performing the calculation ..................................................................................................................................................... 483

Controlling and reviewing the calculation process ................................................................................................................ 483

Performing the repetitious calculations ................................................................................................................................. 484

Repairing the instability of model .......................................................................................................................................... 484

Solution methods ...................................................................................................................................................................... 485

Direct solution ........................................................................................................................................................................ 485

Iterative solution .................................................................................................................................................................... 486

Timoshenko method .............................................................................................................................................................. 486

Newton-Raphson method...................................................................................................................................................... 486

Initial deformations .................................................................................................................................................................... 486

Introduction to initial deformations......................................................................................................................................... 486

Initial-deformation manager................................................................................................................................................... 486

Initial deformation curve ........................................................................................................................................................ 487

Defining a new initial deformation curve ............................................................................................................................... 487

Applying the initial deformation ............................................................................................................................................. 487

Plastic hinges ............................................................................................................................................................................ 488

Introduction to plastic hinges ................................................................................................................................................. 488

Plastic hinges to EC3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 488

Plastic hinges to DIN 18800 .................................................................................................................................................. 488

Plastic hinges to NEN ............................................................................................................................................................ 489

Calculating with plastic hinges .............................................................................................................................................. 490

Global optimisation ................................................................................................................................................................... 490

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 490

AutoDesign manager............................................................................................................................................................. 490

Defining a new optimisation .................................................................................................................................................. 490

Table of Contents

xiii

Opening the service Results ..................................................................................................................................................... 493

Selecting the 1D members for display ...................................................................................................................................... 493

Selecting the load for the display of results .............................................................................................................................. 495

Adjusting the style of result diagrams ....................................................................................................................................... 495

Regenerating the diagrams ....................................................................................................................................................... 497

Animation of results .................................................................................................................................................................. 497

Upgrade from 2D to 1D project ................................................................................................................................................. 499

Results on beams ..................................................................................................................................................................... 499

Displaying the internal forces ................................................................................................................................................ 499

Displaying the deformation on 1D members ......................................................................................................................... 501

Displaying the deformation of nodes ..................................................................................................................................... 501

Displaying the resultant of reactions ..................................................................................................................................... 502

Displaying the nodal space support resultant ....................................................................................................................... 503

Displaying the reactions ........................................................................................................................................................ 505

Displaying the foundation table ............................................................................................................................................. 506

Displaying the bill of material................................................................................................................................................. 508

Displaying the intensity .......................................................................................................................................................... 509

Displaying the stress on members ........................................................................................................................................ 510

Selecting the joints for display of connection forces ............................................................................................................. 510

Displaying the connection forces........................................................................................................................................... 511

Displaying the calculation report ........................................................................................................................................... 511

Displaying the results in tabular form .................................................................................................................................... 512

Displaying the results in named fibres................................................................................................................................... 512

Displaying the stress distribution over the cross-section ...................................................................................................... 515

Fast selection of result quantities for the display .................................................................................................................. 516

Displaying the natural frequencies ........................................................................................................................................ 516

Evaluating the results for harmonic load ............................................................................................................................... 517

Calculation of internal forces in ribs ...................................................................................................................................... 517

Results on slabs ........................................................................................................................................................................ 518

Displaying the deformation of nodes on slabs ...................................................................................................................... 518

Displaying the internal forces on slabs .................................................................................................................................. 519

Principal internal forces ......................................................................................................................................................... 521

Design internal forces ............................................................................................................................................................ 521

Displaying the stresses on slabs ........................................................................................................................................... 523

Stresses ................................................................................................................................................................................ 523

Displaying the contact stress on slabs .................................................................................................................................. 524

Calculated C parameters....................................................................................................................................................... 524

Displaying the settlement ...................................................................................................................................................... 525

Results in membrane elements ............................................................................................................................................. 526

Displaying results for individual FE nodes or elements ......................................................................................................... 527

Isolines, isobands, etc. .......................................................................................................................................................... 527

Averaging strips ..................................................................................................................................................................... 550

Refreshing the results ............................................................................................................................................................... 561

Principle ................................................................................................................................................................................. 561

Refresh of results .................................................................................................................................................................. 561

Example for refresh of results ............................................................................................................................................... 562

Selected sections ...................................................................................................................................................................... 565

Selected sections for result diagrams ................................................................................................................................... 565

Defining a new section for display of results ......................................................................................................................... 566

Basic Reference Guide

xiv

Displaying the results in selected sections ............................................................................................................................ 567

Displaying the resultant in the section across a slab ............................................................................................................ 574

Introduction to graphic output ................................................................................................................................................... 575

Direct graphic output ................................................................................................................................................................. 575

Making the direct graphic output ........................................................................................................................................... 575

Editing the graphic output layout ........................................................................................................................................... 576

Adjusting the page for the drawing ........................................................................................................................................ 578

Saving the drawing to an external file ................................................................................................................................... 579

Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue .......................................................................................................... 579

Using the templates in graphic output ................................................................................................................................... 580

Items of graphic output drawing ............................................................................................................................................ 580

Inserting and editing the items of the drawing ....................................................................................................................... 584

Picture gallery ........................................................................................................................................................................... 590

Introduction to the picture gallery .......................................................................................................................................... 590

Picture gallery manager ........................................................................................................................................................ 590

Editing the picture in the picture gallery ................................................................................................................................ 599

Paper space gallery .................................................................................................................................................................. 609

Introduction to Paper space gallery ....................................................................................................................................... 609

Paper space gallery manager ............................................................................................................................................... 609

Editing the drawing in the gallery .......................................................................................................................................... 609

Creating a new drawing in the gallery ................................................................................................................................... 609

Creating a new drawing based on a template ....................................................................................................................... 610

Printing the drawing from the gallery ..................................................................................................................................... 610

Copying the drawing in the gallery ........................................................................................................................................ 610

Deleting the drawing from the gallery .................................................................................................................................... 610

Making or changing the drawing ........................................................................................................................................... 610

Saving a template .................................................................................................................................................................. 611

Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings ......................................................................................................... 611

Introduction to document .......................................................................................................................................................... 613

Document window ..................................................................................................................................................................... 613

Introduction to document window .......................................................................................................................................... 613

Opening the document window ............................................................................................................................................. 614

Document window toolbar ..................................................................................................................................................... 614

Creating the document .......................................................................................................................................................... 615

Editing the basic document properties .................................................................................................................................. 626

Editing the document layout .................................................................................................................................................. 629

Modifying the structure through the document ...................................................................................................................... 631

Previewing the document ...................................................................................................................................................... 632

Printing and exporting the document .................................................................................................................................... 632

Refreshing the document .......................................................................................................................................................... 634

Principle ................................................................................................................................................................................. 634

Refresh of document ............................................................................................................................................................. 634

Example for refresh of Document ......................................................................................................................................... 634

Preview window ........................................................................................................................................................................ 636

Introduction to preview window ............................................................................................................................................. 636

Opening the preview window ................................................................................................................................................ 636

Adjusting the display style in the preview window ................................................................................................................. 637

Adjusting the preview window settings .................................................................................................................................. 637

Exporting the preview ............................................................................................................................................................ 637

Table of Contents

xv

Printing the preview ............................................................................................................................................................... 637

Editing the structure from within the preview window ........................................................................................................... 637

Visual style of the document ..................................................................................................................................................... 637

Visual style ............................................................................................................................................................................ 637

Visual styles manager ........................................................................................................................................................... 638

Adjusting the visual style ....................................................................................................................................................... 638

Table Manager and Table Composer ....................................................................................................................................... 641

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 641

Manufacturer's versus user's table template ......................................................................................................................... 641

Table Manager ...................................................................................................................................................................... 642

Table Composer .................................................................................................................................................................... 645

1

Version Info

Version info

Documentation title Reference Guide

Version 2010.0

Produced November 2009

Translated N/A

Software covered Scia Engineer

Version 2010.0

Latest Build covered 10.0.25

3

Getting started

Disclaimer This document is being furnished by SCIA for information purposes only to licensed users of SCIA software and is furnished on an "AS IS" basis, that is, without any warranties, whatsoever, expressed or implied. SCIA is not responsible for direct or indirect damage as a result of imperfections in the documentation and/or software.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of SCIA. The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. The software may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license agreement. It is against the law to copy or use the software except as specifically allowed in the license.

© Copyright 2000-2004 SCIA Group. All rights reserved.

Contact address

SCIA Group n.v.

Scientific Application Group

Industrieweg 1007 B-3540 Herk-de-Stad (België)

Tel.(+32) (0)13/55 17 75 Fax.(+32) (0)13/55 41 75

E-mail scia@scia.be

SCIA W+B Software b.v.

Postbus 30119 NL-6803 AC Arnhem (Nederland)

Tel.(+31) 26-3201230 Fax.(+31) 26-3201239

E-mail scia@scia.nl

SCIA CZ, s.r.o.

Thákurova 3, 160 00, Prague 6 (Czech Republic)

Tel.(+420) 2 – 2432 2425 Fax. (+420) 2 – 2432 2288

e-mail info.praha@scia.cz

SCIA CZ, s.r.o.

Slavíčkova 1a, 638 00, Brno (Czech Republic)

Tel.(+420) 5 – 4519 3526 Fax. (+420) 5 – 4519 3533

e-mail info.brno@scia.cz

Introduction

About program

Program mission

The Scia Engineer software system has been designed and developed to provide structural engineers and designers with an efficient, comprehensive and robust tool.

Theoretical background

Scia Engineer is a software system for a static and dynamic analysis of structures and their design to standards. It is grounded on the displacement-based finite element method.

Scia Engineer does not work with finite elements directly but it exploits structural elements (referred to as members) on which a finite element mesh is automatically generated just before the calculation.

Scia Engineer can be used to calculate and design structures consisting of 1D members (modelled by linear finite elements) and planar parts such as walls, plates, and curved slabs (modelled by 2D finite elements).

Types of calculation

Scia Engineer comprises calculation modules for the following types of calculation:

linear static calculation (including some non-linear features),

geometrically non-linear calculation,

dynamic natural vibration calculation,

seismicity calculation,

buckling analysis.

Basic Reference Guide

4

Code checks

In addition to the calculation itself, Scia Engineer enables the user to carry out the final design of a structure in accordance with appropriate technical standards.

The "Code Check library" of Scia Engineer contains a multi-national set of technical standards for various material types, mainly for steel and concrete.

Important note: A proper and exhaustive application of program features assumes that a user is well accustomed to the principles of the finite element method, is familiar with appropriate technical standards and conventions, and is a skilled professional in the field of design and calculation of engineering structures.

About documentation We recommend undergoing a specialised training for Scia Engineer organised for you by your local SCIA dealer before using the program for real work.

The documentation contains explanation of the program principles, theoretical background and operation and will provide the user with invaluable knowledge about the Scia Engineer software.

Purpose and contents

This manual provides an in-depth coverage of Scia Engineer main module functionality and covers the input, calculation and result-evaluation phases for both frame and shell structures.

Special modules such as those for non-linear or dynamic calculation, for design to individual technical standards, etc. are handled in separate manuals.

Style

The following text format conventions and symbols are used throughout this manual:

bold Indicates texts used in the program (menus, texts in dialog windows, buttons, etc.).

E.g. Enter the length of the 1D member in the Length field.

[bold] Indicates a button.

E.g. Click on [OK] to confirm.

Step 1

Step 2

Indicates the different steps in a procedure. Each step describes one action.

E.g.

Enter the value in the Coefficient field.

Click on [OK] to confirm.

Menu > Submenu Indicates items and subitems from the main menu (on top of the screen) or from the menu tree (left side of the screen).

E.g. ... choose Setup > Options from the main menu.

Bold With Capital First Letters

Refers to a chapter of the manual.

E.g. For more details see chapter Detailed Description.

Installation

Installation options All the installation options are introduced by the Setup program.

Scia Engineer uses a standard Setup program like many other MS Windows applications.

The installation of Scia Engineer can be made in three modes:

local installation,

installation on a network server,

connection to a network server.

Local installation

Starting the installation

The installation of Scia Engineer is started by running SETUP.EXE program. Once this program has been started, a language selection dialogue appears on the screen. The language selected here determines the language of the installation program.

The selected language also affects the language of help files that will be installed. In addition, the selected language is adjusted as a default language for the first run of the installed Scia Engineer.

Selection of target folder

The following dialogue provides for the selection of path to the application files. By default, the path is set to: C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESAxx (where is may differ according to a particular version of the program).

Getting started

5

Choice of installation type

One of the following types of installation can be selected:

Typical All program files are installed.

Compact Only the essential files are installed.

Selective The user may select whether help files will be installed and what language versions will be installed.

The next dialogue then summarises the installation information. Once the information is confirmed, the installation process is started.

The installation program adds group Scia Engineer xx (xx differs according to a particular version of the program) into Start > Programs. The new group contains items for running the application and its help. In addition, a short-cut is added onto the desktop.

Maintaining and uninstalling the application

The repairing of the installation or its uninstalling can be started either by a repeated start of SETUP.EXE from the installation medium or by a selection of appropriate item in Control panel > Add or remove programs.

Update to a higher version

If the installation program finds on the computer an already installed lower version of the program, it updates the existing installation to the new version.

Installation on a network server

The installation on a network server can be started by command SETUP.EXE /A. This command starts the installation program in an administration mode.

First, the language of installation must be selected. This language determines the language of help files on all workstations connected to the server.

In the next dialogue, the folder is selected where all the files of the server installation will be extracted. After confirmation of the folder, the administration installation is extracted and the network installation is created.

Connection to the network installation

The installation on a workstation in "connection to the network server" mode can be carried out by running the file SETUP.EXE in the root folder of the network installation.

As first step, the language of the installation is selected. This language determines the language of the application on its first run.

No other settings must be done. No files are copied to a local drive. Only components from the server are registered.

The installation program adds group SCIA.ESA xx into Start > Programs. The new group contains items for running the application and its help. In addition, a short-cut is added onto the desktop.

Both the local installation and the installation of the connection to the network server adjust the default setting of application folders. This setting can be later changed using command Settings > Options, tab Files, folders.

The default setting is as follows:

Cross-section library folder C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESA1\Prof, where C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESA1 is replaced by the real folder where the application has been installed.

System database folder C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESA\db, where C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESA1 is replaced by the real folder where the application has been installed.

In addition, the following folders are set when the application is installed under Windows 2000 or Windows XP:

User files C:\Documents and Settings\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\User

Temporary files C:\Documents and Settings\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Temp

Project files C:\Documents and Settings\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Data

The following folders are set when the application is installed under Windows NT:

User files C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\User

Temporary files C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Temp

Project files C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Data

Basic Reference Guide

6

USER_PROFILE_NAME is the name of user profile of the current user.

Note: If the user has to or decides to reinstall the program, for any reason, it is generally advisable NOT TO delete the contents of User files folder. This folder holds all possible settings made by the user. If the folder is removed as well, all the previously made settings will be lost (which of course, may be desirable in some cases).

System requirements

Hardware requirements

processor speed Pentium IV - 1Ghz (Advised: Pentium IV - 3Ghz)

RAM 512 MB (Advised: > 1GB)

graphic card 64 MB, supporting OpenGL

disk space for the program 450 MB

disk space for projects and temporary files

200 MB (for large projects, the amount of space required can augment to several GB’s)

Software requirements

MS Windows XP / 2003 / Vista / XP 64 bit

It is advised to install the latest Service Pack for these Operating Systems.

Login requirements

In order to install Scia Engineer, the account must have administrator rights.

In order to run Scia Engineer, the account can have just user rights.

Demo version Demoversion is fully functioning in all modules with limitation in calculation. Only 25 1D members and 2 load cases can be calculated. It is even possible to print results, but all printed material contains background text "UNLICENCED SOFTWARE".

ATTENTION: A project created in the demoversion CANNOT be opened in a full version!!!

Uninstalling program In order to uninstall the program use standard Windows procedure: invoke Control panel and select Add or remove program.

Running the program

Starting program Depending on your personal habits select one of the following ways:

Short-cut on desktop

1. If the short-cut has been placed on the desktop automatically during the installation, proceed to step 3.

2. Place the short-cut on the desktop.

a. Click the right mouse button on the desktop.

b. Select New > Short-cut command.

c. Browse the hard disk to find the folder you have installed Scia Engineer into.

d. Select ESA.EXE and finish the New Short-cut command.

3. Double click the short-cut to start the program.

Start menu

1. Click Start button on the left of Windows status bar.

2. Select Programs > SCIA > ESA.

Windows explorer or another file manager

1. Browse the hard disk to find the folder you have installed Scia Engineer into.

2. Select ESA.EXE file and double click it to start the program.

Getting started

7

Tips for advanced users: If you are familiar with Microsoft Windows features you may as well do any of the following:

Assign a hot key to the Scia Engineer program to start it by pressing the defined key combination.

Integrate Scia Engineer into your favourite file manager and start it from the toolbar of that file manager.

Insert Scia Engineer to the Windows 2000 toolbar.

Insert Scia Engineer to the Microsoft Office short-cut panel.

Use any other approach available in Microsoft Windows environment.

Program files and folders The program uses numerous folders and file types to store its data.

Folders

Program folders

main program folder It contains the program executable and auxiliary files.

set It contains initialisation files for a new project. (The information stored here may be overridden by the data from files saved in User folders, if available.)

db It stores system databases (e.g. materials, bolts, etc.)

prof It contains cross-section databases.

DocumentTemplates This folder offers a set of default templates for document. Its contents is automatically copied into the appropriate user folder on first program run.

GraphicTemplates This folder offers a set of default templates for graphical outputs. Its contents is automatically copied into the appropriate user folder on first program run.

Note: All the program folders are ReadOnly.

User folders

set It contains initialisation files for a new project.

db It stores files with user-defined databases.

prof It contains cross-section databases.

DocumentTemplates This folder holds the templates for document.

GraphicTemplates This folder holds the templates for graphical outputs.

Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup dialogue.

Temporary folder

This folder stores all the information that the program needs to store during its run. Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup dialogue.

Project folder

This folder stores the user-crated projects. Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup dialogue.

Files

ESA Project file

ESAD Project file that has been created in a demo or student version of the program. It cannot be read into a standard licensed version of the program.

EPW Project file created in Esa Prima Win

DB4 Database file

SET Initialisation file for the adjustment of project and user interface.

OTS File with table templates for document.

EPD Template for drawing in Paper space.

Basic Reference Guide

8

Upgrade from other products

Upgrade from EPW Scia Engineer keeps compatibility with program Esa Prima Win.

The users of ESA Prima Win may import their EPW projects into Scia Engineer using the appropriate Import function.

9

Terminology and conventions

Terminology

Global terms

additional data entity An entity that defines properties other than the shape of a structural member, e.g. load, support, hinge, etc.

catalogue block;

type structure

A predefined template structure; some of repeatedly used types of structure have been pre-created and can be quickly defined by a simple selection of the appropriate type in the integrated catalogue.

cut-out A rectangular area created by a mouse when dragged over the screen; the area extends from the point where the drag move started to the point where the left button was released; the sides of the cut-out are always horizontal and vertical.

entity Either a 1D member, load, support, hinge or any other part of a structure model the properties of which are defined and can be edited.

generator A part of the program that automatically generates some kind of data, e.g. the finite element mesh, load from a given wind conditions, etc.

geometric entity An entity that defines the geometry (or shape) of the structure. See member.

intersection line A polygonal line drawn by a mouse on the screen; the line can intersect as many entities as desired.

member Any structural member.

mesh finite element mesh

solver A part of the program that calculates the structure subject to the defined load using the selected type of calculation. The solver first assemblies the set of equations, then carries out the numerical solution of the problem.

Geometric entities

1D member A straight or curved member defined by means of its midline and cross-section. The cross-section may be constant or varying along the length of the 1D member.

cross-link A connection of two intersecting 1D members.

force load Load in the form of force. It can be either point or continuous.

foundation block A type of support that represents a pad foundation.

hinge Connection of two members. It can be either rigid or of defined elasticity.

load Any kind of load that the structure is subject to.

moment load Load in the form of bending moment. It can be either point or continuous.

node Generally a vertex of a member or a point where two or more members intersect.

predefined load A load defined by means of the composition of e.g. floor. The user defines individual layers of the floor, their height and specific weight.

rigid arm A 1D member of an infinitely large stiffness.

support Point or line support of a structure. Several types of supports are available: standard, foundation pad, wall, etc.

Cross-sections

catalogue cross-section A cross-section that can be defined by selecting from the library of cross-sections. The library is an integral part of Scia Engineer.

general cross-section A cross-section the shape of which is completely defined by the user.

reference point The reference point is defined according to a cross-section type:

for catalogue cross-sections it is located in the first point of the cross-

Basic Reference Guide

10

section,

for general cross-sections and cross-sections defined by a polygon it is identical with point [0,0].

Note: Some more terms may be found in the Glossary at the end of the documentation.

Co-ordinate systems

Introduction to co-ordinate systems As a user of Scia Engineer you will come across a set of various co-ordinate systems. Some co-ordinate systems are essential for the work with the program itself, some others may significantly reduce the effort and time necessary to get the required result.

The co-ordinate systems may be divided into several groups according to what they relate to:

global co-ordinate system the essential co-ordinate system, provides for positioning and orienting of a model and its unambiguous definition

user-defined co-ordinate systems

UCS

facilitates the model definition, the user may define it’s origin and direction

point definition co-ordinate systems;

geometry definition co-ordinate systems

provides for the definition of geometry in the most straightforward way

entity co-ordinate systems

local co-ordinate system

defines the orientation of individual entities in a model and provide for the unambiguous interpretation of physical quantities related to the entity

Global co-ordinate system The global co-ordinate system used in the program is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system.

The axes of the system are marked X, Y, and Z.

Note: It is highly recommended to locate the created model of a structure close to the origin of the global co-ordinate system (i.e. near the point whose global co-ordinates are 0, 0, 0) in order to prevent possible numerical inaccuracy due to numerical operations carried out with excessively great numbers. It is further recommended to focus on this point especially after the model geometry has been imported from a third-party CAD program.

User-defined co-ordinate system In order to simplify and speed up work with a model, the user can define its own co-ordinate system or systems and locate their origin, including possible inclination, anywhere in the global co-ordinate system.

The user-defined co-ordinate system is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system.

The axes of the system are marked X, Y, and Z.

The user co-ordinate system may be set arbitrarily and the setting can be changed during work as many times as required. In addition, any number of user co-ordinate systems may be defined simultaneously but just one of them can be active at a time. The user can swap between the previously and also newly defined user co-ordinate systems whenever it seems to be convenient.

For information about setting and using of user co-ordinate systems see chapter Basic Working Tools > User co-ordinate system.

Entity co-ordinate systems

Introduction to entity co-ordinate systems Each structural entity, that means each member, has got its own local co-ordinate system. This co-ordinate system is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system.

The system provides for:

unambiguous positioning of the member in space,

unambiguous definition of load and boundary conditions,

unambiguous interpretation of results.

This chapter also deals with a group of co-ordinate systems that do not refer to a structural entity in the full meaning of the word, but that is very closely related to it. This group consists of co-ordinate systems used with cross-sections.

Terminology and conventions

11

Cross-section co-ordinate system There are several co-ordinate systems used with cross-sections. All the sectional co-ordinate systems are two-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate systems.

Principal (or main) axes

The principal axes correspond to the principal moments of inertia of a cross-section. They are marked u and v.

The u axis is called (according to the official Eurocode terminology) a major axis and the v axis is called a minor axis.

The principal axes are used to evaluate important sectional characteristics necessary for design and assessment to technical standards (code check), e.g. moments of inertia, radiuses of gyration, etc.

Centroidal axes

The two centroidal axes pass the centroid of a cross-section and the first moments (the static moments) of the cross-section around these axes are equal to zero.

The centroidal axes are marked y and z.

The centroidal axes are used to evaluate important sectional characteristics necessary for design and assessment to technical standards (code check), e.g. moments of inertia, radiuses of gyration, section modulus, etc.

For symmetrical cross-sections, the centroidal axes are identical to the principal axes.

For example, for steel cross-sections the centroidal y axis is parallel to the flanges and the centroidal z axis is perpendicular to the flanges.

Geometric co-ordinate system

The geometric axes are used to define co-ordinates of cross-section vertices. The axes of the system are marked y and z.

Orientation of the cross-section co-ordinate system with reference to the beam local co-ordinate system

A cross-section is oriented so that the centroidal axis y is identical with beam local axis Y and the centroidal axis z is identical with beam local axis Z. If the 1D member is being rotated around its local X axis, also the sectional centroidal axes rotate.

Beam co-ordinate system The beam co-ordinate system is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system with axes marked x, y, and z.

Each 1D member is defined by means of two end points – by a "starting point" and by an "end point". Each 1D member has got a unique local co-ordinate system, the origin of which is located in the starting point of a 1D member. The x-axis is always identical with the longitudinal beam axis and its direction is from the staring point towards the end point. By default, the y-axis is generally horizontal (unless the beam orientation prevents this) and the z-axis is generally vertical (again, unless the beam orientation in space prevents this configuration).

Basic Reference Guide

12

The local co-ordinate system can be rotated around its x-axis if required.

In addition to this local co-ordinate system, also a principal (or main) co-ordinate system can be referred to on a 1D member. The principal co-ordinate system of a 1D member is related to the principal co-ordinate system of the cross-section of a 1D member.

Geometric block co-ordinate system Some of geometric blocks use a specific co-ordinate system. The system is used only throughout the phase of block definition. The concrete co-ordinate system, if applied, is always displayed in the dialogue for block definition.

Point definition co-ordinate systems

Introduction to point definition Any geometric entity is defined by positions of its vertices. The vertices are defined as points inserted into required location. Any inserted point, regardless the entity type it relates to, can be defined in one of the following co-ordinate systems:

Cartesian co-ordinate system

Cylindrical co-ordinate system

Spherical co-ordinate system

The choice of a particular system depends on several factors:

how is the point position defined in the model drawings,

what is the most efficient and most easiest way for the specific situation,

which particular system is preferred by the user.

Cartesian co-ordinate system A point in the Cartesian co-ordinate system is uniquely defined by three length co-ordinates x, y, and z. The individual co-ordinates represent the distance of the point from the origin of the co-ordinate system measured along individual axes x, y, and z respectively.

Cylindrical co-ordinate system

Terminology and conventions

13

In the cylindrical co-ordinate system the co-ordinate of any point is given by three components r, theta, and z. The co-ordinates r and theta represent polar co-ordinates of a point in xy plane. And the z co-ordinate is a distance of the defined point from xy plane.

Thus the ordinate along x, y, and z axis are respectively:

x = r × cos (theta),

y = r × sin (theta),

z = z.

Spherical co-ordinate system In the spherical co-ordinate system the co-ordinate of any point is given by three components r, Psi, theta. Thus the ordinates along x, y and z axis are:

x = r × sin (theta) cos (Psi),

y = r × sin (theta) sin (Psi),

z = r × cos (theta).

Conventions for applied physical quantities

Input quantities conventions The following notation and conventions are user in the program and in the program documentation.

Axes

global X Y Z

Basic Reference Guide

14

local x y z

External forces

Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz

Prescribed displacement and rotation

global Ux Uy Uz Fix Fiy Fiz

local ux uy uz fix fiy fiz

Both external forces and translations are considered as positive when acting in the direction of an appropriate axis. E.g. Force defined in global co-ordinate system and acting in the direction of the positive global X-axis is taken as positive. Force defined in global co-ordinate system and acting in the direction opposite to the direction of the positive global X-axis is taken as negative.

Output quantities conventions The following notation is user in the program and in the program documentation.

Axes

global X Y Z

local x y z

Displacement and rotation

global Ux Uy Uz Fix Fiy Fiz

local ux uy uz fix fiy fiz

Reactions

Rx Ry Rz Mx My Mz

Internal forces

N Vy Vz Mx My Mz

Stress

sig x sig y sig z

tau xy tau yz tau xz

Units

Introduction to units Scia Engineer supports various unit types.

SI units International system of units (metric practice)

FPS units foot-pound-second unit

Imperial, English units, US unit

FPS unit

Length units

Imperial length units

Terminology and conventions

15

The imperial units for length are:

inch (in),

foot (ft).

The official values for conversion are:

quantity multiply by to obtain

inch 25.400 millimetre (mm)

foot 0.3048 metre (m)

Display style of length units

Display style of length units is defined by format, precision and unit symbol.

Format

The format can be:

scientific (1.55E+01)

engineering (15.50E+00) (the exponent is ..., -09, -06, -03, +00, +03, +06, +09, ... )

decimal (15.50)

fractional (15 1/2)

Precision

The precision for scientific and decimal format is defined as follows. Sample value is 3.1415926

Decimal length in Units Setup

Precision Result

0 0 3

1 0.1 3.1

2 0.01 3.14

3 0.001 3.142

4 0.0001 3.1416

etc. etc. etc.

The precision for fractional format is defined as follows.

Fractional precision in Units Setup Precision

0 1

1 ˝

2 Ľ

3 1/8

4 1/16

etc. etc.

Unit symbol

unit symbol

millimetre mm

centimetre cm

decimetre dm

metre m

inch (1st option) in

inch (2nd option) "

foot (1st option) ft

foot (2nd option) ‘

foot-inch (1st option) ft in

Basic Reference Guide

16

foot-inch (2nd option) ‘ "

Example

The value is 78.24 cm.

Format Precision Unit symbol Result

scientific 0.001 centimetre (cm) 7.824E+01 cm

scientific 0.01 millimetre (mm) 7.82E+02 mm

engineering 0.001 centimetre (cm) 78.240E+00 cm

engineering 0.01 millimetre (mm) 782.40E+00 mm

decimal 0.01 centimetre (cm) 78.24 cm

decimal 0.001 inches (in) 30.803 in

decimal 0.001 inches (") 30.803 "

decimal 0.001 feet (ft) 2.567 ft

decimal 0.001 feet (') 2.567 '

decimal 0.001 feet-inches (ft in) 2 ft 6.803 in

decimal 0.001 feet-inches (' ") 2' 6.803"

fractional 1/16 feet(') 2-9/16'

fractional 1/16 inches (") 30-13/16"

fractional 1/16 inches (in) 30-13/16 in

fractional 1/16 feet-inches (' ") 2' 6-13/16"

Input of length units

For metric units (mm, cm, dm, m), the scientific and decimal formats are supported. Once the value is input, the value is transformed into the defined format, precision and unit.

For the imperial units (in and ft), the scientific, decimal and fractional formats are supported. The use of symbols " and ' is supported. The fractional input (-1/2, -3/4, …) is supported. When entering fractions, the fractions must be separated from the rest by a hyphen. Once the value is input, the value is transformed into the defined format (scientific, decimal, fractional), precision and unit symbol.

It is always possible to enter a number in greater precision than defined by settings. The precise value is stored internally and the displayed value reflects the Units setup.

Examples for imperial units

Input string Display setting Result

3.5 decimal, inches (") 3.5"

3-1/2 decimal, inches (") 3.5"

5' decimal, inches (") 60"

5.3' 6" decimal, inches (") 69.6"

5.3' 6.6" decimal, inches (") 70.20"

5.3' 6.6 decimal, inches (") 70.20"

3.5 decimal, feet (') 3.5'

3-1/2 decimal, feet (') 3.5'

5' decimal, feet (') 5.0'

5.3' 6" decimal, feet (') 5.80'

5.3' 6.6" decimal, feet (') 5.85'

5.3' 6.6 decimal, feet (') 5.85'

3.5 fractional, feet (')-inches (") 3' 6"

3-1/2 fractional, feet (')-inches (") 3' 6"

5' fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 0"

5.3' 6" fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 9-5/8"

5.3' 6.6" fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 10-1/4"

Terminology and conventions

17

5.3' 6.6 fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 10-1/4"

Angle units The display of the angle unit is defined by the format and the precision.

Format

decimal degrees (45.000)

degrees/minutes/seconds (45d0'0")

grads (50.000g)

radians (0.7854r)

Precision

The precision of angle units is analogous to decimal format of Length units.

Similarly to Length units, the settings for display style of angle units can be made in Units setup.

19

Layout and operation

Layout and operation overview Scia Engineer is a computer program designed for running on Microsoft Windows platform. Therefore, the program incorporates common MS Windows features and conventions. Consequently, user accustomed to another MS Windows application will have no difficulties in both (i) orienting in the program and (ii) operating it.

Nevertheless, we assume it more that practical to make a complete description of:

program interface components,

their layout on a screen,

basic and advanced program controls such as dialogues, menus, etc.,

operation of the program control elements.

The following pages will give you a detailed description of every part of the program that you can come across during your work.

User interface

Introduction to user interface The user interface is a part of the program that can be seen on the screen and that provides for the communication between the user and the program. It is often called a "graphical interface".

The user interface consists of several mutually connected and co-operating parts. The following table shows a brief overview of them.

Title bar It is the top most part of the application window. It holds the basic information about the application.

Status bar It displays various information related to a concrete program action.

Menu bar This bar contains a menu that can be used to operate the program.

Tree menu window It contains a tree-like menu used to call individual program functions.

Toolbar It provides for fast access to most common functions.

Working window There are two types of application working window: graphical window and document window (see below).

Graphical window It is a type of an application window that shows drawings of the designed object. The window displays the designed object, calculated results and accepts commands from a mouse.

Document window It is a type of an application window that shows the information about the designed object in the form of tables, text comments and, of course, drawings

Preview window The window shows various types of information in the form of tables and drawings. It can be used to edit objects properties. This is a special kind of a document window.

Command line The command line can be used to type commands to operate the program and it also displays brief instructions about what to do during individual running actions

Graphical window pop-up menu This menu is a menu associated with each of opened graphical windows of the application. It provides for fast access to some of the most often used functions.

In addition to these standard Windows application parts of a user interface, Scia Engineer makes use of a set of unique specially developed control elements that are described in separate chapters (e.g. Property window, database manager, etc.).

Note: The layout of dialogues in the program has been designed for normal size of the text. If your Windows are adjusted to use large fonts, it may happen that some dialogues in SCIA•Scia Engineer look strange and may be slightly distorted.

Title bar The title bar is the heading of the application window. It consists of three parts:

Basic Reference Guide

20

the program icon (on the left side of the bar)

text information about the application name

text information about the name of the opened and active project and the number of the active project window

three control buttons for (i) minimising the application window, (ii) making the application window full-screen, and (iii) closing the application on the right side of the bar.

Note: The first and the last feature of the title bar is the common feature of any Microsoft Windows application.

Example of a title bar

Status bar The status bar is a bar placed at the bottom of the application window. It is used to display information about the program and/or about the functions under process and it contains a few control elements. By default the status bar shows the following information:

co-ordinates of the mouse cursor position in UCS

When a function requiring the definition of a point (e.g. insertion of a 1D member) is running, the status bar shows the cursor position in the current user co-ordinate system.

co-ordinates of the mouse cursor position in GCS

If selected in the application settings the status bar shows the co-ordinates also in the global co-ordinate system.

project length units The bar displays the current length unit (e.g. meter, inch, etc.). The unit can be easily changed by simple clicking on the unit box on the status bar.

orientation of working plane The working plane box of the status bar shows the current orientation of the working plane. The orientation can be changed by clicking on the working plane box.

[SNAP mode] This button enables the user to adjust required SNAP mode.

[Filter for selections] Selections may be limited to specific entities. This can be adjusted by means of selection filter. The status bar shows the current filter status and also provides for its change.

[Current UCS] This button displays the current UCS for the active window. If pressed, it opens the UCS manager.

[Active code] A small icon shows the flag of the country whose code is currently set as active.

The status bar also displays a brief help text for program elements like a toolbar button or a menu function if the mouse cursor is just being placed on such an element.

Example of a status bar

Note: The status bar in the picture does not show the global co-ordinates of the mouse position. This option can be switched on or off in the Application settings.

Menu bar The menu bar is, by default, located just under the Title bar of the application window. It can be, however, moved into another position within the application window. It can be either docked to the left or upper edge of the application window, or it can be let floating anywhere within the work area.

Majority of Scia Engineer functions is accessible via this menu. There are some functions that can be accessed only from the tree menu of from toolbars.

Example of menus

Layout and operation

21

menu View > View

menu Modify > Edit curves

Tree menu window The tree window is similar in function to the menu bar but it is more readable and user-friendly.

The individual items of the tree may be:

service It opens another tree menu in the same window. E.g. service Structure, Loads, etc.

function It opens a specific function, e.g. Point load in node, Cross-link, etc.

branch It opens a branch of the tree and shows individual functions in it. E.g. branch Point load offers functions Point load in node and Point load on 1D member.

How to operate the tree menu

The procedure to operate the tree menu is very straightforward and closely resembles the operating rules for standard Microsoft Windows tree control.

Opening branches of the tree

The tree consists of a main branch and possible sub-branches. If an item has a sub-branch, it is indicated with a plus sign (+) in front of the item name. The sub-branch can be opened (listed on the screen) by means of either (i) a left mouse button single click on the plus sign or (ii) a left mouse button double-click on the item name. If the same action is made with already opened a branch, the branch is closed.

Activating tree branch items

In order to activate an item of a branch (either a main branch item that opens a service or sub-branch item that opens a particular function), simply double-click on the item name with the left mouse button. Depending on the item type either a corresponding function is activated or a particular service tree menu is displayed.

If the branch item represents a particular function, it can also be activated using a button at the bottom part of the tree menu window.

Closing a service

In order to close the whole service you can do the following:

press the [Close] button,

if a function is still opened, press the [Esc] key twice,

a function has been already closed or terminated, press the [Esc] key once.

Closing a function

In order to close the function, you can use one of the following ways:

press the [Close] button (this option closes the service as well),

press the [Esc] key once.

Basic Reference Guide

22

click the [Arrow] ( ) button on the toolbar at the top of the command line.

invoke the window pop-up menu and select function End.

Terminating a function

In order to abandon the activated function without accepting the already made changes, press [Ctrl] + Break keys simultaneously.

It is also possible to invoke the window pop-up menu and select function Cancel.

Example of a tree menu

Customizing the tree menu

The tree menu can be customized using a local pop-up menu.

1) Place the mouse cursor anywhere into the tree menu window.

2) Click the right mouse button.

3) Select what you want to have displayed: icons, captions, tool tips.

A) Icons + captions

B) Icons only

Layout and operation

23

C) Captions only

D) If tool tips are ON and the window is to narrow to display the whole item, the full name of the selected item is shown as a tool tip.

E) If tool tips are OFF and the window is to narrow to display the whole item, the full name of the selected item cannot be seen - see the image under A) above.

Command line The command line provides for the following:

some functions can be activated via typing the appropriate command,

Basic Reference Guide

24

if any function has been already called (regardless whether via the command line, menu, tree menu, or toolbar button), it displays guiding instructions on the command line,

if any function requires a numerical input (e.g. co-ordinates of an inserted point), the corresponding value or values may be typed on the command line.

Especially the second feature is very useful particularly for beginning users as they are clearly guided through the function they want to use and can simply follow the presented step-by-step instructions.

Syntax of commands

The syntax of a command on the command line is: command parameter1 [parameter2] [parameter3] [etc.] Example

SEL BEAM1 This command adds the 1D member named BEAM1 into the current selection.

Syntax for input of co-ordinates

The important thing to be aware of is that if a co-ordinate is typed by means of one or two numbers only, it is considered to be defined in the active working plane of the current user co-ordinate system.

If the point is defined by means of three values, it is considered to be defined in the current user co-ordinate system. In this case, the orientation of the working plane is not taken into account at all.

General syntax for the definition of a point

[prefix] [number] [separator] [number] [separator] [number] Prefix

none absolute co-ordinate in UCS

@ relative co-ordinate related to the last input point, defined in UCS

* co-ordinate in GCS

@* relative co-ordinate related to the last input point, defined in GCS

Number [space] [sign] [nnn] [.] [nnn] [exp] [sign] [nnn]

[space] if any, ignored

[sign] sign plus or minus (‘+’ or ‘-‘)

[nnn] row of digits 0,1, ..., 9

[,] decimal comma or point

[exp] exponent – sign ‘e’ or ‘E’

Separator

; length value follows

< angle value follows

Syntax for the definition of a point in Cartesian co-ordinates

[*,@][X],[Y],[Z] Examples

12.4;45.8;12.4 absolute point co-ordinate in UCS 12.4, 45.8, 12.4

123.4;345.8 absolute point co-ordinate in the current working plane of the UCS 123.4, 345.8

@123;23;5 relative co-ordinate related to the last inserted point in UCS 123, 23, 5

@123;23 relative co-ordinate related to the last inserted point in the current working plane of the UCS 123, 23

@123 relative co-ordinate related to the last inserted point in the current working plane of the UCS 123, 0

*123;23;5 global co-ordinate in GCS 123, 23, 5

Layout and operation

25

* the origin of GCS 0, 0, 0

Syntax for the definition of a point in polar co-ordinates

[*,@][length]<[angle] Examples

123<90 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, 123, 0

123<180 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, -123, 0

Syntax for the definition of a point in spherical co-ordinates

[*,@][length]<[ angle]<[angle] Example

123<90<90 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, 0, 123

Syntax for the definition of a point in cylindrical co-ordinates

[*,@][length]<[angle],[length] Example

123<90;200 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, 123, 20

Property table A property table is a Scia Engineer unique control used in the program dialogues and in the Property window. The control looks like a table (basically a two column multi-row table) whose first column contains names of individual items displayed in the table and the second column shows their values.

Generally, the values in the "value cells" of the property table may be modified. There are various means for the change of the value (see bellow). In addition, the individual items of the table may be interlinked either (i) to another part of the program (e.g. another dialogue) or (ii) to a graphical window. Both variants represent a powerful feature increasing significantly the simplicity and speed of editing process.

In order to unify the appearance of the program dialogues, the property table is also used even for passive display of information. In such a case, the "value cells" are disabled to prevent an accidental alteration of the values.

Type of property table cells

name cell It contains the name of the item whose value is displayed in the coupled value cell.

group cell This is a special case of the name cell. Sometimes, the name cell is standalone and is not coupled with any value cell. This is used to display e.g. the name of a group of items.

value cell This cell holds the corresponding data. The data may or may not be edited depending on the particular situation.

The value cell may be of several types. Where possible, the cell terminology is taken from the standard MS Windows terminology for dialogue box components. In parenthesis, a descriptive name is added (if applicable).

edit box

(simple value cell)

The basic type of cell provides for manual input of value. Depending on the particular item the value may be either numerical or alphanumerical.

combo box

(selection list cell)

This control is used for items where the proper value is defined by selection from a list of available variants.

tick box

(yes/no cell)

This type of cell provides for two limit value only – for YES and NO.

button The button can be used to start a required type of action, e.g. open a dialogue, etc.

colour list This type is similar to the combo box. The difference is that it offers colours only.

Combination of cell types in one table cell

Basic Reference Guide

26

The individual cell types may be combined within a single cell. That means that, for example, one table cell may consist of a combo box and a button, or of three edit boxes.

This feature is used e.g. in tables where a cross-section should be specified. The table sell then contains:

a combo box with all cross-section already defined in the current project,

a button that opens the Cross-section manager and thus provides for the definition of a new cross-section type if none of the existing ones meets requirements on the particular item.

Interconnection between table cells and graphical window

In some dialogues, individual table items may be related to a specific part of the drawing shown in the graphical window. In such a case, it would be useful:

to highlight the appropriate part of the drawing if the corresponding table cell is selected, or

to highlight the appropriate table cell if the corresponding part of the drawing has been clicked on.

The Scia Engineer property table makes this possible. Therefore, where applicable and useful, the appropriate table cells are interlinked with corresponding drawing parts.

As an example we may give the dialogue for editing of a cross-section. Here, the dimensions of a cross-section represent exactly what this feature is ideal for. On clicking any of dimension lines in the drawing, the corresponding table row is highlighted, and vice versa.

Example of a property table

The picture below shows the cross-section editing dialogue. The mouse cursor is positioned in the graphical window of the Cross-section manager over the height dimension line. After the left mouse button was clicked, the corresponding item in the table above the picture got the focus (the blue item).

Progress bar Especially for large models, some actions performed in Scia Engineer may be rather time consuming. In order to tell the user what the progress is, a progress bar is shown on the screen.

It simply:

indicates that the program is working,

measures what portion of the total work has been already finished.

The progress bar may appear either in a modal dialogue or on a status bar.

It may look like e.g.:

Layout and operation

27

Note: If the application window is not maximized, it may happen that the progress bar cannot fit into the status bar whose length is limited by the adjusted width of the application window. In that case, the progress bar that would normally appear on the status bar is invisible.

User Interface Skins Scia Engineer can be run with a standard Graphical User Interface (GUI) or with a simplified user interface. The latter is analogous to skins used in some other programs. In Scia Engineer, these "skins" do not just alter the look of the program, but they may also reduce the available functionality (they are not capable of extending the functionality). This may be useful for clients who focus on a particular group of problems. For example, if you use Scia Engineer as a modeller and do not intend to perform any kind of calculation, it is redundant to have in the menu functions for input of loads, supports, hinges, for start of calculation, review of results, etc. What’s more, it is also possible to change the arrangement of toolbars and tree window and change icons on toolbars.

A good example of a practical application of this technology is 3D Free Form Modeller.

3D Free Form Modeller is an application based on the full Scia Engineer, but leaving aside calculation and code check capabilities. In addition, as it is intended for Allplan users, it replaces some standard Scia Engineer-style icons on toolbars with icons from Allplan, with the only aim: to make it easier for Allplan users to work efficiently with 3D Free Form Modeller.

Toolbars

Toolbars Toolbars are small floating windows-like objects containing sets of buttons. The buttons can be used for opening various functions. The toolbars may be let floating on the screen or may be docked to any side of the screen.

Examples

View

Geometrical manipulations

You may control which toolbars are displayed in menu View > Toolbars. This menu function enables you to switch on or off the required toolbars. Moreover, you may use this function to display or hide other parts of the Graphical User Interface (GUI).

List of GUI parts that can be displayed or hidden:

tree window,

property window,

text window (preview window),

command line,

status bar,

main menu.

List of available toolbars:

Tools (e.g. Units, Layers, UCS, etc.),

Activity,

Modelling tools (e.g. Boolean operations with general solids, Generation and modification of vertices on general solids, etc.),

UCS (User Coordinate System),

Geometry manipulation (e.g. Move, Copy, etc.),

Line edit (e.g. Trim, Extend, Enlarge, etc.),

Polyline edit ((e.g. Add point to a polyline, Divide polyline, etc.),

Curves edit (e.g. Edit arc, Convert arc to line, etc.),

Selection of objects,

Basic Reference Guide

28

Basic (e.g. Open, Save, etc.).

Predefined toolbar arrangements

Even though you may freely move the toolbars on your screen and let them "flow" or dock them to any side of application window, you can also select from several predefined configurations of toolbars in menu View > Toolbars arrangement:

Default arrangement – Classic,

Default configuration – Allplan style (This configuration is intended for Allplan users. It customizes the Graphical User Interface of Scia Engineer so that it follows conventions typical for Allplan.),

Basic configuration,

Float all toolbars.

Note: The number and layout of toolbars and the number and types of predefined toolbar arrangements may vary depending on the "skin" and mode you select for Scia Engineer. For example, the Graphical User Interface of the full Scia Engineer may look different from 3D Free Form Modeller or ESA Modeller (the last two are accessible, for example, when you call Scia Engineer from inside Allplan application).

Customising the toolbars Toolbars can be customised by the user. It is possible to reshape the toolbars, add or remove buttons from individual toolbars and to define new tailor-made toolbars.

Each toolbar has a little-arrow button (the button is located at the right end of the toolbar if the toolbar is docked and at the toolbar header if the toolbaris floating - see the two images below) . When the little-arrow button is clicked a submenu opens with option Add or remove buttons. This item then offers several sub-items:

- the names of toolbars that are docked in the same "toolbar-row" (in case of a floating toolbar, it contains only the name of the particular toolbar),

- item Customise that opens the Customize dialogue (described further in the text).

Picture: little-arrow button (marked with red circle) on a docked and floating toolbar

Reshaping the toolbar

Each floating toolbar can be reshaped. Simply put the mouse cursor over an edge of the toolbar, click the mouse left button and drag.

Example:

Hiding buttons from a toolbar

1) Click the little-arrow button on the required toolbar and open the sub-menu.

2) Select the name of the toolbar you want to modify.

3) Another "sub-menu" with a complete list of available standard buttons for the toolbar is opened.

4) Unmark the buttons you want to hide and select the buttons you want to see.

Note: If the toolbar if floating, this procedure can modify only the toolbar whose little-arrow button has been clicked. If the toolbar is docked, this procedure can access all the toolbars located in the same "toolbar-row".

Dialogue "Customize"

The Customize dialogue can be used for a modification of any existing toolbar and for definition of new user-tailored toolbars.

Layout and operation

29

The procedure to open the Customize dialogue

1) Click the little-arrow button on any toolbar and open the sub-menu.

2) Click option "Customize...".

Commands tab

This tab offers a list of all available toolbars and their buttons.

When on this tab, you can drag-and-drop any command from the dialogue to any displayed toolbar.

1) Select the required toolbar in the left list.

2) Select the required button in the right list.

3) Click it and drag to the required toolbar.

4) Release the mouse button - the selected function is added to the target toolbar.

To remove a button from any of the existing toolbars, just "drag" the required function away from the toolbar (the Customize dialogue must be opened).

1) Select the function to be removed from a toolbar.

2) Click it and drag it anywhere away from the toolbar (outside the toolbar area of all toolbars).

3) Release the mouse button and the function is removed from the toolbar.

Toolbars tab

On this tab you can:

- display or hide any of the existing toolbars,

- reset the toolbar to the default configuration,

- create a new toolbar(s),

- delete you user-made toolbar(s),

- rename you user-made toolbar(s),

When you create a new toolbar, swap to the Commands tab and drag-and-drop the required functions on it.

Note: When a new toolbar is created, it may not appear in the list of existing toolbars in the Customize dialogue. In that case, close the Customize dialogue and reopen it. The new toolbar will be listed there then.

Copying the customised toolbars to a different computer

The settings adjusted on one computer can be easily transferred to another computer. It can be useful, for example, if one engineer works on several different computers or if a team wants to share the same settings.

The settings made by the user are stored in folder for "User settings files" that is defined in the Setup > Options dialogue.

This folder contains sub-folder Toolbars with files for individual toolbars. Each toolbar has its own file with extension CTC: e.g. TB_Activity.CTC, TB_Basic.CTC, TB_Calculate.CTC, TB_Curves_Edit.CTC, etc.

If you want to transfer your settings to another computer, just copy these files to folder Toolbars in the User settings files folder on that second computer.

Application windows

Introduction to application windows All the information that the program can give to the user is displayed in an application window. An application window can of the following types:

graphical window,

Basic Reference Guide

30

document window,

preview window.

The user can use all the window types at the same time and swap between them freely, or he may use just one type at a time. It depends completely on his or her will and habits.

At the same time, as many graphical and document windows can be opened as the user considers convenient to him. On the other hand, there can be opened just one preview window.

Graphical window This window can be perceived as a drawing board, however with rather advanced functionality. A model defined by the user is displayed in this window. The individual parts of a model can be literally drawn in this window. All selections of any function are made in this window type and any response of the program to the user’s action affecting the model is shown in this window. Also the calculated results are shown in this window. The window both displays the project data and receives information from the user provided by means of mouse moves and clicking.

An arbitrary number of graphical windows, regardless of their type, can be opened at the same type for one or several different projects.

Example of a graphical window

Viewports The term "viewport" is taken from Allplan and means a graphical window.

The Window menu offers several predefined arrangements of viewports (windows).

Layout and operation

31

1 viewport

2 viewports

3 viewports

Basic Reference Guide

32

4 viewports (1)

4 viewports (2)

Besides, it is of course possible to arrange the windows in any other way that suits your needs or habits.

Graphical window pop-up menu Every graphical window that Scia Engineer creates has a pop-up menu associated with it. This menu provides for a fast access to some frequently used functions.

To access this menu, move the mouse pointer so that it is within the window - not inside the title bar, nor on the window's borders. Then press the rightmost mouse button to make the menu appear on the screen. Then move the mouse to highlight the required option. Click the leftmost button to start the selected action.

The window pop-up menu is described in detail in a separate chapter Basic working tools > Window pop-up menu.

Example of a pop-up menu

Layout and operation

33

Document window This window type is used to display a document or report about an analysed model, its input data, results of calculation, and assessment to technical standards (i.e. code check). This window can contain both graphical and text information.

An arbitrary number of document windows, regardless of their type, can be opened at the same type for one or several different projects.

Example of a document window

Basic Reference Guide

34

Preview window At first sight, the preview window looks like a document window. In fact, it is a simplified version of the document window. You can display information about required entities in this type of window in the form of clearly readable tables and even edit the structure data in them.

For example, it is possible to display in the preview window information about selected cross-sections, about selected 1D members and their load, etc.

Example of a preview window

Property window

Layout and operation

35

Property window The property window has its name derived from a property table that is displayed in it. The property window summarises parameters, characteristics and selected options of particular entities such as nodes, 1D members, loads, result diagrams, etc.

The property window always shows information related to the selected entities or selected function. However, the property window has been designed to not only passively display the properties, but also to provide for fast and easy modification of them.

If the current selection consists of only one entity, generally all the parameters can be modified. If more than one entity has been selected, the property window automatically applies a filter and displays the parameters that the selected entities have in common.

If a function has been started, the property window may contain some switches that may affect the behaviour of the function. Most of the functions from service Results are good examples as the property window enables the user to select required quantity to-be-displayed, adjust the style of result diagrams, etc.

Example of a property window

Action buttons As the name suggests, the Property Table comprises properties of a particular part of a structure model. Sometimes however, the property table contains also a control that starts a particular action related to the element whose properties are displayed in the table.

If such controls (buttons in particular) are put somewhere inside the table, they may be overlooked. Therefore, these buttons were "extracted" from the table and are located in a special section called Action buttons or Action toolbar.

Thus, all the actions that are accessible for the current properties or for the "property-owner" are visibly and clearly separated from the often long list of information and can be easily accessed.

Action buttons are used in various parts of Scia Engineer.

Action buttons in the Property Window

The table below presents some (not all) applications of Action buttons.

Basic Reference Guide

36

service Steel >

function Check

Refresh It redraws the screen in order to reflect the changes made in the Property Window (see also Refresh of results).

Single check It opens a dialogue that provides for checking of a single selected 1D member.

AutoDesign It opens a dialogue for the AutoDesign of selected 1D members.

Preview It opens the Preview window and displays the relevant information in it.

service Steel >

function Connection check

Open preview It opens the Preview window and displays the relevant information in it.

Layout and operation

37

service Results >

function Internal forces

Refresh It redraws the screen in order to reflect the changes made in the Property Window (see also Refresh of results).

Preview It opens the Preview window and displays the relevant information in it.

Action buttons in Database managers

Action buttons are used for example in the Load case combinations manager.

Explode This buttons explodes the defined combination and shows the critical (or significant) internally generated combinations.

Explode to all possible This buttons explodes the defined combination and shows ALL possible internally generated combinations.

See also chapter Exploded combinations.

Detailed properties Models created in Scia Engineer consist usually of a large number of individual elements. Some of these elements themselves have a lot of specific properties. Some of the properties may depend on other properties. Consequently, the total number of properties that must be treated may be enormous.

If all the properties were listed in the Property window, whenever the particular element is selected, the Property window would be overfilled, unclear, and its contents confusing, which in turn could lead to unintentional mistakes during the input of property values.

Therefore, a new solution has been developed. Property tables that are too complex to be shown in a single Property window are divided into several parts, each of which contains properties related to a single "master" property listed in the main property table.

The "slave" property tables are simple modal dialogues accessible from the main property table via a button.

Example

Let’s imagine a simple frame connection of a column and inclined 1D member.

Basic Reference Guide

38

The Property table shown in the Property window of such a connection may look like:

If an end plate is inserted into the connection, a button next to the check box appears and if pressed, the End plate property dialogue is displayed:

Layout and operation

39

Here all the properties related to the end plate may be defined.

Similarly, if bolts are defined, a button next to the Bolts check box is offered and if pressed, the Bolts property dialogue is displayed:

Here all the properties related to the used bolts may be specified.

Database managers

Introduction to database manager

Basic Reference Guide

40

A database manager is a tool that provides for all possible operations related to manipulation with entities stored in some of program databases. The term "program database" stands e.g. for a database of materials, cross-sections, catalogue blocks, etc. defined in a current project.

It is obvious that:

individual entities of these databases must be somehow defined,

there must be a way to edit them, copy them, delete them,

the user must have an opportunity to review parameters of the individual entities,

there must exist a procedure to select one entity as a "default" for functions requiring an entity of that type as an input parameter,

the approach to all these points must be unique regardless the type of database.

Consequently, Scia Engineer integrates a tool called "manager".

Layout and operation of a database manager A manager consists basically of the following controls:

List of defined entities of a particular database

The list shows all the entities related to the database of the manager that have been defined in the current project so far.

Property table This table shows a brief summary of parameters for the database entity that is just selected in the list of already defined entities (see above).

Graphical window This window displays a drawing of the database entity whose parameters are just listed in the property table.

Control buttons The buttons provide the access to the functions that are accessible from within the particular manager.

Filter The filter allows for a readable representation of data in the Manager.

List of defined database entities

The list summarises all the database entities that has been defined in the project. Most often, the list contains names of the entities. However, if useful and practical, some additional information may be added next to the name.

Property table

The property table displays parameters for the entity that is selected in the list of defined entities. It provides for a quick review of the parameter values. Some of the parameters can also be edited here. But normally, the modification of the parameters is performed in the editing dialogue for a particular entity type.

Graphical window

This window contains a schematic drawing of the database entity the parameters of which are presented in the property table. This window is fitted with a pop-up menu. The menu offers the user some important functions related to the displayed entity.

Control buttons

There are several control buttons in the Manager that allow to user to use various actions that may be performed with database entities.

button meaning

[New]

This button opens the New entity dialogue where a new entity can be defined and inserted into the current project.

The newly defined entity is inserted at the end of the list of defined entities.

[Insert]

This button also opens the New entity dialogue where a new entity can be defined and inserted into the current project.

But, the newly defined entity is inserted before the currently selected entity in the list of defined entities.

This feature can be used to have the entities in user-defined order and not in the order of insertion.

[Edit]

This button opens the Editing dialogue for the entity currently selected in the List of defined entities. The Editing dialogue provides for thorough and detailed review or editing of the entity parameters.

[Delete]

This button allows the user to get rid of those entities of the particular database that are no longer necessary in the project.

[Copy]

The Copy button makes a copy of the entity that is selected in the List of defined entities.

Layout and operation

41

[System database]

It enables the user to read items from a standard system database.

[Read]

It enables the user to read database items from an external file – user’s database.

[Save]

It saves selected entities of the database to an external file – user’s database.

[Text Output]

This button opens the preview window and displays all the parameters in it for the entity that is selected in the List of defined entities.

[Close] This button has got two functions. First, it sets the currently highlighted item in the List of defined entities as the active (or current) entity. Second, it closes the database manager.

[Unify]

This button enables the user to select items from the list of defined items that will be united with the currently selected item.

Thus it is possible to get rid of excessive number of doubled items, or to establish a single item for entities that originally used several items (e.g. to assign one cross-section to 1D members that originally had different cross-sections). See Example below.

Example - function Unify

Let us suppose that we have defined three beams, each of them of a different cross-section.

Later you may want to unify the section of the two left beams and have both of them of rectangular cross-section. Of course, you may edit the properties of the beam and change its cross-section. On the other hand, sometimes it may be useful to "unify" the sections (and if required, get rid of the abandoned cross-section type, that can be automatically deleted from the database).

You call the Unify function to merge two cross-sections into one. In our example do the following:

1. select the rectangular cross-section,

2. call function Unify,

3. select the I section,

4. confirm with OK,

5. the I-section is removed from the project database, two beams are assigned the same rectangular cross-section.

Filter

The filter provides for more readable representation of data in the Manager if the current project contains an excessive number of defined entities of the particular type. The filter allows the user to set a limited set of entities that are displayed in the List of defined entities. The entities that do not meet the chosen criterion are "removed" from the list, but still remain normally defined in the project.

Note: Some specific database managers may contain additional functionality. It is added in the form of additional control buttons.

Basic Reference Guide

42

Name

Note: The name of any item in any manager should be up to 8 characters in length. Longer names should not be used and may be truncated by the program.

Example of a database manager

Opening the database manager A Manager is opened whenever the appropriate function is activated. E.g. function Library > Cross-sections opens the Cross-section manager, etc.

In general, the particular manager is also opened when a general procedure for the definition of a new database entity is invoked. In such a case, the opening of the manager is usually one of the first steps of the procedure.

From the user’s point of view a database manager is a standard Windows modal dialogue. That means that:

it is opened via a function associated with it,

it must be closed before the user can continue with the started multi-step action of before another function can be activated.

it contains control elements that provide for actions and tasks that are accessible from within the manager.

The operation is simple and straightforward and is clear from the description of layout of a database manager.

Note: The Particular manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain an item associated with the particular database manager Such an item contains a button to open the appropriate manager.

Example:

A cross-section manager opened from within the property dialogue of a new 1D member.

Layout and operation

43

Pop-up menu of database manager The graphical window of a database manager is equipped with a pop-up menu that summarises some important functions.

Zoom rectangle The user may define the cut-out that should fit into the graphical window.

Zoom all This option zooms the drawing in or out so that the whole drawing fits the available window area.

Gallery It copies the drawing into the Picture gallery.

Document It copies the drawing into the Document.

Print This function prints the drawing on the connected graphical device.

Copy to clipboard It copies the drawing into the Windows clipboard.

Copy to BMP file It saves the drawing into a Windows Bitmap file.

Copy to WMF file It saves the drawing into a Windows Meta File.

45

Program settings

Language of program

Language of the program By default, the program starts and works in the language chosen during the installation. For many users, however, another language of the user interface may be more suitable. The language of the application and language for outputs can be set in the Setup > Options dialogue.

The procedure for adjustment of a required language

1. Open function Setup > Options :

a. using menu function Setup > Options,

b. using icon Options settings ( ) on toolbar Main.

2. Select tab Other.

3. In the group Language default select the required language for the program.

4. In the group Language default select the required language for outputs.

5. Confirm the settings.

Note: The change takes affect only after the restart of the program.

User level

Level of the user interface The user may choose from two predefined settings of the user interface:

Standard This option is recommended for beginners and for those who need to analyse just simple, mainly 2D, frame structures. In this level, the program automatically hides some features that are not essential for standard or simple projects.

Advanced This option is useful for those who need to make a project of a complex structure and for well trained and advanced users of the program. In this mode, the user has access to all program features which inevitably leads to longer menus and fuller dialogues.

Standard level

In the Standard level there are several limitations:

Project settings:

Functionality

Only options Non-linearity, Buckling and CAD-shape are available.

In Non-linearity, only options Initial deformations and curvature and 2nd order – geometrical nonlinearity are available.

Project settings:

Model

Only option One is available.

Project settings:

Loads

Neither Wind load nor Snow load can be defined.

Service Structure Items Arbitrary profiles, Import ESA project, Rigid arm, Cross-link are not available.

Service Structure:

New beam

In 3D model, parameter Alpha is not available.

Service Structure:

Support

Only Point supports in node can be defined.

Node It is not possible to define local co-ordinate system of nodes.

Geometrical manipulations

The following geometric manipulations are not available:

Scale

Stretch

Enlarge by defined length

Break in defined points

Join

Basic Reference Guide

46

Extend

Polyline edit

Curve edit

Calculation Function Mesh generation is not available. The mesh can be generated only as an integral step of calculation procedure.

Force load Parameter Eccentricity is not available for force loads.

Predefined load Predefined load is not available.

User co-ordinate system Definition and storing of named user co-ordinate systems is not available.

Line grid Line grid is not available.

Selections Filter for selections is not available.

Application options

Workspace settings Workspace settings cover various parameters that allow the user to adjust the Scia Engineer user interface to meet his/her needs, requirements and habits.

Environment This group comprises parameters linked to the display style, in other words the style in which the information is shown on the screen. In addition, this group contains also some general parameters related to the user interface.

Templates Here, the user may specify template drawings that are used whenever a new drawing is being printed or created in the Paper space gallery.

Directories Appropriate directories (or folders) can be defined for individual program files.

Protection This group defines the type of protection.

Code This tab contains a button adjusting an active code of the project.

Other This group enables the user to adjust language of the application and default behaviour on opening of the program.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Environment settings Parameters affecting the user interface appearance make up this group of Workspace settings.

Window settings

Show scrollbar in view This item specifies whether the graphical windows are equipped with scroll-bars on their right and bottom edges.

Rendering The item sets the mode that is used for drawing into application graphical windows.

Hidden lines This option specifies the mode for hidden lines of individual structural entities.

Line pattern length This item specifies the style of dashed lines.

Rendering

Disabled This mode disables any rendering. The drawing on the screen is fast but reverse surfaces of the structure cannot be hidden and are shown.

Disabled – wire This mode is almost identical to the one above. It is however modified to run even on computers with old types of graphical cards where the mode above may not function properly.

Enabled (hardware or graphic card rendering)

If this option is selected, the hardware rendering capability of the computer is employed. This option may lead to a "distorted" display on some computers, especially those with older models of graphic cards.

Software emulation This options tells the computer to simulate the rendering capability by means of software

Program settings

47

algorithms. This option should work properly on all computers. However, if selected on slower one it may lead to longer response of the computer during regeneration of the screen.

Hidden lines

The Hidden lines option serves as a substitute for full and proper rendering if the Rendering itself is disabled.

The available options are:

Invisible The hidden lines (hidden parts of entity surfaces) are not drawn at all.

Dashed The hidden lines are drawn in dashed style.

In addition to the above-mentioned options, it is possible to select whether the intersections of individual surfaces should be calculated and displayed.

Note: The settings made here determine which mode of rendering and hidden line display is set for the application. This setting does not mean that the rendering of the scene (i.e. of what is displayed on the screen) is really applied. To do so, the rendering must be switched on for the required graphical window. This can be done by means of the appropriate view parameter for the appropriate graphical window.

Line pattern length

This item affects the style of dashed lines. The dashed lines may be used whenever within the projects. Any dashed line is controlled by this item.

Small number means short lines used in the dashed line with smaller gaps in between.

Large number means long lines used in the dashed line with longer gaps in between.

Command settings

Right mouse button click generates End of function

If this option is ticked, the right mouse button generates End of command when pressed in any opened function such as definition of a new 1D member, move of 1D member, etc.

Skins

Select skin This option allows the user from pre-defined screen styles of the application.

Other parameters

Maximum number of grouping properties

This value determines the maximum number of entities that can be selected at a time so that the Property window was filled with the parameters of the selected entities. If the number specified here is exceeded, the property window is left blank and can be filled in only on user’s explicit request.

Display global co-ordinates in status bar

By default, the status bar displays co-ordinates defined in an active user co-ordinate system. In addition, the global co-ordinates may be displayed as well.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Graphic templates settings This tab enables the user to define templates which new drawings will be based on. This option may be useful for example if a title block with the company logo should be attached to every drawing.

Print picture Defines the template for function Print picture.

Overview drawings manager

Defines the template for drawings created in the Paper space gallery.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Directories settings

Basic Reference Guide

48

This dialogue allows the user to specify the location of Scia Engineer files. The adjustment can be made separately for individual file types.

Temporary files The folder stores any temporary files.

User setting files The folder stores all files with user-made settings.

Project files The folder stores projects created and saved by the user.

Database files The folder stores databases provided with the program.

Profiles libraries The folder stores databases of cross-sections provided with the program.

User block library The folder stores all user blocks that may be arranged in subfolders of this main library folder.

User templates The folder stores user templates (i.e. template projects created by the user).

Predefined shapes This folder contains predefined shapes such as cylinder, cone, etc.

Note: The changes made in this dialogue will take affect ONLY after the program is closed and restarted. The items on this tab sheet CANNOT be edited if any project is currently opened.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Project settings This dialogue offers a set of settings that relates to projects opened in Scia Engineer.

None No action is carried out when the application is started.

Last opened project The last opened project is automatically loaded into the application on its start.

Show Open project dialogue

When the application is started, the Open project dialogue is automatically displayed to allow for the selection of the project to be processed.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Protection settings The Protection settings specify the type of software protection that is used with the program.

The hardware lock (dongle) that is an integral part of a properly licences installation of Scia Engineer contains information about available (i.e. legally purchased) modules. The licence information can also be stored in a coded file that can be stored on the local computer or anywhere within the local network. The licence information from this coded file can be read by a commercial licence manager Flexlm. The licence manager can manage multiple licences and control the number of simultaneously attached (i.e. working at the same time) users. The licences controlled by the licence manager Flexlm are called "floating" licences. The licence stored directly in the dongle is called "standalone".

Type

demo The program starts in demo mode only.

only standalone The licence information is read only from the hardware lock.

only floating The licence information is read only from the licence file of licence manager Flexlm.

first standalone, then floating

First, the licence stored in the hardware lock is sought. In case of failure, the licence manager Flexlm is used to find a valid and free licence.

This option is useful if a user with a local hardware lock wants to use his/her licence. The licence-seeking process ensures that the licence from the local hardware lock is used instead preferably and the network licence is preserved for other users that are not equipped with hardware locks.

first floating, then standalone

First, the licence is sought using the licence manager Flexlm. In case of failure, the local hardware lock is sought.

Software floating protection

local For standalone licence, the local hardware lock is used. For floating licence a local licence file is used. The file provides for an automatic

Program settings

49

start and configuration of the licence manager Flexlm.

network A network licence is used. The licence manager must be installed by the administrator on the network server.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Adjusting the application options

The procedure for the adjustment of application options

1. Open Options dialogue

a. either: using menu function Setup > Options,

b. or: using button [Options] ( ) on Main toolbar.

2. Make required settings on individual tabs.

3. Confirm with [OK].

The dialogue also contains three save/read buttons.

Read application default

Reads settings as they were pre-defined by the developer of the program.

Read user default

Reads settings that have been previously saved as user’s own default.

Save as user default

Saves the current settings as the user’s default settings. These settings may be later read by the above mentioned function.

Project settings

Basic project settings

Basic project data The basic data of a project describe the project and define some of its main parameters.

Project filename

It shows the name of the project.

Project data

This group of items allows the user to enter some statistical data about the project

Name name of the project

E.g. Eddy Merckx's Airport – Brussel

Part name of the project part, if the project is complex and consists of several partial sub-projects

E.g. Western hall + connection footbridge

Description E.g. variant A (underground parking, restaurants on first floor, check-in desks on second floor)

Author name of the project author

E.g. Sven Nijs

Date date of the last project modification, or date of the program creation, etc.

E.g. 02/02/02

Structure

Here, you can choose the type (or we can say "dimension") of the structure you want to model. Depending on the type selected, some of the functions and options of the program may be disabled or hidden (e.g. in the case of 2D frame oriented in plane XZ, the button for setting the sight of the model from the direction of X and Z axes respectively won't be present on the View toolbar). This feature leads to a significant simplification in the operation of the program for simpler types of structures. The functions and options that are not appropriate (are not possible practically) for the particular type are hidden and do not add to the complexity of the program. The idea behind this feature is: A complex task requires a complex tool, but a simple task can get by a simple tool.

Basic Reference Guide

50

Truss XZ The 1D members of a model are capable of carrying axial forces only. That means that pin ends (hinges) are meaningless, supports do not have rotation degrees of freedom defined and results consists of axial forces only. Only a 2D model can be created.

Frame XZ The 1D members can represent a planar frame structure. Only a 2D model can be created.

Truss XYZ This mode is similar to Truss XZ, but a real 3D structure can be created.

Frame XYZ This option is similar to Frame XZ, but a real 3D structure can be created.

Grid XY A horizontal grate can be modelled in this mode.

Plate XY This mode provides for analysis of combined 1D member and slab structure. All the members must be located in a horizontal plane. Only a 2D model can be created.

Wall XY This mode is similar to Frame XZ mode, but vertical walls can be inserted as well. Only a 2D model can be created.

General XYZ This option allows the user to model and analyse a 3D structure consisting of any structural members: 1D members as well slabs (plates, walls, shells).

Note: Item Structure is compulsory and the user has to make a choice from the available variants.

Material

This option tells the program which materials will be used for members of the structure. The advantage of this in advance selection is that the program functions working with materials will know, which material the user is interested in. Therefore, the functions will not offer other material types and, consequently, the dialogs, lists and similar items will be lucid and readable as much as possible.

If the user realises later that some other material type is necessary, it is of course possible to call the setting dialogue any time in the future and widen the selection of used material types.

Note: At the beginning, i.e. at the time when a new project is being created, it is necessary to select at least one material type.

Project level

The user can choose a layout of the program interface which best reflects (i) his or her habits, (ii) his or her level of familiarity with the program, and (iii) the complexity of the project to be dealt with. Two options are available:

Standard the program interface will offer the most often used functions and features

Advanced the program interface will offer all available functions and features

Model

One the project will contain a single model of a structure

Absence the project can contain some members that may be missing in some stages of the analysis

Construction stages the project will represent modelling of construction stages appearing during the execution of the structure

Code

The selection of the active code determines how the program deals with data related to a specific technical standard. In practice it means that the code selection affects:

the materials offered as code-related materials, e.g. steel or concrete grades, etc.

the procedures, algorithms and possible parameters performing and necessary to perform code checks.

Note: The choice of a particular national standard may have an effect on the layout and even functionality of numerous functions. E.g. functions like Load case and Load group have got parameters that depend on the current code of the project. That means that these function offer the user different parameters for e.g. Czech standard than for let’s say Eurocode. Also the functionality of some functions or services is different for different codes.

The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.

Functionality settings

Program settings

51

Scia Engineer offers a wide range of capabilities. In order to make the operation of the program as clear and simple as possible, the project settings allow for selection of those features that are needed and required.

The Functionality settings dialogue comprises options that control both the appearance and function of the program. That means that until some advanced feature is selected in this dialogue, the program neither performs the specific task nor even offers it in the menu.

The functionality options are divided into several groups.

Non-linearity

This option controls whether the non-linear analysis is available in solver options and, therefore, whether the user can perform a non-linear calculation of his/her problem. The Non-linearity functionality comprises several sub-items. These sub-items are independent on each other and only some of them may be selected for a particular project.

Initial deformations and curvature

If this option is ON, functions for introduction of initial deformations before calculation are available.

2nd order – geometrical non-linearity

If this option is ON, functions for geometrically non-linear calculation are available.

Support non-linearity If this option is ON, functions for non-linear analysis of supports are available.

Beam local non-linearity If this option is ON, functions for non-linear analysis of 1D members are available (e.g. 1D member acting only under compression, etc. may be analysed).

Friction support If ON, friction supports may be defined in the model.

Nonlinear line support If ON, nonlinear line supports may be used in the model.

Stability

This option allows the user to calculate stability problems.

Dynamics

When ticked the option makes the dynamic analysis features available to the user. The appropriate dynamics-related functions and parameters become available in menus and solver adjustment dialogues.

There is one dynamics sub-option:

Seismic If this option is ON, seismic calculations can be performed.

Harmonic band analysis New way of dealing with the calculations in harmonic analysis by doing multiple analysis on a range of frequencies. Harmonic analysis is possible for a range of frequencies controlled by the user. The frequency of the harmonic force varies over a range and a harmonic analysis is done for many values in that range.

General dynamics One or more time-dependant dynamic load cases can be defined with name, mass combination, damping, total time and integration steps. Multiple time-dependant dynamic load functions can be used as modal and basic functions. It is possible to use the results in combination with other (static) load cases for further post-processing.

Non-proportional damping

This option enables the user to define separate damping for selected parts of structure.

Dynamic wind Available only for CSN.

Initial stress

The option, when selected, opens possibility for the introduction of initial stress state in members of a structure being modelled in Scia Engineer.

Subsoil

The Subsoil functionality represents an important and powerful feature of the program especially if the interaction of the analysed structure with its subsoil must be taken into account.

Structural shape

This option enables the user to use two different "shapes" in his/her model. Normally, the calculation model is created and used for calculations, evaluation of results and design and checking to a particular technical standard.

In addition, the user may also define a structural shape that is derived from the calculation shape and can be used for impressive drawings and is also useful during the design of connections.

Climatic loads

If wind or snow loads are supposed to act on the structure, this functionality option must be set ON.

Parameters

Basic Reference Guide

52

Advanced users of Scia Engineer may find it very useful to define some of the program input values as parameters. Parameters, if applied, provide for fast, easy and simple change of e.g. structure dimensions, load values, etc. One single modification of the appropriate parameter leads to automatic regeneration of the model with the new defined value.

Prestressing

This option provides for calculation of prestressing.

Steel

Design of steel structures may require not only the determination of internal forces and deflexions, but also some other tasks related to a safe design and realisation of a steel structure.

Pinned connections This option opens possibility for the definition of pinned connections of steel members.

Frame connections This option opens possibility for the definition of frame connections of steel members.

Fire resistance The type of fire resistance for steel members may be defined after this option has been selected.

Overview drawings This option controls whether "wizards" for automatic generation of pictures in the Picture gallery are available or not.

Expert system If this option is ON, the user may use the expert system for the design of connections. User defined connections may be saved into this system and the saved connections may be applied later to other joints.

Connection monodrawings

This option activates a wizard that helps the user create drawings of defined connections.

The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.

Loads settings The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.

Wind region

This parameter defines the region where the modelled structure will be located. The region may influence wind loads that the building will be exposed to. The user may choose from three options for this item:

None There is be no wind load applied.

Code The wind region is defined according to appropriate national standard.

Library The user specifies the height-wind pressure curve. The real load is then defined as a force load but its type must be set to Wind. The load value input by the user then represents the load width.

Library of wind pressures

When the option Library is selected, it is possible to open [using the three-dot button] the Wind pressure database manager. In this manager the user may input the required wind curves.

Editing dialogue for the input of wind pressure

The Editing dialogue for the input of wind pressure can be opened from the Wind pressure database manager.

This dialogue contains the following controls.

Name Specifies the name of the wind curve.

Graphical window The diagram of the defined wind curve is displayed in this small graphical window. The graphical window offers standard functions such as zoom-in and zoom-out, pan, copy to clipboard, save to file. The functions can be accessed through a pop-up menu or using mouse move with the right button held pressed with simultaneously held Ctrl and/or Shift key(s).

Table with curve values The table contains the values that define the shape of the curve.

Depending on the option in item Input, this table can be "read-only".

Input User input

The curve is defined manually by the user in the table with curve values.

EC-EN

The EC-EN-defined wind curve is used. For this option the table with curve values is "read

Program settings

53

only".

DIN

The DIN-defined wind curve is used. For this option the table with curve values is "read only".

NEN

The NEN-defined wind curve is used. For this option the table with curve values is "read only".

Height range This parameter defines the height range of the curve. This item is accessible only for code-based wind curves. It is disabled for user-input curve.

Edit curve This button opens a special where the parameters of the code-based curve can be edited. This item is accessible only for code-based wind curves. It is disabled for user-input curve.

OK Confirms the changes and closes the dialogue.

Cancel Discards the changes and closes the dialogue.

Note: The defined wind curves can be reviewed and edited also through tree menu function Library > Loads > Wind pressures. This function becomes accessible only if parameter Wind region in the project setup has been set to Library.

Note: For more information about the generation of wind load see chapter Loads > Load generators > Wind generator.

Snow region

This parameter defines the region where the modelled structure will be located. The region may influence snow loads that the building will be subject to. The user may choose from three options for this item:

None There is be no snow load applied.

Code The snow region is defined according to appropriate national standard.

Snow weight The user specifies the snow weight per square meter. The real load is then defined as a force load but its type must be set to Snow. The load value input by the user then represents the load width.

Note: For more information about the generation of wind load see chapter Loads > Load generators > Snow generator.

Combinations settings This tab provides for the adjustment of load case parameters for automatic generation of load case combinations based on a particular national standard.

The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.

Procedure for setting project data

The procedure for the adjustment of project parameters is similar for all groups of parameters.

1. Procedure for setting Basic project data

2. Open dialogue Project data in one of the following ways:

a. Use Menu function Tree > Project.

b. Click Tree menu item Project.

3. Select the required tab (Basic data / Functionality / Loads / Combinations / Protection / National annexes).

4. Adjust the required parameters or select options that should be applied in the project.

5. Click [OK] to confirm the settings.

Display style settings

Display Setup palettes Scia Engineer uses a set of palettes to display project data (i) in the graphical window of the program, (ii) in the document window, and (iii) on an external graphical device. The palette comprises settings of:

colours,

line styles,

fonts,

Basic Reference Guide

54

dimension lines,

beam types,

isolines.

It is possible to adjust separate palettes for individual output "directions". What’s more, it is possible to use settings from one palette for another one, i.e. load settings of one palette into the other one.

The available palettes are:

white background Used for the screen, the structure is drawn in colours on white background.

black background Used for the screen, the structure is drawn in colours on black background.

document – colour Used for the document, the structure is painted in colours.

document – monochrome

Used for the document, the structure is painted in black-and-white style.

Important note: In order to have the pictures with result-isolines in the document black-and-white, it is necessary to have all the pens / brushes in the Setup dialogue set to black / white / grey colour. Otherwise, if even a single pen is set to any other colour, the whole output is made as coloured.

graphic output – colour Used for the graphical output (paper space gallery), the structure is painted in colours.

graphic output – monochrome

Used for the graphical output (paper space gallery), the structure is painted in black-and-white style.

See the note in document – monochrome above.

The procedure for selection of palettes for individual output "directions"

1. Open any of the following Setup dialogues (all of them can be found under function Setup of the main menu):

a. Colours / lines,

b. Fonts,

c. Beam types.

d. Dimension lines.

2. At the top of the dialogue, select the tab corresponding to the "device" you want to adjust.

3. In the combo box named Current palette select the required palette.

4. If required, make any changes to the settings (see chapters Colours setup, Font setup, Beam type setup, Dimension line setup for more information).

5. Confirm with [OK].

Loading and saving defined settings

Loading and saving settings for all the palettes at the same time

If required, you may use one the three buttons at the bottom edge of the dialogue to reload or save the settings for all the palettes used in the program.

Load program default settings

This option loads default settings as they were adjusted by the developer of the program.

Store user default setting This option saves the current settings for all palettes as your personal settings.

Store user default setting This option loads the settings that have been previously saved by means of the button described one line above.

Loading and saving settings for a separate palette

If required, you may use one the three buttons in the top part of tabs Screen, Document and Graphic output to reload or save the settings for the selected group of parameters. Each of the following buttons works just with one sub-tab of the main tabs, i.e. for example with tab Screen > Fonts, Document > Structural types, etc.

Load program default settings

This option loads settings for the current tab as were define by the manufacturer.

Store user default setting This option saves the current settings as a user-defined default.

Load user default setting This option reads the settings that have been previously saved with button Store user default setting.

Load settings from other palette

This option enables the user to load into the current tab settings from the corresponding tab of any other palette.

Program settings

55

Convert colours to grey scale

This option converts the colours on the current tab into grey scale.

This option is not available for dimension lines.

Convert colours to black This option converts all the colours on the current tab into black colour.

This option is not available for dimension lines.

Colours Setup Adjustment of colours is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.

The adjustment of colour and line style can be made separately for each entity type and drawing part. The following parameters can be adjusted for each available entity or symbol:

colour The user may select from a set of basic pre-defined colours or may mix his/her own shade.

line style The user may select from a set of available line styles.

width This parameter defines the thickness of the line.

If the width type is set to pixels, the user may select the thickness in pixels of the screen.

If the width type is set to metric, the user may adjust the thickness in metric units.

width type This options tell in which units the line thickness is specified.

Pixels are useful if the drawing is "tuned" for screen display.

Metric option is usually the right choice if the final drawing is made on a graphical device such as printer, plotter, etc.

The procedure for adjustment of colours

1. Open dialogue Colours Setup using menu function Setup > Colours / lines,

2. Make the required settings.

3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.

Font Setup Adjustment of fonts is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.

The following parameters can be adjusted:

Character set Several character sets are available. Proper choice of a character set is important especially when you want to use characters that are specific for a certain language (e.g. diacritics).

Font type Standard line fond and two variants of true type fonts are available.

TT fonts smooth If a true type font is selected, its smoothness can be adjusted here.

For each of the texts the following parameters can be adjusted:

size Specifies the size of labels.

size definition Specifies how the size is measured. It may be measured in units of graphical device or in absolute units (i.e. the units in which the structure is defined).

colour This item specifies the colour of the text.

placement The labels may be put into:

the plane of the screen

plane XZ

plane XY

line font This option is meaningful ONLY if a true type font is selected in the Font type item.

This item selects the font for the labels.

bold Labels are in bold letters.

Basic Reference Guide

56

italic Labels are in italic letters.

underline Labels are in underlined letters.

strikeout Labels are in stroked out letters.

The procedure for adjustment of fonts

1. Open dialogue Fonts Setup using menu function Setup > Fonts,

2. Make the required settings.

3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.

Beam type Setup Adjustment of beam types is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.

For each of the types the following parameters can be adjusted:

colour The user may select from a set of basic pre-defined colours or may mix his/her own shade.

style The user may select from a set of available line styles.

width This parameter defines the thickness of the line.

If the width type is set to pixels, the user may select the thickness in pixels of the screen.

If the width type is set to metric, the user may adjust the thickness in metric units.

width type This options tell in which units the line thickness is specified.

Pixels are useful if the drawing is "tuned" for screen display.

Metric option is usually the right choice if the final drawing is made on a graphical device such as printer, plotter, etc.

middle line This option specifies the style that is used to display 1D member middle line.

surface This option specifies the style that is used to display 1D member surface.

labels This option specifies the style that is used to display 1D member labels.

cross-section This option specifies the style that is used to display 1D member cross-section.

The procedure for adjustment of beam types

1. Open dialogue Beam types Setup using menu function Setup > Beam types,

2. Make the required settings.

3. Confirm with [OK].

Note 1: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes. Note 2: The Setup dialogue supports the standard Windows feature – multiple selection. Therefore, if the same property should be set for several beam types, the types can be selected at the same time and the property adjusted in one step. The multiple selection is accessible via [Shift] + click and [Ctrl] + click combination. Note 3: For more information about structural types see chapter Geometry > Structural model.

Dimension line Setup Adjustment of dimension lines is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.

The dialogue enables the user to set the following parameters of dimension lines:

end mark style This option defines the shape of end mark (slash or arrow).

size definition This option specifies how the size is measured. It may be measured in units of graphical device or in absolute units (i.e. the units in which the structure is defined).

end mark size This parameters specifies the size of end mark.

font size This parameters specifies the size of dimension line font.

plot line style This parameters specifies the style of plot line.

plot line offset This parameters specifies the offset of plot line.

Program settings

57

1st dimension line offset This parameters specifies the offset of the dimension line closest to the dimensioned object.

next dimension line offset

This parameters specifies the offset of other dimension lines.

The procedure for adjustment of dimension line style

1. Open dialogue Dimension lines Setup using menu function Setup > Dimension lines,

2. Make the required settings.

3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.

Units Setup In Scia Engineer the user uses and comes into contact with a good number of various physical quantities. In order to allow the user to adjust preferable units and display style of these quantities, the program offers a means for user’s adjustment.

The adjustment can be done in Units Setup dialogue.

Unit "parameters"

Unit It sets the unit in which the value of appropriate quantity is displayed.

Decimal length It defines number of decimal digits to be displayed when the corresponding quantity is displayed.

Output format It specifies the format of displayed value for individual the quantity. See below.

Output format

decimal standard representation of a number 78.24 cm

782.4 mm

scientific representation of a number by means of a base and an exponent

7.824E+01 cm

7.82E+02 mm

engineering representation of a number by means of a base and an exponent, where the exponent is always a multiple of three

78.240E+00 cm

782.40E+00 mm

fractional

fractional representation of a number by means of a fraction

3/16 in

deg/min/sec representation of a number used for angles

ft in representation of a number used for imperial units

2 ft 6.803 in

The procedure for adjustment of units

1. Open dialogue Units Setup:

a. either using menu function Setup > Units,

b. or using button Units ( ) on toolbar Project.

2. Make the required settings.

3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: For more information about units see chapter Terminology and conventions > Units.

Scales

Adjusting the scales The entities displayed on the screen are displayed in a specific scale. The user can control the scales through settings made in the Scales manager.

Basic Reference Guide

58

The scales are stored and can be adjusted in the Scales manager. This allows the user to have several "sets" of defined scales for different purposes and to simply swap between them.

The Scales manager always contains the set named "Current". The "Current" set is always associated to graphical windows. All graphical windows use the same set of scales. In addition, you can define as many user-defined sets of scales as required. When you create a new set of scales and assign it to the graphical window, this set is stored in the Scales manager under the name you define and it is also copied to the "Current" set. This way, the graphical windows are always associated with the "Current" set of scales.

Toolbar Scales

Scales toolbar contains the following controls:

Spin control for fast adjustment of scales for additional data This control enables you to quickly multiply all the scales for additional data by the factor in the spin control.

Button "Autofit scales for data" to recalculate the scales for additional data This button recalculates the adjusted scales for additional data so that the drawing fits the screen. The ratio between scales for individual entities is maintained, but the absolute value of the scales is changed. The button performs no action if the Scale type in the "Current" set of scales is set to Symbol size.

Spin control for fast adjustment of scales for results This control enables you to quickly multiply all the scales for results by the factor in the spin control

Button "Autofit scales for results" to recalculate the scales for results This button recalculates the adjusted scales for results so that the drawing fits the screen. The ratio between scales for individual entities is maintained, but the absolute value of the scales is changed. The button performs no action if the Scale type in the "Current" set of scales is set to Symbol size.

Button "Scales" for access to Scales manager This button opens the Scales manager.

Scales manager

The Scales manager is a standard database manager. It can be used to:

a) create a new set of scales,

b) edit the existing set of scales,

c) activate one of the defined sets of scales,

d) copy, delete, export or import the sets of scales.

Note: The "Current" set of scales cannot be deleted.

Scales parameters

General parameters

Name Specifies the name of the set of scales. (The "Current" set of scales cannot be renamed).

Group data

Scale type Symbol size You define the absolute size of the symbol that is used for each type of entity. The multiplier is taken into account during drawing. Real ratio You define the scales for individual types of entities. This scale is used directly (taking into account the multiplier) to display the data. Automatic ratio You define the scales for individual types of entities. These scales, however, are used only to determine the ratios between the size of individual entities. The absolute size is determined using the following algorithm: the largest entity (e.g. the largest force) is so scaled, so that its size in the graphical window is 1 metre. All other entities are scaled using the calculated ratios. The multiplier is taken into account, which means that if the multiplier is set to 2, the size of the largest entity is 2 metres..

Multiplier This multiplier is used to increase (or decrease) the real size of the displayed entities.

Program settings

59

Point data This value specifies the scale for "point" data such as point load, concentrated moment, etc.

Line data This value specifies the scale for "line" data such as line load, line moment, etc.

Surface data This value specifies the scale for "surface" data such as surface load, etc.

Group Result

Scale type See Group Data (above). If Symbol size option is selected for the results, the behaviour is similar to Automatic ratio, but each group of entities (beams, slabs, etc.) is treated separately. It means that the largest value is determined for every group of entities.

Multiplier See Group Data (above).

Reaction, Deformation, Internal forces, Stress, Contact stress, Unity check, Other results The value specifies the scale for individual type of result value.

Group Symbols

Scale type See Group Data (above).

Multiplier See Group Data (above).

Point symbols, Line symbols, Surface symbols, Structure node symbol, Local axis symbols, Other symbols The value specifies the scale for individual type of symbols.

The procedure to open the Scales manager

a) Use menu function Setup > Scales, or

b) click button Scale ( ) on toolbar Scales.

The procedure to create a new set of scales

a) Open the Scales manager,

b) Click button [New].

c) Define the name of the Scales set and, if necessary, adjust the individual parameters.

d) Close the Scales manager.

The procedure to assign a set of scales to the graphical window

a) Open the Scales manager,

b) Select the required Scales set.

c) Close the Scales manager.

Advanced settings

Document Setup The Document Setup dialogue enables the user to adjust default values for the style of document. The parameters are described in chapter Document > Adjusting the document default settings.

Picture gallery Setup

Basic Reference Guide

60

The Gallery Setup dialogue enables the user to adjust default values for style of pictures inserted into or created in the Picture gallery. The parameters are described in chapter Graphic output >Picture gallery > Picture gallery manager > Inserting a new picture into the Picture gallery > Adjusting the default values for new pictures.

Note: The settings adjusted in this dialogue are taken into account whenever a new drawing is inserted into the

picture gallery by means of Picture to gallery function ( ). For example, if the default picture style is set to "wire", the drawing from the graphical window is inserted as "wired" even though it was e.g. rendered in the graphical window. The style may be later edited in the Picture gallery manager.

FE mesh Setup Finite element mesh is generated automatically by the program. The user, however, may specify parameters that control the generation process.

These parameters may be defined in the calculation dialogue or in the program setup.

The setup dialogue can be opened using menu function Setup > Mesh.

The meaning of individual parameters is given in chapter Calculation > Generating the FE mesh > Parameters of FE mesh.

Solver Setup This setup dialogue provides for adjustment of basic parameters controlling the calculation. The parameters are described in chapter Calculation> Calculation types > Static linear calculation.

The parameters may be also specified in the calculation dialogue just before the calculation is executed.

Advanced geometry setup The parameters in the first group are identical with some items from the Parameters controlling the alignment of the structure. These values are used for all geometrical operations and for your convenience they are added into this dialogue as well

Geometric tolerances

Min. distance of two nodes, node to curve

Specifies the min. distance of two nodes for which the two nodes are considered separate nodes. If the real distance of two nodes is lower than this parameter, the two nodes are merged together.

This parameter is used by the function for connection of entities and by the function for check of data.

Max. distance of node to 2D member plane

Specifies the maximal allowable distance of a node from the plane of a 2D member. If the actual distance is larger than this limit value, the geometry is considered invalid and a corresponding warning is issued.

Displaying

Precise member surface This parameter comes into account only if surfaces are switched on.

If ON, the shape is displayed as precisely as possible.

If OFF, only the schematic shape of the cross-section is displayed.

The parameter has meaning in particular for steel rolled sections.

Immediate refresh of structural model

If ON, the structural model is automatically refreshed after all changes.

If OFF, the structural model is refreshed manually on user’s request.

Precision of displayed curves

This parameter control smoothness of curves and curved surfaces. The higher the number the smoother the curve. On the other hand, the higher the number the slower the response of your computer may be.

The parameter must be from interval <1, 10>.

The parameter does not affect the precision of the calculation.

Precision of cut-out mesh This parameter controls smoothness of the displayed shape of intersecting surfaces.

The parameter does not affect the precision of the calculation.

61

Basic working tools

Selections

Introduction to selections Whenever the user needs to do anything with any part of his/her model, s/he must, first of all, determine which part of the model should be treated. In other words, the user has to make a "selection" of members that will be processed.

Once the selection is defined, the required operation may be started. The selection may be formed by a single entity or it may hold as many entities as required. Generally, the selection may contain entities of the same type, or it may contain several entity types. Which of the two cases is applied depends on the intended operation. Some operations require specific entity types, other operations may be carried out with any entity types.

In general, there are two approaches to start an operation:

the user first makes the selection and then starts the appropriate function (the function then deals with the prior made selection),

the user first starts the required function and then (i.e. from within the function) makes the selection.

Which approach is actually applied depends only on work habits of a particular user.

To sum up, the selection can be not only made and utilised in a function, but it can be also modified (reduced or extended), cleared, saved into a file for later use or loaded from a previously created file.

Selections are controlled by:

Menu View > Selections,

Selections toolbar.

Making a selection In order to make a selection, the program must be in the selection-enabled mode. This mode is the default mode of the program and only a limited number of functions changes this mode into a selection-disabled mode. The selection-enabled mode is identified by the mouse cursor that looks like a diagonally oriented arrow with a small square attached to the tip of the arrow. Once this cursor is on the screen, it is possible to make selections freely.

There are two basic ways to make a new selection: using the mouse or typing a command on the command line. In both ways it is a piece of cake.

In addition, a selection can also be made via filters. That means, that the user specifies a condition that should be fulfilled by all selected entities. For example, the user may specify the condition that the cross-section must be a rolled IPE 300. The filter-controlled selection then looks for and selects all 1D members with such a cross-section.

Making a selection by the mouse cursor

When using the mouse cursor, there are several selection modes:

single selection One entity is selected each time the user clicks the mouse button.

intersection line The user draws a line (or a polygon) on the screen. The program selects all entities that have an intersection with the drawn line.

rectangular cut-out The user draws a rectangle on the screen. The program selects all entities located inside the rectangle or overlapping it (see the paragraph below for details about this selection mode).

polygonal cut-out The user draws a closed polygon on the screen. The program selects all entities located inside the polygon.

working plane The program selects all entities located in the current working plane.

select-all All currently displayed entities are selected

previous Activates the last made selection.

How to activate the required selection mode:

selection mode

via toolbar Selections via menu Tools > Selections

Single selection

click button [Selection by mouse] call function Selection by mouse

Intersection line

click button [Selection by cut-out] call function Selection by intersection line

Rectangular

click button [Selection by call function Selection by cut-out

Basic Reference Guide

62

cut-out intersection line]

Polygonal cut-out

click button [Selection by polygonal cut-out]

call function Selection by polygonal cut-out

Working plane

click button [Select by working plane]

call function Select by working plane

Select all

click button [Select all] call function Select all

Previous

click button [Previous selection] call function Previous selection

Single selection mode toggle

swaps between "First found" and "All found" mode

see paragraph Selection of entities with overlapping edges

Selection mode toggle

swaps between "Select" and "Deselect" mode

see topic Removing the entities from selection

Visibility selection mode

swaps between "normal" selection mode and a special mode for OPGL

see paragraph Visibility selection mode

see also paragraph Visibility selection acceleration

Single selection

In order to make a selection, the user has to:

1. place the mouse cursor on the entity he/she wants to select,

2. click the left mouse button.

That is all that is necessary to make a selection by mouse. To add another entity, the user just puts the cursor on another entity and clicks the left mouse button.

Intersection line

When this mode is invoked, all entities that are intersected by a defined line are added into the selection. The line may be either a single straight line or a polygon consisting of straight lines.

The procedure to define a polygon

1. Position the mouse cursor to the place where the polygon should start.

2. Click the left mouse button.

3. Position the mouse cursor where the end point of the polygon line segment should be located.

4. Click the left mouse button.

5. Repeat the previous two steps as many times as required.

6. Close the polygon, ie. either

a. press [ESC] key, or

b. invoke the pop-up menu, select End polyline command and run it, or

c. define the last point with a double-click on the left mouse button.

Cut-out

This mode enables the user to select all entities located inside a mouse defined cut-out. There are two different kinds of the cut-out. The first one serves for selection of entities located fully inside it. The other one can be used to select entities that are both fully inside and overlap the cut-out.

The procedure to define a cut-out that selects inside-located entities only

1. Place the mouse cursor to the TOP LEFT corner of the rectangular cut-out.

2. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.

3. Drag the mouse to the BOTTOM RIGHT corner of the rectangular cut-out.

4. Release the button.

The procedure to define a cut-out selecting both inside-located and overlapping entities

1. Place the mouse cursor to the TOP RIGHT corner of the rectangular cut-out.

2. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.

3. Drag the mouse to the BOTTOM LEFT corner of the rectangular cut-out.

4. Release the button.

Polygon

This mode is similar to the previous one. The difference is that the user draws an arbitrarily shaped closed polygon instead of a simple rectangle.

The procedure to define a polygonal cut-out

Basic working tools

63

1. Position the mouse cursor to the place where the polygon should start.

2. Click the left mouse button.

3. Position the mouse cursor where the next vertex of the polygon should be located.

4. Click the left mouse button.

5. Repeat the previous two steps as many times as required.

6. Close the polygon:

a. either press [ESC] key, or

b. invoke the pop-up menu, select Close polygon command and run it.

Working plane

In this mode, the program automatically selects all entities located in the current working plane.

Select-all

All displayed entities are automatically selected.

Selection of entities with overlapping edges

In a real-life model it is frequent situation that several entities (e.g. beams, walls) meet in one place (joint, corner). In that case it may be difficult to select the proper entity, because when you place the mouse cursor over the intersection of these entities, the program does not know, which one to select. To solve such situations, the program offers a special toggle: Single selection. This switch enables you to work in two modes:

First found

In this mode, the first entity found by the selection algorithm is selected (usually, it is the entity that was input first).

All found

In this mode, the program finds all entities under cursor and offers you a list of them so that you may decide yourself which one(s) should be selected.

Imagine a simple model of three walls.

If you place the cursor over the corner in which the three walls meet and click the left mouse button, the program opens a small dialogue with a list of found entities.

You may roll the mouse cursor over the list. The entity over which the cursor is just placed is highlighted in the graphical screen, so it is easy to find out which entity is which.

Basic Reference Guide

64

If you want to select a particular entity, just click on its name in the list. You may select as many entities as you want.

When you press the green-mark button, the selection is confirmed.

Visibility selection mode

In the "normal" selection mode, you must select an edge of an entity in order to select it. However, if the Visibility selection mode is activated, you may just put the mouse cursor anywhere on the displayed member and it can be selected. The only precondition is that Rendering display style is active. The Single selection mode toggle is taken into account in the Visibility selection mode. Examples (the little cross in the blue circle indicates the position of the mouse cursor): A) Single selection mode toggle set to FIRST FOUND

Basic working tools

65

B) Single selection mode toggle set to ALL FOUND

Please note that the cursor changes its shape when the program is in the visibility selection mode.

Visibility selection acceleration

When you use the Visibility selection mode, the acceleration can be used to speed up the manipulation with large models. However, it is important to know that the final effect of the acceleration depends on the model of the structure and that the acceleration may, under certain circumstances, even slow down the program response. The principle of the acceleration is that the model that is displayed in the graphical window is converted to an OPGL scene (a special graphical scene optimised for the graphical card) that is usually processed faster by the graphical card. However, in order to allow for selections, the OPGL scene must handle also a list of all members that are displayed. And this may be the core of the problem. If the "workload" related to the management of this list exceeds the "workload" related to displaying of the graphical scene, the effect of the acceleration may be negative. This can be better understood on the following example. Let us have a structure model composed of 1000 members (beams and columns). A) All the members have a rectangular cross-section. It is quite a simple task for the graphical card to display such a simple shape (even if it is repeated 1000 times). On the other hand, the maintenance of the list of 1000 items is a rather complex matter. As a result, if the acceleration is ON, the response of the program will be most likely slower.

Basic Reference Guide

66

B) All the members have a circular (pipe) cross-section. It is more complex task for the graphical card to display such a shape. As a result, the acceleration will probably have no effect. In other words, the time saved during the display operation equals the time needed for the management of the list of the members. C) All the members have a cross-section of a complex shape (e.g. a complex aluminium profile). In this case, the time savings reached due to faster display operation are much greater than the time-losses due to the management of the list of the members. Which means that the acceleration has a positive effect. The acceleration can be switched on/off in menu Tools > Selection.

Filter-controlled selection

The filter-controlled selection is useful if the user wants to select all entities that meet a specific condition. This type of selection is described in the following chapter.

Making a selection from the command line

A selection can be also made (sometimes very effectively) from the program’s command line.

The procedure is similarly simple as the "mouse procedure". The user types a command on the command line and the selection is made.

Command syntax

SEL [switch] parameter [parameter2] [parameter3] [etc.]

or SELM [Enter]

name1 [Enter]

name2 [Enter]

...

END [Enter]

The latter alternative provides fo multiple selections. SELM + [Enter] starts the multi-selection mode. Then you can type the names of required entities one by one – each one followed by [Enter] key. The selection can be completed with command END (followed by [Enter] key).

Switch

switch meaning

+ adds into selection

- subtracts from the current selection

| inverts the current selection

Parameter

parameter example description

entity name SEL BEAM23 selects entity named BEAM23

entity name with a wildcard SEL BEAM2? selects all entities whose name starts with BEAM2 and is followed with a single character

SEL B? if 1D members are named B and numbered, this command selects all "one-digit" 1D members

SEL B?? if 1D members are named B and numbered, this command selects all "two-digit" 1D members

SEL B* selects all entities whose name starts with letter B

SEL B1 B2 selects entities named B1 and B2

NONE SEL NONE clears the selection

Examples

Basic working tools

67

sel none clears the selection

sel * selects all entities

sel N1 selects entity N1

sel + N* adds into the current selection entities whose name starts with N

sel – B* removes from the current selection entities whose name starts with B

sel | B1 inverts entity B1 in the selection (i.e. if the entity WAS in the selection, it is removed; if the entity WAS NOT in the selection, it is added)

Removing the entities from selection When using complex and extensive selections, it may be necessary or at least useful to remove a particular entity or entities from the already made selection.

In general, there are two ways to remove an entity from an existing selection: "[Ctrl] key" method and "Inverted selection mode" method.

"[Ctrl] key" method

All the selection modes for making a selection can be used as well for removal of specific entities from the current selection. In order to activate the "subtract from selection" mode, the user must press down and hold [Ctrl] key on the keyboard.

Example 1:

Let’s assume that a selection of some entities has been already made. Now, the user needs to remove one particular entity.

The procedure will be:

1. Position the mouse cursor over the entity that should be extracted from the selection.

2. Press down and hold [Ctrl] key.

3. Click the left mouse button.

4. The entity is removed from the selection.

5. Release [Ctrl] key.

Example 2:

Let’s assume that a selection of some entities has been already made. Now, the user needs to remove a few entities that are parallel to each other and located close to each other.

The procedure will be:

1. Select Intersection line selection mode.

2. Position the mouse cursor next to the first entity that should be removed from the selection and outwards from the others.

3. Press down and hold [Ctrl] key.

4. Define the intersection line, i.e. the line or polygon intersecting all the required entities.

5. Close the intersection line.

6. Release [Ctrl] key.

"Inverted selection mode" method

It is also possible to press button [Selection mode toggle] ( ) on toolbar Selections. All the selection modes described in chapter Making a selection then remove entities from the previously made selection.

Note: It is also possible to remove entities from selection using command "SEL" typed on the command line with the appropriate switch and parameter. For more information see chapter Making a selection.

Making a selection based on a specific property Very often the user needs to select all entities that meet some specific condition. For example, to select all 1D members made of one material type or all supports allowing for free movement in X-direction, the filter-controlled selection is the right choice.

The procedure to apply a filter-controlled selection

1. Select one entity that meets the required condition.

2. In the property table click the left column cell of the row that contains the required condition.

3. Click icon [Quick select] ( ) at the top of the property dialogue frame.

Basic Reference Guide

68

Note: This type of selection may be used to select e.g. - all the 1D members of the same cross-section, - all the slabs of the same thickness, - all the entities located in the same layer, etc.

Adjusting the filter for selections Sometimes it may be very useful to limit the selection on some entity types only. Scia Engineer enables the user to specify the filter for selections.

There are three filter options:

OFF The filter is OFF and any entity of any type may be selected.

For service Function for making a selection recognises only those entities which the active service can deal with.

For tree The type of entities that can be selected is defined by the position of cursor in the tree.

Filter for service

If this filter option is selected, the set of entities for selections is defined by the currently opened service. The user can select only those entities that the service can deal with.

For example, if service Loads is open, and this filter option is ON, only 1D members, nodes, and loads of all types can be selected.

Filter for tree

If this filter option is selected, the set of entities for selections is defined by the currently opened service. and by the position of cursor (by the focus) in the tree menu. The user can select only those entities that are specified by the function "under focus".

For example, if service Loads is open, and this filter option is ON, and the focus in on function Line force on beam, only line loads can be selected.

The procedure to adjust the required filter

1. Click button [Filter] on the Status bar.

2. A short menu is opened.

3. Select the required filter.

The alternative procedure for the adjustment of the required filter

1. Press in button [Filter for selection on/off] ( ) on Selection of objects toolbar in order to select Filter for service.

2. This action makes another filter button available – [Filter by service tree on/off] ( ).

3. Press in button [Filter by service tree on/off] on Selection of objects toolbar in order to select Filter for tree.

Modifying a selection Any existing and active selection may be modified, i.e. some of the selected entities may be removed from it and some other entities may be added to it.

Removal of entities from the selection

In order to remove an entity from the current selection, follow the procedure given in chapter Removing the entities from selection.

Adding another entity into the selection

In order to add another entity into the current selection, simply follow the procedure for making the selection. Until you clear the selection, any new selected entities are added to the current selection.

Applying a selection A selection is usually made to carry out an action (i.e. call one or more of Scia Engineer functions). In fact, vast majority of Scia Engineer functions works with a selection and modifies the entities in the selection according to defined functionality. Therefore, it must be clear how to associate the selection with the required action. Fortunately, this crucial step is completely automatic and absolutely straightforward in Scia Engineer despite the fact that there exist two opposing approaches.

Applying a pre-created selection

This approach leads to the following steps:

1. Select the required entities.

2. Start the function.

Basic working tools

69

3. The function "works" with the previously made selection.

Applying a post-created selection

On the other hand, this approach means:

1. Call the required functions.

2. Select the entities that should be treated with the function.

3. The function then processes the in-function-defined selection.

Both approaches have their advantages. The latter is useful mainly if the user wants to apply the same function on several different selections. It is possible to change the function parameters for each particular selection, but the main function itself must be called just once.

Clearing a selection If a selection is no longer useful, or if it was made improperly (e.g. wrong entities have been selected), or if any other reason occurs, the selection may be cleared. It means that the selected entities are removed from the selection but NOT from the project. Just the selection is emptied.

There are several ways to clear a current selection:

Press [ESC] key,

Click [Cancel selection] ( ) button on the Selections toolbar,

Call function Cancel selection from menu Tools > Selections.

All the possibilities are equivalent to each other.

Saving and reading a selection Any selection made for any purpose can be saved to a disk for later re-use.

Any selection can be saved or loaded through appropriate functions from the Selections toolbar or via menu Tools > Selections.

The selections are stored with the project. It is however possible to export the selections out of the project and use them in another project. This export can be made in the Selection manager (see below).

There are, in principle, three actions that can be done with selections:

a new selection can be saved (done through Save selection dialogue),

an existing selection can be loaded (done through Selection manager dialogue),

an existing selection can be updated (done through Selection manager dialogue).

In addition (as already stated), any selection can be exported from the project to an external file that can be later imported into another project.

Note: Be careful when using one selection (EPS) file with multiple projects. The program makes no special checks and mechanically reads the selection from the file. However, the entities stored in the selection that do not exist in the project are, naturally, ignored.

Saving a new selection

When a selection is being saved, the Saved selection dialogue is opened on the screen.

Saved selection dialogue

Basic Reference Guide

70

Name You can assign an arbitrary name to each saved selection.

Edit selection The selection that was made in graphical window before invoking this dialogue can be further modified or reviewed in the Make selection dialogue – see below.

This option can be also useful when a new selection is made directly in the Selection manager – see below.

Select picture Each saved selection can be accompanied with an illustrative picture – e.g. screen copy – that may be worth thousand words in explaining which entities are in the selection in question.

Comment You may add e few lines of comment.

Description This field contains an automatically generated list of all entities included into the selection.

Make selection dialogue

Basic working tools

71

On condition that you know the names of individual entities in your project, you can manually add or remove the required entities to or from the selection.

Available (entities) This list contains a list of all available entities that can be included into the selection. This list does not contain the entities that have been already inserted into the current selection.

Selected (entities) This list names the entities that have been inserted into the currently edited selection.

Button [--] This button collapses all the branches of the tree with the list of (available/selected) entities.

Each list in the dialogue has its own button.

Button [++] This button expands all the branches of the tree with the list of (available/selected) entities.

Each list in the dialogue has its own button.

Button [>] Use this button to move the highlighted item from the "available" to the "selected" list, i.e. add it to the selection.

Button [>>] Use this button to move all the items from the "available" to the "selected" list, i.e. add them to the selection.

Button [<] Use this button to move the highlighted item from the "selected" to the "available" list, i.e. remove it to the selection.

Button [<<] Use this button to move all the items from the "selected" to the "available" list, i.e. remove them to the selection.

Loading a saved selection

Once a selection was saved, it is possible to load it back for use with any function that works with selections. Any saved selection can be loaded through the Selection manager. The Selection manager is a standard Scia Engineer database manager.

Basic Reference Guide

72

Selection manager

New Creates a new selection.

Edit Edits the existing selection.

Copy Creates a copy of an existing selection.

Delete Deletes the existing selection.

Undo, Redo Takes back the last action done in the manager.

Read from disk Reads a selection that was saved to an external EPS file.

Save to disk Saves the selection into an external file with extension EPS.

Selection properties The right-hand side of the Selection manager dialogue contains the information about the selection. The content is identical to the Saved selection dialogue described above.

Updating a saved selection

Any saved selection can be updated any time later, if required. The update is made through the Selection manager. That is however modified a bit. The button load is replaced with button [Update].

The fact that the update uses the Selection manager has one major advantage. Let us assume that you loaded a saved selection, modified it in the graphical window, started function Update named selection and only then you realise that you do not want to lose the original selection – that it is still useful and necessary. You are in the Selection manager, so instead of selecting (and updating, i.e. changing) one of the existing named selections, you can create a new selection and use it for the update function. In other words, you can swap from "Update" to "Save as new" even if the update function is already in the progress.

The procedure to save a new selection to a disk

1. Make a selection.

2. Start function Save selection (either on toolbar Selections or in menu Tools > Selections).

3. Select Save as new from the submenu.

Basic working tools

73

4. Fill in the parameters in the Saved selection dialogue.

5. Confirm with [OK].

The procedure to update the existing selection

1. Load the required selection (see below for the procedure).

2. Modify the selection as required.

3. Start function Save selection (either on toolbar Selections or in menu Tools > Selections).

4. Select Update existing from the submenu.

5. The Selection manager is opened on the screen.

6. Select the selection to be updated.

7. (If you change you mind, you can create a new empty selection to be "replaced" by the updated selection).

8. Confirm with [Update].

The procedure to read a selection from a disk

1. Start function Load selection (either on toolbar Selections or in menu Tools > Selections).

2. Select the selection you want to read.

3. Confirm with [Load].

Selections versus editing of properties Selections are very advanced feature of Scia Engineer. They do not provide just for the passive selection of entities that will be further treated in some way. The selections represent a powerful tool for editing of the project.

The principle is that whenever whichever entity is inserted into a current selection, its properties are automatically and immediately displayed in the property window of the application.

If multiple entities of the same type are selected then the intersection of their properties is displayed in the window. If multiple entities of different types are selected, the user may choose the type whose properties should be displayed. It is of course possible to simply swap between the types once the parameters for one type have been reviewed.

What’s more, any data displayed in the property window can be edited and the change is immediately recorder.

Editing in the property window for one selected entity

If just one entity is selected, the property window shows it’s properties and, if possible, co-ordinates of its endpoints. Once the user changes any of the values in the property window, the change is recorder and the entity is re-displayed to reflect the changes.

Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of the same type

If several entities of the same type are selected, the property window displays the intersection of their properties. That means that the dialogue contains values of those parameters which are identical. If any parameters are of different value for different 1D members in the selection, the value cell in the property window is left blank.

The user may once again edit any item in the property window. This relates even to the blank cells. If a value is input into any of the cells, that value is assigned to all the entities in the selection.

Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of various types

Here the same can be said as in the paragraph above. What’s more, the combo box at the top part of the property window contains a list of all types whose entities are in the current selection. When the used selects any item from this list, the properties of this entity type are shown in the property window.

The user may then review or edit them as described above.

Note: See also chapter Controlling the selection-versus-editing process.

Controlling the selection-versus-editing process The principle of editing in the Property window as described in chapter Selections versus editing of properties can be controlled by means of settings made in the Environment settings.

The Environment settings dialogue contains item Maximum number of grouping properties. This items tells the program what is the maximum number of entities for which the "selection-versus-editing" process should be started.

In other words, if the user selects fewer entities than specified in the parameter Maximum number of grouping properties, the Property window is filled in with the parameters of selected entities. Consequently, the parameters can be easily edited.

On the other hand, if the number of selected entities is greater than the number specified in parameter Maximum number of grouping properties, the Property window is left blank. If required, the Property window may be filled in manually by

pressing button [Update property dialogue] ( ) located at the top right corner of the Property window..

This feature may be useful particularly for large projects with a great number of entities. The time that is necessary to collect and sort all the parameters of all selected entities is growing with the number of selected entities. In addition, it is assumed

Basic Reference Guide

74

that usually the user will select only a limited number of entities for direct editing in the Property window. And, if the user selects a really vast number of entities, it is assumed that the selection was made for some of manipulation functions and not for direct editing.

Therefore, it is possible to make as large selection as necessary and apply any of manipulation function to it, but the Property window is not filled in for excessive selections. If, however, the user does want to edit directly even the enormous number of entities, he/she may fill in the Property window manually by means of the above mentioned button.

Selections of slabs with openings If a slab has an opening or a subregion, there are a few rules concerning the selection of such a slab.

Let’s assume a simple rectangular slab with an opening.

Adjust the view parameters so that only the middle line of a slab is displayed on the screen

If you select the outline of the main slab, the main slab is highlighted and also selected.

In order to select the opening, you must select the opening itself.

Basic working tools

75

And now, let’s change the view parameters and let also the surfaces of the slab displayed.

If you select the surface outline of the main slab, the main slab is highlighted and also selected. In addition, the surface of

the opening is highlighted as well, BUT be careful, it is NOT selected (see the middle line of the opening – it is NOT highlighted).

In order to select the opening, you must select the opening middle line itself.

Activity

Introduction to activity The concept of activity is based on the assumption that it is convenient to hide a part of the modelled structure and work only the remaining part. This is useful mainly for larger projects where a great number of 1D members and other entities may reduce the lucidity and comfort of performed operations.

The activity feature provides for selection of only those members that are essential for a certain manipulation or operation. The rest of the structure is temporarily hidden from the user’s view.

In Scia Engineer the activity can be realised by means of two approaches:

Layers - see chapter Layers for more details

Activity functions – see individual activity functions.

Activity types There are several approaches the user may choose to determine which part of the structure should be active (i.e. visible and available for manipulations).

Layers The activity is completely controlled by layers.

Basic Reference Guide

76

See chapter Basic working tools > Layers > Displaying and hiding a layer.

Working plane Only members located in the current working plane become active.

Selection Only members being currently selected become active.

Optionally, the selected members may become inactive and all the others remain active.

Clipping box Only members located inside the current clipping box become active.

Switching the activity On or Off Despite the currently selected type of activity, the user may decide whether the activity as a whole should be switched on or off. In other words, whether only the "active" part of the modelled structure should be visible or whether the whole structure should be displayed and available for manipulations.

The procedure to switch the activity (i.e. to switch it ON if the activity is OFF and vice versa)

Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity On (or Activity Off).

Or click button Activity On (or Activity Off) on Activity toolbar ( ).

Note: Both the menu item and the tooltip of the function mentioned above contain the information about the current Activity type.

Activity according to layers When this activity type is selected, the information specified in the Layers manager controls the activity of structure members.

For more details about layers and their use see chapter Basic working tools > Layers > Displaying and hiding a layer.

The procedure to adjust the activity according to layers

Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by layers.

Or click button Activity by layers on Activity toolbar ( ).

Activity according to current selection The user may simply select (using standard Scia Engineer selections) members that he/she wants to make either active or inactive. In general, there are two approaches:

selected members are let active; all the others become inactive,

selected members become inactive; all the others are let active.

Making the selected members active

The procedure to adjust the activity according to selection – selected members become active

Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by selection (Selected members On).

Or click button Activity by selection (Selected members On) on Activity toolbar ( ).

Making the selected members inactive

The procedure to adjust the activity according to selection – selected members become inactive

Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by selection (Selected members Off).

Or click button Activity by selection (Selected members Off) on Activity toolbar ( ).

Activity according to working plane When this activity type is selected, the members located in the currently adjusted working plane become active. All other members become inactive.

For more details about working plane see chapter Basic working tools > working plane > Adjusting a working plane.

The procedure to adjust the activity according to working plane

Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by working plane.

Or click button Activity by working plane on Activity toolbar ( ).

Basic working tools

77

Activity according to clipping box When this activity type is selected, the members located inside the currently adjusted clipping box become active. All other members become inactive.

For more details about clipping box see chapter Advanced tools > Clipping box > Introduction to clipping box.

The procedure to adjust the activity according to clipping box

1. Activate the clipping box and adjust it in required way.

2. Adjust the activity type to "by clipping box":

a. Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by clipping box.

b. Or click button Activity by clipping box on Activity toolbar ( ).

Inverting the activity If required, the currently adjusted activity may be inverted so that:

the currently active members become inactive,

the currently inactive members become active.

The procedure to invert the activity

Either call function Tools > Activity > Invert current activity.

Or click button Invert current activity on Activity toolbar ( ).

Controlling the display style of inactive members The user may decide whether the members that are currently inactive should be partly visible or completely hidden.

The procedure to display inactive members

Either call function Tools > Activity > Draw inactive members.

Or click button Draw inactive members on Activity toolbar ( ).

Note 1: When visible, the inactive members are drawn in a style defined for Inactive members in Colours setup (see chapter Program settings > Project settings > Display style settings > Colour setup). Note 2: The function works like an ON / OFF switch. That means that if the inactive members ARE NOT drawn, the function makes them appear. If the inactive members ARE drawn, the function hides them.

Clipping box

Introduction to clipping box Clipping box is a very powerful tool that facilitates manipulation mainly with excessive structures. The Clipping box defines an area (3D-area) that is visible on the screen. The rest of the structure located behind the given area is temporarily hidden from the user’s view.

Defining a new clipping box The definition of a new clipping box is similar to the adjusting of the clipping box in the setting table.

The procedure for the definition of a new clipping box

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Clipping box - new.

2. Define the origin (i.e. the centre) of the clipping box.

3. The setup dialogue appears on the screen.

4. Fill in the table.

5. Confirm with button [OK].

Defining the clipping box around the working plane Sometimes it may be very useful to define the clipping box in such a way so that only entities located in the working plane are visible.

The procedure for attaching the clipping box to the working plane

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Attach to workplane.

2. The clipping box is adjusted accordingly.

Basic Reference Guide

78

Defining the clipping box around an entity Sometimes it may be very useful to define the clipping box in such a way so that only selected entities are visible.

The procedure for adjusting the clipping box around selected entities

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Around selected entity.

2. The clipping box is adjusted accordingly.

Defining the clipping box around the model Sometimes it may be very useful to define the clipping box in such a way so that it "outscribes" the whole model.

The procedure for adjusting the clipping box around the whole model

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Around all entities.

2. The clipping box is adjusted accordingly.

Using the clipping box

The procedure to switch the clipping box ON or OFF

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Clipping box On/Off.

2. The clipping box is activated or switched off accordingly.

Example of clipping box application

view without clipping box

view with clipping box ON

Basic working tools

79

view with clipping box ON after being zoomed in

Adjusting the clipping box in the setting table

The procedure for tabular adjustment of the clipping box

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Alphanumerical edit.

2. The setup dialogue appears on the screen.

3. Fill in the table.

4. Confirm with button [OK].

Note 1: If the clipping box was not displayed before the setup dialogue was invoked, the clipping box is switched ON on confirming the settings with [OK] button. Note 2: If the clipping box is ON and has been defined around the current working plane, the setting dialogue looks different and allows the user to specify the depth around the working plane.

Adjusting the clipping box using the mouse

The procedure to adjust the clipping by mouse

1. Turn the clipping box ON.

2. Position the mouse cursor over one of the clipping box borders.

3. Click the left mouse button to select the clipping box.

4. Special box-editing symbols are displayed in the centre of all clipping box surfaces. The ball symbol provides for resizing of the box, the cylinder symbol enables the user to rotate the box.

5. Select corresponding symbol for required manipulation.

6. Position the mouse cursor over the symbol.

7. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.

8. Drag the mouse to adjust the clipping box as required.

9. Release the mouse button.

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 as many times as required to tune the adjustment of the box.

11. Press [Esc] key to close the adjustment function.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the adjusting of clipping box. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

The alternative procedure for mouse controlled adjustment of the clipping box

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Graphical edit.

2. The clipping box is turned ON and swapped into the editing mode.

3. Follow the procedure described above.

4. Confirm with button [OK].

Note: If the clipping box was not displayed before the graphical dialogue was invoked, the clipping box is switched ON before enabling the adjusting.

Basic Reference Guide

80

Moving the clipping box If required, the current clipping box can be moved to a new location. The size of the clipping box remains unchanged, only its position in space is altered.

The procedure for moving of the clipping box

1. If it is not the case, activate the clipping box (i.e. switch it on).

2. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Move.

3. Define the new origin (i.e. the centre) of the clipping box.

4. The clipping box is moved accordingly.

Layers

Introduction to layers One of the important entity properties that should be understood well is the layer property. Experienced users definitely use layers all the time and that is why their work is so effective. Good use of layers is one of important aspects of a good model-making-and-evaluating practice.

Basically, layers are the computer equivalent of tracing overlays on a drawing board. However, layers are much more powerful because you can have many layers in a single project and you can control the visibility and colour of layers independently. This makes working with very complicated projects much more efficient.

When you start a new project, it has only one layer. The first thing you should do, therefore, when you start a new Scia Engineer project is to create some new layers.

Layers manager The Layers manager is a tool to control the layers defined in a project. The Layers manager provides for creating, editing and deleting of layers.

The manager itself uses the same "manager philosophy" as other Scia Engineer managers do. It contains control buttons for standard manager operations:

New It creates a new layer. The new layer is created with default properties that may be later edited.

Edit It opens an editing dialogue where the layer’s properties may be changed.

Copy This function creates a copy of the selected layer.

Delete It removes the selected layer from the project database.

Undo / Redo It performs an Undo or Redo operation.

Text Output It opens a small document window with a table that summarises properties of selected layers.

In order to open the Layers manager use either menu function Tools > Layers or tree menu function Tools > Layers.

The Layers manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain item Layer. Such an item contains a button to open the Layers manager.

Basic working tools

81

Displaying and hiding a layer

The Layers manager also enables the user to specify which layers should be visible and which ones should be hidden.

Defining a new layer A new layer can be defined in the Layers manager.

The procedure to define a new layer

1. Open the Layers manager.

2. Click button [New] to create a new layer.

3. If required, click button [Edit] to change the default layer parameters (name, colour, visibility).

4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as you need.

5. Close the Layers manager.

Applying defined layers A defined layer may be applied in the property dialogue of each particular entity. One of the table items contains the layer name. This item defines the layer that the entity is put into.

Once the layer is specified in the property dialogue of an entity, the entity may be displayed or hidden according to the settings made in the Layers manager.

Basic Reference Guide

82

The picture above shows the selection of the appropriate layer for a 1D member.

Displaying and hiding a layer One of the important features of a layer is that it can be hidden. Let’s assume that the user have finished modelling of one part of the structure. Let’s suppose that now s/he needs to work on another part of the same structure and that the new part is independent on the first part. The best s/he can do is hide the whole first part or at least its major part. This can be done by switching the appropriate layers off. The new part of the structure then can be modelled in new layers.

The layers can be switched OFF or ON (i.e. displayed or hidden) in the Layers manager.

The procedure for hiding (or displaying) a layer

1. Open the Layers manager.

2. In the right hand side part of the dialogue is located a layer property table containing option Display.

3. Select the layer or layers you want to display.

4. Tick the option Display.

5. Select the layer or layers you want to hide.

6. Remove the tick from the option Display.

7. If necessary, repeat the steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.

8. Close the Layers manager.

Ignoring selected layers in calculation It may happen that a calculation model of a structure may be quite simple. Simultaneously, the structure may contain a lot of additional parts that have no load-bearing function but that are important for production of nice-looking and accurate drawings.

Such a situation calls for using of special type of layers – layers used in structural model only and ignored in the calculation. This feature may be adjusted in the Layers manager.

The procedure for extracting the layer from calculation

1. Open the Layers manager.

2. In the right hand side part of the dialogue is located a layer property table containing option structural model only.

3. Select the layer or layers you want to ignore in calculation.

4. Tick the option Structural model only.

5. Select the layer or layers you want to consider in calculation.

6. Remove the tick from the option Structural model only.

Basic working tools

83

7. If necessary, repeat the steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.

8. Close the Layers manager.

User co-ordinate system (UCS)

Introduction to a user co-ordinate system The definition of points may be facilitated by the application of a user co-ordinate system. This system can be so defined (i.e. positioned and oriented) that it reflects the geometry of the model (or its part) that is being defined.

The user can define as many user co-ordinate systems as necessary. However, only one of them can be active in one graphical window at a time. Nevertheless, the user may swap between individual user co-ordinate systems at any time. What’s more, even a new user co-ordinate system may be defined any time it is necessary or efficient to do so.

The active user co-ordinate system is indicated on the program status bar.

Adjusting a user co-ordinate system

UCS defined by three points A new UCS can be defined by means of three points that do not lie on the same line. Each of the points has a precisely specified meaning:

1st point It defines the origin of the new co-ordinate system.

2nd point It defines the direction of X-axis of the new co-ordinate system.

3rd point It defines the side to which the Y-axis of the new co-ordinate system will point.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Horizontal UCS defined by one point A new co-ordinate system is defined by a single point. The point defines the origin of the new user co-ordinate system (UCS). The axes of the user co-ordinate system are parallel with corresponding global co-ordinate axes.

That means that:

the X-axis of the UCS is parallel with the X-axis of the global co-ordinate system (GCS),

the Y-axis of the UCS is parallel with the Y-axis of the GCS,

the Z-axis of the UCS is parallel with the Z-axis of the GCS.

The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always horizontal.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Vertical UCS defined by two points A new co-ordinate system is defined by two points (or one line).

The first inserted point defines the origin of the new co-ordinate system. The second point defines the direction of the X-axis of the new system. However, the X-axis is not defined precisely by the second point. The X-axis is always horizontal, and therefore, the second inserted point specifies the direction of the X-axis of the new user co-ordinate system. The Y-axis of the new user co-ordinate system is always vertical.

The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always vertical with the Y-axis pointing upwards.

Note 1: The two inserted points defining the new system MUST NOT lie on a vertical line. Note 2: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Vertical UCS perpendicular to global X-axis A new user co-ordinate system is defined by a single point. The point defines the origin of the new user co-ordinate system.

The axes of the user co-ordinate system are oriented in such a way so that:

the X-axis of the user-coordinate system is always horizontal,

the Y-axis of the user-coordinate system is always vertical,

the XY plane of the user-coordinate system is perpendicular to the global X-axis.

The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always vertical with the Y-axis pointing upwards.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Basic Reference Guide

84

Vertical UCS perpendicular to global Y-axis A new user co-ordinate system is defined by a single point. The point defines the origin of the new user co-ordinate system.

The axes of the user co-ordinate system are oriented in such a way so that:

the X-axis of the user-coordinate system is always horizontal,

the Y-axis of the user-coordinate system is always vertical,

the XY plane of the user-coordinate system is perpendicular to the global Y-axis.

The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always vertical with the Y-axis pointing upwards.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS identical with the global co-ordinate system A new user co-ordinate system is identical with the global co-ordinate system.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's X-axis A new user co-ordinate system (UCS) is defined according the following rules:

the X-axis of the new UCS is put into the Y-axis of the current UCS,

the Y-axis of the new UCS is put into the Z-axis of the current UCS.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's Y-axis A new user co-ordinate system (UCS) is defined according the following rules:

the X-axis of the new UCS remains unchanged,

the Y-axis of the new UCS is put into the Z-axis of the current UCS.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS defined according to an entity's LCS A new user co-ordinate system is defined by means of an existing entity (e.g. beam).

The new user co-ordinate system has got its origin in the starting point of the selected entity. The axes of the user co-ordinate system are identical with the local co-ordinate axes of the selected entity.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS defined from a view direction A new user co-ordinate system is calculated from the current view direction. In other words, the X-axis of the new co-ordinate system appears horizontal on the screen, the Y-axis of the new co-ordinate system appears vertical on the screen, and the Z-axis of the new co-ordinate system points towards the user’s eyes.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Editing a user co-ordinate system

UCS Manager The UCS manager gives the user full control over the existing user co-ordinate systems. Similarly to other database managers, it provides for the definition of a new UCS, for the modification or copying of existing systems, and for removal of no-longer-used co-ordinate systems.

Basic working tools

85

Association of the active graphical window with a particular UCS

The UCS manager is also used to select a particular UCS and associate it with (assign it to) the active graphical window. The UCS that is selected (highlighted) in the list of defined UCSs becomes the one associated with the graphical window.

The procedure for the selection of UCS for the active graphical window

1. Open the UCS manager:

a. in tree menu call function Tools > UCS,

b. on status bar click button showing the name of UCS associated with the active graphical window.

2. Select the UCS that should be assigned to the active graphical window.

3. Close the UCS manager.

Modifying an existing UCS An existing user co-ordinate system may be edited and thus its origin or direction of axes or both may be altered. In general, there are two ways to modify an existing UCS:

type values of UCS parameters into the editing dialogue of the UCS,

apply one of many modifying functions collected in submenu UCS (opened either from menu Tools > UCS, or

under button [Setting of UCS for active view] ( ) on toolbar View) (see chapter Adjusting a user co-ordinate system).

The procedure for direct editing of UCS parameters

1. Open the UCS manager.

2. Select the UCS you want to modify.

3. Click button [Edit] to adjust parameters of the new UCS.

4. Type in the required values for the origin of the UCS and for direction of its axes.

5. Close the editing dialogue.

6. Close the UCS manager.

The procedure for the modification of a UCS by means of UCS submenu functions

1. If it is not the case that the UCS you want to modify is the current (active) one, make it current first.

2. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view] ( ) on toolbar View).

3. Select the required way of modification.

Basic Reference Guide

86

4. If necessary, input required parameters (i.e. required point or points).

5. The UCS has been modified and is now kept as the current UCS.

6. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view] ( ) on toolbar View).

7. Select function Store the current UCS ( ).

8. Select the name of the UCS that has been modified and rewrite it with the new adjustment.

Defining a new UCS A new user co-ordinate system (UCS) can be defined in the UCS manager.

The UCS manager can be used to define completely a new user co-ordinate system if the user knows numerically the parameters of the system. That means, if the user knows the exact global co-ordinates of the UCS’s origin and the exact direction vectors of individual UCS’s axes. Otherwise, the UCS manager is used to create a new UCS instance, and one of numerous UCS-modifying functions is later applied to specify the origin and orientation of the UCS exes.

The procedure for the definition of a new UCS from within the UCS manager

1. Open the UCS manager.

2. Click button [New]. This creates a copy of the current UCS.

3. Click button [Edit] to adjust parameters of the new UCS.

4. Type in the required values for the origin of the UCS and for direction of its axes.

5. Close the editing dialogue.

6. Close the UCS manager.

The procedure for the definition of a new UCS parameters using a menu/toolbar function

1. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view] ( ) on toolbar View).

2. Select the required way of definition.

3. If necessary, input required parameters (i.e. required point or points).

4. Once more open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view]

( ) on toolbar View).

5. Select function Store the current UCS ( ).

6. Type the name of the UCS and confirm with [OK].

7. That’s it. A new UCS is defined and will appear in the UCS manager.

Copying an existing UCS Any of already defined UCSs may be copied. The copy may be further modified to define a new unique user co-ordinate system.

The procedure to make a copy of an existing UCS

1. Open the UCS manager.

2. Select the UCS you want to copy.

3. Click button [Copy] to create a new UCS that is identical in its parameters with the selected one.

4. If required, click button [Edit] to adjust parameters of the new UCS and type the required values for the origin of the UCS and for direction of its axes. Then close the editing dialogue.

5. If required, repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as necessary.

6. Close the UCS manager.

Moving an existing UCS An existing UCS can be moved to a new origin. The orientation of the system remains unchanged, only the UCS’s origin moves to a new position.

The procedure to move a UCS to a new origin

1. If it is not the case that the UCS you want to move is the active one, make it active first.

2. Call menu function Tools > UCS > Move (You may as well activate toolbar function Setting of UCS for active view > Move from toolbar View).

3. Define the new origin of the UCS.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Basic working tools

87

Rotating an existing UCS An existing UCS can be rotated by a specified angle. The origin of the system remains unchanged, only the direction of UCS’s axes changes accordingly. The rotation is performed in the adjusted working plane, i.e. the axis of rotation is normal to the current working plane.

The procedure to rotate a UCS

1. If it is not the case that the UCS you want to move is the active one, make it active first.

2. Make sure that the working plane is adjusted properly, i.e. that it is oriented in such a way that a normal to the working plane is parallel with the axis of intended rotation.

3. Call menu function Tools > UCS > Rotate (You may as well activate toolbar function Setting of UCS for active view > Rotate from toolbar View).

4. Type the angle by which the UCS should be rotated.

5. Close the dialogue.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Deleting an existing UCS It may happen that some of the previously user co-ordinate systems are no longer necessary, or even that some of the user co-ordinate systems have been defined by mistake. Such user co-ordinate systems may be removed from the project.

The procedure to delete an existing UCS

1. Open the UCS manager.

2. Select the UCS you want to delete.

3. Click button [Delete].

4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as necessary.

5. Close the UCS manager.

Storing the user co-ordinate system Any UCS created by the user may be stored as a named UCS. The user can specify the name and once stored, the UCS is listed in the UCS manager.

The procedure to store the UCS as named UCS

1. Adjust the UCS as required.

2. Call menu function Tools > UCS > Store the current UCS (You may as well activate toolbar function Setting of UCS for active view > Store the current UCS from toolbar View).

3. Input the required name.

Using a user co-ordinate system

Rules for using a UCS There are some rules concerning the use of user co-ordinate system that should be clearly stated here in order to prevent a possible confusion.

UCS in windows

Each graphical window can have a different UCS. The UCS can be assigned to a particular window from the UCS manager.

The procedure for association of a particular graphical window with a particular UCS

1. Select the graphical window you need to associate with the required UCS.

2. Open the UCS manager.

3. Select the required UCS.

4. Close the UCS manager.

Modification of an existing UCS in the UCS manager

If a UCS is edited in the UCS manager (i.e. edited numerically), the changes are made to the UCS that is being edited.

Modification of an existing UCS by means of modification functions

If a current UCS assigned to a particular window is edited by means of a function for modification of UCS, IT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW that:

Before the modification itself, the window is associated with the default (called current) UCS.

The modification is made with the current UCS.

The current UCS is let associated with the window.

Basic Reference Guide

88

If a named user-created UCS was associated with the window before the modification has been performed, that UCS remains unchanged.

If a named user-created UCS should be modified using modification functions, the following procedure must be executed.

The procedure for modification of a named user-created UCS

1. Use modification function or functions to define the UCS as required.

2. Call function for storing of the current UCS.

3. Rewrite the original named user-created UCS with the newly defined one.

Using a UCS in the graphical window The origin of the current user co-ordinate system is always displayed in the graphical window. Also directions of individual co-ordinate system axes are shown.

If the program is in point definition mode or point selection mode, the co-ordinates of the mouse cursor are displayed on the program status bas. The co-ordinates are given in user co-ordinate system.

Note: If required, the co-ordinates of position of the mouse cursor may also be displayed in the global co-ordinates.

Using a UCS from the command line If co-ordinates of an inserted point are typed on the command line without any prefix, the co-ordinates are considered to be in the current UCS. For more information about the syntax of the command line see chapter Command line in book Layout and operation > User interface.

Working plane

Introduction to a working plane A working plane is a plane in which the mouse cursor moves in the three-dimensional modelling space. The working plane can be adjusted arbitrarily to reflect the current needs of the user. The working plane is always placed into one of the basic planes of a user co-ordinate system (UCS). It means that the working plane is very closely bound to UCS.

Adjusting a working plane A working plane can be adjusted in any direction. There is only one limitation. A working plane is always bound to the currently set user co-ordinate system. The working plane may be oriented in one of the main planes of this co-ordinate system, i.e. into XY, XZ or YZ plane.

Therefore, in order to adjust the working plane into the required direction, the user may need to adjust the user co-ordinate system first.

The procedure to adjust the working plane into the required UCS main plane

1. Verify that the current UCS is defined as required.

2. Adjust the working plane into XY or YZ or XZ plane of the UCS:

a. Either using toolbar View and its button [Setting of UCS for active view] ( ),

b. Or calling function Tools > UCS,

3. In both cases, select one of the following items: XY workplane, YZ workplane, or XZ workplane.

Cursor SNAP modes

Introduction to SNAP modes Whenever the user needs to define a new point (e.g. an end-point of a new 1D member), it is possible to do so by typing the point co-ordinates on the command line. It is clear that this approach will not be always the most efficient one. Very often, a new point is identical with one of the already defined points (e.g. individual 1D members are connected to each other). What’s more, the geometry of the structure is usually regular in some way, and therefore, end-points of individual entities fit into a regular scheme. Both of these facts have been taken into account during the design of Scia Engineer’s SNAP modes.

A SNAP mode is a mode for locking a mouse cursor into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid or with characteristic points of already defined entities (such as their end-points, middle points, centres of circles, etc.).

When the SNAP mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point on the grid or to the nearest characteristic point.

Basic working tools

89

Grid SNAP modes The grid SNAP mode is a SNAP mode where the mouse cursor is locked into alignment with a grid. Scia Engineer offers two types of grid:

a dot grid (that may be either orthogonal or radial),

a line grid (that may be both two- and three-dimensional).

When this SNAP mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point of the grid.

The grid SNAP mode can be combined with the object SNAP mode if required.

The activation of the grid SNAP mode can be done in the Cursor snap setting dialogue.

Object SNAP modes The object SNAP mode is a SNAP mode where the mouse cursor is locked to commonly needed points, or we can say characteristic points, on entities (such as their end-points, middle points, centres of circles, etc.).

If required, the object SNAP mode can be combined with the grid SNAP mode.

A required kind of the object SNAP mode can be selected (activated) in the Cursor snap setting dialogue.

The picture above shows "in action" the SNAP mode set to Midpoints.

Adjusting a SNAP mode Adjustment of the required SNAP mode or modes can be done in the Cursor snap setting dialogue.

Basic Reference Guide

90

The dialogue offers a vide range of SNAP variants:

Line grid The cursor is locked to the vertices of a defined line grid.

Dot grid The cursor is locked to the points of a defined dot grid.

Only snapped points If this option is ON, the first two variants are automatically turned OFF and only characteristic points of already defined entities may be used to snap to. In other words, only the object SNAP mode is enabled.

Midpoints Middle points of entities are used as snap points.

Endpoints / Nodes End points of entities are used as snap points.

Intersections Intersections of entities are used as snap points.

Orthogonal points This option snaps to a point which forms a perpendicular with the selected object.

Tangential points The Tangential point SNAP mode snaps to a tangent point on a circle.

Arc / circle centre This option snaps to the centre of a circle, arc or polyline arc segment. The cursor must pass over the circumference of the circle or the arc so that the centre can be found.

Points on line / curve N-th The program automatically divides a selected entity into N segments and thus generates (N+1) points on an entity under cursor. The points may be used to snap to.

Points in line / curve % of length This option is similar to the one above. But the division of a 1D member is defined by percents and not by the number of segments.

Surface edges This option is available only if at least one of the above listed object SNAP modes is ON.

If this option is ON, the mouse cursor snaps also to the surface lines of entities.

The procedure for the adjustment of the required SNAP mode:

1. Open the Dot grid setting dialogue. The dialogue can be opened in two ways:

a. via [Snap mode] button on the Status bar,

b. via [Cursor snap setting] button ( ) on the toolbar at the command line.

c. using menu function Tools > Cursor snap setting.

2. Select the required SNAP option or options.

3. Press button [OK] to close the dialogue.

Adjusting the temporary one-step SNAP mode Sometimes it may be useful to let the current SNAP mode AS IS, and change the SNAP mode just and only for a single step (single action). For example, all new end-points of a set of 1D members are defined as end-points of existing entities, but suddenly it may happen that one particular point would be easily defined as a midpoint.

In Scia Engineer the user may change the SNAP mode temporarily for a single step only.

The procedure for the adjustment of a temporary SNAP mode

1. Once a function requiring the definition of points is started a toolbar is displayed at the top of the command line.

2. Proceed with the opened function up to the moment you need to change temporarily the SNAP mode.

3. Click the required icon on the mentioned toolbar.

4. The SNAP mode is temporarily re-adjusted for the following single step.

5. Once you define the point, the SNAP modes returns to the original setting.

Dot grid

Introduction to a dot grid A dot grid is an area in the graphical window covered with regularly spaced dots to aid drawing. The spacing between grid dots is adjustable. The grid dots are not plotted.

Basic working tools

91

The dot grid is always put into the current working plane, so that it can be used for the definition of points (e.g. end points of individual members) by means of mouse.

Properly adjusted dot grid may significantly speed up the process of geometry definition.

Scia Engineer offers two types of the grid: orthogonal and radial.

Adjusting dot grid parameters The dot grid can be adjusted to meet the needs of a particular project. Sometimes, it may be good idea to re-adjust the grid settings from time to time, especially if the geometry of the whole structure is not regular and varies from one part to another.

The procedure to adjust dot grid parameters

1. Open the Dot grid setting dialogue:

a. Either using toolbar View and its button [Setting of the dot grid] ( ),

b. Or via menu function Tools > Dot grid settings

2. Select the required type of the grid: orthogonal or radial

3. Type in the parameters of the grid (the individual parameters are self-explicable).

4. Close the dialogue.

7. The adjusted grid will be displayed on the screen unless it is switched off.

Using the dot grid The dot grid may be used to insert points if the following conditions are met:

the dot grid is switched on (i.e. it is displayed),

the snap mode is adjusted to stick to the grid points,

the program is in the point definition mode.

To be precise, the first condition does not have to be fulfilled and the dot grid may still be used. But as the dots of the grid are not visible, it is not recommended to use this configuration (unless you are a really advanced and skilful user of Scia Engineer).

Displaying the dot grid

The dot grid may be switched on and off using menu function View > View > Show / hide dot grid.

Setting the snap mode to use the dot grid

The capability of the snap mode to stick to the dot grid can be set in two different dialogues. The result is the same regardless of which dialogue is used.

Setting in Snap mode dialogue

1. Open the Cursor snap setting dialogue.

Basic Reference Guide

92

2. Tick the option Dot grid on or off (as required).

3. Close the dialogue.

Setting in Dot grid settings dialogue

1. Open Dot grid setting dialogue.

2. Tick option Snap cursor to dot grid on or off (as required)

3. Close the dialogue

Line grid

Introduction to a line grid A line grid is a kind of a three dimensional grid. Individual vertices of the grid can be used to define points of the modelled structure.

One can imagine the line grid as a set of wire cubes placed one next to another to create a larger wire cube. The vertices of individual small wire cubes are the vertices of the line grid. What’s more, the cubes may be not only regular cubes, but also other solids like a tetrahedron, irregular hexahedron, etc. The grid may be of either regular or irregular (variable) dimensions in any direction.

The tool is extremely useful for the definition of complex 3D structures on condition that at least some parts of the structure are regular (i.e. of the same spans or of the same height).

Types of line grid A line grid may be of several types. Each type may be useful for different "configuration" of the geometry of a modelled structure.

Cartesian This line grid represents the basic type. The vertices of the grid are defined in Cartesian co-ordinates and the grid as a whole resembles a regular rectangular prism.

Oblique This type is based on the previous one. In addition, the user may define two angles that make the grid oblique.

Basic working tools

93

Spherical Vertices of this grid type are defined by means of spherical co-ordinates.

Cylindrical Vertices of this grid of this type are defined by means of cylindrical co-ordinates.

Line grid manager The Line grid manager provides for operations related to line grids. It can be used to create a new line grid, to switch the existing line grids on or off, to modify an existing grid, to copy it or delete it.

The manager is operated the same way as any other Scia Engineer database manager.

The procedure to open the Line grid manager

Basic Reference Guide

94

Either: Use tree menu function Tools > Line grids.

Or: Use menu function Tools > Line grids.

Or: Click button [Line grid] ( ) on View toolbar.

Creating a new line grid Similarly to a great number of other "objects" in Scia Engineer, a new line grid can be created in the appropriate database manager. The Line grid manager has been designed to create and edit line grids

The procedure to create a new line grid

1. Open the Line grid manager.

2. Click button [New].

3. The editing dialogue is opened.

4. Specify grid dimensions.

5. Adjust its display parameters.

6. Close the editing dialogue.

7. Choose whether the new line grid should be displayed or hidden.

8. Close the Line grid manager.

Note: If no line grid has been defined in the current project so far, step 1 leads directly to opening of the editing dialogue. As a result, step 2 is automatically skipped.

Adjusting line grid parameters Each line grid is defined by means of:

dimensions in individual directions,

location of its origin (i.e. the insertion point),

possible rotation,

angles of obliqueness (for oblique line grid only),

name,

parameters of its display style.

Line grid type

Basic working tools

95

The combo box at the bottom part of the dialogue selects the required grid type.

Line grid dimensions

Depending on the grid type, the dimensions are defined in Cartesian, spherical, or cylindrical co-ordinates.

There are two ways to define the individual "spans" and "storey heights":

the user inputs the dimensions of individual "spans" and "storey heights",

the user inputs the co-ordinates of individual line grid vertices (i.e. co-ordinates of end-points for individual "spans" and "storeys").

The approaches are independent for each direction. In other words, the user can specify the dimension of the grid in X and Y direction by means of "span" lengths and then use grid absolute co-ordinates for the definition of individual "storeys" (in the case of Cartesian type) or vice versa. Which approach will be used can be set in the combo box located above the table for each particular direction.

Another general rule is that:

either each "span" and each " storey" of the line grid is defined explicitly,

or a "span" or "storey" dimension is input only once and the number of repetition of this dimension is added (if "spans" or "storeys" of the same dimension are adjacent to each other).

The latter can be user for grid with repetitious "spans" and may significantly speed up the definition of the grid.

Insertion point and rotation

This point defines the location of the grid in the global co-ordinate system.

If required, the whole line grid may be rotated around the global Z-axis.

Name

The name serves for easy identification of individual line grids if more than one grid are defined.

Parameters of display style

The user can control the way the line grid is displayed on the screen.

Adjusting the display style of line grid The user can easily control the appearance of the grid on the screen by means of a few parameters. The parameters are grouped on the Drawing setup tab of the line grid editing dialogue.

Base plane This parameter specifies which plane is the base plane for the labelling system of the grid.

Lines between planes Connecting lines may be or may be not drawn between individual grid layers (i.e. "floors" or "spans" depending on the base plane).

Label format The user can control the format of the labels.

Visibility of grid layers Individual grid layers (i.e. "floors" or "spans" depending on the base plane of the grid) may be visible or hidden.

Labelling of grid layers Individual grid layers may be labelled.

Dimensioning of grid layers Dimension lines may be added to individual grid layers.

Base plane

The base plane defines the plane where the main grid labels will be located. The user can select from the three base planes oriented in the three main planes of the global co-ordinate system (XY plane, YZ, plane, XZ plane).

Lines between planes

The individual grid layers (e.g. "floors" in case of XY base plane) may be graphically connected to each other or may be drawn as separate layers. If the lines are drawn, the final line grid looks like a three dimensional solid. If the lines are not drawn, the final grid resembles of a set of sheets put one above the other.

Label format

The user may adjust the format of the labels. The following parameters can be specified:

position of labels,

offset of labels,

text size,

a circle drawn around labels.

Visibility of grid layers

Each layer can be separately set as visible or hidden. This may be very useful especially for large and complex line grids.

Basic Reference Guide

96

Labelling of grid layers

Labels are added to individual layers according to the user’s settings. There are two types of labels:

labels for individual "spans" in a grid layer,

labels for the whole grid layer.

Each of the types is controlled by a separate parameter.

Dimensioning of grid layers

The individual grid layers may be equipped with dimension lines. The dimension lines may dimension:

either individual spans in individual directions,

or the total dimension in individual directions.

Displaying and hiding a line grid A line grid can be switched on / off (in other words displayed / hidden or activated /deactivated) in the Line grid manager. It is possible to switch on as many different line grids as required.

The procedure for switching a line grid on / off

1. Open the Line grid manager.

2. In the list of defined line grids select the line grid you want to switch on or off.

3. In the grid property table tick option Visible in order to switch the grid on, or remove the tick from this option to hide the grid.

4. Repeat points 2 and 3 as many times as required.

5. Close the Line grid manager.

Using a line grid In order to use a previously defined line grid, two conditions must be met:

at least one line grid must be switched on,

the SNAP mode must be set to pick points of line grid.

Once the two conditions are met, the vertices of the displayed line grids may be used to define points. When the mouse cursor is positioned on a line grid point (vertex), the program automatically detects it, snaps to it and shows its co-ordinates. If the user wants to use the highlighted point, the only thing he/she have to do is click the left mouse button.

The picture above shows the use of line grid for the insertion of columns during creation of a model of a hall.

Basic working tools

97

Editing an existing line grid The way to edit parameters of an already defined line grid is very straightforward and simple.

The procedure to edit an existing line grid

1. Open the Line grid manager.

2. Select the grid you want to modify.

3. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.

4. Change the required parameters on the Input data tab.

5. Change the required parameters on the Drawing setup tab.

6. Close the editing dialogue.

7. Close the Line grid manager.

If a defined line grid is no longer needed it may be deleted. The Line grid manager’s button [Delete] can be used for this operation.

Window pop-up menu

Introduction to window pop-up menu Every graphical window that is created in Scia Engineer has a pop-up menu associated with it. This pop-up menu provides for fast access to frequently used functions. The menu can be invokes by clicking the right mouse button if the mouse cursor is positioned inside the window.

The list of functions offered in the pop-up menu depends on several factors:

whether any function is opened (has been activated),

whether some entities are selected,

whether the mouse cursor is positioned on some entity (at the moment when the right mouse button is being pressed),

if the mouse cursor is positioned on some entity ,what kind of entity it is.

In addition to the pop-up menu in graphical window, Scia Engineer offers also a similar menu in a document window. This particular type of pop-up menu is described in chapter covering the document.

Functions of the pop-up menu The pop-up menu of the graphical is created dynamically. That means that the functions offered in the menu vary according to the current state of the program.

Standard pop-up menu

Zoom all Displays the whole model.

Zoom – cut-out Displays the selected cut-out so that it fits the whole area of the graphical window.

Set view parameters Opens the dialogue for adjustment of view parameters, i.e. the parameters that control the way the modelled structure is displayed on the screen.

Cursor snap setting Opens the dialogue for adjustment of required SNAP mode.

Copy picture to clipboard Copies the contents of the graphical window into clipboard of Windows system.

Export picture to file Saves the contents of the graphical window into an external file. The user may choose from a list of supported file formats.

Picture to document Inserts the contents of the graphical window into the document as a new picture.

Picture to gallery Inserts the contents of the graphical window into the Picture gallery as a new picture.

Print picture Opens the graphic output dialogue and allows the user to carry out the print set-up before the print itself.

Wire model in manipulations If the option is ON and the view direction or zoom is being adjusted by means of mouse (i.e. appropriate control keys and right mouse button held down during mouse movement), only a simplified wire representation of the structure is displayed during the operation of adjustment.

If the option is OFF, the normal (or full) display is used during

Basic Reference Guide

98

the operation.

It is clear that the latter may lead to slower response of the program.

Picture wizard Starts the wizard for generation of pictures.

See appropriate chapters in the Picture gallery.

Pop-up menu if a function is opened

If a function (e.g. Insert a new beam, Define load, etc.) is opened, Scia Engineer adds an additional function to the pop-up menu.

End of command This command may be used to close the currently opened function. The command closes just the function and lets the current service opened.

Pop-up menu if some entities are selected

If at least one entity is selected, the contents of the pop-up menu is rearranged in order to provide for common manipulations with the selected entities. The pop-up menu consists of the following functions:

Set view parameters (for the selected entities only)

Opens the dialogue for adjustment of view parameters, i.e. the parameters that control the way the modelled structure is displayed on the screen. The settings made here are applied to the selected entities only.

As this function deals with a specified set of entities, the range of the view parameters in the setting dialogue is limited to parameters related to the selected entities.

Set view parameters for all entities

Opens the dialogue for adjustment of view parameters, i.e. the parameters that control the way the modelled structure is displayed on the screen.

The settings made here are applied to all entities in the model.

Cursor snap setting Opens the dialogue for adjustment of required SNAP mode.

View This sub-menu comprises majority of the standard pop-up menu functions.

Move Start function for move of 1D members.

Rotate Start function for rotation of 1D members.

Scale Starts function for change of the scale of 1D members.

Stretch Opens function for stretching of 1D members.

Mirror Opens function for mirroring of 1D members.

Copy Starts function for copying of 1D members.

Copy Add data Starts function for copying of additional data.

This item is only available if at least one entity of additional data is in the current selection.

Move Add data Starts function for moving of additional data.

This item is only available if at least one entity of additional data is in the current selection.

Delete Opens function for deletion of selected entities.

Picture wizard Opens wizard (i.e. a set of dialogues) that helps the user generate pictures of the modelled structure.

Pop-up menu if the cursor is positioned over any entity

If the mouse cursor is located over an entity at the moment the mouse button is clicked, the program adds a few special items that are related to the very entity under the cursor.

Brief information about the entity under cursor

This menu item contains type and name of the entity under cursor. This item performs no action, it just says the user which entity the mouse cursor is positioned over.

Edit properties Opens the property dialogue for the entity under cursor. In this property dialogue the parameters of the entity may be changed as required.

Basic working tools

99

The picture below shows a sample pop-up menu that was invoked with the mouse cursor positioned over an entity called B3.

Using the window pop-up menu The pop-up menu of the graphical window can be invoked any time the graphical window is displayed and holds the focus.

The procedure for opening and using the pop-up menu

1. Place the mouse cursor into the drawing area of the required graphical window (please notice that several graphical windows may be opened at a time and therefore the cursor must be put into the required one).

2. If required, position the cursor over particular entity.

3. Click the right mouse button.

4. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Select the function that should be invoked and click the left mouse button.

6. The function starts or is performed (if the function does not require any parameters or response of the user, it is carried out immediately).

7. Finish the opened function.

Note: If the pop-up menu is invoked accidentally, just place the mouse cursor anywhere into the empty area of the graphical window and click the left mouse button. The pop-up menu disappears.

Adjusting the viewpoint (view direction + zoom)

Introduction to view adjustment If a simple two-dimensional structure is being modelled and analysed, it may be sufficient enough to have just one side view of the structure during the whole design and evaluation process. However, if a complex three-dimensional structure is handled, the user needs to:

view the structure from different sides,

zoom in important details,

zoom out to get the overall view,

possibly limit the view to only a part of the structure.

All the points mentioned above can be covered by one term – the user needs to adjust the view.

This task may be carried out by means of numerous view adjusting functions that Scia Engineer offers in its menus and toolbars.

Adjusting the view The adjustment of the view may consist of two separate operations:

Basic Reference Guide

100

definition of the view direction (i.e. from which side the structure is looked at),

specification of the distance of the view point from the structure (i.e. how big the structure appears to be on the screen).

Scia Engineer offers a wide range of functions to adjust the required view. Some functions perform just one of the two mentioned operations, others merge both of them into one action.

Menu functions for adjustment of the view

View > ZOOM > Zoom + Zooms in.

View > ZOOM > Zoom - Zoom out.

View > ZOOM > Zoom Cut-out Requires to define a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is then magnified in order to fit into the whole area of the graphical window.

Once the function is started the mouse cursor changes. Position it to the upper left corner of the cut-out. Press the left mouse button and hold it down. Drag the mouse to place the cursor to the bottom right corner of the cut-out. Release the button.

View > ZOOM > Zoom All Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

View > ZOOM > Zoom All – Selection

Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the whole area of the graphical window.

View > View > View X Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is viewed from the positive X-axis direction. Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

View > View > View Y Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is viewed from the positive Y-axis direction. Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

View > View > View Z Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is viewed from the positive Y-axis direction. Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

View > View > View AXO Sets the view point vector to (1, -1, 1). Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

Toolbar functions for adjustment of the view

Functions for the adjustment of the view are arranged on toolbar View.

View in direction X Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is viewed from the positive X-axis direction. Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

View in direction Y Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is viewed from the positive Y-axis direction. Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

View in direction Z Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is viewed from the positive Y-axis direction. Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

View in direction AXO Sets the view point vector to (1, -1, 1). Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

Zoom in Zooms in.

Zoom out Zooms out.

Zoom by cut-out Requires to define a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is then magnified in order to fit into the whole area of the graphical window.

Basic working tools

101

Once the function is started the mouse cursor changes. Position it to the upper left corner of the cut-out. Press the left mouse button and hold it down. Drag the mouse to place the cursor to the bottom right corner of the cut-out. Release the button.

Zoom all Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

Zoom all – selection Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the whole area of the graphical window.

Window scroll-bar wheel-like buttons for adjustment of the view

Each graphical window has got three wheel-like buttons on the scroll-bar. If the scroll-bar is visible the "wheels" may be used to adjust the required view. The function of the three wheel-like buttons is:

Zoom (located on the bottom scroll-bar)

Zooms in or out.

Rotate horizontally (located on the bottom scroll-bar)

Rotates the structure around the vertical axes (i.e. vertical axis of the screen).

Rotate vertically (located on the right hand side scroll-bar)

Rotates the structure around the horizontal axes (i.e. horizontal axis of the screen).

The operation of the wheel-like buttons is simple. Just place the mouse cursor over the "wheel", press the left mouse button, hold it down and "turn the wheel" with left-right, or up-down, movement of the mouse over the pad.

Mouse controlled adjustment of the view

In addition to the standard menu and toolbar functions Scia Engineer offers also a set of fast-access functions for the view adjustment.

Zoom in

Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse up (away from you) over the pad.

Zoom out Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse down (towards you) over the pad.

Rotate

Press [Ctrl] key and hold it down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse over the pad in order to get the required view direction.

Shift

Press [Shift] key and hold it down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse over the pad in order to get the required position of the structure on the screen.

Zoom All Double-click the middle-button of your mouse to invoke function Zoom All.

The pictures in the table are videos that demonstrate the individual view adjusting features. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Rotation of view

The centre of rotation depends on initial conditions.

No entity is selected The centre of rotation is put into the point that forms a centroid of an imaginary rectangular prism outscribed around the existing model.

Some entities are selected The centre of rotation is put into the point that forms a centroid of an imaginary rectangular prism outscribed around the selected entities.

One node is selected The selected node is the centre of rotation.

Clipping box is ON The centre of rotation is put into the point that forms a centroid of the current clipping box.

Limiting the view

Basic Reference Guide

102

If a modelled structure is larger and complex, it may be convenient to display only a limited part of it. This "limitation" can be achieved in two different ways:

Activity or layers The parts of the structure that are not necessary for the current operations may be hidden, in other words removed from the view.

This approach is described in chapter Basic working tools > Layers or Basic working tools > Activity.

Clipping box The view can restricted to a three-dimensional area (defined as a rectangular prism) called clipping box. If the clipping box is defined, only entities located inside it are displayed.

Features of the clipping box are described in chapter Advanced working tools > Clipping box.

Adjusting the view numerically The view direction may be specified also numerically by means of view direction vector. The vector can be defined in the View parameters dialogue on tab View. The three numbers in the table represent the X, Y, and Z components of the view direction vector.

Examples:

View direction vector View

-1.0

1.4

-1.0

-1.0

-1.4

-1.0

Basic working tools

103

0

0

1

Adjusting perspective projection By default, an orthogonal projection is used to display three-dimensional models on the screen. As an alternative, also a perspective projection can be activated.

The perspective projection can be set using:

Either: Menu function View > View > Perspective view,

Or: Button [Switch view to perspective mode] ( ) on toolbar View.

Special view settings In addition to the adjustment of the viewpoint (view direction and zoom), some other properties of the view can be controlled by the user.

Wire model in manipulations

This option can be set in:

Either: Menu View > View > Wire model in manipulations,

Or: Right mouse button pop-up menu of the graphical window.

Option is ON Only a simplified representation of the structure is displayed during the mouse controlled adjustment of the view.

This option increases significantly the response of the computer during the above mentioned operation. It is therefore more than recommended for standard speed computers and other than very simple models.

Option is OFF This option results in "fully displayed structure" during the mouse controlled adjustment of the view.

This option may lead to slow response of the computer and is recommended only for very state-of-the-art and fast computers and simple models.

View parameters

Introduction to view parameters Each entity that is defined in Scia Engineer is not "just a geometrical shape". There is a good number of various attributes attached to each entity. The attributes may be for example material, cross-section, layer, name, construction type, etc. Each of the attributes that is defined for a particular entity can be displayed on the screen.

What’s more, some of the attributes such as for example cross-section or surface can be drawn in several ways. Scia Engineer enables the user to control the way individual entities are displayed by means of view parameters.

These view parameters tell the program which particular attribute of each entity should be shown and which graphical representation should be used.

View parameters can be defined en block for the whole structure as unique, or they may be defined separately for individual entities. Each entity can be displayed with different view parameters.

Overview of view parameters

Basic Reference Guide

104

Available view parameters

Tab Structure Tab Labels Tab Model

Tab Loads Tab View Tab Miscellaneous

Note: In addition to these general view parameters, there are a few specialised tabs with view parameters for a particular advanced module, e.g. Steel code check, etc. These tabs are not shown until such a module is initialised. Note: The following list contains the available view parameters. It should be noted that not all of them are always offered in the Setup dialogue. The Setup dialogue offers only those parameters for which the appropriate entity type has been already defined. E.g. until you define at least one support in your model, view parameters for supports are not shown in the dialogue.

Tab Structure

Tab Structure > Group Service

Display on opening the service

If ON, entities appropriate for the service are automatically displayed as soon as the service is opened (in the tree menu). If OFF, no change of display takes place when a service is opened.

Tab Structure > Group Structure

Style + colour

It controls the style and colour of members of the model (beams, plates, shells, etc.)

normal: settings made in Setup > Colour/Lines dialogue are used,

by layers: each member is displayed in the colour of the appropriate layer, all members assigned to the same layer are of the same colour,

by material: each member is displayed in the colour of the appropriate material, all members made of the same material are of the same colour,

by cross-section: each member is displayed in the colour of the appropriate cross-section, all members of the same cross-section are of the same colour,

according to structural type: each member is displayed in the colour corresponding to its structural type.

Note: If e.g. two materials, two layers, two cross-sections have assigned the same colour, than the same colour is used for members of different controlling property.

Draw member system line

The system line (midline) is drawn if this option is ON.

Note: If this option is OFF and also Member surface is OFF, then the whole structure disappears from your view.

Member system line style

It controls the style of the member's system line (midline)

Definitions: System line is a line connecting the nodes of a member. This line is what you define when you input a new member. Fine elements are also generated on this system line. Reference line coincides with the system line if no eccentricity of a member is defined. If eccentricity is defined, the reference line is the centroidal axis of the member. Even if eccentricity is defined, the finite elements are generated on the system line (and the defined eccentricity is used in the relevant formulas of the finite elements). Bar is a highlighted system line. However, the bar is not drawn from the node to the node. It just indicates the member and leaves some space around the node for further information to be displayed.

system line: the system line of members is drawn.

system line + reference line: system line (solid) and possibly reference line (dashed) is displayed

Basic working tools

105

bar: highlighted "system line" is drawn

system line + bar: the system line is displayed and it is highlighted with the bar

Model type

You can define different geometry parameters for the "calculation model" of your structure and for the " structural model" of your structure. The calculation model is used for the numerical analysis, the structural model can be used for drawings, detailing, attractive presentations of your project, etc. For example, you can define different eccentricities in the two models, you can define cut-offs at ends of 1D members in the structural model, etc. This parameter tells the program which model you want to see on the screen.

analysis model: the parameters relating to the calculation model are used to display the structure

structural model: the parameters relating to the structural model are used to display the structure

Example: When you open the property table of a member, the calculation-model-parameters are in the top part of the table. The structural -model-parameters are grouped lower in the table under heading structural model.

Basic Reference Guide

106

Member surface

It defines whether the surface of members should be displayed.

Rendering

specifies the style the surface of members is displayed

wired: only the wired scheme of the surface is displayed

hidden lines: the real surface is calculated and those surface lines that are hidden from the view are not drawn

Basic working tools

107

rendered with edges: the real rendered view with outlined edges is displayed

rendered: the real rendered view is displayed

transparent: the surface is filled but it is transparent (this rendering style may be e.g. useful when you want to present designed steel frame connections - the structure may be transparent, the connection may be fully rendered)

Example: The picture shows the combination of transparent rendering style for 1D member and full-rendering for connection.

Draw cross-section

This option tells if the cross-section of a 1D member should be displayed.

Cross-section style

If the previous option is ON, this item defines the style of the displayed cross-section.

section: one section is drawn about in the middle of each 1D member. The section is 3D oriented, i.e. it is displayed AS IS in the structure and in some views may not be clearly recognisable.

Basic Reference Guide

108

in screen plane: one section is drawn about in the middle of each 1D member. The section is transformed into the screen plane so that it is clearly recognisable in all view of the structure.

longitudinal XZ: a short part of XZ projection of the 1D member surface is drawn. In other views than side view, the section may be hardly recognisable.

longitudinal XY: a short part of XZ projection of the 1D member surface is drawn. In other views than plan view, the section may be hardly recognisable.

Tab Structure > Group Structural node

Display

The FE nodes of the structure can be displayed or hidden. Especially in very large models, it may be convenient to hide the nodes when a picture of the whole model is to be drawn.

Mark style

Specifies the style )shape) of the node mark.

Mark size

Specifies the size of the node mark.

Tab Structure > Group Member parameters

Buckling lengths

Buckling lengths (in all directions) for individual 1D members are displayed.

Member non-linearities

If a non-linearity is assigned to a member, a symbol is displayed indicating the type of the assigned non-linearity.

FEM Type

Various FEM types can be assigned to individual members (tension only, normal 1D member) and a description indicating the selected type is displayed if this option is ON.

Tab Structure > Group Mesh

Draw mesh

The generated mesh is displayed (the mesh can be displayed only if it has been already generated).

Draw refinement

The FE mesh can be refined in manually defined area and the defined refinements are displayed if this option is ON

Note: The finite element mesh can ONLY be displayed if at one calculation has been already performed and its results are still available.

Tab Structure > Group Local axes

Nodes

Axes of local coordinate systems of individual nodes are displayed.

Members 1D

Axes of local coordinate systems of individual 1D members are displayed.

Members 2D

Axes of local coordinate systems of individual plate and shell members are displayed.

Tab Structure > Group Sections

Members 1D

Sections (i.e. sections for the evaluation of results) on 1D members are displayed.

Members 2D

Sections (i.e. sections for the evaluation of results) through plate/shell members are displayed.

Basic working tools

109

Tab Structure > Group Calculation info

Display singularity

If a calculation fails, the problematic place is shown.

Tab Labels

Tab Labels > Group Beam labels

Display label

It controls the group as a whole - if ON, the selected labels are displayed, if OFF, no labels of the group are shown.

Name, Cross-section name, Cross-section type, Length, Layer, Type and priority

Individual labels correspond to individual items in the property table of a member.

Tab Labels > Group Node labels

The meaning is more or less self-explanatory.

Tab Labels > Group Slab labels

The meaning of most of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.

Edges

Each edge of a slab has a unique number (unique within the single slab) and these edge numbers are displayed if this option is ON.

Tab Labels > Group Mesh

Display label

see above

Nodes

FE-node numbers

Elements 1D

Numbers of 1D finite elements.

Elements 2D

Numbers of 2D finite elements.

Note: The finite element mesh can ONLY be displayed if the calculation has been already performed and its results are still available or if the mesh has been generated by means of function Calculation > Generate mesh.

Tab Labels > Group Buckling lengths

Display label, Name

The meaning is more or less self-explanatory

Label

Description of the buckling length including the dimension.

Tab Labels > Group Sections

Display label, Name

The meaning is more or less self-explanatory.

Tab Labels > Group Non-linearities

Display label

Basic Reference Guide

110

The label of the defined type of non-linearity.

Tab Model

Tab Model > Group Service

Display on opening the service

If ON, entities appropriate for the service are automatically displayed as soon as the service is opened (in the tree menu). If OFF, no change of display takes place when a service is opened.

Tab Model > Group Supports

The meaning of most of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.

Tab Model > Group Other model data

The meaning of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.

Tab Model > Group Support labels

Displays the label of supports.

Tab Model > Group Labels of other model data

Displays the label of other model data such as hinges, cross-links, etc. This view parameter displays or hides the label for all the types of other model data at the same time. It is not possible to attach the label to e.g. one type of other model data only.

Tab Loads

Tab Loads > Group Service

Display on opening the service

If ON, entities appropriate for the service are automatically displayed as soon as the service is opened (in the tree menu). If OFF, no change of display takes place when a service is opened.

Tab Loads > Group Display loads

Display

If OFF, no load is displayed at all. This item controls the whole tab.

Load case

You can select here the load case to be displayed.

Plane load generator

Displays the loading polygon of the plane load generator.

Absences

Displays the absences.

Absence

You can select here the absence group to be displayed.

Tab Loads > Groups for individual type of load

The meaning of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.

Tab Loads > Groups Labels of loads

Display label

This item controls the display of load labels.

Name

If ON, the name of the load is attached to every loading impulse (force, moment, temperature load, etc.)

Basic working tools

111

Value

Shows the "input" value of the load.

See the note below.

Total value

Shows the "real" value of the load.

See the note below.

Note: Items Value and Total value are significant for loads that are not defined directly by its force or moment impulse, but that were defined by means of a wind generator, load generator, or as a predefined load. For such loads, Scia Engineer can display two different types of data. First, the input value (e.g. width load) can be shown, i.e. the value. Second, the calculated load per meter of length can be displayed (i.e. the total value).

Tab Loads > Groups Masses

Displays the masses.

Tab Loads > Groups Labels of loads

Display label

This item controls the display of mass labels.

Name

If ON, the name of the mass is attached to the mass symbol.

Value

Shows the size of the mass.

Tab View

Tab View > Groups Display tools

Disable tooltips

If ON, no tooltips in the graphical window are shown. I.e. no information concerning the entity under cursor is displayed. This option may reduce the response time in large projects. It also reduces the size of images in the Picture gallery.

Before this option takes effect, the screen must be regenerated.

Disable layers

If ON, no information on layers is stored in the data for the graphical window. This option may reduce the response time in large projects. It also reduces the size of images in the Picture gallery.

However, if this option is ON, it is not possible to e.g. make export of the drawing into DXF file including layers – only one "universal" layer is exported.

Before this option takes effect, the screen must be regenerated.

On the other hand, this option does not prevent you from using e.g. activity by layers. This feature is fully working regardless of this parameter.

View vector X, Y, Z

Enables the user to numerically adjust the view direction.

Clipping box

Switches the Clipping box ON/OFF.

Tab Miscellaneous

Tab Miscellaneous > Group Results diagram

Results

Displays the result diagrams on members.

Basic Reference Guide

112

Tab Miscellaneous > Group Construction stages

Display

Displays data relating to construction stages.

It controls the group as a whole - if ON, the selected labels are displayed, if OFF, no labels of the group are shown.

Already installed

Already installed members are displayed.

Currently installed

Currently installed members are displayed.

Not yet available

Members that are not yet available are displayed.

Already removed

Members that have been already removed are displayed.

Tab Miscellaneous > Group Construction stages data labels

Label local beam history

Attaches labels to the local 1D member history.

Tab Miscellaneous > Group Connection force

Display

Displays the forces in connections (in joints of several 1D members)

Tab Miscellaneous > Group Connection force labels

Display label

Displays the labels of connection forces.

It controls the group as a whole - if ON, the selected labels are displayed, if OFF, no labels of the group are shown.

Name

The name is attached to connection forces.

Adjusting the view parameters In general there are three ways to adjust the view parameters:

in the Setup dialogue,

using the fast-access group-commands,

using the fast-access window-buttons for certain types of entities.

Adjusting the view parameters using the Setup dialogue

The Setup dialogue provides for the adjustment of all available view parameter. In addition to the parameters themselves, the dialogue contains also other controls. They are grouped at the bottom of the dialogue.

Check / uncheck group If the cursor is placed on the name of a group of view parameters (in any of the tabs), it is possible to use this check box to select or deselect the whole group.

Basic working tools

113

Lock position You can move the dialogue to any position on your screen and check this option. When you closed the dialogue and open it again, it is not displayed in the centre of the screen (which is the default position), but in the place you "locked" it.

Check / uncheck all This check box can be used to select or deselect all the view parameters on the active tab.

The procedure to open the Setup dialogue

The Setup dialogue can be opened using:

the button Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model (or if required Fast adjustment of viewflags on selection) on the button-bar of the graphical window and selecting command Setup dialogue,

the pop-up menu (opened by a click of the right mouse button on the area of the graphical window) and selecting the function Set view parameters for all (or if required Set view parameters for selected).

Adjusting the view parameters using the fast-access group-commands

For selected groups of entities (the groups in terms of the overview of available parameters) fast-access group-commands are available in the menu opened through the button Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model (or if required Fast adjustment of viewflags on selection) on the button-bar of the graphical window.

Most groups from the Setup dialogue can be quickly controlled (switched ON/OFF) through these commands. Each command in the menu can be used to display or hide the entities (labels) covered by the corresponding group. The commands work like a toggle menu item: one click on them selects the group, next click deselects the group, etc.

Detailed "toggling"

The fast-access group-commands can work in two modes. The required mode can be set in the menu that opens when you click on the button Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model (or Fast adjustment of viewflags on selection) on the button-bar of the graphical window.

Default

(i.e. Detailed Off)

In this mode, whenever you turn the corresponding group OFF, the whole group becomes hidden.

Whenever you toggle the group ON, the whole group is displayed.

Detailed

(i.e. Detailed On)

In this mode, whenever you turn the corresponding group OFF, the whole group becomes hidden (so far it is the same as in the pervious mode).

But, whenever you toggle the group ON, the only those entities are displayed that are "ticked" (selected) in the Setup dialogue.

See the example below.

Note: The Detailed mode is not available until you at least once open the Setup dialogue for View parameters, make your settings there and confirm them with [OK] button.

Example

Let us take group Other model data. It can offer the following entities:

hinges on 1D members,

hinges on slabs,

cross-link,

rigid arm,

relative node,

internal node,

internal edge.

Let us suppose that you use Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model.

First, let us talk about the Default mode. If you toggle the group OFF, all the above listed entities become invisible. If you then toggle the group ON, all the above listed entities are displayed on the screen.

Now, let us move to the Detailed mode. Let us suppose that in the Setup dialogue, the following settings were made when the dialogue was edited last time:

hinges on beams

hinges on slabs

cross-link

Basic Reference Guide

114

rigid arm

relative node

internal node

internal edge

If you toggle the group OFF, all the above listed entities become invisible. There is no difference in hiding the group. However, when you toggle the group ON, only the selected entities are shown on the screen (i.e. hinges on 1D members, cross-link, rigid arm, relative node) while the entities that are not marked in the Setup dialogue remain hidden (i.e. hinges on slabs, internal node, internal edge).

This mode is intended for such a style or phase of work when you need to check your model repeatedly and you want to see and hide in turns some part of your model.

Adjusting the view parameters using fast-access window-buttons for certain types of entities.

The button bar of the graphical window offers a set of buttons for fast displaying or hiding of certain types of entities or their labels.

Show / hide surfaces Displays / hides the surface outline of members (1D members, slabs, shells).

Render geometry Switches ON/OFF rendering of members.

Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model

Offers a menu with fast-access group-commands (see above) or opens the Setup dialogue (see above).The adjustment is valid for all entities in the model.

Fast adjustment of viewflags on selection

Offers a menu with fast-access group-commands (see above) or opens the Setup dialogue (see above). The adjustment is valid for currently selected entities.

Show / hide label of nodes Displays / hides numbers of nodes. It effects the whole model.

Show / hide label of members

Displays / hides numbers of members (1D members, slabs, shells). It effects the whole model.

Show/hide dot grid Displays / hides the dot grid.

Select load case for display

Selects the load case that will be displayed if the view parameter for load is switched on.

Note: Please note that some view parameters always relate to the whole structure. For example, it is not possible to display reinforcement in selected 1D members only, it is either shown in the whole structure, or hidden everywhere. In order to see e.g. the mentioned reinforcement in selected 1D members only, function Activity must be used to hide (or display in grey colour) the "unwanted" members. Note: Not all view parameters are always offered in the Setup dialogue or in the menu with fast-access group-commands. The Setup dialogue and the menu with fast-access group-commands offer only those parameters for which the appropriate entity type has been already defined. E.g. until you define at least one support in your model, view parameters for supports are not shown.

Predefined view parameters settings Full and complete setting of all the view parameters may be awkward and tiresome task. Especially if the user needs to repeatedly swap between two types of display.

Consequently, Scia Engineer offers several sets of predefined settings. The predefined sets should cover most of commonly needed cases. The predefined sets can be found in menu View > Set view parameters and they are:

Model of structure

This variant displays the structure itself as is. Any supports, loads, etc. are not shown to provide for clear view of the structure.

Analysis model

This option displays the model with the focus laid on the numerical calculation. Therefore, only axes of individual 1D members are displayed and they are accompanied with supports, loads, local co-ordinate systems and other data that are important from the calculation point of view.

Structural model

This variant shows the structural model of the structure.

Other predefined views may be found in the main View menu.

Basic working tools

115

Wired

This option displays the wired representation of the model.

Surfaces of members are switched on.

Rendered

This option switches on the rendering of entities. Surfaces of members are switched on.

Transparent

This option displays members using transparent rendering. Surfaces of members are switched on.

Note: The number and types of predefined views may vary depending on the "skin" and mode you select for Scia Engineer. For example, the Graphical User Interface of the full Scia Engineer may look different from 3D Free Form Modeller or ESA Modeller (the last two are accessible, for example, when you call Scia Engineer from inside Allplan application).

Drawing of input data with eccentricity

Terminology

system line

The line inputted by the user, it has nodes at its ends.

eccentricity of beam

The offset of a 1D member defined in the local coordinates of the 1D member. We have the eccentricity in y- and z-direction.

reference line

The reference line of a 1D member if obtained when the eccentricity is added to the system line. The reference line corresponds to the centroidal axis of the 1D member.

eccentricity of loads

The offset of the load (or we may say add-data in general) related to the reference line.

Current status Recent versions of Scia Engineer drew loads relatively to the system line of the corresponding 1D member. Consequently, users could not check their real position on the 1D members, which could result in the wrong interpretation of input data and also results as we have to realise that results are related to the reference line and not to the system lines. A related topic is the drawing of surfaces (and reference lines) of 1D members with regard to Construction Stages (CS). Cross-sections could change their shapes over time (in general the shape may differ for every CS). This influences the position of the reference lines of 1D members in individual CS and, of course, it also influences the drawing of loads and results on 1D members.

Drawing of input data with the eccentricity taken into account

Loads

So far, the load was displayed on the system line of the 1D member. This was a correct solution only if the load was defined without any eccentricity and if the reference line (centroidal line) of the 1D member coincided with the system line (i.e. in the case of a straight 1D member the line connecting the end nodes of the 1D member). However, as soon as any eccentricity was introduced either to the 1D member or to the load, this display style became misleading.

The new solution is based on the principle that all the loads (and other displayed quantities such as hinges, and even results) are always displayed in their real position.

A few examples dealing with input data follows.

A 1D member with a one-side haunch subjected to a distributed load.

As you can see, the load follows the reference line (centroidal axis) of the 1D member.

A 1D member with a one-side haunch subjected to an eccentric distributed load.

Basic Reference Guide

116

Here, the load acts on eccentricity defined in the z-direction. In the next picture, also the eccentricity in y-direction was introduced to the load.

When required, also a line showing the defined eccentricity of the load can be drawn. Thus, you can more easily see what the real action of the load is. In addition, in the case of several eccentrically loaded 1D members located close to each other, it will be unambiguous which load belongs to which 1D member.

The procedure to display the "eccentricity lines"

1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.

2. Select Tab Loads/Masses.

3. Tick option Display eccentricity.

4. Confirm with [OK].

Basic working tools

117

In addition to the "eccentricity lines", you can also display the magnitude of the specified eccentricity.

The procedure to display the eccentricity label

1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.

2. Select Tab Loads/Masses.

3. Tick option Labels of loads > Display label and Labels of loads > Eccentricity label.

4. Confirm with [OK].

Basic Reference Guide

118

Note: Loads are always drawn at their real location. View parameter Miscellaneous > Drawing style for Model+Loads > Show add data, results at has no effect on the loads.

Supports

Let us have two beams supported at the end. One of the beams is defined with the system-line in the centre line of the beam. The second beam has the system line at the bottom surface.

The support is displayed where its real location in the calculation model is: (i) in the first case at the centre line of the beam, (ii) in the second case at the bottom edge of the beam.

Note: Supports are allways drawn at the system line of the beam. View parameter Miscellaneous > Drawing style for Model+Loads > Show add data, results at has no effect on the supports.

Hinges

Hinges, which also belong to additional data of the Scia Engineer model, can also take into account possible eccentricity of the 1D member at which they are defined.

Unlike loads and supports however, hinges allow the user to decide on the drawing style.

The procedure to select the display mode

Basic working tools

119

1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.

2. Select Tab Misc..

3. Set the option Drawing style for Model+Loads > Show add data, results at to:

a. Reference line in order to see the real position of the hinge (the hinge is put on a short rigid arm that is not drawn in the screen).

b. System line in order to see the schematic position of the hinge.

4. Confirm with [OK].

Results

Note: Results are always drawn in the system line. (Despite the specification, it was not done in this version.)

Structural model

Note: The display of eccentric entities relates exclusively to the analysis model. It has no relation to the structural shape.

Lights If rendering is switched on in View parameters, you may control the direction of the light used to illuminate the graphical screen.

The following examples give the idea of what the effect of the light direction is.

The dialogue for the adjustment of the light direction can be opened through menu function: View > Light. When the dialogue is opened, the light direction can be adjusted by a single click on the picture of the ball in the dialogue. The effect is immediately shown in the graphical window, so it is quite easy to find the required light direction. When the light is adjusted appropriately, close the dialogue.

Basic Reference Guide

120

Regeneration of view

Introduction to regeneration of view It is a common phenomenon in CAD and similar "drawing" programs that once the drawing becomes excessive or is being edited and modified, the "current state" displayed on the screen may happen not to reflect completely the "reality". This is due to the fact that it is not possible to guarantee a flawless automatic regeneration of the view. If the automatic regeneration of the view had to be ensured, it would result in unbearably slow response of the program.

Therefore, Scia Engineer, similarly to other graphically oriented program, offers the user the possibility to regenerate the view manually at any time when necessary.

Redrawing the active graphical window This function redraws the graphical window if some changes affecting the display were made and the window has not been regenerated automatically.

The procedure to regenerate the contents of the graphical window

1. Press button [Redraw] ( ) on toolbar View.

2. The contents of the active window is regenerated and redrawn.

Calculator

Calculator Any time you enter a number into an edit box or command line, you may use the internal calculator. This calculator provides for basic operations: addition, multiplication, subtraction and division. You may use brackets, basic goniometric functions (tan, sin, cos) and it is possible to calculate powers of numbers. The calculator takes account of priorities of operators.

If you want to use the calculator to calculate the value in the input box, you must start with the equals sign (=).

As soon as you type the first character, a temporary field - "bubble" - appears just below the input box. This new field calculates the result of the input formula. If the field shows "error" than the syntax of the formula is invalid.

Valid operators and functions

= obligatory, this character must start the formula

+ addition; e.g. 1+2

- subtraction; e.g. 2-1

* multiplication; e.g. 1*1

/ division; e.g. 2/1

^ power;; e.g. 2^3

() brackets; e.g. 2*(3+3)

e exponential notation, useful for large numbers; e.g. 1e5

sin() sinus; e.g. sin(45)

cos() cosine; e.g. cos(30)

tg() tangent; e.g. tg(45)

The calculator may be used also in the situation when set of numbers is to be input, e.g. when point coordinates are defined. In such a case any of the coordinates can be input as formula, and any of the coordinates can be input as number.

Example 1

The input of point

1;=2*(3+2);sin(45)*5

is "decoded" as:

X = 1

Y = 2*(3+2) = 10

Z = sin(45)*5 = 3,5355339 Example 2

Basic working tools

121

Cleaner

Removing unnecessary data from the project When you work for some time on a project, it may happen that some data you input at the beginning are not relevant any more. For example, you may be force to change the material grades, you decide on replacing certain types of cross-sections, you may opt for another type of reinforcement, the load the structure is subjected to may have been altered, etc.

In order to keep the project (especially a large one) "free of ballast", it is convenient to remove all the entities that are no longer necessary.

Sometimes, it may happen that you must completely abandon the solution you chosen and you must start from scratch – sometimes not exactly, but almost.

For all these situations, you may use tool called Cleaner. It is a simple tool that enables you to select which particular data should be removed from your project.

There are several groups defined within the Cleaner dialogue with each of them containing usually several items. The number and type of the items depends on the data that were defined in the project. The Cleaner dialogue offers only the data that really exist in the project.

Below, you will find an example of the groups and individual items in them (the complete list would be too long and it would contain all possible entities that can be defined in Scia Engineer).

General This group allows you to delete e.g. results, temporary solver data, mesh, etc.

Document Here you can clear the document.

Model This group allows you to remove e.g. supports, hinges, etc.

Loads It is possible to remove all the applied loads or just the selected types of loads.

Sets Defined sets such as load cases, combinations, bore holes, stressing beds, etc. can be deleted here.

Unused library entities

The unused items in specified libraries can be removed from the project to make the project file more compact.

Coordinate information

Information about coordinates of selected points Function Coordinates info enables the user to review the coordinates of selected points in the model and to measure the distance between two defined points.

The function is easy to use. Once it is started, the user just selects (clicks) the required points (nodes) in the model and a simple dialogue shows the information:

coordinates of the selected point in the global coordinate system,

vector (in the global coordinate system) from the previous point to the last point,

coordinates of the selected point in the current user coordinate system,

vector (in the current user coordinate system) from the previous point to the last point,

distance between last two selected points,

angle defined by the last three selected points.

Basic Reference Guide

122

The procedure to obtain the information about coordinates

1. Start function Coordinates info:

a. either through menu function: Tools > Coordinates info,

b. or through tree menu function: Tools > Coordinates info,

c. or through icon on toolbar Tools.

2. The information dialogue is opened on the screen.

3. If necessary, position the dialogue so that it does not it does not hinder you.

4. Select (click) the points you are interested in.

5. When ready, use the close button in the top right corner to close the information dialogue.

123

Materials

Introduction to materials Material is one of the principal parameters that affect the behaviour of the structure.

In Scia Engineer, the user can define his/her own material or use a pre-defined material type from Scia Engineer database. The predefined materials correspond to materials defined in particular technical codes. The properties of predefined materials thus depend on the active code adjusted in the current project.

Material types In Scia Engineer the user may select from the following material types:

steel represents material based on a particular national code for materials

concrete represents material based on a particular national code for materials

timber represents material based on a particular national code for materials

general enables the user to define an arbitrary material that is completely independent on codes assigned to the project

Note: Even the properties of a code-based material may be edited.

Material properties For each material, the user must specify its properties. It is clear that for material types corresponding with material grades of a particular technical code the properties are predefined.

The properties may be divided into two groups:

basic material properties,

advanced material properties.

Basic material properties

The basic properties are those that are necessary for the standard finite element calculation of the model. Without them, no analysis is possible.

The basic parameters are:

unit mass,

modulus of elasticity,

Poisson’s coefficient.

Advanced material properties

The advanced parameters may be required for:

either an advanced type of calculation (e.g. non-linear analysis, dynamic calculation, etc.),

or checking to a particular technical code.

Examples of advanced parameters may be:

independent G modulus,

logarithmic decrement,

nominal or design strength,

ultimate strength,

etc.

There are also special material parameters that do not affect the calculation and results, but that may help the user to make the model clearer. This is e.g. colour. The colour may be used when 1D members are displayed on the screen. Thus, all the 1D members made of the same material will be drawn in the same colour. The display style can be set in View parameters.

Note: The units for the individual material parameters may be set in Units setup.

Materials manager The Materials manager is a tool that provides for control of material defined in the project. The Materials manager provides for creating, editing, deleting, and saving of materials.

The manager itself uses the same "manager philosophy" as other Scia Engineer managers do. It contains control buttons for the standard manager operations:

Basic Reference Guide

124

[New] It creates a new material.

[Edit] It opens an editing dialogue where the material’s properties may be changed.

[Copy] This function creates a copy of the selected material.

[Change] It enables the user to replace an existing material with a new one. All the members in the project that ware made of the original material are now made of the new one.

[Delete] It removes the selected material from the project database. It is not possible to delete material that is used anywhere in the structure.

[Undo] / [Redo] It performs an Undo or Redo operation.

[Text Output] It opens a small document window with a table that summarises properties of selected materials.

[Read from system database] It reads predefined materials from system database.

[Read from user database] It reads material types that the user has saved into his/her external database.

[Save to user database] It saves selected material types into the user’s external database.

In order to open the Materials manager use:

either menu function Tools > Materials,

or tree menu function Tools > Materials,

or button Materials ( ) on toolbar Project.

Note: The Materials manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain item Material. Such an item contains a button to open the Materials manager.

Specifying the materials for the project When a new project is being created, the user has to specify basic project parameters. Material is one of the compulsory parameters. It is not necessary to specify all the materials that will be used. However, at least one material type must be selected (e.g. steel).

Materials

125

The program adds into the project all material grades defined for the selected material type in the active code of the project. The active code can be also defined in the project setup dialogue.

It is possible to add some material type in the same way any time later (i.e. not only during the phase of project creation). The user may use tree menu function Project to open the Project settings dialogue. Here it is possible to add ticks to any other material types that have not been selected at the beginning. Once again, the program adds into the project all materials that are specified in the active national code for the selected material type.

Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings dialogue, the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.

Defining a new code-specific material All the code specific materials (that means material grades for particular material types specified by a particular national technical code) are stored in the material system database.

The procedure for the definition of a new code-specific material

1. Open the Materials manager.

2. Click button [System database] ( ).

3. A dialogue with available materials appears on the screen. Its left hand side window shows that materials defined in the project. The right hand side window lists all available code-specific materials.

4. Add as many materials into the project as required.

5. Close the System database dialogue.

6. Close the Materials manager.

Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings dialogue, the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.

Defining a new user-defined code-specific material The user may need to define a material (related to a specific code) that does not coincide with any standard grade specified in technical codes.

The procedure for the definition of a new user-defined code-specific material

1. Open the Materials manager.

2. Click button [New] ( ).

3. Select the required material type.

4. A new material is added to the List of defined materials in the Materials manager.

5. Click button [Edit] ( ).

6. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.

7. Type required parameters.

8. Confirm with [OK] button.

9. Repeat steps 2 to 9 as many times as required.

10. Close the Materials manager.

Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings dialogue, the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.

Basic Reference Guide

126

Defining a new general material The user may need to define any non-standard material that will be used for calculations. It won’t be possible to use such material for code checks, but it may be used for other calculations.

The procedure for the definition of a new general material

1. Open the Materials manager.

2. Click button [New] ( ).

3. Select the material type General.

4. A new material is added to the list of defined materials in the Materials manager.

5. Click button [Edit] ( ).

6. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.

7. Type required parameters.

8. Confirm with [OK] button.

9. Repeat steps 2 to 9 as many times as required.

10. Close the Materials manager.

Note: Unless the material type General is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add such material into the project.

Editing the defined material The user may need to edit the properties of a particular material. It can be done in the Materials manager.

The procedure to edit the materials properties

1. Open the Materials manager.

2. Select the material that should be edited.

3. Click button [Edit] ( ).

4. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.

5. Type required parameters.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.

8. Close the Materials manager.

Copying the defined material If necessary, it is possible to create a copy of any of the already defined materials. This copy may be later edited.

The procedure for the copying of a particular material

1. Open the Materials manager.

2. Select the material that should be copied.

3. Click button [Copy] ( ).

4. A copy of the selected material is added to the List of defined materials in the Materials manager.

5. Click button [Edit] ( ).

6. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.

7. Type required parameters.

8. Confirm with [OK] button.

9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 as many times as required.

10. Close the Materials manager.

Changing the defined material Sometimes, the need may arise to replace a particular material with another one. E.g. to increase the grade of material used for some structural members. The user must select the original material, specify the substituting material, and the program applies the change to all affected members.

The procedure for the change of a particular material

1. Open the Materials manager.

Materials

127

2. Select the material to be changed.

3. Click button [Change] ( ).

4. Select the type of the substituting material.

5. The material is replaced.

6. If required, click button [Edit] ( ).

7. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.

8. Type required parameters.

9. Confirm with [OK] button.

10. Repeat steps 2 to 10 as many times as required.

11. Close the Materials manager.

Deleting the defined material Any material that is no longer necessary may be deleted from the project.

The procedure for the deletion of a particular material

1. Open the Materials manager.

2. Select the material to be deleted.

3. Click button [Delete] ( ).

4. Confirm the action.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.

6. Close the Materials manager.

Reviewing the defined material parameters There are a few ways to see and scrutinise the parameters of a particular material.

Property table in the Materials manager

The Materials manager contains a vertically oriented window that displays the parameters of currently selected material in a property table.

Property table in the dialogue for editing of a material

Each dialogue for editing of a material contains a property table with all the available parameters of the edited material.

Document-style view in the preview window

This is the most sophisticated kind of display for parameters of a material.

Property table in the Materials manager

The property table in the Materials manager provides for quick overview of parameters of individual materials. It is possible to edit some of the parameters.

Property table in the dialogue for editing of a particular material type

The property table in this dialogue provides for both lucid overview of the material parameters and their straightforward modification.

Basic Reference Guide

128

Document-style view in the preview window

The material parameters can be displayed in tabular form in the Preview window. The preview window displays a table with all the material parameters sorted in it.

The table is in fact a standard Scia Engineer document table and consequently its format can be adjusted to meet any specific requirements. The adjustment can be done the same way as with any other document table.

The picture below shows a sample preview of material properties for three selected materials.

129

Cross-sections

Introduction to cross-sections A cross-section together with material is a basic property of a 1D member. In practice, one can meet a wide range of various cross-section types, shapes, and sizes. Scia Engineer provides powerful tolls for easy definition of almost any cross-section type.

A cross-section in Scia Engineer is defined not only by dimensions and shape, but also by the material or materials used. This means that if you want to use in your project the exactly same shape of a cross-section for two different 1D members and each of the two 1D members is made of a different material, let’s say of wood and concrete, you have to define two different cross-sections: one of wood and the other of concrete.

To minimize the effort the user has to invest in order to define a cross-section, the program offers selection from a plentiful library of:

industrially produced steel profiles (e.g. I-beams, channels, angles, tubular profiles, etc.),

common geometric shapes,

often used shapes for thin-walled cross-sections,

common shapes of concrete profiles,

commonly used welded steel sections (both open and box) made of steel flats,

often applied two material built-up sections,

possible combinations of two or more steel cross-sections welded together,

variants of rolled cross-section pairs,

standard bridge sections,

solutions for haunch application,

common timber profiles.

In addition, the program allows the user to define an arbitrary cross-section regarding shape, size, number of parts, number of materials used for individual parts, etc. If required in some special cases, a cross-section may be defined not via its shape and size, but only by means of explicitly typed sectional characteristics as the characteristics are what is essential for the calculation.

Sectional characteristics and other properties

Overview of sectional characteristics and parameters The calculation method (applied in the calculation module of Scia Engineer) requires some characteristics of cross-sections to be determined beforehand and supplied in the form of input data. In addition, some other sectional characteristics are required for the design and check of cross-sections according to appropriate national technical standards.

Scia Engineer calculates all the required sectional characteristics and offers them both (i) to the calculation module in the form of internally supplied data, and (ii) to the user in the form of editable tables.

In addition to sectional characteristics, a cross-section in Scia Engineer has some additional parameters such as name, material, type description, colour, etc. All of these parameters are available to the user for inserting, editing, reviewing, and printing.

Generally, the parameters may be divided into three groups:

basic sectional characteristics Sectional characteristics that are common to all cross-section types, i.e. sectional area, moment of inertia, section modulus, radius of gyration, position of centroid, position of shear centre, etc.

sectional characteristics specific for particular cross-section type

Some sectional characteristics that are specific for a particular cross-section type and are undefined or unused for other types; for example, stiffeners for concrete or bridge sections, etc.

general parameters Mainly non-numerical parameters such as material, name, colour, etc.

Each of the groups is dealt with in a separate chapter.

Sectional characteristics The user normally defines a cross-section by means of its type and dimensions. Scia Engineer calculates automatically the required sectional characteristics.

The basic automatically calculated sectional characteristics are:

Basic Reference Guide

130

A Surface

Ay/A, Az/A Effective surface for shear in y and z direction respectively (ESA-Prima Win considers shear force deformation).

AL Painting surface of the cross-section defined per one metre of length.

Iy, Iz Moment of inertia for bending around the principal y and z axis respectively

IyLCS, IzLCS Moment of inertia for bending around the yLCS and zLCS axis respectively. The yLCS, zLCS axes are parallel to the axes of the input axis system, and go through the centre of gravity. The input axis system is visible on the picture of the cross-section.

Alpha Angle between the x axis of the input axis system and the principal x axis.

It Torsion moment of inertia.

Iw Warping constant.

Wely, Welz Elastic section modulus for bending around the y and z axis respectively

Wply, Wplz Plastic section modulus for bending around the y and z axis respectively

cyLCS, czLCS Coordinates of the centre of gravity in the input axis system.

dy, dz Coordinates of the shear centre relative to the centre of gravity

Points points where the stresses are calculated

y, z Coordinates of a point in the input axis system.

Shear y, Shear z Shear stress in this point for a unit shear force in y and z direction respectively.

The sectional characteristics are calculated automatically on closing of the dialogue for the editing of a cross-section. In addition, the automatic calculation may be carried out at any time during the editing phase via button [Update] of the above-mentioned dialogue.

In addition to the common sectional characteristics, there are some other parameters that are common to all cross-section types, such as name, type description, colour, etc.

Note: Each cross-section has two co-ordinate systems which are displayed in the picture of the cross-section : (i) the input co-ordinate system - the co-ordinates of the points where stresses are calculated, co-ordinates of the centre of gravity and the shear centre are given in this axis system; (ii) the principal co-ordinates in the centre of gravity.

Calculation of sectional characteristics

Basic sectional characteristics

The following sectional characteristics are calculated for all cross-section types using the standard formulas known from basic mechanics:

Surface A

Moments of inertia Iy, Iz

Moments of inertia IyLCS, IzLCS

Angle Alpha

Elastic section moduli Wely, Welz

Plastic section moduli Wply, Wplz

Coordinates of the centroid cyLCS, czLCS

Radii of gyration iy, iz.

For the calculation of the following characteristics three different types of calculation are implemented.

shear surfaces Ay and Az

torsion moment of inertia It

warping constant Iw

shear centre dy, dz,

shear stresses.

Each method is described in a separate paragraph. The last paragraph describes the calculation method for built-up sections.

Cross-section characteristics – thin-walled cross-sections

Cross-sections

131

Thin-walled sections are cross-sections:

which contain only thin-walled elements and rolled elements

which contain maximally one hole

All standard and built-up steel sections in Scia Engineer are of this type.

torsional moment of inertia, It

for open thin-walled cross-sections, it is calculated using the following formula :

i.e. the sum over the rectangular parts of the thin-walled cross-section where:

d = width of each rectangular part,

t = thickness of each rectangular part.

For closed thin-walled cross-sections, it is calculated using the following formula (2nd formula of Bredt) :

where:

Am = surface inside the centreline of the thin-walled section

the sum is over the rectangular parts of the thin-walled section

d = width of each rectangular part

t = thickness of each rectangular part

Note: For more explanation on these formulas we refer to "Stahl im Hochbau, 14. Auflage, Band I/Teil 2, Verein Deutscher Eisenhüttenleute, Düsseldorf, par. 7.4.3.2.2.".

warping constant, Iw

Warping constant, Iw, is calculated by numerical integration over a cross-section coordinate along the centre line for those thin-walled open cross-sections, for which it is - according to the theory - different from zero

Cross-section characteristics – Geometric shapes, timber sections, concrete sections

The following formulas are used :

effective surfaces for shear are taken equal to the total surface Ay = Az = A)

torsional moment of inertia It : is calculated as the polar moment, It = Iy + Iz, except for rectangular sections (see the remark at the end of this topic)

warping constant Iw is equal to 0

shear centre : dy, dz are equal to 0

It for rectangular cross-sections

For the calculation of It for rectangular cross-sections, an empirical formula based on the height-to-width ratio of the section is used:

where:

b = width of the cross-section

h = height of the cross-section

gamma = coefficient depending on the height to width ratio according to the following table :

h/b gamma

1 0.1406

1.2 0.1661

1.5 0.1958

2 0.2287

Basic Reference Guide

132

3 0.2633

5 0.2914

10 0.3123

infinity 0.3333

Note: For more information about this method see e.g. "Stahl im Hochbau, 14. Auflage, Band I/Teil 2, Verein Deutscher Eisenhüttenleute, Düsseldorf, Table 7.85.".

Cross-section characteristics – built-up cross-sections

The following rules are valid for built-up cross-sections.

Cross-sectional area, A

The cross-sectional area, A, is calculated by summing up the sectional areas of individual cross-sections,

Moments of inertia Iy and Iz

The moments of inertia Iy and Iz are calculated with the parallel axis theorem; the partial profiles of the cross-section are assumed to be perfectly connected to each other even for very large profile inter-centre distances.

This assumption may lead, particularly with large profile spacing, to discrepancies between the program theory and real structure elements. When assembling an equation system, the difference between the calculated and actual stiffness is not taken into consideration. Therefore, a variance in internal force distribution in statically indeterminate structures may occur.

Torsional moment of inertia, It

The torsional moment of inertia, It, is taken to be a simple sum of torsional stiffness values for the individual cross-section parts.

Warping constant, Iw

The warping constant, Iw, is taken as the sum of warping constants of the individual cross-section parts.

Other cross-section parameters In addition to sectional characteristics, a cross-section in Scia Engineer has some additional parameters such as name, type description, colour, etc.

The common parameters in Scia Engineer (except the common sectional characteristics) are:

Name A name of a cross-section. The name must be unique within one project. If an attempt to insert a name that already exists in the project, the typed name is not accepted and is automatically changed to a project-unique name.

Type This parameter describes briefly the cross-section type so that the user can easily and quickly see what type the particular cross-section is.

Detailed (description) Some cross-sections (e.g. welded ones) use this item to specify the cross-section type, shape and possibly dimensions in more detail.

Material This item defines the material the cross-section is made of.

Draw colour

Colour This item defines the colour that is used in Scia Engineer to draw the cross-section in the cross-section manager.

Properties editable If this option is not selected then it is not possible to edit individual calculated sectional characteristics.

If the option is ON, some of the sectional characteristics may be manually edited in order to define the cross-section whose characteristics exactly correspond to particular conditions.

The properties that can be edited are: Ay, Az, It, Iw

Buckling y-y, z-z These two parameters determine the buckling curve types used for buckling calculations.

Fabrication This item specifies the way the cross-section is produced.

FEM analysis If ON, the sectional characteristics are calculated using finite element method.

See separate chapter Sectional characteristics calculated by FEM.

If the FEM analysis is selected, the user can specify additional parameters:

Mesh size

Cross-sections

133

This parameter specifies the size of the finite elements used for the calculation.

IMPORTANT: Please, read chapter Sectional characteristics calculated by FEM for important notes relating to the mesh size.

Min. point distance

Specifies the minimum distance of two FEM nodes.

In order to see the calculated sectional characteristics, click button Update.

Use reduction factor The user can specify reduction factors for selected properties. The property is then multiplied by this reduction factor. For example, reduction factor k a of 0,2 will lead to sectional area of 20% instead of the full area.

This reduced property is used both in checks, and in the calculation!

The self weight is thus calculated with the full section while the check is executed with the reduced section. This is typically used in practice for clients who, for example, did some laboratory tests on sections. In such tests they derive a reduction factor for the surface to account for buckling effects. The full section is there in reality so they want the full section for the self weight, however the check has to be performed with the reduced area since buckling is accounted for in this reduction.

The following reduction coefficients are available:

k A (formerly k a)

k Ay (formerly k ay)

k Az (formerly k az)

k It (formerly k ix)

k Iy (formerly k iy)

k Iz (formerly k iz)

Edit named items It is possible to name selected fibres of the cross-section and use these names as reference in display of results, etc.

Edit joints It is possible to define joints and use them later.

Edit cuts It is possible to define sections (cuts) across the cross-section and use them later.

Special parameters for aluminium cross-sections

Reduced section For aluminium cross-sections a reduced shape can be defined. More information can be found in the Theoretical background manual and in code EN 1999-1-1:2007. If the option is selected, a new group of parameters named Reduced section appears in the dialogue.

Parameters in the Reduced section group

More information about use of a reduced cross-section can be found in the Theoretical background manual and in code EN 1999-1-1:2007.

Edit initial shape For a cross-section with material Aluminium, the Initial Shape can be defined. For a General cross-section the ‘Thin-walled representation’ has to be used to be able to define the Initial Shape.

Run analysis This action runs the analysis of the reduce d cross-section.

In addition to the numerical data available for a cross-section, the program offers also a drawing of the cross-section with marked vertex numbers. The numbers are important mainly if the user includes a cross-section characteristics table into a document where some of the values correspond to individual vertices. Therefore, it is essential to know the convention of vertex numbering. The vertex numbers are given on a separate tab of the graphical window in the editing dialogue.

During the input of a new of cross-section, the user may also specify Average yield strength.

Use If ON, the yield strength of the material is increased due to cold working. The term 'average yield strength' is used.

Basic Reference Guide

134

k The value k is a coefficient depending on the type of forming. Default value k = 7.0 is for cold rolling.

Note: This option is ONLY available if EC3 is selected as a national code, and (at the same time) the fabrication parameter of the cross-section is set to Cold formed.

Sectional characteristics calculated by FEM The sectional characteristics can be calculated through Finite Element Method. This is recommended and sometimes compulsory especially for complex shape cross-sections, composite cross-section, phased cross-sections, etc.

This calculation can be applied to Concrete sections, Timber sections, Polygon sections and Graphical cross-sections. If the FE analysis option in the Cross-section parameters dialog is not marked, these sections are calculated with the general method. If the option is marked, the finite element calculation is used.

Options of the Cross-section characteristics dialog

Draw group

Prandtl – F The Prandtl function is displayed on the cross-section

dF/dz The first derivative of the Prandtl function – torsional shear stress

dF/dy The first derivative of the Prandtl function – torsional shear stress

tau xz The translational force induced shear stress

tau xy The translational force induced shear stress

Torsion

Displays the calculated torsional stiffness of the cross-section.

Ay (z) /A groups: the calculated shear relaxation

With Tau xz(y) The calculated Ay/A value with transversal stress.

If the switch is on, this value will be used.

Without Tau xz(y) The calculated Ay/A value without transversal stress.

If the switch is on, this value will be used.

No calculation The cross-section shear relaxation is not taken into account and the shear area to cross-section area ratio equals one.

Calculation of the torsion moment of inertia and the torsion stress

This calculation is based on the theory of Prandtl. This method is applicable to general cross-sections. For background information we refer to "Handbook of engineering mechanics, W.Flügge, First edition, paragraph 36.3".

Calculation of the shear areas Ay and Az and the shear stresses

This calculation is based on the theory of Grasshof-Zuravski, which assumes that the cross-section is thick-walled and symmetrical.

If a cross-section is symmetrical about one axis only, the results related to the other axis will be technically incorrect and such results should no longer be taken into account for the calculation. The calculation is carried out for the transversal shear effect being both included and not included.

In practice, the theory is also sufficiently accurate for what is termed high cross-sections (in the bending and shear plane). The calculation leads to rather high errors in the case of low cross-sections. Thin-walled cross-sections are inadmissible.

If a cross-section is made of several materials (heterogeneous cross-section), the calculated shear areas Ay and Az can be used under the following conditions:

1. the heterogeneities are symmetrical

2. the heterogeneity does not disturb the Grasshof-Zuravski theory’s stress

Cross-sections

135

3. the heterogeneity is diffused

4. a local heterogeneity consists of less than 10% of the cross-section area

Calculation of shear areas using the Grasshof-Zuravski theory

Requirements concerning the shape of the cross-section:

• symmetrical around the z-axis, • solid cross-section without large openings, • if the height of the cross-section exceeds the width, the results are more satisfying,

Assumptions of the theory:

Shear stresses coming out one section intersect in a single point - point K.

Load is resisted by area .

The value of is calculated from shear stresses either

(1) using only the vertical components (neglecting the effect of ) or

(2) using both components and .

If the cross-section does not meet the Grasshof-Zuravski requirements, the values of calculated using the effect of the

horizontal component are completely incorrect and almost always non-realistic. In such a situation, these values should not be used at all!

The values of calculated using only the components (neglecting the effect of ) can be applicable and realistic depending on to what extent the requirements have not been met. In such a situation the engineer should decide whether the values are acceptable or not. All the requirements and assumptions must also be met for the calculation of the shear area in the y-direction.

Basic Reference Guide

136

Formulas used for the calculation of :

(neglecting the effect of ),

.

Mesh size

The size of the mesh for this calculation can be adjusted in the editing dialogue of the particular cross-section.

Important

The FE analysis of a cross-section is performed in two steps:

1. shear analysis for Ay, Az and tau_xy, tau_xz,

2. torsion analysis for It, F, dF/dy, dF/dz.

The size of the FE mesh for the shear analysis is given by the parameter adjusted in the dialogue.

However, as the torsion analysis is extremely time-consuming, it uses adapted mesh size with elements 3 times larger than for the shear analysis. This may lead to the result that even if the original mesh is symmetrical, the mesh for the torsion analysis may become non-symmetrical. Especially if the elements are quite large, this may distort the results (e.g. break their symmetry in case of a symmetrical cross-section).

The calculated results are displayed on the mesh defined in the dialogue and used for the shear analysis.

It is highly recommended to have at least 1000 finite elements for the shear analysis, which mean at least 300 finite elements for the torsion analysis.

The picture below shows an example of a very coarse mesh that gives completely unreliable and unusable results of the torsion analysis.

However, if the mesh is fine enough (here about 2000 elements not shown in the picture), the results are accurate – see below:

Cross-sections

137

Cross-section types

Geometric shapes Scia Engineer offers a predefined set of basic cross-section shapes.

The procedure for insertion of this cross-section type into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just has to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, choose the appropriate shape and size, and review or change the required parameters.

Similarly to other cross-section types, basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated and the user may type in the non-numerical parameters such as name, material, colour, etc.

Sample cross-sections

Note: A separate book Profile library: Checked sections contains an overview of rolled cross-sections included in Scia Engineer’s database.

Thin-walled cross-sections Scia Engineer offers a predefined set of common steel thin-walled cross-sections.

The procedure for insertion of this cross-section type into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such as:

shape of a wall stiffener,

diagram of warping lines,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,

centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.

Sample cross-sections

Basic Reference Guide

138

Steel rolled cross-sections Hot-rolled and cold-formed cross-sections made of steel are cross-sections manufactured in specialised factories. In Scia Engineer whenever the user wants to use a hot-rolled or cold-formed steel cross-section, s/he may select appropriate shape and size from the integrated library of industrially manufactured cross-sections. All sectional characteristics are automatically read into the program and the user is not forced to take care of anything related to the section and its parameters and characteristics.

The procedure for insertion of a rolled cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

By default, all the sectional characteristics of a rolled or formed cross-section are automatically imported into Scia Engineer the moment the user makes a selection of required shape and size in the integrated cross-section library. If required, the user may specify the non-numerical parameters such as name, colour, material, etc. In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates data such as:

shape of a wall stiffener,

diagram of warping lines,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,

centre lines of the cross-section.

The table below shows diagrams of the above-mentioned sectional characteristics for an I-beam.

Warping lines

Shear Y

Cross-sections

139

Shear Z

Shape of stiffeners

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes. E.g. the shape of stiffener is not provided for angles, or no additional parameters are available for bars, etc.

Sample cross-sections

Welded steel cross-sections

Basic Reference Guide

140

Scia Engineer provides for easy definition of commonly used types of welded cross-sections made of steel flats by offering the selection from a library of such cross-sections.

The procedure for insertion of a welded cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such as:

shape of a wall stiffener,

diagram of warping lines,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,

centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.

Sample cross-sections

Note: The last two cross-sections (framed in the picture)have corrugated web. Therefore, their sectional characteristics differ from the first two cross-section.

Welded hollow cross-sections Welded cross-sections are similar to welded built-up open cross-section. The user can make a selection from a library of commonly used shapes of welded hollow sections.

The procedure for insertion of a welded hollow cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such as:

shape of a wall stiffener,

diagram of warping lines,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,

centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.

Sample cross-sections

Cross-sections

141

Haunch cross-sections It is quite common that a 1D member contains haunches at one or both of its ends. Sometimes the beam cross-section just simply "changes" its dimension (usually the height), sometimes a special cross-section is made for such a 1D member. This special cross-section consists of two parts – one that remains constant along the whole beam span, and one that "makes" the haunch. Scia Engineer allows the user to select from a set of pre-defined "haunch" cross-sections.

The procedure for insertion of a "haunch" cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such as:

shape of a wall stiffener,

diagram of warping lines,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,

centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.

Sample cross-sections

Built-up steel cross-sections Built-up members are used when a single member would not be sufficient or when the slenderness ratio is too high and resulting in excessive vibrations or when a built-up member would reduce the complexity of the connection.

The procedure for insertion of a built-up cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such as:

shape of a wall stiffener,

diagram of warping lines,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,

centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.

Sample cross-sections

Basic Reference Guide

142

Multi-material built-up cross-sections Cross-sections composed of two different materials are quite common in the engineering practice. They provide for the combination of "good qualities" and "advantages" of the combined materials. Probably most often a steel beam is joined together with a concrete slab creating thus the top flange of the cross-section. However, Scia Engineer allows the user to define materials of the composite cross-section freely.

The procedure for insertion of a composite cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such as:

shape of a wall stiffener,

diagram of warping lines,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,

diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,

centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.

Sample cross-sections

Cross-sections

143

Concrete cross-sections Scia Engineer offers a predefined set of concrete cross-section shapes that are used most often. The section may be simply selected from the library list. All basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated by the program.

The procedure for insertion of a concrete cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

Similarly to other cross-section types, basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated and the user may type in the non-numerical parameters such as name, material, colour, etc.

Sample cross-sections

Timber cross-sections Members made of wood generally use a wooden-specific cross-sections. Scia Engineer library of pre-defined cross-sections offers also a set for this material.

The procedure for insertion of a concrete cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

Sample cross-sections

Bridge cross-sections Special cross-sections are used for bridges. Scia Engineer offers a collection of such cross-sections.

The procedure for insertion of a bridge cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.

As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.

Sample cross-sections

Basic Reference Guide

144

Numerical cross-section A numerical cross-section is a special cross-section type. It enables the user to define an arbitrary cross-section. The user does not have to define the shape of the cross-section. The only thing s/he has to do is fill in a table of sectional characteristics.

General cross-section A general cross-section is a cross-section that:

may be of an arbitrary shape,

may consist of an arbitrary number of partial cross-sections,

may be made of an arbitrary number of materials.

This type of cross-section may be useful mainly for sections tailored for a specific purpose (steel thin walled cross-sections, aluminium sections, bridge sections, hollow concrete sections, etc.).

The general cross-section may be designed by means of a tool called General cross-section editor. This editor is a special environment, fully integrated into Scia Engineer that provides the user with all functions necessary for an efficient design of a "free-shape" and "free-composition" cross-section.

Defining a new cross-section

Cross-section manager The Cross-section manager is a versatile tool for dealing with cross-section. The cross-section manager is used to:

define a new cross-section,

edit an existing cross-section,

delete an existing cross-section,

review parameters of existing cross-sections,

choose one if the existing cross-sections as a "default" for later called functions that require a cross-section as a parameter.

Cross-sections

145

The cross-section manager is one of the "managers" integrated in Scia Engineer and its layout and operation is identical to the other Scia Engineer "managers". It is open when function Cross-sections is activated. It may represent one of the steps in the General procedure for the definition of a new cross-section.

Generally, there are several ways to open the Cross-section manager:

Tree menu function Library > Cross-sections.

Project toolbar.

Menu function Libraries > Cross-sections.

"Manager" button in any of numerous property dialogues that contain at least one item Cross-section.

Note: Which way is actually chosen depends on two factors: (i) where (what part of the program) is the manager called from, and (ii) habits of a particular user.

General procedure for the definition of a new cross-section The process for the definition (or we can say insertion) of a new cross-section in a Scia Engineer project consists of a few steps.

Procedure for the definition of a new cross-section

1. Call function Cross-sections. There are various ways to do so:

a. Use tree menu function Library > Cross-sections.

b. Start function for the insertion of a new 1D member and open the Cross-section manager from within the Beam properties dialogue.

c. Click the appropriate icon on the Project toolbar.

d. Call menu function Libraries > Cross-sections.

2. Function Cross-sections opens the Cross-section manager.

3. Press button [New item]. This action opens a dialogue for the selection of cross-section type. (Note: If no cross-section has been defined yet, this step is automatically skipped and the cross-section type dialogue is opened directly).

4. Select the appropriate cross-section type.

5. Specify the sectional parameters and properties.

6. Review the calculated sectional characteristics and possibly include them into a document.

7. Close the Cross-section manager or repeat steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.

Basic Reference Guide

146

Selecting the cross-section type The selection of a required cross-section type or types can be done in the New cross-section type dialogue.

The dialogue consists of the following control and information elements:

List of available cross-section types

It contains all the available cross-section types.

List of possible variants (sub-types) for the current type

It offers possible sub-types for the selected type.

Drawing of the currently selected variant

It shows the particular selected cross-section.

List of already defined cross-sections

It lists all he already defined (inserted) cross-section.

Control buttons They provide for the control of the dialogue.

List of available cross-section types

The dialogue offers a list of available cross-section types. The contents of the list may vary depending on the purchased configuration of Scia Engineer and the material types selected for the particular project.

For example, a user who selected steel and concrete materials in the Project settings dialogue can select from variety of steel and concrete cross-sections, while another user who selected just timber material in the project settings can only use timber cross-sections.

List of possible variants (sub-types) for the current type

This dialogue element displays a set of graphical symbols (icons) representing the individual variants of the cross-section type that is currently selected in the List of available cross-section types.

Note: If the type selected is "rolled steel cross-section ", the list of possible variants is different than for other cross-section types. In this case, the list offers both "shapes" of rolled section and available dimensions for each particular "shape". That means that the user can select directly the required type (shape) of rolled section and its appropriate size.

Drawing of the currently selected variant

A small window displays a drawing of the currently selected variant of the currently selected cross-section type. A short "description name" of the particular variant is added to the drawing mainly to facilitate the identification of a particular cross-section sub-type and type.

Note: This window is hidden if the rolled steel cross-section type is selected.

List of already defined cross-sections

In addition to the available cross-section types, the dialogue displays a list containing all the cross-sections that have been defined (i.e. inserted into the project) so far.

Control buttons

Button [Add] and Button with a "Right Arrow"

Button [Add] confirms the selection of a particular type and variant. Depending on the cross-section type and variant, a new cross-section is either (i) inserted directly into the Scia Engineer project, or (ii) a dialogue for editing of cross-section parameters is opened. The former happens if e.g. a rolled steel section has been selected because there is no need to

Cross-sections

147

specify its dimensions, name, etc. The latter action is performed if some kind of specification is required for the selected cross-section such as the definition of dimensions for welded steel or cast concrete cross-section, etc. Once a new cross-section is inserted by means of this button, the cross-section is added to the List of already defined cross-sections.

Button [Close]

This button closes the New cross-section type dialogue.

Specifying sectional parameters and properties The specification of cross-section parameters can be done in a dialogue for editing of a particular cross-section. This dialogue is opened automatically once the user selects and confirms the required type in the New cross-section type dialogue. In addition, the editing dialogue can be opened any time later via the [Edit] button of the Cross-section manager.

The editing dialogue consists of three main parts:

Graphical window It displays the cross-section including dimension lines, labels, etc.

Property table If comprises all the parameters and sectional characteristics of the cross-section and provides for their editing.

Control buttons They perform various tasks connected with the editing.

Graphical window

The graphical window displays the cross-section, dimension lines, labels and, if available, some of the cross-section properties or characteristics: for example cross-section vertex numbers, shape of stiffeners, diagrams of selected quantities such as shear stress distribution, etc. These additional data about the cross-section are shown on separate tabs (one tab per each property).

Property table

The property table contains all the available and computable cross-section characteristics and parameters. Here the parameters can be input or edited.

The parameters can be divided into three groups: basic sectional characteristics, parameters independent of the cross-section type and type-specific parameters.

It should be stated here that some of the parameters (basic sectional characteristics in particular) cannot be neither input nor edited as they are uniquely determined by the shape and dimensions of the cross-section and are therefore automatically calculated by the program.

There exists a special interconnection between the property table and graphical window that will be described later in this chapter.

Control buttons

Button [Update]

Basic Reference Guide

148

This button starts an algorithm that recalculates the sectional characteristics on the basis of input values.

On entering the editing dialogue for a new cross-section, the property table shows only those parameters that may be edited. In order to see also the computer sectional characteristics, the button must be user.

What’s more, the computed sectional characteristics listed in the property table disappear once the user changes any of the input values. The characteristics are displayed again after this button is pressed. It must be also used to initiate the regeneration of some of the drawings in the graphical window.

Button [Document]

This button invokes the preview window to show the cross-section parameters in a document-style table. The table may be edited the same way as a standard document table.

Button [OK]

This button closes the dialogue and accepts all the inputs and changes made in it.

If a new cross-section has been defined in the editing dialogue it is inserted into the project.

If an existing cross-section has been modified here, the changes are taken into account and saved into the project.

Button [Cancel]

This button closes the dialogue and all the inputs and changes made in it are abandoned.

If a new cross-section has been defined in the editing dialogue it is NOT inserted into the project.

If an existing cross-section has been modified here, the changes are not taken into account and the project remains unchanged.

Graphical window versus property table relation

The graphical window and the property table are provided with a special interlink that provides for easy and lucid style of editing.

The graphical window contains two types of labelling symbols: either dimension lines, or labels, or both. The dimension lines describe dimensions of the individual cross-section edges and parts. The labels depict partial units (e.g. individual rolled steel sections) of a built-up or composite cross-section.

The same items (partial units or dimensions) that are referred to in the graphical window by means of dimension lines and labels can also be found in the property table where they form individual editable cells. In order to facilitate the editing process, there is a link between corresponding property table cells and graphical symbols in the graphical window. That means that if the user wants to change a dimension of a cross-section, it may either (i) select the appropriate cell in the table, or (ii) select the corresponding graphical symbol in the graphical window. What’s more, in order to find quickly which dimension or partial unit the individual table cells refers to, the user can simply select the cell in the table and the appropriate dimension line or label is highlighted in the graphical window.

Reviewing the calculated sectional characteristics There are a few ways to see and scrutinise the parameters of a cross-section including both the input data and calculated sectional characteristics.

Property table in the Cross-section manager

The Cross-section manager contains a vertically oriented window that displays the basic sectional characteristics and parameters of currently selected cross-section in a property table.

Property table in the dialogue for editing of a cross-section

Each dialogue for editing of a cross-section contains a vertically oriented property table with all the available parameters of the edited cross-section.

Document-style view in the preview window

This is the most sophisticated kind of display for parameters of a cross-section. It is accessible from within the dialogue for editing of a cross-section.

Property table in the Cross-section manager

The property table in the Cross-section manager provides for quick overview of basic characteristics and parameters of individual defined cross-sections. It is possible to edit some of the parameters, however, this table is not primarily intended for thorough editing of a cross-section. If a cross-section must be modified, the cross-section editing dialogue should be invoked.

Property table in the dialogue for editing of a cross-section

The property table in this dialogue provides for both clear overview of the cross-section parameters and their straightforward modification. Most of the items may be edited in this dialogue. The only exception is the sectional characteristics that are automatically calculated from the dimensions. Such characteristics are not allowed to be modified.

Document-style view in the preview window

The sectional characteristics and all the other parameters can be displayed in a readable way in the preview window. The preview window then displays a table with all the cross-section parameters sorted in it.

The table is in fact a standard Scia Engineerdocument table and consequently its format can be adjusted to meet any specific requirements. The adjustment can be done the same way as with any other document table.

Cross-sections

149

The table shows not only all the parameters of the cross-section and all its parameters which are displayed in the property tables of dialogues for dealing with cross-sections (i.e. Cross-section manager and Editing dialogue), but also a set of additional information including a couple of diagrams. The additional information depend on the type of cross-section.

The picture below shows a sample preview for an angle section

Importing the cross-sections from another project Quite often, the user may encounter the situation that s/he wants to use the same cross-sections in several different projects. Especially for "man-made" cross-sections (i.e. not rolled ones), the repetitious definition of the same cross-sections may be rather time consuming and boring. What’s more, it may become a source of serious mistakes.

Scia Engineer enables the user to solve this task effectively and clearly. The procedure consists of two separate steps and is limited only by one rule.

Export of required cross-sections from the "source" project

Firstly, the cross-sections defined in one project must be exported into an external database. Later, they may be imported into other projects. The export can be controlled in the Write to database dialogue.

Basic Reference Guide

150

The left hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections defined in the current project.

The right hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections saved in the selected user-database file.

The buttons below the list boxes can be used to manage the external database.

Write to database Writes the selected cross-section from the list of project cross-sections into the database file.

Write all Writes all the cross-section from the list of project cross-sections into the database file.

Delete Deletes the selected cross-section from the database file.

The procedure for export of cross-sections into an external database

1. In it is not the case, define the required cross-sections in the original (or source) project.

2. Open the Cross-section manager.

3. Press button [Save into file] ( ).

4. Define a new or browse for the existing User-database file.

5. The Write-to-database is opened on the screen.

6. Export the required cross-sections.

7. Confirm with [OK].

8. Close the Cross-section manager.

Import of required cross-sections into the "target" project

Once the required cross-sections have been successfully exported into the user-database file, they may be imported into the target project.

The import can be controlled in the Read from database dialogue, which is similar in appearance to the Write to database dialogue (see above).

The left hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections defined in the current project.

The right hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections saved in the selected user-database file.

The buttons below the list boxes can be used to import items from the external database.

Copy to project Copies the selected cross-sections from the external user-database into the current project.

Copy all Copies all the cross-sections from the external user-database into the current project.

Cross-sections

151

The procedure for import of cross-sections from an external database

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Press button [Read from file] ( ).

3. Browse for the existing User-database file.

4. The Read-from-database is opened on the screen.

5. Import the required cross-sections.

6. Confirm with [OK].

7. Close the Cross-section manager.

Limitations of the import process

Despite the fact that the Import is rather versatile, there is a limitation with reference to material code of cross-section materials. As a cross-section stores, among others, the information about the material it is made of, there is a rule concerning materials defined in the project.

Note: AT LEAST ONE of the material codes defined in the source project MUST also be defined in the target project. Otherwise, the import is not made correctly.

Example:

Source project material codes

Material codes defined in the source project, i.e. the project from which the cross-sections have been exported

Target project material codes

Material codes defined in the target project, i.e. the project into which the cross-sections are being imported

Import result

CSN, EC, DIN EC, SIA correct

CSN, DIN EC, SIA INCORRECT

CSN,DIN DIN correct

Modifying an existing cross-section

Editing a cross-section Any cross-section that has been inserted into a project can be edited any time later. In order to do so, the user has to activate the editing dialogue of the particular cross-section.

Procedure for editing of an existing cross-section

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.

3. Use button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue for the selected cross-section.

4. Make the necessary changes of cross-section parameters.

5. Close the editing dialogue using [OK] button to confirm the changes.

6. If required, repeat steps 2 to 5 for other cross-sections.

7. Close the Cross-section manager.

Deleting a cross-section A cross-section that is no longer used in a project, i.e. that is no longer assigned to any of the 1D members in the modelled structure, can be removed from the project database. The deletion may both save the computer memory and improve the orientation in the project data.

It is advisable to remove all unnecessary cross-sections from the project. Any redundant item in the project database deteriorates the lucidity of the data and may be a source of an accidental mistake.

Procedure for deletion of an existing cross-section

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.

3. Use button [Delete] to erase the cross-section from the project database.

4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 for other cross-sections.

5. Close the Cross-section manager.

Note: If a cross-section is used anywhere in the project, the program does not allow the user to remove it.

Basic Reference Guide

152

Copying a cross-section It may be convenient for some reason or another to create a copy of an existing cross-section. The copy may be later modified to define a new cross-section that is similar to its original and varies in a few parameters only. This procedure may be useful for example if the user wants to make experiments or variants for cross-sections of the same geometry but different material.

Procedure for copying of an existing cross-section

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.

3. Use button [Copy] to make a copy of the selected cross-section.

4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 for other cross-sections.

5. Close the Cross-section manager.

This procedure will be most likely immediately followed by the procedure for editing of a cross-section in order to make necessary modifications to the copies.

Replacing a cross-section Sometimes a need may arise to replace one cross-section used in the structure with another one in all its appearances. This task may be done effectively by means of Change cross-section function.

This function allows the user to replace one of the already defined cross-sections with a new one. Once the new cross-section is defined, it is applied for all 1D members in the structure where the "replaced" cross-section was used so far.

Procedure for replacing of an existing cross-section

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.

3. Use button [Change] to replace the selected cross-section with a new one.

4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 for other cross-sections.

5. Close the Cross-section manager.

General cross-section

General cross-section A general cross-section is a cross-section that:

may be of an arbitrary shape,

may consist of an arbitrary number of partial cross-sections,

may be made of an arbitrary number of materials.

This type of cross-section may be useful mainly for sections tailored for a specific purpose (steel thin walled cross-sections, aluminium sections, bridge sections, hollow concrete sections, etc.).

The general cross-section may be designed by means of a tool called General cross-section editor. This editor is a special environment, fully integrated into Scia Engineer that provides the user with all functions necessary for an efficient design of a "free-shape" and "free-composition" cross-section.

Examples of a general cross-section This chapter has been made just to give a gist of what form a general cross-sections can be.

Cross-sections

153

Basic Reference Guide

154

Rules for general cross-sections The final cross-section may consist of several partial sections. The mutual position of these partial sections follows several rules:

The partial sections may be independent, i.e. they do not intersect nor "touch" each other.

The partial sections may "touch" each other or they even may overlap one another (see Properties of the partial section).

It is possible to combine solid (thin-walled) partial section, thin-walled partial section and library cross-section in one general cross-section.

If solid and thin-walled sections are combined in the general cross-section, principles given in chapter Thin-walled versus solid cross-section should be taken into account.

Type of partial sections in the general cross-section

Polygonal cross-section A polygonal cross-section is an arbitrary closed polygon. It is clear that individual segments (edges) of the polygon MUST NOT intersect each other. On the other hand, if the final cross-section consists of several partial sections, these may intersect or overlap - see Rules for general cross-sections.

The individual segments of the polygon may be (i) linear or (ii) circular.

It is possible to adjust the following parameters for the polygonal section.

Name Specifies the name of the polygonal. It is used for easier orientation especially if the final cross-section consists of a larger number of partial sections.

Type This parameter cannot be changed and indicates the type of the partial section.

Material See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Corrosion See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Phase See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Overlap See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

A polygon may also be used to create an opening in another polygonal cross-section. The only requirement is that the opening intersects or lies inside the other partial section that may be either of polygonal or thin-walled type. The intersection of two regions is deducted from the non-opening shape. A few examples follow.

"Full-time" opening

The smaller polygon (with one circular edge) is fully inside the rectangular polygon. The result is a cross-section of rectangular outline with an opening.

Cross-sections

155

Partial opening

The two triangular openings just overlap the solid square.

The result is an irregular hexagonal cross-section.

Thin walled cross-section A thin-walled cross-section is a section defined by its centreline (or midline) and the width. If a cross-section is supposed to have segments of different width, it must be defined as consisting of two (or more) partial and interconnected sections.

Even a thin-walled cross-section may be subject to corrosion. It should be stated, however, that in Scia Engineer the corrosion affects only the thickness of the section. The length of the midline remains unaffected by the corrosion.

Opening may also be defined in a thin-walled cross-section. It is possible to just cut (shorten) a thin-walled section or even make a whole in it (even though this may be considered strange from the practical point of view).

For more information about openings in a thin-walled section, see chapter Thin-walled versus solid cross-section.

Name Specifies the name of the polygonal. It is used for easier orientation especially if the final cross-section consists of a larger number of partial sections.

Type This parameter cannot be changed and indicates the type of the partial section.

Material See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Corrosion See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Basic Reference Guide

156

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the section web.

Alignment The "definition" line may be either the mid-line of the section, or its left or right surface line.

Phase See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Overlap See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Library cross-section A partial section of a general cross-section may also be formed by standard cross-sections imported from the cross-section library, e.g. by rolled steel cross-sections, predefined concrete sections, wooden sections, etc.

An arbitrary number of library sections may be added into a general cross-section and they may be freely combined with polygonal and/or thin-walled sections.

What’s also important is the fact that once inputted the library cross-section may still be edited inside the General cross-section editor, e.g. the depth of a concrete section, its inclination, etc. may be changed.

Thin-walled versus solid cross-section A partial cross-section of a general cross-section may be defined as a thin-walled section or as a solid section (thick-walled) section. If the final general cross-section consists of one type of sections only, there is nothing to bother about. If all the partial sections are thin-walled, the final cross-section is thin-walled as well. If all the partial sections are solid, the final cross-section is solid as well.

But what happens if thin-walled parts are combined with solid ones? In Scia Engineer, the final cross-section is considered as solid section.

What’s more important to know is the fact that even an opening is considered to be a "solid" section, so if a thin-walled section is cut with an opening, the result is a solid cross-section.

Note: It is important to remember this rule as it determines which formulas are used to calculate sectional characteristics.

General cross-section editor

Opening the General cross-section editor The General cross-section editor is a tool that, at first sight, resembles the Picture gallery editor. What both editors have in common is that they both are a "drawing tool" for creation of a "drawing".

In General cross-section editor, the drawing represents a cross-section. In Picture gallery, the drawing is a picture of analysed structure.

The procedure to open the General cross-section editor in order to create a new general cross-section

1. Open the Cross-section manager:

a. either via tree menu item Library > Cross-sections,

b. or using menu function Libraries > Cross-sections,

c. or by means of button [Cross-sections] on toolbar Project.

2. Click button [New] to add a new cross-section.

3. Select General in the Available groups list.

4. Click button [Add].

5. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.

6. Define the new cross-section.

7. Close the editor.

8. Confirm the new cross-section.

9. Close the New cross-section dialogue.

10. Close the Cross-section manager.

The procedure to open the General cross-section editor in order to edit an existing general cross-section

1. Open the Cross-section manager:

a. either via tree menu item Library > Cross-sections,

b. or using menu function Libraries > Cross-sections,

c. or by means of button [Cross-sections] on toolbar Project.

2. In the list of defined cross-section, select the one you need to change.

3. Click button [Edit] to edit the selected cross-section.

Cross-sections

157

4. The Cross-section edit dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. If only some of the general parameters need to be altered, make the change in the property table of the dialogue.

6. If the shape or property of only a partial section need to me modified, press button [Edit] in the property table of the dialogue.

7. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.

8. Make the necessary changes.

9. Close the editor.

10. Confirm the result in the General cross-section editor.

11. Close the Cross-section manager.

Using the General cross-section editor Once the General cross-section editor is opened, it is possible to define (draw) a new cross-section or edit an existing one. This may be done by means of numerous functions available in the General cross-section editor.

The functions can be sorted by their type:

Working plane and user-coordinate system

Adjustment of the view

Setting of view parameters

Dot grid

Selections

SNAP mode

Geometric manipulations

Input of a new partial cross-section

Dimension lines

Definition and application of parameters

The individual functions are described in separate chapters of this book.

Functions of the General cross-section editor

Working plane and user co-ordinate system

The principles of working plane and user co-ordinate systems have been laid in the main reference manual. Those capabilities that are meaningful also in the General cross-section editor have been implemented in it.

UCS by 3 points Defines a UCS by means of 3 points.

According to entity LCS Defines a UCS in such a way that X-axis goes along a selected entity edge (e.g. polygon segment).

GCS The UCS is made identical to the GCS.

GCS parallel The UCS axes are parallel with the GCS axes but the origin is not in the origin of the GCS.

Move The UCS may be moved to a new origin.

Rotate The UCS may be rotated.

Previous The previous UCS may be taken back.

Note: For more information about working plane and user co-ordinate systems in general see chapters Basic working tools > Working plane and Basic working tools > User co-ordinate system (UCS).

Adjusting the view

The General cross-section editor offers similar view adjusting function as the main Scia Engineer graphical environment.

Zoom in Zooms in.

Zoom out Zooms out.

Zoom – Cut-out Requires defining a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is then magnified in order to fit into the whole area of the graphical window.

Basic Reference Guide

158

Zoom – All Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

Zoom – Selection Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the whole area of the graphical window.

Note: For more information about adjusting the view in general see chapter Basic working tools > Adjusting the viewpoint.

Controlling the view parameters

The user may control the way the partial cross-sections are drawn on the screen. There are several means of control.

Names of partial sections and node (vertex) numbers

A button on the main toolbar ( ) can be used to switch ON / OFF the labels giving (i) partial section names and (ii) vertex numbers of polygonal partial section or thin-walled partial section.

Depiction OFF

Depiction ON

Colour palette

As in the main graphical environment of Scia Engineer, the user may adjust colour for individual types of lines. In the General cross-section editor the following colours related to the cross-section may be set in addition to standard line types.

The setup dialogue may be opened via button ( ) on the main toolbar.

Cross-section outline Specifies the colour of the contour of the cross-section.

Cross-section midline Specifies the colour of the midline of the cross-section.

Cross-section fibre Specifies the colour of letters used to depict cross-section vertices.

Cross-section corrosion Specifies the colour of the corrosion level.

Cross-section joints

Cross-section insert point Specifies the colour of the insertion point, i.e. the point that is used to manipulate with the section by mouse.

Fonts

Once again, the General cross-section editor enables the user to set required font type and size.

The setup dialogue may be opened via button ( ) on the main toolbar.

Cross-sections

159

Labels of nodes Specifies the font used to depict cross-section vertices.

Labels of sectional parts Specifies the font used to depict partial cross-sections.

Main labels Specifies the font used for basic labels.

Dimension lines

Similarly to dimension lines used in picture gallery or paper-space gallery, it is possible to set the basic parameters of dimension lines used for dimensioning of general cross-sections.

The setup dialogue may be opened via button ( ) on the main toolbar.

Dot grid

The definition and use of the dot grid are identical with those of the main Scia Engineer graphical environment. Note: For more information about dot grid in general see chapter Basic working tools > Dot grid.

Making the selection

Making a selection by the mouse cursor

single selection One entity is selected each time the user clicks the mouse button.

rectangular cut-out The user draws a rectangle on the screen. The program selects all entities located inside the rectangle or overlapping it (see the paragraph below for details about this selection mode).

intersection line The user draws a line (or a polygon) on the screen. The program selects all entities that have an intersection with the drawn line.

polygonal cut-out The user draws a closed polygon on the screen. The program selects all entities located inside the polygon

select-all All currently displayed entities are selected

previous Activates the last made selection.

clear selection The current selection is cleared (the entities are not deleted, they are just unselected).

Note: For more information about selections in general see chapter Basic working tools > Selections.

Adjusting the snap mode

The principles of "snapping" have been laid in other chapters of the main reference manual. Here, in the general cross-section context, it is worth to say that the same SNAP modes can be utilised for the definition or modification of a general cross-section in the General cross-section editor.

Available SNAP modes are:

Dot grid The cursor is locked to the points of a defined dot grid.

Only snapped points

If this option is ON, the first two variants are automatically turned OFF and only characteristic points of already defined entities may be used to snap to. In other words, only the object SNAP mode is enabled.

Midpoints Middle points of entities are used as snap points.

Endpoints / Nodes End points of entities are used as snap points.

Intersections Intersections of entities are used as snap points.

Orthogonal points This option snaps to a point that forms a perpendicular with the selected object.

Tangential points The Tangential point SNAP mode snaps to a tangent point on a circle.

Arc / circle centre This option snaps to the centre of a circle, arc or polyline arc segment. The cursor must pass over the circumference of the circle or the arc so that the centre can be found.

Points on line / curve N-th

The program automatically divides a selected entity into N segments and thus generates (N+1) points on an entity under cursor. The points may be used to

Basic Reference Guide

160

snap to.

Points in line / curve % of length

This option is similar to the one above. But the division of a 1D member is defined by percents and not by the number of segments.

Note: For more information about SNAP modes in general see chapter Basic working tools > Cursor SNAP modes.

Geometric manipulations

Several geometric manipulations are available to modify the already input polygonal partial cross-sections. The functions are analogous to geometric functions for Scia Engineer structural entities (e.g. 1D members).

Geometric manipulations

Move Moves selected partial section/sections to a new location.

Copy Makes a copy of the selected partial section/sections.

Multicopy Makes several copies of the selected partial section/sections.

Rotate Rotates the selected partial section/sections.

Scale Enlarges or scales down the selected partial section/sections.

Mirror Creates a mirror image of the selected partial section/sections.

Trim Trims the selected partial section/sections to a given border entity.

Extend Extends the selected partial section/sections to a given border entity.

Edit polyline

Insert node Inserts a node to the selected part of a polygon.

Remove node Removes the selected from the selected part of a polygon.

Geometric manipulation with curves

Edit arc angle Changes the angle of the selected arc.

Edit arc bulge Changes the bulge of the selected arc.

Edit arc radius Changes the radius of the selected arc.

Convert curve to line

Converts the selected curve to a straight line.

Convert line to circle arc

Converts the selected straight line to an arc.

Note: For more information about geometric manipulations in general see chapter Geometry.

Dimension lines

Once the general cross-section is defined (or partly defined), it is possible to add dimension lines to the drawing of the section.

There are three types of drawing lines: (i) vertical, (ii) horizontal, and (iii) general.

The procedure to input a new dimension line

1. Open function Dimension line from the tree menu of the General cross-section editor.

2. If required, change dimension line parameters.

3. Select the first point that the dimension line refers to.

4. Select the second point that the dimension line refers to.

5. Define the position of the dimension line.

6. Repeat as many times as required.

Parameters of dimension line

Name Specifies the name of the dimension line.

Style Selects the style: vertical, horizontal, general.

Cross-sections

161

Label Specifies a text label attached to the dimension line.

Plot line offset Defines the offset of the plot line from the cross-section.

offset = 5

offset = 50

Plot line Selects the type of plot line.

short

long

Label alignment Defines the alignment.

Basic Reference Guide

162

left

centre

right

Example of dimension lines

Creating a new general cross-section

Inserting a new polygonal section

The procedure to insert a new polygonal section

1. Open the General cross-section editor.

2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Polygon.

Cross-sections

163

3. If required, adjust polygon parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.

4. Close the setting dialogue.

5. Define the starting point of the section’s outline:

a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,

b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.

6. Use the same approach to define additional vertices of the polygon.

7. When finished, close the function:

a. either by pressing [Esc] key,

b. or via right mouse button’s pop-up menu and its function End of command.

Note 1: See also chapter Plane polygon toolbar.

Note 2: When you start inputting individual vertices, the program draws the outline of the section. If possible, the program also closes the polygon and gives the idea of what the cross-section would look like if you input the vertex and then immediately close the function. If however, it is not possible to close the polygon (without intersecting one or more segments), the polygon is let open and only the defined part of the polygon is drawn.

The two pictures below demonstrate what has been said in the note above. Please note, that the vertex at the cursor (small square) has not been input yet.

The program suggests the "closed" shape (Fig. above).

There is no possibility to close the polygon at the moment (Fig. above).

Example of a polygonal section

Basic Reference Guide

164

Plane polygon toolbar Once function New polygon is started the user may select advanced option from toolbar Plane polygon.

Buttons of the toolbar have the following meaning.

New circle

If this button is pressed, the sub-toolbar with two buttons is opened.

New circle – centre, radius point

The user must define the centre point and a point on the circle that specifies the radius.

New circle – 3 points

The user must input three points located on the circle.

New rectangle

The user must define two opposite corners of a rectangle.

New polygon

The user must define individual vertices of the polygon.

New straight line

The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon will be a straight line.

New circular arc

The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon will be a circular arc (the intermediate point and end point of the circular segment must be input).

Select line

This button is useful if a new polygon is supposed to follow the shape of a previously defined polygon. The user does not have to pick all the vertices of the new polygon, but may select existing edges of the already input polygon.

Example:

Let’s assume that a polygon has been input as shown below.

Cross-sections

165

Another polygon is supposed to follow the circular part of the first polygon.

The procedure may be:

1. Start function New polygon.

2. Input the first point to the right of vertex P4 of the defined polygon.

3. Input the second point in directly in vertex P4.

4. Press button [Select line] on the toolbar.

5. Select edge P4-P5 of the first polygon.

6. Select edge P5-P7 of the first polygon.

7. Select edge P7-P6 of the first polygon.

8. Press button [New straight line] on the toolbar.

9. Input the remaining vertices of the new polygon.

Step back

This button goes one step back in the definition of the polygon. If a polygon is being defined, the last vertex is removed. If a circle is being defined by means of three points and two points have been defined so far, this function removes the second point of the circle but leaves the first circle point unaffected.

Inserting a new thin walled section

The procedure to insert a new thin walled section

1. Open the General cross-section editor.

2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Thin walled.

3. If required, adjust section parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.

4. Close the setting dialogue.

Basic Reference Guide

166

5. Define the starting point of the section’s midline:

a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,

b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.

6. Use the same approach to define additional vertices of the section midline.

7. When finished, close the function:

a. either by pressing [Esc] key,

b. or via right mouse button’s pop-up menu and its function End of command.

Example of a thin-walled section

Inserting a new library section

The procedure to insert a new library section

1. Open the General cross-section editor.

2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Section from library.

3. Select the type and size of the library section.

4. If required, adjust section parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.

5. Close the setting dialogue.

6. Define the location of the reference point of the section:

a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,

b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.

Inserting a new opening An opening is in fact a polygon. So the procedure for its definition is very similar to that for polygonal cross-section. The difference is that the opening has got no material property.

The procedure to insert a new opening

1. Open the General cross-section editor.

2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Polygonal opening.

3. If required, adjust parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.

4. Close the setting dialogue.

5. Define the starting point of the opening’s outline:

a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,

b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.

6. Use the same approach to define additional vertices of the polygon of the opening.

7. When finished, close the function:

a. either by pressing [Esc] key,

b. or via right mouse button’s pop-up menu and its function End of command.

Import of a general cross-section Not only a structure itself, but also a cross-section shape can be imported from DWG/DXF files.

The editor of a general cross-section can be opened via the Cross-section manager. Use function New cross-section > General cross-section.

Cross-sections

167

Procedure to import the shape of a cross-section from DWG/DXF file

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Start function New.

3. Select General.

4. The Cross-section editor is opened on the screen.

5. Double click function Import DXF/DWG.

6. Browse for the file to be imported.

7. The import dialogue is opened on the screen.

8. Make necessary adjustments and/or actions (see below for the meaning of dialogue controls).

9. Complete the action of the import usng buttons [Import selected] or [Import all].

Layers

This list box contains the layers that were defined in the original DWG/DXF file. Only selected layers are shown in the preview window of the Import dialogue.

Entity types

This list contains available entity types. Only selected types are shown in the preview window of the Import dialogue.

Selection mode

Thin walled The selected lines are imported as a thin-walled section.

Polygons The selected lines are imported as a polygonal cross-section.

Polygonal openings The selected lines are imported as a polygonal opening in the cross-section.

Scale

The scale for the import. It may be necessary when the drawing is not in SI units. The item provides for the transformation from "imaginary" units of the DWG/DXF file and metres (used in Scia Engineer as the basic unit).

Sizes

Basic Reference Guide

168

This is an informative item, which shows the dimensions calculated from the input scale.

Connect single curves to closed polygon

The following procedure merges individual lines of the drawing into polygon

Press [Select curves].

Select lines to be inserted into the polygon.

Press [Connect curves].

Repeat as many times as required.

Press [End]

Preview window

The view in the preview can be adjusted using the standard Scia Engineer mouse+key controls (shifted, rotated, zoomed in/out).

Adjusting the properties

Properties of the final general cross-section The final general cross-section has a set of properties that may be adjusted by the user.

Name Specifies the name of the cross-section

Buckling y-y Buckling length related to y-y axis.

Buckling z-z Buckling length related to z-z axis

Fabrication Type of fabrication of the section.

Display final shape

If ON, the shape of the area of the section is drawn as filled.

If OFF, only the contour of the section is drawn.

See example below.

Refresh Regardless of the adjustment of the parameter above, displays temporarily the final shape of the section.

Example

Final shape ON

Final shape OFF

Cross-sections

169

Properties of the partial cross-section Each partial section of a general cross-section has several parameters that may (but also may not) be adjusted independently on other parts of the general cross-section. For example, individual partial sections may be made of different material or they may be subject to different level of corrosion, etc.

The parameters are:

Material This parameter specifies the material the part is made of.

Corrosion Here, the user may define that the partial section has been exposed to the elements and has been "weakened" due to corrosion.

Phase The partial section may belong to a particular phase (or stage) of the construction process.

Overlap If two partial sections overlap, this parameter says which of the two parts is of higher priority and should be taken as the leading part. The other part is then cut accordingly (see the example below).

Corrosion example

If corrosion is defined, the corresponding partial cross-section is drawn with a dashed line next to the outline of the section. The dashed line shows the corroded part of the section. Sectional characteristics are automatically calculated from the part of the section that has NOT corroded.

Overlap example

Let’s assume a general cross-section consisting of two overlapping partial sections: (i) a square and (ii) a triangle.

The square is made of concrete (will be drawn in grey colour), the triangle of steel (will be drawn in blue).

First, let’s set the overlap for the square to 1 and let the overlap for the triangle on the default value equal to zero.

The square is of higher priority, its shape is taken as the leading one, and a part of the triangle is automatically cut off.

Basic Reference Guide

170

Second, if the overlap priorities are swapped, i.e. the overlap for the square is set to 0 and the overlap for the triangle is set to 1, the result will be the opposite. The triangle will remain unaffected and a part of the square will be removed from the final cross-section.

Modifying the existing general cross-section

Modifying the properties of the whole cross-section The properties of a general cross-section can be edited in two ways. First, they may be changed directly in the Editing dialogue of the cross-section. Second, it is possible to change them in the General cross-section editor.

Editing dialogue

Procedure for changing the properties in the editing dialogue

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the cross-section to be modified.

3. Click button [Edit].

4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. On its right hand side there is a list of sectional properties.

6. The first three groups may be edited here – see below for details.

7. Change the required parameters.

8. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].

9. Close the Cross-section manager.

Parameters that may be changed in the editing dialogue:

Cross-sections

171

Name Specifies the name of the cross-section

Mat 1, 2, etc. Materials used in the general cross-section. There may be one or more materials defined in one general cross-section.

Colour Colour of the section.

It is applied when colours by cross-section are adjusted in the graphical window of Scia Engineer.

Buckling y-y Buckling length related to y-y axis.

Buckling z-z Buckling length related to z-z axis.

Fabrication Type of fabrication of the section.

General cross-section editor

Procedure for changing the properties in the editor

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the cross-section to be modified.

3. Click button [Edit].

4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Click button [Edit] located in the property table.

6. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.

7. On its left hand side there is a list of sectional properties.

8. Change the required parameters.

9. Close the editor.

10. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].

11. Close the Cross-section manager.

Parameters that may be changed in the editor are described in chapter Properties of the final general cross-section.

Modifying the properties of a partial cross-section Properties of a partial section of a general cross-section may be edited in the General cross-section editor.

Procedure for changing the properties of a partial section

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the cross-section to be modified.

3. Click button [Edit].

4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Click button [Edit] located in the property table.

6. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.

7. Select the part of the general cross-section to be edited.

8. On its left hand side there is a list of sectional properties.

9. Change the required parameters.

10. If required, clear the selection and modify other parts of the cross-section.

11. Close the editor.

Basic Reference Guide

172

12. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].

13. Close the Cross-section manager.

Note: For library cross-sections, the parameters that may be changed in the editor depend on the type of the section. For example, the depth and width will be offered in the property table for rectangular concrete section, while the selection of a different size or type will be available for rolled cross-section.

Changing the geometry of the general cross-section Any part of the general cross-section may be treated the same way as a standard geometric entity in the main Scia Engineer environment.

The cross-section as a whole or any of its parts may be:

moved to a new location,

copied,

rotated,

mirrored,

enlarged to the given scale,

trimmed,

stretched.

The application of above-mentioned functions is the same as the application of corresponding functions in the main Scia Engineer environment.

Changing the geometry of a partial section The geometry modification functions applicable to the whole cross-section (see chapter Changing the geometry of the general cross-section) are also available for any of the partial sections.

In addition, polygon-editing functions are available for thin-walled and polygonal sections. These are:

Insert node into polyline

This functions enables the user to add a new intermediate vertex to the outline or midline, respectively, of an already defined solid or thin-walled section.

Delete node from polyline

This function removes the selected node from the outline or midline, respectively, of an already defined solid or thin-walled section.

Further, co-ordinates of vertices of both polygonal outline of a solid section and midline of a thin-walled section can be manually edited in the property table. The user just has to select the required node (or nodes) and retype the appropriate co-ordinate in the property table.

Finally, for library sections, the property table provides for the modification of the:

insertion point (which leads to a change of the position of the section within the general cross-section).

rotation.

Note: All the available modification functions and procedures may be freely combined for any of the partial sections in order to achieve the required final shape and dimension of the overall general cross-section.

Defining a parametric cross-section

Introduction to the parametric cross-section Sometimes it may be useful to define the general cross-section not by direct definition of its dimensions, partial section types, etc., but by means of parameters. The parameters may be later easily modified and thus the shape and/or dimension of the general cross-section may be changed.

Note: For more information on parameters see chapter Advanced tools > Parametric input > Using the parameters in the project of the main Reference manual of Scia Engineer.

Defining a new parameter

The procedure to define a new parameter

1. In General cross-section editor, open tree menu function Parameter.

2. The Parameters manager opens on the screen.

3. Define the required parameters and set their type and values.

4. Close the Parameters manager.

Cross-sections

173

5. It is now possible to assign the defined parameters to appropriate dimensions.

Assigning the parameters

The procedure to assign the defined parameter

1. Input the cross-section in usual way.

2. Define the parameters.

3. Select the node (vertex) whose position should be defined by means of "length" parameter.

4. In the property table of the node, select the appropriate parameter.

5. Repeat for other nodes.

6. If applicable, select the rolled cross-section whose size and type is to be defined via parameter.

7. In the property table of the node, replace the type by the appropriate parameter.

8. Repeat for other rolled cross-sections.

9. Close the General cross-section editor.

Note 1: Whenever the value of parameters is changed, the corresponding cross-section is reshaped accordingly. Note 2: What’s more, the parameters appear in the editing dialogue of the cross-section. Therefore, it is easy to change the cross-section section without necessity to open the General cross-section editor.

Example of parameterised cross-section Let’s create a simple rectangular cross-section with two circular openings. Further, let’s edit this section and make it parameterised.

Note: The dimensions stated in this example are in metres. Generally, be careful with units when defining new parameters.

First of all, define the section in usual way. Input the bottom left corner of the section to the origin of the global co-ordinate system (This is not a general condition, but it is assumed in our example).

Then, define the necessary parameters:

Parameter Type Evaluation Value / Formula

H Css length Value 0.6

B Css length Value 1.0

H1 Css length Formula H * 0.5

D Css length Value 0.25

D1 Css length Formula H1 + D / 2

B1 Css length Formula B / 3

B2 Css length Formula B / 3 * 2

Further, assign the parameters to appropriate points of the defined cross-section.

Select the top left corner of the rectangle (see below).

Basic Reference Guide

174

In the property table set the global Z co-ordinate to parameter H (see below).

Clear the selection. Select the top right corner and set the global Z co-ordinate to parameter H and the global Y co-ordinate to parameter B (see below).

Z = H; Y = B

Clear the selection. Select the bottom right corner and set the global Y co-ordinate to parameter B (see below).

Y = B

Cross-sections

175

Clear the selection. Select the centre of the left circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z co-ordinates to parameter B1 and H1 respectively (see below).

Z = H1; Y = B1

Clear the selection. Select the centre of the right circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z co-ordinates to parameter B2 and H1 respectively (see below).

Z = H1; Y = B2

Clear the selection. Select the top most point of the left circular opening and adjust its global Y and Z co-ordinates to parameter B1 and D1 respectively (see below).

Z = D1; Y = B1

Clear the selection. Select the top most point of the right circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z co-ordinates to parameter B2 and D1 respectively (see below).

Basic Reference Guide

176

Z = D1; Y = B2

Close the General cross-section editor. In the editing dialogue, you can see the three Value-type parameters B, H, D that fully define the cross-section’s dimensions (see below).

The same parameters may be reviewed, though not changed, in the Cross-section manager (see below).

Cross-sections

177

Any time in the future, you may edit these three values and reshape the cross-section.

It may also be convenient to make copy or copies of this cross-section and create a set of cross-sections of different size.

What’s more, dimension lines may be added to the cross-section. If provided with proper labels they may significantly improve the clearness of the parameters (see below).

An example of the "D" dimension line is in the figure below (see the parameter values on the left).

Basic Reference Guide

178

179

Geometry

Elements of a model A model of a structure consists of many parts or elements. Some of them form the geometry of the model and some of them define other properties of the structure or define effects that the structure is subject to.

node Primarily, it represents an end-point of a 1D member. It also defines the point where finite element node will be placed. In addition, it may define a place where two 1D members touch or intersect each other.

beam A 1D member represents a 1D member that the real structure consists of. Beam in the model may represent a whole set of structural members such as a column, joist, tie beam, rafter, strip foundation, etc.

plate, wall Plates and walls model slabs and load bearing walls ob the analysed structure. Both entity types may contain openings or subregions. Before calculation the finite element mesh is generated on them.

rigid connection of beams If two 1D members have a common end point, the connection of the 1D members in this point (or node) is normally rigid. Also, if any two members that intersect each other are told to be connected (via a linked node), the connection is rigid by default.

connection of beams with defined non-rigid properties

The parameters of any connection of two 1D members can be adjusted in a way so that the connection corresponds to the practical solution of the detail. That means that the degrees of freedom in the connection may be altered and the connection in any direction (concerning both translation and rotation) may be either rigid or free or anything in between (i.e. elastic).

load A structure does not exist on its own; it is subject to multiple effects of various load types. All the load types that can be applied on the model in Scia Engineer are described in a separate chapter.

support A structure itself must be somehow supported, as the supports must, in the end, bear the entire load applied on the structure. The applicable support types are described in separate chapters.

mass Masses are used in connection with dynamic calculation to define the "dynamic" properties of the structure.

Structural shape The shape of structure that is not considered during calculations, but is used for preparation of drawings and design of connections.

Nodes

Introduction to nodes The term "node" is a common finite element method term. However, when talking about Scia Engineer program, we have to make a strict definition of what the word "node" means in the context of this software.

First of all, we have to distinguish between a standard finite element node and an ESA node. The two node types have something in common, but there are also some differences.

FE node

A standard finite element node will be always referred to as an "FE node". Normally, the user will not encounter this type of node when creating a model of a structure. The FE nodes must be dealt with just before the calculation of the project, and usually only in special cases. For common projects, the user can rely totally on the automatic finite element mesh generator integrated in the Scia Engineer program.

Node

The word "node" will be used to talk about ESA nodes – i.e. about nodes (or points, if you prefer) that the user deals with.

A node is the simplest entity applied in Scia Engineer program. A node is the basic element. The nodes define other entity types. For example, a 1D member is defined primarily by its two end-points that are nothing else but two nodes.

Each node has got some properties including:

position in modelling space (i.e. co-ordinates),

nodal co-ordinate system (used to define the direction of direction-related properties such as degrees of freedom).

Each node may belong to just one 1D member or to as many 1D members as required. If a node belongs to several 1D members, the 1D members are mutually connected in such a node and internal forces from one 1D member are transferred into the other 1D members. If required, special boundary conditions can be defined for the connection and thus only some of the internal forces (e.g. only bending moments or shear forces) may be transferred into the adjacent entities.

Basic Reference Guide

180

What the node and FE node have in common is that both are a proper finite element node. That means that the finite element mesh generator will ALWAYS place an FE node into an ESA node. On the other hand, the generator may add some more FE nodes in between the user-defined ESA nodes, in order to ensure that the finite element mesh corresponds with the required fineness.

There are several types of nodes depending on their "relation" to the 1D member they are part of.

Types of nodes Scia Engineer recognises primarily two types of nodes:

an absolute node,

a linked node.

It is important to understand the differences between the two types as the type of node can have a significant influence on the model properties and behaviour and it also affects functions used for the modification of model geometry.

Absolute node

An absolute node is defined by its "absolute" position, or we can say absolute co-ordinates, in space.

An absolute node is used to define end-points of members (e.g. 1D members).

Linked node

A linked node is usually defined by its position, or we can say relative co-ordinate, on a 1D member.

As the term "linked" suggests, a linked node is used to "link" two entities together.

On the screen, a linked node is marked by a unique graphical symbol. The linked node mark looks like a pair of short parallel lines drawn in a node.

Difference between absolute and linked node

In order to show an example, let’s assume a simple plane frame consisting of two vertical columns and a horizontal beam connecting heads of the two columns with a short cantilever on one side.

Column B1 has two end-nodes N1 and N2. Both nodes are absolute.

Column B2 has two end-nodes N3 and N4. Node N3 is absolute, node N4 is linked and is bound (linked) to beam B3.

Horizontal beam B3 has three nodes N2, N4, and N5. Nodes N2 and N5 are absolute. Node N4 is linked is related to beam B3.

The linked node N4 guarantees that column B2 is connected to beam B3 and that internal forces in any of the two beam 1D members are transferred into the other one. This configuration represents the state usually required in practice.

To demonstrate what happens if the linked node is not applied, let’s consider the sample structure as shown in the following figure.

The structure here is very similar to the previous one. However, there exists a seemingly small difference and the difference leads to significant consequences.

Column B2 has two end-nodes N3 and N4. And both nodes are absolute.

Geometry

181

Horizontal beam B3 has just two end-nodes N2 and N5 which are both absolute.

Because there is no node lying on horizontal beam B3 in the place where column B2 intersects with this horizontal beam, the two 1D members do not have a single common node and are not connected to each other. Both the 1D members would act as separate structures and not as a single column-beam unit.

The differences between the two node types concerning modification functions (such as move, rotate, etc.) are given in chapters describing the modification functions.

Defining a new node Even though Scia Engineer knows the entity "node" and uses it for various purposes (mainly related to the definition of structure model), nodes themselves are not defined as separate and self-standing entities. A new node can only be defined as an integral part of a new 1D member. It is not possible to define an independent and self-standing node.

On the other hand, it is possible that, thanks to various geometric manipulations, some nodes become self-standing. This may occur after a node looses its relation to the 1D member, for example due to the deletion of the 1D member. Such nodes are called free nodes and have no specific purpose in the project. Therefore, Scia Engineer offers tools for their removal (see chapter Deleting the nodes).

Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node

The procedure for the definition of a local co-ordinate system of a node

1. Use the UCS Manager to create a new user co-ordinate system. Define the co-ordinate system in such a way so that its axes are oriented in the direction required for the orientation of the local co-ordinate system of the nodes.

2. Make sure that no entities are selected. If necessary, clear the selection.

3. Select the node (or nodes) where the local co-ordinate system should be applied.

4. In the property dialogue (that opens in the property window) tick option LCS.

5. The dialogue then offers a list of defined user co-ordinate systems.

6. Select the UCS that is adequate for the selected nodes. That means the UCS whose axes are oriented in direction of the intended local co-ordinate system of the node or nodes.

7. Clear the selection

Deleting the nodes Nodes, similarly to other entities, may be deleted if they are no longer necessary. On the other hand, one must be aware that there are some conditions that must be met so that the program can perform the deletion of node.

First, it is not possible to delete a node that relates to any entity. For example, it is not possible to delete the end-point (i.e. node) of an existing 1D member. If this should really be done, the relating entity must be deleted together with the node or nodes. Therefore, it is possible to delete a 1D member and two nodes that are the 1D member end-points.

Second, if it happens and some nodes are free nodes (i.e. do not relate to any entity), it is possible to remove such nodes.

Deletion of proper nodes (nodes that relate to 1D members)

Procedure for deletion of nodes

1. Select the nodes that are supposed to be deleted.

2. Select also the entities that the selected nodes relate to.

3. Call function Delete:

a. either: open menu function Modify > Delete,

b. or: use window pop-up menu function Delete,

c. or: press key Del.

4. Confirm the question box (or question boxes).

Deletion of free nodes

Free nodes (if they occur in a project) can be deleted either manually or automatically

Procedure for manual removal of free nodes

1. Select any free nodes that should be deleted.

2. Call function Delete:

a. either: start menu function Modify > Delete,

b. or: start window pop-up menu function Delete,

c. or: press key Del.

3. Confirm the question box (or question boxes).

Procedure for automatic removal of free nodes

1. Start function Check structure data.

Basic Reference Guide

182

a. either: use menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data,

b. or: start tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data.

2. Make sure that option Search free nodes is ticked.

3. Press button [Check].

4. Check the upper right part of the dialogue and verify whether any free nodes have been discovered.

5. If so, make sure that option Delete free nodes is selected.

6. Press button [Continue] to delete the revealed free nodes.

Tip: For more information about function Check structure data see chapter Calculation > Check of data.

If the user is not sure whether there are any free nodes in his/her project, it is always possible to use the second approach because it means that the program automatically finds any free nodes in the project and informs the user about the findings. The user then may decide whether the discovered free nodes should be deleted or kept.

Beams

Introduction to beams From the definition point of view, 1D members used in Scia Engineer can be divided into several types concerning their orientation (vertical, horizontal, etc.) or cross-section (constant, variable). In addition, there exists another division taking account of the function of 1D members or their position in the structure (see chapter Structural model)

Regardless of the type, each 1D member is primarily defined by its two end-points and by a set of properties. The properties can be defined in advance (i.e. before the 1D member is inserted into the modelled structure) or afterwards. Once a 1D member is inserted, it is not bound to its position forever. If required, it can be moved to another location, rotated, prolonged, shortened or adjusted in any other way to correspond with the changing demands. Also its properties such as material, cross-section, type of transmitted internal forces, etc. can be modified any time and as many times as required.

There are two criterions concerning the definition of 1D members:

Which type of 1D member can be inserted (defined) directly in one-step action.

Which type of 1D member can be defined via additional adjustment of appropriate properties on already inserted (defined) 1D members.

Types of directly defined beams

general beam This beam type can represent an arbitrarily oriented and located 1D member.

column This type represents a vertical column.

horizontal beam This type represents a horizontally oriented 1D member.

What all the above-mentioned beam types have in common is that they have a constant cross-section.

Types of beams defined as a "property" of existing beams

haunch beam A haunch beam is a beam of a linearly variable cross-section. The change of cross-section may extend from one end point to the other end point, or from one end point to an intermediate point lying on the 1D member. The cross-section on both ends of a haunch must be of the same shape (e.g. rectangular, solid I-section, etc.).

beam of variable cross-section (arbitrary beam)

A 1D member of this type can consist of multiple intervals each of which can be of different cross-section, material, and other properties.

Common beam parameters Some of 1D member parameters that define the properties of a 1D member are common for all beam types.

Name A name of the 1D member.

Type The beam type is not essential for the definition of a 1D member but may take effect later. For example, some functions performing design and check to technical standards take account of the type.

Cross-section The cross-section influences the properties of a 1D member and defines its shape and also material (as the material is one of cross-section properties).

Alpha This angle determines the rotation of the cross-section of the inserted 1D member around the longitudinal axis of the 1D member.

Geometry

183

Member system line at The 1D member is inserted by means of two insertion points. This property item determines the position of the insertion points on the cross-section of the 1D member.

Eccentricity ey, ez The eccentricity is similar to the previous feature. However, while the Insertion point item only allows for positions of the insertion point in certain characteristic points of the cross-section, the Eccentricity provides for an arbitrary position of the insertion point.

LCS - local co-ordinate system of the beam

This item specifies the way the local axes of the 1D member are determined.

LCS Rotation This value defines the rotation of local axes of the 1D member. The rotation is measured around the 1D member longitudinal axis, i.e. X-axis.

FEM type This item says which type of finite element will be used for the 1D member.

Buckling length Buckling length for individual directions may be specified on each 1D member. For more information see chapter Buckling parameters.

Layer Any entity including a 1D member can be put into a layer. The layer can thus comprise entities that have something in common (e.g. one floor, columns of one floor, columns of the same length, etc.) Once layers are defined and assigned, they can be used to e.g. display just a particular part of the structure, make selection of that particular part, etc.)

Name

The name is used mainly for a unique identification of 1D members (or all entities in general). The name can be displayed on a screen, printed in output documents, used for selections, etc. For example, the name together with an advanced feature of the program command-line can be used for very fast multiple selection of all 1D members whose name starts with the same letter or letters (e.g. SEL B1? selects all 1D members whose name consists of letter B and a number within the range from 10 to 19).

The name is typed as a simple text.

Type

The type is not very important for the very act of 1D member insertion (or definition). The beam type has also no effect on calculation of deflections and internal forces.

However, if one thinks about further analysis and evaluation of the structure in design (code check) modules and if one wants to perform detailing works (e.g. define lattice girder connections), the beam type must be set properly. Especially the module for design and checking of connections uses the type as a crucial piece of information.

The required type can be selected from a list of available options.

Cross-section

The 1D member shape is defined by the selected cross-section type. Beams of "general beam", "column" and "horizontal beam" type have got a constant cross section over their length. On the other hand, "haunch beams" and "arbitrary beams" can have the cross section variable along the longitudinal axis.

The orientation of the cross-section in the 1D member local co-ordinate system can be adjusted via angle Alpha (see below).

The appropriate cross-section can be:

either selected from a list of already defined cross-sections,

or defined as a new cross-section in the project via the [Cross-section manager] button.

Alpha

This parameters defines the inclination of the cross-section Z-axis from the beam local Z-axis. This parameter together with "LCS rotation" provide for an arbitrary "positioning" of a cross-section in a model.

The angle is input in the pre-adjusted angle unit that is shown in square brackets in the corresponding table cell.

Member system line at

By default, a 1D member is inserted into the model by the end points of its midline. The user, however, may decide to insert the 1D member by any of outer corners of the 1D member cross-section. This option is useful when an eccentricity is to be introduced and it coincides with the outer dimensions of the cross-section.

The required Insertion point can be selected from a list of available option.

Eccentricity

If required, an eccentricity may be input in order to provide for more precise definition of structure shape. The eccentricity is defined in the definition axes of the cross-section.

The eccentricity is defined by two values: eccentricity in Y-direction and eccentricity in Z-direction. Both values are input into the appropriate table cells in units that have been pre-adjusted in project settings and that are shown in square brackets in the table cells.

Basic Reference Guide

184

Tip: If the eccentricity value is such that the "eccentric insertion point" coincides with an outer corner of the cross-section, the eccentricity may be defined simply by means of the "Insertion point" parameter (see above).

Local co-ordinate system (LCS)

Each 1D member has got its local co-ordinate system. The user can define the orientation of the system’s Y and Z axes. There are several options:

to accept the default standard setting

to define the orientation of Y-axis either by a vector or by a point that the axis passes through,

to define the orientation of Z-axis either by a vector or by a point that the axis passes through.

to specify that the 1D member local Z-axis is parallel to the Z-axis of the current UCS.

LCS rotation

Sometimes it may be convenient to rotate the local co-ordinate system. For example, if the user wants to define some load acting in a general direction and introduce it in 1D member local co-ordinate axes.

The angle defines the rotation of the local co-ordinate system around the X-axis of the same system.

The angle is input in the pre-adjusted angle unit that is shown in square brackets in the corresponding table cell.

FEM type

From the finite element analysis point of view, the 1D member can act like a standard 1D member or like a hinged (pinned) rod. The difference is that the standard 1D member is capable of transferring all the internal forces, while the latter variant only provides for transferring of the axial force.

The required option can be selected from a provided list.

Layer

Each 1D member can be "put into" a specific layer. The layer, that could be called group, thus can comprise such 1D members that will be in the future treated simultaneously. A good and well thought out grouping of 1D members in layers can significantly facilitate the manipulation with the model, including even the evaluation of results. And what’s more, a professional use of layers may save a lot of the user’s valuable time.

The required layer may be selected from a list of already defined layers. Or, a new layer may be defined for the 1D member.

Buckling parameters Buckling parameters are described in detail in Book Steel Code Check chapter Buckling parameters > Code independent buckling parameters and in chapter related to individual national codes.

Additional information can be found in Book Steel Code Check chapter Buckling parameters > Buckling parameters related to a particular standard.

For adjustment of buckling parameters see chapter Adjusting the buckling parameters.

Beam types

General beam A general 1D member has got only the common beam parameters. Once these parameters are specified, the 1D member may be inserted into the model.

In order to insert a new general 1D member into a model of the structure that is being analysed, you just follow the general procedure for the definition of a new beam. Attention must only be paid to the specification of 1D member’s position. A general 1D member is defined by its two end-points (or we can say nodes). Therefore, the 1D member position must be specified by insertion of two points: first, the starting or begin point and then the end point.

Geometry

185

Column A column is an always vertical 1D member of a constant cross-section. In addition to common beam parameters, it has the following properties:

Length This parameter says what is the length (height) of the inserted column.

Insertion point This option specifies which of the two column end-points is considered as the base (or insertion) point.

In order to insert a new column into a model of the structure, the general procedure for the definition of a new beam should be followed. Attention must only be paid to the specification of 1D member position. A column is defined by its base point (starting point) only. Therefore, the 1D member position must be specified by insertion of a single point.

Note: The statement that the column is always vertical is related to the user co-ordinate system. Therefore, if the user defines such a UCS whose Z-axis is inclined or even horizontal, a column defined in this UCS will not be vertical from the global co-ordinate system’s point of view. It will vertical in the context of the current UCS.

Horizontal beam A horizontal beam is always horizontal and has a constant cross-section. In addition to common beam parameters, beam has the following properties:

Basic Reference Guide

186

Direction A horizontal beam may be oriented either along the global X-axis or global Y-axis.

Length This parameter says what is the length of the inserted beam.

Insertion point This option specifies which of the two beam end-points is considered as the insertion point.

In order to insert a new horizontal beam into a model, you just follow the general procedure for the definition of a new beam. Attention must only be paid to the specification of beam’s position. A horizontal beam’s position is specified by insertion of a single point that determines the location of the adjusted insertion point.

Note: The statement that the horizontal beam is always horizontal is related to the user co-ordinate system. Therefore, if the user defines such a UCS whose Z-axis is inclined or even horizontal, a horizontal beam defined in this UCS will not be horizontal from the global co-ordinate system’s point of view. It will horizontal in the context of the current UCS.

Haunch beam A haunch beam is a 1D member whose cross-section varies along the length of the 1D member. It is also possible that a part of the 1D member is of a constant cross-section and only the remaining part contains a haunch.

Therefore, the list of haunch beam parameters may be rather long. It contains the following items:

Haunch placement Specifies the location of the haunch on the 1D member.

Cross-section Tells which cross-section will be used to form the haunch. (see Note below ! )

List of dimensions that can vary along the haunch length

This list contains the dimension of the assigned cross-section that may vary along the haunch length.

Alignment Specifies the alignment of the haunch.

Length of haunch Determines the length of the haunch.

This item is not accessible if the haunch is defined per the whole 1D member, i.e. from one 1D member end to the other.

Co-ordinate definition Tells if the haunch length is input in relative 1D member co-ordinate (i.e. from zero to one) or in absolute values (i.e. for example in metres).

This item is not accessible if the haunch is defined per the whole 1D member, i.e. from one 1D member end to the other.

Geometry

187

Haunch placement

The variants for the placement are:

From start The haunch starts at the starting point of the 1D member and its length is determined by the value input in cell Length of haunch.

From end The haunch starts at the end point of the 1D member and its length is determined by the value input in cell Length of haunch.

Symmetrical The haunch is located at both ends of the 1D member its length is determined by the value input in cell Length of haunch.

From start – whole length

The cross-section varies along the whole 1D member length. The haunch starts at the starting point of the 1D member.

From end – whole length

The cross-section varies along the whole 1D member length. The haunch starts at the end point of the 1D member.

Basic Reference Guide

188

Symmetrical – whole length

The haunch is at both sides of the 1D member, is symmetrical and extends from each of the 1D member ends towards the 1D member centre.

Cross-section

The cross-section defined here replaces the original cross-section of the 1D member on which the haunch is defined. That means that the original 1D member cross-section can be of any type. When a haunch is defined on a 1D member, the original cross-section is completely forgotten and the haunch cross-section is applied.

Examples

A haunch on a basic cross-section of I shape with the height equal to 300 millimetres and top flange thickness 50 millimetres.

Height of haunch Shape of haunch

H = 500 mm

H = 1000 mm

H = 1000 mm

and

top flange thickness increased to 200 mm

Note: It is important to be aware of the fact that only specific cross-sections can be used for haunches. For example, it is not possible to use a rolled cross-section as it not possible to change its height over the length of a 1D member.

List of dimensions that can vary along the haunch length

The cross-section defined for a haunch can vary in size along the haunch length. However, not all the possible dimensions of the cross-section can vary. The list of dimensions that may be variable is limited and is stated in the haunch property dialogue. What’s more, these dimensions are highlighted in yellow both in the haunch property dialogue and in the cross-section editing dialogue.

Thanks to the "highlighted" dimensions the cross-section changes linearly its shape along the haunch. The haunch starts with the cross-section specified by the "highlighted" values. And at the end of the haunch there is the cross-section of standard dimensions as defined in the Cross-section manager.

Alignment

The alignment of the haunch may be of several types.

In order to explain clearly the meaning of individual option, let’s assume a horizontal 1D member with a haunch whose cross-section is of variable height as well as of variable width.

Geometry

189

Default The alignment of the haunch is adjusted according to the Insertion point of the 1D member. E.g. if the Insertion point of the 1D member is set to Top, Top surface alignment of the haunch is used.

Centre line

side view

plan view

In plan view as well as in side view the midline of the 1D member remains straight and horizontal. Both left and right surface are inclined to allow the cross-section change its width. The centre line of the 1D member (i.e. the centroid axis) of the 1D member remains straight. Both top and bottom surface are symmetrically inclined to allow the cross-section change its height.

Top surface

side view

The top surface of the 1D member remains flat and horizontal. The bottom surface is inclined in order to provide for the change of the height.

In plan view, the midline of the 1D member is straight. Both left and right surface are symmetrically inclined to allow the cross-section change its width.

Bottom surface

side view

The bottom surface of the 1D member remains flat and horizontal. The top surface is inclined in order to provide for the change of the height.

In plan view, the midline of the 1D member is straight. Both left and right surface are symmetrically inclined to allow the cross-section change its width.

Left surface

plan view

The left surface of the 1D member remains flat and horizontal. The right surface is inclined in order to provide for the change of the width.

In side view, the midline of the 1D member is straight. Both top and bottom surface are symmetrically inclined to allow the cross-section change its height.

Right surface

plan view

The right surface of the 1D member remains flat and horizontal. The left surface is inclined in order to provide for the change of the width.

In side view, the midline of the 1D member is straight. Both top and bottom surface are symmetrically inclined to allow the cross-section change its height.

Beam of a variable cross-section Scia Engineer allows the user to define a 1D member whose cross-section varies arbitrarily along the 1D member length.

Basic Reference Guide

190

1D member of arbitrarily variable cross-section can be divided into segments called spans. Each span has got specific properties that are absolutely independent on the properties of adjacent spans.

Coordinate definition Specifies whether individual spans will be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. See note below.

Length Defines the length of the span.

Type of cross-section Specifies how the cross-section of the span varies.

Cross-section or

cross-sections

This option depends on the previous one. In general, it defines the cross-section of the span.

Alignment The alignment is identical to the alignment of a haunch.

Tip: The individual spans can be of different cross-section. And as material is a parameter of cross-section, it is possible that the individual spans are of different material. Note: When spans are defined in absolute coordinates, one must be careful to "cover" the whole length of the 1D member. Otherwise, the "span-profiles" cover only part of the original length of the 1D member. Or, if the sum of the spans exceeds the length of the 1D member, spans overlapping the original length of the 1D member are ignored, in other words, the arbitrary beam is simply cut at the length of the original 1D member.

Type of cross-section

The cross-section of the span and its change can be defines in several ways.

Prismatic The cross-section of the span is constant.

Parametric haunch A standard haunch is inserted into the span.

Two cross-sections Two cross-sections corresponding to the two end-points of the span are defined. The cross-section varies over the span from one section to the other.

Cross-section / Cross-sections

For prismatic cross-section, this item offers the selection of just one required cross-section.

For parametric haunch, two cross-sections must be specified. However, both of are based on one base cross-section. The user can specify parameters of the two end-sections. Each of the end-sections may be either identical with the base cross-section, or changes of the base cross-section dimensions can be specified.

If the "two cross-sections" option is chosen, the user just selects two end cross-sections.

Example

Geometry

191

The 1D member defined in the property table above looks like:

Defining a new beam

Inserting a new beam When inserting a new 1D member into a model the user must distinguish between two situations:

insertion of a general 1D member or column or horizontal beam,

insertion of a 1D member that has got a variable cross-section (either haunch or generally variable cross-section).

The first situation means a real insertion of a new 1D member into the model. The latter means that appropriate properties are defined on already an existing 1D member in the model. The procedures for the definition of a "haunch" beam and a beam with a variable cross-section are given in separate chapters.

The principle of the procedure for insertion of a new 1D member is identical for both a general 1D member and a column and a horizontal beam. It is clear that there are some differences between the individual beam types, and therefore there must be

Basic Reference Guide

192

slight differences also in the defining procedure. However, the differences are so small that a united procedure may be presented here and the differences discussed in chapters dealing with appropriate beam type.

Procedure for insertion of a beam

1. In the main tree menu, select and open service Structure. (As an alternative, service Structure may also be opened via its toolbar button or via the menu function).

2. In the Structure service, open the appropriate function according to 1D member type you want to insert.

3. Fill in the displayed dialogue, i.e. define the properties of the 1D member(s) you want to define in the next step.

4. Confirm the property dialogue by pressing [OK] button.

5. Define the position of the 1D member (using a mouse and any of available snap mode options or by typing the co-ordinates on the command line). This point varies according to the selected beam type (see General beam, Column, or Horizontal beam chapter).

6. The 1D member has been inserted.

7. Either (i) close the function or (ii) insert another 1D member, i.e. repeat steps 5 and 6.

8. Close the Structure service.

Inserting a new beam of a complex axis shape Real structures are very often composed of members whose longitudinal axes are not straight-line segments. Scia Engineer enables the users to draw almost any shape they may find in architectural sketches.

The principle for the insertion of a non-straight 1D member remains the same as for a straight one (i.e. general beam). The only difference is in the definition of the endpoints of the 1D member.

The procedure for the insertion of a polygonal 1D member

1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the 1D member do the following:

2. Click button [New polyline] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into the "point definition mode".

3. Enter the vertices of the polygon one after another.

4. Press [Esc] key to finish the definition of the polygon.

5. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a 1D member, i.e. close the function or service.

The procedure for the insertion of a circular arc 1D member

1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the 1D member do the following:

2. Click button [New arc] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into the "point definition mode".

3. Enter the starting point of the arc.

4. Enter the intermediate point of the arc.

5. Enter the end point of the arc.

6. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a 1D member, i.e. close the function or service.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

The procedure for the definition of a Bezier-curve beam

1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the 1D member do the following:

2. Click button [New Bezier] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into the "point definition mode".

3. Enter the starting point of the curve.

4. Enter the end point of the arc.

5. Enter the 2nd control point of the curve.

6. Enter the 3rd control point of the curve.

7. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a 1D member, i.e. close the function or service.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure.

The procedure for the definition of a parabolic-curve 1D member

1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the 1D member do the following:

2. Click button [New parabolic arc] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into the "point definition mode".

3. Enter the starting point of the curve.

4. Enter the intermediate point of the curve (i.e. the vertex of the parabola).

Geometry

193

5. Enter the end point of the curve.

6. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a 1D member, i.e. close the function or service.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure.

The procedure for the insertion of a spline-curve 1D member

1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the 1D member do the following:

2. Click button [New spline] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into the "point definition mode".

3. Enter the vertices of the spline one after another.

4. Press [Esc] key to finish the definition of the spline curve.

5. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a 1D member, i.e. close the function or service.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure.

Note: Please note, that it is possible to enter multiple "shaped" 1D members from within one call of Drawing a member function. You can enter one shape (e.g. polygon), press [Esc] to finish the definition of the polygon. You however are still "inside" the Drawing a member function. Therefore, you may for example click [New arc] button, define an arc and again you are still "inside" the Drawing a member function. This fact can be easily visually verified on the screen. As far as you are still "inside" the Drawing a member function, the inserted 1D members are drawn in RED colour. Only when you close the Drawing a member function, the 1D members are redrawn in violet colour which means that they are selected.

Defining a haunch on a 1D member A haunch beam is not a special type of 1D member in the full meaning of the word. A haunch is in fact a property that can be assigned to any previously defined 1D member. Consequently, the definition of a haunch beam is always a two-step procedure.

First step is the insertion of the 1D member itself (either a general beam or column or horizontal beam). This is then followed by the specification of parameters defining the haunch.

The procedure for the definition of a haunch

1. Insert the 1D member that is supposed to contain a haunch and close the New beam function. (Unless it has been made earlier).

2. In the tree menu open service Structure.

3. Start function Haunch.

4. Input and select required parameters and properties of the haunch.

5. Confirm the setting with [OK] button.

6. Select the 1D member(s) that should contain the haunch.

7. Close the function.

8. Close the Structure service.

Note: A standard 1D member (i.e. horizontal beam, column or general 1D member) is defined with a specific cross-section. This cross-section is one of the beam’s parameters. However, when a haunch is defined on this 1D member, the haunch defines its own cross-section and assigns it to the 1D member. The original cross-section is overloaded (forgotten for the moment). However, if the haunch is later deleted, the 1D member remains in its position and takes back its original cross-section.

Defining a 1D member with a variable cross-section Similarly to haunch beam, also this beam type is not a specific type in the full meaning of the word. Once again it is an advanced property of a 1D member. Therefore, the procedure is similar to the definition of a haunch.

The procedure for the definition of a 1D member with variable cross-section

1. Insert the 1D member that is supposed to contain a haunch and close the "New beam" function. (Unless it has been made earlier).

2. In the tree menu open service Structure.

3. Start function Arbitrary profile.

4. Define required number of spans.

5. Input and select required parameters and properties of the spans.

6. Confirm the setting with [OK] button.

7. Select the 1D member(s) that should be of the specified type.

8. Close the function.

9. Close the Structure service.

Basic Reference Guide

194

Slabs

Slab types

Plate

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the slab.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.

Note: This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection of proper type.

Material Defines the material of the slab.

FEM model Isotropic

A normal isotropic slab with identical properties in all directions is used.

Orthotropic

An orthotropic slab with different properties in two orthogonal directions is used.

Membrane

Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the slab.

Thickness It is possible to input a slab of constant or variable thickness.

See below.

Thickness value For constant thickness, just one thickness value must be defined.

For variable thickness, two thickness values must be defined.

Variable thickness type If the variable thickness type is selected, the user must specify the direction in which the thickness varies.

Point 1 Defines the first point used for the definition of variable thickness.

Point 2 Defines the second point used for the definition of variable thickness.

Member system-plane at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of the slab.

Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS Z axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Example of a slab

Geometry

195

Variable thickness

The variable thickness of a slab can be input in the property table of a slab. Two points must be input to define the gradient of thickness change. Corresponding thickness values are specified for each point. The adjusted gradient is related to the global co-ordinate system. It is advisable to input the two points in place where the thickness change starts and ends. Otherwise it may happen that due to the extrapolation of thickness, the final thickness value becomes negative, which would result in an error message during the calculation of the project.

Example of a slab of variable thickness

Note: The definition of a slab of variable thickness is a two-step procedure. First, a slab of a constant thickness must be input. This slab may be then modified and changed into a slab of variable thickness. The reason is that the "property" of variable thickness is bound to the particular nodes of the slab that are not yet known in the phase of slab input. In other words, variable thickness is similar to a haunch on a 1D member – it is an additional property of a slab, not the basic, fundamental parameter.

The effect of LCS Z-axis parameter

Parameter LCS Z-axis controls the direction of local Z-axis of the slab. It should be remembered that the parameter might affect the direction of load defined in LCS of the slab.

normal orientation

swapped orientation

Wall

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the wall.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.

Note: This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection of proper type.

Basic Reference Guide

196

Material Defines the material of the wall.

FEM model Isotropic

A normal isotropic wall with identical properties in all directions is used.

Orthotropic

An orthotropic wall with different properties in two orthogonal directions is used.

Membrane

Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the wall.

Thickness The thickness of the wall is always constant.

Thickness value The thickness value must be defined.

Member system-plane at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of the slab.

Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS Z axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily turned around. This check box does it.

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Height Defines the height of the wall.

Insertion point The wall may be input using its base or its top edge.

The effect of LCS Z-axis parameter

Parameter LCS Z-axis controls the direction of local Z-axis of the wall. It should be remembered that the parameter might affect the direction of load defined in LCS of the wall. For more information see chapter Plate.

Slab components

Introduction to slab components

There may be a situation that it is convenient to separate a part of a main slab and specify special parameters for this part. Scia Engineer enables the user to define various types of such a part.

Subregion

A subregion is a slab defined inside the main slab. This subregion may be of different thickness, material, etc. than the main slab. For example, a subregion may be useful to define a local thickening of the slab, to implement area load acting on a part of the slab only, etc. Internal edge An internal edge is a line intersecting the main slab. For example, line load may be defined along this edge. There are other slab components available: opening, internal node, rib.

The number of subregions and opening in the main slab is not limited. Individual subregions and openings may even overlap the main region or intersect each other. The final shape is found as the intersection of all defined subregions and openings with the order of definition taken into account.

It is not possible, e.g. to insert a subregion into an opening. However, it is possible to do so if at least one edge of the subregion lies on any edge of the opening.

On the other hand, it is possible to define a main slab into an opening inserted into another main slab.

Subregion of a slab

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the subregion of the slab.

Material Defines the material of the subregion of the slab.

Thickness Defines the thickness of the subregion.

Member system-plane at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of the slab.

Geometry

197

Eccentricity z If required, eccentricity of the subregion of the slab may be input.

2D member (informative) Informs about the "owner-slab" of the subregion.

Opening in a slab

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the opening.

2D member Informs about the master plate.

Panel If ON, the opening represents a panel that can be loaded and whose load will be transformed into the edges of the opening.

For more read chapter Geometry > Slabs > Defining a new load panel .

Cut 1D member If ON, the opening cuts and removes the ribs if the opening is being inserted into a ribbed slab.

Cut out opening in 1D member

If ON and if the opening in the slab cuts also the ribs of the ribbed plate, then new openings are created in the ribs (beams).

An opening may be input in two ways: (i) as a normal opening that lies fully inside the main slab, (ii) as an opening that overlaps the main slab – such an opening then serves as a "cut" to the main slab.

Basic Reference Guide

198

normal opening

opening as a cut – definition phase

opening as a cut – final shape

Internal edge in a slab

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the internal edge.

Geometry

199

Internal node in a slab

If required, it is possible to define a node inside any slab. This node may be used to attach another entity, for example.

Example

The following couple of pictures show an example of an internal node. The first picture shows the symbol that is used to depict an internal node in a slab.

The second picture then shows the tooltip that appears on the screen whenever the mouse cursor passes over the node.

Rib in the slab

Name Defines the name of the rib.

Basic Reference Guide

200

Type Informs about the type of the entity.

Analysis model This parameter defines how the rib will be considered in the analysis.

Standard = the rib of a standard cross-section

Cellular beam = the rib is made of a cellular beam

"special cellular beam parameters"

If the cellular beam is selected, the dialogue allows for input of additional parameters defining the position of posts in the beam.

Cross-section Defines the cross-section of the rib.

Alignment Specifies the alignment of the rib:

Bottom

The rib is attached to the bottom of the slab. The eccentricity is calculated automatically as the sum of the half of slab thickness and the distance from the bottom slab face to the centroid of the cross-section.

Top

The rib is attached to the top of the slab. The eccentricity is calculated automatically as the sum of the half of slab thickness and the distance from the top slab face to the centroid of the cross-section.

Centre

Middle axis of the rib and the slab are coincident. The final eccentricity is equal to zero. The calculation model shows a partial doubling of stiffness of the (i) slab and (ii) the rib.

Shape of rib There are several possible shapes of the rib

T symmetric

slab right

slab left

slab non-sym

Effective width Specifies how the effective width is defined:

Default

The effective width is determined as a multiple of rib width. The multiple can be defined in Calculation, Mesh > Solver setup > Number of thicknesses of rib plate.

Width

The effective width is explicitly specified. The value can be input below.

Number of thicknesses

The effective width is determined as a multiple of the thickness. The multiple can be input below this parameter.

for internal forces Two types of effective width can be input. Both the value are used for the modelling of composite cross-section. Value "for internal forces" is used to recalculate internal of the created composite cross-section section. Value "for check" (see below) is used to define the cross-section for the needs of design and check of reinforced cross-section.

Usually, a rectangular section is attached to the slab creating the final T or L section. However, also other library cross-sections can be used to form various composite sections (e.g. steel I section + concrete reinforced plate).

for check See above.

FEM type Defines the type of finite element:

Standard

The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.

Axial force only

Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of transferring the axial force only.

Buckling and relative lengths

Can be used to specify buckling lengths.

Layer Specifies the layer of the rib.

2D member Informs about the "associated" slab.

Geometry parameters

Geometry

201

These parameters are shown in the property window of an already defined rib. They are not displayed when a new rib is being defined.

Length Tells the length of the rib.

Shape Informs about the shape of the entity.

Beg. node Specifies the starting node of the rib. This parameter can be edited, which would affect the location and length of the rib. Before editing, you must find the name of node you want to use as the beginning node.

End node Similar to above. Defines the end-node of the rib.

Structural model

This set of parameters can be used to specify the structural model of the rib. The structural model is important especially if drawings and/or impressive pictures of the structure are to be made.

See chapter Geometry > Structural model > Parameters of structural model for more details.

Shell

Introduction to shells

Scia Engineer enables the user to define curved 2D members – called shells in Scia Engineer. They are defined by border lines (i.e. border curves). At the moment Scia Engineer accepts if the shape of the shell is defined by four, three or two curves / straight lines.

Some shapes require certain "mathematical imagination" when they are created. Therefore, the basic shapes has been pre-created in the form of templates and can be easily input through user blocks.

The following pictures present a few samples of what can be created in Scia Engineer.

Basic Reference Guide

202

Geometry

203

Shell parameters

Shell parameters

Name Identifies the shell. It is useful e.g. for output tables and for selections made from the command line.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.

Note: This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection of proper type.

Material Specifies the material.

FEM model Isotropic

A normal isotropic shell with identical properties in all directions is used.

Orthotropic

An orthotropic shell with different properties in two orthogonal directions is used.

Membrane

Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the shell.

Thickness / Material Thickness is constant in case of shells.

Thickness value Specifies the thickness.

Member system-plane at The input-plane (system-plane) of the shell may be in the mid-surface of the shell, at the top surface or bottom surface of the shell.

Eccentricity If required, z-eccentricity of the shell may be input.

LCS Type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS Z axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the shell may be easily turned around. This check box does it.

Layer Specifies the layer.

Basic Reference Guide

204

Membranes

Prerequisites for membrane elements

Theoretical assumptions

Membrane elements are shell elements with zero flexural stiffness and zero axial compression stiffness.

Prerequisites

In Project settings > Functionality options Nonlinearity > Membrane elements and 2nd order – geometrical nonlinearity must be selected.

In Calculation, Mesh > Solver Setup the parameter Nonlinearity > Geometrical nonlinearity – 2nd order must be set to Newton-Raphson method (even the Modified Newton-Raphson is not allowed for this type of calculation).

Usually the nonlinear calculation must be run in order to obtain realistic results. This means that at least one nonlinear combination must be defined.

Note: Technically speaking, Scia Engineer allows you to run even a linear calculation with the membrane members defined, but the results may be seriously affected (negatively) by the one-step solution. Therefore, in general, use the nonlinear calculation for the membrane members.

Limitations for membrane elements

There are several limitations concerning the membrane elements.

1. Membrane elements can be modelled in general XYZ – environment only.

2. It is not possible to calculate CDD for these membrane elements.

3. It is not possible to set orthotropic parameters for the membrane elements.

4. It is not possible to define ribs for these membrane elements.

5. It is not possible to define prestressed tendons for these elements.

6. It is not possible to use other, steel and aluminium materials.

7. It is not possible to set physical non-linearity for these elements.

Orthotropy

Orthotropic properties of slab members

The procedure to define an orthotropic slab

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start any function for the input of a slab member (plane 2D member, wall, shell member).

3. The property dialogue opens on the screen.

4. Fill in the required parameters.

5. Set the FEM model parameter to orthotropic.

6. A new item appears in the dialogue: Orthotropy.

7. Click the three-dot button [...] in this added line.

8. A dialogue with orthotropy parameters is opened on the screen.

9. Input correct values.

10. Confirm with [OK].

11. Confirm the slab-property-dialogue.

12. Input the slab member.

IMPORTANT: The direction of orthotropy is in general defined by the x-axis of the finite element. If the orthotropic 2D member has been input using function Plate, it is possible to control the direction of orhotropy. The local x-axis of each finite element follows the direction of the local x-axis of the plate. If the local x-axis of the plate is rotated, the direction of orthotropy rotates as well. On the other hand, if the plate is input using function Shell, it is not possible to control explicitly the direction of local x-axis of individual finite elements. Therefore, if orthotropy is to be applied in your model, it MUST be defined for Plates and not for Shells.

Orthotropy parameters

There are two cases of orthotropy :

1. physical orthotropy caused by different moduli in the x and y direction, i.e. a real material property due to the technology of material production (various layers, wood, etc.)

2. technical or shape orthotropy of ribbed plates / walls

Geometry

205

a) Physical orthotropy

First we describe the parameters for the physical orthotropy. The orthotropic material is defined by the following physical constants:

h E1 E2 G12 12 G13 G23

The value of 21 is determined as follows :

v21 = v12 * E2/E1

The shear modulus G12 is determined using Kirchoff’s plate:

The parameters G13 and G23 are necessary because Mindlin’s plate element is used, with a substantial influence of shear forces qx and qy on the deformations.

We assume a plate/wall with a uniform thickness h.

The parameters entered in the program are calculated from these physical constants as follows:

A. For a plate element

For a plate element the angle Beta between the direction 1 (for which the orthotropy parameters are entered) and the local x direction of the element can be entered.

B. For a wall element

C. For a shell element

A shell element is a plate / wall element and possesses both kinds of physical constants with no additional constants.

b) Technical orthotropy

For technical or shape orthotropy we refer to P. Timoshenko, S. Woinowsky, Theory of plates and shells, McGraw Hill, second edition, 1987. The relation between the bending moments and the curvature of an orthotropic plate is given by the following relation:

Basic Reference Guide

206

The definition of moments an curvatures are as follows:

The following notations are used in the program:

D11 = Dx

D22 = Dy

D33 = 0.5 Dxy

D12 = Dx

D44 and D55 are added because Mindlin elements with shear force deformation are used. In many cases there are no simple formulas to calculate these stiffnesses. Shear force deformation is neglected (as by other FEM elements) when big values are entered for this two constants. Further a recommendation how to calculate these factors in some practical cases is given.

Determination of rigidities in various specific cases:

The expressions given for the rigidities are subject to slight modifications according to the nature of the material employed. In particular, all values of torsional rigidity Dxy based on purely theoretical considerations should be regarded as a first approximation, and a direct test must be recommended in order to obtain more reliable values of the modulus G. Usual values of the rigidities in some cases of practical interest are given below:

b.1) Isotropic plate

An isotropic plate with constant thickness is defined by : thickness h, modulus of elasticity E and Poisson coefficient :

b.2) Reinforced concrete slabs

Let Es be Young’s modulus of steel, Ec that of the concrete, c Poisson’s ratio for concrete, and n = Es / Ec. For a slab with two way reinforcement in the directions x and y we can assume:

Geometry

207

In these equations, Icx is the moment of inertia of the slab material, Isx that of the reinforcement taken about the neutral axis in the section x = constant, and Icy and Isy are the respective values for the section y = constant.

It is obvious that these values are not independent of the state of the concrete. For instance, any difference of the reinforcement in the directions x and y will affect the ratio Dx / Dy much more after cracking of the concrete than before.

b.3) Slab reinforced by a set of equidistant ribs

In this case the orthotropic plate theory can only give a rough idea of the actual state of stress and strain of the slab.

With :

E = modulus of the material (for instance, concrete)

I = moment of inertia of a T section of width a1

Az = shear surface of a T section of width a1

C = torsional rigidity of one rib = h / H

When you enter this T section a geometric section, I, Az and C are calculated automatically by the program.

Then we may assume:

Basic Reference Guide

208

with D’xy the torsional rigidity of the slab without the rib

You can check this by taking the ribs not into account. The solution must be the same as for isotropic plates in section b.1.

b.4) Gridworks

The gridwork consists of two systems of parallel beams spaced equal distances apart in the x and y directions and rigidly connected at their points of intersection. The beams are supported at the ends, and the load is applied normal to the xy plane. If the distances a1 and b1 between the beams are small in comparison with the dimensions a and b of the grid, and if the flexural rigidity of each of the beams parallel to the x axis is equal to I1 and that of each of the beams parallel to y axis is equal to I2, the coefficients are as follows:

For all types of elements the thickness which is taken into account for the calculation of the dead weight must be entered in the Load t field. This thickness is multiplied with the density of the selected material.

For more information we refer to a separate document Library_of_Orthotropy_Theory_enu.pdf stored on the installation DVD.

Orthotropy manager

When an orthotropic plate is to be analysed, the user must input the required orthotropy parameters: in total 10 different values.

In order to make the task simpler, the program stores the orthotropy data in a library called Orthotropy. Individual items (types of orthotropy) from this library can be edited in the Orthotropy database manager (a standard Scia Engineer database manager). Moreover, the orthotropy manager enables the user to select from predefined types of orthotropy. For these types, the ten parameters of orthotropy are not input directly by the user, but are calculated by the program from other specific parameters input by the user.

The parameters for individual types of orthotropy can be divided into three groups:

general,

bending (flexural) effects,

membrane effects.

General parameters

General parameters are common to all types orthotropy.

Name Specifies then name of the orthotropy.

Type of orthotropy Selects the required type (see below).

Types of orthotropy

Geometry

209

Standard

This is a general orthotropy. For this type of orthotropy, the user must manually input all the required parameters: D11, D22, D12, D33, D44, D55m d11, d22, d12 and d33.

In addition to the general parameters, this type defines the following parameters.

Thickness of plate/wall Defines the thickness of the orthotropic element.

Material Selects the material of the plate.

Two heights

This type of orthotropy is suitable for slabs that feature "different height" in two parallel directions. For example, this type can be used for lattice girder slabs.

The slab is composed of panels covered by an in-situ cast topping. The panels and the topping are "linked" together through reinforcement protruding from the panels and entering the topping. Despite it, the final slab features different characteristics in the direction of the panels and in the perpendicular direction.

Flexural behaviour is defined by the following parameters

Material Selects the material of the plate.

Effective height d1 The total depth of the final slab.

Effective height d2 The depth of the in-situ cast topping.

Torsion reduction coefficient

Torsion reduction coefficient; using phi_f –> 0, the so called "torsion-weak" plate models can be simulated, providing reduction of lifting corner forces as well as the lower/upper corner main reinforcement.

Shear reduction coefficient Shear reduction coefficient for a rectangular cross-section.

Membrane behaviour is defined by means of the following parameters

Effective height h1 Specifies the effective height h1 for the membrane effects.

Effective height h2 Specifies the effective height h2 for the membrane effects.

Shear reduction coefficient Membrane shear reduction coefficient; using phi_m –> 0, the so called "shear-weak" wall models can be simulated, e. g. aimed at excluding such members (maybe masonry walls) from the horizontal stiffening system of the structure.

Basic Reference Guide

210

One direction slab

This type can be applied e.g. to hollow core slabs. Similarly to the type above, the final slab is composed of prefabricated panels and in-situ cast topping.

However, the main purpose of the topping is to make the top surface even. The topping does not really co-act with the panels.

Flexural behaviour is defined by the following parameters

Material Selects the material of the plate.

CSS Defines the cross-section of the prefabricated panel.

L Specifies the axial distance of two adjacent panels.

h Defines the depth of the in-situ cast topping.

Membrane behaviour is defined by means of the following parameters

Effective height h1 Specifies the effective height h1 for the membrane effects.

Effective height h2 Specifies the effective height h2 for the membrane effects.

Slab with ribs

This type represents a standard ribbed plate with ribs oriented in one direction.

Geometry

211

Flexural behaviour is defined by the following parameters

Rib – rib input type Selects the way the rib dimensions are input.

CSS lib

The rib is selected from the cross-section manager.

Input

The dimensions of the rib are input directly by the user.

Rib – cross-section (only for rib input type set to CSS lib)

Selects the required cross-section of the rib from the project database of defined cross-sections.

Rib – spacing a1 Defines the distance between two adjacent ribs.

Rib – material (only for rib input type set to Input)

Selects the material of the rib.

Rib – thickness, t (only for rib input type set to Input)

Defines the width of the rib.

Rib – depth, h (only for rib input type set to Input)

Defines the depth of the rib.

Slab – material Selects the material of the plate.

Slab – height, h Defines the depth of the plate.

Membrane behaviour is defined by means of the following parameters

Effective height h1 Specifies the effective height h1 for the membrane effects.

Effective height h2 Specifies the effective height h2 for the membrane effects.

Grid work

This type represents a ribbed plate with ribs oriented in two perpendicular directions.

Basic Reference Guide

212

Flexural behaviour is defined by the following parameters

beam 1

Spacing Defines the distance between ribs in direction 1.

Material Selects the material of the rib in direction 1.

Width of beam Defines the width of the rib in direction 1.

Depth of beam Defines the depth of the rib in direction 1.

beam 2

Spacing Defines the distance between ribs in direction 2.

Material Selects the material of the rib in direction 12.

Width of beam Defines the width of the rib in direction 2.

Depth of beam Defines the depth of the rib in direction 2.

Membrane behaviour is defined by means of the following parameters

Effective height h1 Specifies the effective height h1 for the membrane effects.

Effective height h2 Specifies the effective height h2 for the membrane effects.

Plates with beams

Plates with beams

Scia Engineer offers a set of function for fast definition of non-ordinary slabs. Special functions are available for:

ribbed slab (isotropic, orthotropic, membrane),

prefab slab, i.e. plate composed of prefabricated beams (isotropic and orthotropic).

Ribbed slab

This function enables the user to input a plate with stiffening ribs. The calculation takes this entity as a real ribbed plate. The same result can be obtained by a separate input of the plate and the ribs using two separate functions (Structure > Plane 2D member + Structure > Plate rib).

See also Defining a new ribbed beams.

Geometry

213

Prefab slab

If you have a floor composed of prefabricated panels (e.g. hollow core slabs), the checks that are to performed require that these panels be defined. On the other hand, the analysis of the whole structure can be performed with a "substitute" plate whose properties correspond to the system of the panels.

Using the "prefab slab" it is possible to have a single slab that is used in the finite element calculation and, at the same time, to have an assembly of prefabricated panels that can be checked using a special check for that type of structure. Also the drawings show the real arrangement of the structure.

It is not possible to define additional data such as supports, masses, loads, etc. on the beams in this type of plate.

All features of this type of plate can be fully exploited in connection with function upgrading a 2D project to 1D project.

See also Defining a new prefab plate.

Basic Reference Guide

214

Defining a new slab

Defining a new plate

Procedure for the definition of a new plate

1. Open function Plane slab:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Plane slab,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane slab.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Input individual vertices of the slab.

5. Close the function.

Note: If two overlapping slabs are input, the question that arises is "what property should be assigned to the intersection of the two slabs?" The answer is simple: "The parameters of the later input slab are those of the highest priority."

Defining a new wall

Procedure for the definition of a new wall

1. Open function Wall:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Wall,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Wall.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Input individual vertices of the wall.

5. Close the function.

Defining a new subregion

Procedure for the definition of a new subregion

1. Open function Subregion:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Subregion,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane component > Plane slab.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select the slab where the subregion is to be inserted.

5. Press [Esc].

6. Input individual vertices of the subregion.

7. Close the function.

Geometry

215

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new opening

Procedure for the definition of a new opening

1. Open function plane Opening:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Opening,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane component > Opening.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select the slab where the opening is to be inserted.

5. Press [Esc].

6. Input individual vertices of the opening.

7. Close the function.

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new internal edge

Procedure for the definition of a new internal edge

1. Open function plane Internal edge:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Internal edge,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane component > Internal edge.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select the slab where the internal edge is to be inserted.

5. Press [Esc].

6. Input the starting and end point of the internal edge.

7. Close the function.

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining an internal node in a slab

Procedure for the definition of a new internal node in a slab

1. Open function Internal node:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Internal node,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function 2D member component > Internal node.

2. Select the slab where you need to insert the rib into.

3. Press [Esc].

4. Insert the node.

5. Close the function.

Defining a new rib

Procedure for the definition of a new plate rib

1. Open function Plate rib:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Plate rib,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function 2D components component > Plate rib.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

Basic Reference Guide

216

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select the slab where you need to insert the rib into.

5. Press [Esc].

6. Input the starting and end point of the rib.

7. Close the function.

Note: There are a few limitations concerning the rib: (i) the rib must not "overlap" the slab, the rib must be attached to the slab along its whole length, (ii) the rib must not intersect an opening or a subregion, (iii) the rib however may go along the edge of an opening. (iv) a geometric manipulation with an earlier defined rib may result in an forbidden configuration of the rib; Such a situation is corrected during the Check of data before calculation. Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new plate with beams

Input parameters for the plate

Name Defines the name of the slab.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.

This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection of proper type.

Material Defines the material of the slab.

FEM model Isotropic

A normal isotropic slab with identical properties in all directions is used.

Orthotropic

An orthotropic slab with different properties in two orthogonal directions is used.

Membrane

Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the slab.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the plate.

Member system plane at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of the slab.

Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.

normal orientation

swapped orientation

Geometry

217

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Geometry of beams (part of the input parameters for the plate)

Position The position of the beams can be defined by the distance between two adjacent beams or by the number of beams that is required under the plate.

Offset Available only if Position set to Distance.

This value defines the offset of the first beam from the plate edge. The distance is measured in the positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.

The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Offset first

Offset last

Available only if Position set to Number.

These values define the offset of the first and last beam from the plate edge. The numbering of beams is made in the positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.

The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Distance Specifies the axial distance between two adjacent beams.

Alignment Top

The beams are laid on the top surface of the plate.

Centre

The axis of the beam is at the same level as the middle-plane of the plate.

Bottom

The beams are attached to the bottom surface of the plate.

Generate subregions If ON, the final plate is defined with as many subregions as there are beams in the plate. One beam is accompanied with one subregion and they together create a T-section composed of the beam (i.e. rib) and the effective slab width.

Input parameters for the beams (parameters from the separate dialogue for the beams)

Name Defines the name of the rib.

Type rib Informs about the type of the entity.

Cross-section Defines the cross-section of the rib.

Alignment Disabled.

Informs about the alignment adjusted in the plate parameters.

Shape of rib T symmetric

Basic Reference Guide

218

The beam and the plate form a regular T-section.

slab left

The plate is on the left side of the effective slab width.

slab right

The plate is on the right side of the effective slab width.

slab non-sym

The final cross-section is not symmetrical. The user must define the effective width on the left of the rib and on the right of the rib.

Effective width Specifies how the effective width is defined:

Default

The effective width is determined as a multiple of rib width. The multiple can be defined in Calculation, Mesh > Solver setup > Number of thicknesses of rib plate.

Width

The effective width is explicitly specified. The value can be input below.

Number of thicknesses

The effective width is determined as a multiple of the thickness. The multiple can be input below this parameter.

for internal forces Two types of effective width can be input. Both the values are used for the modelling of composite cross-section. Value "for internal forces" is used to recalculate internal of the created composite cross-section section. Value "for check" (see below) is used to define the cross-section for the needs of design and check of reinforced cross-section.

Usually, a rectangular section is attached to the slab creating the final T or L section. However, also other library cross-sections can be used to form various composite sections (e.g. steel I section + concrete reinforced plate).

for check See above.

FEM type Defines the type of finite element:

Standard

The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.

Axial force only

Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of transferring the axial force only.

Buckling and relative lengths

Can be used to specify buckling lengths.

Layer Specifies the layer of the rib.

2D member Informs about the "associated" slab.

The procedure to define a new plate with beams

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function 2D member > Ribbed slab.

3. Set the FEM model to Isotropic with beams or Orthotropic with beams or Membrane with beams.

4. Fill in other parameters (see below).

5. Confirm with [OK].

6. Define the shape of the plate.

7. When the shape definition is complete the input dialogue with beam (rib) parameters is opened on the screen.

8. Fill in the required parameters (see above).

9. Confirm with [OK].

10. The input is complete.

Defining a new plate from beams

Input parameters for the plate

Geometry

219

Name Defines the name of the slab.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.

This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection of proper type.

Material Defines the material of the slab.

FEM model Isotropic

A normal isotropic slab with identical properties in all directions is used.

Orthotropic

An orthotropic slab with different properties in two orthogonal directions is used.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the plate.

Member system plane at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of the slab.

Eccentricity z If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.

normal orientation

swapped orientation

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Geometry of beams (part of the input parameters for the plate)

Position The position of the beams can be defined by the distance between two adjacent beams or by the number of beams that is required under the plate.

Basic Reference Guide

220

Offset Available only if Position set to Distance.

This value defines the offset of the first beam from the plate edge. The distance is measured in the positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.

The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Offset first

Offset last

Available only if Position set to Number.

These values define the offset of the first and last beam from the plate edge. The numbering of beams is made in the positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.

The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Distance Specifies the axial distance between two adjacent beams.

Position in plate Specifies the position of the beam over the height of the plate.

Alignment Top

The beams are laid on the top surface of the plate.

Centre

The axis of the beam is at the same level as the middle-plane of the plate.

Bottom

The beams are attached to the bottom surface of the plate.

Beams eccentricity Z Defines the eccentricity of the beams in the Z-axis.

Generate subregions If ON, the final plate is defined with as many subregions as there are beams in the plate. One beam is accompanied with one subregion and they together create a T-section composed of the beam (i.e. rib) and the effective slab width.

Input parameters for the beams (parameters from the separate dialogue for the beams)

Name A name of the 1D member.

Type The beam type is not essential for the definition of a 1D member but may take effect later. For example, some functions performing design and check to technical standards take account of the type.

Cross-section The cross-section influences the properties of a 1D member and defines its shape and also material (as the material is one of cross-section properties).

Alpha This angle determines the rotation of the cross-section of the inserted 1D member around the longitudinal axis of the 1D member.

Member system line at Disabled.

Informs about the alignment adjusted in the plate parameters.

Geometry

221

Eccentricity ey, ez Disabled.

LCS Disabled. Set to z by vector.

LCS Rotation Disabled.

FEM type Defines the type of finite element:

Standard

The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.

Axial force only

Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of transferring the axial force only.

Buckling length Disabled.

Layer Any entity including a 1D member can be put into a layer. The layer can thus comprise entities that have something in common (e.g. one floor, columns of one floor, columns of the same length, etc.) Once layers are defined and assigned, they can be used to e.g. display just a particular part of the structure, make selection of that particular part, etc.)

The procedure to define a new plate from beams

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function 2D Member > Prefab slab.

3. Set the FEM model to Isotropic from beams or Orthotropic from beams.

4. Fill in other parameters (see below).

5. Confirm with [OK].

6. Define the shape of the plate.

7. When the shape definition is complete the input dialogue with beam (rib) parameters is opened on the screen.

8. Fill in the required parameters (see above).

9. Confirm with [OK].

10. The input is complete.

Defining a new load panel with beams

Input parameters for the plate

Name Defines the name of the slab.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.

This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection of proper type.

Analysis model Only type Standard is available.

Material Defines the material of the slab.

FEM model Only option Load panel with beams is available.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the plate.

Member system plane at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of the slab.

Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

Basic Reference Guide

222

Swap orientation The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.

normal orientation

swapped orientation

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Geometry of beams (part of the input parameters for the plate)

Position The position of the beams can be defined by the distance between two adjacent beams or by the number of beams that is required under the plate.

Offset Available only if Position set to Distance.

This value defines the offset of the first beam from the plate edge. The distance is measured in the positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.

The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Offset first

Offset last

Available only if Position set to Number.

These values define the offset of the first and last beam from the plate edge. The numbering of beams is made in the positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.

The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Distance Specifies the axial distance between two adjacent beams.

Position in plate Specifies the position of the beam over the height of the plate.

Geometry

223

Alignment Top

The beams are laid on the top surface of the plate.

Centre

The axis of the beam is at the same level as the middle-plane of the plate.

Bottom

The beams are attached to the bottom surface of the plate.

Beams eccentricity Z Defines the eccentricity of the beams in the Z-axis.

Input parameters for the beams (parameters from the separate dialogue for the beams)

Name A name of the 1D member.

Type The beam type is not essential for the definition of a 1D member but may take effect later. For example, some functions performing design and check to technical standards take account of the type.

Cross-section The cross-section influences the properties of a 1D member and defines its shape and also material (as the material is one of cross-section properties).

Alpha This angle determines the rotation of the cross-section of the inserted 1D member around the longitudinal axis of the 1D member.

Member system line at Disabled.

Informs about the alignment adjusted in the plate parameters.

Eccentricity ey, ez Disabled.

LCS Disabled. Set to z by vector.

LCS Rotation Disabled.

FEM type Defines the type of finite element:

Standard

The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.

Axial force only

Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of transferring the axial force only.

Buckling length Disabled.

Layer Any entity including a 1D member can be put into a layer. The layer can thus comprise entities that have something in common (e.g. one floor,

Basic Reference Guide

224

columns of one floor, columns of the same length, etc.) Once layers are defined and assigned, they can be used to e.g. display just a particular part of the structure, make selection of that particular part, etc.)

The procedure to define a new load panel with beams

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function Panel > Load to beams.

3. Fill in other parameters (see below).

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. Define the shape of the plate.

6. When the shape definition is complete the input dialogue with beam (rib) parameters is opened on the screen.

7. Fill in the required parameters (see above).

8. Confirm with [OK].

9. The input is complete.

Defining a new load panel

Load to panel nodes / edges

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the load panel.

Panel type Type "Load to panel nodes" or "Load to panel edges" can be selected.

Load transfer direction Defines the direction for the distribution of the load:x- or y-direction of the local axes or both directions.

Shape informative item

Material Defines the material of the panel.

Thickness type The panel can be of constant or variable thickness.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the panel.

Member system-plane at Member system plane can be at the top or bottom surface of the panel or in the middle of the thickness.

Eccentricity Defines the eccentricity in the z-direction, i.e. in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the panel.

LCS type Only option Standard is available here.

Swap orientation Controls the direction of the local z-axis of the panel.

LCS angle Defines the direction of the local x-axis of the panel.

Layer Specifies the layer for the panel.

Select all nodes to generator If ON, the load will be distributed to all the nodes. Otherwise, the user must select nodes will be subjected to load and which remain unloaded.

Weight of loaded nodes It is possible to define weight for individual nodes.

Unloaded nodes Lists the unloaded nodes.

Action buttons

Table edit geometry Opens a dialogue where the coordinates of individual panel nodes can be edited.

Update node selection Updates the selection of the nodes that are subjected to the redistributed load.

Update all load panels Updates the load panels.

Generate loads Distributes the input load to specified nodes / edges.

Procedure for the definition of a new load panel: load to panel nodes / edges

1. Open function plane Load to panel nodes or Load to panel edges:

Geometry

225

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Load to panel nodes / edges,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Panel > Load to panel nodes / edges.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Input individual vertices of the panel.

5. Close the function.

Load to opening edges

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the load panel.

2D member Informs about the master plate.

Panel If ON, the opening represents a panel that can be loaded and whose load will be transformed into the edges of the opening.

It can be switched off – then a normal opening would be input.

Weights of edges Each edge can have its own weight factor assigned. These weights are used to recalculate the surface load input on the load panel to a system of linear loads assigned to individual edges of the load panel.

The weights are not available in the input dialogue. They appear only in the property dialogue of an already inputted roof/facade panel.

Procedure for the definition of a new load panel: load to opening edges

1. Open function plane Load to opening edges:

a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Load to opening edges,

b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Panel > Load to opening edges.

2. Input and adjust the required parameters.

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select the slab where the opening is to be inserted.

5. Input individual vertices of the opening.

6. Close the function.

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new shell

Defining a new shell Each shell is defined as a closed polygon consisting of straight or curved lines.

The procedure to define a shell

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function Shells.

3. Fill in the parameters – see chapter Shell parameters.

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. Input the vertices of the polygon.

6. If the defined polygon is not closed, the program tries to close it automatically.

Tip: If you want to define a curved 2D member, it may be very useful to input the shape-defining curves in advance as normal lines (service Structure > Drawing tools > Line). See also Sample shells.

In addition to a general shell, it is possible to use special functions for the input of a surface of revolution and swept surface.

Swept surface

This shell is defined by a master curve and a line or curve along which the master curve is translated (swept). This translation generates the final shape.

Basic Reference Guide

226

The procedure to input a new swept surface

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch 2D members.

3. Select and start function Shell – swept surface.

4. Input the parameters (se chapter Basic slab types).

5. Define the master curve. End its definition with [Esc].

6. Input the curve along which the master curve will be swept. End its definition with [Esc].

7. Close the function.

Surface of revolution

The procedure to input a new surface of revolution

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch 2D members.

3. Select and start function Shell – surface of revolution.

4. Input the parameters (se chapter Basic slab types).

5. Define the line/curve that will rotate around the axis and thus define the surface.

6. Once the master curve is input, a dialogue opens on the screen.

7. Define the angle of rotation.

8. Define the way the axis of the solid will be defined (see the table above).

9. Confirm the settings in the dialogue.

10. Input the centre of rotation (and depending on the type of the definition of the axis, input other required points).

11. Close the function.

Sample shells

Cylinder

Start function Structure > Shell.

Geometry

227

Adjust the parameters.

On the toolbar at the command line select that you want to input a circle.

Define its centre and radius. (Our example: centre = 0, 0, 0; radius point = 2, 0, 0)

Define the surface line – probably by typing the vertex coordinate on the command line. (Our example: 2, 0, 3)

Input the other circle by its centre only – probably by typing the vertex coordinate on the command line. (Our example: 0, 0, 3)

Basic Reference Guide

228

Program closes the polygon and the cylinder is there.

Parabolic cylinder

The shell of rectangular plan view, whose two opposite edges are straight lines, and the other two opposite edges are parabolic arcs.

Start function Structure > Shell.

Adjust the parameters.

Insert the first straight line (start in point 0, 0, 0 and end in 0, -5, 0).

Geometry

229

The second edge is parabolic, so press button Parabolic arc on the toolbar at the command line.

Input the intermediate point (3, -5, 3) and the end point (6, -5, 0).

Add one more straight edge ending in point 6, 0, 0.

Basic Reference Guide

230

Input the other parabolic edge with the intermediate point in 3, 0, 1 and the end point in 0, 0, 0 (do not forget to swap to parabolic arc mode).

The final rendered shell looks like:

Shell templates Some most common shells used in civil engineering practice have been pre-defined and can be inserted into your project as a user block.

Available templates

Geometry

231

cone

truncated cone

cylinder

Basic Reference Guide

232

spherical cap

elbow

The procedure to input shell template

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function Predefined shapes.

3. Select the required shape.

4. Double-click on its icon to open the template-dimensions dialogue.

5. Input the dimension.

6. Confirm with [OK].

7. Insert the shell into your project.

8. If necessary, modify the shell parameters (e.g. thickness, material, etc.).

Defining a new membrane

Defining a new membrane element

The procedure to define a membrane member

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function Plane 2D member or Shell member.

3. Fill in the parameters – see chapter Plate or Shell parameters to learn more about individual parameters.

4. Tick checkbox Membrane.

5. Confirm with [OK].

6. Input the shape of the membrane member.

Geometric manipulations

Geometric manipulations with slabs

Geometry

233

Slabs like any other entity may be moved, shifted, rotated, etc. Standard geometry-manipulation functions may be applied to slabs with a few exceptions:

a slab is manipulated (i.e. copied, moved, etc.) including all its components (i.e. subregions, openings, etc.),

slab components may be freely manipulated inside the area of the main slab,

it is not possible to copy or move any slab component to another main slab,

if node or nodes (vertices) of a slab (both main and component) are manipulated, the operation is valid only if the final slab remains planar (i.e. all the vertices of a slab must lie in one plane both before and after the manipulation),

geometry manipulation functions applicable to slabs are: (i) copy (single and multiple), (ii) move, (iii) stretch, (iv) rotate, (v) scale, (vi) mirror.

individual nodes of a slab may be moved to a new location using the Drag&Drop feature or via standard geometry manipulation functions like move, rotate, mirror, stretch, scale.

Note: To move a node, you must first select the node and then invoke the required function (either the Drag&Drop feature or any of standard geometry manipulation functions.

Editing the shape of a slab A slab is in fact a closed polygon. Consequently, the shape of a slab can be modified using functions for editing of polygons: (i) insert vertex, (ii) remove vertex, (iii) move vertex. The latter is possible through either (i) direct modification of vertex coordinates in the property window (available for selected vertices) or (ii) drag-and-drop feature.

Example

Let’s demonstrate the feature on an example. Let’s have a rectangular plate and let’s assume that we need to change it to a L-shape plate.

First, use function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – insert node and insert two vertices into the required slab edge. One of the inserted vertices should in the corner of the "flange" of the final L-shape. The other vertex can be inserted anywhere between the first inserted vertex and the "flange-edge" of the plate.

Now, move the intermediate-vertex to its final location.

Basic Reference Guide

234

And finally, move the other "flange" vertex to its final position.

In addition, individual slab edges may be treated as a standard polyline segment or "line", which means that they may be converted to arcs.

Example

Let’s take the L-shaped plate created in the previous example. Let’s call function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to circle arc. In this first step simply define an arbitrary arc (turned to the right side, of course) as it will be modified to the final shape in the second step.

Geometry

235

Finally, use function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by radius to input the proper final radius of the circular arc.

Intersection of two shells The problem of intersection of two shells (or plates) is divided into two separate problems:

1. calculation of the intersection (i.e. the intersection curve),

2. removal of the part (called cut-out) that should not be considered in the calculation (if such a part exists).

Procedure to generate the intersection of two shells

1. Input the shells.

2. If you want to limit the action on selected shells only, select the required ones.

3. Call function Modify > Connect members / nodes.

4. The program calculates the intersection of all defined shells (the function connects also nodes to 1D members and 1D members to slabs).

Procedure to define the cut-out (i.e. to define the part of a shell that should be removed from the model)

1. In you have not done so yet, define the intersection – see above.

2. Start function Structure > 2D member components > Cut-out.

3. Select the shells you want to process and confirm the selection with [Esc].

4. The program highlights individual parts of the selected shells. The boundaries of the parts are defined by the shell edges and by the generated intersections.

5. Select the parts that should be removed and confirm with [Esc].

6. The program draws a cut-out symbol around the border of the selected part(s).

Example

Let’s demonstrate the procedures on a simple example of two intersecting semi-cylinders that may represent an intersection of two corridors.

Define the shells.

Basic Reference Guide

236

Call function Modify > Connect members / nodes ([ ]) to generate the intersection curves.

They may be better seen in the plan view (the black curves).

When you rotate the view, you may see that even though the intersection has been generated, both shells remain unchanged, i.e. it is not possible to pass from one corridor to the other one.

Geometry

237

Now call function Structure > 2D member components > Cut-out and select both shells. Then select three end-outs.

Basic Reference Guide

238

When you confirm the selection, the program removes the selected parts from the calculation model. To verify it, generate the FE mesh and display it.

When you rotate the view, you may see that it is possible to freely pass from one corridor to the other.

Note: In Scia Engineer terminology, the cut-out is an extra entity added to the shell (it is called Additional Data, or Add Data). The removed part of the shell is not removed from the graphical scene, the shell still remains unchanged, and is drawn AS IS. The cut.-out is drawn as an additional entity relating to the shell.

Geometry

239

It means that if you display rendered surfaces (or rendered middle plane) of the shell, the removed part (the cut-out) is still displayed.

In order to see the final shape with cut-outs removed, it is necessary to switch off the rendering and display the generated finite element mesh. See the example above.

Examples

The enclosed images show a practical application of shell intersections and cut-outs.

Basic Reference Guide

240

Modification of the geometry and properties of plates with beams In general, the following text applies also to plates from beams and load panels with beams.

Modifying the layout of beams

As long as the beams are not disconnected from the plate (see further in the text), the properties specified in the table with input parameters of the plate can be arbitrarily modified. That means that it is possible to change the number and distance of the beams, their alignment, etc.

In order to change for example the cross-section of the beams, it is necessary to select separately the beams that are to be modified. In general, it is possible that each beam has different cross-section, is inserted into a different layer, etc.

The procedure to change the layout of the beams

1. Select the plate that is to be modified.

2. The properties of the plate are displayed in the Property window.

3. In section Beam layout change the required parameters.

Geometry

241

4. All the changes are immediately reflected in the model.

5. Clear the selection.

Changing the general properties of the plate

The general parameters (listed in the table with Input parameters for the plate) can be changed in the same way as for normal slabs. For example, the name, material, LCS, etc. can be modified this way.

Special note must be made concerning the FEM model of the plate. Plates with beams and plates from beams are input through the same function. The final type of the plate is adjusted in the input parameters. However, once the plate is defined, there are some limitations concerning the change of the FEM type.

1. If a plate with beams of any type (isotropic, orthotropic or membrane) has been defined, it cannot be changed to a plate from beams. The user can only swap freely between isotropic, orthotropic and membrane option.

2. The same applies to the plate from beams. Once a plate is input as a plate from beams, it cannot be changed to a plate with beams. Once again, it is possible to swap between orthotropic and isotropic plate from beams.

The procedure to change the general properties of the plate

1. Select the plate that is to be modified.

2. The properties of the plate are displayed in the Property window.

3. Change the required parameters at the top part of the table.

4. All the changes are immediately reflected in the model.

5. Clear the selection.

Changing the geometry of the plate

As long as the beams are not disconnected from the plate (see further in the text), all the changes to the geometry affect also the beams. If the plate is for example rotated, the beams rotate as well. If an additional vertex is added to the outline of the plate and the shape of the plate is changed, the beams are regenerated accordingly.

Example:

Let us have a plate like this:

Let us rotate it by 90 degrees.

Basic Reference Guide

242

Let us change its shape. (The user changes just the shape of the plate, the beams are modified automatically to correspond to the new geometry of the plate.

The procedure to change the geometry of the plate

1. Select the plate that is to be modified.

2. Use any available general function to change the shape. For example:

a. select the required nodes and drag-and-drop to their new position,

b. click action button [Table edit geometry] to open a table with the coordinates of the plate and make necessary changes,

c. use function for editing of a polygon (menu Modify > Polyline edit > Insert node / Delete node / etc.

3. All the changes are immediately reflected in the model.

4. Clear the selection.

Inserting an opening into a plate with beams

As long as the beams are not disconnected from the plate (see further in the text), the inserted openings and load panels affect also the beams.

It can be clearly seen in the following picture. Let us have a plate with beams. An opening is inserted. One of the edges of the opening follows the axis of one of the beams. Another beam is "cut" by the opening.

As a result, we get a plate with beams with:

the beam that is "cut" by the opening is really cut into three segments and the segment lying below the opening is removed, which means that only two segments remain in the model (see the blue numbers in the picture),

the beam that goes along the edge of the opening is also divided into three segments and all the three segments remain in the model (see the red numbers in the picture).

Disconnecting the beams from the plate

If required, it is possible to disconnect the beams from the plate and treat both as separate entities (standard beams and standard plate).

The procedure to disconnect the beams

Geometry

243

1. Select the plate that is to be modified.

2. Click action button [Edit beams].

3. This action removes the relation between the plate and the beams.

4. From this moment, both entities are independent.

Auxiliary lines

Lines Lines (it means lines and curves) can be used as an auxiliary tool for input of complex shapes. Alternatively, lines may be used to "complete" your model in terms of graphical representation. For example, you may decide to draw something around the structure itself, to indicate HVAC parts, etc .

The procedure to draw a line (curve)

1) Open service Structure.

2) Start function modelling/Drawing > Line > Line.

3) If required, type the name of the line and select the layer.

4) Confirm with [OK].

5) On the toolbar above the command line select the shape of the line/curve.

6) Follow the instructions on the command line and input the required points.

7) End the function.

Lines from text Function Lines from text allow you to type a text message anywhere in the graphical window and treat the text as lines.

It means that you can move it, rotate it, resize it, etc. like any other entity.

The procedure to input lines from text

1) Open service Structure.

2) Start function modelling/Drawing > Line > Lines from text.

3) The input dialogue is opened on the screen.

4) Type the text and adjust other (self-explanatory) parameters (text size, font, code page, font type).

5) Confirm with [OK].

6) The Line input dialogue is opened on the screen now.

7) If required, type the name of the line and select the layer.

8) Confirm with [OK].

5) Position the text.

7) End the function.

General solids

General solids In addition to 1D members and slabs, you can use in Scia Engineer a general entity called general solid.

It is a geometrical shape that forms a part of your project but is completely neglected during the calculation. General solids can be used to model parts of the model that should appear in drawings but that have no real meaning for the analysis (air-conditioning, railing, etc.).

General solids can be also effectively used if Scia Engineer is used in combination with a CAD program and the architectural model is imported into it from that third-party CAD program.

Defining a new general solid There are two types of solid that can be defined in Scia Engineer.

Solid A solid is a 3D volume. Solids are defined by its surface and the interior is filled with an imaginary mass.

Open shell An open shell is a surface. It may be planar or curved, but it is just the surface.

Solids

Prism

The prism is a solid whose base can be formed by a closed polygon of an arbitrary shape (with both straight and curved edges) and whose height can follow either a straight line (the picture above) or a curve (circle, parabola, Bezier curve or spline) (the picture below).

Basic Reference Guide

244

The procedure to input a new prism

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids > Solid.

3. Select and start function Solid - extruded prism.

4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.

5. If required, input also the advanced parameters: material and role.

6. Define the base of the prism (i.e. input a closed polygon).

7. Once the polygon is closed, the working plane is automatically readjusted to allow for the input of the height of the prism.

8. Input the height (a straight line or a curve).

9. Close the function.

Cylinder

The cylinder is a kind of the extruded prism. The limitation is that the base is always formed by a full circle. The height can once again follow either a straight line or a curve.

The procedure to input a new cylinder

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids > Solid.

3. Select and start function Solid - cylinder.

4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.

5. If required, input also the advanced parameters: material and role.

6. Define the base of the cylinder (i.e. input a circle).

7. Once the base is input, the working plane is automatically readjusted to allow for the input of the height of the cylinder.

8. Input the height (a straight line or a curve).

9. Close the function.

Surface of revolution

Geometry

245

The Surface of revolution is defined by a line or curve and the axis around which it rotates.

The axis can be defined in several ways.

Working plane axis X

The axis of rotation is parallel to the X-axis of the current working plane.

Working plane axis Y

The axis of rotation is parallel to the Y-axis of the current working plane.

Working plane axis Z

The axis of rotation is parallel to the Z-axis of the current working plane.

Define axis by cursor

The axis of rotation is defined manually in the graphical window.

Enter custom axis vector

The direction of the axis of rotation is defined by a user-input vector.

The procedure to input a new surface of revolution

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids > Solid.

3. Select and start function Solid – surface of revolution.

4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.

5. If required, input also the advanced parameters: material and role.

6. Define the line/curve that will rotate around the axis and thus define the surface.

7. Once the master curve is input, a dialogue opens on the screen.

8. Define the angle of rotation.

9. Define the way the axis of the solid will be defined (see the table above).

10. Confirm the settings in the dialogue.

11. Input the centre of rotation (and depending on the type of the definition of the axis, input other required points).

12. Close the function.

Open shells

General polygon

This is a simple planar shape with an arbitrary number of vertices and arbitrary shape of edges (straight, circular, spline, etc.).

The procedure to input a new polygon

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids > Open shell.

3. Select and start function Open shell – general polygon.

4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.

5. If required, input also the advanced parameters: material and role.

6. Define the polygon.

7. Close the function.

Swept surface

Basic Reference Guide

246

This shell is defined by a master curve and a line or curve along which the master curve is translated (swept). This translation generates the final shape.

The procedure to input a new swept surface

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids > Open shell.

3. Select and start function Open shell – swept surface.

4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.

5. If required, input also the advanced parameters: material and role.

6. Define the master curve. End its definition with [Esc].

7. Input the curve along which the master curve will be swept. End its definition with [Esc].

8. Close the function.

Surface of revolution

This component is similar to the Solid – surface of revolution described above. The difference is that this function (open shell - surface of revolution) defines a surface and not a volume.

The procedure to input a new surface of revolution

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids > Open shell.

3. Select and start function Open shell – surface of revolution.

4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.

5. If required, input also the advanced parameters: material and role.

6. Define the line/curve that will rotate around the axis and thus define the surface.

7. Once the master curve is input, a dialogue opens on the screen.

8. Define the angle of rotation.

9. Define the way the axis of the solid will be defined (see the table above).

10. Confirm the settings in the dialogue.

11. Input the centre of rotation (and depending on the type of the definition of the axis, input other required points).

Geometry

247

12. Close the function.

Editing the existing general solid Any of the defined general solids can be modified using the same procedure that applies to other Scia Engineer entities such as beam, slab, etc.

The procedure to modify the existing general solid

1. Select the solid to be edited.

2. Its properties are displayed in the Property window.

3. Change the required parameters. The changes are immediately reflected in the graphical window.

4. If you want to modify the geometry, press action button [Table edit geometry]. This button opens a dialogue with coordinates of the vertices that define the shape of the solid. Make any changes that are necessary and confirm with [OK].

Geometrical manipulations with general solids You may perform standard geometrical manipulations with general solids. For example, they may be moved, copied, stretched, etc. The procedures are the same as for standard Scia Engineer entities.

Boolean operations with general solids Scia Engineer enables the user to perform standard Boolean operations with general solids.

The operations will be demonstrated on a set of simple examples.

Let us have two solids (cuboids) that intersect each other.

Union

The union operation merges the two cuboids into one solid.

Subtraction

When you perform the subtraction, you may decide whether the subtracted solid should be deleted or kept in the model.

If you decide to delete it, it is removed.

If you keep it, it remains unaffected.

Basic Reference Guide

248

Intersection

There are two types of intersection: XOR (exclusive OR) and OR.

For the XOR option, what remains from the solids is the part that belongs to just one of them. The part that belongs to both solids (the intersecting part) is removed.

For normal OR it is the opposite way. The parts of the solids that belong to all intersecting solids are kept in the model and the rest is removed.

Division

This operation divides the solids into more separate shapes. The parts that belong to just one solid are separated and the parts that belong to more solids create a new solid or solids.

The procedure to perform a Boolean operation

1. Open service Structure.

2. Expand branch Transfer/Break/Unify.

3. Select the required function (Union of solids, Subtraction of solids, Intersection of solids, Division of solids).

4. Select the original entity for the operation.

5. Select the secondary entity or entities for the operation.

6. End selection with [ESC].

Geometry

249

7. For subtraction and intersection operations decide on the type of the operation (see above).

8. That’s it.

Conversion of general components to structural members General solids either directly inputted in your model or imported through any of available import function can be transformed into Scia Engineer native entities: 1D members (beam, column, etc.) or 2D members (plate, wall, etc.).

Solid to beam

Any (reasonably shaped) general solid can be transformed to a Scia Engineer native entity of 1D member type. In general, we can talk about three (or four – depending on the way you count it) different conversion algorithms: automatic, straight prismatic beam, and arbitrary beam (which works in both "automatic" and "straight prismatic" mode).

The "automatic" recognition algorithm is intended for curved members (e.g. the image below).

The "straight prismatic beam" recognition algorithm is able to create straight 1D members with a prismatic cross-sections (e.g. the image below).

The "arbitrary beam" option can be used with any of the two above-mentioned modes. It produces curved or straight 1D members with variable cross-section (e.g. the image below).

Setup parameters for solid to beam/column conversion

Recognition algorithm

Automatic

This option first calculates an approximated oriented "bounding box" of the selected solid (i.e. the smallest possible box containing the whole solid). Its longest axis determines the approximate direction of the final 1D member. Then the system line of the member is calculated (the algorithm is rather complex and will not be described here). When the system line is found,

Basic Reference Guide

250

the cross-section is analysed and determined. In this step the algorithm tries to take into account possible openings defined in the member.

Detect straight prismatic beams

This option first calculates an approximated oriented "bounding box" of the selected solid (i.e. the smallest possible box containing the whole solid). Its longest axis determines the approximate direction of the final 1D member. So far, it has been identical to the Automatic algorithm. From now on, however, the procedure is different and simpler. The algorithm finds the edge the orientation of which is nearest to the approximated orientation determined earlier. Then the solid is transformed to the coordinate system defined by the orientation of the edge in question. A standard xyz system of the bounding box is created. The length of the system line is then determined from it. Finally, the cross-section is detected.

Recognition setup

Cross-section comparison tolerance

This is the maximum allowable distance of two points that is used to determine whether the cross-section created by the recognition algorithm already exists in the database of the project.

The larger the value the less exact recognised shape of the cross-section and, at the same time, the lower total number of cross-sections defined in the project (even though, there may be configurations in which this proportion does not hold).

Detect arbitrary beam

If ON, the algorithm detects changes of the cross-section along the member and creates an arbitrary beam.

Arbitrary beam recognition setup

This set of parameters is available only if Detect arbitrary beam (above) is set to ON.

Arbitrary beams can be detected for both "automatic" and "straight prismatic beams" option. The principal difference in the algorithm is that the cross-section is detected in more points along the beam. The points where the detection takes place are specified by the user. The definition is similar to the definition of SNAP points in SNAP function (see below). Adjacent spans with identical cross-sections can be merged into single spans (see "Arbitrary beam output setup" below).

Points on line-curve length

If ON, the recognition algorithm tries to recognise the shape of the cross-section in points specified by the number, distance between them and distance from the beginning or end of the beam.

Enabled

Switches ON/OFF this definition of points where cross-section is recognised.

Length

Specifies the distance between points.

Repeat

Specifies the number of points for the recognition.

Start point

Defines if the distance is measured from the beginning or end or both end-points of the beam.

Points on line-curve Nths

If ON, the recognition algorithm tries to recognise the shape of the cross-section in points located in N-ths ofthe beam length.

Enabled

Switches ON/OFF this definition of points where cross-section is recognised.

Number of Nths

Specifies the number of intervals to which the beam is divided (e.g. 3 = three intervals).

Points on line-curve % of length

If ON, the recognition algorithm tries to recognise the shape of the cross-section in points located in given percentage of the

Geometry

251

total length of the beam.

Enabled

Switches ON/OFF this definition of points where cross-section is recognised.

Point position

Defines the required percentage.

Arbitrary beam output setup

This set of parameters is available only if Detect arbitrary beam (above) is set to ON.

Merge identical spans

If ON, all adjacent spans with identical cross-section are merged into one span.

Cross-section Prismatic

The cross-section does not change within the extent of one span.

Two css

The cross-section varies from CSS1 to CSS2 linearly over the length of the span.

Output setup

Display output report

If ON, a report is shown on the screen when the recognition is completed.

The procedure to convert a general solid to a 1D member

1. Start function Transfer/Break/Unify > General solid into beam/column.

2. Select the required member(s).

3. End the selection.

4. The setup dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Define the required parameters.

6. Confirm with [OK].

Solid to plate

A reasonably shaped general solid can be transformed to a Scia Engineer native entity of 2D member type. In general, we can talk about two different conversion algorithms: automatic, and flat slabs.

The "automatic" recognition algorithm is intended for more complex shapes as it is capable of creating a set of plates located in different non-parallel planes. For example, the solid in the picture is transformed into four 2D members.

The "flat slabs" recognition algorithm is able to create 2D members from solids that are roughly "flat". For example, the solid in the picture below is transformed into two 2D members, as the two corner "wings" are located out of the plane.

Basic Reference Guide

252

Setup parameters for solid to plate/wall conversion

Recognition algorithm

Automatic

Converts selected solids to planar 2D members. The conversion may result in several plates.

The solid is internally split into individual planar parts which are then sorted by size and processed. The result is one or more Scia Engineer native 2D members of plate type.

Detect flat slabs

This option is intended for solids that are roughly flat. The algorithm is analogous to the automatic mode. The exception is that at the very beginning all the planar parts of the solid that are not located in the main plane of the solid are excluded from processing.

Detect circular slabs

This option is intended for circular walls imported from Allplan. When read from Allplan, these walls are stored as a "collection" of a great number of small wall segments. The recognizer-algorithm converts them to a standard Scia Engineer member.

Example: Circular wall - before and after recognition:

Output setup

Display output report

If ON, a report is shown on the screen when the recognition is completed.

The procedure to convert a general solid to a 2D member

1. Start function Transfer/Break/Unify > General solid into plate/wall.

2. Select the required member(s).

Geometry

253

3. End the selection.

4. The setup dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Define the required parameters.

6. Confirm with [OK].

Catalogue blocks

Introduction to catalogue blocks Catalogue blocks represent a powerful tool that allows the user to define the "whole" structure in a single step. The word "whole" has been put into the quotation marks as the structure created here may either (i) really form the whole structure that should be analysed, or (ii) be just a part of a larger, complex model.

The catalogue block is a smaller, or we can say standard or template, structure the geometry of which has been defined in advance by the developer of Scia Engineer. The user has to specify only the dimensions and properties of his/her particular application. The whole geometry-definition process is confined to a simple filling in of a short table.

Scia Engineer offers a wide range of catalogue blocks (standard template structures) such as 2D and 3D lattice girders, towers (masts), 2D and 3D frames and much more. The procedure for their definition has been unified and, therefore, once the user becomes accustomed to the definition of one of the catalogue block types, he/she is capable of inserting all other types.

Overview of catalogue blocks Catalogue blocks, or we can say standard template structures, that are accessible in Scia Engineer can be divided into groups according to their shape and dimension:

beam A 1D member of variable cross-section.

planar frame Simple two-dimensional frames.

frame 3D A couple of classical 3D frames.

tower 2D A set of 2D masts (analogous to 3D masts).

tower / mast A series of lattice masts with most usual variants of diagonal arrangement.

two-dimensional lattice girder - straight variant

Simple 2D lattice girders with various arrangements of diagonals and verticals.

two-dimensional lattice girder - curved variant

A set of 2D lattice girders with curved chords and different arrangement and number of diagonals and verticals.

three-dimensional lattice girder - straight variant

Practical variants of three-dimensional lattice girders with alternative arrangement of diagonals, verticals and chord elements.

three-dimensional lattice girder - curved variant

Several possible arrangements of diagonals, verticals and chord elements for 3D lattice girders with curved chord.

curve A set of commonly used curves such as a circle, ellipse, parabola, etc.

Catalogue block types

Catalogue block - Beam Catalogue block Beam represents an I-beam of a cross-section varying along the span. In cross-section the beam is shaped like letter I with haunches in the inner corners between the flanges and the wall. In longitudinal section, the beam is symmetrical and resembles of letter A. However, the longitudinal shape may be affected by the concrete values of individual beam dimensions.

Beam parameters

Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the catalogue block.

Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the beam. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

Cross-section Catalogue block Beam always requires the definition of its cross-section before the specification of dimensions.

Basic Reference Guide

254

Catalogue block - 2D frame Catalogue block Plane frame (2D frame) is a simple 2D frame. There are several types of the shape available.

2D Frame parameters

Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the catalogue block.

Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the frame. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

Cross-section Separate cross-section may be defined for columns and cross-beam of the frame.

Catalogue block - 3D frame There are two variants of 3D frame available in Scia Engineer: a regular orthogonal frame and a "tapering" one. For both variants a dialogue of the same type is opened and must be filled in.

3D Frame parameters

Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the catalogue block.

Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the frame. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

Cross-section Three different cross-sections must be defined for this type of catalogue block. Each cross-section is used for members oriented in one direction: along X-axis, along Y-axis, along Z-axis.

Catalogue block - 2D lattice girder A wider range of plane lattice girders is available in the catalogue block library. They cover the most often used types of girders.

Separate sets have been prepared for both straight and curved variants of plane lattice girders. The manipulation with girders, procedure of definition, and meaning of parameters is the same for both.

Lattice girder parameters

Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the catalogue block.

Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the lattice girder. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

The parameters define not only the size and shape, but also number of spans of the girder.

Cross-section Cross-sections may be defined separately for individual parts of the girder:

Geometry

255

upper chord, lower chord, verticals, and diagonals.

Catalogue block - 3D lattice girder A wider range of space lattice girders is available in the catalogue block library. They cover the most often used types of girders.

Separate sets have been prepared for both straight and curved variants of 3D lattice girders. The manipulation with girders, procedure of definition, and meaning of parameters is the same for both.

Lattice girder parameters

Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the catalogue block.

Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the lattice girder. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

The parameters define not only the size and shape, but also number of spans of the girder.

Cross-section Cross-sections may be defined separately for individual parts of the girder: upper chord, lower chord, verticals, and diagonals.

Basic Reference Guide

256

Catalogue block - Mast Scia Engineer offers a whole set of masts, or we can say towers, with different arrangement of diagonals. The user thus can select the required type. It may however happen that none of the pre-defined shapes satisfies particular needs and the user needs to define a mast of type that is not in the library. Then it is possible to select the most similar, or the closest, type, insert it into the project and subsequently apply modification functions (e.g. delete, move, copy, etc.) to adjust the shape as necessary.

Mast parameters

Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the catalogue block.

Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the mast. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

Cross-section Three different cross-sections must be defined for this type of catalogue block. Each cross-section is used for members oriented in one direction: horizontal beams, vertical (or inclined) 1D members, and diagonals.

Geometry

257

Note: If the current project is of 3D type, the user may choose from a set of three-dimensional masts. It the project is of 2D type, only two-dimensional musts are available.

Catalogue block - Curve Catalogue blocks provide not only for simple structures, but also for common geometric shapes such as curves. A whole set of basic curves is available in Scia Engineer. For each curve shape (e.g. circle, ellipse, hyperbole, etc.) the user can select the most appropriate way of its definition.

Together with the shape also a cross-section is defined and as a result a curved 1D member is created. The generated 1D member is not smooth-curved, but the exact curve of the shape is substituted with a polygon of straight segments.

A big advantage of the pre-defined curve catalogue blocks is that not only the whole curve, but only a required segment of it can be defined. Thus the field of application becomes much wider for this Scia Engineer feature.

Curve types

circle (x)

A circle segment defined by means of radius and a set of X co-ordinates.

circle (y)

A circle segment defined by means of radius and a set of Y co-ordinates.

circle (f)

A circle segment defined by means of radius and a central angle.

ellipse (x)

An ellipse segment defined by means of maximum and minimum radius and a couple of X co-ordinates.

ellipse (y)

An ellipse segment defined by means of maximum and minimum radius and a couple of X co-ordinates.

ellipse (f)

An ellipse segment defined by means of maximum and minimum radius and a central angle.

parabola (x)

A parabolic segment defined by means of its height, length and a couple of X co-ordinates.

Basic Reference Guide

258

parabola (y)

A parabolic segment defined by means of its height, length and a couple of Y co-ordinates.

hyperbole (x)

A hyperbolic segment defined by means of a X co-ordinates.

hyperbole (y)

A hyperbolic segment defined by means of a X co-ordinates.

hyperbole (f)

A hyperbolic segment defined by means of two central angle.

chain curve (x)

A "chain-curve" segment defined by means of X co-ordinates of chain-curve ends.

chain curve (s)

A "chain-curve" segment defined by means of chain-curve end co-ordinates measured along the curve.

sinusoid

A segment of a standard sinusoid.

spiral

A segment of a spiral.

Curve parameters

Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the catalogue block.

Dimensions and parameters of shape

The dimensions and other parameters define the size and the shape of the appropriate curve. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

Number of straight segments per curve

This number specifies how many line segments is used to substitute the exact curve shape. The higher the number is the smoother is the final generated curve.

Cross-section The generated "curved" 1D member has got a constant cross-section. If necessary, it may later altered via standard beam-modification functions.

Defining a new catalogue block

Catalogue block manager The Catalogue block manager is a tool that provides for all the possible operations related to the definition or editing of catalogue blocks. The user may to:

define a new catalogue block,

select an already defined catalogue block and insert it repeatedly into the project,

choose an already defined catalogue block, modify it as required and insert the modified variant into the project.

The Catalogue block manager is one of the managers integrated in Scia Engineer and its layout and operation are identical to other Scia Engineer Managers.

The Catalogue block manager is open when function Catalogue block is activated. It may represent one of the steps in the General procedure for the definition of a new catalogue block.

Generally, there are several ways to open the Catalogue block manager:

Tree menu function Library > Catalogue blocks.

Geometry

259

Tree menu function Structure > Catalogue blocks.

Menu function Libraries > Catalogue blocks.

Note: Which way is actually chosen depends on two factors: (i) where (what part of the program) is the manager called from, and (ii) habits of a particular user.

Defining a new catalogue block The process for the definition (or we can say insertion) of a new catalogue block into a Scia Engineer project consists of a few steps.

The procedure for the definition of a catalogue block

1. Call function Catalogue block. There are several way to do so:

a. Use tree menu function Library > Catalogue block.

b. Activate menu function Libraries > Catalogue block.

c. Open service Structure in the menu tree and then call function Catalogue block.

2. The function opens the Catalogue block manager. If no catalogue block has been defined yet in the project, the program automatically opens New catalogue block dialogue (see point 4 of the procedure.

3. Select function New in the Catalogue block manager dialogue.

4. From the New catalogue block dialogue select the required type of catalogue block (standard structure).

5. Fill in the catalogue block parameters (name, dimensions, cross-section type, etc.).

6. Review the catalogue block parameters.

7. Close the Catalogue block manager.

8. Insert the catalogue block into the modelling space. This step may be repeated as many times as required. This insertion phase is a standard "insert new entity" action and can be closed accordingly.

Note 1: Step 2 may be preceded by one more intermediate step. If no cross-section has been defined when the Catalogue block manager is being opened, the dialogue for the definition of a new cross-section is opened first. After at least one cross-section is defined, dialogue and Cross-section manager are closed, then the Catalogue block manager is finally opened. Note 2: Step 8 is available ONLY IF the Catalogue block function was called from within service Structure. Otherwise, the catalogue blocks defined in steps 1 to 7 are added into the project and saved with it when the project is saved, but they are not included into the model. Note 3: When a catalogue block has been defined and is being inserted into the modelling space, the mouse cursor is attached to one of the block nodes. If required, the user may change this node and define a new

insertion point of the catalogue block. To do so, button [Change the insertion point] ( ) that is located at the

Basic Reference Guide

260

end of the toolbar above the command line must be pressed. The catalogue block is then temporarily placed "somewhere" into the modelling space and the user may select the new insertion point (using any SNAP options that may be convenient for this). Once the new insertion point is selected, the mouse cursor is attached to it and the user may finish the insertion of the catalogue block.

Selecting the catalogue block type The selection of the required catalogue block type or types can be done in a New catalogue block dialogue. The dialogue consists of the following control and information elements:

List of available catalogue block types

It contains all the available catalogue block types.

List of possible variants for the current type

It offers possible sub-types for the selected type.

Drawing of the currently selected variant

It shows the particular selected catalogue block.

List of already defined catalogue blocks

It lists all he already defined (inserted) catalogue block.

Control buttons They provide for the control of the dialogue.

List of available catalogue block types

The dialogue offers a list of available catalogue block types. The contents of the list may vary depending on the current configuration of the program. The list provides for the selection of required type of standard structure (e.g. mast, 2D truss girder, etc.).

List of possible variants (sub-types) for the current type

This dialogue element displays a set of graphical symbols (icons) representing the individual variants of the catalogue block type that is currently selected in the List of available catalogue block types.

Drawing of the currently selected variant

A small window displays a drawing of the currently selected variant of the currently selected catalogue block type. A short "description name" of the particular variant is added to the drawing mainly to facilitate the identification of a particular catalogue block sub-type and type.

List of already defined catalogue blocks

In addition to the available catalogue block types, the dialogue displays a list containing all the catalogue block that have been defined (i.e. inserted into the project) so far.

Control Buttons

Button [OK]

Button [OK] confirms the selection of a particular type and variant. Once this button is pressed a dialogue for editing of catalogue block parameters is opened. When the parameters are specified and confirmed, a new catalogue block is added to the List of already defined catalogue blocks.

Button [Close]

This button closes the New catalogue block dialogue.

Geometry

261

Specifying the block parameters The specification of catalogue block parameters can be done in a dialogue for editing of a particular catalogue block. This dialogue is opened automatically once the user selects and confirms the required type in the New catalogue block type dialogue. In addition, the editing dialogue can be opened any time later via the [Edit] button of the Catalogue block manager.

The editing dialogue consists of three main parts:

Graphical window It displays the particular catalogue block. For some types it includes dimension lines, labels, etc.

Property table It comprises all the parameters the catalogue block and provides for their insertion and editing .

Legend drawing It shows the meaning of individual parameters on a drawing of a sample catalogue block structure.

Control buttons They close the editing dialogue in the required way.

Graphical window

The graphical window displays the catalogue block. For some of the types also dimension lines and labels are available. The drawing immediately reflects any modifications of geometry parameters made in the property table.

Property table

The property table contains all the parameters that are necessary for full definition of the selected catalogue block structure. The parameters can be both input or edited in this table.

The parameters can be divided into three groups: name, geometry parameters, and specification of cross-section or cross-sections. The number of cross-sections that must be specifies depends on the type of the catalogue block. E.g. curves require just one cross-section, and e.g. 3D frames need three ones.

If the graphical window displays also dimension lines, then there exists a special interconnection between the property table and graphical window. The principles, main features and advantages of this interconnection are described in detail in book Cross-sections, chapter Specifying sectional parameters and properties.

Control buttons

Button [OK]

This button closes the dialogue and accepts all the inputs and changes made in it.

If a new catalogue block has been defined in the editing dialogue it is inserted into the project.

If an existing catalogue block has been modified here, the changes are taken into account and saved into the project.

Button [Cancel]

This button closes the dialogue and all the inputs and changes made in it are abandoned.

If a new catalogue block has been defined in the editing dialogue it is NOT inserted into the project.

If an existing catalogue block has been modified here, the changes are not taken into account.

Basic Reference Guide

262

Reviewing the block parameters There are a few ways to see, scrutinise, and edit (if necessary) the parameters of a catalogue block.

Property table in the Catalogue block manager

The Catalogue block manager contains a vertically oriented window that displays the parameters of currently selected catalogue block.

Property table in the dialogue for editing of a catalogue block

Each dialogue for editing of a catalogue block contains a property table with all the parameters of the edited catalogue block.

Document-style view in the preview window

This is the most sophisticated kind of display for parameters of a catalogue block. It is accessible from within the dialogue for editing of a catalogue block.

Property table in the Catalogue block manager

The property table in the Catalogue block manager provides for quick overview of parameters of individual catalogue blocks. It is possible to edit some of the parameters, however, this table is not primarily intended for thorough editing of a catalogue block.

If a catalogue block should be modified, the catalogue block editing dialogue should be invoked via button [Edit].

Property table in the dialogue for editing of a catalogue block

The property table in this dialogue provides for both lucid overview of the catalogue block parameters and their straightforward modification.

Document-style view in the preview window

The parameters of a catalogue block can be displayed in a readable way in the preview window. The preview window then displays a table with all the catalogue block parameters sorted in it.

The table is in fact a standard Scia Engineer document table and consequently its format can be adjusted to meet any specific requirements. The adjustment can be done the same way as with any other document table.

This display style can be invoked from within the Catalogue block manager by pressing button [Text output].

User blocks

Introduction to user blocks Scia Engineer enables the user to make a library of his/her projects that are used over and over again. These projects may be at any time included into a newly created project or appended to an earlier created and currently edited project.

The projects in this user-created library are called User blocks and the library is called User block library.

Using the user blocks The application of user blocks can be divided into three independent steps. The steps must be carried out in the given order and all of them must be made.

Creating the user block

A user block can be created as a standard project. There are no explicit restrictions to it. Usually, the user will be working on his/her project and either at the end or some time during the design phase s/he decides to make a user block of the current state of the project.

Then the only thing that must be done is save the project to the disk. It may be useful, however not compulsory, to use function Save As and give the project such a name that gives a hint about the structure in the project.

Storing the user block to the library

In order to be usable as a user block, the project must be stored in the User block library folder (see Program settings > Directory settings). This may be achieved in two ways.

The user specifies the proper path in the Save As dialogue (see paragraph above) and saves the project directly to the User block library folder.

The user saves the project to his/her common project folder and then copies the file to the User block library folder. The file may be copied in any file-management tool (e.g. Windows Explorer, Total Commander, My Computer dialogue, etc.)

Tip: The user blocks may be stored not only in the given User block library folder, but they may be arranged in a tree of subfolders. The subfolders may then group user blocks that have something in common. This arrangement may lead to easier and clearer application of user blocks, especially if a long time passes from the time they were created and stored.

Inserting the user block into another project

The procedure for insertion of a user block into a project

1. Open service Structure:

Geometry

263

a. either by means of tree menu function Structure,

b. or by means of menu function Tree > Structure,

c. or by means of icon Structure on toolbar Project.

2. Select and activate function User blocks.

3. A User block wizard opens on the screen. Its left hand side window shows the organisation of the User block library folder, i.e. it shows any possible subfolders. The right hand side window then displays all available user blocks saved in the appropriate folder or subfolder.

4. Select the required folder.

5. Select the required User block.

6. Click [OK] in order to insert the block to the current project.

7. Select the required options for the import (see below).

8. Position the user block to the desired place and click the left mouse button to put the block there.

9. If required, repeat the previous step as many times as required or necessary.

Note: It the User block is a parameterised project, the program asks the user to provide all necessary parameters in order to complete the definition of the user block.

Import user block parameters

Import type Only structure

Only structural members (1D members, slabs, shells, etc.) will be imported.

Structure with all other data

Both the structure and all other defined data such as supports, loads, load cases, connections, etc. will be imported.

Structure with selective other data

The structure will be imported together with user-selected model and other data.

Only other data

Only the model and other additional data will be imported. No structural member will be added to the current project.

Model (available only for option Structure with selective other data)

If ON, the model data (e.g. supports) will be imported.

Loads (available only for option Structure with selective other data)

If ON, the loads will be imported.

Connections (available only for option Structure with selective other data)

If ON, the connections will be imported.

Import structure into

New layers

The structure will be imported into new layers. The number of newly created layers corresponds to the number of layers in the user block.

Identical layers by name (when exist)

The import procedure tries to place the structural members from the user block into identical layers in the current project – if such layers exist. In necessary, new layers are created.

Current layer

The whole user block is imported into the current (active) layer of the current project.

Load cases Add block library item

New load cases are added in the Load case manager. The number of added load cases is equal to the number of load cases stored in the imported user block.

Collect block library item by name

The import procedure compares the names of load cases in the imported user block and in the current project and when possible, it puts the imported loads into the existing load cases.

Cross-sections Analogous to the load cases above.

Load groups Analogous to the load cases above.

Others Analogous to the load cases above.

Basic Reference Guide

264

Note: The number and type of the parameters in the import user block dialogue may vary depending on the contents of the current project and imported block.

Limitations of the import

Different national code in the imported user block and current project

The national code of the imported user block is changed to the national code of the current project.

Each used material of the user block is shown to the user. User has to assign one material from the current project. The assignment rule can be remembered and used for next user blocks (then it is applied automatically without asking). No materials from the user block are added to the new project.

Parameters

After the modification of the user block, all parameters are disconnected from the block items and they are not copied into current project.

Moving the entities

Introduction to moving of entities The preparation of a model is rarely completed simply by insertion of new entities such as 1D members, slabs, loads, supports, etc. Most likely you will need to modify the inserted objects in some way in order to create the model you really need.

Scia Engineer provides a whole range of functions for moving of entities. For some intriguing manipulations the functions may have to be combined in order to obtain the required effect. Sometimes, there may be a few ways to obtain the same result. If so, it will be solely on the user which concrete procedure will be selected and carried out.

The move operations can be sorted by:

the entity type which is being moved,

the trajectory followed by the entity that is being moved.

Type of manipulated entity

move of a geometric entity the description of which is given below,

move of an additional-data entity (such as load, support, etc.) which is described in a separate chapter.

Trajectory followed by the manipulated entity

(simple) move It shifts the object from one position to another. The trajectory is a straight line and the orientation of the object remains unchanged.

rotation It rotates the object around a given point. The trajectory is a circle or a part of a circle.

mirroring It makes a "mirror image" of the object.

Thus, for geometric entities one can use the following set of move functions:

(Simple) Move Move via a property table

Move using a menu function

Move by means of Drag & Drop feature

Move via the right mouse button pop-up menu

Rotation Rotation by means of changing one vertex location

Rotation using a menu function

Rotation via the right mouse button pop-up menu

Mirroring

In addition to move of entities, some other modification functions can be applied, such as copying, deleting, changing of dimensions, connecting and disconnecting of members, dividing and joining of members, etc. These functions are described in separate chapters.

Tip: If the modification is supposed to be done with a large or complex model or if the modification itself is going to be rather excessive, it is highly recommended to make a backup copy of the project prior to the intended changes. The program contains UNDO function, nevertheless, it is always better to have got a backup copy so that one can:

return to the original if the manipulations lead to a state that is even less suitable than the original,

compare the results of both variants if the results of the modified structure may seem to be strange or unexpected.

Geometry

265

Note: Please, note that any kind of model modification will lead to the necessity to carry our all the previously performed calculations once more because the change in the structure geometry, the re-positioning of load, and the modification of boundary conditions do result in a different distribution of internal forces.

General rules for move of entities There exists a set of rules that are followed when nodes or 1D members change their position. The rules, for example, guarantee that an undefined state of geometry or otherwise forbidden situation won’t arise once the move operation has been carried out.

Linked versus absolute node

Scia Engineer uses two types of nodes: absolute and linked. If a modification function is carried out with a part of a structure model, the result will depend on the type of nodes that are included in the structure part being moved. The differences may occur for move of separate nodes as well as for move of whole 1D members (and of course, for move of both nodes and 1D members at the same time).

The rules that are applied during move operations are given below. The rules are divided into two separate parts. The first one deals with move operation that includes nodes only. The other part describes that rules that are followed when either 1D members or 1D members and nodes together are being moved.

Rules for move of nodes

When an absolute node or several absolute nodes are moved, the 1D member(s) connected to the node before the move operation remains connected also after the operation. It is not possible to "tear" the node out of the 1D member. This feature may be used to e.g. rotate, shorten, or prolong a 1D member.

If all the nodes relating to a particular 1D member are selected for the move operation, the result is the move of the whole 1D member. This feature can be therefore deliberately used for the repositioning of 1D members.

An absolute node can be moved to an arbitrary new position. The connected 1D member follows the move of the node and, as a result, the 1D member connected to the moved node may change its orientation or length or both. A curved 1D member may also change its curvature.

A linked node can be moved in two ways. First, it may be moved the same way as an absolute node. Second, it can be shifted in a way so that it remains bound to the 1D member it relates to. The latter result is achieved if nodal co-ordinates are modified in the property table.

Rules for move of 1D members

When a 1D member is being moved to a new location, it may remain attached to the rest of the model (with simultaneous distortion of the model) or it may separate from the remaining part of the model. Which variant actually happens depends on the type of connection between the moved and unmoved 1D members (See below).

If the 1D member that is being moved is connected to the attached 1D member s by means of linked nodes, the connection remains unchanged and the ends of the connected 1D members move together with the moved 1D member. That means that the attached 1D members may change its orientation, size, curvature, or both.

If the connection between the moved and attached 1D members is NOT made via linked nodes, the 1D member that is being moved is separated from the structure.

If a 1D member is placed to a new location, the program verifies whether some unattached nodes would not remain in the original 1D member location. If so, such nodes are automatically moved together with the 1D member. If not, the 1D member is moved and new end nodes are automatically created for the 1D member in its target location.

If the 1D member end nodes in its target location fit into some of the existing nodes, the existing nodes are assigned as the end nodes of the 1D member and no new nodes are created.

For more information about nodes read chapter Nodes.

Practical examples of node type influence

Let’s assume a simple plane frame consisting of two columns and a horizontal beam.

As the first step, let’s consider that the right hand column is connected to the horizontal beam by means of a linked node. The linked node is marked by the short double line drawn at the connection of the members.

Basic Reference Guide

266

Now, let’s move the horizontal beam up and right. The result can be seen in the figure below. The right hand column has remained connected to the horizontal beam, has inclined to the right and has changed its length. On the other hand, the left hand column has stayed in its original position without any change. There is no linked node on the horizontal beam in the point of connection with this column.

In the second step of the example, let’s assume that the linked node is missing also at the connection of the horizontal beam with the right hand column. Consequently, when the beam is moved (again up and right), both the columns undergo no change at all (see the figure below).

Moving the geometric entities

Moving an entity via the property table If you want to move a node or a 1D member to a new location and you know the co-ordinates of the final position, you can define the co-ordinates directly in the property dialogue.

When moving a single node, its new position can be defined simply be typing the new X, Y, and Z co-ordinates. When moving two or more nodes and when moving a 1D member or 1D members, one must be aware of the fact that only some of the co-ordinates may be allowed to be changed.

For example, if you want to move a vertical column, it is not possible to move it in vertical direction. The only change that is allowed is the horizontal move. This limitation stems from the following:

In order to move an entity using the discussed approach, you have to select its end points, i.e. its end nodes.

The move is carried out via the change of the position of these end nodes.

Assuming the situation that two nodes located one above the other, it is illogical to modify their Z co-ordinate, as the two nodes would become identical. Therefore, only X and Y co-ordinates may be modified in the example under consideration.

Similar rules are applied for entities oriented in a different than vertical direction.

The procedure for move of a node or nodes

1. Select the nodes you want to move.

2. In the property table, modify the co-ordinate or co-ordinates you require to.

3. Confirm each modified co-ordinate with [Enter] key.

4. After each confirmation, you will see the response in the graphical window, as the model will be regenerated.

5. Clear the selection (unless you want to continue to work with the selected nodes)

The procedure for move of a 1D member(s)

1. Select end nodes of the 1D members you want to move.

2. In the property table, modify the co-ordinate or co-ordinates you require to.

3. Confirm each modified co-ordinate with [Enter] key.

4. After each confirmation, you will see the response in the graphical window, as the model will be regenerated.

5. Clear the selection (unless you want to continue to work with the selected nodes)

Geometry

267

Moving an entity via a menu function Function Move entity can be activated in two ways:

using menu item Modify > Move,

using the [Move] ( ) icon on the Geometrical manipulations toolbar.

Both the approached call the same function for move of geometric entities.

The function works with selected entities and moves them to a new location. The selection can be made:

either before the activation of the function,

or after the activation of the function.

The Move operation done with a previously made selection of entities

If some entities have been selected prior to calling the Move function, the function requires only the definition of the move vector and then it performs the move operation with the already selected entities. Once the entities are moved to a new location, the function is closed and the selection of the entities remains the same as it was before the function call.

The procedure for the Move operation done with a previously made selection of entities

1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved or adopt the existing selection made for other purposes.

2. Call function Move.

3. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

4. Define the second reference point.

5. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains unchanged.

The Move operation done with a selection created as a part the function procedure

The Move function can be, of course, called also without any existing, previously made selection. The selection of the entities that are supposed to be moved is then made as a part of the Move operation procedure. Once the operation is completed and the function closed, the selection is cleared and does not exist any more. However, it may be renewed via the Previous selection function.

The procedure for the Move operation done with an afterwards-created selection of entities

1. Call function Move.

2. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved.

3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection part of the procedure.

4. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

5. Define the second reference point.

6. The move operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.

Moving an entity via the window pop-up menu An entity or a set of entities can be moved quite simply using the pop-up menu that appears when you click the right button of your mouse.

Move of one or more previously selected entities using the right mouse button pop-up menu

The procedure is very similar to the procedure for the Move operation called from menu and done with a previously made selection of entities. The only difference is the way the Move function is called.

The procedure for the Move operation using the right mouse button pop-up menu

1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved or adopt the existing selection made for other purposes.

2. Click the right mouse button.

3. A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select the Move function.

5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

6. Define the second reference point.

Basic Reference Guide

268

7. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains unchanged.

Move of a single entity using the right mouse button pop-up menu

If only a single entity should be moved, the procedure may be even simpler and shorter. During this approach, no selection is necessary to be made and, therefore, no selection remains active after the operation.

The procedure for Move of a single entity using the right mouse button pop-up menu

1. Place the mouse cursor on the midline of the entity you want to move.

2. Click the right mouse button.

3. A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select the Move function.

5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

6. Define the second reference point.

7. The move operation has been completed.

Moving an entity using Drag&Drop feature An entity can be moved by simple picking and dragging over the graphical window. This approach can be applied on a single entity as well as on multiple entities.

The procedure for Drag&Drop move

1. Select the entity or entities you want to move

2. Place the mouse cursor on one of the selected entities near to its end point. This end point will become a reference point for the move operation.

3. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.

4. Drag the mouse over the graphical window until the moved elements gets to the intended target position. You will see the current position of the moved entities in thin-line style.

5. Release the mouse button.

Tip: The Drag&Drop approach for the move operation is convenient mainly if the target position of the moved entity end-point lies (i) on a point of a grid, (ii) in an end-point of another entity, (iii) in an intermediate point (e.g. one quarter, one half, centre of an arc, etc.) of another entity, or (iv) in any other point that is easily and uniquely accessible by the mouse cursor.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the Drag&Drop moving procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Rotating an entity via its vertex co-ordinate change If you want to rotate a 1D member and you know the final position of its vertices, you may do that in the property table. This approach is useful mainly if one of the vertices remains in its original position, i.e. if the vertex (the one that does not change its position) represents a centre of revolution.

In order to rotate a 1D member, select one of the end nodes of the 1D member and modify its co-ordinates. The procedure of co-ordinate modification is the same as if you move a node.

Rotating an entity via a menu function Function Rotate can be activated in two ways:

using menu item Modify > Rotate,

using the [Rotate] ( ) icon on the Geometrical manipulations toolbar.

The function works with selected entities and rotates them to a new location. The selection can be made:

either before the activation of the function,

or after the activation of the function.

The procedure for the rotation (selections is made after the function is started)

1. Call function Rotate.

2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.

3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

4. Define the centre of rotation.

Geometry

269

5. Define the first reference point. (The angle of rotation is defined by means of two reference points. These points together with the centre of rotation define the rotation angle.)

6. Define the second reference point.

7. The move operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.

The alternative procedure for the rotation with pre-selected entities

1. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.

2. Call the Rotate function.

3. Define the centre of rotation.

4. Define the first reference point. (The angle of rotation is defined by means of two reference points. These points together with the centre of rotation define the rotation angle.)

5. Define the second reference point.

6. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains as it was prior to calling the rotation function.

Alternative with defined angle of rotation

In any of the above described procedures, you can alternatively define the axis and angle of rotation. The procedure will be explained for the option when selection of entities is made after the function is called.

Procedure to rotate an entity by given angle

1. Call function Rotate.

2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.

3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

4. There is a special icon added to the end of the toolbar above the command line: "Enter the angle of rotation". Press this icon.

5. The Rotation angle and axis dialogue is opened on the screen.

6. Input the angle and specify the way you want to define the axis (see below).

7. Confirm with [OK].

8. Input the centre of rotation.

9. If required (depending on the option selected in the Rotation angle and axis dialogue), define the axis of revolution.

10. The entity is rotated.

Rotation angle and axis dialogue

Rotation

Angle Specifies the angle of rotation

Axis vector

Working plane normal vector

The axis of rotation is perpendicular to the current working plane.

Define axis by cursor

The axis must be defined by two points. The centre of rotation is input for all options. This option then requires one more point.

Enter custom axis vector

The axis of rotation is defined by the vector – see below.

Custom axis vector

The vector defining the axis of rotation if option Enter custom axis vector was selected.

Rotating an entity via the right mouse button pop-up menu The procedure for the rotation of entities using the window pop-up menu is very similar to the same procedure for the move of entities. The only difference is that instead of two reference points the user has to define the centre of rotation and two reference points.

For details see chapters Moving an entity via the window pop-up menu and Rotating an entity via a menu function.

Rotating an entity using Drag&Drop feature

Basic Reference Guide

270

The Drag&Drop feature can be in some special cases applied also for the rotation of an entity. During the Drag&Drop operation, just one of the end point of a 1D member can be moved to another location. If some specific conditions are satisfied, the result of the operation may be the rotation of a 1D member.

The conditions that must be fulfilled are:

One of the 1D members end-points must also be the centre of rotation.

The other end-point must be the point that is being Drag&Dropp-ed.

The original and target position of the moved point must lie on a circle with the centre in the centre of rotation defined above.

If the last of the conditions stated above is not satisfied, the "move" is still a kind of rotation, but simultaneously, the 1D member changes its length. Such an operation is not called rotation in the full meaning of the word and is considered to be an operation changing dimensions of a member.

The procedure for the Drag&Drop rotation

1. Select one end node of the 1D member you want to rotate.

2. Place the mouse cursor on the selected node.

3. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.

4. Drag the mouse over the graphical window until the node reaches the intended target position. You will see the current position of the moved entity in thin-line style.

5. Release the mouse button.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the Drag&Drop procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Mirroring an entity Any entity can be mirrored to a new location. The "mirror" is perpendicular to the current working plane. The user just has to define the inclination of the mirror. Once again, as in the case of move and rotation, there are two possible ways to carry out the operation and two ways to activate the function itself.

Function Mirror can be activated in two ways:

using menu item Modify > Mirror,

using the [Mirror] ( ) icon on the Geometrical manipulations toolbar.

The procedure for the mirroring (selections is made after the function is started)

1. Call the Mirror function.

2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.

3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

4. Define the first reference point. (The plane of the mirroring is always perpendicular to the current working plane. The precise orientation of the mirror is then defined by means of two reference points.)

5. Define the second reference point.

6. The mirroring operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.

The alternative procedure for the mirroring with pre-selected entities

1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved.

2. Call the Mirror function.

3. Define the first reference point.

4. Define the second reference point.

5. The mirroring operation has been completed and the selection remains as it was prior to calling the mirroring function.

Moving the additional data entities

Introduction to moving of additional-data entities The term Additional data covers two major groups of entities: loads and model data (e.g. supports, hinges, etc.). Both the groups form a very important part of a Scia Engineer project. Even though the two groups have a lot in common, they represent separate compact units. The units are dealt with in separate chapters in this manual. Therefore, also the move operations for the individual units are explained in separate texts. This division has been applied in order to provide the reader with a good consistency in chapters devoted to related topics.

The relevant chapters are:

Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Moving the model data

Loads > Modifying the existing load > Moving the loads

Geometry

271

Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Copying the model data

Loads > Modifying the existing load > Copying the loads

Copying the entities

Introduction to copying of entities Copying of members is an easy way to create models of complex structure. This is useful particularly if the geometry of the modelled structure shows at least a few signs of regularity.

Members may be copied one by one or en bloc. It is possible to create only one or more copies at a time. If required, additional members may interconnect the individual copies with the original and with each other in specified point.

In general, the user may choose from the following approaches:

making a single copy of the original using menu function,

making a single copy of the original using the pop-up menu of the graphical window,

making multiple copies at a time with an advanced definition of copy parameters (e.g. the copied members may rotate simultaneously with being shifted)

Making a single copy via menu function

The procedure to make a single copy of a 1D member

1. Start function Copy:

a. either: use button [Copy] ( ) on toolbar Manipulations

b. or: open menu function Manipulations > Copy

2. Select member(s) that should be copied.

3. Press key [Esc] to end the selection phase.

4. Define the direction and distance for the copy operation. That is, define first and second point of a vector that defines both the direction and distance. (The vector along which the selected entities move in order to create the copy is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the copy vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being copied, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

5. Once you define the second point, the action of copying is performed.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 as many times as required.

7. The function is closed.

An alternative procedure for making a single copy of a member

In general, the alternative procedure is identical to the one above. The difference is that you may swap the first two steps.

1. First, you select the entities.

2. Second, you open the Copy function.

This approach means that once the second point of the copying vector (i.e. the vector that define the direction and distance for the copy operation) is specified, the copy operation is performed. The selected entity remains selected and may be copied to another location.

Making a single copy via window pop-up menu

Copying arbitrary number of entities

The procedure for the copy operation

1. Select the entities to be copied.

2. With the mouse cursor inside the graphical window but NOT OVER any entity, click the right mouse button.

3. A menu appears on the screen

4. Select function Copy.

5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move in order to create the copy is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the copy vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being copied, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

6. Define the second reference point.

7. The operation is performed, copies are created, the function is closed and the selection remains unchanged.

Copying just a single entity

Basic Reference Guide

272

When only a single entity is copied, it is not necessary to make any selection.

The procedure for the copying of a single entity

1. Position the mouse cursor into the graphical window and over the entity you want to copy.

2. Click the right mouse button

3. A menu appears on the screen

4. Select function Copy.

5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move in order to create the copy is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the copy vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being copied, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

6. Define the second reference point.

7. The operation is performed, the copy is created, and the function is closed.

Tip: This approach can be applied even if no entity has been already inserted into selection. The fact that the mouse cursor is positioned on an entity has bigger priority that the fact that any selection has been made. Therefore, it is possible to prepare a selection for any operation, then position the mouse cursor over a single entity and copy this particular entity. The selection remains untouched.

Making multiple copies via menu function Scia Engineer allows the user to make a multiple copy of the original entity. For this operation, the user has to adjust a set of copy parameters. The parameters are grouped in a dialogue that opens automatically once the Multicopy function is activated.

Number of copies Specifies the number of copies that will be made.

Connect selected nodes with new beams

Defines whether the individual copies will be interconnected by means of newly inserted 1D members. If so, the user must specify the nodes (i.e. insert them into the selection for the copy operation) where the interconnection will be realised.

Distance vector By default the distance vector is defined by means of two reference points specified by the user. (The vector along which the selected entities move in order to create the copy is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the copy vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being copied, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)

However, it is possible to enter the vector numerically in the Multicopy table.

Rotation By default, the copied members are just shifted along the specified vector (see above). It is however possible to rotate the copied members during their "move".

How to define the distance

The distance input either in the table or by means of two reference points can specify:

either the distance between two adjacent copies,

or the distance between the original and the last copy.

If only one copy is being made, the meaning of the two options becomes identical.

How to define the rotation

The rotation angle input in the table can specify:

either the angle between two adjacent copies,

or the angle between the original and the last copy.

If only one copy is being made, the meaning of the two options becomes identical.

Rotation around The rotation may be defined around UCS axes or around the distance vector. It is obvious that the latter enables the user to input just one angle – around the distance vector.

It is clear from the list of parameters that this variant of copy function provides for advanced definition of copying vector (i.e. the vector that define the direction and distance for the copy operation).

The procedure to make a multiple copy of a 1D member

1. Start function Multicopy:

a. either: use button [Multicopy] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations

Geometry

273

b. or: open menu function Manipulations > Multicopy

2. Select 1D member(s) that should be copied.

3. Press key [Esc] to end the selection phase.

4. Set the parameters for the copy operation (see above for their meaning).

5. Define the direction and distance for the copy operation. That is, define first and second point of a vector that defines both the direction and distance. (NOTE: This point is automatically skipped if the distance vector has been input numerically in the table – point 4).

6. Once you define the second point, the action of copying is performed.

7. The function is closed.

The alternative procedure for the multicopy operation

As in the case of other manipulation functions, it is once again possible to swap the first two steps of the procedure.

1. First, you make the selection of entities that you want to copy.

2. Second, you call the Multicopy function.

Then you follow the procedure given above starting from the step 4.

At the end, the selection that has been made prior to calling the copy function remains unchanged.

The picture below shows a possible application of Multicopy function. A spiral staircase can be "generated" just in one multicopy step.

Deleting the entities

Introduction to deleting of entities Any entity that is no longer required and becomes redundant or even makes an obstacle to the achievement of the user’s main goal – creation of an accurate model of the real structure, can be deleted.

It may happen that some entities have been somehow distorted during the modelling process that they become hidden to the user’s eye. This may happen if two 1D members lie on each other (i.e. their middle axes become identical) of if the 1D member length changes to zero.

Scia Engineer provides a set of tools for all above-mentioned circumstances.

Deleting the user-selected entities

The procedure for the deletion of entities

1. Select the entities that should be removed.

2. Start function Delete:

a. either: via menu Modify > Delete,

b. or: via the window pop-up menu.

3. The program informs you about what have been selected.

4. If the report corresponds to what you are expecting, confirm the action. If you are not sure about the reported message, abort the action, clear the selection and start again.

5. If the action has been confirmed, it is performed and the selected entities are removed from the project.

It may happen that after the operation is completed some free nodes remain in the project. They may be removed by means of function Check structure data.

Basic Reference Guide

274

Under certain conditions (depending on the entities present in the model) the program issues a question box to find out what to do with a certain type of entities.

Delete free nodes If ON, the free nodes that form as a result of the Delete operation will be deleted.

Convert intersection into internal edge

If ON then if a deleted slab intersects with another slab and if the intersection of the two slabs has been generated, this intersection remains preserved as an internal slab of the slab that is not deleted.

Convert plate ribs into 1D member

If ON then if a ribbed slab is deleted, the beams are converted to standard 1D members and are kept in the model.

Always display this warning

If ON, this warning is shown with every Delete.

If OFF, the program takes into account the settings, but the dialogue itself is not shown. The settings can be changed through menu function Setup > Delete.

The settings for the Delete function can also be adjusted through menu function Setup > Delete.

Deleting invalid entities Invalid entities are such that do not have proper function in the model. They may be for example 1D members of zero length, duplicate beams, free nodes, etc.

Procedure for automatic removal of invalid entities

1. Start function Check structure data.

a. either: use menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data,

b. or: start tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data.

2. Make sure that required options are ticked.

3. Press button [Check].

4. Check the upper right part of the dialogue and verify whether any free nodes have been discovered.

5. If so, make sure that option Delete is selected in required fields.

6. Press button [Continue] to delete the revealed free nodes.

Tip: For more information about function Check structure data see chapter Calculation > Check of data.

Editing the entity properties

Introduction to editing of entity properties Once a new 1D member is inserted into the model, it does not mean that must be there AS IS forever and that no property of the 1D member can be changed.

The user may at any time open the property dialogue of a particular 1D member and edit the properties in it.

In addition, it is also possible to use a simpler procedure – editing in the property window of the application. This approach is not only faster, but it also provides for simultaneous editing of multiple 1D members.

Editing the beam properties in its property dialogue

The procedure for the editing of beam properties in the beam property dialogue

1. Position the mouse cursor over the 1D member you want to edit.

2. Click the right mouse button.

3. The window pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select function Edit properties.

5. The property dialogue of the 1D member opens on the screen.

6. Modify any parameters you need to.

7. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

Editing the beam properties in the property window Whenever an entity is selected in Scia Engineer, its properties are displayed in the property window.

Therefore, it is possible to simply edit any item in the property window and the change is immediately taken into account and the entity is re-drawn with the new parameters.

The procedure for the editing of properties of a single 1D member

Geometry

275

1. Make sure that no entities are in the current selection.

2. Position the mouse cursor over the required entity.

3. Click the left mouse button to select the entity.

4. The properties of the entity are displayed in the property window.

5. Edit any parameter you need to.

6. Clear the selection.

The procedure for the editing of properties of a multiple 1D members at a time

1. Make sure that no entities are in the current selection.

2. Select the entities you need to edit.

3. The properties for the selected entities are displayed in the property window (for details see chapter Selections versus editing of properties).

4. Edit any parameters you need to.

5. Clear the selection.

Note: Please, be careful when editing the properties of multiple entities at the same time. Once you type and confirm the value into a particular cell of the property window, the change is immediately made for all currently selected entities. Even if the original value of the edited property was different for individual entities, it becomes unique with the change being confirmed. The change is confirmed as soon as you either type the value and press Enter, or as soon as you type the value and leave the cell. The cell may be left either using the left mouse button click on another cell or pressing Tab key.

Adjusting the buckling parameters

The procedure for adjustment of buckling parameters for a particular member

1. In the graphical window, select the 1D member (or members) whose buckling settings should be modified.

2. The 1D member properties are displayed in the Property window.

3. In the table cell Buckling lengths use the combo box to select the required Buckling length definition and go to the last step of the procedure.

4. If the required Buckling length definition has not been defined yet, use the button at the right hand side of the cell to create a new Buckling length definition.

5. Press button [Edit buckling] to open the editing dialogue.

6. Adjust required parameters.

7. Confirm with [OK].

8. Clear the selection.

Note: When the Buckling length manager is opened, it displays ONLY those buckling length definitions that correspond to conditions of the selected 1D member(s). If e.g. a 1D member with one buckling segment is selected, the manager hides any buckling length system for more then one segment.

Modifying the shape and dimensions

Types of geometric manipulations When talking about the modification of a shape or dimensions of an entity, we can distinguish several types of manipulations.

Manipulation with a whole entity

Functions belonging to this group work with the whole entity, regardless of its dimension. They can be applied to an auxiliary line, 1D member (beam, column, etc.), 2D member (plate, wall, etc.).

Typical functions from this group are: Scale, Stretch.

Manipulation with a line

This group of functions manipulates with "lines". The line may be an auxiliary line, 1D member axis, edge of a 2D member.

Typical functions are: Trim, Extend, Enlarge by defined length, Break in defined points, Join, Break in intersections, Reverse orientation.

Manipulation with a polyline

Functions for the modification of a polyline work with an open or closed polyline.

Typical examples are: Insert node, Delete node, Join curves, Break into curves, Fillet.

Manipulation with a curve

These functions modify a curve, regardless of whether it is a circle or a more genral curve (e.g. spline, Bezier curve, etc.). Also functions converting straight lines into curves and vice versa belong to this group.

Basic Reference Guide

276

Typical examples are: Edit arc (by angle, by bulge, by radius), Edit Bezier weight factor, Convert (curve to line, line to circular arc, line to parabolic arc, line to Bezier, line to spline) and also Editing the shape using Drag&Drop feature.

Treatment of linked nodes in manipulation functions As stated earlier in chapter Types of nodes, there are two types of nodes in ESA. This paragraph will emphasize important rules taken into account in manipulation functions.

In Scia Engineer, a connection where the end point of one 1D members gets in contact with an intermediate point of another 1D members of two 1D members is called a LINKED NODE. The said is true on condition that the two 1D members were "told" to be connected to each other. What, however, remains an open issue is what should happen to the linked node when one of the 1D members is repositioned. Should the linked node stay "rooted" in the original location, or should it follow the manipulation formula?

As the problem is rather complex, Scia Engineer presents a logical compromise solution.

Manipulation functions are divided into two groups:

a global change of 1D member position and / or orientation is possible,

only an "in-axis" modification of 1D member geometry is available.

In-axis modification

Manipulation where only the "in-axis" modification can be carried out leads to the situation that the linked node remains in its original position. This group of manipulation functions consists of a limited number of functions: trim, extend, enlarge, break in defined points.

Out-of-axis modification

Manipulation where only a general modification of the 1D member orientation can be performed cause that the linked node is manipulated as well and may change its position. This is the case of majority of manipulation functions, e.g. move, rotate, mirror, stretch, scale, etc.

If the manipulation brings any ambiguity to what should be done with the linked node, the linked node is disconnected and the connection of the two 1D members is broken. This may happen in function Join (two 1D members into one).

Examples

The original structure

The cantilever end moved up and right using function Move node.

Geometry

277

The cantilever end moved right using function Move node.

The cantilever end moved right using function Extend (by defined length).

Note: The distinction between "in-axis" and "out-of-axis" modification is not based on the actual result of the manipulation that has been carried out. It is based on the principle, i.e. on the fact WHAT CAN BE DONE by means of selected manipulation function. If the function provides for an "out-of-axis" manipulation, rules for "out-of-axis" manipulation are applied even if the final position of the 1D member looks like after an "in-axis" manipulation.

Editing the shape in the property window Whenever an entity is selected, the property window of the application displays its properties including the endpoints and even co-ordinates (for nodes). If any of the geometry attributes is changed in the property window, the shape of the corresponding entity is modifies accordingly.

The procedure to change the endpoints of a 1D member

1. Select the entity that should be moved.

2. The property window displays (among others) names of the end-nodes.

3. Input the name of a new end-node or nodes.

4. The 1D member changes accordingly.

The procedure to move the endpoint of an entity

1. Select the end point of the entity that should be moved.

2. Type the new values for co-ordinates (you may define the co-ordinates either in the UCS or in the GCS, you may even combine the definition, i.e. input e.g. X co-ordinate in one system and Z co-ordinate in the other system).

3. The endpoint moves accordingly.

Editing the shape using Drag&Drop feature The shape of 1D members may be changed using the Drag&Drop feature. Any end point of 1D member can be "grabbed" and "dragged" over the working plane. The trajectory of the dragging determines whether the operation is a pure rotation or shape modification.

If a curved 1D member is modified in this way, it is possible to pick not only the end-point, but also the characteristic point of the curve. Thus e.g. the shape of Bezier curve can be modified, etc.

The videos below show a few possible applications.

Basic Reference Guide

278

Editing circular arc

Editing Bezier curve

Editing spline

The pictures above are videos that demonstrate the Drag&Drop procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Manipulations with whole entities

Scaling the entities The Scale function changes the size of the selected entities by given factor.

The procedure for the scaling of entities

1. Start function Scale:

a. either call menu function Modify > Scale

b. or click button [Scale] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities to be modified.

3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

4. Input the centre of affinity.

5. Input the first point defining the magnification scale.

6. Input the second point defining the magnification scale.

7. The operation is performed and function closed.

The alternative procedure for the scaling of entities

As with other geometry manipulation functions, it is possible to swap the first two steps.

1. First, you make the selection.

2. Second, you start the function.

Once the function ends, the original selection remains untouched.

There is one more feature related to this alternative procedure. The function can be opened via the window pop-up menu. If the pop-up menu is used, one must be aware of where the mouse cursor is precisely positioned when the right mouse button is clicked. If the cursor is on an empty are of the modelling space, the operation is carried out with currently selected entities. However, if the cursor is positioned just over a particular 1D member, the function only deals with this particular 1D member and the current selection is ignored.

Stretching the entities The Stretch function changes the size of the selected entities by given factor.

The procedure for the stretching of entities

1. Start function Stretch:

a. either call menu function Modify > Stretch,

b. or click button [Stretch] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities to be modified.

3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

4. Input the centre of affinity.

5. Input the first point defining the stretching.

6. Input the second point defining the stretching.

7. The operation is performed and function closed.

The alternative procedure for the stretching of entities

As with other geometry manipulation functions, it is possible to swap the first two steps.

1. First, you make the selection.

2. Second, you start the function.

Once the function ends, the original selection remains untouched.

There is one more feature related to this alternative procedure. The function can be opened via the window pop-up menu. If the pop-up menu is used, one must be aware of where the mouse cursor is precisely positioned when the right mouse button is clicked. If the cursor is on an empty are of the modelling space, the operation is carried out with currently selected entities. However, if the cursor is positioned just over a particular 1D member, the function only deals with this particular 1D member and the current selection is ignored.

Geometry

279

Manipulations with lines

Trimming the entities The Trim function trims the selected entities according to the specified "trimming" entity.

The procedure for the trimming of entities

1. Start function Trim:

a. either call menu function Modify > Trim,

b. or click button [Trim] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select entities to which the other ones should be trimmed.

3. Press [Esc] to end this particular selection.

4. Select entities that should be trimmed (i.e. shortened).

5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by the computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the function must be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command line. Once the function is closed, the original selection is restored.

Example:

before trimming after trimming

Extending the entities The Extend function extends the selected entities according to the specified "boundary" entity. In order words, the function extends the selected entities in a way so that they reach and touch the other specified entity.

The procedure for the extending of entities

1. Start function Extend:

a. either call menu function Modify > Extend,

b. or click button [Extend] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select entities to which the other ones should be extended.

3. Press [Esc] to end this particular selection.

4. Select entities that should be extended.

5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by the computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the function must be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command line. Once the function is closed, the original selection is restored.

Example:

before extending after extending

Basic Reference Guide

280

Enlarging the entities The Enlarge function extends the selected entities by a given value.

The procedure for the enlarging of entities

1. Start function Enlarge by defined length:

a. either call menu function Modify > Enlarge by defined length,

b. or click button [Enlarge by defined length] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. In the dialogue that appear on the screen, type the value by which the selected entities should be enlarged.

3. Select entities that should be enlarged.

4. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by the computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the function must be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command line. Once the function is closed, the original selection is restored.

Breaking the entities in defined points

The procedure for the breaking of an entity in a specified point

1. Start function Break in defined points:

a. either call menu function Modify > Break in defined points,

b. or click button [Break in defined points] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entity that should be broken.

3. Press [Esc] to end this particular selection.

4. Define the point of division.

5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Breaking the entities in intersections Any intersecting entity can be divided in the point of intersection, if required.

The procedure for the breaking of entities in the point of their intersection

1. Start function Break in intersections:

a. either call menu function Modify > Break in intersections,

b. or click button [Break in intersections] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entity that should be broken.

3. Press [Esc] to end the function.

4. All the selected and intersecting entities are divided (broken) in the point of intersection.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Coupling the entities

Geometry

281

If required, any two entities that touch each other in their endpoints can be coupled (joined) to create a single entity.

The procedure for the coupling of entities into one

1. Start function Join:

a. either call menu function Modify > Join,

b. or click button [Join] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entity that should be joined together.

3. Press [Esc] to end the function.

4. The individual entities are coupled.

Note 1: The entities that are being coupled together, must lie on one line. Otherwise, it is not possible to create a single 1D member from them. Note 2: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Reversing the orientation of an entity Each entity has got its starting point and end point. These points for example define the orientation of the local X-axis of a 1D member. If necessary, the user may reverse the orientation by swapping the end-nodes.

The procedure to reverse the orientation of a 1D member

1. Start function Reverse orientation:

a. either call menu function Modify > Reverse orientation,

b. or click button [Reverse orientation] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities that should be reverted.

3. Press [Esc] to end the function.

The alternative procedure to reverse the orientation of a 1D member

As with some other geometry manipulation functions, it is possible to swap the first two steps.

1. First, you make the selection.

2. Second, you start the function.

The function is immediately performed and automatically closed.

Note: The change of 1D member orientation can be easily verified when local co-ordinate system of the edited entity is displayed. The direction of the local X-axis inverts once the function is finished.

Example:

before reversing after reversing

Manipulations with polylines

Inserting a node into a polygonal entity Into any entity (polygonal or single-segment one) an inner vertex may be inserted. The inserted vertex may be used as a node for further geometrical manipulations. For example, another entity may use it as its end-point, the node may be moved to modify the shape of the original entity, etc.

The procedure for the definition of an inner vertex

1. Start function Insert node:

a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – Insert node,

Basic Reference Guide

282

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Insert node into polyline] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the polylines where the inner nodes (vertices) should be inserted.

3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

4. Define the points where the inner nodes should be located.

5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

6. The nodes are inserted into the selected polylines in the defined points.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. Only the points for the inner nodes must be then specified.

Deleting a node from a polygonal entity This function is analogous to the insertion of a node into a polyline. However, it removes the selected inner nodes from an existing polygonal entity. The result is that the selected vertex is removed and the two adjacent vertices are connected with a straight line.

The procedure for the deletion of an inner vertex

1. Start function Delete node:

a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – Delete node,

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Delete node on polyline] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the polylines from which the inner nodes (vertices) should be removed.

3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

4. Select the nodes that should be removed.

5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

6. The selected nodes are removed from the selected polylines.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. Only the inner nodes for the deletion must be specified.

Coupling curves into a polyline Any two entities may be joined together to create a polygonal entity. The only prerequisite is that the two entities must have one common end-point.

The procedure for joining of entities into a polyline

1. Start function Join curves into polyline:

a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Join curves into polyline,

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Join curves into polyline] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities that should be joined together.

3. Press [Esc] to end the function.

4. The entities are joined together and from now on they represent a single polygonal entity.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Breaking a polyline into curves A polyline may be broken into separate lines or curves.

The procedure to break a polyline into lines/curves

1. Start function Edit polyline – break into single curves:

a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – break into single curves,

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Edit polyline – break into single curves] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities to be broken.

3. Press [Esc] to end the function.

4. The selected polylines are broken into separate single lines or curves.

Geometry

283

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Defining a fillet in a polyline vertex A sharp corner in a polyline vertex can be modified through a fillet function.

The procedure to define a fillet

1. Start function Edit polyline – fillet:

a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – fillet,

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Edit polyline – fillet] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select two adjacent polyline sides.

3. Specify the type and size of the fillet and confirm with [OK].

4. The sharp corner in the corresponding vertex is modified accordingly.

Fillet parameters

Fillet type line

The fillet is formed by a short line inserted into the corner. The parameter Size is measured from the edited polyline vertex along the original polyline side (i.e. the fillet size is not the length of the inserted short line, but the length of the leg of the imaginary little triangle that is created in the vertex).

circle arc by length

The fillet is formed by a circular arc inserted into the corner. The parameter Size is measured from the edited polyline vertex along the original polyline side (i.e. the fillet size is not the length of the inserted arc, but the length of the leg of the imaginary little triangle in the vertex).

circle arc by radius

The fillet is formed by a circular arc inserted into the corner. The parameter Size represents the radius of the inserted arc.

Size The meaning of this parameter depend on the fillet type. See above for the explanation.

Manipulations with curves

Editing the circular arc angle A defined circular arc may be edited afterwards if such a need arises. It is possible to edit the arc’s angle, the arc's bulge, and the arc's radius.

The procedure for the modification of the angle of a circular arc

1. Open function Edit arc angle:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc angle] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by angle.

2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.

3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.

4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Type the new value.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Editing the circular arc bulge A defined circular arc may be edited afterwards if such a need arises. It is possible to edit the arc's angle, the arc’s bulge, or the arc's radius.

Basic Reference Guide

284

The procedure for the modification of the bulge of a circular arc

1. Open function Edit arc bulge:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc bulge] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by bulge.

2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.

3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.

4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Type the new value.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Editing the circular arc radius A defined circular arc may be edited afterwards if such a need arises. It is possible to edit the arc's angle, the arc's bulge, or the arc’s radius.

The procedure for the modification of the radius of a circular arc

1. Open function Edit arc radius:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc radius] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by radius.

2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.

3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.

4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Type the new value.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Editing the Bezier curve weight factors

The procedure for the modification of a Bezier curve

1. Open function Edit Bezier weight factors:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit Bezier weight factors] (

> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – Bezier weight factors.

2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.

3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.

4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Type the new value.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

It is also possible to edit the shape of a Bezier curve using the Drag&Drop feature.

The alternative procedure for editing of Bezier curve shape

1. Simple select the curve you want to edit.

2. The curve is then highlighted including the two control points located outside the curve.

3. Position the mouse cursor over the required point.

4. Press and hold the left mouse button.

Geometry

285

5. Drag the mouse over the pad to place the point into its new location.

6. Release the button.

Converting a curve into a line Any curve, i.e. circular arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve and spline can be converted into a straight line, if necessary. Scia Engineer offers a universal function that converts any curve into a line.

The procedure for the conversion of a curve into a line

1. Open function Convert curve to line:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert curve to line] (

> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert curve to line.

2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select multiple arcs at time.

3. Press [Esc] key to carry out the conversion.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Converting a line into a circular arc If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, 1D members defined as straight may be afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.

The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a circular arc

1. Open function Convert line to circle arc:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to circle arc] (

> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to circle arc.

2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.

3. Define an intermediate point of the arc.

4. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and restores back the original selection.

Converting a line into a parabolic arc If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, 1D members defined as straight may be afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.

The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a parabolic arc

1. Open function Convert line to parabolic arc:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to parabolic

arc] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to parabolic arc.

2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.

3. Define an intermediate point of the parabola.

4. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and restores back the original selection.

Converting a line into a Bezier curve If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, 1D members defined as straight may be afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.

The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a Bezier curve

1. Open function Convert line to Bezier:

Basic Reference Guide

286

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to Bezier] (

> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line Bezier.

2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.

3. Define two control points of Bezier curve.

4. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and restores back the original selection.

Converting a line into a spline curve If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, 1D members defined as straight may be afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.

The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a spline

1. Open function Convert line to spline:

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to spline] (

> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to spline.

2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.

3. Define control points of the spline. You may input as many control points as required.

4. Press [Esc] to end the definition of control points.

5. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and restores back the original selection.

Connecting and disconnecting the entities

Introduction to connecting and disconnecting of entities If a structure consists of more than one member, it is necessary to define the connection of the individual entities. The connection may be rigid or free or anything in between.

In Scia Engineer the rigid connection is realised by means of linked nodes and cross-links. The "something in between" connection may be realised by means of hinges (see chapter Hinges) or by means of hinged cross-links. And there is no need to define a free connection, just let the 1D members unconnected.

The difference between individual types of connections can be summarised as follows.

A linked node is a connection where an end-point of one entity is connected to any point of another entity.

A cross-link is the connection of two intersecting entities. Both entities remain "undivided" in the connection, they just pass through it.

A hinge may be inserted into an end-point of a 1D member if other than rigid connection is required.

Defining a new connection of two entities IN order to define a new connection of two entities if the end-point of one entity lies anywhere on the other one, the user has to insert a linked node. Once the linked node is inserted, the two entities become fixed together. If other than fixed connection is required, it is necessary to define a hinge in the linked node.

The procedure for the definition of a new linked node may vary according to initial conditions:

The two entities have already been inserted into the model and now the need to connect them has arisen.

One entity has been inserted into the model and the user wants to define the point where the other entity should be connected. However, the other entity will be defined later. (see paragraph Inserting a linked node for future connection of an entity)

The procedure for connection of two entities

1. Open function Connect nodes to beams:

a. either using menu function Modify > Connect members/nodes

Geometry

287

b. or using button [Connect nodes to members] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations

c. or using button tree menu function Connect members/nodes.

2. Select 1D members and / or nodes that should be connected.

3. Close the function.

It is possible to apply an alternative procedure and swap the first two steps of the stated procedure.

The alternative procedure for the connection of two entities

1. Select 1D members and / or nodes that should be connected.

2. Open function Connect nodes to beams:

a. either using menu function Modify > Connect members/nodes,

b. or using button [Connect nodes to members] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

c. or using button tree menu function Connect members/nodes.

3. The function is carried out and closed.

Note: It is important to know what one wants to connect and make the selection accordingly. This note is important especially for curved 1D members. If the two connected 1D members have two or more intersections and both the 1D members are selected for the operation, the connection (linked nodes) are created in all the intersection points. Therefore, if the connection of such 1D members is required in one specific point only, it is necessary to select the required end-point of the first 1D member (i.e. its node) and the other 1D member. Then the connection is generated in the selected node only.

Inserting a linked node for future connection of an entity It is possible to specify a point on a 1D member where another entity will be later attached.

The procedure for the definition of the connecting point (for later insertion of the other entity)

1. Open function Node on beam:

a. either using menu function menu Tree > Structure > Node on beam,

b. or using service Structure and function Node on beam.

2. Select the 1D member where the point (i.e. linked node) should be defined.

3. Specify the location of the linked node.

Defining a new connection of intersecting entities Any two intersecting entities may be connected in a point called cross-link. The cross-link ensures that the two entities remain undivided but act together and allow for transfer of internal forces from one entity to the other one.

The cross-link may be either fixed or hinged. The hinged variant does not transfer bending moments from one entity to the other.

The procedure for the definition of a new cross-link

1. Open function Cross-link

a. either from menu Tree > Structure,

b. or from tree menu service Structure.

2. In the Property window specify the parameters of the cross-link, i.e. its name and property: fixed versus hinged.

3. Select the 1D members that should be connected.

4. Close the function.

5. The cross-link is generated and displayed in the form of a thick dot with thin short lines along the connected 1D members.

It is possible to use an alternative procedure, which means that first, the selection of 1D members is made and only then the function is called. If applied, this procedure does not require the user to close the function but does not allow for the modification of cross-link parameters. They would have to be edited afterwards.

Modifying the connection of two entities Any defined linked node can be edited if required. Any of its parameters can be reviewed or changed.

Name It is used for identification of the node.

Connection Says that the node is connected (linked) to an entity. States the "owner" of the node.

Coordinate Specifies the co-ordinate type by means of which the position of the node on its "owner" is defined.

Position x Defines the position.

Basic Reference Guide

288

LCS The node can have its local coordinate system. To define it, at least one UCS must be defined by the user. If it is done, it is possible to coincide the LCS of the node with the required UCS.

(see also Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node).

The procedure for the modification of linked node properties

1. Select the node you need to modify.

2. The node parameters are displayed in the Property window.

3. Modify any parameter you need to.

4. The modification is immediately taken into account.

5. Clear the selection.

Note 1: It is possible to edit the linked node even if it has not been attached to the second entity. Thus e.g. its relative position on the 1D member can be modified. Note 2: It is possible to modify several nodes at a time. The user must be aware of that the change made in the Property window will be applied to all selected nodes. Note 3: The Property window shows among others the 1D members that are connected in the selected node.

Modifying the connection of intersecting entities Any defined cross-link can be edited if required. Any of its parameters can be reviewed or changed.

Name It is used for identification of the node.

Connection Defines the type of the connection (fixed or hinged)

The procedure for the modification of cross-link properties

1. Select the cross-link you need to modify.

2. The cross-link parameters are displayed in the Property window.

3. Modify any parameter you need to.

4. The modification is immediately taken into account.

5. Clear the selection.

Note 1: It is possible to modify several nodes at a time. The user must be aware of that the change made in the Property window will be applied to all selected nodes. Note 2: The Property window shows among others the 1D members that are connected in the selected cross-link.

Deleting the connection of two entities

Deleting the connection via the property table of the linked node

To delete the connection of two entities realised by means of a linked node, the connection itself must be removed, not the node.

The procedure for deletion of connection realised by means of a linked node

1. Select the node where the connection should be removed.

2. The node parameters are displayed in the Property window.

3. In the Property window click the button next to cell Linked node (the button contains the name of the connected 1D member).

4. A short pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Click item Disconnect.

6. Clear the selection.

Deleting the connection via the function for disconnection of entities

The procedure for disconnection of two entities

1. Open function Disconnect linked nodes:

a. either using menu function Modify > Disconnect linked nodes,

b. or using button [Disconnect linked nodes] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

2. Select 1D members and / or nodes that should be connected.

3. Close the function.

It is possible to apply another altered procedure and swap the first two steps of the procedure.

Geometry

289

The alternative procedure for the disconnection of two entities

1. Select 1D members and / or nodes that should be connected.

2. Open function Disconnect linked nodes:

a. either using menu function Modify > Disconnect linked nodes,

b. or using button [Disconnect linked nodes] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

3. The function is carried out and closed.

Note: It does not matter whether a node or a 1D member is selected. Always either the linked node that is selected directly or the linked node connecting the selected 1D member or members is removed.

Deleting the connection of intersecting entities To delete the connection of intersecting entities realised by means of a cross-link, the cross-link itself must be removed

The procedure for deletion of connection realised by means of a cross-link

1. Select the cross-link that should be removed.

2. Open function Delete:

a. either using menu function Modify > Delete,

b. or using the window pop-up menu function Delete.

3. Confirm the action.

4. The cross-link is deleted.

Truing of slabs and walls

Alignment of slabs

Background

CAD and CAE applications, even though they have a lot in common, differ significantly in the requirements on the accuracy with which the shape of individual members is defined.

While the main requirement laid by CAD applications is that the final model must be “pleasing to the eye", in CAE applications everything must be “perfectly aligned” so that a working analysis model can be generated.

For this reason, a model imported into a CAE program from a CAD application must often be tuned. This includes namely (i) the alignment (“truing”) of planar members so that they are really planar (within the tolerances allowed by the calculation module) and (ii) displacement of nodes so that members that are supposed to be in mutual contact really share their border nodes.

Master plane

This alignment (“truing”) process is controlled by what is called “master planes”. A master plane is a plane into which the program tries to project the real member (imported from a CAD application), which results in a perfectly planar 2D-member suitable for the generation of an accuracy-sensitive analysis model.

Also displacement of nodes works with these master planes and moves nodes that are located within the defined distance from a master plane to the master plane.

The user can control the number and type of master planes.

Types of master planes

Planes of parametric input

(This option is available ONLY if (i) project functionality Parameters is ON and (ii) at least one coordinate of at least one node of the structure has been defined through a parameter.)

Master planes are defined in nodes where at least one coordinate is defined by means of a parameter.

For example, if the X-coordinate of a specific node is defined as a parameter, the YZ-plane is put into this node and it forms a master plane. Similarly, if e.g. the Y-coordinate is defined through a parameter, the master plane is defined as the XZ plane passing through the node.

GCS main planes

Master planes are defined in the three main planes (XY, XZ, YZ) of the global coordinate system.

This option creates three master planes regardless whether any member has been defined in the model.

GCS parallel planes

The program takes one defined 2D member of the model after another and looks if the member is parallel to one of the three main planes (XY, XZ, YZ) of the global coordinate system. If so, a new master plane is defined in the plane of the member.

This option creates master plane(s) only if at least one 2D-member has been defined in the model.

UCS XY planes

One master plane is defined in the XY plane of every user-defined coordinate system (UCS).

Basic Reference Guide

290

If at least one UCS has been defined, this option creates master plane(s) regardless whether any member has been defined in the model.

UCS XY parallel planes

The program takes one defined 2D member of the model after another and looks if the member is parallel to the XY plane of some of the defined user coordinate systems. If so, a new master plane is defined in the plane of the member.

This option creates master plane(s) only if at least one 2D-member has been defined in the model.

Line grid planes

Master planes are defined in the main planes of defined line grids.

If at least one line grid has been defined, this option creates master plane(s) regardless whether any member has been defined in the model.

Alignment procedure

Alignment procedure

The whole process can be divided into several principal steps:

A) generation of the list of master planes,

B) truing of slabs,

C) creation of "formulas" and constraints for move of vertices,

D) alignment of vertices,

E) generation of report.

Generation of the list of master planes

At the beginning of the whole procedure a list of master planes is generated.

Master planes are added to the list in the following order:.

1) planes created in nodes the coordinate(s) of which are defined by means of parameters (if option Planes of parametric input in dialogue Setup for connection of structural entities is ON),

2) main planes (XY, XZ, YZ) of the global coordinate system (if option GCS main planes in dialogue Setup for connection of structural entities is ON),

3) planes parallel with the main planes (XY, XZ, YZ) of the global coordinate system (if option GCS parallel planes in dialogue Setup for connection of structural entities is ON) (in fact, not "full" planes are added here, just three vectors defining normals to the three global main planes),

4) XY planes of the defined user coordinate systems (if option UCS XY planes in dialogue Setup for connection of structural entities is ON),

5) planes parallel with the XY-planes of the defined user coordinate systems (if option UCS XY parallel planes in dialogue Setup for connection of structural entities is ON) (similarly to GCS parallel planes, not "full" planes are added here, just vectors defining normals to the UCS XY-planes),

6) planes of the defined line grids (if option Line grid planes in dialogue Setup for connection of structural entities is ON),

7) planes of input flat slabs (these master planes are always generated, it is not possible to exclude them from the algorithm),

8) planes formed by the curve of curved 1D members (these master planes are always generated, it is not possible to exclude them from the algorithm),

9) XY and XZ planes of the local coordinate systems of the input 1D members (if option Beam LCS planes in dialogue Setup for connection of structural entities is ON).

In the phase of the generation of the list of master planes, the algorithm holds two separate lists: (i) a list of "fixed" master planes and (ii) a list of "parallel" master planes. The "parallel" master planes are those generated in step 3 or 5 of the above-mentioned procedure. All other master planes are "fixed" master planes. When a new master plane (of any type) is being generated, it is not mechanically added to the list of the defined master planes, but a set of checks is performed.

a) It is checked whether the candidate master plane is identical (within specified tolerances) with any of the already existing "fixed" master plane. If so, nothing is done.

b) If the candidate master plane is not present in the already existing list of "fixed" master planes, it is checked whether the normal vector of the candidate master plane is identical (within the specified tolerances) with the normal vector of any of the "parallel" master planes. If so, the candidate master plane is rotated so that its normal vector is identical to the normal vector of the "parallel" master plane. And finally, the candidate is added to the list of "fixed" master planes.

After these preliminary operations the alignment itself can start. From now on, only the "fixed" master planes are considered.

1) Each beam and slab knows which master plane it belongs to. All slabs (including openings, subregions and internal edges) and all beams (middle lines of beams) are checked and if necessary the nodes are moved so that they are located exactly in the corresponding master plane. (For beams to local beam planes XY and XZ).

Geometry

291

2) The program searches for "singular" slabs (i.e. slabs that are smaller than the specified tolerance for displacement of nodes). This step prevents possible shrinkage of such a small slab to one point during next alignment steps. These "singular" slabs are skipped in the following steps of the procedure.

3) Now, a set of possible (allowed) moves is created for every node:

a) The program checks the distance of every node from all master planes. If the distance is greater than the allowed maximum displacement of the node, the program further checks whether the slab which the tested node belongs to has been "trued" in step (1) above. If so, the program checks

(i) If the distance of the node was smaller than the allowed maximum displacement of the node before the slab have been aligned.

(ii) If the projection (along the normal to the slab) of the node falls into that slab. If both conditions are met, the node is moved to the master plane (the slab functions here as a kind of "magnet").

(iii) If a master plane has been created from a slab or a beam, such a master plane is not desired to have effect on nodes located somewhere in the distant part of the model. Therefore, a bounding box (with sides parallel to the global coordinate planes) is created around the slab or beam that generated the master plane and it is checked whether the tested node lies inside this bounding box. If not, it is further checked whether any "line" (beam middle line, edge) going from the tested node intersects the bounding box. If not, no manipulation is done with the node. The node can be moved only if it lies inside the bounding box or if at least one "line" going from the node intersects the bounding box.

Optionally, the limitation by the bounding box can be switched off and also the nodes from distant parts (outside of the master slab) of the model are handled.

(iv) The new constraint is added only if it does not collide with another already existing constraint for this vertex.

b) If a node is going to be moved to a master plane generated from parametric planes, the node is moved in such a way that its corresponding coordinate is assigned directly the value of the parameter.

4) At this moment, the program has a set of (allowed) moves for every node.

a) The program now checks whether the displacement of the node is unambiguous, i.e. whether there are not too many "formulas" for the move of the node. If the algorithm has generated (in point (3) above) too many "formulas", the program tries to remove some master planes - e.g. if two angle between two master planes is too small, one of the master planes is removed. If this elimination is not enough, the vertex is not moved.

b) The program checks whether the displacement of the node is not greater than the user-specified maximum displacement and whether the node does not want to "go" to two master planes with the same distance from the node. If these checks fail, the node is not moved.

c) The nodes that passed all the checks are moved.

d) Before saving to the project data, the whole aligned structure is checked for validity of individual members. If any of the members is found invalid, it remains AS IS (i.e. unaligned). Other members are treated normally.

5) At the very end of the procedure a report is generated. What deserves a special explanation is the number of nodes "moved" to planes. This number does not include the nodes that were displaced when a slab as a whole was aligned to a master plane. It includes only nodes moved to other master planes (i.e. it does not cover the nodes moved to the master plane generated from the middle plane of the slab that the node belongs to).

Parameters controlling the alignment of the structure These parameters control the alignment, connection, and check of the structure.

Align structural entities to planes (moving nodes)

This group of parameters controls the process of alignment of entities into selected planes.

Align If ON, selected structural members will be checked and, if necessary, aligned to appropriate planes.

Master planes

Planes of parametric input

(This option is available ONLY if (i) project functionality Parameters is ON and (ii) at least one coordinate of at least one node of the structure is defined through a parameter.)

The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the planes created in nodes whose at least one coordinate is defined by means of a parameter.

For example, if the X-coordinate of a node is defined as a parameter, the YZ-plane is put into this node and it forms the master plane. Similarly, if e.g. the Y-coordinate is defined through a parameter, the master plane is put into the XZ plane created in

Basic Reference Guide

292

the node.

GCS main plains

The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the three main planes of the global coordinate system.

GCS parallel planes

The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the planes parallel with three main planes of the global coordinate system.

UCS XY planes The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into all XY planes of all the defined user coordinate systems.

UCS XY parallel planes

The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into planes parallel with all the XY planes of all the defined user coordinate systems.

Line grid planes

The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the main planes of the line grid.

Max. distance between parallel master planes

This parameter specifies the maximum distance between parallel master planes for which the tested plane is considered a new master plane. If the tested plane is closer to an existing plane, then no new master plane is created and the tested plane is coincided with the existing plane.

Note: Max. distance between parallel master planes must be greater than Max. distance between master plane and node to be aligned.

This parameter is used during the generation of the list of master planes - see chapter Alignment procedure for more details.

Max. angle between master planes

Analogous to the condition above.

This parameter is used during the generation of the list of master planes and in the checks for ambiguity of node moves - see chapter Alignment procedure for more details.

Parameterize the structure by master planes

(This option is available ONLY if (i) project functionality Parameters is ON and (ii) at least one coordinate of at least one node of the structure is defined through a parameter.)

If the program creates master planes in the nodes defined through a parameter (see Planes of parametric input above) and if this option is ON, then the program parameterizes all the nodes found in the appropriate master plane. Follow the example below.

Let us assume a simple structure with four columns. Just one column head (marked with the arrow) is defined by means of a parameter for the Z-coordinate. The X- and Y-coordinates of this column head and all the coordinates of other column heads are defined directly by a number. Now, if options Parameterize the structure by master planes and Planes of parametric input are ON, the program does the following (among other):

- it checks if there is a nodal coordinate defined through a parameter (in our picture: the Z-coordinate of the node marked with the arrow is parameterised),

- if so, it creates a plane "perpendicular" to the parameter: which means that if the parameter is defined for the Z-coordinate, the XY-plane is created and put into the parameterised node (in the picture: shown as transparent),

- if other nodes lie in this plane, their appropriate coordinate is parameterised as well (in our picture: the Z-coordinate of the remaining three column heads is parameterised).

Limits

Geometry

293

Max. distance between master plane and node to be aligned

If the distance between the master plane and tested node is greater than the value specified here, the alignment is not performed. Otherwise, the node is aligned into the plane.

This parameter is used during the alignment process (not during the generation of the list of master planes) - see chapter Alignment procedure for more details.

Max. total displacement of node If the alignment of the node would mean that the node would move more than specified in this field, the alignment is not performed. This value prevents creation of long and sharp corners if two planes meet at a very small angle.

Note: Max. distance between master plane and node to be aligned must be lower or equal to Max. total displacement of node.

This parameter is used during the alignment process (not during the generation of the list of master planes) - see chapter Alignment procedure for more details.

Keep original shape of the model

If ON, the alignment uses eccentricities to keep the original shape of the structure. If OFF, the individual members are aligned into the midplane.

The meaning of the parameter can be best explained using a simple example of three walls put one onto another.

Let us assume a sample structure composed of three walls of different thickness with one face aligned.

If the option is ON, the program generates exactly this shape. On the other hand, if the option is OFF, the program considers the shift of the walls as an inaccuracy and puts their mid-plane into one plane - see below.

Basic Reference Guide

294

Geometrical tolerance

The parameters in this group are identical with those in Setup > Geometry/Graphics. These values are used for all geometrical operations and for your convenience, they are added into this dialogue as well.

Keep original shape of the model

If ON, the alignment uses eccentricities to keep the original shape of the structure. If OFF, the individual members are aligned into the midplane.

The meaning of the parameter can be best explained using a simple example of three walls put one onto another.

Let us assume a sample structure composed of three walls of different thickness with one face aligned.

If the option is ON, the program generates exactly this shape. On the other hand, if the option is OFF, the program considers the shift of the walls as an inaccuracy and puts their mid-plane into one plane - see below.

Geometry

295

Min. distance of two nodes, node to curve

Specifies the min. distance of two nodes for which the two nodes are considered separate nodes. If the real distance of two nodes is lower than this parameter, the two nodes are merged together.

Max. distance of node to 2D member plane

Specifies the maximal allowable distance of a node from the plane of a 2D member. If the actual distance is larger than this limit value, the geometry is considered invalid and a corresponding warning is issued.

Recommendation: These two parameters should be lower at least by a factor of ten than parameters Max. distance between parallel master planes, Max. distance between master plane and node to be aligned and Max. total displacement of node.

Connect

This group of parameters control the process of connection of intersecting and "touching" entities.

Connect If ON, the program connects automatically the intersecting entities and provides for the transfer of loads and internal forces between them.

Link nodes of slabs as linked nodes to beam

This option works only with vertex-nodes of slabs. It has no influence on internal nodes.

If ON, the node where a slab and a 1D member are connected is made as a linked node. If so, any future manipulation with the 1D member affects also the node of the slab. The node follows the movement of the 1D member and the shape of the slab is modified accordingly.

Example: Let us assume the following simple structure.

If the option is ON and the linked node is generated and if we then move the column by a certain distance, the slab "follows" the movement.

Basic Reference Guide

296

On the other hand, if the option is OFF, the same operation (moving the column) will split the structure into two parts.

Link free nodes as internal nodes

This option has meaning only for XML import from certain programs that allow to define free nodes used e.g. for the definition of loads. In Scia Engineer such nodes are linked as internal nodes of appropriate slabs (it means that those free nodes must be located inside of a slab).

Check structure data

This group controls the process in which the structure data are checked for compliance with restrictions implied by Scia Engineer algorithms and Finite Element Method principles.

Check If ON, the data are check and, if necessary and possible, corrected.

If OFF, no data check is performed.

Openings in beams

Opening in webs of beams Normally, when a 1D member is defined in Scia Engineer, its cross-section is constant along the whole length. Haunches and arbitrary beams are the only exceptions. But even for these two situations, we usually have a solid web of the 1D member that may change its height or width or both over a specified interval.

Function Opening in beams (Member 1D opening) introduce a qualitatively new feature. This function enables you to define an opening anywhere in the 1D member. Compare the two 1D members in the following picture to understand what the opening means.

Geometry

297

Parameters of the opening

General

Name Specifies the name of the opening

Shape Rectangular

The opening is rectangular in shape.

Circular

The opening is circular in shape.

Cross-section

The shape of the opening is defined by a specific cross-section (e.g. Z-section as in the figure below).

Rectangular shape

B Width of the rectangular opening.

H Height of the rectangular opening.

Alpha Inclination of the opening.

Basic Reference Guide

298

Circular shape

Diameter Diameter of the circular opening.

Number of edges The circle of the opening is idealised by a polygon with n-vertices. The number here specifies the number of edges (vertices) of this idealised shape of the opening.

Cross-section-type shape

Cross-section Specifies the cross-section that defines the shape of the opening.

Alpha Inclination of the opening.

X-axis reverse The x-axis of the cross-section making the opening is reversed.

Position

Alignment Centre

Centre-line of the opening is aligned with the centre-line of the cross-section.

Top

Top face of the opening is aligned with the centre-line of the cross-section.

Geometry

299

Bottom

Top face of the opening is aligned with the centre-line of the cross-section.

Perpendicular offset Specifies the offset in the position of the opening. The offset is measured along the height of the opening. I.e. if the opening is oriented in Y direction (see parameter below) the offset is made in another direction than for orientation Z.

Orientation Y

The normal to the opening follows the direction of the local Y-axis of the 1D member. The picture below shows a Y-oriented opening with Top alignment.

Z

The normal to the opening follows the direction of the local Z-axis of the 1D member. The picture below shows a Z-oriented opening with Top alignment.

Basic Reference Guide

300

Beta Rotation of the opening around the X-axis of the 1D member.

Depth Full

The opening goes through the whole thickness of the web of the cross-section. (For inclined and rotated openings it cuts the flanges as well).

Partial

The opening cuts out just a portion of the web.

Geometry

301

Depth value Specifies the depth of the partial opening.

The depth is measured from one side-face of the beam cross-section. In order to cut a part of the web from the other side, define angle Beta equal to 180 degrees, which turns the opening around and the depth is measured from the other face.

Calculation

Use for analysis and design

If ON, the opening is used for the calculation and design.

If OFF, the opening is used just for the drawings and the calculation is performed with the original cross-section without any openings and cut-outs.

Number of FE Specifies the number of finite elements generated along the length of the opening.

Note: For rectangular opening parallel with the longitudinal axis of the 1D member, a single finite element is sufficient. For other configurations, larger number is necessary to model the opening properly.

Geometry

Position x Defines the position of the opening in the direction of the local X-axis of the 1D member.

Coordinate definition Selects if the position is defined in relative (<0, 1>) or absolute coordinates.

Origin The position can be measured from the beginning or from the end of the 1D member.

Repeat (n) Defines number of identical openings located one next to each other.

Regularly If ON, the specified number openings is distributed uniformly along the length of the 1D member.

Basic Reference Guide

302

If OFF, the distance between adjacent openings can be defined – see below.

Delta x Defines the distance between two adjacent openings.

Note: If you need to specify a specific opening that cuts just a specific part of your 1D member (i.e. it does not make just a simple hole), it may be sometimes more efficient to use trial-and-error approach instead of detailed studying of individual parameters.

The procedure to input a new opening in a beam

1. The beam into which the opening is to be inserted must be already present in the model.

2. Open service Structure.

3. Select and start function Member 1D opening.

4. The Member 1D opening dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Fill in the parameters (see above).

6. Confirm with [OK].

7. Select the beam(s) where the specified opening(s) should be inserted.

Note: The openings in beams are accessible only if the project level is set to advanced.

Structural model

Introduction to structural model structural model, as the name itself suggests, represents the shape of structure with reference to requirements of design and detailing.

The calculation model is usually simplified to some extent because the numerical analysis does not require or is not able to process all detailed information about the model. When however, a drawing should be prepared or some detail of the structure properly designed (e.g. a connection of two steel 1D members) more information is needed.

Scia Engineer stores the two kinds of information separately. Basic geometry information is used for calculations, structural model information is used for detailing, preparation of drawings, check of connections, etc.

Parameters of structural model The parameters describing structural model are summarised in the table below.

priority definition This parameter specifies "how" the priority will be defined.

priority value The value defines the priority of the 1D member.

perpendicular alignment This option specifies the alignment of the 1D member to its middle axis.

eccentricity definition This parameter defines eccentricity that may be introduced.

eccentricity ey, ez Depending on the previous parameter, the eccentricity can be specified.

end cuts End-cuts can be defined automatically or manually. See below.

offset parameters Offset parameters differ for automatic and manual end-cuts. See below.

In addition, there is one more parameter related to structural model. The basic beam parameter Type defines the structural type of 1D member. This parameter defines the priority of the 1D member if the priority is specified according to member.

Priority

The priority is taken into account when connection of intersecting or touching 1D members is solved. The meaning will be best explained on a small example.

Let’s assume a column with a 1D member attached to its head. The calculation model looks like:

Geometry

303

Now, let’s display the structural model. The priority of the column (B17) is set to 100. The priority of the inclined 1D member (B18) is set to 80. The automatically created detail will look like:

Now, let’s decrease the priority of the column (B17) to 50. The result will be:

Perpendicular alignment

If adjusted to default value, the alignment of the structural model is taken from the alignment of the calculation model.

Eccentricity

The eccentricity may be defined in several ways:

Basic Reference Guide

304

whole member The eccentricity is constant along the 1D member.

each end point The eccentricity is defined separately for the two end points. In between, it varies linearly.

purlin on rafter The eccentricity is so adjusted so that one member is put (laid) on the other. This option is useful mainly for "intersecting" 1D members that touch with their surfaces.

See below.

Purlin on rafter

The effect of this option is shown on the following two pictures. The first one shows intersecting beam without defined eccentricity.

In the second picture, option Purlin on rafter is assigned to transverse beams. As a result they are put atop the other two beams.

Note 1: The priority of "purlins", i.e. the beams with Purlin on rafter option must be lower than the priority of the intersecting beams. Otherwise, the setting will have no effect. Note 2: Purlins and rafters must be connected by means of linked nodes. Otherwise the automatic calculation of vertical offset cannot be performed.

End cuts

Automatic end cuts

Automatic end cuts are calculated automatically. Individual 1D members are so adjusted to make a neat detail in joints. In addition, it is possible to define a gap that must be made between the face of the given 1D member and the joined member.

x-gap begin gap at the beginning of the 1D member

x-gap end gap at the end of the 1D member

Manual end cuts

The user may define the detail of the 1D member end manually. This may be useful for large models that do not change any more. Once the manual end cut is adjusted, there is no need to calculate it again when the model is regenerated. It also enables the user to design special details.

begin x-offset end cut in longitudinal direction at the beginning of the 1D member

begin Rz inclination Rz of the face of the 1D member at the beginning of the 1D member

begin Ry inclination Ry of the face of the 1D member at the beginning of the 1D member

end x-offset end cut in longitudinal direction at the end of the 1D member

Geometry

305

end Rz inclination Rz of the face of the 1D member at the end of the 1D member

end Ry inclination Ry of the face of the 1D member at the end of the 1D member

Example

beam:

automatic end cut

beam:

automatic end cut

gap = 50 mm

beam:

manual end cut

Offset filled in from previous automatic end cut.

The end offset is 50 mm bigger than the beginning offset.

Basic Reference Guide

306

beam:

end offset = 500

beam:

end offset = 0

Ry = 135

column:

Ry = 45

Defining the structural model In order to use the structural model the user has to select this feature in the functionality list in the Project settings dialogue.

The structural shape may be then defined at the same time as new 1D members are inserted into the model. Or, if preferred, new 1D members may be defined without thinking about the structural model and the structural parameters may be specified later.

The procedure for adjusting the structural model for a new 1D member

1. Start the function for the definition of a new beam.

2. In the property table adjust the required beam parameters.

3. At the bottom part of the table fill in the parameters of structural model.

Geometry

307

4. Confirm the settings with [OK].

5. Finish the standard definition of a new 1D member.

Displaying the structural model Whether the screen shows the calculation or structural model of the structure is controlled by view parameters.

In general, there are two ways to display the structural model:

via manual adjustment in View parameters dialogue,

using fast display swap function View > Set view parameters > structural model.

Note: If the structural model is being displayed for the first time, or if changes were made to the some of the structural parameters of arbitrary beam or beams, it may be sometimes necessary to regenerate (or generate) the structural model.

Modifying the structural model The modification of structural model is subject to the same principles as editing of basic beam properties.

Once a 1D member is selected, it’s parameters including structural model parameters are displayed in the Property window. Here, they may be easily edited.

Note: Due to time response optimisation, the changes made in the Property window may not be taken into account immediately. In such a situation, the user has to use manual regeneration of the structural model.

Regenerating the structural model As the background calculations forced by changes in the structural model may be rather time consuming, especially when a long set of changes is being made. Therefore, the model itself is not automatically regenerated on the screen after every particular change. The user must invoke the overall regeneration of structural model when he/she decides that it’s time to do so.

The procedure for the regeneration of the structural model

1. Call function Generate structural shape:

a. either using menu function View > Set view parameters > Generate structural shape,

b. or using button Generate structural shape ( ) on toolbar View.

2. The view is regenerated.

Manual input of end cut In some cases it may be required to input the end cut of structural model manually. In order to save the user from the necessity to calculate the offset values by hand, it is possible to exploit several functions.

The functions will be explained on simple examples.

One by others

Let’s have a simple frame.

Basic Reference Guide

308

We want to prolong the columns to the top edge of the horizontal beam and shorten the horizontal beam so that there is a gap 100 mm between the face of the column and the end-face of the beam.

1. Call function Modify > Calculate member end-cut > Calculate member end-cut - method One by Others.

2. Select the horizontal beam as the member to be cut.

3. Select the two columns as the cutting members.

4. Press [Esc] to end the selection of cutting members.

5. Define the gap (the gap was chosen as big as 100 mm in order to make the result of this example clear on the screen). You can also verify the to-be-cut and cutting members in the dialogue.

6. You get the result:

Others by one

Let’s have a simple frame.

Geometry

309

We want to shorten the columns to the bottom edge of the horizontal beam and prolong the horizontal beam to outer surface of the columns.

1. Call function Modify > Calculate member end-cut > Calculate member end-cut - method Others by One.

2. Select the horizontal beam as the cutting member.

3. Select the two columns as the members-to-be-cut.

4. Press [Esc] to end the selection of members-to-be-cut.

5. Define the gap (we type zero in our example). You can also verify the to-be-cut and cutting members in the dialogue.

6. You get the result:

Splice

Let’s have the same frame as in the two examples above.

Let’s focus on one corner only.

Basic Reference Guide

310

We want to join the two members under the 45° angle.

1. Call function Modify > Calculate member end-cut > Calculate member end-cut - method Splice.

2. Select the horizontal beam as the first member.

3. Select the column as the second members.

4. Define the gap of 25 mm.

5. You get the result:

Structural shape of 2D members Even though Scia Engineer is primarily a state-of-the-art and sophisticated tool for static, dynamic, etc. calculations, it can serve also as a powerful modeller, as it can remember two types of model: structural model (called CAD model in previous versions of Scia Engineer) and analysis model (called calculation model in Scia Engineer). The former represents the real shape of the structure and is also used for imports from other CAD programs, the latter contains certain simplifications and idealisations enforced by the applied numerical method of solution.

So far, the structural model in Scia Engineer was restricted to 1D members only. Now, this feature extends to plates, walls, and shells as well. The user can take the full advantage of this fact and (and it is important) within one project define both the tuned analysis model that provides accurate results and fine-looking structural model reflecting the real configuration of the structure.

But this is not all! Scia Engineer enables the user to import the model of the structure from a third-party software. Most often, what is imported is the structural shape (fig. 1). The user then faces the problem of transforming this structural model into a working analysis model – usually, there will be problems with contacts of adjacent members (fig. 2). Scia Engineer comes with a handy solution. After a single click and a little-play with a few parameters that control the whole process, Scia

Geometry

311

Engineer can automatically convert the structural model into the analysis one (fig. 3). Should it happen that a conflict have arisen during this conversion, the user is immediately and graphically informed about it in the screen (fig. 4). Once such places are corrected manually, nothing prevents the user from defining the required boundary conditions, load cases, loads and other data needed for a successful calculation of the project.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Basic Reference Guide

312

Fig. 4

313

Model data

Introduction to model data A model of a structure created in Scia Engineer consists not only of structural members (such as 1D members, columns, slabs, etc.) but also of a whole set of additional entities. These additional entities are as important for successful calculation and design as the geometry itself.

The additional entities are called additional data. The term additional data covers loads, supports, hinges, masses (in case of dynamic analysis), etc. The load represents a complex and rather coherent group and therefore it is dealt with in a separate chapter.

Entities such as supports, foundations, and hinges are called Model data. They are described in separate chapters. In Scia Engineer menus and dialogues they are usually treated separately as well, but occasionally the term Model data is used when the action or setting is related to all model data (e.g. view parameters).

Supports

Types of supports

Point supports There are three basic types of point supports in Scia Engineer. Each of them, however, can be of many different configurations.

Standard support This support is defined by six separate parameters. Each parameter defines the constraint in one direction: translation in X, Y, Z axis and rotation around the same axes.

Foundation block This support is modelled by means of a foundation block. In addition, some parameters related to the surrounding soil are defined as well.

Column This support is used to model the case where the supporting is realised by a column.

Basic Reference Guide

314

Standard support

A standard support defines an idealised supporting restricted to a single point. The user may define the way the support acts in individual directions, i.e. in translation along and rotation around axes of selected co-ordinate system.

Free The support is free in the specified direction. That is it imposes no constraint in the direction.

Rigid The support in fully rigid in the specified direction.

Flexible The support is flexible (elastic) in the specified direction. The user has to define the required stiffness of the support.

Rigid press only Same as pure Rigid but the support acts ONLY under compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.

Flexible press only Same as pure Flexible but the support acts ONLY under compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.

Nonlinear The stiffness of the support is defined by means of a non-linear function (force-displacement diagram).

For more information read chapter Parameters of a non-linear support.

Friction The "stiffness" of the support is calculated from defined friction. See chapter Friction support.

Note: If supports of Press only type (both rigid and flexible) appear in the model, a NONLINEAR calculation MUST be executed. Linear calculation can be run as well, but it does NOT take account of the press only behaviour. The nonlinear calculation requires a definition of a nonlinear load case combination. Unless a nonlinear combination is defined, the nonlinear calculation is not accessible in the calculation dialogue.

Other parameters of a standard support

Angle This parameter specifies the inclination of the support. The format of this parameter is: Rx12,Ry12,Rz12 where Rx defines the inclination from X axis, and Ry and Rz define the inclination from Y and Z axis respectively. The angle is input in adjusted angle units.

Size x;

Size y

These two parameters define the size of the support. The size parameter is taken into account only if the support is at a slab. The size is used to calculate the appropriate reduction of slab bending moment in the surroundings of the support.

Note: Parameter Angle mentioned above and the adjustment of orientation described below are available for all support types, not only for the standard support.

Orientation of a support

Support in a node A nodal support may be oriented in:

global co-ordinate system,

local co-ordinate system of the node.

Support on a beam A point support on a 1D member may be oriented in:

global co-ordinate system,

local co-ordinate system of the node,

selected user co-ordinate system.

Foundation block

A support may be defined in the form of a foundation block. The supporting is then specified by the material and dimensions of the block together with the properties of the soil below and above the footing surface.

The support of Foundation block type requires the definition of the following parameters.

Foundation block Selects the type of foundation block.

Foundation Defines the properties of the soil below the footing surface.

Upper soil Defines the properties of the soil above the footing surface.

Model data

315

Note: A foundation block can be used only if the Subsoil functionality has been selected in the Project settings and if material Concrete has been specified for the project.

Column

If only a part of the final structure is modelled (e.g. just one or a few floors instead of the whole building), it may happen that a support in the model is in fact a column in the real structure. Scia Engineer enables the user to model even such situation.

The support is defined through the following parameters. The program automatically calculates the stiffness of the support.

Length Defines the length of the supporting column.

Hinged Says whether the column is pinned at the end or rigidly fixed.

Connection The column may either end in the support or may continue (e.g. to another floor).

Cross-section Specifies the cross-section of the supporting column.

Line supports There are three basic types of linear supports in Scia Engineer. They are similar to point support types.

Standard support

This support is defined by six independent parameters. Each parameter defines the constraint in one direction: translation in X, Y, Z axis and rotation around the same axes. The parameters are the same as for point support except that it is not possible to define non-linear and friction line support.

Foundation strip

This support is modelled by means of a foundation strip. In addition, some parameters related to the surrounding soil are defined as well.

Wall This support is used to model the case where the supporting is realised by a wall.

Basic Reference Guide

316

Foundation strip

A linear support may be defined in the form of a foundation strip. The supporting is then specified by the properties and dimensions of the strip together with the properties of the soil below and above the footing surface.

This type of support is described in chapter Foundation strip and requires the following parameters to be input.

Foundation Defines the properties of the soil below the footing surface.

Width Defines the width of the foundation strip.

Upper soil Defines the properties of the soil above the footing surface.

Note: A foundation block can be used only if the Subsoil functionality has been selected in the Project settings.

Wall

A structure member may be in real life very often supported by a wall. If this is the case and only a part of the real structure is being modelled (e.g. one floor), Scia Engineer allows definition of such supporting condition with minimal effort.

The program automatically calculates the stiffness of the support from the following parameters:

Material Specifies the material of the supporting wall.

Width Defines the width of the supporting wall.

Height Defines the height of the supporting wall.

Hinged Tells whether the wall is rigidly fixed into the supported member or is pinned into it.

Connection Determines if the wall is only under the supported member or also above it.

Note: A supporting wall can be used only if material Concrete has been specified for the project in the Project settings.

Orientation of a linear support on a 1D member

A linear support on a 1D member can be acting:

in the direction of global co-ordinate axes,

in the direction of axes of the local co-ordinate system of the particular 1D member.

The setting can be made in the property dialogue of each new support.

Line support on a slab

Parameters

Name Specifies the name of the support.

Constraint conditions See table below.

Constraint conditions

Free The support is free in the specified direction. That is it imposes no constraint in the direction.

Rigid The support in fully rigid in the specified direction.

Flexible The support is flexible (elastic) in the specified direction. The user has to define the required stiffness of the support.

Rigid press only Same as pure Rigid but the support acts ONLY under compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.

Flexible press only Same as pure Flexible but the support acts ONLY under compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.

Geometry

System The support may be defined in local or global coordinate system.

Edge Specifies the edge where the support is located.

Model data

317

Position x1 Defines the starting point of the support.

Position x2 Defines the end point of the support.

Coordination definition The position of starting and end point may be defined in absolute or relative coordinates.

Origin Defines the origin for the coordinate system (above).

Note: A line support on the edge of a 2D member that was input as a shell member can only be defined in global coordinate system. If the user requires the definition of the constraint conditions in the local coordinate system of the slab, the 2D member must be input as a plane 2D member.

Surface support on slab

Parameters

Name Specifies the name of the support.

Type Defines the type of support – see below.

Subsoil If necessary for the selected type, this item specifies the subsoil parameters.

Type

Individual A particular subsoil type is assigned to the slab.

The subsoil is defined by means of C parameters. These user-defined C parameters are used for the calculation (of e.g contact stress in the footing surface)

Soil-in For such a support, the interaction of the structure with the foundation subsoil is carried out by means of SOIL-IN module.

Parameters C1z, C2x, C2y are calculated by SOIL-IN module. Note: Parameters C1x and C1y are defined in Setup > Solver dialogue.

Both Both of the above mentioned types are combined on the same slab.

The user defines which C parameters will be user-defined and which ones will be calculated by SOIL-IN module.

Parameters can be defined in subsoil properties. Those C parameters that are input in the subsoil-property dialogue as zero, will be calculated by the SOIL-IN module. Nonzero parameters will be taken as they are input.

Note: Parameters C1x and C1y must ALWAYS be user-defined. SOIL-IN module is not able to calculate them.

Soil-in

Module Soil-in can calculate parameters C1z, C2x, C2y. The other parameters must be defined by the user.

In this text we limit ourselves to a brief derivation for the purpose of the explanation that will follow:

The formula for the potential energy of internal forces of the 3D model has the following form:

(0.0.1)

Neglecting the effect of horizontal components of deformation, we get the following vectors:

(0.0.2)

(0.0.3)

This means the corresponding simplification of the matrix of physical constants D.

Basic Reference Guide

318

(0.0.4)

In order to be able to reduce the problem from 3D to 2D, it is necessary to integrate formula (0.0.1) over the z-axis. For this

reason, a certain “damping function” is introduced and it is defined by the ratio of the settlement in the given depth

to the settlement of the surface .

(0.0.5)

Modifying (0.0.3) and (0.0.5) we get

(0.0.6)

Substituting (0.0.6) into the formula for the potential energy of body , where is the extent of the 2D model

and is the depth of the deformed zone of the 3D model, we obtain the following formula:

(0.0.7)

Integrating over z , we get the formula for the potential energy of internal forces of the 2D model with two parameters:

(0.0.8)

Comparing (0.0.7) and (0.0.8), we can define the relation between the parameters of the general (3D) and surface (2D) model:

(0.0.9)

It is also possible to eliminate the automatic calculation of some C parameters and define them manually. This can be achieved by special adjustment of the subsoil parameters and set the type to Both (!).

If a certain C parameter in subsoil dialogue is set to zero, this C parameters will be calculated by the program.

If a certain C parameter in subsoil dialogue is set to non-zero value, such C parameter will be taken as input.

The type Both is not too common and it was introduced mainly for two reasons:

1. I use type Soil-in but I want to have different friction in different parts of the structure. Therefore, the solver setup dialogue is not enough for me, because is just one value can be adjusted there for the friction. Therefore, I can use type Both and thus I am able to define several subsoils with non-zero constants C1x and C1y with all other parameters adjusted to zero. When the Soilin module runs, the non-zero constants C1x and C1y are of higher priority than those determined by the solver and are applied. Other "zero" values indicate that the values determined by the solver are applied.

Model data

319

2. Sometimes it may be necessary to "suppress" higher values of shear (C2x, C2y) calculated by Soil-in module. This may happen e.g. when a new plate is modelled on an old one and the old plate is defined as the first layer of the subsoil. It is a correct and proper solution, but as E modules of soil and concrete are dramatically different, the Soil-in module calculates high C2parameters. Consequently, the stiffness of the foundation slab in the model is bigger than if the two slabs were "joined" together and input as a homogenous monolith. Therefore, C2 parameters may be reduced artificially. This can be achieved in type Both. I define the subsoil with zero C1z (it will be determined by the Soil-in module) and other non-zero parameters (C2 and friction). Thus the Soil-in module will provide only for C1z parameter.

Friction support

Parameters

From reaction The user may select the reaction that defines the force pushing against the support.

C flex Stiffness of the support.

This stiffness applies ONLY until the friction force is exceeded.

mju Coefficient of friction.

If friction of X / Y / Z or XY / XZ / YZ type is selected, one mju value must be input.

If friction of X+Y / X+Z / Y+Z type is selected, two mju values must be input.

Independent If simple friction (X, Y, Z) is defined in two directions, this option is available. It specifies that friction in one direction is independent on the friction in the other direction.

From reaction

X, Y, Z The final limit force can be calculated from the reaction in a specified direction. If a support in X-direction is being defined, it can be said that the friction force should be determined from the reaction calculated in either Y or Z direction.

XY, XZ, YZ The final limit force can be calculated as a compound friction. Only one of the stated options is offered for each direction. E.g. if a support in X-direction is being defined, it can be said that the friction force should be determined from the reactions calculated in Y and Z direction. The friction force is calculated from the following formula:

X+Y, X+Z, Y+Z The same as above can be said here. Different procedure is however used to calculate the limit force. E.g. for friction support in X-direction the following formula is employed:

Note: Friction can be input in one or two directions. It is not possible to define friction in all three direction otherwise the "thrust" could not determined. Note: Composed friction (e.g. YZ or Y+Z) can be input in one direction only. Note: Option Independent friction is available ONLY if simple friction (X, Y, Z) is defined in two directions.

When inserted into the model, a friction support (friction defined in Y and Z direction) is marked with the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Basic Reference Guide

320

Examples:

Let’s assume a plane XY and a support that can slide on it in any direction with a friction.

X friction

C flex x 1E5

mju x 0.20

from reaction Z

Y friction

C flex y 1E5

mju y 0.55

from reaction Z

Z rigid (or press only)

Independent friction YES

Let’s assume a pipe in a borehole in X-direction.

X friction

C flex x 1E5

mju x 0.20

from reaction YZ

Y flexible

stiff y 5E5

Z flexible

stiff z 3.5E6

Nonlinear soil spring The non-linear soil spring is a line support for 1D members. It is intended to model soil reaction using real soil parameters.

The model consist of six springs, four of then are acting perpendicular to the member axis and are used to model the soil loading and stiffness at the top, bottom, left and right side of the beam.

The two remaining springs are used to model friction in translation along the local x-axis and rotation around the local x-axis.

The nonlinear soil spring can be used in a nonlinear or nonlinear staged analysis.

Model data

321

The values for the springs can be pre-installed using the PIPFAS wizard

Description of spring types which can be connected at the line support

In each position 6 spring are connected, 4 translation springs acting perpendicular to the local x axis (i.e. springs z+, z-, y + and y -), one translation spring acting in local x and one spring Rx acting in rotation around the local x axis.

At Z+ and Z- side, three different functions types are allowed:

o Type A, i.e. linear soil function with plastic braches at its begin end at its end , for modelling of non-consolidated soil,

o Type B, i.e. bi-linear soil function with plastic braches at its begin end at its end, for modelling of consolidated soil,

o Type C, i.e. water function, hyper elastic type, for Archimedes law.

At Y+ and Y- side, two different functions types are allowed:

o Type A, i.e. linear soil function with plastic braches at its begin end at its end , for modelling of non-consolidated soil,

o Type B, i.e. bi-linear soil function with plastic braches at its begin end at its end, for modelling of consolidated soil.

At X, a function with a linear part and a horizontal branch connected at its end. The height of the plastic yielding is equal to the total reaction of spring A or B multiplied by the friction coefficient. Spring type C (water spring) does not effect the friction.

At Rx, a function with a linear part and a horizontal branch connected at its end. The height of the plastic yielding is equal to the total reaction multiplied with his friction coefficient

The non-linear soil spring can be used in a non-linear staged analysis. Unloading is supported.

Hyper elastic unloading, i.e. the same path as during the loading is followed during unloading, even if the plastic yielding occurred.

Plastic unloading, i.e. in unloading, the linear, bi-linear branch (for type A or type B) is taken immediately.

Type A and B can have hyper elastic or plastic unloading.

Type C, i.e. water function, area is always of hyper elastic type, for Archimedes law.

Function type A

U0 Gap [mm]

Qa Active pressure [kN/m]

Qn Neutral pressure [kN/m]

Qp Passive pressure [kN/m]

C1 Soil stiffness [kN/m˛]

C2 Soil stiffness [kN/m˛]

Elastic

Basic Reference Guide

322

Plastic

Function type B

U0 Gap [mm]

Qa Active pressure [kN/m]

Qn Neutral pressure [kN/m]

Qc Consollidation pressure [kN/m]

Qp Passive pressure [kN/m]

C1 Soil stiffness [kN/m˛]

C2 Soil stiffness [kN/m˛]

Elastic

Model data

323

Plastic

Function type C

The function is used to model water reaction on a diving or sinking member. Bellow picture and description of the parameters.

Elastic unloading is always applied.

U0 Gap [mm]

Qp Maximal water pressure [kN/m]

C1 Stiffness [kN/m]

Basic Reference Guide

324

This function based on the law of Archimedes. When the member starts at water level 0m and submerges, the acting force is proportional to the volume below the water surface.

The water spring is of type "Hyper elastic". It means that no losses occur due to unloading. The path of loading is the same as the path of unloading.

This function can be connected at Z+ and at Z- side of the pipeline support.

Friction

The function is connected at X and Rx parameters and is used to model friction.

Bi-linear springs with the maximum (plastic behaviour) depending on the pressure force.

Cfriction represents the elasticity of the spring and is together with the plastic friction force the only property of the spring.

The program computes interaction between the friction spring caused by torsion and by a normal force. The type of friction interaction is circular. The interaction implies that the maximum value of 'normal' axial friction spring is reduced by the interaction between axial forces and torsion.

Torsion squared + Axial force squared = 1

The procedure to input a new nonlinear soil spring

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function Model data > Support > nonlinear soil spring.

3. Type and adjust the parameters of the support (see below).

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. Input the support into the model.

6. Close the function.

7. Close the service.

Required project functionality

In the Project setup dialogue, the following functionality must be switched ON if the nonlinear soil spring is to defined:

Nonlinearity > Support nonlinearity / Soil spring,

Nonlinearity > Friction support / Soil spring.

Defining a new support

Defining a new support In order to define a new support, the supported member must have been already inserted into the model.

The procedure differs little bit according to the shape and placement of the support. In general, however, it is simple and straightforward and the difference for individual variants is only in the specification of the support precise position.

The procedure for the definition of a new support

1. Open tree menu service Structure.

2. Open branch Support.

3. Start function for the support type that should be inserted:

a. In node for a point support located in a node.

b. On beam for a point support located "somewhere" on a 1D member.

Model data

325

c. Line on beam for a linear support of a 1D member.

4. Choose the required support type:

a. Standard support

b. Foundation block or foundation strip

c. Column or wall

5. Input necessary parameters for the selected support type (point or linear).

6. Specify the orientation of the support.

7. Specify the location of the support:

a. No action is needed for a point support in node.

b. Specify the position of the support on a 1D member (in the case of point support on a 1D member).

c. Specify the position of the start-point and end-point of support on a 1D member (in the case of linear support on a 1D member).

8. Confirm the settings with button [OK].

9. Select nodes (for point support in node) or 1D members (for point and line support on a 1D member) where the adjusted supporting conditions should be defined.

10. Close the function.

11. Repeat steps 3 to 10 as many times as required.

12. Close the service Structure.

Defining a new support on a slab

The procedure for the definition of a new support

1. Open tree menu service Structure.

2. Open branch Support.

3. Start function for the support type that should be inserted:

a. line support on slab edge,

b. surface support.

4. Input necessary parameters for the selected support type (point or linear).

5. Confirm the settings with button [OK].

6. Select slabs where the adjusted supporting conditions should be defined.

7. Close the function.

8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.

9. Close the service Structure.

Defining a new friction support

Procedure for the definition of a friction support

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function Support > in node or Support > point on beam.

3. Select the direction for the "friction-controlled-behaviour" (see chapter Friction support for more information).

4. Type and adjust other parameters of the support (see the second note below).

5. Confirm with [OK].

6. Input the support / support into the model.

7. Close the function.

8. Close the service.

Note: In order to use friction supports the Project Setup dialogue options must be assigned appropriately. Options Nonlinearity and Friction supports must be selected. Note: See also chapters under Model data > Supports, chapters Point supports and Defining a new support in particular.

Fast definition of specific support types Selected types of nodal supports can be inserted into the model in a very straightforward way.

Once the user opens service Structure, a new toolbar is displayed at the top of the command line. This toolbar offers the most common support types:

Basic Reference Guide

326

sliding support in a node ( ),

hinged support in a node ( ),

fixed support in a node ( ).

The procedure for the fast definition of a support

1. Open service Structure.

2. A new toolbar appears at the top of the command line.

3. Click the required button.

4. The property table for the selected support type is displayed in the Property window.

5. If required, change any parameters.

6. Select nodes to position the support.

7. Close the function.

8. Close the service.

Parameters of a non-linear support Parameters of a nonlinear support can be divided into two groups:

Stiffness This basic stiffness is used for the initial linear calculation.

Function The function defines non-linear behaviour of the support. This function is taken into account during the non-linear calculation.

Non-linear function manager

Non-linear function that specifies the behaviour of a non-linear support can be defined in a standard Scia Engineer database manager.

The function itself consists of a positive and negative branch. The function must always pass the zero point, i.e. the zero displacement must correspond to zero force. Any "switchbacks" in the diagram are not allowed. This means that e.g. the positive branch may rise or keep a constant force value but it is not possible to let the force go down with increasing displacement.

In addition to the function itself, there is a special parameter for the positive and negative axis. Possible values of this parameter are

Rigid If ON, the support is considered infinitely rigid once the limit displacement (the last input displacement value defined in the diagram) is reached.

Free If ON, the support is considered free once the limit displacement (the last input displacement value defined in the diagram) is reached.

Flexible If ON, the stiffness of the support is considered constant once the limit displacement (the last input displacement value defined in the diagram) is reached. The force value specified for the last input displacement is used.

Hinges (pins)

Beams

Introduction to hinges If a structure consists of more than one member, it is necessary to define the connection of the individual entities. The connection may be rigid or free or anything in between.

In Scia Engineer the rigid connection is realised by means of linked nodes or cross-links and described in chapter Connecting and disconnecting the entities. The "something in between" connection may be realised by means of hinges (described in this chapter) or by means of hinged cross-links (see chapter Connecting and disconnecting the entities). And there is no need to define a free connection, just let the 1D members unconnected.

The difference between individual types of connections can be summarised as follows.

A linked node is a connection where an end-point of one entity is connected to any point of another entity.

A cross-link is the connection of two intersecting entities. The both entities remain "undivided" in the connection, they just pass through it.

A hinge may be inserted into an end-point of a 1D member if other than rigid connection is required.

Model data

327

Specifying hinge parameters Hinge parameters can be input in the property dialogue for a new hinge.

Parameters of a hinge

Name Is used for the identification of a hinge.

Position on a beam The hinge can be inserted into the starting point of a 1D member, into the end point of a 1D member, or to both ends.

Constraint conditions in individual directions

Degrees of freedom may be defined independently for individual directions: translations along X, Y, and Z axes, rotation around X, Y, and Z axes.

The degrees of freedom are defined in the local co-ordinate system of the 1D member.

Constraint conditions

In each direction (translations along X, Y, and Z local 1D member axes, rotation around X, Y, and Z local 1D member axes) the condition may be:

rigid There is no release of degree of freedom defined for the specific direction. The entities are fully connected in this direction.

free The degree of freedom in the specified direction is released. The two entities are not connected in the given direction.

flexible There is defined a certain degree of flexibility in the specified direction. The user then has to specify the stiffness of the connection in the given direction.

nonlinear The behaviour of the hinge must be specified by means of a non-linear function. A particular function may be selected in the Hinge property dialogue. Unless the function has been defined earlier, it must be defined when the hinge is being inserted into the model. It is possible to call the Nonlinear function manager directly from the Hinge property dialogue.

Defining a new hinge A hinge may be defined in any connection of two entities.

The procedure fort the definition of a new hinge

1. Open service Structure and call menu Hinge on beam:

a. either using menu function Tree > Structure > Hinge on beam,

b. or using tree menu function Structure > Hinge on beam.

2. The property dialogue for a new hinge is opened.

3. Fill in the parameters.

4. Confirm with [OK] button.

5. Select 1D member where the new hinge or hinges should be applied.

6. Close the function.

7. Close the service.

Fast definition of specific hinges Once the user opens service Structure, a new toolbar is displayed at the top of the command line. This toolbar offers the most common types of hinges:

two-direction pin in the first end-node of a 1D member ( ),

two-direction pin in the second end-node of a 1D member ( ),

two-direction pin in both end-nodes of a 1D member ( ).

The procedure for the fast definition of a two-direction pin

1. Open service Structure.

2. A new toolbar appears at the top of the command line.

Basic Reference Guide

328

1. Click the required button.

2. The property table for the selected hinge type is displayed in the Property window.

3. If required, change any parameters.

4. Select nodes where the hinge should be inserted.

5. Close the function.

6. Close the service.

Slabs

Hinges in slabs A connection of two slabs may be modelled as a fixed one or a hinge may be inserted to create a pinned connection. Two configurations of slab hinge are allowed:

free connection There is no rotation restraint in the hinge and the two slabs may freely rotate around the hinge.

flexible connection The stiffness of the hinge in rotation is specified. As a result, the bending moment is partially transferred through the hinge.

Under any configuration, all translations are fully transferred from one slab into the other.

Parameters

Name Specifies the name of the hinge.

fix Specifies the hinge configuration:

free

A standard pinned connection is use. There is no rotation restraint.

rigid

The members connected in the hinge are fully fixed. There is no hinge.

flexible

The connection is partially fixed – the user must define the stiffness in rotation.

Stiffness For a flexible hinge the stiffness must be input.

Position x1 Defines the starting point of the hinge. By default, the hinge extends along the whole edge of the slab. However, if required, it may be restricted to only a part of the edge.

Position x2 Defines the end point of the hinge. See above.

Coordinate definition Selects the coordinate system that is used to define the length of the hinge.

Origin Specifies the origin of the coordinate system used for the definition of the length of the hinge.

Example

Let’s input two identical rectangular slabs. In fact, each slab consists of two square slabs attached closely to each other. This configuration has been chosen with a view to inserting the hinge. Both ends of both slabs are fixed.

And now, let’s insert a hinge into one of the two slabs – into the middle of the span. The model can be clearly seen on the figure below.

Model data

329

Let’s subject the slabs to uniform distributed load acting in the direction perpendicular to the slab. The result bending moment clearly demonstrates the effect of the hinge.

The top slab (in the figure above) is with the hinge in the middle of the span. The bending moment is zero there. The bottom slab (in the figure above) is without a hinge and therefore, the middle of the span there is the place where the bending moment reaches its maximum.

The results can be seen also in the following figure showing diagrams of bending moment displayed on a longitudinal section across the slab.

Basic Reference Guide

330

Rigid arms

Rigid arms A rigid link is a displacement or rotation dependence between a master node and slave nodes. The dependence depends on the position of both nodes and on the selected type of rigid link.

The result of a rigid link will be that :

1. the deformation of both nodes in the direction of the line connecting both nodes will be identical

2. the orientation of the line connecting both nodes after the calculation depends on the selected type of rigid link

The different types of rigid links :

Rigid – rigid

The rotation of both nodes is identical. This rotation determines the direction of the connection line between both nodes after the calculation.

Rigid – hinge

The rotation of the connection line between the nodes is identical to the rotation of the master node.

Scia Engineer allows you to insert two types of rigid arms:

1. standard rigid arm, i.e. node-to-node rigid arm.

2. line rigid arm, i.e. node-to-edge(line) rigid arm.

The latter can be used to link a node to an edge of a nearby slab.

Node-to-edge (line) rigid arm

The master must be always a node.

The slave is always a line (edge of a slab).

All finite element nodes generated on the connected line are connected to the master node.

One master node can connect more several lines.

Defining a new rigid arm

Procedure to define a new (node-to-node) rigid arm

1. The parts of the structure that are to be linked by the rigid arm must be already defined.

2. Open service Structure.

3. Start function Rigid arms.

4. Select the master node.

5. Select at least one slave node.

6. End the function.

Inserting a hinge to the slave node

Model data

331

By default the rigid arm is always "rigid". Alternatively, you may modify the inserted rigid arm, so that the slave node is pinned to the arm.

Procedure to insert a hinge into the rigid arm

1. Select the rigid arm into which the hinge is to be inserted.

2. The properties of the selected rigid arm are displayed in the Property window.

3. Select option Hinge on slave.

4. Clear the selection.

Defining a new line rigid arm

Procedure to define a new (node-to-edge) rigid arm

1. The parts of the structure that are to be linked by the rigid arm must be already defined.

2. Open service Structure.

3. Start function Line rigid arms.

4. Select the master node.

5. Select the slave edge(s).

6. End the function.

Inserting a hinge to the slave edge

By default the rigid arm is always "rigid". Alternatively, you may modify the inserted rigid arm, so that the slave edge is pinned to the arm.

Procedure to insert a hinge into the line rigid arm

1. Select the line rigid arm into which the hinge is to be inserted.

2. The properties of the selected rigid arm are displayed in the Property window.

3. Select option Hinge on slave.

4. Clear the selection. Note: Line rigid arm uses an extra view parameter. This means that the display on standard and line rigid arms can be controlled separately.

Modifying the existing model data

Changing the parameters of model data Scia Engineer offers a unique and unified system of editing for all types of entities that appear in the project. The task of changing model data is no more complex than editing of properties of any geometrical entity.

The procedure for the modification of parameters of model data entities

1. Simply select the model data entity (or entities) that should be modified.

2. The intersection of properties for the selected entities is displayed in the Property window.

3. Change the parameters as required.

4. The change is automatically applied.

5. Clear the selection.

This procedure may be applied to any model data entity. The procedure given above may be thus used for editing of standard supports, foundation blocks, foundation strips, supporting columns, and all other support types. It is applicable as well for the modification of hinge properties.

The procedure can also be used to change types of some model data entities. For example, a standard support may be changed to supporting column, a foundation strip changed to a standard linear support, etc.

The property dialogue also provides for a direct access to individual database managers that are relevant for the selected entity or entities.

If only a single entity should be modified and the user would prefer to see the regular property table of the entity including the drawing explaining the parameters, an alternative approach may be used.

The alternative procedure for editing of model data entities

1. Position the mouse cursor over the entity that should be modified.

2. Click the right mouse button.

3. The graphical window pop-up menu appear on the screen.

4. Select function Edit properties.

5. The property dialogue for the selected entity is opened.

6. Change any parameters you need to modify.

7. Confirm the settings with button [OK].

Basic Reference Guide

332

8. The operation is completed.

Moving the model data Scia Engineer distinguishes between basic geometric entities such as nodes and 1D members and other entities called Additional data. Model data are a subset of the Additional data group. Any manipulation with Model data is carried out by means of manipulation functions for the Additional data.

The procedure for moving of the model data

1. Select the modal data that are to be moved.

2. Icon Move add data ( ) becomes accessible on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

3. Click the icon.

4. Define the target position for the moved entities.

5. All the selected entities are moved into the new location (i.e. into one particular point or onto a one particular 1D member).

6. Press [Esc] to and the function.

The function for the move of additional data is also accessible via the window pop-up menu.

The alternative procedure for the same task

1. Select the modal data that are to be moved.

2. Position the mouse cursor outside any entity on the screen.

3. Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.

4. Select function Move Add data.

5. Follow the final steps of the procedure described above.

There is also an alternative to the above mentioned procedure. The alternative is useful if only one particular entity should be moved.

The alternative procedure for moving of a single model data entity

1. Position the mouse cursor on the entity you want to move.

2. Click the right mouse button.

3. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select function Move Add data.

5. The function will treat the single entity – the one over which the mouse cursor was positioned when the mouse button was clicked.

6. Define the target position for the moved entities.

7. The selected entity is moved into the new location.

8. Press [Esc] to and the function.

Copying the model data The program distinguishes between basic geometric entities such as nodes and 1D members and other entities called Additional data. Model data are a subset of the Additional data group. Any manipulation with Model data is carried out by means of manipulation functions for the Additional data.

Note: Starting from version 2008, the additional data can be copied also through standard Copy function that was in previous versions reserved to structural entities (1D members and 2D members).

The procedure for copying of the model data

1. Select the modal data that are to be copied.

2. Icon Copy add data ( ) becomes accessible on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

3. Click the icon.

4. Define the target position for the copied entities.

5. All the selected entities are copied into the new location (i.e. into one particular point or onto a one particular 1D member).

6. If required, select another target positions.

7. Press [Esc] to and the function.

The function for copying of additional data is also accessible via the window pop-up menu.

The alternative procedure for the same task

1. Select the modal data that are to be copied.

2. Position the mouse cursor outside any entity on the screen.

Model data

333

3. Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.

4. Select function Copy add data.

5. Follow the final steps of the procedure described above.

There is also an alternative to the above mentioned procedure. The alternative is useful if only one particular entity should be copied.

The alternative procedure for copying of a single model data entity

1. Position the mouse cursor on the entity you want to copy.

2. Click the right mouse button.

3. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select function Copy add data.

5. The function will treat the single entity – the one over which the mouse cursor was positioned when the mouse button was clicked.

6. Define the target position for the copied entities.

7. The selected entity is copied into the new location.

8. If required, select another target positions.

9. Press [Esc] to and the function.

Deleting the model data Any model data entities can be deleted the same way as geometrical entity.

The procedure for deletion of model data

1. Select entities that will be removed.

2. Start function Delete:

a. either use menu function Modify > Delete,

b. or invoke the window pop-up menu and here select function Delete.

3. A dialogue asking for your confirmation appears on the screen.

4. Confirm it.

5. The data are deleted from the project.

Absences

Introduction to absences In practice, it may happen that selected parts of a structure are not always acting. It may happen, for example, that fresh concrete members are not capable of transferring any load. Or it is possible that some bracing steel diagonals are missing at an early stage of construction. And the list of similar examples may be even longer.

The question raised here is: how could the engineer take account of this?

Scia Engineer brings solution in the form of Absences. Absence means that a certain part of a model is missing (or absenting) in a certain load case.

The principle of Absences It is possible to define that either a member or a support is absenting. The principle applied in Scia Engineer can be expressed in three points:

1. The user defines which members or supports are missing, i.e. absenting (regardless of any other circumstances).

2. The user defines which members or supports are missing at the same time. That means that the absenting members are sorted into groups. The members or absences from the same group are always absenting together.

3. The user defines which group of absenting members is absenting in which load case.

Note: The first and second points are in fact joined in a single step of the absence-definition procedure.

Creating a project allowing for absences In order to allow the calculation to take account of any absences (i.e. members or supports missing from a selected load cases), the appropriate project parameter must be adjusted accordingly.

The procedure to activate Absences in the project

1. Open the Project data dialogue:

a. using tree menu item Project.

Basic Reference Guide

334

b. using menu item Tree > Project.

2. On tab Basic data, set item Model to Absence.

3. Confirm the setting with [OK].

Note: Only linear calculation can be performed if absences are defined in the model.

Absence groups Absenting members are grouped together in groups called Absence groups.

The management of these groups can be performed in the Absence group manager. This manager is one of many Scia Engineer database managers.

The manager provides for all standard operations with database data: (i) creation of a new group, (ii) editing of a group, (iii) activation of a selected group (i.e. displaying of the group), (iv) removal if a group, etc.

The procedure for opening of the Absence group manager

1. Open tree menu branch Absences.

2. Select function Absences manager and start it.

3. The Absences manager is opened on the screen.

Defining a new absence

The procedure for definition of a new absence on a member

1. Open tree menu branch Absences.

2. Select service Absences and open it.

3. At the top of the service, select Absences group which you want to define the new absences into. If required, a new group may be created.

4. Select function Beam and start it.

5. Type the name of the new absence.

6. Confirm it with [OK].

7. Select member or members where the absences should be defined.

8. Close the function.

9. If required, repeat steps 4 to 8.

10. Close the service.

The procedure for definition of a new absence in a support

1. Open tree menu branch Absences.

2. Select service Absences and open it.

3. At the top of the service, select required Absences group for your absences. If required, a new group may be created.

4. Select function Support and start it.

5. Type the name of the new absence.

6. Confirm it with [OK].

7. Select supports where the absences should be defined.

8. Close the function.

9. If required, repeat steps 4 to 8.

10. Close the service.

Note 1: If no absence group has been defined prior to the definition of a new absence, step 4 of the above stated procedure is preceded by opening of the Absences group manager. There, the user may define required Absences group or groups. Note 2: Be aware of that the display of absences in controlled by means of special absences-related view parameters. Note 3: Absences groups are an analogy to load cases. Also the principle of dealing with these two "concepts" in Scia Engineer environment is similar. For example, only ONE absences group can be displayed at a time.

Absence on a 1D member An absence on a 1D member has the following parameters:

Name Specifies the name of the absence.

Group Specifies the group into which the absence is included.

Model data

335

Each absence can be inserted into one group only.

See the Note below.

Note: Parameter Group can be adjusted either (i) in combo box placed at the top of Absences service, or (ii) afterwards during editing of an existing absence in the Property window.

Absences in a support An absence in a support has the following parameters:

Name Specifies the name of the absence.

Group Specifies the group into which the absence is included.

Each absence can be inserted into one group only.

See the Note below.

Note: Parameter Group can be adjusted either (i) in combo box placed at the top of Absences service, or (ii) afterwards during editing of an existing absence in the Property window.

Associating the absence group with a load case The association of a defined Absence group with a certain Load case can be made in Load case manager. The Absence group is one of the parameters of a load case.

The procedure for association of a defined Absence group with a certain Load case

1. Open Load case manager.

2. Select the load case where the absences should be taken into account.

3. Set parameter Absences to required value, i.e. select from the given list of existing Absence groups the group that should be associated with the given load case.

4. Close the Load case manager.

Displaying the required Absence group Only one absences group can be displayed at a time. The user may select the required group in two ways:

in service Absences,

via View parameters dialogue.

The procedure to select absence group for display in service Absences

1. Open tree menu branch Absences.

2. Select service Absences and open it.

3. At the top of the service, select Absences group that you want to be displayed.

4. Close the service.

Basic Reference Guide

336

The procedure to select absence group for display in View parameters dialogue

1. With the mouse cursor positioned inside the graphical window, click the right mouse button to invoke the window’s pop-up menu.

2. Select function Set view parameters.

3. The View parameters dialogue is opened on the screen.

4. In group Absences select the required Absences group.

5. Close the dialogue.

Note: Absences are normally displayed ONLY if service Absences is open. Otherwise, absences are hidden by default. It can be however changed on user’s request in dialogue View parameter settings where permanent display of absences may be adjusted by ticking the appropriate option.

Editing the existing absence If required, it is possible to change parameters of an already defined absence.

The procedure for editing of an existing absence

1. Select the absence to be edited.

2. The Property window shows the parameters of the absence.

3. Edit the required parameter.

4. Clear the selection.

Note: If the Absence group parameter is changed (i.e. the edited group is put into a different group), the edited Absence disappears from the screen, as only one group is displayed at a time.

Deleting the existing absence If required, it is possible to delete an already defined absence or absences.

The procedure for removal of an existing absence

1. Select the absence to be deleted.

2. Press key [Delete].

3. Invoke the pop-up menu and select function Delete.

4. The selected Absence is deleted.

Beam nonlinearity

Defining a new beam nonlinearity

Procedure to define a new 1D member subject to local nonlinearity

1. Input the 1D member in a standard way.

2. Open service Structure.

3. Start function Beam nonlinearity.

4. Select the required type of non-linearity.

5. If required, input additional parameters.

6. Confirm with [OK].

7. Select the 1D member(s) that should be subject to this kind of nonlinearity.

8. Close the function.

9. Close the service.

Editing the existing beam nonlinearity 1D member non-linearity may be edited in the exactly the same way as any other model data. See chapter Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Changing the parameters of model data.

Types of nonlinearity

Tension only Tension-only 1D members (i.e. 1D members not able to bear any compression) show behaviour to the following stress-strain diagram:

Model data

337

When inserted into the model, such a 1D member is marked with the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Note: The accuracy of the calculation may be affected by parameter Maximum iterations from dialogue Solver Setup.

Press only Press-only 1D members (i.e. 1D members not able to bear any tension) show behaviour to the following stress-strain diagram:

When inserted into the model, such a 1D member is marked with the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Limit force This feature may be useful if a 1D member is capable of bearing tension (or compression) stress up to a certain limit. The limit is specified by the limit value of axial force input in its absolute value. When the limit value is reached, two types of behaviour may occur: (i) the 1D member loses its stability and its bearing capacity drops to zero, or (ii) plastic behaviour get into action.

The following stress-strain diagrams demonstrate available options:

Basic Reference Guide

338

Limit compression force combined with loss of stability

Limit compression force combined with plastic behaviour

Limit tension force combined with loss of stability

Limit tension force combined with plastic behaviour

When inserted into the model, a 1D member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Model data

339

Parameters

Direction Either Limit tension or Limit compression may be selected.

Type Buckling: If the limit force is reached, the 1D member loses its stability and bears no load at all.

Plastic yielding: If the limit force is reached, the 1D member follows the plastic stress-strain diagram.

Marginal force Specifies the value of the limit force.

Gap There are various connection and support conditions used in a real structure. It may happen that a 1D member is not attached rigidly to the structure but "starts its action" only after some initial change of its length. The behaviour of such a beam is defined by the absolute value of the initial "slip". The beam then member starts to bear the load only after its elongation or shortening reaches the input value. There are three options available:

no tension

Modelling e.g. the instant when a 1D member bears against a support.

no compression

Modelling e.g. a free rope.

Basic Reference Guide

340

free in both directions

E.g. a scaffold pipe.

The algorithm applied has been designed for large structures. All 1D members are tested and processed simultaneously in every iteration step. The procedure is iterative and converges to the accurate solution. 1D members inserted into the model may be again eliminated in a next step if their deformation gets under the input value if initial displacement ("slip"). The convergence speed is high and does not depend on the number of 1D members. Eight to ten iteration steps should be sufficient for an arbitrary structure.

When inserted into the model, a 1D member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Parameters

Type One of three types can be selected: (i) press only, (ii) tension only, (iii) both directions. See the diagrams above.

Displacement Specifies the value of the initial "slip" before the 1D member becomes active.

Position Specifies whether the "slipping" is allowed at the beginning or end of the 1D member.

Initial stress In slender structures the axial force in a 1D member may have a big effect on the stiffness of the overall structure and the stiffness of its parts. In general, tensile force increases the stiffness and compression force reduces the stiffness of the structure.

It is possible to define initial pre-stressing forces in individual 1D members. These forces are considered constant along the whole 1D member.

The effect of initial pre-stressing can be taken into account in ALL or NONE nonlinear combination. In addition, also buckling calculation and dynamic free vibration analysis may take account of initial pre-stressing.

When inserted into the model, a 1D member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Parameters

Normal force Specifies the initial axial force applied in the 1D member.

A bit of theory

Initial stress can be defined in two forms: either (i) as a load case, or nonlinear combination, result, or (ii) as a given initial axial force in certain elements. For the second approach, the forces are transformed into shrinkage or elongation of 1D

Model data

341

members. That situation is analysed in order to obtain a balanced solution. The result of this calculation is then treated the same way as in the first approach.

In principle, the initial stress is viewed as a result of loading that was applied before the given load case or nonlinear combination. The geometry defined by the user is, however, assumed to be the same as before this initial loading. The solution that is used as the initial one is thus obtained on the defined (unchanged) geometry. The procedure that follows depends on (i) whether a linear or nonlinear calculation is used and (ii) whether we deal with the first, second or third order (the first order is a geometrically linear calculation, the second order can be found in the dialogue under the option Timoshenko and the third order under the name Newton-Raphson).

1. Linear calculation

The initial stress is used only to determine the impact of the stress-state on the stiffness of the structure (termed geometrical stiffness matrix). It is advantageous to use e.g. the stress-state resulting from the permanent load for the analysis of all load cases defined on the structure or for the dynamic analysis. With regard to the fact that the right-hand side of the equation remains unchanged, the principle of superposition can be applied (together with the possibility to calculate the critical combinations) and the significant effect of the geometrical nonlinearity can be taken into account. Neither the initial stress nor the initial deformations are added to the results (otherwise the combinations could not be created).

2. Nonlinear calculation

As a rule valid for all kinds of nonlinear calculations, the results of a nonlinear solution include also the deformations and stresses resulting from the initial loading (i.e. not just the effect of the stress-state on the stiffness of the structure).

a) The first and second order

The initial stress is used to modify the stiffness of the structure. The calculation is carried out with the load of a given nonlinear combination and the results of the initial load case are then added to the obtained results, including deformations and reactions.

b) The third order

It is necessary to take into account the way by which the initial loading was calculated. The procedure that is used to process the initial state depends on whether the initial state was calculated by the third order or not.

What is important is whether the equilibrium was calculated on the original or deformed geometry.

The initial shape must correspond to the one for which the equilibrium was calculated.

aa) The initial state was calculated by the 1st or 2nd order

The initial stress is used for the geometrical stiffness in the calculation. The initial shape is not changed. After finishing the calculation, the initial deformation is added to the results of the nonlinear combination. It must be emphasised that this approach is not suitable especially for cable and membrane structures. In any case, it is always better to apply the third order to the determination of the initial state if the third order calculation is to be performed.

bb) The initial state was calculated by the 3rd order

The deformations from the initial state are added to the geometry, which means that the analysis is performed on a deformed structure. The initial loading is applied into the calculation as an old load (similarly to the analysis of construction stages). Once the calculation has been performed, it is necessary to add the initial deformations to the deformations of the analysed nonlinear combination, so that the user obtains, after adding these total deformations to the initial geometry of the structure, the final shape of the structure (he is not in fact aware that the calculation has been performed on a modified structure). The analysis of stresses in the third order calculation is similar to the analysis of construction stages.

Consequently, in all nonlinear calculations, unlike in the linear calculation, the result of the initial state is fully included into the results (including the initial deformations). In order to determine the detailed forces in 1D members, both (i) the final end-forces including the results of the initial load case and the (ii) the final load on 1D members (including the initial loading) are used.

Cable Two cable elements can be modelled: (i) straight cable (pre-stressed element) and (ii) slack cable.

Straight cables

Only the pre-stressing force must be input for a straight cable. Note: Proper settings must be made in Project Setup dialogue, Functionality tab. Options Initial stress, Nonlinearity, Beam local nonlinearity and 2nd order calculation must be selected.

Slack cables

In addition to pre-stressing force, additional parameter must be defined for slack cable. The cable is subject to additional load: either (i) self-weight load, or (ii) a general load acting under the given angle and having identical orientation as the local rotation axis fix of the 1D member. These parameters are used to determine the slack of the cable in a particular direction. All calculations are carried out on the "deformed" structure. That means that the final deformation of a cable is calculated from this "slack" shape and not from the ideal straight shape of 1D member.

Note: Proper settings must be made in Project Setup dialogue, Functionality tab. Options Initial stress, Nonlinearity, and 2nd order calculation must be selected. Option Beam local nonlinearity does not have be ON; it would lead to unnecessary lengthening of calculation.

Basic Reference Guide

342

Note: ONLY Newton-Raphson method can be used for this type of analysis. Timoshenko method MUST NOT be applied for analysis of slack cables.

When inserted into the model, a 1D member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Parameters

Straight If ON, the 1D member is without any slack. Only the initial pre-stressing is then considered.

Self-weight If ON, the slack cable is subject to self-weight.

Normal force Specifies the value of the pre-stressing axial force.

In order to take the normal force into account, the solver parameters must be adjusted accordingly - see below the table.

Pn Specifies the value of the additional force.

This parameter is ignored if Self-weight is ON.

Alpha x Specifies the direction of the additional force.

This parameter is ignored if Self-weight is ON.

Normal force in the calculation

If the specified normal force is to be taken into account in the nonlinear calculation, the following parameters must be set in the Solver Setup dialogue (menu function Setup > Solver setup): - Initial stress > Initial stress must be set ON, - Initial stress > Initial stress as input must be set ON.

Note: If the parameter Initial stress as input is set to OFF, parameter Initial stress > Stress from load case must be specified as well. It selects the load case whose linear-calculation results are taken as the input stress.

Technical background

No special finite element is used for this type of analysis. Regular 1D member element is used, but its flexural stiffness is very very small. Small shear forces that appear during the iterative calculation appear are deleted.

343

Loads

Introduction to loads Load represents probably the most important part of the model. The user has always to pay a great attention to proper definition of load the structure is subject to.

Scia Engineer comes with a set of tools that facilitate this very important task. The program not only provides for numerous load types (concentrated force, linear moment load, thermal load, etc.) but also enables the user to manage the loads in a very clear and effective way through load cases, load groups, load case combinations and result classes. Each of these topics is described in detail in a separate chapter.

Note 1: If the current load case is of Self weight type, it is not possible to define any load in it. Therefore, if service Loads is called with a Self weight load case active, the menu remains empty. Note 2: The service Loads contains a long list of various load types. However, the actual offer in the list depends on several factors. First, the Standard user level of the user interface may hide some of the sophisticated loads. Second, the type of the load case that is set as active controls the individual load types in the list.

Load types

Introduction to load types Load types available in a particular project may depend on the type of project (2D, 3D, etc.) and on the functionality adjusted for the project. In general, it can be said that loads applicable in Scia Engineer can be divided into the following groups:

self weight represents the weight of the structure

force and moment load introduces action of external forces

thermal load takes account of different temperature in different places

climatic load models effects of climatic phenomena (wind, snow)

displacement of specified points

introduces the effect of prescribed displacements for specific points of the structure

The number of available load types is really large. In order to simplify the operation of the program, a lot of the types may be "switched off" by the user. This results in a simplified and more lucid menu of the program. By default, only the basic load types are offered by the program. If the user wants to use some advanced load types, he/she must select appropriate options in the functionality settings.

Note: The display style of loads is controlled by appropriate view parameters. By default, service Loads set the view parameters related to loads ON. Therefore, whenever you are in the service (Loads), the loads are automatically displayed. However, as soon as you close service Loads, the program returns to the standard setting of view parameters. It may happen that the view parameters for loads are OFF, which means that the defined loads disappear from the screen. They DO NOT disappear from the project. They are just not displayed. In order to see the loads even from outside the Loads service, set the appropriate view parameters ON.

Point force in node Parameters of point load applied into a node are:

Name Is used for identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load. The direction may further specified by the Angle item.

Type The point load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, or predefined load.

Angle Specifies the angle by which the load is rotated from its basic direction.

Value Specifies the size of the load.

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

For information about setting a local co-ordinate system of a node see chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node.

Basic Reference Guide

344

Direction and angle

Items Direction and Angle may be combined together to obtain the required orientation of the load. The Direction specifies the base direction. The Angle then defines if and how the load is inclined from the base direction.

The syntax for item Angle is: R[axis of rotation][angle] E.g. Rx30 means to rotate the load around the X-axis by 30 angle units. Rz-20 means to rotate the load around the Z-axis by minus 20 angle units. The angle units can be adjusted in program Unit setup.

Value

The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.

For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.

For Wind load, the Value represents the loading area. The real wind pressure is defined by wind curve specified in the project settings.

For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.

For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.

Point force on beam Some of the parameters for this load type are the same as for Point force in node.

In addition, parameters specifying the location of the load on a 1D member must be defined as well:

Position x Defines the position of the load on the 1D member.

Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or relative.

Origin Tell where the origin for the position co-ordinate measurement is.

Repeat Defines the number of forces acting on the 1D member. If the number is greater than 1, the forces are distributed uniformly over the 1D member.

Delta x Specifies the distance between two adjacent forces.

(available only if Repeat is greater than 1)

Eccentricity ey Specifies the eccentricity in Y-direction.

Eccentricity ez Specifies the eccentricity in Z-direction.

Loads

345

Co-ordinate definition

The location of the load on the 1D member may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute co-ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative co-ordinates, the position of the load on the 1D member is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>. In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.

Line force on beam Line force load models load distributed over a 1D member. It may be action along the whole 1D member or only on its part. Parameters of point load applied into a node are:

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load. The direction may further specified by the Angle item.

Type The point load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, or predefined load.

Angle Specifies the angle by which the load is rotated from its basic direction.

Distribution The load may be either constant along the 1D member or linearly variable (trapezoidal).

Value Specifies the size of the load.

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Bottom flange Defines the distribution of load on a built-in 1D member – see Out-of-balance factor below.

Q factor Defines the Out-of-balance factor – see below.

Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined 1D member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.

(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).

Position x1 Defines the position of the load beginning on the 1D member.

Position x2 Defines the position of the load end on the 1D member.

Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or relative.

Origin Tell where the origin for the position co-ordinate measurement is.

Eccentricity ey Specifies the eccentricity in Y-direction.

Eccentricity ez Specifies the eccentricity in Z-direction.

Direction and angle

Items Direction and Angle may be combined together to obtain the required orientation of the load. The Direction specifies the base direction. The Angle then defines if and how the load is inclined from the base direction.

The syntax for item Angle is: R[axis of rotation][angle] E.g. Rx30 means to rotate the load around the X-axis by 30 angle units. Rz-20 means to rotate the load around the Z-axis by minus 20 angle units. The angle units can be adjusted in program Unit setup.

Value

The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.

For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.

Basic Reference Guide

346

For Wind load, the Value represents the loading width. The real wind pressure is defined by wind curve specified in the project settings.

For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.

For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.

System

The definition of load direction may be defined:

in the local co-ordinate system of a 1D member,

in a selected user-co-ordinate system,

in the global co-ordinate system.

Location

The location depends on the setting of the System.

For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.

However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.

For more information see chapter Direction of loads.

Co-ordinate definition

The location of the load on the 1D member may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute co-ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative co-ordinates, the position of the load on the 1D member is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>. In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.

Out-of-balance factor

The Out-of-balance factor can be defined if option Bottom flange is ON. The Bottom flange parameter is meaningful only for line load applied on Built-in beams. This parameter enables the user to define the distribution of the load along the bottom flange. If parameter Bottom flange is ON, parameter Q, i.e. the out-of-balance factor, can be input.

Q-factor = 0 symmetrical distribution on flange

Q-factor = 1 asymmetrical distribution on flange

Q-factor = qmax – qmin / q general position

Line force on slab edge

Parameters

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.

Type The load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, self-weight or predefined load.

Distribution The load may be either constant along the edge or linearly variable (trapezoidal).

Value Specifies the size of the load.

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.

(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).

Edge Specifies the edge where the load is acting.

Position x1 Defines the position of the load beginning on the edge.

Position x2 Defines the position of the load end on the edge.

Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or relative.

Origin Tells where the origin for the position co-ordinate is.

Loads

347

Value

The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.

For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.

For Wind load, the Value represents the loading width. The real wind pressure is defined by wind curve specified in the project settings.

For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.

For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.

System

The definition of load direction may be defined:

in the local co-ordinate system of a edge,

in a selected user-co-ordinate system,

in the global co-ordinate system.

Location

The location depends on the setting of the System.

For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.

However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.

For more information see chapter Direction of loads.

Co-ordinate definition

The location of the load on the edge may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute co-ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative co-ordinates, the position of the load on the edge is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>. In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item. Example

Surface load on slab The surface load is defined on the whole slab. If only a part of a main slab is supposed to be subject to this load, a subregion must be defined inside the main slab. The subregion must be identical with the loading area. Alternatively, free surface load may be applied.

Parameters

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.

Type The point load may be a force load, self-weight or predefined load.

See Line force on slab edge for detailed information.

Value Specifies the size of the load.

See Line force on slab edge for detailed information.

Basic Reference Guide

348

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

See Line force on slab edge for detailed information.

Note: Predefined load and snow load add a new parameter to the property table: Coefficient. The default value of this parameter is –1 (minus one) to ensure that the defined load acts downwards and is of the same value as defined.

Moment load in node A node of the structure may be subject to a moment load. The load is defined by the direction and size of the moment.

The meaning of individual parameters is analogous to parameters for Point force in node.

Moment load on beam The meaning of individual parameters is analogous to parameters for Point force on beam.

Loads

349

Line moment load on beam The meaning of individual parameters is analogous to parameters for Line force on beam.

Line moment on slab edge

Parameters

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the direction of the moment.

Type The load may be of moment type only.

Distribution The load can be either uniformly distributed along the edge or it can linearly variable (trapezoidal distribution).

Value Specifies the size of the load.

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.

(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).

Position x1 Defines the position of the load beginning on the edge.

Position x2 Defines the position of the load end on the edge.

Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or relative.

Origin Tells where the origin for the position co-ordinate is.

System

The definition of load direction may be defined:

in the local co-ordinate system of a edge,

in the global co-ordinate system.

Location

The location depends on the setting of the System.

For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.

However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.

For more information see chapter Direction of loads.

Co-ordinate definition

The location of the load on the edge may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute co-ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative co-ordinates, the position of the load on the edge is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>. In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.

Thermal load on beam

Distribution of thermal load

Constant The load is defined by means of a single value. The value specifies the

Basic Reference Guide

350

warming to which the 1D member is subject.

Linear The load is defined by means of a set of four values. The individual values specify the temperature at individual sides (top, left, bottom, right) of the 1D member.

Thermal distribution curve If ON, the load is defined by means of specified thermal distribution curve.

Thermal distribution curve parameters

Direction in LCS of cross-section

This parameter specifies the direction from which the heat "comes", i.e. which face of the beam is exposed to the fire.

Temperature distribution curve

Specifies the temperature distribution curve that is used to determine the final load.

Number of cross-section layers

The actual distribution of the heat over the cross-section is generally non-linear (defined by the temperature distribution curve). The calculation algorithm, however, required a linear distribution. Therefore, the program must transform the curve into a trapezoid. The accuracy of this approximation can be controlled by this parameter. The higher the input number, the better accuracy and the more demanding (longer) the calculation.

The parameter can be from the interval <5, 50>.

The meaning of parameters from the Geometry group is identical with Line force on beam.

Temperature distribution curve Thermal load can be defined through a distribution curve that defines the distribution of the heat across the cross-section of a member.

When a member is exposed to fire, one side of the cross-section is directly exposed to the source of the heat. The temperature to which the interior of the cross-section is exposed to decreases with the distance from the directly exposed face. The temperature distribution curve defines this drop in the temperature.

To allow for this type of load, it is necessary to select Concrete > Fire resistance option in the Project settings.

The temperature distribution curve can be defined in the Temperature curves manager. Once at least temperature curve is defined, it can be used in function Load > Thermal load.

Temperature curves manager

The Temperature curves manager is a standard Scia Engineer database manager. You can perform the following:

input of a new temperature distribution curve,

review and modify the existing curves,

copy and delete the defined curves,

save them to an external file,

Loads

351

import temperature distribution curves from previously created external files (the external file can also be provided by a colleague user),

import predefined temperature distribution curve created according to the regulations of EN 1168.

Temperature distribution curves input dialogue

One temperature distribution curve defined in the Temperature curves manager may in fact consist of several individual curves. Each individual curve is defined for one time duration of fire. The final temperature distribution curve stored in the Temperature curves manager can be thus used for any duration of fire that is within the interval of durations of individual curves. If the user specified time duration coincides with one of the individual curves, then that corresponding curve is used in the calculation. If the user specified time duration is somewhere in between, the curve to be used in the calculation is automatically interpolated by the program.

Consequently, the input dialogue is a two-level input dialogue. The first level displays the whole set of defined curves. The second level enables the user to work with one particular individual curve.

It is, however, also possible that the final curve consists just of one individual curve.

First-level dialogue – the set of curves

Graphical window This part of the dialogue displays the defined set of curves.

Name Specifies the name of the temperature distribution curve.

Description Describes the curve (e.g. "Temperature curves for hollow core slabs according to EN 1168").

Fire duration The final fire duration used in the calculation. If the value specified here coincides with one of the individual curves, the corresponding curve is used. Otherwise the final curve is obtained through interpolation.

List of individual curves Lists the defined individual curves.

[New] Inputs a new individual curve (opens the second-level dialogue).

[Edit] Enables the user to edit one of the already defined individual curves.

[Delete] Deletes one of the already defined individual curves.

Basic Reference Guide

352

[Delete All] Deletes all the already defined individual curves.

Property table Summarises the information about the individual curve currently highlighted in the list.

In addition, it enables the user to adjust the required colour of the individual curve.

Second-level dialogue – one individual curve

Graphical window This part of the dialogue displays the defined curve.

Table In this table you input individual points that define the curve.

Distance = the distance from the face of the cross-section that exposed to fire. The distance is measured from the face inwards.

Temperature = the temperature at the given distance.

File duration Specifies the time duration of the fire.

[OK] Saves the input and closes the dialogue.

[Cancel] Discards the input and closes the dialogue.

The procedure to input a new temperature distribution curve

1. Open the Temperature curves manager:

a. Use tree menu function Library > Temperature curve.

b. Use menu function Libraries > Temperature curve.

2. Click button [New] to start the input of a new temperature distribution curve (if no temperature distribution curve has been defined so far, this step is automatically skipped and you are asked to input temperature distribution curve as soon as you the Temperature curves manager.

3. The Temperature distribution curves input dialogue is opened on the screen (i.e. the first level dialogue).

4. Click button [New] to input one individual curve. Confirm the input with [OK].

5. If required, add other individual curves.

6. Input the required duration of the fire. (The duration of fire can be also adjusted directly in the main dialogue of the Temperature curves manager.)

7. Close the Temperature distribution curves input dialogue. You get back to the Temperature curves manager.

8. If required, input another time distribution curve.

9. When everything is defined, close the manager.

The procedure to import the predefined (according to a standard) temperature distribution curve

1. Open the Temperature curves manager:

a. Use tree menu function Library > Temperature curve.

b. Use menu function Libraries > Temperature curve.

2. Click icon System database.

3. The Read from database dialogue is opened on the screen.

4. The right-hand side window contains the available predefined curves.

5. The left-hand side window contains the curves that are defined in the project.

6. Use button [Copy to project] or [Copy all] to copy the required curves into your project.

7. Close the dialogue.

Thermal load on slab Thermal load may be either constant or linear.

Constant The load is defined by means of a single value. The value specifies the warming to which the slab is subject.

Linear The load is defined by means of a set of two values. The individual values specify the temperature at individual surfaces (top, bottom) of

Loads

353

the slab.

Translation of support A node of the structure may be subject to a prescribed displacement. In such a case, the user defines the direction and magnitude of the known displacement.

Parameters have the following meaning

Name The name Is used for identification of the entity - translation of a support.

Direction The direction specifies the direction in which the support "settles".

Reference Absolute: The value (below) is input in absolute value related to the origin of the global coordinate system. Relative: The value (below) is input in relative value related to the position of the support. See also the example later in this chapter.

Value - U Specifies the value by which the support is translated.

System (informative) The direction is always defined by the local coordinate system of the support.

Note: The translation of support cannot be defined in flexible and non-linear supports.

Example

This example demonstrates the difference of absolute and relative reference.

Let us assume a simple three-span frame with supports as shown in the picture.

Basic Reference Guide

354

We have two identical frames: the left one for the absolute translation of the support, the right one for the relative translation. The global Z-coordinate of the lower supports is equal to zero, i.e. the supports are located in the global XY-plane.

The translation of a support is assigned to the support located in the middle of the middle-span beam.

The translation in the left frame is input with the following values:

The right variant with the following parameters:

The difference between the absolute and relative reference can be clearly seen in the last picture (the height of the frame is 4 metres).

Loads

355

Translation of a point on beam A point of the structure may be subject to a prescribed displacement. The displacement means that the 1D member is "torn apart" and one part of the 1D member is lifted up while the other part is pushed down. The imposed load is clear from the picture below. The magnitude defined is equal to the distance of "torn-end-points" of the 1D member.

The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Basic Reference Guide

356

Rotation of support A node of the structure may be subject to a prescribed rotation. In such a case, the user defines the direction and magnitude of the known rotation.

The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force in node. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Note: The translation of support cannot be defined in flexible and non-linear supports.

Rotation of a point on beam A point of the structure may be subject to a prescribed rotation. The displacement means that the 1D member is "cracked" and both parts are bent. The imposed load is clear from the picture below. The magnitude defined is equal to the angle between the tangents to two parts of the 1D member.

The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Loads

357

Longitudinal strain The whole 1D member may be subject to a longitudinal strain. This strain can be either uniform along the beam or may vary linearly.

The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Line force on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Flexural strain The whole 1D member may be subject to a flexural strain. This strain can be either uniform along the 1D member or may vary linearly.

The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Line force on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Slab displacement and curvature

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the load. It may facilitate the identification of the load.

Epsilon [mm/m’] Relative elongation due to increase of temperature or shrinkage.

k [mrad/m’] Curvature of the plane due to non-uniform increase of temperature or shrinkage.

A little bit of theory

Considering that the material is homogenous and isotropic and that the temperature is distributed linearly across the member thickness, the elongation of a member due to the increase of temperature can be easily calculated.

Let’s assume increase of temperature at the upper surface TH and increase of temperature at the lower surface TD. The final increase of temperature (shrinkage) can be divided into two components – see the figure below.

Basic Reference Guide

358

Considering this, we obtain:

Elongation (in m/m’)

where

alpha coefficient of thermal expansion

Ts the increased temperature

Positive increase of temperature gives positive value of elongation.

Curvature

where

alpha coefficient of thermal expansion

delta T difference in temperature between the surface z = -h/2 and

z = +h/2.

h member thickness

It follows from geometry that k = 1 / R, where R is a radius of a spherical surface the shape of which the members takes if the change of shape due to an increase of temperature is not prevented.

Note: If the increase of temperature is not linear across the member, the distribution of temperature increase must be linearised. The results must be then revised and stress resulting from the difference between the given and linearised increase of temperature must be obtained by a special calculation and added to this result.

Example

Imagine the following – rather theoretical – situation. Let’s have a circular slab supported in its centre only.

Loads

359

First, let’s subject this slab to the uniform elongation of 10 mm/m. It is possible to imagine that both surfaces of the slab are heated.

After calculation, we may see the overall and symmetrical expansion of the slab (the figure shows both the original slab and the deformed finite element mesh).

Second, let’s subject the slab to non-uniform expansion (curvature) of 10 mrad/m. It is possible to imagine that only one surface of the slab is heated.

After calculation, we may see the bowl-like deformation of the slab that results from this type of load. The figure shows the both the original slab and the deformed finite element mesh. The second figure presenting the side-view is more illustrative.

Basic Reference Guide

360

Pond load - water accumulation

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the load. It may facilitate the identification of the load.

Loaded beams Informs about the loading conditions.

Direction Specifies the direction of the load.

Storage capacity Specifies the capacity of the roof.

Other reasons Specifies an additional height.

Division Specifies the division used for the calculation.

Max number of steps Defines maximum number of steps during the calculation.

Use other permanent load If ON, other permanent load may be included.

Status Tells the status of he calculation.

Detailed parameters -Points

No. Automatically generated vertex number.

X, Y Co-ordinates of vertex of loading polygon.

Height Type of definition of water height.

Input: The height is manually input.

Point: The height is calculated from the value at different point using the given slope.

Calculate: The height is calculated from defined slopes.

H Defines the water height.

Point Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the point from which the height is calculated.

Slope Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the slope from the selected point.

Detailed parameters -Drains

Point Number of point.

Location Location of the drain.

hdn depth of the emergency drain above the roof or roof edge, in m

A roof area (vertical projection at ground plane) that drains using a certain emergency drain, in m2

Loads

361

b width of the drain

Detailed parameters -Slopes

The user may define subregions where planar shape is assumed. Only three points may have the height defined. The remaining points are calculated. In case of any conflict, the area is not permitted.

Example

When defined in the model, the pond load may look like:

Basic Reference Guide

362

Soil pressure and water pressure Several types of load (point force, line load and surface load) can be defined as what is called "soil pressure" or "water pressure ". Both loads are quite related and will be explained together.

Both load types appear only if a structure is located underground. Depending on the surrounding soil, level of underground water and depth below the surface, the program automatically calculates the soil pressure and water pressure.

In depth h (point a), the intensities of the generated loads are:

SigV,a If a is located above water level

(h <= H’d), then (h * Gdry)

If a is located below water level

(h > H’d), then (H’d * Gdry + H’w * Gwet)

It works ONLY in the negative direction of global Z-axis!

SigH,a SigH,a = SigV,a * k0

SigW,a If a is located above water level

(h <= H’d), then ( 0)

Loads

363

If a is located below water level

(h > H’d), then (H’w * Gwater)

This would lead to a distributed load as in the image below:

Water and soil loads can be input for the following load cases:

action type = "permanent" and load type = "standard",

action type = "variable" and load type = "static".

The procedure to input soil / water pressure

1. Open service Load.

2. Start function the required load type (point, line, surface).

3. Adjust the parameters - see below.

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. Apply the load on required entities.

Soil / water load parameters

In addition to common parameters for point, line and slab load, this load type requires the input of the following data:

Type Must be set to Soil pressure or Water pressure.

Distribution Only for line load.

The line load may be uniform or trapezoidal.

Acting area Only for point load.

Defines the acting area for the load.

Acting width Only for line load.

Defines the acting width for the load.

Coefficient Only for soil pressure.

This coefficient must be defined for horizontal soil pressure. It specifies the ration between vertical and horizontal soil pressure.

(I.e. for vertical pressure it should be equal to 1).

Borehole profile Specifies the borehole that is used for the generation of the pressure.

The soil / water pressure is displayed as shown in the picture below.

The brown diagram represents the "defined" load. It has been defined along the whole column.

The green diagram represents the "generated" part. The generated soil pressure reaches just to then top of the borehole (that was used as the reference borehole).

The calculation considers the green, i.e. generated, load.

Basic Reference Guide

364

Note: Water pressure is generated only below the level of underground water. If the whole model is above the water level, no pressure is generated at all.

Note: Please note, that the pressure is generated on the basis of data provided in the dialogue. It means that the "geologic" data are derived exclusively from the borehole profile provided. The generated soil pressure takes no account of possibly displayed earth surface. Even if the surface has been calculated and is displayed, the program does not calculate the intersection of the surface with the member that is subject to the soil pressure. The part of the member that is underground is determined only and solely from the specified single borehole profile. See the picture below.

The picture demonstrates the note above. There are three columns defined. There are several boreholes defined. The surface was calculated and is shown in the picture – the inclined line joining the top ends of the two boreholes. The soil pressure was input on all the columns. The left most borehole was used as the reference parameter for the definition of all three loads. That is the reason why the distribution of the soil pressure generated on all columns is identical. In other words, the two columns on the right are subject to soil pressure even above the surface. The calculated surface does not influence the generation of the soil pressure.

Pressure load

Parameters

Name Is used for identification of the load.

Type Outside

Loads

365

The pipe is exposed to external pressure.

Inside

The pipe is exposed to internal pressure.

Distribution Uniform

The uniform pressure acts on the pipe.

Trapez

The pressure has trapezoidal distribution.

Value – P (only for uniform distribution)

Specifies the magnitude of the pressure.

Value – P1, P2 (only for trapezoidal distribution)

Specify the magnitude of the pressure.

Close begin If ON, the pipe is closed at the starting point. This option has an effect on the calculation algorithm.

Close end If ON, the pipe is closed at the end-point. This option has an effect on the calculation algorithm.

Internal forces not calculated in the model If required, the user can input to any 1D member and any load case his/her definition of the distribution of internal forces along the 1D member. The input of these "not-calculated" internal forces can be made in service Load. This user-input internal force is displayed as a normal load.

It is possible to define up to 7 different components of internal forces: N, Vy, Vz, Mx, My, Mz, Sig Y, Sig Z.

The user can choose from several types of the course of the quantity along the 1D member:

uniform (1 value is defined),

trapezoidal (2 values on ends are defined),

triangle (2 values on ends and 1 in the middle are defined),

polynomial (n values in n relative sections are input).

Scia Engineer performs a standard analysis. The calculated results are after the calculation rewritten by the input values - for the specific 1D member and specific load case.

If Sig Y is input on a specific 1D member, this value is taken into account in the calculation of von Mises stress.

The input internal forces can either overwrite the calculated results or can be added to them.

Example

Let us have a simply supported beam with two load cases defined. In both load cases, let us introduce a unit concentrated force in the middle of the span.

In addition, in the second load case, let us define two components of not-calculated internal forces: Vz and My.

Vz is defined as uniform over the beam.

Basic Reference Guide

366

My is input as triangular with negative values in the supports and a positive value in the middle of the span.

The input not-calculated internal forces are displayed as a normal load.

When the calculation is performed and the results reviewed, the following is shown in the screen.

The first load case in which the beam is subjected to the concentrated force in the middle of the span and no not-calculated internal forces are defined, the distribution of both Vz and My is as anyone would expect from the external load.

Loads

367

in the second load case however, the specified not-calculated internal forces overwrite the calculated results and the distribution of Vz and y corresponds not to the external load but the input values of not-calculated internal forces.

Procedure to input not-calculated internal forces

1. Open service Load.

2. Start function Not-calculated internal forces.

3. If required, type the name that serves better orientation in your project.

4. Select the type (one of the seven components mentioned above).

5. Select the distribution (one of the four stated above).

6. Press the three-dot button in item Parameters in order to open an extra dialogue and input the required values.

Basic Reference Guide

368

7. Confirm the parameters with [OK].

8. Confirm the load definition with [OK].

9. Position the load to required 1D members.

Dynamic loads

Harmonic load There is no need to carry out a special dynamic calculation for a weakly damped structure. The method of expansion into eigenmodes can be used to determine the final amplitude of deformation line as a linear combination of the eigenmodes (the phase shift between individual eigenmodes can be ignored for weak damping). This type of calculation only requires the definition of logarithmic decrement, frequency of excitation impulse in Hz and amplitude of nodal impulses (see Defining the harmonic load case).

The results may than be reviewed the same way as results of a standard static calculation (see also Evaluating the results for harmonic load).

If the phase shift between individual eigenmodes cannot be ignored due to stronger damping, the problem must be solved as a response to a general dynamic load.

Seismic load During earthquake, the subsoil (sub-grade or foundation) bearing a structure moves. The structure tries to follow this movement. As a result, all masses in the structure begin to move. Subsequently, they subject the structure to inertial forces. Supports can generally move in all directions, but normally only horizontal moves are taken into consideration. The user may define the direction that s/he considers to be crucial for the structure or s/he may evaluate the effect of shakes acting in different directions.

Inertial forces arise from the move. It is sufficient to determine these forces and apply them on the structure. Thus, the dynamic calculation is transformed into a static one. But the whole thing is not that simple. We do not know the precise movement of subsoil and therefore we are not able to determine the seismic forces precisely. But we can apply formulas of a technical standard or employ the frequency spectrum of a real earthquake.

Usually, horizontal movement of a structure is assumed for seismic load. That means that the earthquake acts in a plane horizontal to XY plane. The direction can be specified by means of coefficient for individual co-ordinate axes.

For example:

earthquake in X-direction set X = 1 and Y = 0

earthquake in Y-direction set X = 0 and Y = 1

earthquake in the axis of the 1st quadrant set X = Y = 0.707 (i.e. sin(45°))

On the other hand, it is possible to take account of Z-directions as well. This can be achieved by specifying the coefficient for Z axis.

Note: We must be careful with the coefficients as earthquake "X=1; Y=0; Z=0.667" is not equal to earthquake "X=1; Y=0; Z=-0.667" nor to earthquake "X=-1; Y=0; Z=0.667".

The seismic calculation runs automatically, which means that both self-weight and input masses are used to generate load for individual eigenmodes.

The evaluation is performed separately for each force and displacement component using generally two available formulas:

Square root of the sum of squares taking account of the extreme value:

Square root of the sum of squares:

where:

Sdyn component in consideration

Sm the maximum corresponding component for individual eigenmode

Sj other corresponding components for individual eigenmode

The final force may be both negative and positive. Both possibilities are considered in combinations.

Loads

369

Note: Whatever procedure we apply to the evaluation of quantity X, the result is always positive value. But we can have also a negative value because in seismicity the vibration is around the equilibrium position. The results of seismic calculation are always positive in Scia Engineer. The only exception is with internal forces. Here, the co-ordinate system convention in not used. Instead, the "elasticity" convention (lower and front fibres under tension) is applied. Signs of some shear forces and bending moments may be inverted and "minus" may appear in the results of seismic calculation.

One more fact must be borne in mind. In static analysis we are curious about relations between individual internal forces – e.g. extreme axial force and corresponding bending moment. Such relations, however, cannot be determined for results of seismic calculation because each component is evaluated separately which, as you have surely noticed, is not a linear problem.

When evaluating results of seismic analysis, the one may say "this is the maximal axial force", "this is the maximal axial stress", "this is the maximal vertical displacement". But one cannot calculate stress in a section from the axial force and bending moment even though they appear in the same line of result table. This is the effect of the squares and roots in the formulas above. Accurate stress can be obtained only in appropriate module for design and checking (steel, concrete, etc. structures).

General seismisity If a structure is designed for a particular earthquake, we can employ seismicity defined by means of a frequency spectrum. The following data must be specified:

table of frequencies and accelerations,

coefficients of accelerations,

direction coefficients,

evaluation type.

For more information see chapter Defining the seismic load case.

Free loads

Introduction to free loads Free load is related to slabs. The load is not defined by the entity it acts on, but by a specific load border. Free loads are defined by means of "loading entities" that may overlap or affect one or more slabs.

Available types of "loading entity"

polygon The loading entity is defined by means of a general polygon.

line The loading entity is defined by means of a line or polyline.

point The loading entity is defined by means of a point.

Note: The loading entity may be oriented arbitrarily but can be input only in the XY plane of the current UCS. Therefore, before one can input the free load, it is necessary to adjust the working plane accordingly.

Each loading entity keeps a record of what was the orientation of the UCS when the entity was defined. The orientation of the UCS is important as some of the loading parameters may be related to this UCS. Whenever any already defined free load entity is selected, the appropriate UCS is activated.

If an inclined slab is subject to free load (the word inclined means that the plane of the slab and the loading plane of the loading entity are not parallel), the final load value is calculated from the projection of defined load onto the selected slab.

Free load is independent of finite element mesh and possible refinement or "coursing" of the mesh does not affect the calculated results.

It is possible to manually define which particular slabs should be subject to a particular free load. Alternatively, the program may automatically detect all affected slabs and apply the load on them. The former approach enables the user to extract specific slabs from the effect of the defined load.

Validity of free loads

The validity of free load means (i) which particular slabs are subject to the given load and (ii) the halfspace where the load acts (i.e. the direction of the load).

All Both entities located under and above the defined load are subject to the defined load.

-Z If ON, the load is supposed to act only in the space located along the negative half of Z-axis of the User coordinate system. That means that ONLY the entities located UNDER the XY-plane of the UCS are subject to the load in question.

-Z (incl. 0) The same as above plus entities located IN the XY-plane of the UCS.

Basic Reference Guide

370

Z = 0 Only the entities located in the XY-plane of the UCS are subject to the load in question.

+Z If ON, the load is supposed to act only in the space located along the positive half of Z-axis of the User coordinate system. That means that ONLY the entities located ABOVE the XY-plane of the UCS are subject to the load in question.

+Z (incl. 0) The same as above plus entities located IN the XY-plane of the UCS.

Selected The user must define which particular entities are supposed to be subject to the given load.

The validity parameters can become more clear from the following example.

Let’s have four slabs input one above the other. Define free area load in the plane of the third slab (from the bottom).

First, set option Select to All and validity to All. Perform the calculation and open function Calculation, mesh > 2D data viewer > Surface load. You can see that the load acts on all four slabs.

Second, set option Select to All and validity to Z. The load acts only on the top slab because it acts only on that part of the structure that is above the plane in which the load is defined. (If the load was input let’s say 5 cm below the midplane of the third (from bottom) slab, also that slab would be subject to the load.)

Loads

371

Third, set option Select to All and validity to –Z. The load acts only on two bottom slabs because it acts only on that part of the structure that is below the plane in which the load is defined.

Fourth, set option Select to Select and validity to All. Select the most bottom slab and the third one.

Basic Reference Guide

372

The load acts only on the two selected slabs only.

Note: Attention must be paid to the situation when parameter Select is set to Select and parameter Validity is set to Z or –Z. In this case the two conditions are combined to make a product. So it could happen that there is no slab that would comply with both the conditions: being selected and being in the proper semi-space.

Free point load

Parameters

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.

Type The free point load may be of force type only.

Value Specifies the size of the load.

Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to free loads for more information.

Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to this load or if only selected members are supposed to be affected by this particular load.

Loads

373

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Free moment load

Parameters

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.

Type The free moment load may be of moment type only.

Value – F Specifies the magnitude of the load.

Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to free loads for more information.

Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to this load or if only selected members are supposed to be affected by this particular load.

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Free line load

Parameters

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.

Type The load may be a force load.

Distribution The load may be either constant along the edge or linearly variable (trapezoidal).

Value Specifies the size of the load.

Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to free loads for more information.

Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to this load or if only selected members are supposed to be affected by this particular load.

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.

(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).

Free surface load

Parameters

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.

Type The load may be a force load, wind load, snow load or predefined load.

Distribution The load may be either constant across the slab or linearly variable (trapezoidal).

Value Specifies the size of the load.

Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to free loads for more information.

Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to this load or if only selected members are supposed to be affected by this particular load.

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Basic Reference Guide

374

Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.

(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).

If the loaded slab is perpendicular to the plane of the defined free load, and the plane of the free load intersects the slab, and option Select is set to Selected, and the slab is selected, then the load is always generated on the whole slab regardless of the real action-area (see the image below).

Input, display and modification of free loads

General procedure for the definition of a new free load

1) Start the appropriate function (free point load, free line load, free surface load).

2) Adjust the size and other parameters of the load.

3) Input the loading entity (i.e. the loading area/line/point).

4) If necessary, make the selection of slabs that should be subject to the load.

5) Close the function.

Once the load has been input, it can be selected and its properties are displayed in the Property window. The list of input parameters is extended by a set of Action buttons.

Action buttons for free loads

Generate loads This button generates the "actual" loads for the selected free load. The visual result of the operation depends on the currently adjusted View parameters (see below).

Loads

375

Hide original load This action button is available only if the free load was not selected directly but when the generated load was selected by the mouse and the free load "definition" was activated through action button Display original load.

Update 2D members selection If the Validity is set to Selected, this button becomes available and it enables the user to modify the selection of members that are to be subject to the generated load.

Move UCS This button moves the origin of the selected free loads to the origin of the currently active UCS.

Edit plane load geometry This button enables you to edit the shape of the free load in the graphical window.

Table edit geometry This button enables you to edit the coordinates of the vertices of the free load in a table.

Action buttons for loads generated from free loads

Display original load When you select the generated load, you may display the original input free load through this action button.

Display style for the free loads

The display style of free and generated loads can be controlled by view parameter Tab Loads / masses > Group Display loads > item Generators.

Original Only the inputted free load definition is displayed.

Generated Only the generated real load is displayed.

Original + Generated Both the input free load and the generated real load are displayed.

Example

There are three slabs located one above the other. Three free surface loads are defined on the middle slab:

1) rectangular: validity = All

2) triangular: validity = -Z

3) cross-like: validity = +Z (incl. 0)

Picture 1

The mentioned view parameter is set to Original. Only the defined free loads are visible.

Basic Reference Guide

376

Picture 2

The mentioned view parameter is set to Generated. Only the generated loads are visible.

Picture 3

The mentioned view parameter is set to Original + Generated. Both the input loads and the generated loads are displayed. You may see in the tooltip that both loads are really displayed (even though they overlap).

Loads

377

Load direction

Direction of loads

Point force load

Point force load defined in a node or on a 1D member can be acting in the following directions:

global co-ordinate system Both point force load in node and point force load on 1D member can be defined to act in the direction of the global co-ordinate system.

local co-ordinate system of node

Point force load in node can be acting in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the node.

See also chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node.

local co-ordinate system of beam

Point force load on 1D member can be acting in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the 1D member.

Line force load

Distributed load on a 1D member can be acting in the following directions:

global co-ordinate system

Basic Reference Guide

378

projection in the global co-ordinate system

local co-ordinate system of beam

Moment load (point and line)

global co-ordinate system Both point moment load in node, point moment load on 1D member, and line moment load on 1D member can be defined to act in the direction of the global co-ordinate system.

local co-ordinate system of node

Point moment load in node can be acting in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the node.

See also chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node.

local co-ordinate system of beam

Both point and line moment load on 1D member can be acting in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the 1D member.

Point displacement load

global co-ordinate system Point displacement load in node can be acting in the direction of the global co-ordinate system.

local co-ordinate system of node

Point displacement load in node can be acting in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the node.

See also chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node.

local co-ordinate system of beam

Point displacement load on 1D member can be acting ONLY in the direction of the local co-ordinate system of the 1D member.

Line displacement load

Line displacement load can be defined ONLY in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the 1D member.

Defining a new load

Loads

379

Defining a new point load in a node The same procedure is applicable for the definition of all nodal point loads, i.e. point force, point moment, translation in node, rotation in node, wind pressure in node, etc.

The procedure for the definition of a new point load in a node

1. Open the required function via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:

a. Point force > in node

b. Moment > in node

c. Point displacement > Translation of support

d. Point displacement > Rotation of support

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Select nodes where the load should act.

5. Close the function.

Defining a new point load on a beam The same procedure is applicable for the definition of all point loads located on a 1D member, i.e. point force, point moment, translation of a point, rotation of a point, wind pressure in a point, etc.

The procedure for the definition of a new point load on a 1D member

1. Open the required function via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:

a. Point force > on beam

b. Moment > on beam

c. Point displacement > on beam - translation

d. Point displacement > on beam - rotation

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Input the position of the load on the 1D member.

4. Type the number of repetitions of the load and input the distance between adjacent loads.

5. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

6. Select 1D members where the load should act.

7. Close the function.

Defining a new line load on a beam The same procedure is applicable for the definition of all line loads, i.e. line force, line moment, translation of a 1D member, rotation of a 1D member, wind pressure over a 1D member, etc.

The procedure for the definition of a new line load on a 1D member

1. Open the required function via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:

a. Line force on beam

b. Line moment on beam

c. Line displacement > relative translation

d. Line displacement > relative rotation

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Input the starting point and end point of the load position. (This must be made only for force loads as the prescribed displacement must be applied to the whole 1D member.)

4. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

5. Select 1D members where the load should act.

6. Close the function.

Defining a new thermal load on a beam

The procedure for the definition of a new thermal load

1. Open function Thermal load on beam via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Input the starting point and end point of the load position.

4. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

5. Select 1D members where the load should act.

Basic Reference Guide

380

6. Close the function.

Defining a new line load on slab edge

The procedure for the definition of a new line load on slab edge

1. Open function Line force > on slab edge via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Select the edges where the load should act.

5. Close the function.

Defining a new surface load on a slab

The procedure for the definition of a new surface load on slab

1. Open function Surface load > on slab via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Select the slabs where the load should act (you may select both main slabs and subregions).

5. Close the function.

Defining a new thermal load on slab

The procedure for the definition of a new thermal load

1. Open function Thermal load on slab via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Select slabs where the load should act.

5. Close the function.

Defining a new free point load

The procedure for the definition of a new free point load

1. Open function Point force > Free via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Define the point / points where the load should act.

5. Close the function.

Defining a new free line load

The procedure for the definition of a new free line load

1. Open function Line force > Free via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Define the loading line / polygone.

5. Close the function.

Defining a new free surface load

The procedure for the definition of a new free surface load

1. Open function Surface load > Free via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Define the loading area (i.e. a closed polygon).

5. Close the function.

Defining a new slab displacement

Loads

381

The procedure for the definition of a displacement of a slab

1. Open function Slab displacement, curvature via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Select slabs where the load should be applied.

5. Close the function.

Fast definition of specific load types Some of the most often used load types may be defined very fast via buttons on the toolbar at the top edge of the command line.

The toolbar appears only when service Loads is opened. The individual buttons provide for the definition of the following load types:

point force in a node ( ),

single point force on 1D member ( ),

two uniformly distributed point forces on a 1D member ( ),

three uniformly distributed point forces on a 1D member ( ),

four uniformly distributed point forces on a 1D member ( ),

distributed load on a 1D member ( ).

All the above-mentioned buttons start the corresponding function with default settings. The settings are shown in the property window where they can but do not have to be edited.

The procedure for the fast definition of specific load types

1. Start service Loads.

2. The toolbar appears on the screen.

3. Press the required button.

4. If necessary, edit the values in the Property window.

5. Select entities to which the load should be applied.

6. Close the function.

Note: The fast definition of load does not work if the current load case is either of Self weight or wind or snow type.

Modifying the existing load

Changing the load parameters Load is a standard Scia Engineer’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types. What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the Scia Engineer project. The procedure for the modification of load is therefore identical to the procedure for the modification of model data (e.g. supports, etc.).

Moving the load Load is a standard Scia Engineer’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types. What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the Scia Engineer project. The procedure for move of load is therefore identical to the procedure for move of model data (see chapter Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Moving the model data).

Copying the load Load is a normal Scia Engineer’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types. What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the Scia Engineer project. The procedure for copying of load is therefore identical to the procedure for copying of model data (see chapter Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Copying the model data).

Deleting the load Load is a normal Scia Engineer’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types. What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the Scia Engineer project. The procedure for removal of load is

Basic Reference Guide

382

therefore identical to the procedure for removal of model data (see chapter Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Deleting the model data).

Editing the shape of free load The shape of free load (line and surface) can be edited, if required. The procedure is identical for both load types and differs only in the name of the function that does the editing.

The procedure to edit the geometry of free load

1. Select the load to be edited.

2. In the property window click button:

a. in case of line load, [Edit polygonal load geometry],

b. in case of area load, [Edit plane load geometry].

3. Use drag-and-drop approach to move the vertices of the load geometry, if required.

4. Invoke the pop-up menu and use appropriate function to insert or delete a vertex.

5. Invoke the pop-up menu and select required function to abandon or end the editing.

Load cases

Introduction to load cases Individual loads are not defined "freely". They must be included in load cases. The load cases correspond with the professional terminology specified in national technical standards dealing with loads of civil engineering structures. The application of load cases in Scia Engineer follows the load management procedures that are usual and also obligatory in civil engineering practice.

It is possible to specify a great number of load case parameters to control the way the program treats each particular load case and especially the loads defined into it.

Load case manager The Load case manager is a standard Scia Engineer manager. It provides for basic operations with load cases:

creation of a new load case,

editing of existing load cases,

deletion of existing load cases,

printing the information about existing load cases,

saving and reading of existing load cases into and from an external file.

The Load case manager can be opened in one of the following ways:

using menu function Tree > Load cases, combinations > Load cases,

using tree menu function Load cases, combinations > Load cases.

Defining a new load case

The procedure for the definition of a new load case

Loads

383

1. Open the Load case manager.

2. Click button [New].

3. A new load case is created.

4. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.

5. Input the required values for individual load case parameters.

6. Confirm with button [OK].

7. If required, repeat steps 2 to 6.

8. Close the Load case manager.

Note: By default, the first load case is automatically created once a new project is opened. The default load case is of Self weight type. Unless the user defines another load case and sets it as an active one, it is not possible to define any load (except the self weight). See also Note 1 in chapter Introduction to loads.

Defining the load case parameters The parameters of a load case control the way the program treats the load inserted in the load case.

Basic parameters

Name Is used for a unique identification of the load case.

Description May add some information about the load case.

Type Specifies the type of the load case.

Load group Sorts load cases by load groups.

Load case type

The load case type can be set to:

Permanent Specifies the permanent loads.

Variable Specifies the variable loads in the project.

Other parameters depend on the adjustment of the load case type.

Parameters for permanent loads

Type (subtype)

Self weight Specifies the load case where only self-weight of the structure can be defined.

Standard Specifies the load case where any load can be defined.

Creep Defines a special load case for specific calculation.

Prestress This type is used for calculations of prestressed structures.

Primary effects This load case is used when the primary effect are calculated.

Note: The list above may not be complete. Some types of load case may appear only for a specific type of analysis. The list above may not be complete. The meaning of special load cases is explained in appropriate chapters.

Direction

This item tells the program the direction in which the generated self-weight is acting.

Parameters for variable loads

Type (subtype)

Static The load case is used for static calculations.

Dynamic The load case is used for dynamic calculations.

Primary effects This load case is used when the primary effect are calculated.

Note: The list above may not be complete. Some types of load case may appear only for a specific type of analysis. The list above may not be complete. The meaning of special load cases is explained in appropriate chapters.

Basic Reference Guide

384

Specification of static load case

Standard Defines a general static load case. Any load can be defined in such a load case.

Temperature Defines a load case for thermal loads.

Static wind Defines a load case for wind loads. Only wind load can be defined in such a load case.

Earthquake Defines a load case for seismic analysis.

Snow Defines a load case for snow loads. Only snow load can be defined in such a load case.

Coefficient

It defines the factor used for the load case when combinations of load cases are generated. This parameter is defined only for some codes.

Duration

For static standard loads, the duration of the load impact can be specified.

Long Is used for non-linear calculation of deformation for concrete structures

Medium Is used for check of timber structures.

Short Default type.

Instantaneous Is used for check of timber structures.

All standard static loads are considered during the generation of load case combination as a normal variable load. Loads of long and short duration are applied only to combinations for the calculation of deformation of concrete structures according to the second ultimate state. Loads of medium and instantaneous duration are taken into account only for check of timber members.

Master load case

It is possible to specify that some particular load case may be included into a combination of load cases ONLY if another specific load case is included. The item Master load case tells the program that a particular load case is bound to another load case – to the Master load case.

The master load case is valid for all the load cases within one load group.

For example, let us define:

LC1 in LG1

LC2 in LG1

If LC3 is set as a master load case for LC2, it means that it is automatically set also for LC1.

Other parameters

There are other parameters available for each load case. However, these additional parameters depend on the active code adjusted for the project. The meaning of individual additional parameters is based on corresponding articles of appropriate codes and it goes beyond the scope of this book.

Note: The settings may affect the functionality of the program. For example, let’s assume that the user defines a new load case and sets its specification to Static wind. If later service Loads is opened, the user may define only wind loads, nothing else.

Using the load case The load case is used with each newly defined load – a particular load case must be set as active so that the user may define a new load.

Setting the load case in service Loads

1. Open service Loads.

2. A combo box listing the defined load cases appears at the top of the service tree.

3. Use the combo box to select and set the required load case.

4. All the new loads defined later are inserted into the current load case shown in the combo box.

It is also possible to change only the displayed load case in the active graphical window.

Setting the displayed load case via window control button

1. Click button [Set load case for display] ( ) located on the window toolbar (the window’s bottom scroll bar).

2. A list of defined load cases opens on the screen.

3. Select the required load case.

Loads

385

4. A new load case is displayed.

Note 1: The display style of loads is controlled by appropriate view parameters. By default, service Loads set the view parameters related to loads ON. Therefore, whenever you are in the service (Loads), the loads are automatically displayed. However, as soon as you close service Loads, the program returns to the standard setting of view parameters. It may happen that the view parameters for loads are OFF, which means that the defined loads disappear from the screen. They DO NOT disappear from the project. They are just not display. In order to see the loads even from outside the Loads service, set the appropriate view parameters ON. Note 2: The adjustment of the active load case for displaying of results is an integral part of service Results and is described in corresponding chapter of the manual.

Dynamic load cases

Dynamic load cases Dynamic load cases cover the following:

response to a harmonic vibration,

response to a seismic load.

A dynamic calculation is carried out for defined dynamic load cases simultaneously with a static calculation. Dynamic load cases can be arbitrarily combined with static load cases. As a result, Scia Engineer provides for a direct combination and evaluation of results for static and dynamic analysis. For example, both static and dynamic wind can be included into one selective group and the program automatically determines which one is more unfavourable.

Dynamic load cases can be input only after mass groups and their combinations have been defined. A dynamic load case can be input as a standard variable load case; only its type must be set to dynamic. Impulses, usually but not exclusively point impulses in nodes, can then be defined in these load cases.

A load factor can be defined for a dynamic load case. The meaning of the factor is the same as for static load case. Other parameters of a dynamic load case depend on its type.

The meaning of the nodal impulse differs according to the type of dynamic load case. No impulses appear in eigenvalue problem (free vibration analysis) or in seismic calculation. For harmonic vibration, impulses of exciting forces must be specified.

In case of dynamic wind, impulses from static wind are defined. The impulse size is 1 kN/m2 regardless of the height (i.e. the product of node-corresponding area and shape coefficient). For orthogonal vibration, one must specify the node-corresponding length of cylindrical parts of the structure where vibration can occur.

Defining a new dynamic load case

Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must have been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list of the Project setup dialogue.

A new dynamic load case can be defined in the Load case manager. A dynamic load case is defined like a static load case, but its properties are adjusted otherwise.

The procedure for the definition of a dynamic load case

1. Open the Load case manager.

2. Press button [New] to create a new load case.

3. Set Action type to Variable.

4. Set Load type to Dynamic.

5. Select required Specification.

6. Press button [Parameters] to specify required parameters for selected type of dynamic load case.

7. Close the Load case manager.

Each defined dynamic load case, similarly to a static variable load case, must be sorted into a group of variable loads. Identical rules for sorting into groups and for the generation of combinations are applied for both static and dynamic variable load cases.

IMPORTANT: If the Specification of the load case is set to General dynamics, the program generates a set of new load cases. These load cases are used to store the results of the calculation: internal forces, deformation, reactions. Even though these load cases contain these results, it is NOT POSSIBLE to EVALUATE STRESS in 1D members (neither standard stress nor stress in steel / concrete code checks). Moreover, if such a load case is included to a combination of load cases, the stress cannot be evaluated for these combinations neither (the stress in such combinations is set to zero).

Defining the harmonic load case A general procedure for the definition of a dynamic load case is given in chapter Defining a new dynamic load case. Harmonic load case requires input of the following parameters:

Basic Reference Guide

386

Logarithmic decrement The rate at which the amplitude decays gives us measurement of the damping in a system. It is known as the logarithmic decrement. This is defined as the natural logarithm of the ratio of any two successive amplitudes.

Frequency The frequency of the excitation impulse in Hz.

Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must have been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list of the Project setup dialogue.

Defining the seismic load case A general procedure for the definition of a dynamic load case is given in chapter Defining a new dynamic load case.

Seismic load case parameters

seismic spectrum X If the option is ON, the user can select required spectrum for X-direction. The selection contains all the defined spectra stored in the spectrum database (see Defining the seismic spectrum). Button next to the combo box opens the Spectrum manager and the user may modify the existing spectrum or add a new one.

For more about the definition of a spectrum see chapter Defining the seismic spectrum.

seismic spectrum Y ditto for Y-direction

seismic spectrum Z ditto for Z-direction

direction X Substitute seismic forces are calculated from masses defined on the structure and from the acceleration. The values in this and two adjacent fields (for the two other axis-directions) specify the final direction in which the earthquake acts. Value 1 means full effect along the axis. 0 (zero) stands for no effect along the axis.

direction Y ditto for Y-direction

direction Z ditto for Z-direction

acceleration coefficient All the acceleration values in the spectrum table are multiplied by the given value of acceleration coefficient.

overturning level This field specifies the height of a point around which the structure may overturn. The height is measured from origin of the global co-ordinate system. The final turning moment is related to this point.

evaluation type There are two basic approaches available for the evaluation of result of seismic calculation. See below.

Evaluation type

sum The result value may be obtained as a square root of the sum of squares of values from individual load cases. For more information see chapter Seismic load.

extreme The result may take account of extreme values.

For more information see chapter Seismic load.

CQC Alternatively, an evaluation to CQC (Complete Quadratic Combination) standard may be applied. This method takes the damping – frequency diagram into account.

Button [...] opens the Damping database manager (which is a standards Scia Engineer database manager).

Predominant mode

Signed results If ON, the eigenshape selected in the combo box below is used for the definition of signs of result values.

This affects the results on 1D and 2D members.

When the load case is used in a combination, then it is combined once with coefficient 1 and once with coefficient -1.

Mode shape If the option above is ON, the user may specify the predominant mode = the mode shape which determines the sign of the results.

It is possible to select option "Default" or a number from 1 to the total number of selected eigenshapes.

The "Default" stays for mode shape with biggest mass ratio.

Loads

387

Note:

It is difficult to define the "predominant mode" automatically by the program, because it is a 3D program which computes mass in 3 directions: X, Y and Z.

Multiple eigenshapes

This feature can be used in the seismic analysis if SRSS is used. Modes are combined together if the precision condition is met.

Classic SRSS

SRSS with multiple eigen shapes

If precision,

where

mode (i) and (j) are multiple. Then for example

where mode 2 and 3 are multiple.

Unify shapes If ON, the eigenshapes meeting the precision condition are considered multiple.

Precision The procision in the condition for multuiple eigenshapes.

Mass in analysis

Participation mass only When you consider only participation mass, i.e. you don’t take all modes in the analysis, you make some error. You say something like "not all mass is included in the analysis". This "error" can be corrected by the two following options.

Missing mass in modes The program recalculates the missing mass in modes that has been already computed (e.g. the number of modes selected by the user).

Residual mode "Residual mode" method install the missing mass as "weight" (e.g. standard load case). The result of this load case is handled as an "extra mode".

A few note concerning options Missing mass in modes and Residual mode

The two methods (Missing mass in modes and Residual mode) are intended for bigger models, where it is difficult to compute the minimal required modes. French norm say, for example, that you need all modes until 33hz. Then you look at the participation ratio.

You never obtain good results if you compute only two modes and take the rest in missing mass or residual modes. That’s not the purpose.

The selection affects the results 1d, 2d

Redistribute missing mass to the known modes

This means to smooth the missing mass to the known modes and compute modal deformations and then the modal forces.

Afterwards its summed depending the selected rule SRSS, CQC, MAX

We proposed assign "missing mass" to known eigenmode. Let us suppose that we have determined k eigenmodes, where

Basic Reference Guide

388

k is direction

is effective mass

Missing mass can now be written as

Ratio between effective mass and missing mass is

Now we can write these formulas

Then

Missing mass is installed as an extra mode which is computed as an equivalent static load case

Missing mass is computed in each node as the difference between total mass and effective mass

k is direction

i is node

j is mode

is effective mass, direction k, node i

Missing mass can now be written as

A static load case of weight in computed, which is handled as a "real" mode.

For each direction k, selected in "General seismic load" interface, the amplitude of static load is computed as:

Loads

389

is acceleration of "cut off" frequency in direction k (i.e. last calculated frequency),

missing mass in direction k, node i .

Afterwards the extra mode is summed depending on the selected rule SRSS, CQC, MAX.

Remark: For CQC we do not assume correlation with the other modes (i.e. absolute value is added).

Remark 1:

The direction of the static equivalent loads is the same as the direction selected by user in the spectrum direction.

Remark 2:

If the user installs seismic load in 2 or 3 global directions, then the static equivalent mass in the residual mode is computed in the global 2 or 3 installed directions with respect to the directions defined in the input.

Remark 3:

The program doesn’t check the level of the cut off frequency. This part is the responsibility of the user.

Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must have been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list of the Project setup dialogue.

Defining the seismic spectrum A new seismic spectrum can be defined in the Seismic spectra manager. It can also be used for editing of an earlier input spectrum. The manager is analogous to other Scia Engineer database managers.

Pressing button [New] in the manager opens the dialogue for input of a new seismic spectrum. The dialogue consists of the following controls. The set of the control covered by the first table below can be used to define an arbitrary user-define spectrum.

The controls described in the second table below provide for the input of seismic spectrums for national codes.

General seismic spectrum

graphical window shows the frequency-acceleration diagram of the defined spectrum

table contains the values of frequencies and corresponding accelerations

name is used for identification of the spectrum

control buttons enable the user to confirm or abort the input values

National seismic spectrum

In addition to the controls described in the previous table, the definition of the seismic spectrums for a particular national code offers the following items (when the seismic spectrum is defined according to a particular national code, the table with the input values is disabled).

Type of drawing Frequency – the horizontal axis shows the frequency

Period - the horizontal axis shows time

Type of input Input – for this option, the input table is accessible and the user can input all the values manually

"Particular national standard" – for this option, the values are taken automatically from the selected national seismic code. The spectra are available for the following countries:

India

Czech Republic

Slovakia

Austria

France

Germany

Eurocode

Italy

Basic Reference Guide

390

Suisse

Max frequency This item limits the spectrum.

Step This item defines the "density" with which the spectrum is defined.

Code This button opens a separate dialogue that enables the user to specify other parameters contained in the currently selected national code.

The operation of the dialogue is quite straightforward and similar to other curve defining dialogues in Scia Engineer (e.g. see chapter Advanced input data > Initial deformations > Initial deformation curve).

Procedure to open Seismic Spectrum Manager

Prerequisites: Functionality Dynamics > Seismic must be selected in the Project Data dialogue.

1) Expand branch Libraries of the main tree menu.

2) Expand subbranch Loads.

3) Call function Seismic spectrum.

Load groups

Introduction to load groups Load groups define "how the individual load cases may be combined together" if inserted into a load case combination.

Load groups are important especially for the automatic generation of load case combinations. Thanks to the load groups, the user can easily specify which load cases MUST, MUST NOT, or CAN act together.

Load group manager The Load group manager is a standard Scia Engineer manager. It provides for basic operations with load groups:

creation of a new load group,

editing of existing load groups,

deletion of existing load groups,

printing the information about existing load groups,

saving and reading of existing load groups into and from an external file.

The Load group manager can be opened in one of the following ways:

using menu function Tree > Load cases, combinations > Load groups,

using tree menu function Load cases, combinations > Load groups.

Defining a new load group To define a new load group and set its parameters follow the procedures given below.

The procedure for the definition of a new load group

1. Open the Load group manager.

2. Click button [New].

3. A new load group is created.

4. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.

Loads

391

5. Input the required values for individual load group parameters.

6. Confirm with button [OK].

7. If required, repeat steps 2 to 6.

8. Close the Load group manager.

The parameters of a load group

The basic parameters of load group are:

Relation The relation tells what the relation of load cases in the particular load group is.

Load This parameters tell whether the load group is used for permanent or variable loads.

Relation

The relation may be:

Together All load cases of the same load group of this type are always inserted into every new load case combination if at least one of the load cases should be put in.

Exclusive Two load cases from the same load group of this type will never appear in the same combination.

Standard This option provides for user’s sorting purposes. It allows the user to sort load cases but it does not affect the process of generation of load case combinations.

Load

Each load group may be used either for permanent loads or for variable loads. Permanent and variable loads cannot appear in the same group.

Note: There may be some other parameters available in the editing dialogue. These parameters depend on the active code adjusted for the project and the explanation of their meaning goes beyond the scope of this general manual.

Using the load group The required load group can be assigned to a particular load case in the Load case manager.

The group is considered when combinations are generated from defined load cases. The rules described in chapter Defining a new load group are taken into account and ensure that inadequate load cases are not put into one combination and simultaneously that interlinked load cases are always acting together.

Load case combinations

Introduction to load case combinations Load cases defined in the project can be combined in load case combinations. The combinations can be then used for evaluation of results and for checking to national codes.

Combinations may be of various types. Each type is used for different checks. However, all the types can be used for an initial evaluation of results (i.e. reviewing of calculated internal forces).

Scia Engineer allows the user to use three different types of combination: linear, used, code-related. The linear combination as the simplest one is not important for the following reasoning.

But when either user or code-related combination is used, there are two critical points:

the user uses the combination as a "black box"

The user just trusts the program and cannot see nor evaluate what goes on "behind the scenes".

the user explodes the combination into all possible combinations

The user can see and evaluate all the linear combinations created from the selected set of load cases included into the combination. But the number of these combinations may be enormous and usually leaving the user confused and the final checking uncertain, notwithstanding the deteriorated speed of the program response.

The new solution is based on dynamically created list of "dangerous" combinations.

For example, in the example given later just 7 "dangerous" envelopes are created. This is a very sensible number in comparison with the total number of 164 possible linear combinations that may be created for the same example.

Basic Reference Guide

392

There are two approaches for the treatment of the "dangerous" combinations.

background use The combinations are created on the background and the user is not disturbed at all.

foreground use The user may decide to explode the defined combination and see the "dangerous" combinations.

Note 1: Regardless of the approach selected, the numerical results will be the same, as for both approaches the calculations are performed for the same combinations. Note 2: In addition, if there a special need arises, the user still has the choice to explode the defined combination into all the possible linear combinations that may be then evaluated one by one.

Advanced load case combinations

We use the term "advanced" combination for a combination that is designed for other than static linear combination. They treated separately in appropriate chapter of the book.

Note: A nonlinear combination MUST be defined if the user wants to perform nonlinear calculation. A stability combination MUST be defined if the user wants to run a buckling analysis. If such a combination (nonlinear or stability one) has not been input, the corresponding calculation is NOT even available in the Calculation dialogue.

Types of load case combinations Scia Engineer offers the following types of combinations:

Envelope - ultimate This combination defines a base for automatic generation of ultimate combinations.

Envelope - serviceability This combination defines a base for automatic generation of serviceability combinations.

Linear - ultimate This combination defines one particular user-specifies ultimate combination.

Linear - serviceability This combination defines one particular user-specifies serviceability combination.

Code dependent combinations

According to the active code set for the project the program may offer a set of other combinations based on the particular technical standard.

Envelope

An envelope contains all the load cases specified by the user and combined in all possible ways according to defined Action type, Load type and Load group of individual load cases inserted into the combination. Usually, more than one linear combination can be generated from the envelope.

IMPORTANT NOTE: This type of combination was called User combination in previous releases of Scia Engineer

What happens if this combination is exploded?

If a envelope is exploded to all possible, a set of linear combinations is generated.

Envelope ultimate

The user can enters the multiplication coefficients for individual load cases. The program generates several combinations for the inserted load cases if there are any variable load cases. All possible combinations of specified load cases are generated.

A small example will show the difference between Linear-ultimate (see below) and User-ultimate combination:

A project contains two load cases: LC1 - type permanent and LC2 - type variable.

The linear-ultimate combination with the contents LC1/ coefficient1 and LC2/ coefficient2 will give the following combination:

C1 : coefficient1 * LC1 + coefficient2 * LC2

The user-ultimate combination with contents LC1/ coefficient1 and LC2/ coefficient2 will give the following combinations :

C1 : coefficient1 * LC1 + coefficient2 * LC2

C2 : coefficient1 * LC1

(LC2 is a variable load: both situations (with this load and without this load) are considered by the program).

Ultimate combinations are used for a strength check (steel code check, reinforcement calculation).

Note: See also chapter Exploding the load case combination.

Envelope serviceability

This type of combination is similar to User-ultimate. Serviceability combinations are used for a serviceability check (deformation check).

Loads

393

Linear combination

A linear combination is a combination of load cases in which the user explicitly specifies which particular load cases should be included in a specific combination. The result is exactly what the user does, nothing less and nothing more.

Linear ultimate

The linear-ultimate combinations are the combinations known from other programs: the specified load cases are multiplied by the given coefficients and the total sum is then made. Nor additional combinations are generated.

Ultimate combinations are used for a strength check (steel code check, reinforcement calculation).

Linear serviceability

This type of combination is similar to Linear-ultimate. Serviceability combinations are used for a serviceability check (deformation check).

Code-related combination

A code-related combination is an extension of the envelope. Once again, all the load cases specified by the user are combined in all possible ways according to specified Action type, Load type, Load group of individual load cases and with respect to regulations of the particular technical standard (code).

Usually, more than one linear combination can be generated for the code-related combination.

What happens if this combination is exploded?

If a code-related combination is exploded, a set of envelopes is generated.

If a code-related combination is exploded into all possible combinations, a set of linear combinations is generated.

Load case combination manager The Load case combination manager provides for all the operations with combinations of load cases. This means that the defined combinations (of appropriate type) may also be exploded here.

There are two control buttons and a filter that both enable the user to manipulate with exploded combinations.

Control buttons

[Explode to envelope] This button is available if a code-related combination is selected in the list of defined combinations. As a result, a set of envelopes is generated and added to the Load case combinations manager.

[Explode to linear] This button is available if either a code-related or envelope is selected in the list of defined combinations. In any case, a set of linear combinations is generated and added to the Load case combinations manager.

Filter

The filter enables the user to view only those combinations in the Load case combinations manager that s/he is interested in at the particular moment.

Input combinations Only the input combinations are listed. Note: An exploded combination is also considered as an input combination. E.g. one Eurocode combination defined, filter set to Input.

Basic Reference Guide

394

Contents of combination Only the background combinations are shown. E.g. one Eurocode combination defined, filter set to Background.

Results This filter is useful for e.g. stages analysis. The manager filters the combinations for individual construction stages.

TDA combinations Only combinations for Time Dependent Calculation are displayed in the list of defined combinations.

ULS combinations Only Ultimate Limit State combinations are displayed in the list of defined combinations.

Loads

395

Defining a new combination A new load case combination can be defined in the Combinations manager.

The procedure for the definition of a new combination

1. Open the Combinations manager .

2. Click button [New].

3. The editing dialogue for the combination is opened.

4. Type the name and description of the combination.

5. Select the type of the combination.

6. In the list of load cases on the right hand side select the required load case that should be inserted into the combination. (It is possible to make a multiple selection if several load cases have the same coefficient).

7. Type the coefficient for this load case.

8. Press button [Add] to insert the load case into the combination with the given coefficient.

9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for all load cases that should be inserted into the combination.

10. If required, specify the nonlinear combination whose results should be added to the results of the linear combination that is just being defined (read chapter Non-linear combination used as a load case in a linear combination).

11. Confirm the definition with button [OK].

12. Repeat steps 2 to 10 for other combinations, if required.

13. Close the Combinations manager.

Exploding the load case combination

Combinations exploded automatically on background

On background, so-called background combinations are automatically created if a code-related combination or an envelope is input.

If a code-related combination is input, the background combinations are of user-combination type. If an envelope is input, the background combinations are of linear-combination type.

The background combinations are used for all the calculations, and the user can concentrate on the "principle" or "mother" combination only. Thus, s/he is saved from the need to deal manually and personally with all the possible load case combinations.

What’s more, when an output document is being printed (previewed) and a table of e.g. extremes is included in it, the program "knows" for which background combination the extreme value has been achieved and informs about it. The composition of the "extreme" linear combination is attached to the result table.

If required, the background combinations can be reviewed in the Load case combination manager.

The name of background combinations is derived from the name of the "principle" or "mother" combination. If e.g. the "mother" combination is named "UEC" then the background combinations are named "UEC.1", "UEC.2", "UEC.3", etc. (see the dot in the name and compare with the name of exploded combination below)

Combinations exploded manually by the user

Despite the fact that an input combination is automatically "exploded" on background, the user may explode any code-related or envelope manually.

If a code-related combination is exploded, a set of envelopes is generated. If a code-related combination is exploded into all possible combinations, a set of linear combinations is generated. If an envelope is exploded to all possible, a set of linear combinations is generated.

The user thus gets a full control over the load case combinations.

The exploded combinations are listed in the Load case combination manager.

In order to explode a combination, one of two control buttons must be used:

[Explode to envelope] This button is available if a code-related combination is selected in the list of defined combinations.

As a result, a set of envelopes is generated and added to the Load case combinations manager.

[Explode to linear] This button is available if either a code-related or envelope is selected in the list of defined combinations.

In any case, a set of linear combinations is generated and added to the Load case combinations manager.

The name of exploded combinations is derived from the name of the "principle" or "mother" combination. If e.g. the "mother" combination is named "UEC" then the background combinations are named "UEC1", "UEC2", "UEC3", etc. (notice that the number immediately follows the "mother" combination name and compare with the name of background combination above)

Basic Reference Guide

396

Note 1: Any envelope can be exploded to all possible combinations. This means that even a user-combination that was created from a code-related combination as a result of Explode operation can be further exploded. Note 2: If a code-related combination is exploded to all possible combinations, the number of created linear combinations may be very large. Consequently, it may be rather difficult to evaluate all the combinations properly. Therefore, this action is recommended for experienced user only.

Combination key Whenever a table of extremes (either local, beam or global) is given in the Document, it shows not only the value and place, but also the load case or combinations in which each particular extreme was achieved.

If the user is only using code-related combinations, the information that the extreme was achieved in this "huge" combination may be insufficient. As stated already several times, a code-related combination may combine several tens or even hundred linear combinations.

Therefore, Scia Engineer enables the user the option to attach a legend to result tables. This legend is called Combination key and it contains a list and composition of linear combinations (formed from the code-related combination) for which any of extreme values has been achieved.

Only the linear combinations that appear in the result table are stated in the Combination key.

Example

Example for Envelopes

Let’s assume a continuous beam of two spans. The beam is subject to load sorted into five load cases.

LC1 – permanent – self weight, distributed load in both spans

LC2 – variable – distributed load in the left span, load group G1

LC3 – variable – distributed load in the right span, load group G1

LC4 – variable – crane, concentrated force in the middle of the left span, load group G2

LC5 – variable – crane, concentrated force in the middle of the right span, load group G2

The variable load cases are divided into two groups:

G1 – imposed floor load, standard group

G2 – crane, exclusive group, only one of the load cases may be acting at the same time

The user defines the following envelopes:

LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 +1.3*LC4 + 1.3*LC5

The program will then generate (explode) the following linear combinations:

LC1

Loads

397

LC1 + 1.2*LC2

LC1 + 1.2*LC3

LC1 + 1.3*LC4

LC1 + 1.3*LC5

LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3

LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.3*LC4

LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.3*LC5

LC1 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC4

LC1 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC5

LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC4

LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC5

Example for Code-related combination

Let’s assume a continuous beam subject to several loads.

LC1 self weight

V1

V2

Basic Reference Guide

398

V3

V4

S1

S2

Let’s define a code-related combination to Eurocode. The combination definition contains all the defined load cases.

Name Type Load cases Coefficiens

UEC EC – ultimate LC1

V1

V2

V3

V4

S2

S2

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

Scia Engineer creates a set of "dangerous" combinations for the given definition:

UEC.1 User – ultimate LC1 1,35

UEC.2 User – ultimate LC1

V1

V2

V3

V4

1,35

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

UEC.3 User – ultimate LC1

V1

V2

V3

1,00

1,50

1,50

1,50

Loads

399

V4 1,50

UEC.4 User – ultimate LC1

S1

S2

1,35

1,50

1,50

UEC.5 User – ultimate LC1

S1

S2

1,00

1,50

1,50

UEC.6 User – ultimate LC1

V1

V2

V3

V4

S2

S2

1.35

1.35

1.35

1.35

1.35

1.35

1.35

UEC.7 User – ultimate LC1

V1

V2

V3

V4

S2

S2

1.00

1.35

1.35

1.35

1.35

1.35

1.35

When displayed in the Document, the Combinations table looks like:

Basic Reference Guide

400

Load case combinations according to EC Scia Engineer makes no distinction between primary and secondary variable load case. The algorithm takes one load case (in turn) as the primary one and all the others are considered secondary. The coefficients Psi0 are assigned accordingly. Doing this in turns, all the possible combinations are exploited. No combination should contain two variable load cases with the full coefficient 1.5 (one of them is always reduced by the corresponding Psi0).

It may happen, under some special circumstances, that this approach is not the most economical one (if the primary load is small (insignificant) and the secondary one is large - there is the difference if the coefficient Psi0=0.5 is applied to the large load or the small one). However, this is based on the assumption that the large load is usually taken as the primary one.

Let us consider the following load cases, groups and combinations.

Load cases:

Name Description Action type

Load group

Load type

Specification Direction Duration Master load case

LC1 self weight Permanent LG1 Self weight

-Z

LC2 live load (20 kNm)

Variable LG2 Static Standard Long None

LC3 snow load (10 kNm)

Variable LG3 Static Standard Long None

Load groups:

Loads

401

Name Load Relation Coeff 2

LG1 Permanent

LG2 Variable Standard Cat E: Storage

LG3 Variable Standard Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.

Combinations:

Name Description Type Load cases Coeff [1]

CO1 (1) EN - ULS Fundamental (STR)

LC1 - self weight 1.00

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

1.00

LC3 - snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

CO2 (7) EN - ULS Accidential - Psi 1

LC1 - self weight 1.00

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

1.00

LC3 - snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

CO3 (1) EN - ULS Accidential - Psi 2

LC1 - self weight 1.00

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

1.00

LC3 - snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

Let us use the following combinations setup:

Basic Reference Guide

402

We get the following envelope combinations:

C1.1 (118) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight 1.35

C1.2 (119) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.35

1.50

0.75

C1.3 (120) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

1.50

0.75

C1.4 (121) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.35

1.50

1.50

C1.5 (122) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

1.50

1.50

C2.1 (123) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight 1.00

C2.2 (124) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

0.90

0.00

C2.3 (125) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

0.80

0.20

C3.1 (126) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight 1.00

C3.2 (127) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

0.80

0.00

C3.3 (128) Envelope – ultimate

LC1 – self weight

LC2 - live load (20 kNm)

LC3 – snow load (10 kNm)

1.00

0.80

0.00

Let us review the already stated:

LC1 – permanent => LG 1

LC2-variable (live load (20kNm)) => LG2 (Cat E : Storage) => from setup: Psi 0 =1.0, Psi1=0.9, Psi2=0.8

LC3–variable (snow load (10kNm) ) => LG3 (Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.") => from setup: Psi 0 =0.5, Psi1=0.2, Psi2=0.0

Combination C01 (EN - ULS Fundamental(STR)) : LC1+LC2+LC3

We use Eq.6.10

Loads

403

It is not specified at the load case if it is the primary or secondary load case. Therefore, always one load case (group) in turn is taken as the primary one and the rest is considered secondary. This is repeated until all the load cases are used for the primary one.

We get the following combinations:

First of all, we get the combination with just the permanent load cases

C1.1 1.35 * LC1

Secondly, one variable load case is taken as primary one (1.5) and the rest as secondary (1.5 * Psi0) + the permanent load is either favourable (1.0) or unfavourable (1.35)

The combinations obtained are:

Permanent load case LC1 is unfavourable (1.35) and LC2 is the primary load.

C1.2 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + 1.5*Psi0*LC3 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + (1.5*0.5)*LC3 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + 0.75*LC3

(Psi0 = 0.5; LG3 is (Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.") )

Permanent load case LC1is favourable (1.00) and LC2 is the primary load.

C1.3 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + 1.5*Psi0*LC3 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + (1.5*0.5)*LC3 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + 0.75*LC3

(Psi0 = 0.5; LG3 is (Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.") )

Permanent load case LC1 is unfavourable (1.35) and LC3 is the primary load.

C1.4 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + 1.5*Psi0*LC2 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + (1.5*1.0)*LC2 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + 1.5*LC2

(Psi0 = 1.0; LG2 is Category E )

Permanent load case LC1 is favourable (1.00) and LC3 is the primary load.

C1.5 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + 1.5*Psi0 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + (1.5*1.0)*LC2 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + 1.5*LC2

(Psi0 = 1.0; LG2 is Category E )

Then we have combinations C2 and C3 that are created using these rules:

The choice between 1,l or 2,l is done by the user. Default is 1,l.

C02 - EN - ULS Accidental - Psi 1 : LC1+LC2+LC3

First of all, we get the combination with just the permanent load cases

C2.1 1.0 * LC1

Second, the combination rule applies Psi1 to one load case and Psi2 to the other one.

C2.2 1.0 * LC1 + Psi1*LC2 + Psi2*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.9*LC2 + 0.0*LC3

C2.3 1.0 * LC1 + Psi2(LG2) *LC2 + Psi1(LG3)*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.8*LC2 + 0.2*LC3

C03 - EN - ULS Accidental - Psi 2 : LC1+LC2+LC3

First of all, we get the combination with just the permanent load cases

C3.1 1.0 * LC1

Second, the combination rule applies Psi1 to one load case and Psi2 to the other one.

C3.2 1.0 * LC1 + Psi2*LC2 + Psi2*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.8*LC2 + 0.0*LC3

C3.3 1.0 * LC1 + Psi2(LG2) *LC2 + Psi2(LG3)*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.8*LC2 + 0.0*LC3

In addition, the combinations setup dialogue makes it possible to say that instead of Eq.6.10, formulas Eq.6.10a & Eq.6.10b should be used and the rule for the combination is:

Basic Reference Guide

404

The choice between Eq.6.10 and (Eq.6.10a & Eq.6.10.b) is done in the National Annex.

The default is Eq.6.10.

Load case combinations to ČSN The Czech standard introduces one conception that is different from other national codes implemented in Scia Engineer.

The Czech standard defines a coefficient for a load case. This coefficient (load factor) is applied when the load case is included into a combination. The coefficient is defined as one of load case parameters.

The coefficient can be defined in the Load case manager (see below).

Scia Engineer distinguishes between three types of load case combinations. It is important to know what happens to the load factor in each of the types. The following text is valid ONLY if Czech standard is adjusted as a current code of Scia Engineer. If another code is adjusted, the possible application of load factor is not accessible.

Linear combination

If a linear combination is being defined, a coefficient may be input manually for each of the load cases included into the combination. So far, this is true for any national code implemented in Scia Engineer.

For Czech standard however, the combination input dialogue offer an option to apply the load factor defined previously for a load case.

This gives an advantage especially if one load case is included into several combinations. There is no need to input a coefficient for each new combination. It is sufficient enough to input the load factor once for the load case and then simply apply it for each combination.

In order to apply the load factors to all load cases included into a combination, the user must only press button [Apply] in item Coefficient for CSN. The appropriate load factors are assigned to corresponding load cases.

Loads

405

Envelope combination

Here, the same can be said as for linear combination.

Code-related combination

If a code-related combination is defined, the option for application of load factors becomes inaccessible. The reason is that the algorithm for automatic generation of envelope and linear combinations from the input set of load cases uses load factors defined by the appropriate standard. They can be reviewed in Project setup dialogue on Combinations tab.

Note: The same applies to the current Slovak standard.

Load case combinations to NEN

NEN-ultimate

Basic Reference Guide

406

The simplified ultimate limit state combinations are implemented according to: NEN 6702 art. 6.3.4.1.

The coefficients can be edited in Project data , Combinations tab page service menu.

The following load types and coefficients are used.

Grep,i Permanent actions, e.g. self weight

Qrep,i Variable actions, e.g. imposed loads on floors, snow loads, wind loads

Gamma f;g Partial safety factors for permanent actions:

1.35 for unfavourable actions in permanent combinations (permanent actions only) (Gamma f;g - fund. combi 2)

1.2 for unfavourable actions in other combinations (Gamma f;g – fund. combi 1)

0.9 for favourable actions (Gamma G – favourable)

See the notice at the end of this topic for the use of the 1.35, 1.2 and 0.9 coefficients.

Gamma f;q Partial safety factor for variable actions : 1.2, 1.3 or 1.5 (Gamma fq)

Momentaanfactor

(Psi i)

This factor is entered for each group of variable load cases (NEN – mom. factor)

Default value : 0.5.

Service life

(Psi t)

Factor to take the service life into account (Service life). Formula gives factor 1 for a service life of 50 years.

According to NEN6720, art. 5.5.2.

Model factor If a ponding water iteration is done the structure stiffness is divided by this model factor.

Default value 1.0.

Use complex combinations formula for permanent loads

If switch ON, than each permanent load case is separately taken with the factor 1.2 and 0.9. Or with the factor 1.35 and 0.9 in combinations without variable loads. In the standard configuration of the program, the Gamma f;g coefficients for permanent load cases are taken 1.2 for all load cases (or 1.35 in combinations without variable loads) or 0.9 for all load cases.

The following combinations are generated :

The load coefficient set in Project settings, combinations tab page are default settings. The value for momentaan factor can be changed for each load group in the service menu Load cases Combinations > Load groups.

Loads

407

If it is chosen to generate code combinations like NEN-Ultimate, than the coefficient entered in the Combination dialogue is multiplied with the coefficient which is generated by the program.

NEN-serviceability

The following combinations are generated :

If it is chosen to generate code combinations like NEN-Ultimate, than the coefficient entered in the Combination dialogue is multiplied with the coefficient which is generated by the program.

NEN-special Ultimate

The design effects of actions for the fire situation are taken from the results of the analysis. It is recommended to use the special combination rules according to NEN6702 6.3.4.2., for calculating the internal forces used in the fire resistance check.

This special combination is given by

in which Arep represents the characteristic value of the special load (from e.g. fire exposure).

Advanced combinations of load cases

Non-linear combinations Non-linear combinations are similar to standard combinations and are used for non-linear calculations.

Note: A nonlinear combination MUST be defined if a nonlinear calculation is supposed to be carried out. Without a nonlinear combination defined, the program is NOT CAPABLE of running the nonlinear calculation of any kind.

The non-linear combination may be defined with a specific kind of initial imperfection in shape of the modelled structure. There are several ways to define the initial imperfection. In general, the imperfections are divided into two groups:

bow imperfection,

global imperfection.

Bow imperfection

None

No initial imperfection is imposed.

Simple curvature

f Curvature of one 1D member

1/f Radius of curvature

According to buckling data

The imperfection is derived from the buckling data. For standard sections the buckling curves are determined according to the appropriate national standard (e.g. for EC3 Table 5.5.3 is used ). For other sections, the buckling curves are taken from the user input made in cross-section definition.

Global imperfection

None

No initial imperfection is imposed.

Simple inclination

dx The inclination per one meter of height in the direction of global X-axis

dy The inclination per one meter of height in the direction of global Y-axis

Inclination functions

dx inclination function: Z The inclination in the direction of the global X-axis.

The inclination dependent on the Z-direction, i.e. on the height of the structure.

dx inclination function: Y The inclination in the direction of the global X-axis.

Basic Reference Guide

408

The inclination dependent on the Y-direction, i.e. on the length of the structure.

dy inclination function: Z The inclination in the direction of the global Y-axis.

The inclination dependent on the Z-direction, i.e. on the height of the structure.

dy inclination function: X The inclination in the direction of the global Y-axis.

The inclination dependent on the X-direction, i.e. on the length of the structure.

dz inclination function: X The inclination in the direction of the global Z-axis.

The inclination dependent on the X-direction, i.e. on the height of the structure.

dz inclination function: Y The inclination in the direction of the global Z-axis.

The inclination dependent on the Y-direction, i.e. on the length of the structure.

Note 1: The inclinations in both X- and Y-direction are evaluated as a sum of inclination components dependent on vertical and horizontal direction. I.e. the final inclination in X-axis is equal to the sum of (dx inclination function: Z) and (dx inclination function: Y), and the final inclination in Y-axis is equal to the sum of (dy inclination function: Z) and (dy inclination function: X).

Deformation from load case

Load case The results obtained for the specified load case are imposed as the initial imperfection for further calculations. It means that the results for the specified load case must be calculated first. Only then the further calculations may be performed.

Note: The results for the given load case must be already calculated. Otherwise the program issues a warning.

Stability combination Stability combinations are similar to standard combinations and are used for stability calculations.

Note: A stability calculation MUST be defined if a stability calculation is supposed to be carried out. Without a stability combination defined, the program is NOT CAPABLE of running the stability calculation of any kind.

Result classes

Introduction to result classes Result classes represent a very powerful and useful tool for the evaluation of results. They allow the user to define a set (a class) of results for selected load cases and load case combinations. The program then treats the class like an envelope of results.

Result class manager The Result class manager is a standard Scia Engineer manager. It provides for basic operations with result classes.

The Result class manager can be opened in one of the following ways:

using menu function Tree > Load cases, combinations > Result class,

using tree menu function Load cases, combinations > Result class.

Defining a new result class A new result class can be defined in the Result class manager.

The procedure for the definition of a new combination

1. Open the Result class manager .

2. Click button [New].

3. The editing dialogue for a new result class is opened.

4. Type the name and description of the result class.

5. In the list of available load cases and combinations on the right hand side select the required items that should be inserted into the result class (Multiple selections are supported).

Loads

409

6. Press button [Add] to insert the load case or combination into the result class.

7. Repeat steps 5 to 6 for all load cases and combinations that should be inserted into the result class.

8. Confirm the definition with button [OK].

9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 for other classes, if required.

10. Close the Result class manager.

The picture above shows the editing dialogue for a new result class.

Using the result class Result classes may be used to view the effect of certain "combinations" of load cases and load case combinations. They are offered in all dialogues for results review together with load classes and load class combinations.

Important notes relating to result classes

If no result class is defined manually by the user, the program generates three classes automatically:

- class containing all existing ULS combinations

- class containing all existing SLS combinations

- class containing all existing ULS and SLS combinations

Note: For EC-EN, combinations of the type EN-ULS (STR/GEO) Set C are NOT added into any of the three automatically generated classes. This specific combination type is added into a special Geotechnics class as explained further below.

These classes are generated when the Result tree is opened and any of the functions for display of results activated (e.g. Internal forces).

If some result classes are defined manually by the user before, no automatic classes are generated.

If the user creates a result class that contains ALL load case combinations of a certain type existing at the moment when the class is being created, the program assumes that it is the intention to have all the combinations of that type in the class in question. Therefore, if the user later creates a new combination of the same type, it is automatically added to the corresponding result class.

This rule applies to both manually and automatically created result classes.

Basic Reference Guide

410

This rule implies also the following behaviour of the program. Let us assume that the three automatic result classes were generated. Now, the user changes the type of one of the existing combinations (let us say) from SLS to ULS. The newly appearing ULS combination is automatically added to the result class with all the ULS combinations. However, the combination ALSO REMAINS in the result class with all the SLS combinations (this issue is handled at the moment and the behaviour of the program may change in one of the following versions in respect to this particular feature).

Also automatically generated is the result class GEO for geotechnics according to EC-EN. This result class is generated immediately after the calculation has been completed and requires that the Subsoil functionality be switched ON.

The GEO class contains all code combinations of the following types:

- EN-ULS (STR/GEO) Set B

- EN-ULS (STR/GEO) Set C

Load generators

Introduction to load generators Load generators represent a tool that may be used for simplified definition of load. They provide for the transformation of load from specified load area into a given planar section of the structure. It is also possible to use generators to determine wind or snow load per given vertical section of the structure. The generation of wind and snow load can be performed directly to a specific national technical standard or according to a user-defined snow weight of wind distribution along the height of the building. Arbitrary polygonal areas can be used to define the load area for recalculation of the load into a planar section.

Wind generator

Wind generator Wind generator enables the user to subject a structure to the effect of wind. It is possible to apply values and formulas given in a particular standard, or specify a user-defined curve of wind pressure along the height of a building.

The load calculated from the given wind definition is applied on the planar section of the structure. The section is defined by the current working plane. Thus, various sections may be subject to various generated loads.

Note 1: The wind load generator may be used to generate the load on a single planar section of the structure at a time. The section is defined by the current working plane. The working plane MUST be defined as vertical. Otherwise, the wind load generator cannot be applied. Note 2: The wind load generator can be used ONLY on an undivided building. If a structure consists of two or more separate and unconnected parts in the particular planar section, the load is generated on one of the parts only. Note 3: Only the part of the structure that is ABOVE the terrain level is considered in the load generation. The terrain level parameter may be thus used to exclude some part of the structure from being subject to the generated wind load. The terrain level is always defined in global co-ordinate system.

Types of wind load As stated earlier, there are two ways to define wind load in Scia Engineer.

The actual load may be calculated to a specific technical standard or it may be derived from a user-defined curve of wind pressure. The type of wind load can be adjusted in the Project Setup dialogue on tab Loads.

Code wind

If option Code is selected, the user may then specify additional parameters defined in the particular national standard. The sample pictures below show dialogues for the adjustment of code related parameters for EC and NEN standards.

Loads

411

User-defined wind curve

If option Library is adjusted, the user must define a height-pressure curve. The definition of the curve is made in a standard Scia Engineer dialogue for graph definition.

Basic Reference Guide

412

It is possible to define multiple wind curves. They are stored and can be easily revised, edited, deleted and selected in a standard Scia Engineer database manager.

Note: The type of wind load adjusted in this Project Setup dialogue is later used when function Load > Wind generator is applied.

Note: Read also chapter Program settings > Project settings > Basic project settings > Loads settings.

Using the wind generator

Step 0: Enabling the wind generation and selecting the type of wind load

In order to tell Scia Engineer that the load generator will be used, the user must say so on the Functionality tab of Project setup dialogue. Item Climatic load must be selected in the functionality list.

To select the wind type see chapter Types of wind load.

Step 1: Starting the function

The wind generator can be accessed via function Load > Wind generator.

Step 2: Defining the distance between adjacent frames

Loads

413

The wind load is generated for a single planar section of the structure. In order to calculate properly the load values, the program must know the "load width", i.e. the distance between adjacent frames. Therefore, on starting the function, the user is asked to define this dimension.

Step 3: Specifying the generator parameters

Once step 2 is done, a wind generator dialogue is opened on the screen. The user may control the generation of the load via a set of parameters of the generator. Their meaning and application is explained in chapter Adjusting the wind generator parameters.

Step 4: Generation of the load

On completion of the input of generator parameters and its confirmation, the adequate load is calculated and applied on the structure.

Adjusting the wind generator parameters The main dialogue of the wind generator enables the user to control the process of load generation. The meaning of individual parameters and control buttons is given in a brief table below.

The dialogue also displays the contour of the structure or its part (i.e. the planar section) that will be considered for the load generation. 1D members that will be subject to the generated load are drawn in thick line. The active 1D member is in red while the others are in green. The remaining 1D members of the structure, i.e. those that will not be subject to the generated wind load, are drawn in thin line.

If the wind load is to be generated to a specific code, it is possible that some of the loaded 1D members are divided into several intervals. The division is controlled by the regulations of the particular standard.

In addition, the user may decide to divide any of the existing intervals or 1D members into two parts. This division may be applied recursively, so any of the 1D members can be divided into as many intervals as necessary. And vice versa, any of the two adjacent intervals may be connected to create one interval and ultimately a single 1D member.

Hatches drawn at the thick-line, i.e. loaded, 1D members indicate the direction of the generated load. Hatches attached to a 1D member from outside of the structure contour mean that the load produces pressure. Hatches drawn on the inside of a 1D member indicate that the load produces suction.

Parameters

Direction This parameter tells the generator the direction from which the wind is blowing. It can be blowing from the left or right side of the building section. The selected direction is also indicated by

Basic Reference Guide

414

a hatched rectangle drawn at the left or right side of the structure.

Inside coefficients These coefficients define the effect of the wind inside the building.

None = there is none overpressure or underpressure inside the building

Overpressure = there is overpressure inside the building

Underpressure = there is underpressure inside the building

See Note at the end of the chapter.

Preference This parameter defines the preference, or priority, for places where the code allows for selection from multiple values:

Pressure = greater values of shape coefficients will be preferred

Suction = lower values of shape coefficients will be preferred

Frame distance The distance between two adjacent frames defined before opening the dialogue may be reviewed and/or edited here.

Terrain level Only the part of the structure that is ABOVE the terrain level is considered in the load generation. The terrain level parameter may be thus used to exclude some part of the structure from being subject to the generated wind load. The terrain level is always defined in global co-ordinate system.

Coefficients This group defines shape coefficients. A set of control buttons (see below) accompanies the input boxes.

Outside = adjusts the value of shape coefficient outside the building

Inside = adjusts the value of shape coefficient inside the building

Control buttons

Set coefficients The value of shape coefficients typed in the Outside and Inside input boxes, is assigned to the active interval or 1D member of the structure contour (i.e. to the 1D member drawn in red thick line).

Next The focus is shifted to the next interval or 1D member. The next interval or 1D member becomes active.

Previous The focus is shifted to the previous interval or 1D member. The previous interval or 1D member becomes active.

Divide The active interval or 1D member is divided in the given point. The point of division is defined in a dialogue that opens after the action is started.

Connect This function is applicable only if some 1D members have been already divided. The function does nothing, if undivided 1D members form the contour of the structure.

Two intervals are joined together. The rule is that the active interval is preserved including the coefficients and the next interval is linked to it.

Regenerate This button resets the program default values. It sets all the coefficients to their default values and deletes all possible intervals created by the user.

Print picture The current picture can be printed on an installed printer.

Change (terrain level) The level of terrain can be adjusted in these input boxes. It may be useful e.g. if the structure has not been defined in zero-level (measured in the global co-ordinate system) or if a part of the structure is protected by surrounding buildings.

The wind load is always generated only on 1D members that are ABOVE the defined terrain level. The terrain may be inclined which can be defined by different values for terrain level on the left and right side of the structure.

Note: Czech standard (CSN) does not take the Inside coefficient into account, even though it may be defined.

Loads

415

Example of wind generator application The application of wind generator will be demonstrated on a simple example. Let’s assume a regular frame as shown in the figure.

The frame will be subject to wind load whose intensity will be specified by means of a user-defined height-pressure curve. For simplicity and for good demonstration, the curve is defined so that:

the pressure is constant and equal to 1 kN/m2 over the first storey,

the pressure changes linearly to 2 kN/m2 over the second storey,

the pressure is constant and equal to 2 kN/m2 over the third storey,

Once the wind curve is input, the wind load generator may be started. Let’s set the frame distance to 3 metres.

Let’s accept the default parameters for the direction, inside coefficients and preference.

Basic Reference Guide

416

Then, let’s adjust shape coefficient on the first 1D member. Let’s set the outside coefficient to 1.0 and the inside coefficient to 0 (zero).

The coefficients on the second 1D member will be as shown in the figure.

Loads

417

And the coefficients on the last 1D member will be:

On closing the dialogue of the wind load generator, the defined load is displayed on the screen.

Basic Reference Guide

418

In order to review and, if necessary, modify any of the defined wind parameters, it is possible to apply the editing procedure. Let’s assume that the load along the second floor of the right hand side column should be reviewed.

So, let’s select the load.

The properties, including all parameters are displayed in the Property Window.

There are two coefficients in the Property Window named Coef1 and Coeff2. These represent the total value of the shape coefficient at the beginning and at the end, respectively, of the selected 1D member.

All the input data can also be clearly verified in a load table in either Preview window or Document window.

Loads

419

Note: The graphical representation of the wind load uses the following convention:

1. The graphical size of the load "diagram" takes account of both acting width, shape coefficient and wind pressure.

2. The numerical value at the load "diagram" may show the acting width or the final load value. The adjustment may be made using the Set view parameters function. See the Note in chapter Basic working tools > View parameters > Overview of view parameters > Labels and descriptions.

3. The value of the shape coefficient can be read in the property table once the required load is selected.

Snow generator

Snow generator Snow generator enables the user to subject a structure to the effect of snow. It is possible to apply values and formulas given in a particular standard, or specify a user-defined value of snow weight.

The load calculated from the given snow definition is applied on the planar section of the structure. The section is defined by the current working plane. Thus, various sections may be subject to various generated loads.

Note 1: The snow load generator may be used to generate the load on a single planar section of the structure at a time. The section is defined by the current working plane. The working plane MUST be defined as vertical. Otherwise, the snow load generator cannot be applied. Note 2: The snow load generator can be used ONLY on an undivided building. If a structure consists of two or more separate and unconnected parts in the particular planar section, the load is generated on one of the parts only.

Types of snow load As stated earlier, there are two ways to define snow load in Scia Engineer.

The actual load may be calculated to a specific technical standard or it may be derived from a user-defined snow weight. The type of snow load can be adjusted in the Project Setup dialogue on tab Load.

Code snow

If option Code is selected, the user may then specify additional parameters defined in the particular national standard. The sample picture below show dialogues for the adjustment of code related parameters for EC standard.

Basic Reference Guide

420

User-defined snow weight

If option Snow weight is adjusted, the user must define the snow weight typical for the region in consideration.

Note: The type of snow load adjusted in this Project Setup dialogue is later used when function Load > Snow generator is applied.

Using the snow generator

Step 0: Enabling the snow generation and selecting the type of snow load

In order to tell Scia Engineer that the snow generator will be used, the user must say so on the Functionality tab of Project setup dialogue. Item Climatic load must be selected in the functionality list.

To select the snow type see chapter Types of snow load.

Step 1: Starting the function

The snow generator can be accessed via function Load > Snow generator.

Step 2: Defining the distance between adjacent frames

The snow load is generated for a single planar section of the structure. In order to calculate properly the load values, the program must know the "snow width", i.e. the distance between adjacent frames. Therefore, on starting the function, the user is asked to define this dimension.

Step 3: Specifying the generator parameters

Once this step is done, a snow generator dialogue is opened on the screen. The user may control the generation of the snow load via a set of parameters of the generator. Their meaning and application is explained in chapter Adjusting the snow generator parameters.

Step 4: Generation of the load

On completion of the input of generator parameters and its confirmation, the adequate load is calculated and applied on the structure.

Adjusting the snow generator parameters The main dialogue of the snow generator enables the user to control the process of load generation. The meaning of individual parameters and control buttons is given in a brief table below.

Loads

421

The dialogue also displays the contour of the structure or its part (i.e. the planar section) that will be considered for the load generation. 1D members that will be subject to the generated load are drawn in thick line. The active 1D member is in red while the others are in green. The remaining 1D members of the structure, i.e. those that will not be subject to the generated snow load, are drawn in thin line.

If the snow load is to be generated to a specific code, it is possible that some of the loaded 1D members are divided into several intervals. The division is controlled by the regulations of the particular standard.

In addition, the user may decide to divide any of the existing intervals or 1D members into two parts. This division may be applied recursively, so any of the 1D members can be divided into as many intervals as necessary. And vice versa, any of the two adjacent intervals may be connected to create one interval and ultimately a single 1D member.

Hatches drawn at the thick-line, i.e. loaded, 1D members indicate the direction of the generated load. Hatches attached to a 1D member from outside of the structure contour mean that the load produces pressure.

Parameters

Load mode This item selects the mode of snow load.

Valley effect If the building is located in a valley, this button enables the user to take account of this fact.

Frame distance The distance between two adjacent frames defined before opening the dialogue may be reviewed and/or edited here.

Coefficients This group defines shape coefficients. A set of control buttons (see below) accompanies the input boxes.

Begin = adjusts the value of shape coefficient at the beginning of the interval

End = adjusts the value of shape coefficient at the end of the interval

Control buttons

Set coefficients The value of coefficients typed in the Begin and End input boxes, is assigned to the active interval or 1D member of the structure contour (i.e. to the 1D member drawn in red thick line).

Basic Reference Guide

422

Next The focus is shifted to the next interval or 1D member. The next interval or 1D member becomes active.

Previous The focus is shifted to the previous interval or 1D member. The previous interval or 1D member becomes active.

Divide The active interval or 1D member is divided in the given point. The point of division is defined in a dialogue that opens after the action is started.

Connect This function is applicable only if some 1D members have been already divided. The function does nothing, if undivided 1D members form the contour of the structure.

Two intervals are joined together. The rule is that the active interval is preserved including the coefficients and the next interval is linked to it.

Regenerate This button resets the program default values. It sets all the coefficients to their default values and deletes all possible intervals created by the user.

Print picture The current picture can be printed on an installed printer.

Snow weight to EC1 The individual parameters and their meaning are briefly described in the figure and table below.

For more information we refer to the appropriate articles of the code that are referenced in the enclosed explanatory text below the table.

sk characteristic value of snow load [kN/m2]

Ce exposure coefficient

Ct thermal coefficient

The snow load acting on the roof is determined from:

s = mii . Ce . Ct . sk

where:

mii shape coefficient

Ce exposure coefficient, usually equal to 1.0

Ct thermal coefficient, usually equal to 1.0

sk characteristic value of snow weight

The thermal coefficient can be lower than 1.0 in buildings where big thermal loses appear thought the roof. The exposure coefficient can express the effect of wind on reduction of snow layer size.

Combined wind and snow generator

Loads

423

Snow and wind generator In addition to separate wind and snow generators, Scia Engineer offers also a complex tool for the generation of wind and snow load on frame structures.

This complex generator does several tasks at once:

it creates a new load case for wind from the left hand side with overpressure and generates the appropriate load for it,

it creates a new load case for wind from the left hand side with under-pressure and generates the appropriate load for it,

it creates a new load case for wind from the right hand side with overpressure and generates the appropriate load for it,

it creates a new load case for wind from the right hand side with under-pressure and generates the appropriate load for it,

it creates a new load case for snow generates the snow load.

Procedure to use Snow and Wind generator

Open service Load

Start function Wind snow generator.

Define the input parameters (see below).

Confirm with [OK].

The load-generator wizard is opened on the screen.

If necessary, you may alter some of the parameters (for more see chapters dealing with standalone wind and snow generators).

Use button [Next] to go through all the screens of the wizard.

At the end the specified load cases are created and corresponding load generated in them.

Wind snow generator parameters

Frame distance Defines the distance between adjacent frames. Similarly to standalone wind or snow generator, you select one planar frame that will be subject to the generated load. Therefore, you must specify the distance to the neighbouring frames in order to define the loading width.

Wind

Load group The generated load cases for wind load will be inserted to the given group.

Load case name You may input the base of the load case name.

E.g. if you specify the base of the name "WND", the names of the generated load cases will be:

WND – LO,

WND – LU,

WND – RO,

WND – RU.

Also corresponding descriptions of load cases are automatically generated:

Wind from left – overpressure,

Wind from left – underpressure,

Wind from right – overpressure,

Wind from right – underpressure.

Overpressure If ON, the overpressure load case will be generated.

Underpressure If ON, the underpressure load case will be generated.

Snow

Basic Reference Guide

424

Load group The generated load case for snow load will be inserted to the given group.

Load case name You may input the name of the load case. Also a corresponding description of the load case is automatically generated.

International standards

For some national standards the parameters of the generator may be extended. E.g. for the French code, two more wind load cases (front wind – overpressure and front wind-underpressure) and one more snow load case (accidental) are generated in compliance with the provisions of the national standard. Also snow accumulation is taken into account for the French standard.

Plane load generator

Introduction to plane load generator A plane load generator is a tool that automatically transforms defined area load into line loads that acts on 1D members located in the specified plane.

This generator is useful for planar frames (that may be an independent structure or may form just a part of a complex 3D frame) that are subject to continuous area load. With this generator, the user no longer has to determine load widths and recalculate the known area load to line load.

More can be found in:

Principle of plane load generator

Defining a new plane load

Principle of plane load generator The usual procedure applied during the definition of a new area load is:

1. to specify the load size per square metre,

2. to define the loading area,

3. to let the program calculate line loads for affected 1D members.

If necessary, the input data may be edited any time later.

If the program is not said to calculate (or generate) the loads manually, the program does so automatically before starting a calculation.

There are some limitations that one should bear in mind:

The loading polygon (loading area) must be planar.

The 1D members that are supposed to bear the defined load must be located in the loading plane.

Parameters of plane load The parameters of this load type are:

Name Specifies the name of the load.

Direction Selects the direction of the load. The load may act along one of the co-ordinate axes only (i.e. in the X-direction, Y-direction, or Z-direction).

System The load may act either along an axis of the global-coordinate system or in the direction of a User co-ordinate axis.

q [kN/m2] Specifies the intensity (size) of the area load. This load will be then recalculated onto selected 1D members.

Loaded beams The area load, whose size is input in the field above, can act on all the 1D members located in the loading plane, or on only some of them (i.e. on the user-selected beams).

Defining a new plane load

The procedure to define a new plane load

1. If necessary, define a new load case for the new load.

2. Open service Load in the tree menu.

3. Start function Plane generator.

Loads

425

4. Fill in the parameters in the Plane geometry dialogue .

5. Confirm with [OK].

6. If necessary, move and/or rotate the working plane so that it defines the level and orientation of the loading plane.

7. Input the loading polygon.

8. Close the function:

a. either press [Esc] key,

b. or press button [End action] on the toolbar just above the command line ( ),

c. or invoke the window pop-up menu and select command End.

9. The Property window now shows the earlier confirmed parameters as well as a few Action buttons (see below).

13. If required, use the action buttons to finish the definition.

14. Close the function.

Action buttons in the Plane generator property window

Refresh This button starts the generator itself. If the generator is not started manually by the user in the phase of definition of a new plane load, the generation is performed automatically before calculation.

Note:

It is highly recommended to generate the loads on 1D members manually using this button. It gives the user an invaluable possibility to review WHAT exactly has been defined and generated and compare it with WHAT the user wanted.

Edit plane geometry This button enables the user to edit the geometry of the loading polygon.

See separate chapter Editing the loading polygon.

Update beams selection If parameter Loaded beams is adjusted to Selected, this button starts the operation of selection of required 1D members. The 1D members that should be subject to the input load must be selected. The operation of selection can be closed by the [Esc] key.

Inputting the loading polygon When function Plane generator is started, a new toolbar is added to the bar just above the command line.

Buttons of the toolbar has the following meaning (from the left).

New circle – centre, radius point

Once button [New circle] is pressed a short sub-toolbar is offered. This is the first of the functions on this sub-toolbar.

The user must define the centre point and a point on the circle that specifies the radius.

New circle – 3 points Once button [New circle] is pressed a short sub-toolbar is offered. This is the second of the functions on this sub-toolbar.

Basic Reference Guide

426

The user must input three points located on the circle.

New rectangle The user must define two opposite corners of a rectangle.

New polygon The user must define individual vertices of the polygon.

New straight line The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon will be a straight line.

New circular arc The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon will be a circular arc (the intermediate point and end point of the circular segment must be input).

New parabolic arc The following edge will be of a parabolic shape. Follow the procedure for the input of a parabolic beam.

New Bezier The following edge will be formed by a Bezier curve. Follow the procedure for the input of a "Bezier-curve" beam.

New spline The following edge will be formed by a spline. Follow the procedure for the input of a "spline" beam.

Select line This button is useful if a new polygon is supposed to follow the shape of a previously defined polygon. The user does not have to pick all the vertices of the new polygon, but may select existing edges of the already input polygon.

See the example below.

Step back This button goes one step back in the definition of the polygon.

For example:

If a polygon is being defined, the last vertex is removed. Or, if a circle is being defined by means of three points and two points have been defined so far, this function removes the second point of the circle but leaves the first circle point unaffected.

Example for Select line function

Let’s assume that a polygon has been input as shown below.

Another polygon is supposed to follow the circular part of the first polygon. The procedure may be:

1. Start function Plane load.

2. Input the first point to the right of vertex P4 of the defined polygon.

3. Input the second point directly in vertex P4.

4. Press button [Select line] on the toolbar.

5. Select edge P4-P5 of the first polygon.

6. Select edge P5-P7 of the first polygon.

7. Select edge P7-P6 of the first polygon.

8. Press button [New straight] line on the toolbar.

9. Input the remaining vertices of the new polygon.

Loads

427

Editing the polygon

Editing the loading polygon

The loading polygon can be edited any time after it has been defined. It is possible to modify both (i) the plane polygon parameters and (ii) the geometry of the polygon.

Concerning the geometry of the polygon, the user may do the following:

change the shape (moving the existing vertices of the polygon),

insert a new vertex,

remove the existing vertex,

insert a new opening into the existing polygon,

remove the existing opening from the existing polygon,

delete the polygon.

Note: After any modification of the polygon, button [Refresh] should be pressed to start re-generation of the load. If the user does not carry out the generation of the load manually, it will be performed automatically before the calculation of the project.

Changing the parameters

The procedure to edit polygon parameters

1. Select the polygon.

2. Its parameters are displayed in the Property window.

3. Change required parameters.

4. If necessary, use button [Refresh] to update the load (see the Note below).

5. Clear the selection.

Note: It is recommended to press button [Refresh] to start re-generation of the load. If this is not done manually now, it will be performed automatically before the calculation of the project.

Changing the geometry of the loading polygon

Any of the vertices of the polygon may be moved. There is only one limitation for the operation in that the vertex must remain in the plane of the polygon. The move of the vertex can be performed using the Drag&Drop functionality.

The procedure to move the vertex

1. Select the polygon

2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:

a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,

b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.

3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.

Basic Reference Guide

428

4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.

5. Use Drag&Drop functionality to move the required vertex to its new position.

6. Close the function.

7. If the working plane was moved to the plane of the polygon at the beginning of this function, it is moved back to its original location now.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Inserting a new vertex

The procedure to insert a new vertex

1. Select the polygon

2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:

a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,

b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.

3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.

4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.

5. Start function Insert vertex:

a. using the Action button in the Property window,

b. using the window pop-up menu.

6. Select edges where the new vertex or vertices will be inserted. It is possible to select several edges, not only one.

7. Press [Esc] key to finish the selection of edges.

8. The mouse cursor becomes bound to the selected edges.

9. Define the new vertices. Proper adjustment of SNAP function can help with this task.

10. Close the function of insertion.

11. Close the function of polygon editing.

12. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Removing the vertex

The procedure to remove the vertex

1. Select the polygon

2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:

a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,

b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.

3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.

4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.

5. Start function Delete vertex:

a. using the Action button in the Property window,

b. using the window pop-up menu.

6. Select vertex or vertices that will be removed. As soon as the vertex is picked, it is removed from the polygon.

7. Close the function of deleting.

8. Close the function of polygon editing.

9. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).

Inserting an opening

The procedure to insert a new opening

1. Select the polygon

2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:

Loads

429

a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,

b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.

3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.

4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.

5. Start function Insert opening:

a. using the Action button in the Property window,

b. using the window pop-up menu.

6. Define the new opening polygon. Proper adjustment of SNAP function can help with this task. The opening may overlap the original polygon.

7. Close the new opening.

8. Close the function of insertion.

9. Close the function of polygon editing.

10. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Deleting the opening

The procedure to insert a new vertex

1. Select the polygon

2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:

a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,

b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.

3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.

4. The vertices of the polygon and opening (or openings) are highlighted.

5. Start function Delete opening:

a. using the Action button in the Property window,

b. using the window pop-up menu.

6. Select the opening or openings to be deleted.

7. Close the function of deleting.

8. Close the function of polygon editing.

9. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).

Deleting the polygon

The procedure to delete the polygon

1. Select the polygon.

2. Delete the polygon:

a. use menu function Modify > Delete,

b. or use window pop-up menu function Delete,

c. or press key [Delete].

3. A message is displayed. Confirm with [OK] button.

Pond water

Introduction to pond load Ponding of rainwater is a phenomenon that occurs during a heavy rainfall on slender flat roofs. The water flows to the lowest point of the structure. Because the rainfall is excessively intensive, the drains cannot drain the water. Thus the water stays at the same place and the water level raises until the level of emergency drains is reached. Before that however the structure deforms. Due to the deformation more water flows to the lowest pond (= ponding of water also known as water accumulation) and the structure deformation increases, thus more water ... , thus larger deformation..., etc.

The described situation occurs mainly in the combination of flat roofs, roofs with slender roof structures, large area roofs.

Since the collapse of view roofs in 2002, the ponding of rainwater is a hot issue in the Netherlands.

Pond load - water accumulation

Basic Reference Guide

430

Parameters

Name Defines the name of the load. It may facilitate the identification of the load.

Loaded beams Informs about the loading conditions.

Direction Specifies the direction of the load.

Storage capacity Specifies the capacity of the roof.

Other reasons Specifies an additional height.

Division Specifies the division used for the calculation.

Max number of steps Defines maximum number of steps during the calculation.

Use other permanent load If ON, other permanent load may be included.

Status Tells the status of he calculation.

Detailed parameters -Points

No. Automatically generated vertex number.

X, Y Co-ordinates of vertex of loading polygon.

Height Type of definition of water height.

Input: The height is manually input.

Point: The height is calculated from the value at different point using the given slope.

Calculate: The height is calculated from defined slopes.

H Defines the water height.

Point Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the point from which the height is calculated.

Slope Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the slope from the selected point.

Detailed parameters -Drains

Point Number of point.

Location Location of the drain.

hdn depth of the emergency drain above the roof or roof edge, in m

A roof area (vertical projection at ground plane) that drains using a certain emergency drain, in m2

b width of the drain

Detailed parameters -Slopes

The user may define subregions where planar shape is assumed. Only three points may have the height defined. The remaining points are calculated. In case of any conflict, the area is not permitted.

Loads

431

Example

When defined in the model, the pond load may look like:

Defining a new pond load

The procedure for the definition of a new pond load

Basic Reference Guide

432

1. Open function Pond load – water accumulation via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

4. Input the area where water may accumulate.

5. Press Action button [Gener loads] in the Property Window. The generator dialogue opens on the screen.

6. Press button [Calculate] to generate the load on loaded 1D members.

Loads

433

7. Confirm with [OK].

8. Close the function.

Note: The loading area may be edited any time later. The procedure of the modification of loading areas is similar to the modification of loading polygon in plane load generator. Note: Pond load may be defined ONLY in a variable load case.

Theoretical background

References

NEN6702 – Loadings and deformations: 2001

Theory

NEN6702, Art. 8.7.1.1

Ponding of rainwater is a local effect. Therefore the load should be considered as a free load and thus a chessboard combination should be considered.

NEN6702, Art. 8.7.1.4

The deflections has to be calculated in the end-situation, i.e. total deflections minus pre-camber. The start-load for ponding of rainwater is determined as:

where

Pi;rep(x) The load in calculation step i in kN/m2

d(i-1)(x) The water depth caused by the deflection of the roof in iteration (i-1) at location (x) in m.

dhw(x) The water depth above the non-deformed roof area in m acc. to art. 8.7.1.5

NEN6702, Art. 8.7.1.5

dhw(x=0) = dnd+hnd

Basic Reference Guide

434

dhw(x) the numerical value of the water depth at the roof edge or emergency drain

dnd the numerical value of the water depth above the emergency drain in m

hnd the depth of the emergency drain above the roof or roof edge, in m

correction factor for reference period

A the roof area (vertical projection at ground plane) that drains using a certain emergency drain, in m2

b the width of the drain

The weight of water

Span loads

Introduction to spans It may happen that a 1D member extends over several spans. A continuous beam and a multi-span frame are good example of this.

The frame below has four spans that are 2 m, 4 m, 4 m, and 2 m long, respectively.

The second picture shows a continuous beam with five spans.

Loads

435

If the user designs such a type of structure, s/he may need to define a load that extends just over a single span (e.g. like in the enclosed picture).

Scia Engineer enables the user to do this easily. The only thing the user has to do is adjust a proper "extent" of the load. This parameter can be adjusted during the definition of a new load. The parameter may even be changed for already existing loads. The standard procedure described in ESA help chapter Modifying the existing load > Changing the load parameters may be used.

The application of "span loads" itself is straightforward and requires no special preliminary steps. It is even offered in the Standard user interface level.

What is the span

What is a span?

First of all, it is important to define what the term span exactly mean. In Scia Engineer terminology the span is one of the following:

if a 1D member is defined by means of a polyline, the span is the segment between two adjacent vertices,

if a linked node (or several of these) is defined on a 1D member, the span is either (i) the segment between two adjacent linked nodes, or (ii) between a linked node and the adjacent end-node of the 1D member,

any combination of the above mentioned options.

Note: A linked node does not have to be only in a real "connection" of two 1D members. It is possible to define a linked node anywhere along a 1D member and let it "unlinked" to any other member.

What is NOT a span?

In order to prevent misunderstanding, it may be also good to state what is NOT the span:

The span is NOT a segment between a node (either end node or linked node) and a crosslink.

The span is NOT a segment between two intersections of a 1D member with two other 1D members unless linked nodes have been defined in the intersections.

The span is NOT a segment between a node (either end node or linked node) and a support-on-beam. The span is neither a segment between two supports-on-beam.

The span is NOT a segment between two end nodes if several 1D members lie in one line and touch each other by their end points. In this case, each "segment" is a full 1D member. No spans appear on such a structure.

Types of spans

Span defined by means of polyline In order to have spans "prepared" by means of a polyline, the following procedure must be used for the definition of a new 1D member.

Procedure for the definition of spans by means of polyline

1. Start function Structure > Drawing a member.

2. Define parameters of the 1D member in the property dialogue.

Basic Reference Guide

436

3. Do NOT define the start point of the 1D member. Instead, click button [New polyline] ( ) on the toolbar located just above the command line.

4. Now define the start point.

5. Continue with intermediate vertices of the polygon.

6. Define the end point of the polygon, i.e. the end node of the 1D member.

7. Close the function.

8. Now, the defined 1D member consists of several segments. Each of the segments represents one span.

The following pictures demonstrate the described procedure and its application.

First, the polygon is defined.

Second, when function Drawing a member is closed, a 1D member is created (automatically) along the polygon.

Finally, span-loads may be defined on individual spans.

Span defined by means of linked nodes This approach is suitable if:

The spatial arrangement of the members of the structure is such that individual spans are defined by means of the connections of 1D members.

The demand for span-loads appears in later design phases and the 1D members have been already defined without the polyline approach taken into account.

The exact procedure will differ for each of the two mentioned situations.

Definition of spans according to spatial arrangement of 1D members

Procedure for the definition of spans according to spatial arrangement of 1D members

1. Select the 1D members that should be connected.

2. Call function Modify > Connect nodes to beams.

3. Linked nodes are created in contacts of 1D members.

Example

Let’s assume a simple 2D frame.

Loads

437

The top horizontal beam covering all the spans of the frame is not connected to the columns yet.

So, select the top horizontal beam and the inner columns. (Surface of beams is displayed in this picture for better clearness.)

Call function Modify > Connect nodes to beams. Or, if you prefer, use icon of the same name ( ) located on toolbar Geometrical manipulations. New linked nodes are created in the points of "touch" between the horizontal beam and the columns.

The detailed view shows the graphical symbol used for linked nodes.

Definition of spans on individual 1D members

Basic Reference Guide

438

The procedure here is very straightforward. The user defines manually new linked nodes in points where the end-of-span is supposed to be.

Procedure for the definition of spans on individual 1D members

1. Call function Node on beam:

a. Either through menu function Tree > Structure > Node on beam,

b. Or through tree menu function Structure > Node on beam.

2. Select the 1D member where the new linked node should be defined.

3. Define the position of the new linked node.

4. The linked node is created.

5. If required, repeat the whole procedure as many times as necessary.

Example

Let’s take a simple beam.

Let’s assume that the user want to "divide" the beam into three segments, i.e. have three spans on it. Adjust the SNAP function to the picture. Option Points on line-curve Nths should be set to 3.

Call function Node on beam, select the beam and define the point, i.e. the position of the new linked node.

Repeat the same for the second point.

Loads

439

The detailed view shows the graphical symbol used for linked nodes.

Work with spans

Defining a new span-load The general procedure for the definition of a new load that extends over a span instead of the whole 1D member is the same as for normal beam-load. The only difference is that parameter Extent must be adjusted to span.

The same principle applies for all types of load on 1D member:

point load on 1D member,

line force on 1D member,

thermal load on 1D member,

moment load on 1D member,

line moment load on 1D member,

point displacement on 1D member – relative translation,

point displacement on 1D member – relative rotation,

line displacement on 1D member – longitudinal strain,

line displacement on 1D member – flexural strain.

The procedure will be explained for line force load on beam only. Examples will be given for several load types.

The procedure for the definition of a span-load on a 1D member

1. Open function Line force on beam via tree menu function Loads or via menu function Tree > Loads.

2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.

3. Set parameter Extent to span.

4. Input the starting point and end point of the load position.

5. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

6. Select 1D members where the load should act.

7. Close the function.

Example

Let’s assume a continuous five span beam. Let’s assume that this beam is subject to three different loads:

line force load extending over the whole first span,

thermal load extending from the point in one fourth of the third span to the point in three fourths of the same span,

moment load acting in the middle of the last, i.e. fifth span.

The beam is shown in the picture below.

Basic Reference Guide

440

First, let’s define the line load over the first span. Call function Line force on beam and fill in the parameters according to the picture. REMEMBER to set the extent to span.

Confirm the settings and select the first span of the beam.

The load is inputted there.

Second, let’s add the thermal load. This load acts not along the whole span but only over its part. Call function Thermal load on beam. Fill in the table as shown below. Again, REMEMBER to set item extent to span.

Confirm the settings and select the third span of the beam. The load is inputted accordingly.

Loads

441

Finally, let’s input the moment load acting in the middle of the last span. Call function Moment > on beam and fill in the table as given below.

Confirm the settings and select the top right span of the beam. The moment is added to the beam.

At the end, the beam is subject the three prescribed loads.

Changing location of span-load Once a span-load is defined, it is stored as a normal load. This means that it can be manipulated the same way as any other load.

In order to move the span load, see chapter Loads > Modifying the existing load > Moving the load.

Modifying the span length If a span length is modified, the result of the operation may depend on the type of span-load definition. And sometimes, special measures must be taken to make the result correct.

The action of modification of span length depends on whether the load on it has been defined "relatively" or "absolutely". If the load has been defined in relative co-ordinates, everything is clear and the user does not have to think about it much.

On the other hand, if the span-load is defined in absolute co-ordinates, the user must pay attention to the operation.

If the span in question is made longer, no special measures need to be taken. The after-modification span is longer than the original one and the load can be put on the new span without any corrections.

Basic Reference Guide

442

If however, the "after-modification span" is shorter than the original, and especially, if the "after-modification span" is even shorter than the extent of the load, the load must be corrected in order to fit the "after-modification span".

We’ll explain the problem on a simple example.

Let’s have a three-span continuous beam subject to a uniformly distributed load over the top right span.

The length of the loaded span is 5 metres. Let’s move the span’s left node to shorten the span to 3 metres only. The load that is defined in absolute co-ordinates (i.e. it extents from ordinate 0,000 to ordinate 5,000) can’t fit onto the shortened span.

For several reasons, an automatic check and correction of this situation is not performed and the user must take the initiative. S/he must use function Calculation > Check structure data to correct any invalid data.

On opening the function a function-control dialogue is displayed. For our case, an attention should be paid to its bottom part called Check of additional data. This option must be ticked.

Pressing button [Check] starts the checking procedure. If any invalidities are discovered, the dialogue offers to continue and correct them. Before pressing button [Continue], make sure that option Correct position is selected.

At the end, the program informs about the number of corrections made to the project data.

Loads

443

It can be seen on the screen that the load has been corrected appropriately.

Note: If the user does not make the check of data personally, the situation is not so crucial as it may seem. Scia Engineer performs the check of data before each calculation. So, if the user forgets or does not bother to perform the check of data manually, the data are checked automatically and, if necessary, corrected before the calculation.

Copying the span-load to another 1D member Span-load can be copied to other 1D members. The procedure is identical to copying a standard load.

The procedure for copying of span-load

1. Select the span-load to be copied.

2. Call menu function Modify > Copy add data.

3. Select the target 1D member, i.e. the 1D member where the load should be copied to. It is possible to select several target 1D members at a time.

4. Close the function.

5. The load is copied.

Copying 1D members subject to span-load As with normal beam load, it is possible to copy the whole 1D member with defined span-loads to a new location including this span-load. Of course, any other defined properties like supports, hinges, etc. may be copied with the 1D member as well.

The procedure for copying a 1D member including its load

1. Select the 1D member and load that is to be copied. If you select other data like supports, they will be copied as well.

2. Start function Modify > Copy.

3. Define the displacement vector by means of Starting point and End point.

4. Close the function.

5. Selected entities are copied.

Predefined load

Introduction to predefined loads Predefined load represent a useful feature if the load that the analysed structure is subject to can be evaluated from the composition of e.g. floor, or other layered construction. The real load is then defined by:

selection of appropriate predefined load set and

specification of loading width or area.

Predefined load manager The Predefined load can be defined and edited in the Predefined load manager. This manager is one the Scia Engineer numerous database managers. Its operation and layout are analogous to other database managers.

In Predefined load manager the user may:

define a new predefined load,

edit an existing predefined load,

copy an existing predefined load,

delete an existing predefined load,

save the existing predefined load to an external file.

Basic Reference Guide

444

The Predefined load manager can be opened in two ways:

using tree menu function Libraries > Predefined loads,

using menu function Libraries > Predefined loads.

Defining a new predefined load

The procedure for the definition of a new predefined load

1. Open the Predefined load manager.

2. Click button [New] to insert a new predefined load.

3. A new predefined load is added to the list of defined predefined loads.

4. Select the new predefined load.

5. Press button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.

6. In the editing dialogue, input the parameters of individual layers.

7. Confirm with [OK].

8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 as many times as required.

9. Close the manager.

Note: If the manager is opened for the first time and no predefined load has been defined so far, step 2 to 5 may be automatically skipped.

Editing the predefined load The Predefined load is defined by means of individual layers that compose it.

The Predefined load may be defined in a simple operated dialogue.

The user just has to type the appropriate parameters for individual layers.

Name Identifies the particular layer.

Height Specifies the height of the particular layer.

Unit load Specifies the unit weight (density) of the particular layer.

Name of predefined load The whole set may be named as well in order to easily identified when

Loads

445

set used in the project.

The dialogue automatically calculates the total weight of one square metre of the predefined load.

The set can be then later used in the definition of line or point load together with specified loading width or area respectively.

Applying the predefined load

The procedure for the application of a predefined set

1. Follow the standard procedure for the definition of line or point load.

2. Parameter Type set to Predefined load.

3. A new item appears in the property table.

4. Use this item to select the required predefined load set.

5. Finish the standard procedure for the definition of line or point load.

Input and display conventions for predefined load When a predefined load is applied, the real load intensity is not defined explicitly by a single value. Instead, some other data are input and the final intensity is calculated from them.

This may initiate a discussion, which value should be displayed on the screen:

the input data?

the final – calculated intensity value?

Scia Engineer uses a compromise, allowing the user to select which value types should be displayed.

On-screen drawing

The adjustment may be made by means of appropriate View parameters. The tab Labels and descriptions contains groups Loads:

Display label Controls whether load labels will be shown or not.

Name Shows the name of the load.

Value Displays the load’s value. See Note below.

Total value Displays total value of load. See Note below.

Note: Items Value and Total value are significant for loads that are not defined directly by its force or moment impulse, but that were defined by means of a wind generator, load generator, or as a predefined load. For such loads, Scia Engineer can display two different types of data. First, the input value (e.g. width load) can be shown, i.e. the value. Second, the calculated load per meter of length can be displayed (i.e. the total value).

Property dialogue

The property dialogue gives enough space for additional information, and thus the input load width and calculated load intensity are shown – see value P.

Because the intensity is calculated from the input acting width, it is not editable.

Basic Reference Guide

446

Preview window

The preview window displays all the available information concerning the defined load.

The calculated load intensity is shown in column marked P. The input acting width is given in column marked W.

Calculation

It is obvious that the calculation uses the pre-calculated load intensity as the factually applied load.

Sign convention

However strange it may seem on the first view, the sign convention used for predefined load is based on the same logic as for other load types.

Positive load acts in the direction of the appropriate axis. Negative load acts against the direction of the appropriate axis.

What may seem strange is that the downward-oriented load (the weight of the predefined load "sandwich") must be defined as negative in order to really act "downwards". The strangeness is in the fact that acting width is input and it may seem unusual to specify a negative dimension. On the other hand, imagine a drawing showing loads of several types. With the convention applied, all the loads acting in the same direction will be of the same sign regardless of the type.

Mobile load

Introduction The module generates influence lines / areas for the load moving along a given track. You can alter the direction and intensity of the moving unit load. The result of the calculation are influence lines and load-systems can be positioned on them. Critical positions are then found for these systems. This is known as utilisation of influence lines. It is possible to automatically calculate the envelope of the most unfavourable effects. Various types of load-systems allow for wider calculation possibilities.

Currently, the evaluation of utilisation is not sufficiently accurate for 2D members and 2D load. The calculation is always simplified into a track and the effect of the width of the 2D load-system is not taken into account. The calculation is always performed along the track.

The whole process necessary for the calculation of influence lines and evaluation of their utilisation is divided into several steps.

Definition of the model of the analysed structure and input of at least one load case.

Definition of the track and unit load.

Calculation that automatically analyses the track and unit load moving along it.

Loads

447

Definition of load-systems, specification of rules for the generation of load cases and evaluation of utilisation.

The subsequent linear calculation generates the envelope load cases and processes the load cases created from the movement of load-systems.

Brief introduction to the theory

Influence lines Influence lines and mobile loads are used in the design of e.g. bridge structures where the effect of loads moving along the structure predominates. Once the calculation of influence lines has been performed, the linearity of the system allows for the evaluation of utilisation of influence lines with respect to the motion of an arbitrary load-system defined according to a particular technical standard or according to the judgment of the user.

The influence line represents the change of resultant or effect – of e.g. bending moment, shear force, etc. – in the particular point of a structure as a result of the move of unit load along the structure (following the given track).

It is important to say that the effect is evaluated in a fixed point. X-coordinate of individual influence lines represents the position of the unit load moving along the structure and the Y-coordinate of the same point corresponds to the effect caused by the unit load in the fixed point. The final aim is to find the position of the load-system which results in the maximal effect on the structure in the point.

The linearity of the system makes it possible to evaluate the motion of unit load along the structure and then calculate the utilisation of the mobile load-system consisting of several concentrated forces and distributed loads (e.g. a train on the rails) using the superposition of influence lines multiplied by the size of the load.

The influence lines and their utilisation are calculated for a fixed section. One can obtain an envelope of maximal effects and save other corresponding values. This envelope can be combined with a standard load (e.g. self-weight) and thus the overview of the overall behaviour of the structure can be obtained.

Application of mobile load The principle of the utilisation of influence lines is in the superposition of load cases in such a way that we get a mobile load-system consisting of various concentrated and distributed loads simulating e.g. a train.

The load-system used for the simulation of moving loads (e.g. trains, trucks on a motorway) can be divided into two types:

a simple load-system,

an advanced load-system.

The calculation of the response of influence lines on mobile loads requires a few parameters derived from the curve of an influence line. Each possible position of a load-system must be evaluated independently, so that the most critical position can be determined.

General facts A mobile load-system consists of one or several load groups. Distributed load and concentrated load impulses with a fixed distance from a reference point can be defined for each load group. The distance between the groups can be fixed or variable depending on whether railway or road mobile load is simulated. The aim is to position the load group in such a way that it results in the maximal effect on the structure (see the simple load-system and advanced load-system).

In practice, the program first calculates the influence lines for each result component.

6 internal forces (axial force, shear forces, bending moments and torque),

6 displacements and rotations,

6 reactions in supports.

Basic parameters, such as the change of sign separating the negative and positive part of the influence line, are determined for each influence line. The area below the curve is calculated for each part of the influence line. The load-system is positioned for the given section and effect on the influence line and is moved until the maximum is found. The found position is the extreme for one fixed section and one required component. It must be noted that sometimes it is necessary to consider the unloading in order to take into account the effect of load group placed on the negative part of the influence line (See Determining the maximal effect of concentrated forces, Determining the maximal effect of distributed load and Determining the maximal effect of the combination of distributed and concentrated loads).

Simple load system The simple load system is defined by the following load types and characteristics:

a group of concentrated loads defined by their size and positions that are related to the reference point,

a distributed mobile load that is distributed along various parts of the influence line, so that maximal effects were imposed,

Some national standards consider the application of load systems in the design of structures such as bridges or cranes.

Basic Reference Guide

448

Advanced load system An advanced load system is defined by means of the following parameters:

given number of load groups,

type of load group, e.g. loading block consisting of a given number of concentrated load impulses characterised by the fixed mutual distance, size and position related to the reference point,

percentage of unloading (in the program called percentage ordinates) that is used if a part of the group of concentrated load impulses is positioned on the negative part of the influence line in such a way that the effect of this part on the invoked maximum was changed,

for several load groups:

o for the system with more than two load groups, a constant distance between individual groups,

o for the system of two load groups, the maximal and minimal permissible distance (variable distance),

the value of distributed load,

the value of distributed load between two positive parts of the influence line (similar effect as the percentage of unloading – described above)

in case of one load group it is possible to change the size of the distributed load around the concentrated load impulse between two specified coordinates: the beginning and end of the change of the distributed load.

The coordinates of concentrated loads that define the position of the load group are defined from a reference point.

Determining the maximal effect of distributed load The definition says that in order to obtain the maximal effect of the load from the influence line in a fixed section, the ordinate of the influence line in the x-coordinate is multiplied by the size of the load. According to this definition, the effect of the distributed load means the calculation of the area under the influence line between every change of sign, and its multiplication by the load size. If the influence line is defined by several positive and negative parts, the area is calculated for each part considering the sign. The overall effect is the sum of all loaded parts. The maximal effect is caused by a distributed load positioned on the positive part of the influence line. The load is therefore divided between each of the parts according to the following picture.

Loads

449

Qm,pos&neg – mobile load in the positive or negative part

Qb,pos&neg – distributed load between load groups (interrupted)

Each line below the influence line shows the possible division of the load system. E.g. the first line represents the distributed load Qm,pos positioned only on the first positive part. The third line is the represents the distributed load Qm,pos divided between the first and second positive part and the unloading of the distributed load Qb,neg that causes an important reduction of the overall effect in the summation of loaded parts. It can be seen from the picture that the maximal effect is reached if the load is positioned only on positive or only on negative parts of the influence line. Each of them results in an extreme. The critical position is therefore determined separately for the positive and negative part.

Determining the maximal effect of concentrated forces The definition says that in order to obtain the maximal effect of the load from the influence line in a fixed section, the ordinate of the influence line in the x-coordinate is multiplied by the size of the load. In case of simultaneous action of several loads, e.g. in a load group, the effect is obtained as a sum of each ordinate value multiplied by the corresponding load size. The extreme can be both positive and negative. The positioning of each load group depends on the number of load groups.

One load group

In order to determine the position leading to the maximal effect of a group of concentrated forces, each force from the given group is positioned into every intermediate point. It means that in some positions, a part of the load group may be outside of the border of the structure.

Basic Reference Guide

450

Two load groups

For this configuration, the distance between the groups can be variable. In order to find out the critical position, the minimal and maximal distance of load groups must be specified.

More than 2 load groups

For this configuration the distance between load groups is constant. The procedure applied is similar to one load group. Note: The critical position can be formed by a group when some loads are placed outside of the structure. For the combination of asymmetrical loads, the program allows for motion of the mobile loads in two opposite directions, so that the effect of the asymmetry can be taken into account.

Determining the maximal effect of the combination of distributed and concentrated loads The maximal effect of the combination of distributed load and concentrated load impulses is determined from the maximal effect of the distributed load and from the maximal effect of the group of concentrated load impulses.

Parameters used to determine the maximal effect The following list describes all the parameters used for the calculation of the utilisation of influence line. Also stated are the values prescribed in some national technical standards.

Reference point

The reference point of a load group for the determination of the position of a concentrated load impulse and for the reduction of a distributed load.

Limited length of the motion (Limited run-length)

The limitation of the track in case that it is necessary to avoid the positioning of a part of a load group outside of the track (outside of the structure).

Sign change

The position where the sign of the influence line changes (from positive to negative or vice versa).

Area of a region

The interval of an influence line where all the ordinate values are positive or negative.

Impact coefficient

The VOSB standard prescribes that each internal force and reaction for the position of a mobile load is multiplied by this coefficient. The results of influence lines for deformations are not multiplied.

The same convention is applied for the dynamic coefficient in CSN 736203 and ENV 1991-3.

Mobile factor

The mobile factor is used for double and single mobile tracks or if only the main 1D member of the structure is taken into account. This coefficient is used to multiply all the results. There is no similar factor in CSN 736203, it is possible to use the value of 1.0.

Ordinate percentage

The coefficient for the reduction of the effect of a concentrated load impulse positioned on a negative part of the influence line, so that the reduction of the determined maximum is prevented. If the zero (0) value is input, the concentrated load impulses in the negative part are neglected completely. On the other hand, 100% means that the loads on the negative part are not reduced at all.

Loading track

Defining a new track

Procedure to define a new track

1. Open the branch of the main tree menu Mobile loads.

2. Start function New mobile load track.

3. Adjust its parameters in the property window.

4. Define the track.

5. End the function.

Mobile load track parameters

Name Specifies the name of the system.

Use for calculation If ON, the track is used for the calculation. Otherwise, it is neglected.

Used nodes (informative)

Loads

451

Tells the number of track nodes (vertices).

Track nodes Contains a list of all track nodes. Each end node of each track interval can be used to assign the slabs that are to be exposed to the effect of the train load.

Assigning a track to slabs in the model

In order to explain this action, let us imagine a multi story storehouse with a track defined in the top floor. In general, a mobile load may appear in every floor or only in some floors. You then need to specify in which floor the mobile load operates.

In this operation you do not work with the track as a whole, but you need to assign the slabs to every interval of the track polygon (naturally, if the track has been defined as a single line or arc, there is just one interval to be assigned).

The procedure to assign a track to a slab

1. Select the track.

2. The property window displays a list of nodes (vertices) of the track.

3. Select the end node of the required track interval. (The end node of the interval is decisive in this operation).

4. Click the three dot button [...] corresponding to that node.

5. A small dialogue opens on the screen.

6. The left-hand side of the dialogue offers a list of existing slabs. The right-hand side of the dialogue contains a list of assigned slabs.

7. Select the required slabs in the left-hand side and move them to the right-hand side using the buttons between the two lists. NOTE: If the right-hand side list is empty, it means that the train load acts on ALL slabs.

8. Close the selection dialogue.

Editing the existing track

Procedure to edit the existing track

1. Select the required track (if the track is not displayed, use view parameters to make it visible).

2. You may change the parameters in the property window.

Deleting the existing track

Procedure to delete the existing track

1. Select the required track (if the track is not displayed, use view parameters to make it visible).

2. Press key [Del] or use pop-up menu function Delete or call menu function Modify > Delete to remove the track.

Unit loads

Unit loads Unit loads have meaning only for 3D structures where a motion of a loading vehicle acting in several tracks parallel with the axis of the mobile track can be modelled. For 2D structures, one unit load represented by a force Pz = -1.0 is predefined.

It is possible to set several unit loads for each track. Each impulse consists of unit loads and can be adjusted in away so that it represents a multi-track truck. The unit load can act in the direction of individual axes of the global coordinate system. It is for example possible to model a bridge by a small 2D system, but such a solution makes it impossible to define a system of wheel-pairs (one next to another) of trucks or trains in a way described in national standards.

It is possible to define a unit load that on a 3D structure acts in several tracks parallel to the defined mobile load track (unit load along the width of a bridge). Certain standards use also a distributed load to model the surface contact of wheels with the structure.

Unit loads manager The Unit loads manager is a standard Scia Engineer database manager. It is operated in the usual way.

Parts of the Unit loads manager are:

List of defined unit loads.

Graphical window with a picture of the selected unit load.

Preview window with the parameters of the unit load that is currently selected in the list.

Basic Reference Guide

452

Control buttons – standard control buttons of the Scia Engineer database manager.

Procedure to open the Unit loads manager

1. Open service Mobile loads.

2. Call function Unit loads.

3. The manager is opened on the screen.

Defining a new unit load

Procedure to define a new unit load

1. Open the Unit loads manager.

2. Press button [New] to create a new load.

3. Specify its parameters – see below.

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. Close the manager.

Parameters of unit loads

Name Name of the impulse.

Track assignment The track that is associated with the unit load.

Sections This parameter specifies the density of sections and thus also the number of generated load cases for 1D members.

Use sections from results

The unit load is positioned into every section of a 1D member located on the mobile track.

Use step according to 2D element

The unit load is positioned with the step equal to the value specified in the input box Step for 2D element. If the structure contains 1D members that are shorter than this step, these 1D members may not be subjected to the unit load at all.

Generate at least one section on member

The unit load is positioned with the step equal to the value specified in the input box Step for 2D element. However, the unit load is positioned also on the 1D members that are shorter than this step.

Step for 2D element The size of the step for 2D elements. This parameter specifies the density of evaluation points and thus also the number of generated load cases for planar members. The overall length of the track is divided by this parameter and this quotient defines the number of intermediate points where the mobile unit load impulse is positioned.

A shorter step means more accurate results but longer time of calculation.

Generate section under Load system

If ON, the section is generated under the defined load-system.

Add new impulse Adds a new unit impulse.

Impulse parameters

Type The load impulse may be: concentrated or uniform (i.e. distributed).

Value The size of the impulse.

Default value = 1.0.

Position Position on the mobile track.

ey Eccentricity of the impulse.

ez Eccentricity of the impulse.

System Defines the coordinate system in which the impulse is defined.

Direction Direction of the impulse.

Loads

453

Load systems

Load systems A mobile load system is composed of one or more load groups. For each group, a distributed load and several concentrated load impulses can be defined. The distance between individual load impulses is fixed and is defined relatively from a reference point. The distance between individual groups can be fixed or can vary to simulate the real situation on a railway or highway bridge. The final purpose is to position the load systems into such a position so that the produced effect on the structure is extreme.

The program first determines the influence lines for each effect, result or reaction for each section of a structure element. Those influence lines, defined by an ordinate for a load position in regard with a fixed section, are evaluated for all internal forces, reactions and deformations. For each influence line, the process determines preponderant parameters like the position of the sign switching, that defines the positive, and the negative part of the influence. For each field, the area under its curve is determined. The load system is now placed (for a given section and a given effect) on the influence lines and is positioned until the extreme is found.

Mobile load systems manager Mobile load systems manager is a standard Scia Engineer database manager. It is operated in the usual way.

Parts of the Mobile load systems manager are:

List of defined load systems

Preview window with the parameters of the load system that is currently selected in the list.

Graphical preview window showing the load system that is currently selected in the list.

Control buttons – standard control buttons of the Scia Engineer database manager.

Simple load system A simple load system is composed of one distributed load and one or more concentrated forces with fixed distance between each other.

This load system is defined by means of the following parameters:

Name Specifies the name of the system.

100% ordinates of concentrated load(s)

If this option is ON, the whole concentrated load above the negative part of influence line is considered in the calculation. Full load-release due to concentrated forces happens.

Distributed load The size of the distributed load is input here.

Concentrated load A set of concentrated loads can be entered in this table. The first column of the table contains the size of the forces.

Offset This column defines the offset of the particular force from the reference point – see the example below.

Note: Right click on the line number (in the table) opens a short pop-up menu that enables you to (i) insert a new line into the table, (ii) delete the selected line from the table, or (iii) just clear the contents of the selected line of the table. Note: If required the whole table can be deleted (cleared) through the button [Del All] located below the table.

Example

The following couple of pictures demonstrate the definition of a set of concentrated forces and their position.

Basic Reference Guide

454

Advanced load system An advanced load system may consist exclusively of distributed loads or it may be formed by a combination of distributed loads and concentrated forces.

Name Specifies the name of the system.

Percentage ordinates This field defines the percentage of influence line ordinate that will be used for concentrated loads positioned above the negative part of the influence line.

Zero value means that the whole concentrated load is ignored in the calculation of the sum of response.

100% means that the whole load is taken into account with the negative sign.

Distributed load

There is a separate tab sheet for the definition of an advanced load system consisting exclusively of distributed load.

Distributed load The size of the distributed load is input here.

Block load In the field you can input the value of the block load. The purpose of the block is to have an easy way to define a group composed of such a big amount of concentrated loads that it can be consider a distributed load. During the calculation, the block load is divided in 15 concentrated forces internally with the corresponding decrease at the extremities.

Length of block load The length of the load block that will be divided into 15 concentrated forces.

Concentrated load

Another tab sheet provides for the input of a load system that is formed by a combination of distributed loads and concentrated forces.

Distributed load The size of the distributed load is input here.

Concentrated load A set of concentrated loads can be entered in this table. The first column of the table contains the size of the forces.

Offset This column defines the offset of the particular force from the reference point – see the example below.

Number of groups This value defines the number of groups of concentrated forces in the load system. This parameter controls additional input parameters.

Loads

455

Note: Right click on the line number (in the table) opens a short pop-up menu that enables you to (i) insert a new line into the table, (ii) delete the selected line from the table, or (iii) just clear the contents of the selected line of the table. Note: If required the whole table can be deleted (cleared) through the button [Del All] located below the table.

Additional input parameters for one (1) group of concentrated forces

Interrupt distributed load on spot of concentrated load group

If this option is ON, it is possible to input lower value of the distributed load in the place where concentrated forces are located.

Interrupted load The size of the distributed load in the place where concentrated forces are located..

Begin interruption Beginning of the interval with reduced distributed load. The position is defined as a distance from the reference point.

End interruption End of the interval with reduced distributed load. The position is defined as a distance from the reference point.

Additional input parameters for two (2) groups of concentrated forces

A load system with two groups of loads is characterised by a variable distance between the load groups. The system finds the critical distance that gives the maximal effect.

Minimum distance between the load groups

Minimal allowable distance of load groups.

Maximum distance between the load groups

Maximal allowable distance of load groups.

Mobile load distributed between the load groups

The meaning of this parameter is similar to the Percentage ordinates applied to concentrated forces.

In a simple load system consisting of one load group the distributed load is divided into the positive and negative part of the influence line in such a way that maximal effect is produced. In case of advanced load system it is possible to input a reduced distributed load between every positive or negative span, which reduces the value of found maximum.

Additional input parameters for three (3) groups of concentrated forces

A load system with tree groups of loads is characterised by a fixed distance between individual load groups.

Distance between the load groups

The value defining the distance between adjacent groups of load in the load system.

Mobile load distributed between the load groups

The meaning of this parameter is similar to the Percentage ordinates applied to concentrated forces.

In a simple load system consisting of one load group the distributed load is divided into the positive and negative part of the influence line in such a way that maximal effect is produced. In case of advanced load system it is possible to input a reduced distributed load between every positive or negative span, which reduces the value of found maximum.

Defining a new load system

Procedure to define a new load system

1. Open the Mobile load systems manager using tree menu function Mobile loads > Load system database.

2. Press button [New] to open the input dialogue.

3. Select either Simple load system or Advanced load system.

4. Input the parameters.

5. Confirm with [OK].

6. Repeat as many times as required.

7. Close the Mobile load systems manager.

Generated load cases

Theory

Basic Reference Guide

456

During the evaluation the influence lines of individual points of the track are evaluated for the result components (e.g. My). The evaluation is carried out and the critical position of the load is determined. This position causes maximal value of My in the section. The value is stored together with the corresponding values of other components and another the evaluation continues with the next section.

Once the calculation is performed for each intermediate section, the envelope can be created. The system then can create envelopes for other result components (e.g. Vy, Vz, etc.). It is important to bear in mind that the envelope is not represented as an existing load case. It is a fictitious load case that generates the found extremes. Therefore, it is of no meaning to use this envelope for e.g. the design of steel members.

Manager for generated load cases The Manager for generated load cases is a standard Scia Engineer database manager. It is operated in the usual way.

Parts of the Manager for generated load cases are:

List of specified definitions.

Preview window with the parameters of the definition that is currently selected in the list.

Control buttons – standard control buttons of the Scia Engineer database manager.

Procedure to open the Manager for generated load cases

1. Open service Mobile loads.

2. Call function Setup generated load cases.

3. The manager is opened on the screen.

Specifying a new definition for generation of load cases The calculation of utilisation using the envelopes is performed for the definitions of calculation of utilisation. Each definition consists of a unit load and a load-system that moves along the influence lines from the corresponding unit load. Several unit loads and several load-systems can be included into the definition. If so, each of the included load-systems moves along all the unit loads.

Parameters of the definition

Name Specifies the name of the system.

Use for calculation If ON, the track is used for the calculation. Otherwise, it is neglected.

Select unit load Selects the required unit loads.

Select load-system Selects the required load-systems.

Limited running length

The evaluation process tries to find the most critical position of the mobile load on the structure. Sometimes the extreme can be reached if the mobile load stays partly outside of the structure. This group of parameters enables you to specify the part (interval) of the track where the mobile load can travel. This limitation can e.g. prevent the load-system from leaving partly the structure.

The limitation of the track length is done in such a way that the values of influence lines outside of the specified interval are considered as zero.

The starting point corresponds to the position of the most left concentrated load impulse in the load-system. Similarly, the end point corresponds to the position of the most right in the group. The distributed load is divided between the corresponding positive and negative spans of the influence line.

Enable If ON, the limited length of the track can be specified.

Start The beginning of the allowed "mobile" length.

Finish The end of the allowed "mobile" length.

Additional

Multiplication factor for results except deformation

The VOSB standard prescribes that each internal force and reaction for the position of a mobile load is multiplied by this coefficient. The results of influence lines for deformations are not multiplied.

The same convention is applied for the dynamic coefficient in CSN 736203 and ENV 1991-3.

See chapter Parameters used to determine the maximal effect for related information.

Loads

457

Mobile factor The mobile factor is used for double and single mobile tracks or if only the main 1D member of the structure is taken into account. This coefficient is used to multiply all the results.

There is no similar factor in CSN 736203, it is possible to use the value of 1.0.

See chapter Parameters used to determine the maximal effect for related information.

Selection of members

All members If ON, all members are taken into account.

If OFF, manual selection of members must be made.

Selection Available only if the above option is OFF.

Opens a dialogue for manual selection of required members.

Components

Select components Opens a dialogue for manual selection of required components.

List of available components The required components can also be selected directly in the main dialogue.

Calculation and evaluation

Calculation and evaluation procedure Several steps must be made in order to perform the calculation and design of a structure where standard loads (wind, snow, etc.) are combined with mobile load.

Step 1: The definition of a structure + self-weight

Input the structure and at least one load case of self-weight type.

Step 3: The definition of a mobile load

Define one or more tracks in the project.

Step 3: The generation of influence lines

Run the linear calculation.

Step 4: The display of the influence lines in specified sections

The influence lines created by a move of a unit load along the structure are stored for each internal force, reaction and deformation component in each fixed section of the structure. The influence lines can be viewed in the tree menu Mobile loads > Influence lines.

Step 5: The definition of a load system representing the mobile load

Define a simple or advanced load system that represents the intended mobile load. Use the tree menu function Mobile loads > Load system database.

Step 6: The determination of the critical position of the mobile load, i.e. the position where the maximal effect is reached

As soon as the mobile load is defined, the calculation of the utilisation of influence lines can be performed. Use the required function from the branch of the tree menu Mobile loads > Detail analysis to review the results.

Step 7: The combination with standard load cases

Once the calculation of influence lines has been performed, it is possible to combine the results of influence lines with the results of standard load cases acting on the structure. Create load case combinations consisting of generated "mobile" load case(s) and standard load case(s). Use service Results to view the result values.

Note: The list of load cases (in the Load case manager, in the dialogue for the definition of a load case combination and also in the available load cases for the display of results) contains the load cases that have been automatically generated and added during the evaluation of influence lines. You must bear in mind that these envelopes only represent the found extremes and not the positioned load system. These loading envelopes can only be considered as a result of action of a virtual loading (load whose effect is the envelope). Therefore, it is unsuitable to use these envelopes for the design and checking of steel members in the structure.

Calculating the influence lines Before the calculation of influence lines can be performed, the following step must be completed:

Basic Reference Guide

458

the project must be created and also at least the self-weigh load case must be defined,

at least one mobile load track must be defined,

unit load representing the loading impulse moving along the track must be defined.

Run normal linear calculation. When it is done the service Mobile loads offers the calculated influence lines.

The evaluation is described in chapter Reviewing the calculated influence lines.

Further information can be found in chapter Calculation and evaluation procedure .

Reviewing the calculated influence lines Once the influence lines have been calculated, it is possible to view and analyse them.

Procedure to review the calculated influence lines

1. Perform the calculation following the instructions from chapter Calculating the influence lines.

2. Open service Mobile loads.

3. In the branch Influence line select the required result quantity: (i) deformation on members, (ii) internal forces on members, (iii) deformation of nodes, (iv) supports, (v) member stresses.

4. In the property window select the unit load for which the results should be analysed.

5. Either use action button [Single check] to view the results for a single member – see below for details.

6. Or use action button [Preview] to view the results for selected members in the tabular form in the Preview window – see below for details.

Single check – reviewing the influence lines for a single member

This function opens a specialised dialogue for the display of all available influence lines from the selected group ((i) deformation on members, (ii) internal forces on members, (iii) deformation of nodes, (iv) supports, (v) member stresses).

The dialogue consists of a graphical window and a few controls.

Graphical window

It displays the selected influence line in the defined scale. Basic zoom functions are accessible via the pop-up menu. The left-mouse button can be pressed and hold the mouse can be moved to define a window for zoom-window function.

It is important to know that the x-axis of the diagram shows the "unrolled" or "straightened" mobile load track. It means that for non-straight tracks, the actual length of the track is shown.

Description of

This control defines the density of numerical values attached to the displayed influence line

Extremes: Only extremes are depicted.

All: All calculated values of the influence line are depicted.

All + number: Each n-th value is depicted.

1D macro / Support / Node / 2D macro

(informative) It shows the number of the evaluated member / entity.

Section

(available only for 1D members) Each influence line is related to a fixed point. This input box specifies the position of the evaluated section, i.e. the position where the unit load is located. When you enter the value, press button [Redraw].

Position

These input boxes are accessible for evaluation of influence lines for 2D members. They specify the coordinates of the evaluated point. When you enter the value, press button [Redraw].

Type

Depending on the selected group ((i) deformation on members, (ii) internal forces on members, (iii) deformation of nodes, (iv) supports, (v) member stresses) you can choose which quantity you are interested in.

Multiplication factor

The calculated ordinates of the influence line are multiplied by this factor before they are displayed in the graphical window. Note: This value may be of great importance especially for displacements and rotations. These values may be very small and considered "zero" by the program. Therefore they may not be displayed until a reasonable multiplication factor is input.

Button [Redraw]

This button regenerates the contents of the graphical window. Note: The graphical window is always redrawn with the function "Zoom All". If you have adjusted a detail before the regeneration and want to see it again, you must define the detail once again.

Button [To Document]

Loads

459

This button puts the selected influence line in tabular form into the document.

Calculating the utilisation of influence lines Once the influence lines have been calculated, it is possible to evaluate the utilisation of mobile load and combine the results with other load cases. The following must be done:

The definition of a load-system

Define a simple or advanced load system that represents the intended mobile load. Use the tree menu function Mobile loads > Load system database.

The calculation of the project

Run the linear calculation.

The combination with standard load cases

Activate the generation of load cases that correspond to calculated critical positions. These load cases may be further combined with standard load cases.

Evaluation

Run the linear calculation to calculate the newly created load cases combined with the standard ones and perform the evaluation of the model using service Results.

Evaluating the utilisation

Procedure to evaluate the utilisation

1. Perform the calculation following the steps described in chapter Calculating the utilisation of influence lines.

2. Open service Results.

3. Select the required function to see and evaluate the results. Note: The list of load cases (in the Load case manager, in the dialogue for the definition of a load case combination and also in the available load cases for the display of results) contains the load cases that have been automatically generated and added during the evaluation of influence lines.

Load patterns (train load)

Train load Train loads can be used to define a group of loads acting on a plate. The group of loads can contain point loads, line loads and rectangular loads. In general, the group is supposed to represent a train, vehicle or a series of vehicles that move over the designed plate.

We may talk about two ways the train load can be used. For both variants you must first define the group of loads. The difference is in the application of the group of loads.

Single train load

The group of loads can be placed on the structure to a fixed position. The train load is converted into a standard free load.

Moving train load

The group of loads can be placed on a track and can be "triggered" to move along the track. A set of load cases is automatically generated. Each load case corresponds to one position of the moving train load.

Load pattern manager The Load pattern manager is a standard Scia Engineer database manager. You can perform the following:

input a new load pattern,

review and modify the load patterns,

copy and delete the defined load pattern,

save them to an external file,

import load patterns from previously created external files (the external file can also be provided by a colleague user).

The procedure to open the Load pattern manager

There are several ways to open the manager:

Tree menu

1. Open function Library > Load pattern.

Menu

1. Open function Libraries > Load pattern.

Basic Reference Guide

460

Service Loads (as a part of the procedure to input a new single train load)

1. Open service Loads.

2. Expand branch Load pattern.

3. Start function Single load pattern.

4. The Load pattern manager is opened on the screen.

Definition of the train

The procedure to define a new load pattern (new train load)

1. Open service Load.

2. Expand branch Load pattern.

3. Start function Single load pattern.

4. The Load patterns manager is opened on the screen.

5. If no load pattern has been defined, the input dialogue is opened directly on the screen.

6. Otherwise, click button [New].

7. The Train load input dialogue is opened on the screen.

8. Input the load.

9. Confirm with [OK].

Train load input dialogue

Name Specifies the name of the load pattern.

Description Describes the load pattern.

Type Specifies the type of the entity that will be added to the load pattern.

Add new entity Adds a new entity into the load pattern.

Delete entity Deletes an existing entity from the load pattern.

List of defined entities with their parameters

Lists all the added entities and their parameters

Parameters of a point

Direction Defines the direction of the force.

Force Specifies the size of the load.

Position x1 Defines the x-coordinate of the point in which the load acts.

Position y1 Defines the y-coordinate of the point in which the load acts.

Repeats x Specifies how many times the load entity is repeated along the x-axis.

Delta x Specifies the distance between individual load entities in the x-direction.

Repeats y Specifies how many times the load entity is repeated along the y-axis.

Delta y Specifies the distance between individual load entities in the y-direction.

Parameters of a line

Direction Defines the direction of the force.

Loads

461

Force Specifies the size of the load.

Position x1 Defines the x-coordinate of the starting point of the line along which the load acts.

Position y1 Defines the y-coordinate of the starting point of the line along which the load acts.

Position x2 Defines the x-coordinate of the end point of the line along which the load acts.

Position y2 Defines the y-coordinate of the end point of the line along which the load acts.

Repeats x Specifies how many times the load entity is repeated along the x-axis.

Delta x Specifies the distance between individual load entities in the x-direction.

Repeats y Specifies how many times the load entity is repeated along the y-axis.

Delta y Specifies the distance between individual load entities in the y-direction.

Parameters of a rectangle

Direction Defines the direction of the force.

Force Specifies the size of the load.

Position x1 Defines the x-coordinate of the first corner of the rectangle over which the load acts.

Position y1 Defines the y-coordinate of the first corner of the rectangle over which the load acts.

Position x2 Defines the x-coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle over which the load acts.

Position y2 Defines the y-coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle over which the load acts.

Repeats x Specifies how many times the load entity is repeated along the x-axis.

Delta x Specifies the distance between individual load entities in the x-direction.

Repeats y Specifies how many times the load entity is repeated along the y-axis.

Delta y Specifies the distance between individual load entities in the y-direction.

Parameters of a turning point

The load pattern (loading train) may be composed of a great number of individual "parts". For example, imagine a standard train with many carriages. If such a load pattern moves along a curved track, it does not move as a rigid unit. Only individual carriages are rigid, but they are connected in "joints" that can rotate. These joints or points of rotation are called turning points.

Position x Defines the x-coordinate of the turning point.

Example:

Basic Reference Guide

462

Let us have a load pattern composed of six pairs of point forces representing three carriages. Turning points are defined in between individual carriages.

When on a straight track, the turning points have no effect.

When the train gets into a corner, the whole system of loads "breaks" in the defined turning point.

Definition of the track The train load (i.e. the group of loads) can move along a track of an arbitrary shape. The track may be a simple straight line track, a circular arc or a complex polygon with both straight and curved parts. When you define the track, you may use all the standard Scia Engineer tools for the input of a polygon.

The procedure to define a new track

1. Open service Load.

2. Expand branch Load pattern.

3. Start function New mobile load track.

4. Input the vertices of the track.

5. End the definition with [Esc].

Once a new track is defined, it is possible to set its parameters. The parameters appear in the Property window every time the track is selected.

Name Defines the name of the track.

Use for calculation The track for train load can be used also for the calculation of normal mobile load.

Loads

463

If this option is ON, the track is used for the calculation of influence lines for moving unit load.

If OFF, the track is ignored in that calculation.

Used nodes (informative)

Tells the number of track nodes (vertices).

Track nodes Contains a list of all track nodes. Each end node of each track interval can be used to assign the slabs that are to be exposed to the effect of the train load.

Assigning a track to slabs in the model

In order to explain this action that may seem illogical at first sign, let us imagine a multi story storehouse with a track defined in the top floor. In general, a train of trucks (something like a train of airport trucks full of luggage) may be used to transfer the goods. And such a train can be operated in several floors of the storehouse. You then need to specify in which floor these trains operate and in which floor there are only offices.

In this operation you do not work with the track as a whole, but you need to assign the slabs to every interval of the track polygon (naturally, if the track has been defined as a single line or arc, there is just one interval to be assigned).

The procedure to assign a track to a slab

1. Select the track.

2. The property window displays a list of nodes (vertices) of the track.

3. Select the end node of the required track interval. (The end node of the interval is decisive in this operation).

4. Click the three dot button [...] corresponding to that node.

5. A small dialogue opens on the screen.

6. The left-hand side of the dialogue offers a list of existing slabs. The right-hand side of the dialogue contains a list of assigned slabs.

7. Select the required slabs in the left-hand side and move them to the right-hand side using the buttons between the two lists. NOTE: If the right-hand side list is empty, it means that the train load acts on ALL slabs.

8. Close the selection dialogue.

Important note: If the assignment of slabs to the track intervals is changed after the load cases were generated for that particular track, all the generated load cases (and also possible load case combinations made of those load cases) must be deleted and the load cases must be re-generated. Also the combinations must be defined again.

Input of single train load The defined loading train may be positioned on the structure as a simple stationary load.

The procedure to input a single train load

1. Open service Load.

2. Expand branch Load pattern.

3. Start function Single load pattern.

4. The Load patterns manager is opened on the screen.

5. If no load pattern has been defined so far, do it now.

6. Select the required load pattern.

7. Close the Load patterns manager.

8. Position the load pattern (group of loads).

9. End the definition with [Esc].

Once you position the load pattern, it is automatically transferred into standard free loads. If the load pattern consists of several partial entities (point forces, line forces, surface loads), it is broken to a set of independent free loads of appropriate type.

The validity of the load is by default set to All. If the load is supposed to have effect only on some slabs in a possible multi-story building, it must be adjusted afterwards in the Property window.

The train load cannot be added to a load case whose type is self-weight.

Generation of loads from a train moving along a track When both the train load (load pattern) and track has been defined, it is possible to generate the load cases corresponding to individual positions of the moving train.

The procedure to generate load cases for moving train

Basic Reference Guide

464

1. Open service Load.

2. Expand branch Load pattern.

3. Start function Load pattern on track.

4. The Train load generator appears on the screen.

5. Select the required load pattern, track and other parameters.

6. Confirm with [OK].

7. The corresponding load cases are generated. You may review them in the Load case manager.

Train load generator

Load pattern Selects the load pattern that will move along the track.

Track assignment Selects the track that will be followed by the specified load pattern.

Load group Defines the load group for the generated load cases.

Load case name Specifies the base of the name of the generated load cases.

Step The selected load pattern will move along the specified track with the here-defined step. A separate load case is generated for each position of the moving load.

Validity The three-dot button at this item opens a small dialogue where the user can define the validity of the generated load.

In the dialogue the user inputs intervals with different "validity". Each interval is defined by its end-position and a factor. The input load is multiplied by this factor to obtain the final value of the load.

The factor is a real number from interval 0 to 1. The value of 1 means that the load acts in its full size. The value of zero means that no load acts over the corresponding interval.

465

Calculation

Introduction to calculation Once the model of an analysed structure is created, the calculation of required type may be performed.

Scia Engineer applies the deformation variant of finite element method. The employed beam finite element takes account of shear deformation.

Detailed information about the applied calculation methods may be found:

in the following chapters and

in a separate book Advanced calculations accessible via menu function Help > Contents > Advanced calculations.

Checking the data

Introduction to check of data It is a good practice and sometimes even necessity to check the data of the model from time to time or at least before calculation. Especially for excessive models that have been modified by means of various manipulation functions, it may happen that the model contains some invalid or obsolete data. Such data should be removed from the project as they:

occupy memory unnecessarily,

could mislead some functions.

Scia Engineer provides aN easy-to-use wizard that automatically searches the project and reveals improper or invalid data.

Note: The check of data is important from one more point of view. By default the intersecting 1D members are not joined to each other. If they are supposed to act together, a linked node must be defined in their intersection. The Check of data function traces such places and suggests the user to make an automatic connection of affected 1D members. This operation may thus resolve possible future problems with numerically unstable solution.

Parameters of data check The Check data function tries to reveal invalid data in the project.

Check of nodes

Search nodes This option is ALWAYS ON. This check ensures that nodal data are correct. This option is a kind of protection against possible damage of saved data.

Search duplicate nodes If ON, the program searches for nodes with identical co-ordinates If two nodes of identical position are found they are merged into a single node (i.e. one of them is removed).

The value defined in Minimal distance between two points in the Mesh Setup dialogue is used for this check.

Ignore parameters This option is effective only if parametric nodes have been defined in the project.

If ON, only the co-ordinates (calculated from input parameters) are checked. If two nodes of the same co-ordinates are found, they are merged into one node.

If OFF, the check procedure consists of two steps. First, the co-ordinates are checked. If any two nodes of the same co-ordinates are discovered, the defining parameters are check in the second step. If the two nodes are defined by means of the same parameters, they are considered duplicate and merged into one. If, however, the two nodes are defined using different parameters or different formulas, the nodes are let unchanged.

If the Check of nodes discovers any disorder or "mess" in nodal data, another dialogue is displayed.

Members with undefined nodes

This item shows the number of discovered undefined nodes. Such nodes MUST always be corrected and therefore the checkbox is ALWAYS ON.

Free nodes If any free nodes are found in the project (i.e. nodes that do not belong to any member) the user may delete them.

It is recommended to delete any free nodes unless the user has a specific reason for their existence in the project (e.g. free nodes may represent a temporary state during the definition of a complex model).

Basic Reference Guide

466

Duplicate nodes Any duplicate nodes found in the project are reported here and it up to the user whether they will be deleted or not.

It is recommended to delete duplicate nodes.

Check of 1D members

Check beams The user may decide if 1D members in the project should be checked or not.

Search null beams 1D members of zero length are found. If such 1D members are discovered in the project, they are always deleted.

Search duplicate beams This check goes through the model and traces double 1D members, i.e. 1D members of identical position, orientation and length. If such 1D members are discovered, the user may decide whether they should be preserved or whether only one of the identical 1D members should be kept in the project.

Note: Any two 1D members are considered identical if they have identical end nodes. If two different 1D members defined by means of four different end nodes "lie" one on another, they are not identical under the terms of this check. However, if standard check options are selected, the check procedure discovers duplicate nodes first, merges them, and consequently also the two 1D members become identical under the conditions of the check.

Check of structure

Note: Contrary to original versions of Scia Engineer, version 5 DOES NOT perfom the check of structure within this function. That means that any problems in connection of "touching" members are not solved by this function. A separate function Connect members/nodes must be used for this task. The function can be found in tree menu Calculation, Mesh; on toolbar Geometry manipulation; or in menu Modify.

Check of additional data

Check additional data position

The program checks all additional data (e.g. loads, supports, etc.) and verifies the position of these data on members. For example, some loads might have got out of 1D member during manipulation functions. Such improper data are corrected.

Note: For the procedure read chapter Performing the check of data.

Performing the check of data

The procedure for the check of data

1. Start function Check of data:

a. either using menu function Tree > Calculation, mesh > Check structure data,

b. or using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Check structure data.

2. The Check data wizard opens the setup dialogue on the screen.

3. Select the data types that should be searched and verified.

4. Start the check with button [Check].

5. The program scrutinises all the project data.

6. If no disproportion is revealed a message telling that no problems have been found is issued.

7. If something suspicious has been discovered, the wizard displays the statistics in the dialogue. Numbers of invalid entities for individual data types are stated.

8. Now, decide which data types should be corrected and which ones left unchanged (i.e. put a tick to the data type that should be corrected and remove the tick from those types that should be skipped during the correction phase).

9. Finish the Data check with button [Continue].

10. The invalid data are removed from the project.

Collision between entities Sometimes you may need to find out if specific entities do or do not intersect each other. This can be verified through function Clash check of solids.

The function can process all types of entities: 1D members (beam, column, etc.), 2D members (plate, wall, etc.), general components (solid, open shell, etc.).

Calculation

467

The function checks the selected entities and generates new entities (general components / solids) that correspond to the intersection of the selected entities. The original entities remain unaffected.

The following pictures demonstrate the use of the function.

The first picture shows the result of the check on two solids (cylinder and prism).

The second picture shows the same for 1D member (beam) and 2D member (slab).

The last picture demonstrates the existence of the newly generated solid in the intersection of the checked entities. Here, the beam and slab from the previous picture were removed. What remains is a new entity (general solid) representing the intersection of the two above-mentioned entities.

The function can be used to check one or two groups of entities.

Check of one group of entities

If just one group of entities is selected, all the selected entities are checked if they collide with any other entity from the selection.

Check of two groups of entities

If two groups of entities are selected, the function checks whether any entity from the first group collides with any entity from the second group. If two entities in the same group collide, it is not reported.

The procedure to check the collision of entities

1) Start function Transfer/Break/Unify > Clash check of solids.

2) Select the entities for the first group to be checked.

3) Press [Esc] to complete the selection of the first group.

4) Select the entities for the second group to be checked. If only one-group check is requested, simply ignore this step

5) Press [Esc] to complete the selection of the second group.

6) The collisions are displayed on the screen. Moreover, they are selected.

7) If required, clear the selection, or do whatever necessary with the collisions.

Note: This function also checks collisions between free reinforcement bars. For more information on free bars read the documentation for Concrete Code Check.

Basic Reference Guide

468

Generating the FE mesh

Parameters of FE mesh The user may control the shape of the finite element mesh. The Mesh setup dialogue offers a whole range of parameters.

Mesh

Minimal distance between two points

If the distance between two points is lower that the value specified here, the two points are automatically merged into a single point.

Average size of 2D elements / curved members

The average size of edge for 2D elements. The size defined here may be altered through refinement of the mesh in specified points.

Defines also the size of finite elements generated on curved members.

Average number of tiles of 1D element

If required, more than finite element may be generated on a single 1D member. The value here specifies how many finite elements should be created on a 1D member.

The value is taken into account only if the original 1D member is longer than adjusted minimal length of beam element and shorter than adjusted maximal length of beam element.

This option is useful mainly for stability, non-linear and dynamic calculations where more than one finite element is required per a structural member.

1D elements (1D members)

Minimal length of beam element If a 1D member of a structure is shorter than the value here specified, then the 1D member is no longer divided into multiple finite elements even though the parameter above (Average number of tiles of 1D element) says so.

Maximal length of beam element If a 1D member of a structure is longer than the value here specified, then the 1D member will be divided into multiple finite elements so that the condition of maximal length is satisfied.

Average size of cables, tendons, elements on subsoil

It is necessary to generate more than one finite element on cables, tendons (prestressed concrete) and 1D members on subsoil.

For more information about this issue see book Advanced calculations, chapter Analysis of a beam on elastic foundation versus mesh size.

NOTE: This parameter also controls the size of finite elements for beams with a phased cross-section.

Generation of nodes in connections of beams

If this option is ON, a check for "touching" 1D members is performed. If an end node of one 1D member "touches" another 1D member in a point where there is no node, the two 1D members are connected by a FE node.

If the option is OFF, such a situation remains unsolved and the 1D members are not connected to each other.

The function has the same effect as performing function Check of data.

Generation of nodes under concentrated loads on beam elements

If this option is ON, finite elements nodes are generated in points where concentrated load is acting.

This option is not normally required.

Generation of eccentric elements on members with variable height

If a beam is of variable height, the generator automatically generates eccentric finite elements along the haunch.

Moreover, if this option is ON, the eccentricity of the elements may vary along the element, i.e. the start-node of the element may have different eccentricity than the end-node of the element.

If this option is off, the eccentricity along individual finite elements is constant and the eccentricity changes in steps in nodes along the haunch.

No. of FE per haunch Specifies the number of FE generated on a haunch.

Calculation

469

Apply the nodal refinement Specifies the mode of refinement on 1D members.

No members

The refinement is applied to 2D members only.

Only 1D members

The refinement applied to 2D members and 1D members the type of which is adjusted to "beam (80)"

All members

The refinement applied to 2D members as well as to all 1D members.

2D elements (slabs)

Generation of refinement bands along the lines

If ON, a band of refined mesh is generated along every edge (both external and internal) of a slab.

Include current points of the curve into the mesh

If ON, every definition point of every line (i.e. every vertex of a polyline – if a 1D member is defined using a polygon) becomes a finite element node.

If OFF, the line is divided according to the specified element size parameters and the definition point do not have be transferred to FE nodes.

Te generate predefined mesh If ON, the generator first tries to generate in every slab a regular quadrilateral finite element mesh complying with the adjusted element-size parameters. Only if required, additional necessary nodes are added to the mesh.

If OFF, the finite element mesh nodes are generated across the slab and the nodes are the elements are then created from the nodes.

To smooth the border of predefined mesh

If ON, the border elements of predefined mesh are included into the process of smoothening, i.e. the mesh area consisting of regular quadrilaterals can be reduced.

Maximal out of plane angle of a quadrilateral

This value determines whether a spatial quadrilateral whose nodes are not in one plane will be replaced by triangular elements. This parameter is meaningful only for out-of-plane surfaces – shells. The assessed angle is measured between the plane made of three nodes of the quadrilateral and the remaining node of this quadrilateral.

The ratio of element sides in the line refinement bands

Defines the proportion of edges in quadrilateral elements that may be potentially used to generate a refinement strip along border and internal edges.

Predefined mesh ratio Defines the relative distance between the predefined mesh formed by regular quadrilateral elements and the nearest edge. The edge may consist of an internal edge, external edge or border of refined area. The final distance is calculated as a multiple of the defined ratio and adjusted average element size for 2D elements.

The procedure for the adjustment of mesh parameters

1. Call menu function Setup > Mesh.

2. Adjust the parameters (see above).

3. Confirm with [OK].

The finite element mesh may be previewed using function Mesh generation under tree menu Calculation.

Previewing the FE mesh For complex structures it may be useful to review the FE mesh before the results are scrutinised in detail.

It is possible to control the display style of the mesh through a set of view parameters.

Tab Structure > Group Mesh

Draw mesh If ON, the mesh is displayed on the screen.

Free edges Free edge is an edge of a 2D element that is not connected to

Basic Reference Guide

470

any other element.

It may be useful to see which parts of the structure are not connected to the rest of the model.

If this option is ON, the free (unconnected) edges of 2D finite elements are highlighted using a thick line.

This option is independent on the option above.

Display mode The user may decide about the drawing style for the mesh (wired, rendered, transparent).

Note: Rendered and transparent option may affect the adjustment of colours for symbols relating to the mesh (e.g. local axes).

Tab Structure > Group Local axes

Nodes If ON, the program displays local axes of the nodes in the generated finite element mesh.

Mesh elements If ON, the program displays local axes of the generated finite elements.

Tab Labels > Group Mesh

Display label If ON, the selected labels are displayed together with the mesh.

Note: If parameter Draw mesh from tab Structure - group Mesh is OFF, no labels are displayed.

Nodes If ON, the numbers of nodes are displayed.

Elements 1D If ON, the numbers of 1D finite elements are displayed.

Elements 2D If ON, the numbers of 2D finite elements are displayed.

Tab Labels > Group Labels of local axes

Nodes If ON, the labels (x, y, z) of node local axes are displayed.

Mesh If ON, the labels (x, y, z) of finite element local axes are displayed.

The procedure for the preview of finite element mesh

1. Open View parameters setting dialogue.

2. Select Tab Structure or Labels.

3. In the required group adjust the required parameters.

4. Confirm the settings.

5. Check the mesh.

6. If required, switch the mesh off again.

Mesh refinement

Mesh refinement The finer the finite element mesh is, the more accurate the obtained results are (i.e. the closer to the theoretically correct ones) and the more time consuming the solution is and the more disk space is needed both during the calculation and for storage of the results. The mesh size should be adjusted considering the load the structure is subject to and taking account of the requirements on the calculation.

The generation of the mesh is based on the adjusted size for 2D elements. The generator creates such elements whose edge size is as close to the adjusted value as possible. Also the division of slab / shell borders and internal edges is based on this. Any internal nodes of slabs / shells are taken into account as well.

Calculation

471

The mesh must be made finer in certain areas. The mesh may be refines in a circular area around a specific point, in a band along a defined line or over the whole slab / shell.

If any two refinement areas overlap anywhere, the smaller element size is used. The refinement area does not have be fully inside the "master" slab /shell. Only a part of the refinement area may be located inside it.

Refinement around a node The refinement area is circular with its centre in a specified point. The finite element size outside the circle is the standard FE size for 2D elements adjusted in FE mesh setup dialogue. The element size in the centre of the circle is the given refined value. The size of elements in between varies linearly from the two limits.

Name Identifies the refinement.

Radius Defines the radius of circular area where the mesh will be refined.

Ratio Defines the ratio between the average element edge size in the centre of refinement area and the average preset element size.

dx, dy, dz Defines possible shift of the centre of refinement area from the specified point. Thus the refinement area may be placed anywhere in the structure.

The procedure for the adjustment of node refinement

1. Call function Node mesh refinement using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Local mesh refinement > Node mesh refinement.

2. Adjust the parameters (see above).

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select nodes where the refinement should be used.

5. Close the function.

Refinement along a line The finite element size is reduced along the specified line.

Name Identifies the refinement.

Size Defines the size of refined elements.

Note: If this type of refinement is used without proper attention, it may result in really "strange" shapes of finite elements along the selected line. This may happen especially if the size along the line is too far from the standard element size that is used for other edges of the elements along the selected line (see the figure below).

The procedure for the adjustment of line refinement

1. Call function Line mesh refinement using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Local mesh refinement > Line mesh refinement.

2. Adjust the parameters (see above).

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select the line along which the refinement should be used.

5. Close the function.

Refinement across an area

Basic Reference Guide

472

The finite element size is reduced over the specified area.

Name Identifies the refinement.

Size Defines the size of refined elements.

The procedure for the adjustment of line refinement

1. Call function Line mesh refinement using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Local mesh refinement > Line mesh refinement.

2. Adjust the parameters (see above).

3. Confirm with [OK].

4. Select the regions over which the refinement should be used.

5. Close the function.

Calculation types

General calculation parameters Any type of calculation can be controlled by means of a set of parameters.

Advanced solver option If this option is ON, the user may specify which load cases, or load case combination in case of other than linear calculation, will be calculated. Otherwise, all non-calculated load cases or combinations are always calculated.

Proper FEM analysis of cross-section parameters

If this option is ON, torsional constant and shear relaxation are calculated by means of finite element method for cross-sections defined as (i) general cross-section, (ii) geometric shapes or (iii) wooden sections.

Neglect shear force deformation

If this option is ON, transverse shear deformation is ignored.

In other words, this option ON means that the Kirchhoff approach is applied (a normal is always perpendicular to the deformation line).

The option OFF means that the Mindlin approach is applied (a normal is not perpendicular to the deformation line).

Type of solver Direct or iterative solution type may be selected.

Number of sections on average member

Defines the number of section for evaluation of results on a 1D member of "average length".

Section is always created in both end points and under concentrated loads. The average length is determined from the real length. Shorter 1D members contain fewer sections while longer 1D members contain more sections.

Maximal acceptable translation

If the maximal value of translation specified here is exceeded, the user is asked to confirm that s/he still want to review the results.

Maximal acceptable rotation

If the maximal value of rotation specified here is exceeded, the user is asked to confirm that s/he still want to review the results.

Number of thicknesses of rib plate

This parameter is relevant for plates with ribs. If the effective width is defined using default option, then this parameter defines the multiple. The effective slab width = rib width x this parameter.

Note: The adjustment of these parameters may affect the layout of the calculation dialogue that opens on the screen when a calculation is started.

Static linear calculation When performing the static linear calculation, the user may specify the general calculation parameter to control the calculation method and process.

Static nonlinear calculation In addition to general parameters controlling the calculation, the non-linear calculation enables the user to define additional options.

Maximum iterations Specifies the number of iterations for the non-linear calculation.

This value is taken into account only for the Newton-Raphson method. For the Timoshenko method, the number of iterations is automatically

Calculation

473

set to 2.

The termination of calculation is controlled by means of convergence accuracy or by means of the given maximal number of iterations. If the limit is reached, the calculation is stopped. If this happens, it is up to the user to evaluate the obtained results and decide whether (i) the maximum number of iteration must be increased or whether (ii) the results may be accepted. For example, if the solution oscillates, the increased number of iterations won’t help.

Plastic hinge code If this option is ON, the non-linear calculation takes account of plastic hinges. It is possible to select the required national standard that will be used to reduce limit moments. If no standard is selected, no reduction is performed.

Geometrical nonlinearity If this option is ON, the second order effects are considered during the calculation.

It is possible to select either Timoshenko or Newton-Raphson method.

For both methods, the exact solution of 1D members is implemented. It takes account of normal forces and shear deformation for any kind of loading. Transformation of internal forces into the deformed 1D member axis is included.

Number of increments This parameter is applied for both Newton-Raphson and Timoshenko method only. The values for individual methods are independent and remembered by the programme. Therefore, if you adjust 1 increment for Timoshenko method and four increments for Newton-Raphson method, this parameter will change every time you swap from one method to the other.

Usually, one increment gives sufficient results. If deformation is large, the calculation issues a warning and the number of increments can be increased. The greater the value is, the longer it takes to complete the calculation.

Limits of the calculation

Total number of nodes and finite elements unlimited

Total number of non-linear combinations 1000

Maximal number of iterations (in one increment) 999

Maximal number of increments 99

Note: Static non-linear calculation can ONLY be performed after the static calculation of the same project has been carried out successfully. In other words, non-linear calculation is a two-step procedure: (i) linear calculation must be completed, (ii) non-linear calculation can be started.

Dynamic natural vibration calculation In addition to general parameters controlling the calculation, the dynamic calculation enables the user to define additional options.

Number of eigenvalues Here the user specifies how many eigen frequencies should be calculated.

Calculation for selected mass combinations

If general option Advanced solver option is ON, the user may specify which mass combinations will be calculated. Otherwise, all non-calculated are always calculated.

Note: The dynamic calculation can be carried out for mass combinations only.

Dynamic forced harmonic vibration The principles of how Scia Engineer deals with a structure subject to a harmonic load are given in chapters:

Loads > Load types > Dynamic loads > Harmonic load

Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining the harmonic load case

Results > Evaluating the results for harmonic load

Basic Reference Guide

474

And the core of dynamic calculations is laid down in:

Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Dynamic load cases

Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining a new dynamic load case

Harmonic band analysis Harmonic Band Analysis = Harmonic analysis performed as a multiple analysis on a range of frequencies.

Description

This calculation represents a new way of dealing with the calculations in harmonic analysis. Multiple analyses on a range of frequencies are carried out. The harmonic analysis is possible for a range of frequencies controlled by the user. In the standard harmonic analysis, the forces and the frequency are defined. In this type (Harmonic Band Analysis) of analysis, the frequency of the harmonic force varied over a range and the harmonic analysis is performed for multiple values in that range.

To fit the needs of this type of calculation, a new load case type named "Harmonic Band Analysis" has been introduced into Scia Engineer. the properties of this load case are similar to the standard harmonic load case. But, instead of the frequency, there are 5 new parameters: A, n1, n2, C, N (explained below). The input of loads is the same as for the standard harmonic load cases.

Scia Engineer generates a set of extra load cases:

1. one set of main F frequencies (their number is n=n2-n1+1) and

2. n sets of secondary frequencies (each of them with 2N items).

The secondary load cases are the standard Scia Engineer harmonic load cases and have standard results.

The results of the main load cases are calculated by RMS (root mean square) method from the appropriate set of the secondary load cases.

Scia Engineer generates the following result classes:

1. one with all main load cases and

2. n with the sets of the secondary load cases.

Output of results

Alphanumerical output

All the results of the main and secondary load cases are presented in the standard Scia Engineer way in result tables using the generated results classes.

Graphical output

The results of the main frequencies or results of the bands around the main frequency can be presented also graphically in the form of a diagram. For that purpose a new tool has been integrated into Scia Engineer.

Refresh after modifications of the structure and changes in other input values

When the user changes parameters n1, n2 or N, all the generated load cases and all the generated result classes are deleted and all the document items with band analysis load cases are not valid any more. If any other project data are changed, all generated items remain in the project and their content is updated after next calculation.

(Little) Theoretical background

The user defines constants A, n1, n2, C, N.

The default values are: A = 2, n1 = 6, n2 = 30, C = 3, N = 10.

From these data, a geometric series are generated using the following formula

where n varies from n1 to n2 with a step of 1.

The result is a series of so-called main frequencies F. The default set is: 4,00; 5,04; 6,35; 8,00; 10,08; etc. Around each of these values, an interval Fi- - Fi+ is defined:

The interval [Fi- - F] is now divided into N steps to generate the secondary frequencies "f".

For each value of "f" a harmonic analysis is carried out. The displacement or inner force in a specified node in a given direction is calculated, giving N result values. The same is done for the interval [F – Fi+]. From these 2N values, one value is calculated using RMS (root mean square) and assigned to the main frequency F.

Combination with other load cases

The results of this analysis can not be combined with other static and dynamic analyses.

Input of the load case for the Harmonic Band Analysis

Calculation

475

The input of the load case for the Harmonic Band Analysis requires similar prerequisites as other dynamic load cases.

Procedure do define a new load case for the Harmonic Band Analysis

1. In the Project setup dialogue, on tab Functionality, select Dynamics and Harmonic band analysis.

2. In the Dynamics branch of the tree menu define at least one Mass group and at least one Combination of mass groups.

3. Then you may open the Load case manager and input a new load case for the Harmonic Band Analysis.

4. Select the following options and define the appropriate parameters:

a. Action type = variable

b. Load group = as required in the particular project

c. Load type = dynamic

d. Specification = Harmonic band analysis

e. Parameters = as required in the particular project

f. Master load case = none or as required in the particular project

g. Mass combi = as required in the particular project

5. When ready, close the Load case manager.

Note: Before the calculation is performed, the load case manager shows just this (these) input load case (cases). All the automatically generated load cases, generated according to the description provided above, are added to the Load case manager only after the calculation has been carried out.

Example

The list of load cases after performed Harmonic Band Analysis may look like

This picture shows an extract of the list of load cases. It contains one main frequency (BA1-F1) and eight secondary frequencies (BA1-4, BA1-3, BA1-2, BA1-1, BA1+1, BA1+2, BA1+3, BA1+4).

Performing the Harmonic Band Analysis

In order to start the Harmonic Band Analysis, the linear static calculation must be run. Note: Similarly to other dynamic calculations, attention must be paid the size of the finite elements. This is true also in simple structures with a few 1D members only. The analysis may require a certain number of finite elements in order to calculate the total number of required bands.

Display of results of Harmonic Band Analysis

There is a special display mode for the results of the Harmonic Band Analysis. This mode is available in the following functions of service Results:

Beams > Internal forces,

2D members > deformation of nodes,

2D members > Internal forces.

In this mode a new item (parameter) appears in the property window. This item is called Text output and can be set to two options: (i) Texts or (ii) Graph.

The Text option displays the results in a standard way, i.e. using the diagram in the graphical window and alphanumerical table in the Preview window.

The Graph option draws a special diagram in the Preview window. For this option one more item is added to the property window: Selection tool. This tool – accessible through the three-dot button – allows you to select the 1D members or slabs and nodes for which the diagram is to be displayed.

The later will be demonstrated on a few examples.

Example 1 - Setup for graphical result at main frequencies at a selected mesh node:

Function: Deformation of nodes

Type of load: Class

Class: Main

Text output: Graph

Selection tool: S1, node no. 1.

Basic Reference Guide

476

Example 2 - Setup for graphical result at a selected band for a selected mesh node:

Function: Deformation of nodes

Type of load: Class

Class: Sec3

Text output: Graph

Selection tool: S1, node no. 1.

Note that for a band, beside the deformation curve also the RMS is drawn.

Example 3 - Setup for envelope graphical result at main band frequencies, all nodes selected:

Function: Deformation of nodes

Type of load: Class

Class: Main

Text output: Graph

Selection tool: all members, (by default all nodes are selected)

Extreme: Global

Calculation

477

Example 4 - Setup for graphical result at the main band frequencies for all nodes displayed in the same diagram:

Function: Deformation of nodes

Type of load: Class

Class: Main

Text output: Graph

Selection tool: all members, (by default all nodes are selected)

Extreme: no

Dynamic seismic calculation The principles of how Scia Engineer deals with a structure subject to a harmonic load are given in chapters:

Loads > Load types > Dynamic loads > Seismic load

Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining the seismic load case

And the core of dynamic calculations is laid down in:

Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Dynamic load cases

Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining a new dynamic load case

Buckling analysis Adjustment of general parameters may control the calculation.

Calculation for selected stability combinations

Basic Reference Guide

478

If general option Advanced solver option is ON, the user may specify which stability combinations will be calculated. Otherwise, all non-calculated are always calculated.

Note: The buckling calculation can be carried out for stability combinations only.

Nonlinear stability calculation Non-linear stability is in its first phase calculated as normal nonlinear calculation using N-R method. The load is incremented in steps, but the incrementation does not stop at the load intensity defined by the non-linear combination and continues until the singularity is reached. Then the solution goes back to the last regular state and the critical load intensity is found from this state by means of eigenvalues, i.e. refined solution is sought in the interval between the last regular and singular state.The accuracy of the solution is therefore determined by the number of load increments. The load intensity defined in the non-linear combination has two meanings. First, when divided by the number of the increments, it specifies the size of load increment and, second, the calculated coefficient of the critical load is related just to it.

Soil-in calculation parameters

Solver parameters relating to SOIL-IN module

Soil combination Specifies the load combination that is used for the calculation of C parameters.

Even though it is not an exact solution, for practical reasons the C parameters are not calculated separately for each load case or each load case combination. The user must specify one particular reference combination that is used to calculate the C parameters. The calculated C parameters are then applied in all remaining defined load cases and combinations.

Note: The combination must be a linear combination (not an envelope).

Max soil interaction step Limits the size of iteration step.

Size of soil surface element

Defines the size of FE element generated "in contact" with subsoil.

C1x Resistance of environment against wP (mm) [C1z in MN/m3]

C1y Resistance of environment against wP/xP (mm/m) [C2x in MN/m]

C1z Resistance of environment against wP/yP (mm/m) [C2y in MN/m]

C2x Resistance of environment against uP (mm) [C1x in MN/m3]

C2y Resistance of environment against vP (mm) [C1y in MN/m3]

C parameters

The C parameters in the Solver setup dialogue are used as starting values for the iterative calculation. These values may be ignored if combined Soil-in-subsoil support has been chosen and the user specified that a certain C parameters is to considered as user-defined. See chapter Surface support on slab.

Non uniform damping in dynamic calculation

Non uniform damping This type of calculation is a dynamic calculation that takes into account non-uniform damping on members and supports.

There is a possibility to input a damping value on each 1D and 2D member. It can be (i) relative damping, (ii) logarithmic decrement or (iii) Rayleigh damping. Moreover, a damper can be input in direction X, Y, Z of a nodal flexible support.

If a dynamic calculation (seismic + harmonic) is carried out and the load case has "Damping group" defined, then Scia Engineer takes into account the non-uniform damping of the members and supports. The modal relative damping for each direction (i.e. the damping percentage for each mode and each direction) is calculated automatically for each load case.

All 1D and all 2D members must have the damping value assigned before the calculation starts or the default value is used. The input of damping in supports is possible only in the GCS directions.

Background information

The effect of damping is significant in the vicinity of resonance. The phenomenon resonance appears when the frequency of the source of vibration (=driving frequency) corresponds to the eigenfrequency of the system. In this case, large deformations are expected which can cause damage of the structure. Damping of the system is a solution to prevent this.

Calculation

479

The most famous example of resonance was the collapse of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge in Washington state in 1940. Because of high windspeeds, this bridge began to vibrate torsionally firstly. Later, the vibrations entered a natural resonance frequency of the bridge which started to increase their amplitude.

Also the Erasmusbrug in Rotterdam became a danger due to resonance causing by the vibration of the cables. To prevent this in the future, hydraulic dampers were provided as a measure.

In Scia Engineer, different damping methods are available.

First of all, the user is able to input uniform damping which influences the entire structure. For example, the damping value is taken into account in the harmonic analysis by means of the logarithmic decrement:

with Xi being the damping ratio of the structure.

For the CQC-method in a seismic analysis, it's also possible to define a damping curve:

Basic Reference Guide

480

In the third case, a functionality non proportional damping is provided in Scia Engineer.

Damping can have different causes. The component that is always present is structural damping. Structural damping is caused by hysteresis in the material: the transfer of small amounts of energy into warmth for each vibration cycle possibly increased by friction between internal parts.

Other causes can be the foundation soil of the building and aerodynamic damping due to the diversion of energy by the air. In many cases, damping is increased by adding artificial dampers to the structure.

Non proportional damping allows the user to input manually dampers into the system and also to calculate the influence of the damping of the material. Structural systems composed of several structural elements with different properties can present high nonproportional damping.

Non proportional damping

The module non proportional damping gives a solution to take into account the natural damping of the different kinds of materials in the structure. The logarithmic decrement of steel differs for example from that of concrete caused by another value of the damping ratio.

On top of this, the user is able to attribute manually dampers (by means of damping ratios) to the different elements of the system.

When no damping ratio is inputted on an element, a default value will be used. As default material damping or a global default for damping will be taken into account, dependent on the setting chosen by the user.

In Scia Engineer, damping can be specified on 1D elements, 2D elements and supports.

The damping of each of these elements (or substructures) will be used to calculate a modal damping ratio for the whole structure for each Eigenmode. In the literature this is described as Composite Damping.

Calculation

481

Composite damping is used in partly bolted, partly welded steel constructions, mixed steel-concrete structures, constructions on subsoil, ...

For structural systems that consist of substructures with different damping properties, the composite damping matrix C can be obtained by an appropriate superposition of damping matrices Ci for the individual substructures:

With:

Ci= The damping matrix for the ith substructure in the global coordinate system.

N = The number of substructures being assembled.

Different ways of describing the damping can be assumed:

Rayleigh damping

In this method the damping matrix is formed by a linear combination of the mass and the stiffness matrices

Stiffness-Weighted Damping

For structures that consist of major components with different damping characteristics, composite modal damping values can be calculated using the elastic energy of the structure:

Support damping

Additional to the damping of 1D and 2D elements, Scia Engineer allows the input of a damper on a flexible nodal support. The modal damping ratio xi is calculated by the following formula:

Damper setup The damper setup provides for the input of global defaults.

Base value – logarithmic decrement

Default value of logarithmic decrement.

Alpha factor for supports Factor for supports.

Must be >0; default 1.

Maximal modal damping Is used to limit the calculated damping.

Default 30%.

Defining a new damping group

Procedure to define a new damping group

1. In the Project setup dialogue > tab Functionality options Dynamics and Non proportional damping must be selected.

2. Open service Dynamics.

3. Start function Damping group.

4. The Damping group manager is opened on the screen.

5. Click button [New].

6. A new damping group is added to the list of defined groups.

Basic Reference Guide

482

7. If necessary, change the name and/or other group parameters.

Damping group parameters

Name Specifies the name of the group.

Description Provides a short description of the group.

Type of default damping Global default

The default values are taken from the Damper setup.

Material default

The default values are taken from material properties.

Defining a new damper A damper can be defined in a support, on a beam membe, on a slab.

Procedure to define a new damper

1. Open service Dynamics.

2. Start function Dampers.

3. If no damping has been defined so far, the Damping groups manager is opened on the screen. Define at least one damping group.

4. The Dampers branch is opened in the tree menu bar.

5. Select and start the function corresponding to the required type of damper:

a. 1D damping,

b. 2D damping,

c. Node damping.

6. Fill in the parameters.

7. Select the appropriate 1D member/slab/support where the damper is to be installed.

8. End the function.

1D damping

Name Specifies the name of the damper.

Type Select the type of the damping parameter.

Logarithmic decrement

Relative damping

Rayleigh damping

Value

Alpha / Beta

Specifies the value of the parameter selected in the item above.

Note: The Rayleigh damping requires the definition of two parameters. The remaining two types need just one value.

2D damping

Name Specifies the name of the damper.

Type Select the type of the damping parameter.

Logarithmic decrement

Relative damping

Rayleigh damping

Value

Alpha / Beta

Specifies the value of the parameter selected in the item above.

Note: The Rayleigh damping requires the definition of two parameters. The remaining two types need just one value.

Node damping

Name Specifies the name of the damper.

Damping X

Damping Y

Defines the damping in individual directions of the global coordinate system.

Calculation

483

Damping Z

Performing the calculation

Adjusting the calculation parameters

The procedure to adjust calculation parameters

1. Open the Solver setup dialogue

a. either use menu function Setup > Solver,

b. or use tree menu function Calculation > Solver setup.

2. The Setup dialogue is opened on the screen.

3. Adjust the parameters.

4. Confirm with [OK] button.

Note: The adjustment of these parameters may affect the layout of the calculation dialogue that opens on the screen when a calculation is started.

Performing the calculation

The procedure for performing of the calculation

1. Call function Calculation:

a. either using menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Calculation,

b. or using tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Calculation.

2. The Calculation settings dialogue opens on the screen (see below).

3. Adjust the parameters for calculation.

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. The calculation is started and solver report dialogue is opened on the screen (for small models the dialogue may just flash).

6. When the calculation has been finished, close the calculation report dialogue.

9. Proceed to evaluation of result.

Note: All the calculation parameters may be adjusted in the Solver Setup dialogue.

Controlling and reviewing the calculation process Once a calculation has been started a Solver report dialogue opens on the screen.

Basic Reference Guide

484

For small models the dialogue may just "flash" on the screen and disappear again.

On finishing the calculation, the program shows the dialogue with the result of the calculation.

If everything is OK, the Solver report dialogue can be closed and the user may proceed to the evaluation of results. If anything went wrong during the calculation, a message is displayed and it’s up to the user to resolve the situation.

Performing the repetitious calculations Very often it may be necessary to repeat the calculation with the same calculation settings. It is possiblr to repeat a normal calculation. In addition, Scia Engineer offers function Hidden calculation. This function starts the calculation without showing any information on the screen. Once the calculation is finished, all possible open windows with displayed results are automatically regenerated.

The Hidden calculation can be performed by means of:

either menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Hidden calculation,

or tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Hidden calculation,

or button [Hidden calculation] ( ) on toolbar Project.

Note: If just one type of calculation is available in the calculation dialogue, the hidden calculation simply runs on the background. If, however, two or more calculation types are accessible (depending on project and solver settings), the calculation dialogue is displayed and you must choose the required calculation type.

Repairing the instability of model It may happen that the model is so defined that the numerical solution is impossible. Most often some kind of numerical instability may occur due to mistakes in the definition of boundary conditions.

Maximum displacement has been reached

Calculation

485

The first case is that the numerical solution itself was correct, but the results seem to be distorted. This situation can be revealed by the check of maximum permissible vale of displacement and rotation. If the adjusted values are exceeded, a warning is given.

The results may be reviewed even if this situation happens. It is up to the user’s experience to decide whether the structure is so soft and the large deformation is reasonable or whether a mistake was made in the definition of the model.

The point where the maximum displacement has been found is stated in the warning dialogue.

Singular stiffness matrix

If the stiffness matrix is singular, the solution cannot be obtained at all. The user is informed about the problematic place in the model. The place is stated in the warning dialogue.

Solution methods

Direct solution This is a standard Cholesky solution based on a decomposition of the matrix of the system. The advantage is that it can solve several right sides at the same time. This type of solution is effective especially for small and middle-size problems when disk swapping is not necessary. The limit depends on the size of the problem and on the size of available RAM memory.

It can be said that this solution is more convenient for most of problems.

Disadvantage of this solution may emerge with extremely large problems. The calculation time may rise significantly if RAM size is insufficient. What’s more, if the available disk space is not large enough, the problem cannot be solved at all.

If the problem is excessive and of poor numerical condition, the rounding error may be so big that it exceeds the acceptable limit. This may result in imbalance between resultants of load and reactions. The difference between the total sums of loads and reactions should not be greater than about 0.5%. But even the value of 0.1% suggests that the results may be suspicious.

Note: Generally, the direct solver should be used only for beam structures (without any 2D members) or planar structure composed of 2D members (i.e. a plate or a wall). In other cases the direct solver should be used as a default solution method. The application of iterative solution depends on the total number of nodes, band width and memory size of the particular computer. If the direct solution leads to an excessive disk swapping, the process is slowed down sifgnificantly and the iterative solution must be employed. This solver does not require so much memory – 150 000 nodes needs about 250 MB RAM. Other reason for the application of iterative solution may be poor determinetness of the equation system. These numerical problems can result in a discrepancy between the total load and sum of reactions. If this difference is greater than 5%, a warning is issued and the direct solver should be replaced by the iterative one.

Basic Reference Guide

486

Iterative solution The Incomplete Cholesky conjugate gradient method is applied.

Its advantage is minimal demand on RAM and disk size. Therefore, the solution is convenient especially for extremely large problems that cannot be solved by means of direct solution or whose calculation time would be enormous for that kind of solution due to excessive disk operations.

Another advantage is that due to the ability of continuous improvement of accuracy the method is able to find technically accurate solution even for equation systems that would be numerically unstable in the direct solution.

The disadvantage is that the method can employ only one right side at a time and this increases the time demands for equation systems with several right sides.

Note: See the note in the Direct solution.

Timoshenko method The algorithm is based on the exact Timoshenko’s solution of a 1D member. The axial force is assumed constant during the deformation. Therefore, the method is applicable for structures where the difference of axial force obtained by 1st order and 2nd order calculation is negligible (so called well defined structures). This is true mainly for frames, buildings, etc. for which the method is the most effective option.

The method is applicable for structures where rotation does not exceed 8°.

The method assumes small displacements, small rotations and small strains.

If 1D members of the structure are in no contact with subsoil and simultaneously they do not form ribs of shells, no fine division of 1D members into finite elements is required. If the axial force is lower than the critical force, this solution is robust. The method needs only two steps, which leads to a great efficiency of the method.

The first step serves only for solution of axial force. The second step uses the determined axial forces for Timoshenko´s exact solution. The original Timoshenko´s solution was generalised in Scia Engineer and the shear deformations can be taken into account.

Newton-Raphson method The algorithm is based on Newton-Raphson method for solution of non-linear problems. The method is robust for most of problems. It may, however, fail in the vicinity of inflection points of loading diagram. This may occur for example at compressed 1D members subject to small eccentricity or to small transverse load. Except for the mentioned example, the method can be applied for wide range of problems. It provides for solution of extremely large deformations.

The load acting on the structure can be divided into several steps. The default number of steps is eight. If this number is not sufficient, the program issues a warning.

The rotation achieved in one increment should not exceed 5°.

The accuracy of the method can be increased through refinement of the finite element mesh or by the increase in total number of increments. For example, the solution of a single beam divided to a single finite element will not give sufficient results.

In some specific cases, high number of increments may solve even problems that tend to a singular solution which is typical for the analysis of post-critical states.

Note: This method requires that a 1D member is divided to at least four (4) finite elements. Usually, such division is adjusted automatically whenever Newton-Raphson method is selected for calculation.

Initial deformations

Introduction to initial deformations The initial deformation may be used in non-linear calculation to define the shape of the structure at the beginning of the analysis. Thus a state of initial imperfection in shape can be easily modelled.

Initial-deformation manager The initial deformation curves can be defined and edited in the Initial-deformation manager. This manager is one the Scia Engineer numerous database managers. Its operation and layout are analogous to other database managers.

In the Initial-deformation manager the user may:

define a new initial deformation curve,

edit an existing initial deformation curve,

copy an existing initial deformation curve,

delete an existing initial deformation curve,

save the existing initial deformation curve to an external file.

The Initial-deformation manager can be opened in two ways:

Calculation

487

using tree menu function Libraries > Initial deformations,

using menu function Libraries > Initial deformations.

Initial deformation curve The initial deformation is defined in the editing dialogue by means of a position-deformation curve.

The curve may be defined in a simple operated dialogue.

The user just has to type pairs of corresponding values for position and deformation. Next to the table the curve is displayed with the position on the vertical axis and deformation on the horizontal axis.

The curve can be then later assigned to required direction in the definition of a non-linear combination.

Defining a new initial deformation curve

The procedure for the definition of a new initial deformation curve

1. Open the Initial-deformation manager.

2. Click button [New] to insert a new curve.

3. A new curve is added to the list of defined curves.

4. Select the new curve.

5. Press button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.

6. In the editing dialogue, type pairs of corresponding values for the position-deformation curve.

7. Confirm with [OK].

8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 as many times as required.

9. Close the manager.

Applying the initial deformation The initial deformation curve may be used in a non-linear combination to define the initial imperfect shape of the structure.

The procedure for the application of the initial deformation curve

1. Create a new non-linear combination or edit the existing one.

Basic Reference Guide

488

2. Item Type of imperfection set to an option requiring the input of an initial deformation curve (i.e. either Functions + curvature on beams or Inclination functions).

3. In the appropriate items choose the required initial deformation curve (each direction can use different initial deformation curve).

4. Finish the definition or editing of the non-linear combination.

5. Use the combination for calculation.

Plastic hinges

Introduction to plastic hinges If a normal linear calculation is performed and limit stress is achieved in any part of the structure, the dimension of critical elements must be increased. If however, plastic hinges are taken into account, the achievement of limit stress causes that plastic hinges are inserted into appropriate joints and the calculation can continue with another iteration step. The stress is redistributed to other parts of the structure and better utilisation of overall load bearing capacity of the structure is obtained.

On the other hand, there is a risk in this approach. If a hinge is added to the structure, its statical indeterminateness is reduced. If other hinges are added, it may happen that the structure becomes a mechanism. This would lead to a collapse of the structure and the calculation is stopped.

Plastic hinges can be thus used to calculate the plastic reliability margin of the structure. The applied load can be increased little by little (e.g. by increasing the load case coefficients in load case combination) until the structure collapses. This approach can be used to determine the maximum load multiple that the structure can sustain.

Plastic hinges are considered only at ends of individual 1D members. No selection of 1D members is made for the calculation with plastic hinges. If this type of calculation is selected, all 1D members in the structure are tested .

The calculation is similar to the calculation of beams with gaps. All 1D members in the structure are tested and if the limit stress is reached, the plastic hinge is inserted. If however the stress lowers in the next iteration step, the plastic hinge may be removed.

The Solver setup offers an item where a particular national code can be selected for correction of the limit moments. If option No Code is selected , the modification of the limit moments is performed as for option EC (Eurocode).

Approaches described in EC3, DIN 18800 and NEN codes are implemented in Scia Engineer.

Plastic hinges to EC3

Axis Axial load V =<0.5 V_ V>0.5 V_

yy NSd =<0.25 NRd Mpl,y,Rd Mpl,y,Rd (1-)

yy Nsd >0.25 NRd Mpl,y,Rd 1.11 (1-n) Mpl,y,Rd 1.11 (1-n-)

zz NSd =<0.25 NRd Mpl,z,Rd Mpl,z,Rd (1-)

zz NSd >0.25 NRd Mpl,z,Rd 1.56 .

. (1-n)(n+0.6)

Mpl,z,Rd 1.56 .

. (1-n-)(0.6+n/(1-))

where:

(2 VSd / VRd –1)2

a NSd / NRd

Nsd axial force

VSd shear force

Mpl,y,Rd full plastic moment around yy axis

Mpl,z,Rd full plastic moment around zz axis

VRd plastic shear force

NRd plastic axial force

Plastic hinges to DIN 18800

Axis Axial load V =<0.33 V_ V>0.33 V_

yy N =<0.10 Npl,d Mpl,y,d Mpl,y,d (1.136-0.42)

yy N >0.10 Npl,d Mpl,y,d 1.111 (1-n) Mpl,y,d (1.25-1.113 n -

Calculation

489

- 0.4125 )

Axis Axial load V =<0.25 V_ V>0.25 V_

zz N =<0.30 Npl,d Mpl,z,d Mpl,z,d (1-0.82) / 0.95

zz N >0.30 Npl,d Mpl,z,d (1-n2) / 0.91 Mpl,z,d (1-0.95 n2 -

- 0.75 )/0.87

where:

V / Vpl,d

a N / Npl,d

A axial force

V shear force

Mpl,y,d full plastic moment around yy axis

Mpl,z,d full plastic moment around zz axis

Vpl,d plastic shear force

Npl,d plastic axial force

Plastic hinges to NEN

For IPE sections

Axis Condition

yy n / 0.18 + <= 1 Mpl,y,d

yy a <=0.18 Mpl,y,d

yy a >0.18 Mpl,y,d 1.22 (1-n)

yy <=0.3 Mpl,y,d

yy >0.3 Mpl,y,d (1.1-0.3 n)

zz n <=0.36 Mpl,z,d

zz n >0.36 Mpl,z,d (1-((n-0.36) / 0.64)2)

zz <=0.3 Mpl,z,d

zz >0.3 Mpl,z,d (1.1-0.3 n)

For other sections

Axis Condition

yy n / 0.10 + <= 1 Mpl,y,d

yy n <=0.10 Mpl,y,d

yy n >0.10 Mpl,y,d 1.11 (1-n)

yy <=0.3 Mpl,y,d

yy >0.3 Mpl,y,d (1.1-0.3 n)

zz n <=0.20 Mpl,z,d

zz n >0.20 Mpl,z,d (1-((n-0.20) / 0.80)2)

zz <=0.3 Mpl,z,d

zz >0.3 Mpl,z,d (1.1-0.3 n)

where:

V / Vpl,d

Basic Reference Guide

490

a N / Npl,d

A axial force

V shear force

Mpl,y,d full plastic moment around yy axis

Mpl,z,d full plastic moment around zz axis

Vpl,d plastic shear force

Npl,d plastic axial force

Calculating with plastic hinges To perform the calculation with plastic hinges taken into account, it is necessary to:

select Nonlinearity in Project Setup dialogue,

select required Plastic hinge code in Solver setup dialogue,

define non-linear load case combination / combinations,

have linear calculation of the structure successfully completed,

start nonlinear calculation and obtain successful solution.

Global optimisation

Introduction Scia Engineer enables you to perform an optimisation of the whole structure or of its selected part. The optimisation can be run for steel and timber structures or for steel or timber parts of multi-material projects.

It is possible to optimise the value of:

standard steel code check,

fire resistance steel check,

timber code check,

bolted diagonal check.

It is also possible to perform several of the above mentioned optimisation types and then compare the results.

It is always the cross-section size or the bolt size that is optimised. In general, you must select which cross-section types or bolted diagonal connections used in your model are to be optimised. And it is up to you to select the cross-section types and bolted diagonal connections that are relevant to your work. It is also your responsibility to think in advance and define and assign to 1D members as many cross-section types as necessary for a proper design and optimisation of the project.

Note: In order to perform the AutoDesign, calculation must be already performed.

AutoDesign manager As stated in the introduction you may perform several different optimisations. You may run the AutoDesign and compare the results for different parts of the structure, for different optimisation types (e.g. standard and fire resistance code check). Therefore, all the defined optimisations are stored in the AutoDesign manager. Thus you do not have to define all the AutoDesign criteria and parameters again and again.

The AutoDesign manager is a standard Scia Engineer database manager with usual features and functions.

Procedure to open the AutoDesign manager

1. Open service Calculation, Mesh.

2. Start (double-click) function AutoDesign.

Defining a new optimisation

Procedure to define and run a new optimisation

1. Start the AutoDesign manager.

2. Click button [New] to open the Overall AutoDesign dialogue.

3. Define the AutoDesign parameters and criteria.

4. Click button [AutoDesign] to run the calculation and see its result.

5. If required, click button [Calculation] to re-calculate the model in order to reflect the results of the optimisation.

6. Depending on what you exactly need and want, you may repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as required.

Calculation

491

Note: Please note, that a mechanical repetition of AutoDesign and Calculation in turns may lead to a "never-ending" cycle. The AutoDesign may find cross-section "A" as optimal. When you perform the calculation, the internal forces are redistributed to reflect the AutoDesign results. When you run AutoDesign now, it may find cross-section "B" as optimal. And another re-calculation once more redistributes the internal forces. And it may happen that the subsequent AutoDesign finds the cross-section "A" as optimal once again. And so on, and so on, and so on.

AutoDesign parameters and criteria

Items

The item defines the type of the optimisation and the cross-section type that should be optimised. The type of optimisation (e.g. standard and fire resistance code check) must be defined for the first item only. All the other items in one AutoDesign definition are of the same type. One AutoDesign item represents one cross-section type or one bolted diagonal connection that will be optimised.

[Add item] Adds a new optimisation item into the list.

[Remove item] Removes the existing optimisation item from the list.

Property

Name Defines the name of the optimisation (criteria).

Type of loads The AutoDesign may be performed for load cases, load case combinations, result classes, etc.

Load Specifies the particular load case, combination, etc. for which the selected cross-section type will be optimised.

AutoDesign type (informative) Tells the type of the optimisation.

Item count (informative) Shows the number of defined AutoDesign items.

Parameters

Cross-section AutoDesign

Cross-section Defines the cross-section type to be optimised.

Parameter Selects the dimension (e.g. section depth, width, etc.) that will be optimised.

Length (informative) Shows the current size of the selected dimension.

Minimum Defines the minimal applicable size for the optimised parameter.

Maximum Defines the maximal applicable size for the optimised parameter.

Step Defines the step for the AutoDesign.

Maximal check Defines the maximal acceptable value of unity check of the optimised cross-section.

Optimised check (informative) Shows the unity check for the optimised connection.

Bolted diagonal AutoDesign

Bolted diagonal Specifies the bolted diagonal to be optimised.

Bolt Specifies the bolt used.

Optimised check (informative) Shows the unity check for the optimised connection.

Picture

The picture shows the shape of the optimised cross-section or the symbol of the bolted diagonal connection.

Control buttons

AutoDesign Performs the optimisation for the defined AutoDesign items.

Calculation Carries out the calculation for the optimised model.

493

Results

Opening the service Results Service Results may be opened after a calculation has been successfully finished.

Service Results can be opened using:

tree menu item Results,

menu function Tree > Results,

icon Results ( ) on toolbar Project.

The service may look like:

As soon as the service is opened in the tree menu window, the Property window is filled with parameters corresponding to active function of service Results. The parameters in the Property window can be used to adjust "WHAT" is displayed and "HOW" it is displayed.

Common parameters are:

Load type Specifies what "load type" is considered for the display. Available load types are:

load cases,

load case combinations,

result classes.

Load case / combination / class

For each of the above specified load type a set of available items (load cases, combinations, result classes) is offered.

Selection The user may display the results either on all or only selected 1D members.

Filter The set of 1D members where the results are displayed may be specified by means of a filter.

Values For each of the result groups (internal forces, deformations, etc.) a set of quantities id offered for display. The user may select which one is really shown.

Drawing setup It is possible to adjust the style of the diagrams.

Other specific parameters Some of the available result groups (internal forces, deformations, etc.) may have other group-specific parameters.

Note: If a calculation has not been performed yet or the structure has been somehow modified after the calculation has been carried out, service Results is not accessible (to be precise, it is not offered in the tree menu). Note: The collection of functions offered in the service may vary according to the project type and authorised modules.

Selecting the 1D members for display The result diagrams may be displayed on (i) all the 1D members in the structure, or (ii) selected 1D members only.

Which variant is actually applied can be adjusted in the Property window by means of parameters Selection and Filter.

Selection

All If this option is selected, the result diagrams are displayed on all 1D members in the structure.

Current

The result diagrams are displayed on all the currently selected members.

Advanced

This option allows the user to display diagrams on selected members. It is similar to the previous option but offers something more. See below the table.

Basic Reference Guide

494

Named

This option allows the user to select one of the previously created, named and saved selections.

Selection: Advanced

With this option, you may select required members on which the results are to be displayed and review the results. Then you may clear the selection. The result diagrams, however, remain displayed. Now you may make a new selection and invoke the refresh of the screen. The program will ask you what to do. The available options are:

Use current selection

The result diagrams displayed during the last refresh are deleted. New result diagrams are displayed on the currently selected members only.

Add current selection to previous selection

The result diagrams displayed during the last refresh remain displayed. New result diagrams are shown on the currently selected members.

Use previous selection

The current selection is ignored. The result diagrams displayed during the previous refresh remain displayed.

Subtract current selection from previous selection

If there is a result diagram currently displayed on one of the currently selected members, this diagram is hidden. The result diagrams that are shown on members that are not in the current selection remain displayed.

Filter

No No filter is applied.

Wildcard The set of 1D members for display is defined by a wildcard expression.

E.g. expression "N*" lists all entities whose name starts with letter N. The expression "B??" lists all entities whose name starts with letter B and is followed by two characters.

Cross-section Diagrams are shown only on entities of selected cross-section.

Material Diagrams are shown only on entities of selected material.

Layer Diagrams are shown only on entities inserted into selected layer.

Structure

This parameter is useful especially for nonlinear analysis construction stages analysis.

Initial The diagrams of result quantities are drawn at the initial (non-deformed) shape of the analysed structure.

The "smoothness" of the diagram is specified by the Number of sections on average member that can be adjusted in Solver setup.

Mesh The diagrams of result quantities are drawn at the initial mesh for the evaluated construction stage. For the results of stage 1 or for results of a simple (non-staged) calculation it is identical with the previous option. However, for stage 2 and subsequent ones it represents the "initial" shape of the structure at the beginning of the evaluated constructions stage

The smoothness of the diagram is given by how fine the generated mesh is.

Deformed The diagrams of result quantities are drawn at the final (deformed) shape of the analysed structure.

The deformation of the structure uses fixed predefined scale 1:1.

Section

This parameter defines how detailed and smooth the diagram is.

All The checks are performed and displayed in all sections along the

Results

495

member. The number of sections is defined in Solver setup.

Input The checks are performed and displayed ONLY in sections defined by the user. The sections can be defined in service Structure.

Ends The checks are performed and displayed ONLY in end points of the member.

Input + Ends The checks are performed and displayed in sections defined by the user and in the end points of the member. The sections can be defined in service Structure.

Selecting the load for the display of results The results may have calculated for: (i) load cases, (ii) load case combinations, (iii) result classes.

In service Results, the user may specify which group (or set) should be taken into account for display. The selection can be made in item Type of loads in the Property window of service Results.

load case Diagrams are drawn for specific load case.

combination Diagrams are drawn for specific load case combination.

result class Diagrams are drawn for specific result class.

The choice of a particular load case, combination, or result class can be then made in item located just below Types of loads in the Property window of service Results. Only one load case, combination or result class may be selected at a time.

Adjusting the style of result diagrams The style of the diagrams may be adjusted in the Drawing setup dialogue.

Representation

outline lines only

outline lines only with hatches in sections

filled form

Limits

The limits may be adjusted to control the colour of the diagram. The user specifies two numerical values. Three colours are used to display the diagram. The colours may be adjusted in the Setup > Colours and lines dialogue. Rules for use of individual colour are explained in the enclosed table:

Basic Reference Guide

496

Colour:

Result if below min

This colour is used for those sections where the value of displayed component is lower that the minimum limit.

Colour:

Result if above max

This colour is used for those sections where the value of displayed component is greater that the maximum limit.

Colour:

Result if between min and max

This colour is applied for the sections where the value of displayed component is between the limits.

Example of limits application

Let’s assume the following adjustment of limits and colours:

Maximum 1000

Minimum -4000

Colour:

Result if below min

blue

Colour:

Result if above max

red

Colour:

Result if between min and max

green

The diagram will look like:

Another example

The settings described above may be used to "hide" specific range of the result values. For example, if you want to see just the positive branch of the diagram, it is possible to use the following trick.

Maximum 0

Minimum 0

Colour:

Result if below min

colour that is very close or identical to the background colour; e.g. very very light blue if white background is used

Colour:

Result if above max

e.g. blue

Colour:

Result if between min and max

does not matter

Results

497

The diagram will look like:

Description

Values Numerical values are printed next to the diagram.

Sections in labels The relative co-ordinate of individual sections is printed next to the diagram.

Load case or combination in labels

The name of appropriate load case or combination is printed next to the diagram.

Angle of text

The user may specify the inclination of the text for diagram labels.

Drawing of more components

If more than one component is drawn at the same time, it is possible to define the style of the composed diagram.

Same scale All the diagrams for the same 1D member use the same scale.

Same height All the diagrams for the same 1D member use the same height.

Space between diagrams Defines the "gap" between two adjacent diagrams.

Shift of the first diagram Defines the shift of the first diagram from the 1D member.

The procedure for the adjustment of display style parameters

1. Open service Results.

2. Select required group (or set) for the display (e.g. internal forces, bill of material, etc.).

3. Click button [Drawing setup].

4. The Drawing setup dialogue opens on the screen.

5. Set required parameters.

6. Confirm with [OK].

Regenerating the diagrams When the settings in the Property window of service Results are changed, the diagrams usually require regeneration. Because the fully automatic regeneration could be very slow for excessive models, it is up to the user to regenerate the drawing when necessary.

Any time the user makes a change that affects the display, the program paints the cell Refresh in red colour. Until the user presses the button [Refresh], the cell remains highlighted.

Animation of results Any result quantity that has been calculated and shown in the graphical window can be displayed also in the Animation window. This window, as the name suggest, provides for animation of the currently displayed quantity.

Basic Reference Guide

498

In practice, this may be useful e.g. when dynamic calculation was performed. The animation window enables the user to view the vibration "in action".

Procedure to activate the animation

1. If necessary, perform the calculation.

2. Open service results and display the quantity you want to be animated including the load case or combination.

3. Regenerate the window to see the result diagram.

4. Call function Edit > View > New animation window.

5. If required, set the parameters of the window (see below).

6. Start the animation through icon Start animation.

7. When satisfied, close the animation window.

Controls of the animation window

Start animation This button starts / stops the animation.

Pause animation This button enables you to pause the animation.

Repeat the animation indefinitely If OFF, just one "cycle" of animation is shown.

If ON, the animation is repeat until stopped manually.

Preset minimal ratio to invert MAX If ON, the quantity is animated in both positive and negative direction.

Set initial view parameters The view in the animation window can be adjusted using standard Scia Engineer "mouse+keyboard" controls (shift view, rotate view, zoom in/out).

Display frame time Specifies the time for how long each calculated screen is shown. The lower the number, the "finer" the animation is.

Results

499

For large projects it may be necessary to adjust greater number in order to give the computer enough time to calculate the next screen.

Play time The total time of the animation (i.e. of one "cycle" of the animation).

Mode of calculation The interpolation of the diagram can be performed in two ways.

Linear

Standard linear interpolation is used.

Sinus

This interpolation gives nicer "motion" of the diagram.

Upgrade from 2D to 1D project 2D-1D Upgrade is a special export function that has been designed specifically for slabs input as slabs composed of beams (tree menu function Structure > 2D member > Prefab Slab).

This export function enables the user to select one or several beams from the slab and export them to a separate project including load cases, combinations and calculated internal forces that are exported as a load the exported beam is subjected to.

The user can control the export through a set of parameters.

Effective width slab If ON, the effective width of the slab is taken into account and the beam is exported as a T-section.

If OFF, the beam is exported with the cross-sections that was specified for it in the project.

Export into Frame XZ (available only if just one beam is exported)

If ON, the exported project is of Frame XZ type.

Export to UCS from member 1D

If ON, the origin of the UCS in the exported project is set to the origin of the LCS of the exported beam.

Upgraded internal forces If ON, the calculated internal forces are exported.

If OFF, only the geometry is exported.

Load cases, Combinations (available only if Upgraded internal forces is set to ON)

The user can select which load cases and combinations are exported.

Upgraded internal forces

This group of parameters is available only if the above-mentioned parameter Upgraded internal forces is set to ON.

The user may select which particular internal force is to be exported.

Points of beam

This group of parameters is available only if the above-mentioned parameter Upgraded internal forces is set to ON.

Type The calculated internal forces are exported in a specified sections.

Number

The number of sections is input explicitly.

Distance

The number of sections is calculated from the given distance of two adjacent sections.

Number of points (available only if Type set to Number)

Defines the number of sections in which the forces are exported.

Distance between points (available only if Type set to Distance)

Defines the distance between two adjacent sections in which the forces are exported.

Results on beams

Displaying the internal forces

The procedure to display diagrams of internal forces

Basic Reference Guide

500

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Internal forces on beams.

3. Select the beams for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Adjust the diagram style.

6. Set other display parameters.

7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Display parameters for diagrams of internal forces

Values Specifies the values, i.e. the components, which are displayed.

Either one or multiple components can be displayed at a time.

Principal Specifies whether the components are evaluated in principal or local axes of 1D members.

Extreme Specifies the position on diagrams where numerical values are attached.

Drawing setup It is possible to adjust the style of the diagrams. Read chapter Adjusting the style of result diagrams.

Section Defines whether the diagram is drawn for defined sections or only for end-sections on the 1D member.

Extreme

The individual options for parameter Extreme are demonstrated in the table below. For each parameter option a corresponding simple drawing is added.

No

Section

Results

501

Local

Beam

Global

Displaying the deformation on 1D members

The procedure to display diagrams of deformation on 1D members

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Deformation on beams.

3. Select the beams for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Adjust the diagram style.

6. Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of deformation on 1D members are analogous to parameters for internal forces on beams).

7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Displaying the deformation of nodes

The procedure to display diagrams of deformation of nodes

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Deformation of nodes.

3. Select the beams for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

Basic Reference Guide

502

5. Adjust the diagram style.

6. Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of deformation of nodes are analogous to parameters for internal forces on beams).

7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Displaying the resultant of reactions

The procedure to display diagrams of resultant of reactions

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Supports > Resultant of reactions.

3. Select the supports for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Set the display parameters.

6. Refresh the screen

Display parameters for diagrams of resultant of reactions

Values Specifies the values, i.e. the components, which are displayed. Either one or multiple components can be displayed at a time.

Extreme Specifies the position on diagrams where numerical values are attached. Possible options are: No, Node, Global

Rotated supports Selects the type of supports.

Resultant in intersecting linear supports

When the resultant is displayed for a linear support and if the selected linear support intersects another linear support, one must be aware of the following. If several linear supports meet in one point or if they intersect each other, the resultant calculated for one of the supports takes into account also the results from other supports. As a result, if you display in turns the resultants for individual supports, the sum of these resultants will not be equal to the resultant calculated for all the supports selected simultaneously. Let us assume a structure whose one part is supported by three linear supports that all meet in one point of intersection (red support A, blue support B and green support C).

Let us define some load (the exact size and distribution is not important as the example is just illustrative). That load produces the following resultants in individual supports (i.e. when these supports are selected separately): red A = 111.1 kN blue B = 60.1 kN green C = 51.9 kN The sum of these three resultants is 223.1 kN. When, however, all the three supports are selected at the same time, the total resultant is 189.2 kN. The reason is that the resultants in individual supports take into account also the results from finite elements located in the two remaining supports (for example elements e2 and e3 if we evaluate the resultant in the support with element e1 in the picture below).

Results

503

Displaying the nodal space support resultant Scia Engineer can display standard resultants of reactions – see chapter Results > Results on beams > Displaying the resultant of reactions. However, for certain types of structures other representation of the reaction may be suitable.

Example

Reactions in node

Basic Reference Guide

504

Nodal Support Space Resultant

Nodal Support Space Resultant

Function Nodal Support Space Resultant (NSSR) calculates the total resultant of a given reaction. In addition, the function also calculates the total horizontal component of the reaction.

Calculation principle

For each selected (nodal) support the program does the following:

1. The minimum and maximum extreme of reaction values Rx, Ry and Rz is found.

2. For each extreme reaction value the complementary values are calculated:

a. horizontal component;

a. total resultant;

a. direction (angle to diagonal) of the total resultant;

b. slope of the total resultant ( = Rz / HR);

c. the combination in which the extreme reaction value was achieved is shown.

If there are mope than one combination that have the same extreme reaction value, the combination in which the maximal total resultant is calculated is displayed.

Note: The function has bee designed to give results for load case combinations and result classes. It can be however applied also to load cases, and the resultant is calculates as well, but the search for extreme is irrelevant. Note: It is NOT the purpose of the function to determine the extreme resultant.

Possible application

The primary application of the function is in the design of masts. When the total resultant is known, it is possible to determine the direction of the foundation poles under supports. The slope determines the inclination of the foundation pole. It can be also found whether the pole is under tension or compression. The angle with the diagonal is required for the following reason. If the angle is too large, an additional shear force has to be taken into account for the calculation of the foundation.

Nodal Support Space Resultant table in the document

The layout of the default Nodal Support Space Resultant table will be explained on an example of the table generated for support Sn1 located in node N21.

Results

505

A table for one support has six lines. Each line contains the extreme value (minimum / maximum) of one reaction component (Rx / Ry / Rz) and the corresponding calculated values of the Nodal Support Space Resultant.

Case Shows the load case combination + load case index from the combination key in which the corresponding extreme of reaction component was reached.

Support Shows the name of the support and name of the node where the support is located.

Extreme Indicates the component to which the extreme value refers to.

Horizontal component Contains the calculated horizontal component of the Nodal Support Space Resultant.

Resultant Displays the total value of the Nodal Support Space Resultant.

Angle Shows the orientation of the resultant in plan view.

Contrary to many other functions, this function does not measure the angle from the axis of the coordinate system, but from a diagonal line.

What is measured is the deviation between the direction of the resultant force and the diagonal line (because of the connection of the supports). To have a general solution, the diagonal line is the line from the support in question to the point (0,0,0) in GCS.

Slope Shows the inclination of the resultant from the horizontal plane.

Rx, Ry, Rz Displays the appropriate reaction component extreme value.

Note: Some texts in the table header in the figure have been modified (in comparison with original headers in the real document table) in order to reduce the width of the table to fit the page in this documentation. Note: It is convenient to add the Combination key table into the document too, as (in case of the results for load case combinations and result classes) it provides useful information about the particular load case in which the extreme value of the reaction component was reached.

The procedure to display the nodal space support resultant

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Nodal space support resultant.

3. Select the supports for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Set other display parameters.

6. Refresh the screen.

Displaying the reactions

The procedure to display diagrams of reactions

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Supports.

3. Select the beams for the display of results.

Basic Reference Guide

506

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Adjust the diagram style.

6. Set other display parameters.

7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Display parameters for diagrams of reactions

Values Specifies the values, i.e. the components, which are displayed.

Either one or multiple components can be displayed at a time.

Extreme Specifies the position on diagrams where numerical values are attached.

Possible options are:

No

Node

Global

Rotated supports Selects the type of supports.

Displaying the foundation table Service Reactions contains, among others, the possibility to generate a table with reactions in foundations.

Note: This option is only available for load cases.

A coefficient may be entered for each load case. The reactions in the table are multiplied by this coefficient. This may be used with advantage to consider a safety factor in reactions.

The table generated in the Preview window contains in general four main parts:

Permanent loads All permanent load cases are considered together. Only the total reaction (sum of all permanent load cases) is given.

Variable load case

- not exclusive

Variable load cases which are not in an exclusive group. They can act simultaneously with all other variable loads.

Variable load cases

- exclusive

These load cases cannot act simultaneously with other load cases of the same exclusive group.

Extremes This section contains extreme values composed from all permanent and variable load cases.

The procedure for the generation of a foundation table

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Foundation table (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see below).

4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.

a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,

b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.

5. Review the results.

Parameters of Foundation table function

Selection The results may be shown for either All or User-defined entities.

Filter Here, the user may limit the selection to specific entities only.

Coefficient This option enables the user to select and / or define a set of coefficients for individual load cases. The reactions in the foundation table are multiplied by these coefficients.

Rotated support This option has influence only when rotated supports exist the project.

If this option is not marked, the reactions in the global axes are drawn.

If this option is marked, the reactions in the axes of the support are drawn.

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.

Results

507

Example of a foundation table

Basic Reference Guide

508

Displaying the bill of material

The procedure to display diagrams of bill of material

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Bill of material.

3. Select the beams for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Adjust the diagram style.

6. Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of bill of material are analogous to parameters for internal forces on beams, although their number is considerably lower).

7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Results

509

Displaying the intensity If a member of a structure is laid on foundation, it is possible to display the intensity (reaction per meter of length) in the footing surface.

The procedure for displaying of intensity

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Intensity (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Adjust the parameters of the function.

4. If required, redraw the screen using button Redraw in the Property window.

5. Review the results.

Example

The procedure for displaying of intensity in Preview window

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Intensity (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Adjust the parameters of the function.

4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.

a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,

b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.

5. Review the results.

Example

Basic Reference Guide

510

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.

Displaying the stress on members Scia Engineer calculates various stress components for each member. Simple stress is given here considering neither code checks nor stability check (buckling, lateral-torsional buckling).

Normal Normal stress in the member.

Shear Shear stress in the member.

von Mises Von Mises (or equivalent) stress in the member.

Fatigue The stress variation between the maximum and minimum stress in each fibre for the selected load cases or combinations.

Kappa The stress ratio. This ratio is used in some fatigue check rules (e.g. DIN).

The procedure for displaying of stress

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Member stress (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see Note below).

4. If required, redraw the screen using button Redraw in the Property window.

5. Review the results.

The procedure for displaying of stress in Preview window

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Member stress (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see Note below).

4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.

a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,

b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.

5. Review the results.

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.

Selecting the joints for display of connection forces Usually, the user will probably use module Connections for design and checking of connections in the structure. However, it may be sometimes useful to perform a manual design and fast checking of an individual joint manually.

Scia Engineer enables the user to select required joints (or nodes), define the "configuration" of the connection and review easily the internal forces acting in these connections (or nodes).

The term "configuration" in this context means the basic arrangement of the connection. If no "configuration" is adjusted, the internal forces in the connection are equal to zero, as each joint of the structure must be in equilibrium, which is one of the principles of numerical method applied for calculation. In order to obtain the required internal forces, it is necessary to define:

which 1D member (entering the joint) is the owner of the connection,

which other 1D members contribute to the connection (i.e. the internal forces of which 1D members are transferred into the connection).

Let’s assume a node where four 1D members meet. Two 1D members are vertical and two are horizontal. The joint then looks like a simple cross. If such a joint is selected and no other adjustment is made, the resultant internal forces will be equal to zero and won’t be shown.

If, however, one of the 1D members (e.g. the bottom vertical 1D member) is selected as the owner of the connection, the function shows internal forces that are transferred into the joint from the remaining three 1D members. The connection should be then designed to resist these forces.

The procedure for selection of required nodes and definition of the "configuration" of connection

1. Open service Results.

2. Activate (doubleclick) function Connection input.

Results

511

3. If required, type the name of the connection.

4. Select the co-ordinate system. The internal forces will be then determined in the selected system.

5. Confirm with [OK].

6. Select node or nodes where the connection forces should be displayed. A circular mark is drawn around each of the selected nodes.

7. Close the function.

8. If more than one connection has been defined, clear the selection and select the first one.

9. The Property window displays the parameters of the connection including all the entering 1D members.

10. Select, i.e. unmark, the 1D member that is the "owner" of the connection.

11. Select, i.e. mark, all the 1D members that contribute to the connection.

12. If necessary, clear the selection and select another connection.

Note: The internal forces in the connection may be then displayed using function Connection forces.

Displaying the connection forces Usually, the user will probably use module Connections for design and checking of connections in the structure. However, it may sometimes be useful to perform a manual design and fast checking of an individual joint manually. Scia Engineer provides for a simple and fast determination of internal forces acting in selected joints (nodes).

Once the node and the configuration of the connection are defined, the internal forces may be displayed.

The procedure to display the forces in connection on a screen

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Connection forces (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see below).

4. If required, redraw the screen using button Redraw in the Property window.

5. Review the results.

The procedure to display the forces in connection in the Preview window

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Connection forces (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see below).

4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.

a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,

b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.

5. Review the results.

Parameters of function Connection forces

Redraw This item invokes a regeneration of the screen when the button is pressed.

Selection The results may be shown in either All or User-defined entities.

Type of load The results for load case, load case combination or class may be displayed.

Load case / Combination This item provides for selection of a particular load case or combination for the display.

Filter Here, the user may limit the selection to specific entities only.

Values Either all or only selected quantities may be shown.

Individual components If the previous item is set to More components, the user may specify which particular component should be drawn.

Drawing setup This item enables the user to adjust the view parameters for the result diagrams.

Extreme This item performs no action for this function.

Section This item performs no action for this function.

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.

Displaying the calculation report

Basic Reference Guide

512

If required, the user may display (and subsequently print) a report summarising all the important about carried out calculation.

The procedure to display the calculation report

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Calculation protocol (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).

3. Select the type of calculation you require to be reported.

4. Use function Print > Print / Preview table to create the report.

5. A brief summarising table is shown in the Preview window.

Note: If you double-click the Calculation protocol function in service Results, a small preview window is opened on the screen. This window contains the required information about the last performed calculation.

Displaying the results in tabular form Any of available results can be displayed in tabular form in the Preview window,

The basic principle is explained in chapter Document > Creating the document > Inserting a new section into document from the graphical window.

The same approach is applied to get the required result values into the Preview window. The user just has to use function Print / Preview table.

Displaying the results in named fibres

Named fibres of a cross-section

Scia Engineer enables the user to name selected fibres of selected cross-sections. These named fibres can be then referred to in the Results service in function Member Stress and the calculated stresses can be displayed in these named fibres.

The standard procedure consists of two steps: (i) naming the required fibres in the Editing dialogue for the selected cross-section, (ii) referring to the named fibres in function Member stress in service Results.

Named items dialogue

The first step is made in the Named items dialogue that consists of the following parts and controls.

Cross-section parts This window lists all parts of the selected cross-section. For "normal" cross-sections there is just one line here. For composite cross-sections consisting of multiple partial cross-sections the list is longer.

Cross-section fibres This window contains all the vertices of the selected cross-section. The list offers the vertices for all the cross-section parts listed in the top window.

Graphical window This window shows the graphical representation of the cross-section shape. It also highlights the vertex and/or part that is currently selected in the lists.

[OK] and [Cancel] buttons These buttons close the dialogue. [OK] confirms the changes made, [Cancel] abandons them.

Named fibres in function Results > Member stress

Property window in function Results > Member stress is extended by a couple of options to enable you to refer to the named fibres.

Fibres

All

The stress is displayed in all fibres (i.e. the "envelope" for the stress is displayed)

Top

The stress is displayed in the top fibres of the cross-section.

Bottom

The stress is displayed in the bottom fibres of the cross-section.

Named fibre

You may specify the fibre in which the stress is to be displayed.

Note: You must remember the names of the fibres defined in the Named items dialogue as you are required to type the name in the input field.

Results

513

All named fibres

The stress diagram is displayed in all fibres that have been given a name in the Named items dialogue.

Cross-section parts If the cross-section consists of two or more parts, you may select on which one the stress diagram is to be drawn.

Note: You must remember the names of the cross-section parts defined in the Named items dialogue as you are required to type the name in the input field.

Procedure to name the fibres

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

2. Select the required cross-section.

3. Open the Cross-section editing dialogue.

4. In the properties table find item Edit named items and press the three-dot button [...] next to it.

5. The Named items dialogue is opened on the screen.

6. If required, type the names of the cross-section parts (you are not obliged to name all the parts unless you want so).

7. If required, type the names of the selected fibres (you are not obliged to name all the fibres unless you want so).

8. If required, you may:

a. invoke a pop-up menu in the graphical window of the dialogue and employ some basic display-related functions, or

b. use combination "Press-and-hold keys Ctrl+Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse right button" and zoom-in or zoom-out the drawing, or

c. use combination "Press-and-hold key Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse right button" and move the drawing around the graphical window of the dialogue.

9. Confirm the Named items dialogue with [OK].

10. Confirm the Cross-section editing dialogue with [OK].

11. Close the Cross-section manager.

Procedure to display the results in the given named cross-section part

1. You must have the named cross-section parts defined.

2. Run the calculation and open service Results.

3. Select function Beams > Member stress.

4. In the Property table go to item Cross-section parts.

5. Select option Named item.

6. A new input box called Named item is added to the table.

7. Type the name of the required cross-section part.

8. Refresh the screen using the action button. Note: You must remember the names of the cross-section parts defined in the Named items dialogue as you are required to type the name in the input field.

Procedure to display the results in the named fibre

1. You must have the named fibres defined.

2. Run the calculation and open service Results.

3. Select function Beams > Member stress.

4. In the Property table go to item Fibres.

5. Select option Named item.

6. A new input box called Named item is added to the table.

7. Type the name of the required fibre.

8. Refresh the screen using the action button. Note: You must remember the names of the fibres defined in the Named items dialogue as you are required to type the name in the input field.

Note: Option Named fibres is of higher priority that the option Named cross-section parts. Therefore, once you select Named fibres in the property table, the item Cross-section parts is hidden.

Example

Basic Reference Guide

514

Let us have a solid rectangular cross-section as in figure below. Further, let us name the fibre number 4 "MY TOP" and fibre number 8 "MY BOTTOM".

Note: The vertex (fibre) numbers are generated automatically by the program and cannot be altered by the user.

Let input a beam fully fixed on both its ends and subject it to the self-weight. The deflection diagram clearly indicates which part of the top and bottom surface of the beam is subjected to tension and which interval of the top and bottom surface is under compression. (Top surface: towards the end tension occurs, in the middle the face is under compression. Bottom surface: it is vice versa).

When displaying stress Normal + and Normal- for the user-defined MY TOP and MY BOTTOM fibres, the diagrams look like:

bottom – compression:

bottom – tension:

Results

515

top – compression:

top- tension:

Note: The named fibres and named cross-sections work for stresses in 1D members only.

Displaying the stress distribution over the cross-section Scia Engineer provides for the display of stress distribution over the cross-section of 1D members.

The procedure to display the stress distribution over the cross-section

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Beams > Member stress.

3. Set Fibres to All.

4. Set Drawing to 3D stress diagram.

5. Click the three-dot button in item Selection tool and select the 1D members and sections in these 1D members where the stress diagram is to be drawn.

6. Select the quantity to be displayed.

7. If required, make other adjustments (e.g. Extreme, Drawing setup, etc.).

8. Refresh the screen.

Basic Reference Guide

516

Fast selection of result quantities for the display Whenever service Results is opened, a new toolbar appears at the top of command line. Individual buttons switch on appropriate diagrams.

N axial force

Vy shear force Vy

Vz shear force Vz

Mx bending moment Mx

My bending moment My

My bending moment Mz

ux displacement ux on 1D members

uy displacement uy on 1D members

uz displacement uz on 1D members

deformed structure

displacement of nodes

Rx force reaction Rx

Ry force reaction Ry

Rz force reaction Rz

Mx moment reaction Mx

My moment reaction My

Mz moment reaction Mz

Note: If the command line is hidden, the toolbar does not appear. In order to see the toolbar, display the command line first using function View > Toolbars.

Displaying the natural frequencies The calculated eigenfrequencies (natural frequencies) may be displayed in summarised form in a preview table.

The procedure to display the table with eigenfrequencies

1. If it is not the case, perform dynamic calculation of the project.

2. Open service Results.

3. Double click function Eigen frequencies

Results

517

Evaluating the results for harmonic load Once the calculation has been finished, the user may review the results the same way s/he is accustomed to doing for static calculations.

In addition to standard result quantities, some additional result can be found in the calculation report. These are:

omega, period, frequency,

participation coefficients: wx, i/wx,tot, wy, i/wy,tot, wz, i/wz,tot.

The above-mentioned values are stated for every calculated eigenmode.

Calculation of internal forces in ribs When calculating internal forces in a rib (see the procedure below to learn how to switch this feature on), a substitute T-section is used to calculate the results. The web of this T-section is formed by the rib-beam itself, the flange of the T-section is made of the appropriate effective width of the slab. The effective width of the slab is then used to determine internal forces from the slab that must be added to the internal forces calculated in the rib itself. The internal forces in the slab are transformed into the local coordinate system of the rib before the integration.

T the centre of gravity of the whole substitute T-section

T1 the centre of gravity of the left hand side part of the effective width

T2 the centre of gravity of the right hand side part of the effective width

T3 the centre of gravity of the original rib

Basic Reference Guide

518

The coordinates of centres of gravity are used to determine lever arms in Y and Z direction:

Lever Arm Z1 = T1z – Tz Lever Arm Y1 = T1y – Ty

Lever Arm Z2 = T2z – Tz Lever Arm Y2 = T2y – Ty

Lever Arm Z3 = T3z – Tz Lever Arm Y3 = T3y – Ty

Lever Arm Z = Tz – 0z Lever Arm Y = Ty – 0y

The final internal forces in the rib can be calculated from the formulas below:

N = N beam + N slab, left + N slab, right

Vy = Vy beam + Vy slab, left + Vy slab, right

Vz = Vz beam + Vz slab, left + Vz slab, right

Mx = Mx beam + Mx slab, left + Mx slab, right

My = My beam + My slab, left + My slab, right +

N slab, left * (Lever Arm Z1) – N slab, right * (Lever Arm Z2) +

N beam * Lever Arm Z3;

Mz = Mz beam + Mz slab, left + Mz slab, right +

N slab, left * (Lever Arm Y1) – N slab, right * (Lever Arm Y2) +

N beam * Lever Arm Y3;

The procedure to recalculate internal forces in the rib

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Beams > Internal forces on beams.

3. Select the 1D member(s) where the results should be displayed.

4. Select the quantity to be displayed.

5. In the property dialogue select option Rib.

6. Press button Refresh to see the result diagram.

Results on slabs

Displaying the deformation of nodes on slabs

The procedure to display the deformation of nodes

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function 2D members > Deformation of nodes.

3. Select the slabs for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

Results

519

5. Select the quantity to be displayed.

6. Select the drawing style.

7. If required, change the Drawing setup.

8. Set any other parameter.

9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Note: This function displays deformation of both slabs and 1D members.

The isolines/isobands of deformation can be displayed either on the original (nondeformed) structure or on the deformed one. This can be selected in option Standard in the Property window when the function 2D members > Deformation of nodes is opened.

See also Style of isolines.

Displaying the internal forces on slabs

The procedure to display the internal forces

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function 2D members > Internal forces.

3. Select the slabs for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Select the quantity to be displayed.

6. Select the drawing style.

7. If required, change the Drawing setup.

8. Set any other parameter.

9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Parameters for display of results

Name Specifies the name of the current result quantity.

Selection Specifies on which slabs the results are to be displayed. Read chapter Selecting the 1D members for display for more information.

Type of loads The results can be displayed for calculated load cases or combinations or classes.

Load cases / Combinations / Class This item select the particular load case / combination / class for the display.

Filter The display can be limited to slabs of certain name, material, thickness, etc.

System The result quantities (except those displayed in principal directions) can be displayed in several coordinate systems. Local = local coordinate system of individual finite elements. UCS = user-defined coordinate system UCS polar = user-defined polar coordinate system LCS - Member 2D = local coordinate system of the 2D element

Rotation The results can be displayed in the direction that is rotated by the given angle from the direction specified above.

Averaging of peaks If ON, the peak values in the corners of 2D members are averaged.

Location The program calculates result values in the nodes of individual finite elements. If required, these results can be further processed to obtain "better" displayed values. For more read chapter Averaging of results in FE nodes.

Type of forces It is possible to select from three types of result values: Basic magnitude = Results in local slab axes are displayed. Principal magnitude = Results in principal axes are evaluated. Dimensional magnitude = Quantities for design are calculated.

Envelope

Basic Reference Guide

520

For envelope combinations and for result classes, it is possible to select the minimum or maximum "branch" of the envelope should be displayed.

Drawing The results can be displayed using several different techniques: Standard = isolines / isobands are used. Section = distribution of the quantity along defined section(s) is displayed Resultant = the resultant over defined sections is displayed Section+ Standard = combines the two above-mentioned techniques Trajectories = the trajectories of the quantity are displayed (useful e.g. for principal magnitudes). Read also chapter Isolines Setup for more information and illustrative examples

Values Here the required quantity is selected.

Text output This parameter is available only if type of load is set to "class".

Extreme This parameter says what type extreme is indicated in the screen.

Drawing setup This button can be used to set additional parameter for the display style.

Type of forces

As mentioned above, there are three different types of force. The following tables summarise individual options.

Basic magnitude

Project: plate Available quantities are:

mx, my, mxy, qx, qy

Project: wall Available quantities are:

nx, ny, qxy

Project: general (shell) Available quantities are:

mx, my, mxy, qx, qy, nx, ny, qxy

Principal magnitude

Note: Lower index "m" at the quantity name means the membrane component. Lower index "b" at the quantity name means the bending component.

Project: plate

m1, m2 principal moments

alfa angle between the direction of m1 and planar axis xP

mtmax maximal torque moment

qmax maximal shear force

Project: wall

n1, n2 principal axial forces

alfa angle between the direction of n1 and planar axis xP

Project: general (shell)

m1, m2 principal moment

alfab angle between the direction of m1 and planar axis xP

qmax-b maximal shear force from bending effects

beta angle between the direction of qmxo and planar axis xP

n1, n2 principal axial forces

alfam angle between the direction of n1 and planar axis xP

qmax-m maximal shear force from membrane effects

Results

521

Design magnitude

Project: plate mxD+, myD+, mcD+, mxD–, myD–, mcD–

Project: wall nxD, nyD, ncD

Project: general (shell)

mxD+, myD+, mcD+, mxD–, myD–, mcD–, nxD, nyD, ncD

Design moments in slabs that are related to the surface with positive element coordinate and are marked with + (plus sign). Dimension moments in slabs that are elated to the surface with negative element coordinate and are marked with – (minus sign).

Design forces in a wall are in the middle plane.

Corresponding surface of action of design moments in shells is given directly by the sigh of the moment.

See also chapters Principal internal forces and Design internal forces.

See also chapter Style of isolines.

Note: To activate the use of redistribution strips read chapter Results > Results on slabs > Redistribution strips > Displaying the redistributed results.

Principal internal forces The calculation of principal bending forces is performed to the formula below.

The calculation of principal membrane forces is performed to the formula below.

Design internal forces The calculation of design moments for plates and shells according to the EC2 algorithm (option EC2 is selected) follows the flow chart from CSN P ENV 1992–1–1 (731201), Annex 2, paragraph A2.8.

The following rule is used for indexes:

Basic Reference Guide

522

The calculation of design moments for walls and shells according to the EC2 algorithm (option EC2 is selected) follows the flow chart from CSN P ENV 1992–1–1 (731201), Annex 2, paragraph A2.9.

The following rule is used for indexes:

Quantities mxD and myD (respectively nxD and nyD) are design moments (respectively forces) in the reinforcement. Negative design moments have no practical meaning and are stated just for the reason of completeness.

Quantity mcD (resp. ncD) is design moment (resp. force) in concrete and these two quantities form an integral trio with design moments (resp. forces) in the reinforcement in terms of invariant.

Results

523

Design force in concrete ncD is used for checking of concrete crushing (see CSN P ENV 1992–1–1 (731201), Annex 2, paragraph A2.9). The standard does not mention the design moments in concrete mcD, but their meaning is analogous and are stated for the reason of completeness.

Values of design moments and forces according to the standard algorithm (option EC2 is NOT selected) are calculated according to the left branch of the above mentioned flow charts, i.e. no account is taken of the relation between mx, my and mxy (respectively nx, ny and qxy). This approach is on the safe side (see below) but is less optimal.

The right branch of the flow charts is used if the left branch of the flow charts would lead to one reinforcement direction in compression (negative value of the corresponding quantity). This direction is assigned zero value of the design quantity, the value in the other direction (and also the necessary reinforcement area) is then lower than it would be if the right branch of the flow charts were followed (the condition of completeness is met in both variants). The difference is in increased compression in concrete (mcD and ncD). In this respect the EC2 algorithm can be considered as more economic.

Displaying the stresses on slabs

The procedure to display the stresses

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function 2D members > Stresses.

3. Select the slabs for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Select the quantity to be displayed.

6. Select the drawing style.

7. If required, change the Drawing setup.

8. Set any other parameter.

9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Available stress values

Project: plate, shell

sig1+, sig2+ principal stress at the surface with positive planar z-coordinate

alfa+ angle between the direction of sig1+ and planar axis xP

sigE+ equivalent stress at the surface with positive planar z-coordinate

sig1–, sig2– principal stress at the surface with negative planar z-coordinate

alfa– angle between the direction of sig1– and planar axis xP

sigE– equivalent stress at the surface with negative planar z-coordinate

taumaxb maximal transverse shear stress in middle plane

Project: wall

sig1, sig2 principal stress in middle plane

alfa angle between the direction of sig1 and planar axis xP

sigE equivalent stress in middle plane

taumaxb maximal membrane shear stress in middle plane

See also chapter Stresses.

See also chapter Style of isolines.

Stresses Principal and maximal shear stresses are calculated by means of widely known formulas:

Basic Reference Guide

524

Equivalent stress is calculated by means of Huber–Mieses–Hencky theory:

Displaying the contact stress on slabs

The procedure to display the contact stresses

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function 2D members > Contact stress.

3. Select the slabs for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Select the quantity to be displayed.

6. Select the drawing style.

7. If required, change the Drawing setup.

8. Set any other parameter.

9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

See also Style of isolines.

Calculated C parameters The calculated C parameters can be reviewed in 2D data viewer or in service Results.

The procedure to view the C parameters in 2D Data viewer

1. Perform the calculation

2. Open tree Calculation, mesh.

3. Start function 2D data viewer.

4. Select function Subsoil.

5. Select the required parameter.

6. Adjust other drawing parameters.

7. Invoke the refresh of the screen (through button [Refresh] in the property window)

Results

525

Note: This function offers all five C parameters. The two that are not calculated (C1x and C1y) are constant across the whole ground slab. The other ones may have an arbitrary distribution depending on input boundary conditions.

The procedure to view the C parameters in service Results

1. Perform the calculation

2. Open service Results.

3. Start function Subsoil – C parameters.

4. Select the required parameter.

5. Adjust other drawing parameters.

6. Invoke the refresh of the screen (through button [Refresh] in the property window)

Note: This function offers only the (really) calculated C parameters. The two that are not calculated (C1x and C1y) and are constant across the whole ground slab are not shown here.

Displaying the settlement

The procedure to display settlement

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function Subsoil - Other data.

3. Select the slabs for the display of results.

4. Click action button [Preview] to see a table with settlement results.

Basic Reference Guide

526

Results in membrane elements With regard to the theoretical assumptions some of the internal forces in membrane elements are not defined (are zero):

mx zero (see the fig. below)

my zero

mxy zero

qx zero

qy zero

nx defined

ny defined

qxy defined

Differences in the results between membrane and standard element

The difference in the obtained results resulting from the application of the membrane behaviour can be best demonstrated on a simple example. Let us assume a rectangular plate made of a very thin sheet of steel. The left-hand side of the figure shows the results obtained for a standard 2D element. The right-hand side then contains the results for the membrane elements.

Moment mx

Stress Sigma X+

Results

527

Displaying results for individual FE nodes or elements Scia Engineer offer the option to display in the screen and in the document the numerical result for all loadcases in a selected finite element node or element.

This function is available for all types of results in slabs, walls and shells (i.e. 2D members).

Dialogue for the display of results for individual FE nodes or elements

The dialogue consists of the following parts.

Value in element: the values in the nodes of the selected element are displayed,

node: the value in the given node is displayed.

Get values This button reads the appropriate values and displays them in the preview window.

Preview / Document This button inserts a table into the document with the appropriate result for the selected node/element.

Preview window In this small window the selected results are shown.

The procedure to display the results for individual FE node or element

1. Open service Results.

2. Select the required type of results for 2D members.

3. Click action button Values for loadcase.

4. The function dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. Specify if the values should be shown for a specific node or element.

6. Click button [Get values] to see the values in the small preview window.

7. If required, click the other button to insert the results into the Document.

8. When ready, close the dialogue.

Isolines, isobands, etc.

Averaging of results in FE nodes The program calculates result values in the nodes of individual finite elements. If required, these results can be further processed to obtain "better" displayed values.

Basic Reference Guide

528

The user may select from the following options (the options are demonstrated on a slab composed of two halves of different thickness with one half subjected to a uniformly distributed load and the other half without any loading):

In centres The values in centres (centres of gravity) are calculated as an arithmetic average of nodal values of the finite element. The result is a single value for one finite element.

In nodes, no averaging These are values provided by the solver. The results are kept pure without any processing.

In nodes, averaging Nodal values from adjacent finite elements are averaged in every node. The result is a single value for each node and the distribution becomes continuous.

Moreover, extrapolation of values is carried out on free edges (the values on the free edge are so modified so that the average value in the element was preserved).

Results

529

In nodes, averaging on macro

This is similar to the option above, but the values are not averaged if:

elements belong to a different 2D member,

elements are located on different sides of an internal edge,

an internal point is defined.

For these situations, the distribution is non-continuous and a possible discontinuity (step-change) in the distribution of internal is taken into account, which may a result of applied loads, supports, changes of physical properties.

Note: The averaging may not be available for every result quantity. Only some results may be subject to this type of "postprocessing".

Isolines setup The values set here are used as a default option in Drawing setup dialogues when the results on slabs are drawn in the form of isolines.

Styles – isolines / isobands

The style of isolines can be adjusted independently for different kind of representation of results (in centres of finite elements, averaged in nodes, non-averaged in nodes, averaged on macros). These settings are used if the results are displayed with the parameter Drawing set to Standard:

Averaged values in nodes

Basic Reference Guide

530

One colour

Smooth

Coloured mesh

Results

531

Isolines

Isobands

Labelled isolines

Basic Reference Guide

532

Numbers

Constant (centre) values on elements

One colour

Colours

Results

533

Numbers

Non-averaged values in nodes

One colour

Smooth

Basic Reference Guide

534

Isolines

Isobands

Labelled isolines

Results

535

Numbers

Styles – arrows / vectors

The style of isolines can be adjusted independently for different kind of representation of results (in centres of finite elements, averaged in nodes, non-averaged in nodes, averaged on macros). These settings are used if the results are displayed with the parameter Drawing set to Trajectories:

Averaged values in nodes

One colour

Basic Reference Guide

536

Colour

Arrow

Coloured arrows

Constant (centre) values on elements

Results

537

One colour

Colour

Arrow

Basic Reference Guide

538

Coloured arrows

Non-averaged values in nodes

One colour

Colour

Results

539

Arrow

Coloured arrows

Common properties

Display mesh If ON, the finite element mesh is displayed.

Lighting If ON, a light above the displayed surface is switched on. The colours get brighter.

Flat shading The effect of shading is applied.

Number of isolines Specifies the number of isolines used.

The number must be from interval <1, 99>.

Surfaces with isolines

The isolines may be drawn on a "transparent" slab, on a slab in "background" or on a slab of "rendered" colour.

This option is useful if the slabs are in several levels and the view is so adjusted that one slab overlaps the other and hides a part of that slab from your view. See the pictures below.

Basic Reference Guide

540

Transparent

Background

Rendered

Isobands style

Isolines

Results

541

Filled

Palette properties

Font Defines the font of the palette.

Size Specifies the font size for the palette.

Local extremes

This option allows the user to mark places where the displayed quantity reaches its local extreme. It is possible to display only "minimum peaks" or only the "maximum peaks" or both. Various description options are available.

Extreme None

No values are displayed.

Local minimum and maximum

Both minimum and maximum are displayed.

Local minimum

Only minimum is displayed.

Local maximum

Only maximum is displayed.

Style Transparent description

Basic Reference Guide

542

Description

Text with cross

Procedure to adjust the isolines parameters

1. Start menu function Setup > Colours/Lines.

2. Select tab Isolines.

3. Press button [Detailed setup].

Drawing setup for isolines The Drawing setup dialogue is accessible from the property window of any function for display of results. Usually, it is the last item in the Property window.

Results

543

The three-dot button opens a separate dialogue with settings for a particular quantity and for a particular display style. The Drawing setup dialogue will look differently for the results on 1D members and 2D members, which is quite logical.

IMPORTANT NOTE

Moreover, the contents and layout of the Drawing setup dialogue for the results on 2D members will differ depending on some other settings such as:

type of averaging of results on 2D members (in centres of finite elements, averaged in nodes, non-averaged in nodes, averaged on macros),

drawing style (standard, section, resultant, trajectories),

type of result quantity.

The following text will try to summarize the settings that may be present in the Drawing setup dialogue when isolines (standard drawing style) or trajectories are used to display the results.

The Drawing setup dialogue for the drawing style set to section or resultant is identical to the Drawing setup dialogue for 1D members.

Drawing setup dialogue for the standard drawing style (isolines)

The dialogue is divided into four parts: Display, Minimum and maximum settings, Ground value, Local extremes. The items in individual parts may differ depending on the style selected in the Display part. The following text focuses on settings that are exclusive to the Drawing setup dialogue and are not available in the Isolines setup dialogue. The meaning of individual options that will not be explained below is shown in chapter Isolines setup.

Display

Display style The list of options depends on the type of averaging of results on 2D members. Individual options are presented in chapter Isolines setup.

Display mesh If ON, the finite element is drawn as well.

This option is available for relevant display styles.

Lightning If ON, the effect of a light is applied.

This option is available for relevant display styles.

Number of isolines Defines the number of isolines, i.e. the refinement of the "map" of the result.

This option is available for relevant display styles.

Colour Defines the colour used for the display. This option is available only if the display style is set to one colour.

Surfaces with isolines The isolines may be drawn on a "transparent" slab, on a slab in "background" or on a slab of "rendered" colour.

This option is useful if the slabs are in several levels and the view is so adjusted that one slab overlaps the other and hides a part of that slab from your view. Transparent

Basic Reference Guide

544

Background

Rendered

Palette values The explanation of this parameter is given in a separate chapter Palette values for isobands/isolines (see below).

Advanced Display settings

The advanced settings may differ according to the selected display style.

Advanced settings for isobands

Number of isobands Defines the "refineness" of the scale.

Style Specifies the style.

Filled

The bands are fully in colour.

Inserted isolines

The bands are not filled with the adjusted colour, just intermediate isolines are drawn in each band (the final display is similar to "labelled isolines").

Isoband contour: Display If ON, the band border is drawn as a olid line.

Isoband contour: Label If ON, appropriate scale value is attached to each band.

Predefined palette colours The use may select one of several predefined colour schemes.

This is available only if option User-adjustable palette values is selected in the main Drawing setup dialogue.

Palette colours It is possible to adjust a user-defined colour for each band.

This is available only if option User-adjustable palette values is selected in the main Drawing setup dialogue.

Results

545

Numerical values for individual isobands or isolines can be adjusted by the user. For more read chapter Palette values for isobands/isolines.

Advanced settings for labelled isolines

Number of isolines with description

Determines the number of drawn labelled isolines – see the examples below.

6 labelled isolines

+ 1 inserted

3 labelled isolines

+ 1 inserted

Basic Reference Guide

546

3 labelled isolines

+ 3 inserted

Number of inserted isolines Determines the number of drawn non-labelled isolines inserted between labelled ones – see the examples below.

Coloured isolines If ON, isolines are in colour. If OFF, isolines are black&white.

Letters If ON, letters are used instead of numerical values to describe individual isolines.

Minimum and maximum settings

It is possible to define the range of the scale. Normally, the program calculates the range on the basis of the result values. If required, however, the user may decide to change the top and bottom limit value of the scale.

User defined values If ON, the user-input minimum and maximum values are used for the isolines palette.

If OFF, the automatically calculated minimum and maximum values are used.

Minimum The (disabled) edit box on the left shows the automatically calculated minimum value.

The user may input the required minimum value to the edit on the right.

Maximum ditto for the maximum value

Ground value

Use value

Value

If ON, the user may specify a value (zero by default) that is marked in the diagram. Sometimes the zero value may be useful to see where in the structure a specific quantity passes from negative to positive values. Sometimes a specific non-zero value may quickly reveal a place where some quantity exceeds a certain limit.

The picture for example clearly shows where the deformation exceeds 10 mm.

Results

547

Draw isoline This option accompanies the option above. If ON then a line marking the "border" is drawn.

Use +/- palette If ON, not only the border (i.e. the ground value) is drawn but only two colours are used for the diagram – one for "up-to-the-ground-value" interval and the other one for the "above-the-ground-value" interval. (see the picture above and the pictures below)

+/- ON

Basic Reference Guide

548

+/- OFF

Local extremes

This option allows the user to mark places where the displayed quantity reaches its local extreme. It is possible to display only "minimum peaks" or only the "maximum peaks" or both. Various description options are available.

Extreme None

No values are displayed.

Local minimum and maximum

Both minimum and maximum are displayed.

Local minimum

Only minimum is displayed.

Local maximum

Only maximum is displayed.

Style Transparent description

Description

Results

549

Text with cross

Description colour Selects the colour of the printed description.

Drawing setup dialogue for the trajectories drawing style

The dialogue is divided into three parts: Display, Minimum and maximum settings, Local extremes. The items in individual parts may differ depending on the style selected in the Display part.

The meaning of individual parameters is analogous to the meaning for the standard drawing style (isolines) – see above.

More information about some settings can be found in chapter Isolines setup.

Palette values for isobands/isolines The numerical values used in isoline/isoband palette are normally calculated automatically by the program and respect the range of the evaluated quantity (i.e. the minimal and maximal value) and the adjusted number of isolines/isobands.

Under certain circumstances, it may be more convenient to adjust the palette values manually. For example, when designing the reinforcement in concrete 1D members it may be useful to adjust the values so that they correspond to the area of let’s say 1, 2, 3, ... n bars of a certain diameter.

Types of palette values

Automatic palette values – normal The palette values are calculated automatically and used AS IS, i.e. the decimal digits are used in the length specified in Setup > Units.

E.g.:

Basic Reference Guide

550

Automatic palette values – rounded

The palette values are calculated automatically and rounded, so that the user can better "read" the results.

E.g.:

User-adjustable palette values By default, the palette is identical to Automatic palette values – rounded option. But, the user can edit the values and adjust such values that best meet his/her needs.

Moreover, the palette becomes "frozen" and is used for every result quantity.

The procedure to adjust the type of palette values

1. Open the required service (e.g. Results, Concrete, etc.).

2. Select the required function for evaluation of results (e.g. Internal forces in Results).

3. In the Property window, click three-dot button [...] to open the Drawing setup dialogue.

4. In the combo box in the left-hand side part of the dialogue select the required palette values type.

5. If necessary, use button [Advanced settings] to edit the values or to make other adjustments.

6. Confirm with [OK].

Important note: The option with user adjustable palette values requires that maximum and minimum value of the corresponding quantity is know. These two values become known only after the quantity has been displayed on the screen at least once. Therefore, until you display the result diagrams on the screen using action button [Refresh], it is not possible to select the type of palette values.

Saving the palette for later use

The palette with User-adjustable palette values can be saved and later read into another project or service or function.

The procedure to save the palette

1. Open the required service (e.g. Results, Concrete, etc.).

2. Select the required function for evaluation of results (e.g. Internal forces in Results).

3. In the Property window, click three-dot button [...] to open the Drawing setup dialogue.

4. In the combo box in the left-hand side part of the dialogue select User-adjustable palette values.

5. The [Save palette ...] and [Load palette ...] buttons appear in the dialogue.

6. If necessary, use button [Advanced settings] to edit the values or to make other adjustments.

7. Use button [Save palette ...] to save the adjusted palette for later re-use.

8. Close the dialogue.

Note: When you need to load a palette you saved, the procedure is analogous to the procedure above. Just use button [Load palette ...] instead of [Save palette ...].

Averaging strips

Results

551

Averaging strips This functionality provides for automatic averaging of peak results around defined points or along defined line strips on slabs. The users can define several styles how to calculate the averaged values. The averaging can be applied to internal forces on slabs and to required reinforcement areas used in the design of reinforcement in concrete slabs.

The averaging strips are defined as what is termed additional data. This fact together with some other characteristics of the averaging strips leads to the following rules concerning the manipulation with the already defined strips:

No geometrical manipulation is supported (i.e. the averaging strip cannot be copied, moved, etc.) The only exception is the direct editing of the coordinated of the definition points in the Property Window.

The averaging strip can be normally deleted.

The removal or editing of the defined averaging strip DOES NOT influences the results.

If the slab that contains the averaging strip is moved, copied, etc. the averaging strip "goes with" its master slab.

The averaging strips react to the activity of the slabs. It means that only averaging strips that are defined on active slabs are visible.

Check of data verifies the position of the strips and all invalid strips (e.g. located out of the master slab) are deleted.

Averaging strips versus finite element mesh

The averaging algorithm uses only the FE nodes that are located inside the averaging strip. This may cause certain inaccuracies especially in the combination with larger finite elements. Therefore, it is recommended to define internal edges along the averaging strips. This ensures that finite element nodes are generated along the edge of the averaging strip, which may significantly improve the accuracy.

The recommended procedure is thus:

1. Define the model of the structure.

2. Perform the calculation.

3. Review the results.

4. Define averaging strips.

5. Review the averaged results.

6. Decide on the final location and number of averaging strips.

7. Define internal edges along the averaging strips.

8. Repeat the calculation to obtain the improved results.

"Density" of averaging strips

The averaging strips can be defined almost arbitrarily. For the purpose of this paragraph we will distinguish two situations. Averaging strips defined with a gap between individual strips and averaging strips defined one next to another (e.g. strip above support and strip in the "middle" of the span defined without any gap in between).

The possible effect of these configurations can be best explained in the following pictures.

Separate strips (i.e. gap between strips)

If the averaging strips are defined as separate, the algorithm can meet the condition that the distribution of the quantity should as much constant across the span as possible. In other words, the quantity is constant (more or less) across the whole width of the strip. The vertical white line indicates the strip.

Adjacent strips (i.e. no gap between strips)

On the other hand, if the averaging strips are defined closely one next to another, there is no space between them for the algorithm to handle the change of the magnitude of the given quantity, as the magnitude cannot change in step, it must be gradual. Thus one of the strips must be affected by the change in the magnitude. This is shown in the figure below where the value of the result quantity varies along the width of the strip.

Basic Reference Guide

552

Internal forces versus required reinforcement areas

The averaging algorithm can be applied to (i) internal forces in slabs and (ii) required reinforcement areas in slabs. Each of the averaging is performed separately. It means that averaging internal forces are calculated from non-averaged internal forces and averaged required reinforcement areas are calculated from non-averaged required reinforcement areas. Thus it is NOT true that the averaged required reinforcement areas are calculated from averaged internal forces.

Defining a new averaging strip

Procedure to define a new averaging strip

1. Define the project and perform the calculation. The completion of the calculation is necessary to get access to service Results that contains the function for the definition of the averaging strips. See also note below.

2. Open service Results.

3. Open branch 2D members.

4. Start (double-click) function Averaging strip.

5. Fill in the parameters in the input dialogue – see below.

6. Input the strip in the graphical window.

7. End the function.

Note: Alternatively, the same function can be accessed from service Concrete. The procedure described above is useful when you want to review averaged internal forces. The alternative is suitable for the design of required reinforcement areas with the averaging taken into account. This function is accessible even prior to the completion of calculation. On the other hand, it is available only to users who purchase the module for the design of concrete structures and on condition that the material concrete has been defined in the project.

Averaging strip parameters

Name Specifies the name of the strip.

Type Strip

The averaging strip is defined by a line with a specified width.

Point

The averaging strip is defined by a point, width, length, and angle (that specifies the direction of the strip).

Width Defines the width of the averaging strip.

Length (only if Type = Point)

Defines the length of the averaging strip.

Angle (only if Type = Point)

Defines the direction of the averaging strip.

Direction Specifies the direction in which the averaging is to be calculated.

Longitudinal

The averaging is done along the defined strip. We can imagine that the strip represents a 1D member and we want the program to smooth the distribution of the result along that 1D member.

Perpendicular

The averaging is performed in the direction that is

Results

553

perpendicular to the length of the strip. This option is for special purposes only.

Both

The averaging is made in both directions. Again, this option is for special purposes only, e.g. heads of columns.

None

No averaging is made. This option may be useful if one (or several) defined averaging strip(s) should be temporarily ignored while other strips are still required to be used.

Practical demonstration

The following example demonstrates the meaning and effect of parameter Direction.

Let us have a simple plate supported by nine columns placed symmetrically in both directions and review moment mx calculated without averaging strips and with different variants of the strips.

First, let us define horizontal averaging strips placed just over the supports (the support means the head of the column).

Second, let us define horizontal averaging strips placed both above the supports and between them.

Basic Reference Guide

554

Third, let us define vertical averaging strips just over the supports.

Fourth, let us define vertical averaging strips placed both above the supports and between them.

Let us subject the plate to the self-weight and to a uniformly distributed load placed over the whole plate. The result diagram for mx (horizontal direction) without any averaging looks like this.

Now, let us adjust longitudinal direction for the averaging. It means that the results will be averaged along the length of the strip and will be more or loss constant across the strip.

The result for the horizontal averaging strips defined only above the supports will be like this.

Results

555

The result for the horizontal averaging strips defined above both the supports and between them will be like this.

The following picture shows that vertically oriented strips has almost no impact on the distribution of moment mx.

Now, let us try to change the direction of averaging to Perpendicular. The following picture represents the results for the horizontal averaging strips defined above both the supports and between them. You can see almost no difference in comparison with the unaveraged results.

Basic Reference Guide

556

On the other hand, the vertical averaging strips placed over the supports give the following result for moment mx.

The vertical averaging strips placed both over the supports and between them give the following result.

The averaging affects also the results drawn in the section (i.e. not using the isolines / isobands). Let us define a section in the middle of the plate parallel to the x-axis. Let us adjust the longitudinal direction for the averaging strips and look at the results for the horizontal averaging strips placed above the supports.

The first picture shows the result without averaging.

Results

557

The second picture the result with the averaging.

Editing the existing averaging strip

Procedure to edit the properties of the defined averaging strip

1. Select the required averaging strip.

2. The properties of the strip are displayed in the Property Window.

3. Change the required parameter (Direction, node coordinate, etc.)

4. The change is automatically immediately accepted.

5. Clear the selection.

Tip: Open service Result. Open branch 2D members. Select function Averaging strip (just select, do not double-click). In bottom right corner of the screen, on the status bar, click the "filter field" and select Filter for tree. With these settings, the only entity the cursor can select is just the averaging strip. This may simplify the process of selection.

Deleting the averaging strip

Procedure to delete the defined averaging strip

1. Select the required averaging strip.

2. The properties of the strip are displayed in the Property Window.

3. Press key [Del].

4. The strip is deleted.

Tip: Open service Result. Open branch 2D members. Select function Averaging strip (just select, do not double-click). In bottom right corner of the screen, on the status bar, click the "filter field" and select Filter for tree. With these settings, the only entity the cursor can select is just the averaging strip. This may simplify the process of selection.

Displaying the averaged results In order to activate the averaging algorithm, the user must select the appropriate option in service Results.

Basic Reference Guide

558

Procedure to activate the averaging of internal forces

1. Open service Results.

2. Select function 2D members > Member 2D – Internal forces.

3. In the property Window adjust the required parameters for the display of the results.

4. Select option Averaging of peak (without this option being selected, the results are NOT averaged even when averaging strips have been defined).

5. Refresh the screen.

Procedure to activate the averaging of required reinforcement areas

1. Open service Concrete.

2. Depending on the needs, select function 2D member > Member design – Design – ULS or 2D member > Member design – Design – crack width.

3. In the property Window adjust the required parameters for the display of the results.

4. Select option Averaging of peak (without this option being selected, the results are NOT averaged even when averaging strips have been defined).

5. Refresh the screen.

View parameters related to averaging strips A special view parameter can be found in the View parameters setting dialogue.

Procedure to display / hide the defined averaging strips

1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.

2. Select Tab Structure.

3. Look into group Averaging strips.

4. Tick option Display to see the averaging strips (default) or clear the option to hide them.

5. Confirm with [OK].

Averaging strips example To illustrate the algorithm of averaging strips, a manual verification is performed.

A square slab is inputted with dimensions 2m x 2m.

The mesh size is set to 0,5m.

An averaging strip was inputted in Y-direction with averaging set to 'Perpendicular'

Result of mx in nodes not averaged:

Results

559

Result of mx in nodes not averaged with averaging strip activated:

Manual verification:

Step 1: Create sections perpendicular to the inputted averaging direction.

In this example, the averaging was set to 'perpendicular' => create sections in longitudinal direction.

section A is inputted just outside the strip from (0,499;0) to (0,499;2)

section B is inputted just inside the strip from (0,501;0) to (0,501;2)

Basic Reference Guide

560

section C is inputted in the middle of the slab from (1;0) to (1;2)

Result of mx in nodes not averaged:

Step 2: Look at the average result in each section by setting the course to 'uniform':

=> Section A: 0,08

=> Section B: -0,03

=> Section C: -0,16

These are the results which are shown when activating averaging strips!

Step 3: Result of mx in nodes not averaged with averaging strip activated:

Results

561

Refreshing the results

Principle An ideal state would be if everything could be fully automatic and made immediately without any delay. This is even more true with reference to software and its interaction with the user.

Unfortunately, this is only an ideal state that can hardly be achieved in practice. What’s more, sometimes the immediate response to any user’s action can be even undesirable, especially when a set of successive steps is necessary to complete a particular action.

Scia Engineer therefore presents a well-thought-out compromise solution in service Results and also in the Document.

The implemented solution consists of two separate steps:

1. The user can freely select "WHAT" should be displayed and also adjust "HOW" it should be displayed.

2. The user then gives the command "refresh (or display or regenerate) everything NOW".

Refresh of results In order to refresh (regenerate the display of) results on the screen a special Action button is located in the Property Window of Scia Engineer user interface. This button is called Refresh.

The procedure for refresh of results on the screen

1. Open service Results.

2. Select required function (e.g. Internal forces on beam, deformation of nodes, etc.)

Basic Reference Guide

562

3. In the Property Window, select required load case or combination, quantity and adjust other parameters defining the display style.

4. When finished with the settings, press Action button [Refresh].

5. The screen is regenerated.

6. Evaluate the displayed diagrams.

7. When finished, select another result quantity and / or change the display settings and press Action button [Refresh] again.

8. The screen is regenerated once more in order to reflect the latest adjustment.

9. Repeat steps 7 to 8 as many times as reguired.

Note: Whenever a change made in the Property Window requires a subsequent refresh of the screen, item Refresh in Action buttons is highlighted in red.

Example for refresh of results The following example demonstrates the use of [Refresh] button from service Results.

A model must be created and calculated. A simple frame will be used in this example.

The frame is subject to:

self weight

a vertical force located in the middle of the span of the beam

Results

563

a horizontal force acting at the top of the left column

When service Results is opened and function Internal forces on beam is selected, no result diagrams appear on the screen.

In the Property window, make required adjustments, e.g. set Type of loads to Load cases, and under Load cases select LC1 (i.e. the self weight). Press button [Refresh] in the Action buttons.

Once button [Refresh] is pressed, the diagram is displayed (this time, bending moment diagram for self weight load).

Basic Reference Guide

564

In order to see the diagram for another load case, make the required setting in the Property Window.

And press button [Refresh] again.

The diagram is regenerated.

And the same may be repeated once more for the last load case.

Button [Refresh] must be pressed again.

Results

565

The selected result is drawn on the screen.

The same may procedure may be now be repeated for any other result quantity, load case, load case combination, or for any other display-style related adjustments.

Selected sections

Selected sections for result diagrams

1D members

Diagrams of result quantities are normally displayed in sections whose density is defined in the Solver setup dialogue. If the need arises the density may be reduced significantly by means of "user-defined" sections. The user may simply define a very limited (or excessive, if s/he likes) set of specific points on the structure (called sections) and the calculated results will be shown in these particular points only.

A section on a 1D member has the following parameters.

Name Identifies the section.

Position x Defines the position of the section on the 1D member.

Coordination definition Specifies the coordinate system used for the definition. Either absolute or relative coordinates may be used.

The relative coordinate must lie within interval <0; 1>.

The absolute coordinate must lie within interval <0; the length of a particular 1D member >.

Origin Defines whether the position is measured from the beginning or end of the 1D member.

Repeat Specifies the number of section defined at the same time.

Delta x If Repeat is greater than 1 (one), this value defines the distance between individual sections on the 1D member.

Slabs

Similarly to 1D members, it is possible to define a specific section or section across the slab where the results should be displayed..

Name Identifies the section.

Draw Defines the plane in which the section is drawn.

Upright to element = the plane of the result-diagram is perpendicular to the plane of the slab

Element plane = the result-diagram is drawn in the plane of the slab

X direction = the result-diagram is drawn in the direction of the global X-axis

Y direction = the result-diagram is drawn in the direction of the global Y-axis

Z direction = the result-diagram is drawn in the direction of the global Z-axis

Basic Reference Guide

566

Direction of cut The section plane is defined by a line (input graphically in the graphical window) and by this "in-plane" vector.

See the example below.

Let us assume a single slab as in the picture.

There are two sections defined. The lines defining the sections are not situated in the plane of the slab but are 1 metre below the slab. To indicate the vertical direction and help you to understand the picture, four vertical columns supporting the slab are defined. The columns intersect the lines defining the sections: (i) the line defining the left-hand section intersects the two columns on the left and (ii) the line defining the right-hand section intersects the two columns on the right. The vector defining the left-hand section is set to: 1 / 0 / 1. The vector defining the right-hand section is set to: 0 / 0 / 1.

It is clearly seen that while the diagram for the right-hand section is drawn directly above the section defining line, the left-hand section is moved to the right in the direction of the X axis. In fact, the diagram is displayed along a line that forms the intersection of the slab and the plane coming out from the section-defining line inclined by 45 degrees from the vertical.

Defining a new section for display of results

Procedure to define a new section on a 1D member

1. Open service Structure.

2. Start function Section on beam.

3. Adjust the section parameters.

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. Select the 1D members where the section / sections should be defined.

6. Close the function.

7. Close the service.

Procedure to define a new section on a slab

1. Open service Results.

2. Start function 2D Members > Section on 2D member.

3. Adjust the section parameters.

4. Confirm with [OK].

5. Define the section by its starting and end point.

6. Close the function.

7. Close the service.

Results

567

Displaying the results in selected sections

1D member

By default any result diagram is displayed in all calculated sections. If required, it is however possible to limit the diagram to a limited set of explicitly defined points – user defined sections.

Whenever a function displaying some result quantity is started, the parameters controlling the behaviour of this function are displayed in the Property window. One of the parameters is called Section. The meaning and consequences of this parameter will be demonstrated on a simple continuous beam.

Let’s assume a simple three-span continuous beam subject to uniformly distributed load. The beam is defined as a set of three beams attached to each other.

Further, let’s define one section in the middle of each span.

Finally, let’s display the diagram of calculated bending moment My. Using the default setting (parameters Section set to Ends), the diagram may look like:

Now, let’s change the setting of parameter Section to Ends. The calculated values of bending moment will be drawn in end points of each defined beam.

Basic Reference Guide

568

Now, let’s change the setting of parameter Section to Input+Ends. The calculated values of bending moment will be drawn in end points of each defined beam and in three defined sections.

Now, let’s change the setting of parameter Section to Input. The calculated values of bending moment will be drawn only in the defined sections.

Slab

By default any result diagram is displayed by means of isolines / isobands. If required, it is however possible to limit the display to a diagram along a defined section – user defined sections.

Whenever a function displaying some result quantity on slabs is started, the parameters controlling the behaviour of this function are displayed in the Property window. One of the parameters is called Drawing. The meaning and consequences of this parameter will be demonstrated on a simple slab.

Let’s define a rectangular slab subject to any load.

Results

569

Further, let’s define a section cutting the section e.g. in the middle.

Let’s calculate the slab and display e.g. internal forces.

Let’s try all the options for the Drawing parameter.

Standard The results are shown using isolines/isobands. A legend is displayed in the top right corner of the graphical window.

Section The results are drawn along the defined section across the slab. Function Setup > Scales can be used o control the size of the diagram.

Basic Reference Guide

570

Resultant The resultant along the section is calculated. Again, function Setup > Scales can be used o control the size of the diagram.

Standard + Section Options Standard and Section are cmbined together.

Trajetories This option works for principal quantities only. The direction (trajectory) of the quantity is shown. A legend is displayed in the top right corner of the graphical window.

Results

571

Type of diagram in the section

According to the needs of a particular calculation, Scia Engineer allows you to select the most appropriate type of representation of the result in a section across the slab.

To understand more the individual options, let us input two identical slabs subjected to the identical load. Further, let us define a section across each of the slabs. The first slab has one section defined across the whole width. In the second slab, let us divide the section into eight intervals to have finer results - see the image below.

Precise The precise distribution of the displayed result quantity is draw along the section.

Basic Reference Guide

572

In our example of two identical slabs, diagrams on both slabs look identical as well.

Uniform The average value of the result is displayed. This option may be useful to see the effect of the structure and loads to the particular section.

The example of two identical slabs produces the following results. The "precise" area must be equal to the area of the "uniform" rectangular diagram.

Results

573

Trapezoid The distribution of the quantity along the section is approximated by a trapezoid. This option may be useful if you model your structure in parts and use the reactions of upper parts as load for lower parts. It may be practical to idealise the effect of the upper part by this trapezoidal distribution.

The example of two identical slabs produces results where the force resultant and moment resultant of the trapezoidal diagram are equal to the resultants determined from the "precise" diagram.

Basic Reference Guide

574

Procedure to select the type of diagram in the section across a slab

1. Have the project calculated.

2. Open service Results.

3. Call a function that displays the results in slabs in sections, i.e.:

a. 2D members > Deformation of nodes,

b. 2D members > Member 2D – Internal forces,

c. 2D members > Member 2D – Stresses.

4. Note that there are two items named Drawing in the property window – on condition that the first Drawing is set to Section (otherwise there is just one Drawing item in the property window).

5. Set the first Drawing to Section.

6. Set the second Drawing to the required type of diagram (Precise, Uniform, Trapezoid).

7. Select the quantity to be displayed.

8. If required, adjust other display parameters.

9. Refresh the screen.

Displaying the resultant in the section across a slab When displaying the results in sections across slabs, you may select between two options. Either the distribution over the section is displayed or the resultant for that section is calculated and shown.

Procedure to display the resultant in the section across a slab

1. Have the project calculated.

2. Open service Results.

3. Call a function that displays the results in slabs in sections, i.e.:

a. 2D members > Deformation of nodes,

b. 2D members > Member 2D – Internal forces,

c. 2D members > Member 2D – Stresses.

4. Set the Drawing to Resultant.

5. Select the quantity to be displayed.

6. If required, adjust other display parameters.

7. Refresh the screen.

575

Graphic output

Introduction to graphic output Making a project of a structure represents not only the creation of a precise model and performing of an exact calculation but also a preparation of a complete documentation providing for clear lucid representation of results.

Scia Engineer offers the user a set of powerful tools for this task.

Direct graphical print This output type enables the user to make a direct print of a drawing from the screen onto a graphical device. In other words, "what you just see on the screen is what you get on paper". The last sentence is however not precise as the user can, before the very act of printing, arrange the layout of the drawing to meet his/her requirements.

To sum up, the main purpose of this output option is to print the contents of the graphical window.

Picture gallery The Picture gallery is a tool that enables the user to collect and further edit various pictures. The pictures may be "scanned" screens of the program or they may be created manually, or both in one. The pictures collected here may be printed, used in the Paper space gallery or inserted into the Document.

To sum up, the main purpose of this output option is to prepare separate pictures for further processing.

Paper space gallery The Paper space gallery is an extremely powerful tool for creation of "graphic output sheets." These "sheets" may consist of multiple inserted pre-created pictures, manually added drawings and text passages.

To sum up, the main purpose of this output option is to create well-arranged professional drawings.

Document The Document is a universal environment for the preparation and editing of sophisticated outputs consisting of pictures, text passages, and tables in any order.

Direct graphic output

Making the direct graphic output The contents of the graphical window can be printed any time directly to any attached graphical output device (printer, plotter, PDF driver, etc.)

The main dialogue of function Print picture contains the following controls.

Caption This item enables the user to specify a caption of the drawing. It is also possible to click the three-dot button and select one of the "automatic" captions.

Templates In general, the program offers a list of available pre-prepared layout templates. Some of them are portrait oriented, some of them are landscape oriented. The user my select which templates should be used for his/her drawing. The combo box can be used to filter the list of available templates.

Zoom / fit Fit to window = the output is scaled so that "what is in the graphical window" fits the output page. (If function "zoom-all" was used in the graphical window prior to calling function Print picture, the effect of this option is very similar to Fit to page.) Fit to page = the output is scaled so that the whole structure fits the output page. Scale = the picture is printed in the specified scale.

Graphics This option is disabled for the time being.

Rendering If the picture should be printed as rendered, the user can select the required stretch mode and memory that will used for the output. See also chapter Selecting the suitable stretch mode.

Preview The preview window shows the final layout.

[Printer setup ...] This button opens a dialogue where the required printing device can be selected and its options set.

Basic Reference Guide

576

[Edit printed layout ...] This button opens a dialogue where the drawing itself can be graphically modified or saved to an external graphical file.

[Print] This button finishes the action.

[Cancel] This button cancels the action.

The procedure for making the direct graphical output

1. Activate function Print picture:

a. either using button [Print picture] > [Print picture] ( > ) on toolbar Project,

b. or using menu function File > Print picture > Print picture,

c. or using the pop-up menu of the graphical window and its function Print picture.

2. The Graphic output dialogue is opened. The heading of the dialogue shows the name of the active printing device.

3. Select required options in the dialogue (see above).

4. If required, use button [Edit printed layout ...] to make any modifications or amendments to the drawing.

5. If required, change the printer setup using button [Printer setup ...].

6. Print the drawing on the connected printing device – using button [Print].

Editing the graphic output layout A drawing in the Paper space editor may be processed by means of numerous editing and drawing functions offered on the editor toolbar and in its pop-up menu.

Control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue

Insert picture

Inserts a picture from required source.

Select

Switches on the "select" mode of the Graphic output dialogue.

Line

When pressed, allows the user to draw a single line on the page. The first left mouse button click defines the staring point of the line. The second click defines the end point of the line.

In order to end the "line mode", button [Select] ( ) must be pressed.

Polyline

When pressed, allows the user to draw a polygon of straight lines. The individual vertices of the polygon are defined by means of a left mouse button click. In order to end the polygon, button [Esc] must be pressed.

In order to end the "polyline mode", button [Select] ( ) must be pressed.

Rectangle

When pressed, allows the user to draw a rectangle on the page. The first left mouse button click defines the first corner of the rectangle. The second click defines the opposite corner of the rectangle.

In order to end the "rectangle mode", button [Select] ( ) must be pressed.

Text

Provides for the insertion of text.

Group

Several items on the drawing may be grouped into one.

Ungroup

Items previously grouped together may be "broken" to individual original items.

Delete

Deletes selected items from the drawing.

Edit properties

Adjusts properties of a particular picture in the drawing.

Undo

Returns back the last performed action.

Update automatic text

Updates all automatic text items inserted into the drawing.

E.g. if a DATE and TIME item is in the drawing, the update fills these item with current date and time.

Stamp + header wizard

Adds a title block and a heading to the drawing.

Graphic output

577

Page setting

Sets the parameters of the page.

Zoom buttons Adjust the required magnification of the printed sheet on the screen.

Save

Saves the drawing into an external file.

Save as template

Saves the current drawing as a template into the Template folder.

Print

Prints the drawing on a connected graphical device.

For information about the adjustment of various parameters for individual items of the graphic output drawing see chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Checkbox bar of the Graphic output editor

Ortho tick box Active only if a line is being drawn. If selected, the drawn line is either horizontal or vertical only.

Snap to endpoint If ON, the cursor snaps endpoints of existing entities if it is positioned near of any such a point.

Cursor step If ON, the step defined in Page settings is used. Otherwise, the cursor moves freely and smoothly all over the area of the drawing.

Zoom wheel Located at the top right corner of the dialogue window. Enables the user to zoom in and zoom out the view dynamically.

button [Print] Performs the printing and closes the dialogue.

button [Cancel] Closes the dialogue.

Pop-up menu of the Graphic output dialogue

Zoom Adjust the required magnification of the printed sheet on the screen.

Wired model for view manipulations

If ON, simplified wired model is drawn during view-adjusting operations.

See also chapter Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue.

Draw picture frames only If ON, only a picture’s frame is drawn on the screen.

See also chapter Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue.

Fast dragging If ON, fast dragging feature is enabled.

See also chapter Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue.

Save to file Saves the drawing into an external file.

Save template Saves the current drawing as a template into the Template folder.

Print Prints the drawing on a connected graphical device.

Copy Copies the selected object in the Windows clipboard.

Order Enables the user to arrange the order of individual drawing part on the final drawing – i.e. to define which drawing part is at the bottom and which on top.

This function is useful if two or more parts overlap.

Groups Individual drawing pars may be grouped. The manipulation with such a group is easier than with "broken" entities.

Delete Deletes the selected drawing part.

Properties Opens a property dialogue for selected entity in the drawing.

Copy objects This function enables the user to make multiple copies of selected objects:

1. Select the first object to be copied.

2. If required, press and hold Shift and select other copies to be selected. Then release the Shift key.

3. A hair cross is drawn in the centroid of the selected objects.

4. Click the new position for the copy.

5. Repeat step 4 if required.

Align objects Selected object may be aligned so that their edges are aligned either horizontally (top and bottom alignment) or vertically (left and right

Basic Reference Guide

578

alignment).

Undo Returns back the last performed action.

Update automatic texts Updates all automatic text items inserted into the drawing.

E.g. if a DATE and TIME item is in the drawing, the update fills these item with current date and time.

Adjusting the page for the drawing

Paper size, margins

Page size Selects the size of used sheet format.

Landscape Defines whether portrait or landscape orientation of the sheet should be used.

Page margins Specifies margins around the sheet.

Set printer margins Sets the margins according to the current printer.

Grid, step

Show grid Displays or hides the grid.

Snap If ON, the cursor snaps to the grid.

Step Specifies the step of the grid, i.e. the distance between two points of the grid.

Grid Specifies which points of the grid are visible. E.g. number 10 in this field means that each tenth point of the grid is visible. But all the invisible points are "active" as well and can be used for cursor snapping.

Grid origin Defines the location of grid starting point on the page.

Printer

Printer setup Sets the printer and his properties.

Show printable area Displays the printable area in the Graphic output dialogue.

Display mode

Graphics Selects the mode for drawings in the graphic output.

Windows – standard Windows drawing library is used.

OpenGL – OpenGL library is used which supports e.g. rendered drawings.

Advanced

Line thickness multiplier Defines the multiplier for thickness of drawn lines.

Line pattern Defines the line pattern.

Minimal line thickness This line thickness is used when the drawing is printed. If there are lines in the drawing that are thinner than the specified minimal line thickness, they are printed thicker to comply with the adjusted limit.

Header / footer font

The graphic output can be fitted with a header and footer positioned at the top or the bottom of the page respectively.

Font Selects the font for the header and footer.

Character set Selects the character set for the header and footer.

Bold The header and footer are in bold letters.

Italic The header and footer are in italic letters.

Graphic output

579

Underline The header and footer are in underlined letters.

Strikeout Letters of the header and footer are stroked out.

Colour Selects the colour of the header and footer letters.

Header + footer at left + right side

Positions the header and footer to the left and right hand side of the page instead to the top and bottom sides.

Text in header and footer

Header Here the user can type the header text.

Alignment Specifies the alignment for the header.

Height Specifies the height of the header.

Offset Specifies the offset of the header.

Rotation Specifies the rotation of the header.

Footer Here the user can type the footer text.

Alignment Specifies the alignment for the footer.

Height Specifies the height of the footer.

Offset Specifies the offset of the footer.

Rotation Specifies the rotation of the footer.

Saving the drawing to an external file Any drawing may be saved to an external file. The file may be later used and imported to another drawing.

Scia Engineer offers numerous formats:

EPD Internal Scia Engineer format. This drawing may be e.g. inserted into another drawing.

BMP Windows bitmap.

EMF Extended meta file.

WMF Windows meta file.

DXF AutoCAD DXF format. The file exported from Scia Engineer can be read completely only in to AutoCAD versions 14 and 2000. Other versions of AutoCAD may import only a part of the drawing.

DWG AutoCAD DWG format. The file exported from Scia Engineer can be read completely only in to AutoCAD versions 14 and 2000 and for 3D also 2006. Other versions of AutoCAD may import only a part of the drawing.

The drawing may be saved via button Save on the toolbar.

Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue The Graphic output dialogue displays a preview of what will be printed. It is possible to adjust the display style of this preview.

Wired model for view manipulations

If ON, any rendered picture is temporarily converted to a wired one during e.g. zooming of the drawing.

Draw picture frames only If this option is ON, individual pictures are shown only schematically.

Fast dragging If ON, this option means that the original drawing remains displayed during any manipulations (e.g. moving of items) with the displayed items of the graphic output drawing. Only after the manipulation has been completed, the drawing is regenerated.

If the option is OFF, the drawing is automatically regenerated during the manipulation. This may lead to slower response of the program on lower-capacity computers or in the case of complex drawings.

The procedure to adjust the display style

Basic Reference Guide

580

1. Position the mouse cursor inside the preview.

2. Click the right mouse button.

3. Select the required option.

4. Click on it.

Using the templates in graphic output New graphic outputs may be based on a previously defined template. It means that the drawing consists not only of the "scanned" picture from the graphical window, but also of a pre-defined drawing part, e.g. a title block with the company logo.

The procedure for the definition of a template is given in chapter Paper spacegallery > Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings.

Note: If the template is supposed to be used not for the Paper space gallery drawings, but for Graphic output (i.e. Print picture function) field Print picture in the Setup > Options dialogue must be specified.

Items of graphic output drawing

Line For a line, the user may set the following properties:

Colour Specifies the colour of the line.

Width Specifies the thickness of the line.

Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the line.

End point co-ordinates It provides for numerical definition of the co-ordinates of both line end points.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Polyline For a polyline, it is possible to set the following properties:

Colour Specifies the colour of the polyline.

Width Specifies the thickness of the polyline.

Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the polyline.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Rectangle For a rectangle, it is possible to set the following properties:

Colour Specifies the colour of the rectangle (i.e. rectangle border).

Width Specifies the thickness of the rectangle (i.e. rectangle border).

Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the rectangle (i.e. rectangle border).

Brush colour Specifies the colour of the filling of the rectangle. The rectangle may be hatched, if required and then the Brush controls the filling of the rectangle area.

Brush pattern Specifies the pattern (hatch style) for the brush.

Corner co-ordinates It provides for numerical definition of the co-ordinates of two opposite corners of the rectangle.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Circle For a circle, it is possible to set the following properties:

Colour Specifies the colour of the circle (i.e. rectangle circle).

Graphic output

581

Width Specifies the thickness of the circle (i.e. circle border).

Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the circle (i.e. circle border).

Brush colour Specifies the colour of the filling of the circle. The circle may be hatched, if required and then the Brush controls the filling of the circle area.

Brush pattern Specifies the pattern (hatch style) for the brush.

Corner co-ordinates It provides for numerical definition of the co-ordinates of the corners of the circle.

Radius It defines the radius.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Text Various formatting information may be specified for the inserted text.

Text Here the user types the text to appear on the drawing.

Height Specified the height of the text.

Horizontal align Specified the horizontal alignment of the text.

Vertical align Specified the vertical alignment of the text.

Angle Specified the inclination angle of the text.

Colour Specified the colour of the text.

Font type Specified the font used for the text.

Character set Selects the character set for the current font.

Bold Types the text in bold.

Italic Types the text in italic.

Underline Underlines the text.

Strikeout Strikes out the text.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Automatic text Scia Engineer offers a whole set of automatic text items. These text items look like a standard text on the drawing. However, they may be updated any time to reflect the current situation. What’s more, they may be edited and formatted like standard text.

Date Inserts the current date.

Time Inserts the current time.

Date + time Inserts the current date and time.

Project name Inserts the name of the current project.

Project comment Inserts the comment attached to the current project.

Project type Inserts the type of the current project.

Load case name Inserts the name of the current load case.

Load case result Inserts the type of current result (e.g. internal forces, deformation, etc.).

Load case result quantity Inserts the mane of the displayed result quantity.

Plane Inserts the orientation of working plane.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Note: It is possible to combine in one text field an automatic text with a manually typed text. Thus the user may create texts like e.g. "Project: &PROJECT_NAME&, Load case: &LC_NAME&".

Title block

Basic Reference Guide

582

Title block (sometimes called a stamp) summarises the important information about the contents of a drawing. It is an essential part of standard hand-made drawings. Therefore, also Scia Engineer comes with the possibility to add this drawing item.

The title block parts and parameters are:

Header

Display Specifies the number of rows in the header of the title block.

Frame around header Selects a frame around the header of the title block.

Line Contains the text for individual lines of the header of the title block.

Alignment Specifies the alignment for individual lines of the header of the title block.

Height Specifies the text height for individual lines of the header of the title block.

Separator Specifies, whether the individual lines of the header are separated or not.

Font

Font Specifies the font for the title block.

Character set Specifies the character set for the title block.

Bold Prints the title block in bold characters.

Italic Prints the title block in italic characters.

Underline Prints the title block in underlined characters.

Strikeout Prints the title block in stoked out characters.

Stamp

Display stamp If ON, both the header and the stamp are printed.

If OFF, only the header is printed.

Fit on page horizontally If ON, the width of the stamp is set in a way so that the stamp fits the current page.

If OFF, the width of the stamp may be specified manually (see below).

Width Specifies the width of the stamp if the option above is OFF:

Number of rows Specifies the number of stamp lines.

Number of columns Specifies the number of stamp columns.

First line continuous Tell whether the first line consists of above mentioned number of columns or whether the columns are merged into one table cell.

Frame around stamp Controls whether a frame is drawn around the stamp.

Separators If ON, separates individual lines of the stamp.

Text of stamp cell Contains the text in individual stamp table cells.

Alignment of stamp cell Defines the alignments for individual stamp table cells.

Height of stamp line Specifies the text height for individual stamp table lines.

Frame

Display frame If ON, a frame is drawn around the page.

Advanced

Clear drawing Clears all manually drawn entities from the graphic output drawing.

Colour Selects the colour for the title block (both the header, stamp, and frame).

Preview

Graphic output

583

Shows preview of the title block (including the header).

Automatic text in the title block

Individual text items of a title block may be of automatic text type. That means that they can display some of the predefined text information and may be automatically updated on request.

The procedure for insertion of an automatic text item into a title block

1. In the Title block editing dialogue select the text item you want to make automatic.

2. Press the small button at the right hand side of the input field.

3. Select the required automatic text item.

4. Confirm with [OK] button.

Example: The final title block (stamp) may look like:

Note: The Company logo has been imported later from an external BMP file and positioned inside the title block. It is not an integral part of the title block itself.

Picture The properties of a picture are:

Picture size

Width Specifies the width of the picture.

Height Specifies the height of the picture.

Background

Transparent Makes the background transparent.

Filled Makes the background fully coloured

Colour Specifies the background colour for the Filled option.

Clipping box

Use Switches on or off the clipping box.

For more information about this Scia Engineer feature see chapter Advanced tools > Clipping box.

Edit Provides for editing of the clipping box.

Default box Sets the default clipping box.

On scale

Use If ON, tells the program to make the printing in required scale.

Scale If the option above is ON, the user may specify the scale for the printing.

Advanced

Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the picture.

OpenGL Selects the required rendering mode for the picture.

Hidden lines Specifies the mode that is used to draw hidden lines and surfaces.

Perspective Switches on and off the perspective.

Basic Reference Guide

584

Lock view Locks the view so that it is not possible to adjust the view direction. It is intended to prevent an accidental maladjustment once the required view direction has been properly adjusted.

Line pattern Defines the pattern for dashed lines in the picture.

OpenGL

If the option Display style in the Page setup is set to OpenGL, this option is unavailable because the whole graphic output drawing is rendered.

If the option Display style of the Page setup is set to Windows, this option allows the user to set required rendering mode for the particular picture.

This option is present here to allow all users to use rendering in their graphical output regardless of the particular type of graphical device that they are using. The unlucky fact is that some of printing devices may have problems with rendered pictures. The main reason is the insufficiency of memory for printing if the Display style in the Page setup is adjusted to OpenGL In order to overcome possible difficulties with some printing devices, Scia Engineer offer a unique solution. The rendered picture is created in the program using only such amount of memory that the user specifies. Such "memory-limited" picture is then stretched to the required size and sent to the printing device.

The possible options for the rendering are:

Photo Suitable for fully rendered drawings of details.

Dark lines Suitable for drawings in dark lines on light background.

Light lines Suitable for drawings in light lines on dark background.

More information about these options can be found in chapter Graphic output > Items of graphic output drawing > Selecting the suitable stretch mode.

Each of the above mentioned optioned allows the user to specify the size of the memory for rendering made in Scia Engineer.

0.2 Mb The picture occupies 0.2 Mb of memory.

0.9 Mb The picture occupies 0.9 Mb of memory.

1.44 Mb The picture occupies 1.44 Mb of memory.

2.4 Mb The picture occupies 2.4 Mb of memory.

If this picture is stretched to fit an A4 format, the drawing can still be considered of a rather good quality.

12 Mb The picture occupies 12 Mb of memory.

If this picture is stretched to fit an A0 format, the drawing is of a good quality.

The procedure for the editing of picture properties is given in chapter Adjusting the picture properties.

Inserting and editing the items of the drawing

Inserting the text into graphic output drawing Scia Engineer allows the user to add either manually typed text or automatically generated text information such as the current date, time, project name, etc.

Inserting the manually typed text

The procedure for the insertion of manually typed text

1. In the Graphic output dialogue click button [Text] ( ).

2. The Add text dialogue is opened on the screen.

3. Type the text into field Text.

4. Adjust the required formatting parameters.

5. Confirm with [OK] button.

6. Use the mouse to position the text.

7. Click the left mouse button when the text is on the "right place".

Inserting the item of automatic text

The procedure for the insertion of automatic text

1. In the Graphic output dialogue click button [Text] ( ).

2. The Add text dialogue is opened on the screen.

Graphic output

585

3. Press the button at the right hand side of field Text.

4. Select the required automatic text item.

5. Adjust the required formatting parameters.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

7. Use the mouse cursor to position the text.

8. Click the left mouse button when the text is on the "right place".

Note: Please note that automatic text items like Project name or Author name read the information typed in the Project Setup dialogue. If no information was input in the Project Setup dialogue, no text may appear in the drawing.

Adding the title block to the drawing Very often it is necessary to equip the drawing with a title block summarising basic information about what is being displayed on the drawing. Scia Engineer offers a wizard to create such a drawing item.

The procedure for insertion of a title block into the graphic output drawing

1. On the control toolbar, click button [Stamp + header wizard] ( ).

2. The title block editing dialogue is displayed on the screen.

3. Fill in the individual parameters.

4. If required, look at the preview.

5. Confirm with button [OK].

Inserting the picture into graphic output drawing A picture may be inserted from various resources:

Insert picture from window

Inserts the drawing from a required graphical window.

Insert picture from EP3 file

Inserts a picture from EP3 file.

Insert picture from EP2 file

Inserts a picture from EP2 file.

Insert picture from BMP file

Inserts an external Windows bitmap file.

Insert picture from DWG or DXF file

Inserts a picture from DWG or DXF file. The contents of the file is inserted as a picture, i.e. including a frame.

Load from EPD file Loads a previously saved graphic output drawing.

Append from EPD file Appends a previously saved graphic output drawing.

Insert drawing from DWG or DXF file

Inserts a drawing from DWG or DXF file. The contents of the file is inserted as a set of drawn entities grouped into one group.

Change template Changes the template of the drawing.

Inserting an external BMP file

The user may control the way an external Windows bitmap is inserted into the graphic output drawing. Function Insert picture from BMP file opens a dialogue where the parameters controlling the insertion may be adjusted.

Original picture Shows the original picture saved on disk.

Preview Shows the picture with adjusted effects taken into account.

Ignore aspect ratio If selected, the inserted picture is fitted (distorted) into the user-specified area.

If not selected, the inserted picture keeps the original aspect ration.

Greyscale The picture (if coloured) is reduced to greyscale picture.

Watermark The picture is inserted as a watermark.

Stretch mode Defines the stretch mode for the bitmap.

Note 1: While options Ignore aspect ration, Greyscale, and Watermark have effect only on the Preview window of the dialogue, the selected Stretch mode affects both the Original picture and Preview windows of the dialogue. Note 2: Concerning BMP files, only 24-bit bitmaps can be inserted.

Basic Reference Guide

586

Note 3: Concerning DXF and DWG files, only drawings created in AutoCAD versions 2000 and older can be imported. If a drawing created in AutoCAD 2004 and possible newer versions is imported, the result may not be satisfactory. This is due to modifications in the file format definition. The format definition varies for different AutoCAD versions.

Different procedures for insertion of an external drawing

The procedure for the insertion of an external drawing may vary by individual function.

Generally there are four procedures: (i) for insertion of a picture (including a picture created from a DXF/DWG drawing), (ii) for insertion of a drawing (including a DXF/DWG drawing), (iii) for loading of EPD drawing and (iv) for appending of EPD drawing.

EPD is a specialised graphical format developed by SCIA Company..

The procedure for the insertion of a picture

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.

2. Select the required picture format and, if required, its source.

3. Position the mouse cursor to the upper left corner of the intended picture location rectangle.

4. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.

5. Drag the mouse to the bottom right corner of the intended picture location rectangle.

6. Release the button.

7. The picture is inserted in the required size and on the required location. (Both may be later changed if necessary).

The procedure for the insertion of a drawing

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.

2. Select the required drawing format and its source.

3. Besides others adjust the parameters specifying the insertion point and scale.

4. Use the mouse cursor to position the drawing.

5. The drawing is inserted as a group of drawn entities. If required, it may be broken and individual lines may be edited separately.

The procedure to load an EPD drawing

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.

2. Select function Load from EPD file and browse for the required drawing file.

3. The current drawing is discarded and the new drawing is inserted.

The procedure to append an EPD drawing

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.

2. Select function Append from EPD file and browse for the required drawing file.

3. The current drawing remains unchanged and the new drawing is added over it.

Adjusting the picture properties A picture inserted into the graphic output drawing may be "tuned" to reflect the user’s esthetical feeling and serve to the intended purposes.

The procedure for the adjusting of picture properties

1. Position the mouse cursor over the picture border.

2. Click the left mouse button to select the picture.

3. Click button [Properties] ( ) on the control toolbar.

4. The picture editing dialogue is opened on the screen. The dialogue summarises all the properties of the selected picture.

5. Make the required changes.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

Pop-up menu of the editing dialogue

When the picture editing dialogue is opened, it is equipped with a pop-up menu. The pop-up menu may be opened via the right mouse button click and offer the following functions:

View Sets the view in the direction of individual axes of drawing co-ordinate system.

Graphic output

587

Zoom Offers the basic zooming functions.

Copy Copies the picture in the standard Windows clipboard.

Save to file Saves the picture into an external file.

Print Prints the drawing on the connected graphical device.

Wired model for manipulation

Defines that a simplified wire representation of the drawing should be used for view adjusting functions. This option affects only fully rendered pictures.

Adjusting view in the editing dialogue

The graphical window of the picture editing dialogue is a standard Scia Engineer graphical window. Therefore, the view in it may be adjusted the same way as in normal graphical window of the program.

Window scroll-bar wheel-like buttons for adjustment of the view

The graphical window has got three wheel-like buttons on the scroll-bar. The "wheels" may be used to adjust the required view. The function of the three wheels-like buttons is:

Zoom (located on the bottom scroll-bar)

Zooms in or out.

Rotate horizontally (located on the bottom scroll-bar)

Rotates the structure around the vertical axes (i.e. vertical axis of the screen).

Rotate vertically (located on the right hand side scroll-bar)

Rotates the structure around the horizontal axes (i.e. horizontal axis of the screen).

The operation of the wheel-like buttons is simple. Just place the mouse cursor over the "wheel", press the left mouse button, hold it down and "turn the wheel" with left-right, or up-down, movement of the mouse over the pad.

Mouse controlled adjustment of the view

In addition, Scia Engineer offers also a set of fast-access functions for the view adjustment in the graphical window.

Zoom in Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse up (away from you) over the pad.

Zoom out Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse down (towards you) over the pad.

Rotate Press [Ctrl] key and hold it down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse over the pad in order to get the required view direction.

[Shift] Press [Shift] key and hold it down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse over the pad in order to get the required position of the structure on the screen.

Editing the items of graphic output drawing Any item (picture, text, line, polyline, rectangle, or title box) of the final drawing can be edited any time after it has been inserted. The parameters are different for different items and are described in chapter Items of graphic output drawing.

The procedure for the editing of item properties

1. Position the mouse cursor over the required entity (in the case of picture over the border of the picture).

2. Click the left mouse button.

3. On the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue press button [Properties] ( ).

4. The appropriate editing dialogue opens on the screen.

5. Make the required changes.

6. Confirm the changes with [OK] button.

Note 1: Until at least one item of the drawing has been selected, the button [Properties] is not available. Note 2: If required, it is possible to edit multiple items at a time. To select multiple items do the following. Select the first item (i.e. move the mouse cursor over it and press the left mouse button). Press down and hold key [Shift] on your keyboard. Select another item. Repeat as many times as required.

Moving the item of a drawing

Basic Reference Guide

588

Every drawn entity (item) may be moved across the drawing.

The procedure to move the entity

1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted

2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Object moving".

3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the entity to the new location.

4. Release the mouse button.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the resizing and moving procedures. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Copying the item of a drawing

The procedure to copy one or more entities in the drawing

1. Select the entity or entities to be copied.

2. Invoke the pop-up menu and select function Copy objects.

3. A hair cross is drawn in the centroid of selected entities.

4. Use left button mouse click to position the copy of the selected entities.

5. Repeat step 4 as many times as required.

Resizing the item of a drawing Some of drawn entities may be resized after they have been inserted into the main drawing. This refers to (i) rectangle, (ii) circle, (iii) picture, (iv) text, and to some extent to (v) line.

When such an entity (item) is selected, its border or outline is highlighted and specific points shown. These points (or some of them, may be grabbed and used for resizing of the entity.

The procedure to resize entities offering "Object resizing" point

(This refers to circle and text entity)

1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted

2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Object resizing".

3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the point to change the size of the entity.

4. Release the mouse button.

The procedure to resize entities offering "Vertex moving" and/or "Edge moving" point

(This refers to rectangle, line and picture entity)

1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted

2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Vertex moving" or "Edge moving".

3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the point to change the size of the entity.

4. Release the mouse button.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the resizing and moving procedures. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Rotating the item of a drawing Some of drawn entities may be rotated after they have been inserted into the main drawing. This refers to (i) text and to some extent to (ii) line.

When such an entity (item) is selected, its border or outline is highlighted and specific points shown. These points (or some of them, may be grabbed and used to rotate the entity.

The procedure to rotate entities

1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted

2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Object rotating" or "Vertex moving".

3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the point to change the orientation of the entity.

4. Release the mouse button.

Selecting the suitable stretch mode A bitmap picture has got a fixed size. If the user needs to resize it, the program must apply a special algorithm that changes the size and even proportions of the original picture. This algorithm is called "stretch mode".

Graphic output

589

There are three different stretch modes. Each of them is suitable for different types of pictures and also for different type of output graphical device.

Considering the picture type, it is possible to give a simple clue as to which stretch mode should be applied to which picture type. Concerning the printing device, it is up to the user to find the most suitable stretch mode for his/her particular conditions.

Stretch modes

Photo Suitable for photographs imported into Scia Engineer or for fully rendered coloured drawings of details made in Scia Engineer.

Dark lines Suitable for drawings consisting of dark lines on light background.

Light lines Suitable for drawings with light lines on dark background.

The table below demonstrates the effect of individual options on a sample imported photograph.

Photo

Dark lines

Basic Reference Guide

590

Light lines

Grouping of items Sometimes it may be useful to group several drawing items into a group. It may happen particularly if the user decides to draw something manually. The "something" will usually consist of several lines (or polylines, etc.) but it will represent a single object. Therefore, it will be very useful if such an object could be treated (e.g. moved) as a single item.

The procedure to group several items into a group

1. Select the first item (e.g. line, polyline, etc.), i.e. position the mouse cursor over it and click the left mouse button.

2. Press down and hold key [Shift] on your keyboard.

3. Select another item.

4. Repeat as many times as required.

5. Press the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu. Select function Groups > Group.

6. The selected items are grouped into one.

The procedure to ungroup previously grouped items

1. Select the required group.

2. Press the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu. Select function Groups > Ungroup.

Picture gallery

Introduction to the picture gallery Picture gallery is a tool that enables the user to collect, review, modify, delete, and print individual pictures. The pictures can be either "scanned" from a Scia Engineer graphical window or created manually. It is also possible to scan a window drawing and add some manually drawn entities to it.

The pictures can be then treated as the final product (i.e. printed or saved to graphical files) or inserted into the graphic output drawings in the Paper space gallery.

Picture gallery manager

Using the Picture gallery manager The Picture gallery manager is an advanced type of a standard Scia Engineer’s database manager. It consists mostly of standard "database manager parts".

Control buttons The buttons call all the available functions of the manager.

List of defined pictures It lists all the created pictures.

Property table for the selected picture

The table shows the basic properties of the selected picture.

Preview of the selected picture

It shows the preview of the selected picture.

Additional information It may display some additional information for pictures generated by

Graphic output

591

about selected picture wizards.

Picture gallery manager functions

New picture

Creates a new picture and adds it into the Picture gallery.

New by wizard

Creates a set of new pictures based on defined line grids.

Adjust default parameters of new picture

Adjusts default parameters for a new picture.

Edit picture

Edits the selected picture.

Print picture

Prints the selected picture.

Delete picture

Deletes the selected picture.

Copy picture

Copies the selected picture.

Export picture to file

Exports the selected picture.

Copy picture to Clipboard

Copies the selected picture into the Windows Clipboard.

Regenerate picture

Regenerates the selected pictures.

Refresh setup settings

Re-reads the current setup.

Refresh colours setup

Re-reads the current colours setup.

Adjust the view Arranges the list of created pictures.

The Picture gallery manager can be opened:

using button [Picture gallery] ( ) on toolbar Project,

using function Picture gallery in the tree menu,

using function Picture gallery from menu Tree.

Adjusting the manager

Basic Reference Guide

592

As the Picture gallery manager deals with drawings, it offers a feature known from various professional graphical programs. The user may decide that the List of defined pictures will not be arranged as a simple list but as a collection of thumbnails. There are three control buttons on the manager toolbar adjusting the layout of the List of defined pictures.

Detail view

The List of defined pictures is a simple list with information about the creation and last modification of individual pictures.

List view

The List of defined pictures shows miniature previews of individual pictures.

Change thumbnail size

This button sets the size of the miniature previews in the list (i.e. the thumbnail size).

Inserting a new picture into the Picture gallery

Inserting a window drawing into the Picture gallery

Any drawing arranged in any graphical window of Scia Engineer can be inserted into the Picture gallery. It may be directly printed or further processed.

The procedure for the insertion of a picture into the Picture gallery

1. Arrange the view of structure in a graphical window to meet the required purpose.

2. Add the drawing into the Picture gallery:

a. either use menu function File > Graphic output > Picture to gallery,

b. or use the window pop-up menu and its function Picture to gallery.

3. Type the name of the drawing and confirm with [OK].

4. The drawing is added into the gallery.

Adjusting the default values for new pictures

When a new empty picture is being created (i.e. added into the Picture gallery), it is created with the predefined default parameters.

Prefix of name Specifies the prefix of the name. This prefix is used for generation of name for each new picture.

Scale Defines the scale of the picture.

Picture width Specifies the size of the picture.

Picture height Specifies the size of the picture.

Display mode wired

Only the wired model is displayed.

standard

Similar to the above.

rendered

The picture is fully rendered.

hidden lines

The picture hides outline lines that cannot be seen from the adjusted view point.

hidden lines dashed

Similar to the above, but the hidden lines are drawn as dashed lines.

View point (available only from the main dialogue of the Picture gallery manager)

This option opens a dialogue where the view direction and zoom can be easily adjusted.

View parameters (available only from the main dialogue of the Picture gallery manager)

Opens a standard view parameters dialogue. View parameters control what components of the structure are displayed and how.

Colour + line settings (available only from the main dialogue of the Picture gallery manager)

Opens a standard Palette settings dialogue where e.g. colours of individual components, line style, etc. can be adjusted.

Graphic output

593

Load colour setup in regen(eration)

(available only from the main dialogue of the Picture gallery manager)

If ON and the picture in the document is regenerated, the picture reads current colour settings from the project.

Explanation:

Let us assume that you insert a picture to document. You make no special colour adjustments as you want to have the same colours in your graphical screen and in the document. Later, you change the colours in your project, i.e. the colours in your graphical screen change. If option "Load colour setup in regen(eration)" is OFF, the picture in the document keeps its original colours. However, if option "Load colour setup in regen(eration)" is ON, the picture in the document – when regenerated - reads the current settings from the project and changes its own settings accordingly.

Load units in regen(eration)

(available only from the main dialogue of the Picture gallery manager)

This option is analogous to the previous one. This time the units are either preserved or updated from current project settings.

Load activity in regen(eration)

(available only from the main dialogue of the Picture gallery manager)

This option is analogous to the previous one. This time activity is either preserved or updated from current project settings.

Text scale factor This item specifies the scale for text in the image.

This parameter may be useful when the picture is intended for large formats (e.g. A0). I such a case the text will be significantly small in comparison with the size of the drawing. It may however happen that the user needs to make a draft printing on smaller format. If this is made without any changes, the text becomes illegible. The same may be true for the preview on the screen. Therefore, it is possible to magnify the text size in order to make the text readable even on smaller formats.

Charset of text This item defines the character set for the text – this option may be especially important for other than western European languages.

Line pattern length This parameter defines the length of "dashes" in dashed lines.

Display GCS icon An icon indicating orientation of global coordinate axes may be placed on the image. Available options are: none, to coordinate system origin, to picture corner.

Performance settings

Exclude object tooltips If ON, all tooltips are removed from the current scene in the graphical window, before it is saved to the image. As a result, when the picture is later edited in the Document or in the Picture gallery, no tooltips are available when selections are made.

This option significantly reduces the size of the image. For a common project, it may reduce the size by 20%.

Default = OFF.

Exclude layers If ON, information about layers is removed from the current scene in the graphical window, before it is saved to the image.

This option significantly reduces the size of the image. For a common project, it may reduce the size by 20%.

Default = ON.

Disable surface OSNAP If ON, information about hidden geometry (i.e. hidden surface lines) is removed from the current scene in the graphical window, before it is saved to the image.

This option dramatically reduces the size of the image. For a common project, it may reduce the size by 50%.

Default = ON.

Dimension lines

End mark style Specifies the style of end mark for dimension lines.

End mark size Specifies the size of end mark for dimension lines.

Text size Specifies the text size for dimension lines.

Picture name

Basic Reference Guide

594

Place name to picture If ON, the picture name is automatically added to the picture.

Picture name font size Specifies the size of the picture name.

Save / Read buttons

Store settings as user default settings

Stores the current settings as the user’s default settings.

Load user default settings

Read the saved user’s default settings.

Load application default settings

Reads the default settings preset by the manufacturer of the program.

The procedure for the definition of default parameters

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. Click button [Edit default new picture parameters] ( ).

3. The dialogue for the adjustment of the parameters is opened.

4. Set the parameters as required.

5. Confirm with button [OK].

Creating a new empty picture

A new empty picture may be inserted into the Picture gallery. The picture is created with preset default parameters.

The procedure for the creation of a new picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. Click button [New].

3. Type the name of the new picture and confirm with [OK] button.

4. The new picture is added to the List of defined pictures.

5. If required, edit the picture.

Generating new pictures according to line grid

The Picture gallery manager has not been designed for pure management of manually created pictures. It offers a powerful tool for an automatic generation of pictures. The generation may be based on line grids defined in the project or on designed connections.

The generation based on defined line grids goes through the project data and generates pictures corresponding to plane sections of the model made in individual line grid planes.

Parameters controlling the generation process

Definition of planes

All Pictures will be generated for all possible planes of selected line grids.

Selected The user will select the line grid planes that will be used for the generation of pictures.

View parameters

To active window View parameters for the pictures will be taken from the active window.

To structural types View parameters adjusted for structural types are used for the pictures.

View direction

To active window View direction for the pictures will be taken from the active window.

Perpendicular to plane All the pictures are made as viewed from the direction perpendicular to the corresponding picture plane.

Graphic output

595

Make picture

For all selected planes The pictures are generated for all selected planes regardless of whether there are any entities in the plane or not.

Only planes with existing members

The pictures that would be empty because no entity is located in the corresponding plane will not be created.

Draw members

Only members in plane Only members located exactly in the particular picture plane are drawn on the corresponding picture.

Members around plane Members located exactly in the particular picture plane and around it in the specified depth are drawn on the corresponding picture.

Active depth forward If the option above is ON, it is possible to specify the depth of the plane surrounding.

Active depth backward Ditto

Draw loads + supports

To active window Loads and supports are drawn only if they are shown in the active window.

No Loads and supports are not put into the picture.

Draw result diagrams

To active window Result diagrams are drawn only if they are shown in the active window.

No Result diagrams are not put into the picture.

Beam label size

Size This value specifies the height of text used to label 1D members.

Grid selection

If more than one line grid has been defined, it is possible to select which ones should be used for the generation of planes for the pictures. This can be done in Used planes dialogue of the wizard.

Used line grids This window lists all the line grids that have been selected for the generation.

All used line grid planes This window lists all the planes that the wizard could generate for the selected line grids.

Select grid This button allows the user to choose the line grids that will be used for the generation.

The procedure for the generation of "line-grid-based" pictures

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. Click button [New by wizard] ( ).

3. The wizard starts.

4. If at least one item of both line grid and connection is defined in the project, select Create planes of line grid and click button [Run wizard]. If no connection has been defined in the project, this step is automatically skipped and the wizard started.

5. Now the first wizard dialogue is opened. It summarises default picture settings. If necessary, change any of the values.

6. Click button [Next].

7. Another wizard dialogue is opened on the screen. Specify parameters controlling the generation process.

8. Click button [Next].

9. The last wizard dialogue is shown to help you with the generation. Select grids that will be used for the generation.

Basic Reference Guide

596

10. Click button [Finish].

11. The appropriate pictures are generated and added to the Picture gallery.

Note: Unless at least one line grid has been defined in the project it is not possible to run this wizard.

Generating new pictures for defined connections

The user may automatically generate picture for defined connections. A set of specified pictures is generated for each designed connection present in the project.

The procedure to generate drawings of connections

1. Define connections in your model.

2. Call the picture wizard:

a. invoke the pop-up menu and select Picture wizard, or

b. open the Picture gallery and click Picture wizard icon.

3. Depending on your current project, either confirm or select Steel connection monodrawings.

4. Adjust the picture properties.

5. Select the connections and type of drawings (see note below).

6. Complete the generation process.

7. The pictures are stored in the Picture gallery.

Note: If no connection is selected when the wizard is started, the drawings are generated for all existing connections. If some connections are selected when the wizard is started, you may choose, if the pictures should be generated for the selected connections only, or for all existing connections.

Processing the pictures in the Picture gallery

Editing the picture

Any picture inserted into the Picture gallery, regardless of "how" it has been created, can be edited any time later.

The procedure for editing of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be modified.

3. Click button [Edit].

4. The Gallery item editor for the selected picture is opened.

5. Make the required changes.

6. Close the editing dialogue.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.

8. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Adjusting the picture properties

Each picture has got a set of basic parameters. The parameters may be edited directly in the Property table for the selected picture in the Picture gallery manager. The meaning of individual parameters is explained in chapter Adjusting the default values for new pictures.

The procedure for the adjusting of picture properties

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be modified.

3. The parameters of this picture are shown in Property table for the selected picture.

4. Modify required items.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.

6. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Printing the picture

Any picture inserted in the Picture gallery can be printed on a connected graphical device.

The procedure for printing of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

Graphic output

597

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be printed.

3. Click button [Print picture] ( ).

4. The Graphic output dialogue for the selected picture is opened.

5. If required, make any modifications to the layout of the drawing.

6. Make the printing and close the Graphic output dialogue.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.

8. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Removing the picture from the gallery

The procedure for printing of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be deleted.

3. Click button [Delete].

4. The selected picture or pictures are deleted.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.

6. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Copying the picture

If required, any picture from the Picture gallery can be copied and possibly further processed.

The procedure for copying of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be copied.

3. Click button [Copy].

4. A copy of the selected picture is created.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.

6. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Regenerating the picture

When a picture is inserted into the Picture gallery, it is created from the current project data. It may however happen that any time later the project must be changed (e.g. some 1D members are moved, some cross-sections enlarged, etc.). The Picture gallery is fitted with a function that is able to match the picture with the current project data.

The procedure for regeneration of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be updated.

3. Click button [Regenerate picture] ( ). The picture is regenerated using the current project data and settings.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.

5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: If the picture has been edited in the Gallery item editor and any structural entities (scanned from the graphical window) have been removed from the picture or broken into single lines, they are regenerated in the form that fully corresponds with the current state in the graphical window of the application. Note: If a set of pictures has been generated using the Wizard "overview drawings" and if any of the generated pictures has been modified and if function Regenerate has been applied to this set, the program asks whether the manual changes made in the automatically generated pictures should be (i) preserved, (ii) discarded or (iii) whether the whole operation should be aborted.

See chapters Regenerating the picture setup and Regenerating the colours setup for additional information.

Regenerating the picture setup

When a picture is inserted into the Picture gallery, it is created from the current project data. It may however happen that any time later the settings of the project must be changed. The Picture gallery is fitted with a function that is able to match the picture with the current project settings.

The procedure for regeneration of settings for selected picture

Basic Reference Guide

598

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be updated.

3. Click button [Refresh setup settings] ( ). The picture is regenerated.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.

5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: If also the update of the geometry is necessary, function Regenerate the picture can be used instead.

See chapters Regenerating the picture and Regenerating the colours setup for additional information.

Regenerating the colours setup

When a picture is inserted into the Picture gallery, it is created from the current project data. It may however happen that any time later the settings of colours are changed. Consequently, the picture does not reflect the current status. The Picture gallery is fitted with a function that is able to match the picture with the current colours settings.

The procedure for regeneration of settings for selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be updated.

3. Click button [Refresh colours settings] ( ). The picture is regenerated.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.

5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: If also the update of the geometry is necessary, function Regenerate the picture can be used instead.

See chapters Regenerating the picture setup and Regenerating the picture for additional information.

Saving the picture into an external file

Any picture from the Picture gallery can be saved, or exported, into an external graphical file.

BMP Windows bitmap file

WMF Windows metafile

EMF Enhanced Windows metafile

EP3 Internal format of Scia Engineer

WRL VRML format

3D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 Three-dimensional DXF drawing.

2D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 Two-dimensional DXF drawing.

3D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 Three-dimensional DWG drawing.

2D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 Two-dimensional DWG drawing.

The procedure for export of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be exported.

3. Click button [Export picture to file] ( ).

4. The Windows File save dialogue is opened.

5. Specify the file name and path to the file.

6. Confirm with Save.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.

8. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: Scia Engineer supports export into DXF and DWG format of AutoCAD versions R14 and 2000. If a picture is imported into another version of AutoCAD, the result may not be satisfactory. This is due to modifications in the file format definition. The format definition varies for different AutoCAD versions.

Copying the picture into the Clipboard

Any picture from the gallery can be copied into the Windows Clipboard directly from the Picture gallery manager.

Graphic output

599

The procedure for copying of selected picture into the Windows Clipboard

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be copied.

3. Click button [Copy picture to clipboard] ( ).

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.

5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Editing the picture in the picture gallery

Introduction to editing of picture A picture inserted into the Picture gallery does not have to be the final product. The Picture gallery offers a powerful editing tool that allows the user to modify the picture so that it achieves perfection.

It is possible to:

edit the picture that has been scanned from a particular graphical window,

add additional graphical entities,

add dimension lines,

put useful text information on the picture,

arrange the layout of the picture.

All these tasks can be done in the Gallery item editor. It can be opened from the Picture gallery manager by means of function Edit.

Printing the edited picture The edited picture can be printed directly from the Gallery item editor on the connected graphical device.

The procedure to print the picture from within the Gallery item editor

1. Click button [Print picture] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

2. The Graphic output dialogue is opened.

3. If necessary, make any modifications to the layout of the page.

4. Finish the print with button [Print].

Exporting the edited picture The edited picture can be exported to an external graphical file directly from the Gallery item editor.

The procedure for export of picture to an external file

1. Click button [Export picture to file] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

2. The standard Windows Save as dialogue is opened.

3. Specify the file name and path to the file.

4. Confirm with button [Save].

Note: The "area" of the picture that is saved into the file is defined by the border of picture.

Copying the edited picture to clipboard The edited picture can be copied to the Windows Clipboard.

The procedure for copying of the picture into the clipboard

1. Click button [Copy picture to clipboard] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

Adjusting the editing dialogue

Adjusting the basic properties of picture

Basic picture parameters that may have been adjusted in the Picture gallery manager may also be edited directly from within the Gallery item editor.

The procedure for the editing of picture basic parameters

1. Click button [Picture properties] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

2. The editing dialogue with the parameters opens on the screen

Basic Reference Guide

600

3. Change required parameters.

4. Confirm with button [OK].

For full meaning of individual parameters see chapter Adjusting the default values for new pictures.

Adjusting the parameters of dot grid

As the user may add various manual drawings into the picture, the Gallery item editor is equipped with a dot grid similar to the one implemented in the graphical windows of Scia Engineer.

The procedure for adjustment of the dot grid in the Gallery item editor.

1. Click button [Adjustment of the dot grid] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

2. The adjusting dialogue opens on the screen.

3. Select type of the grid.

4. Set the parameters.

5. Confirm with button [OK].

Displaying the dot grid

The dot grid, whose parameters can be adjusted in the adjusting dialogue, can be either displayed or hidden.

The procedure to show / hide the dot grid

1. On toolbar Modify click button [Grid on / off] ( ).

2. If the grid is displayed, the button hides it and vice versa.

Adjusting the SNAP mode

Both the principle and realisation of the SNAP mode in the Gallery item editor is identical to the main Scia Engineer environment. The description is given in chapter Basic working tools > Cursor SNAP modes.

There is the only exception and it is the location of the SNAP toolbar. The toolbar is a separate self-standing toolbar and is named Point snap.

Adjusting the view

Adjusting the view

The view of the picture in the Gallery item editor can be adjusted the same way as in the standard graphical window of the application.

Adjusting the view via toolbars Zoom

Zoom in

Zoom in.

Zoom out

Zoom out.

Zoom by cut-out

Requires to define a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is then magnified in order to fit into the whole are of the graphical window.

Once the function is started the mouse cursor changes. Position it to the upper left corner of the cut-out. Press the left mouse button and hold it down. Drag the mouse to place the cursor to the bottom right corner of the cut-out. Release the button.

Zoom all

Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the whole area of the graphical window.

Zoom all – selection

Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the whole area of the graphical window.

Adjusting the view via key & mouse combination

Zoom in Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse up (away from you) over the pad.

Graphic output

601

Zoom out Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse down (towards you) over the pad.

The functions described above are identical to standard view adjustment functions available in the main Scia Engineer environment.

In addition to the standard View-adjustment functions, Scia Engineer offers also a set of sophisticated functions such as: (i) reversing the view, (ii) border of picture, (iii) clipping box, (iv) layers.

The functions are described in separate chapters.

Reversing the view

Despite the fact that it is not possible to adjust the view direction in the Gallery item editor, it is possible to look at the structure "from the other side".

The procedure for reversing the view

1. On toolbar Zoom click button [Invert view direction] ( ).

2. The view is readjusted as if you change the position and look at the displayed structure from the opposite side.

For more information about adjustment of the view see chapter Adjusting the view.

Adjusting the border of picture

The Gallery item editor enables the user to define a border of the picture and thus display its part only.

This border can be then used to:

set the zoom,

save the framed part into an external graphical file.

The procedure to define the border

1. Adjust the view in a way so that only the required part of the picture is displayed in the window.

2. Click button [Save picture zoom, position and border] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

3. The border is set.

The procedure to zoom in the part framed with the border

1. On toolbar Modify click button [Zoom according to picture border] ( ).

2. The view is adjusted in a way so that only the framed part of the picture is displayed in the window.

The procedure to define the border using Drag-and-Drop feature

1. Use view adjustment functions to see the required part of the picture and also the border rectangle.

2. Position the mouse cursor over any border line, press the left mouse button, hold it down and move the border to its new position.

3. Position the mouse cursor over any border vertex, press the left mouse button, hold it down and move the border vertex to adjust the required size of the border rectangle.

Using the layers

Graphical entities added manually to the picture (i.e. lines, polylines, text, dimension lines) can be sorted into layers.

Parameters of layer

Name It is used for identification of the layer.

Colour It specifies the colour that is assigned to all entities inserted in the layer.

Visibility All entities inserted into one layer are visible or hidden.

Activity All entities inserted into one layer are active or not.

Comment The user may add a short comment to explain what the layer represents.

The procedure for adjustment of layer parameters

Basic Reference Guide

602

1. Click button [Layers manager] ( ) on toolbar Gallery picture editor toolbar.

2. The Layers manager dialogue is opened on the screen.

3. Set the parameters.

4. Confirm with button [OK].

The procedure for selection of layer for a particular entity.

1. Select the entity or entities that should be inserted into one layer.

2. In combo box with layers ( ) on toolbar Gallery picture editor toolbar select the required new layer for the selected entities.

Note: The number of layers in the Gallery item editor is fixed. That means that new layers cannot be added and no layers can be removed.

Using the clipping box for picture

Similarly to the main Scia Engineer environment the view in the Gallery item editor may be limited by means of the clipping box.

The procedure for turning the clipping box ON or OFF

1. On toolbar Zoom click button [Switch on/off clipping box] ( ).

2. If the clipping box has been OFF it is turned ON and vice versa.

Adjusting the clipping box by mouse

The procedure to adjust the clipping by mouse

1. Turn the clipping box ON.

2. Position the mouse cursor over one of the clipping box borders.

3. Click the left mouse button to select the clipping box.

4. Special box-editing symbols are displayed in the centre of all clipping box surfaces. The ball symbol provides for resizing of the box, the cylinder symbol enables the user to rotate the box.

Graphic output

603

5. Select corresponding symbol for required manipulation.

6. Position the mouse cursor over the symbol.

7. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.

8. Drag the mouse to adjust the clipping box as required.

9. Release the mouse button.

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 as many times as required to tune the adjustment of the box.

11. Press [Esc] key to close the adjustment function.

The picture above is a video that demonstrates the adjusting of clipping box. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Adjusting the clipping box in setup table

The procedure for tabular adjustment of the clipping box

1. On toolbar Zoom click button [Clipping box setting dialogue] ( ).

2. The setup dialogue appears on the screen.

3. Fill in the table.

4. Confirm with button [OK].

Note: If the clipping box was not displayed before the setup dialogue was invoked, the clipping box is switched ON on confirming the settings with [OK] button.

Adding the manually drawn entities

Drawing a line

The procedure for drawing a line

1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert new edges] ( ).

3. Toolbar Main graphic entry appears on the screen.

4. Select the line type you need to draw (i.e. straight line, circular arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve, spline).

5. Define end points of the selected line or curve type.

6. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

Note: For details about the definition of curves see chapter Geometry > Beams > Inserting a new beam of a complex axis shape.

Defining the end points of line

There are multiple possibilities to define the end-points of the line.

mouse in free hand Position the mouse cursor to the defined location and click the left mouse button.

mouse with specified SNAP mode

Adjust the required SNAP mode, use the mouse cursor to select the point.

command line Type point co-ordinates on the command line of the Gallery item editor.

Drawing a polyline

The procedure for drawing a polyline

1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert new polylines] ( ).

3. Toolbar Main graphic entry appears on the screen.

4. Select the line type you need to draw for the first segment of the polygon (i.e. straight line, circular arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve, spline).

5. Define end points of the segment.

Basic Reference Guide

604

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all required polygon segments. (For second and all the following segments only one end-point must be defined.)

7. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

The options for the definition of end-points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Drawing a closed polyline

The procedure for drawing a closed polyline

1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Closed polylines] ( ).

3. Toolbar Main graphic entry appears on the screen.

4. Select the line type you need to draw (i.e. straight line, circular arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve, spline).

5. Define end points of the selected line or curve type.

6. Finish the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert. The polygon is closed and the function terminated.

The options for the definition of end-points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Inserting a text

The procedure for inserting text

1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert text] ( ).

3. The property dialogue appears on the screen.

4. Type the text in the property dialogue.

5. If required, adjust other text parameters (size, style, rotation, letter type).

6. Position the text in the picture. Click the left mouse button to insert the text.

7. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

The options for the definition of text position are the same as for the definition of line end-points and are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Inserting a vertical dimension line

The procedure for inserting vertical dimension line

1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. Click button [Insert vertical dimension line] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

3. The property dialogue for dimension lines is opened on the screen.

4. The style is pre-set to vertical and Label value to Projection.

5. If needed, adjust other parameters (see chapter Changing the parameters of dimension line).

6. Input the first point to be dimensioned.

7. Input the second point to be dimensioned.

8. Input the point that defines the position of the dimension line.

9. If appropriate, insert other points to be dimensioned.

10. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single vertical dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension line is complete.

Inserting a horizontal dimension line

The procedure for inserting horizontal dimension line

1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

Graphic output

605

2. Click button [Insert horizontal dimension line] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

3. The property dialogue for dimension lines is opened on the screen.

4. The style is pre-set to horizontal and Label value to Projection.

5. If needed, adjust other parameters (see chapter Changing the parameters of dimension line).

6. Input the first point to be dimensioned.

7. Input the second point to be dimensioned.

8. Input the point that defines the position of the dimension line.

9. If appropriate, insert other points to be dimensioned.

10. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single horizontal dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension line is complete.

Inserting a general dimension line

The procedure for inserting general dimension line

1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. Click button [Insert general dimension line] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

3. The property dialogue for dimension lines is opened on the screen.

4. The style is pre-set to general and Label value to Projection.

5. If needed, adjust other parameters (see chapter Changing the parameters of dimension line).

6. Input the first point to be dimensioned.

7. Input the second point to be dimensioned.

8. Input the point that defines the position of the dimension line.

9. If appropriate, insert other points to be dimensioned.

10. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single general dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension line is complete.

Using the command line

The command line of the Gallery item editor helps the user with completion of individual functions.

Short tool tips are displayed in it once a function that requires some kind of input has been started. It is also possible to type co-ordinates of inserted point in the command line.

Using the SNAP mode

Both the principle and implementation of SNAP mode in the Gallery item editor is identical with the main Scia Engineer environment. The description is given in chapter Basic working tools > Cursor SNAP modes. Also the temporary one-step SNAP mode can be applied.

There is only one exception and it is the location of the SNAP toolbar. The toolbar is a separate self-standing toolbar and is named Point snap. It can be arranged anywhere on the screen.

Modifying the manually drawn entities

Selecting the entity

Principle and rules for making a selection and for its possible modification by removing some entities from it are identical to the principle and rules for the main Scia Engineer environment.

Basic Reference Guide

606

Moving the entity

The procedure for move of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Moving the geometric entities > Moving an entity via a menu function.

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Move] on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

Copying the entity

The procedure for copying of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. See chapter Geometry > Copying the entities > Making a single copy via menu function and Geometry > Copying the entities > Making multiple copies via menu function.

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Copy] on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

Rotating the entity

The procedure for rotating of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Moving the geometric entities > Rotating an entity via a menu function.

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Rotate] on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

Mirroring the entity

The procedure for mirroring of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Moving the geometric entities > Mirroring an entity.

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Mirror] on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

Trimming the entity

The procedure for trimming of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Modifying the shape and dimensions > Trimming the entities.

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Trim] on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

Stretching the entity

The procedure for stretching of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Modifying the shape and dimensions > Stretching the entities.

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Stretch] on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

Scaling the entity

The procedure for scaling of entities is similar to the sae manipulation in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Modifying the shape and dimensions > Scaling the entities.

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Scale] on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.

Changing the shape of entity

The Gallery item editor supports Drag & Drop feature. Therefore, this feature may be used for Drag & Drop manipulations, i.e. move of entity or move of entity’s end-points.

Similarly to toolbar-invoked manipulation functions, this approach may be used for manually drawn entities only. It is not possible to move structural members scanned from the Scia Engineer’s graphical window.

The procedure is identical to the one for Scia Engineer graphical window.

Deleting the entity

The procedure for deletion of entities

1. Select entities you need to delete.

2. Click button [Delete] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

3. The entities are deleted from the picture.

Note: This function can be used for both manually drawn entities (e.g. line, text, dimension line) and scanned graphic window entities (e.g. 1D member).

Graphic output

607

Adjusting the colour of entity

All manually added entities are drawn in a specific colour. There are two ways to specify the colour.

Colour of the corresponding layer

The colour of the entity is determined according to entity’s layer. The colour of layer can be specified in the Layers manager.

Explicitly defined colour The colour of a particular entity is independent on the layer.

The colour is adjusted by means of buttons on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.

The procedure to adjust the colour according to the layer

1. Select the entities you want to modify.

2. Click button [Colour by layers] ( ) so that it becomes "pressed down".

3. The colour of the entities is taken from the corresponding layer.

4. Clear the selection.

The procedure to adjust the colour independent on the layer

1. Select the entities you want to modify.

2. Click button [Colour by layers] ( ) so that it is not "pressed down".

3. Button [Current colour] ( ) located next to button [Colour by layers] becomes accessible.

4. Press button [Current colour] ( ) and select the required colour.

5. The colour is adjusted.

6. Clear the selection.

Adjusting the thickness of line

Line thickness is adjusted by means of the edit box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.

The procedure for the adjustment of line thickness

1. Select the entities you want to modify.

2. Into the first edit box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar ( ) type the required thickness.

3. The change is immediately taken into account.

4. Clear the selection.

Adjusting the pattern of line

Line pattern can be adjusted by means of the combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.

The procedure for the adjustment of line pattern

1. Select the entities you want to modify.

2. Into the combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar ( ) select the required line pattern.

3. The change is immediately taken into account.

4. Clear the selection.

Adjusting the layer of entity

The layer can be adjusted by means of combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.

The procedure for the adjustment of layer

1. Select the entities you want to edit.

2. Into the layer combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar ( ) select the required layer.

3. The change is immediately taken into account.

4. Clear the selection.

Basic Reference Guide

608

Changing the parameters of text

The procedure to change text parameters

1. Select the text entity you want to modify.

2. If the property dialogue is not displayed, click button [Show / hide properties of selection] ( ) on Modify toolbar.

3. Adjust the parameters of the text.

4. The changes are automatically and immediately taken into account.

5. Clear the selection.

In addition, also colour and layer can be adjusted for the selected text items.

Changing the parameters of dimension line

Parameters of dimension line

Style The dimension line may be horizontal, vertical, or general.

Plot line Plot line can be long, i.e. leading from the dimension line up to the dimensioned object, or short.

Plot line offset This value specifies the length of the plot line.

Label alignment The option determines the position of dimension line value.

Label value

The procedure for the change of dimension line parameters

1. Select the dimension lines that should be edited.

2. If the Properties dialogue is not displayed, click button [Show/hide properties] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

3. Make the necessary changes in the dialogue.

4. The changes are immediately taken into account.

5. If required, close the Properties dialogue.

Modifying the window drawing

Breaking the structural member into free entities

The picture can consist of:

entities scanned from the graphical window of the application,

entities added manually to the picture.

It is possible to make geometrical manipulations with all the entities in the picture. On the other hand, parameters like colour, line thickness, line pattern and layer can be adjusted only to the manually added entities.

If the user needs to modify these parameters for scanned entities as well, it is necessary to transfer the scanned entities into manually drawn ones. This means that lines representing structural members are converted into single lines. These single lines then can be processed like normal manually drawn lines.

The procedure for breaking of structural members

1. Select the 1D members you need to break into single lines.

2. Click button [Break selected] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

3. The selected members are broken into single lines.

4. Clear the selection.

Deleting the entity

The procedure for deletion of entities

1. Select entities you need to delete.

2. Click button [Delete] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

3. The entities are deleted from the picture.

Note: This function can be used for both manually drawn entities (e.g. line, text, dimension line) and scanned graphic window entities (e.g. 1D member).

Graphic output

609

Paper space gallery

Introduction to Paper space gallery The Paper space gallery is a tool that allows the user to prepare graphic output drawings in advance and store them within the corresponding project. The individual graphic output drawings are the same drawings as those created in function Print picture.

The difference is that instead of being directly printed on the connected graphical device, they are stored in a gallery of drawings. Thus they may be processed any time later (i.e. edited, printed, saved to external file, etc.).

Paper space gallery manager The Paper space gallery is controlled by means of a specially designed dialogue that resembles (in appearance and function) database managers used through out Scia Engineer.

The dialogue (from now on the Paper space gallery manager) provides for:

creation of a new drawing,

editing of an existing drawing,

printing of an existing drawing,

copying of an existing drawing,

deleting of an existing drawing.

The Paper space gallery manager consists of the following parts:

Control buttons They perform the operations stated above.

List of existing drawings It states all the drawings that have been created.

Preview of the selected drawing

This window displays the preview of the drawing that is currently selected in the List of existing drawings.

Property table of the selected drawing

In this table, the name of a particular drawing may be edited.

The Paper space gallery manager can be opened:

using button [Paper space gallery] ( ) on toolbar Project,

using function Paper space gallery in the tree menu,

using function Paper space gallery from menu Tree.

Editing the drawing in the gallery

The procedure for editing of an existing drawing

1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.

2. Select the drawing you need to modify.

3. Click button [Edit].

4. The editing dialogue for a new drawing is opened.

5. Make the necessary changes to the drawing.

6. Confirm with [OK] button.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.

8. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Creating a new drawing in the gallery

The procedure for the creation of a new drawing

1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.

2. Click button [New].

3. The editing dialogue for a new drawing is opened.

4. Make the drawing.

5. Confirm with [OK] button.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 as many times as required.

7. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Basic Reference Guide

610

Creating a new drawing based on a template Especially for larger projects, it may be useful to define some part of the drawing that is repeated on each drawing related to the project. This repeated part might be e.g. a title block with the company logo, etc.

Scia Engineer enables the user to define a template for each new drawing created in the Paper space gallery. The template is nothing else than a drawing that has been created in the Paper space gallery earlier and saved as an external file.

If a template is specified in the application settings (see chapter Program settings > Application settings > Graphic templates settings) each new drawing created in the Paper space gallery is based on this template.

Printing the drawing from the gallery

The procedure for printing of an existing drawing

1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.

2. Select the drawing you need to print.

3. Click button [Print].

4. Adjust printer parameters.

5. Confirm with [OK] button.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 as many times as required.

7. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Copying the drawing in the gallery

The procedure for editing of an existing drawing

1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.

2. Select the drawing you need to copy.

3. Click button [Copy].

4. A new copy of the selected drawing is created.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.

6. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Deleting the drawing from the gallery

The procedure for removal of an existing drawing

1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.

2. Select the drawing you want to delete.

3. Click button [Delete].

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.

5. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Making or changing the drawing A drawing itself is created or edited in a dialogue that is almost identical to the Graphic output dialogue (see chapter Graphic output > Direct graphic output > Editing the layout).

Graphic output

611

There are a few changes or extensions that are described below.

Insertion of an external picture

An external picture may be inserted from the same resources as in the direct graphical output. In addition, there are some more option:

from window Inserts a drawing from any of the opened graphical windows.

from gallery Insert a picture from the Picture gallery.

Editing picture properties

Button [Picture setting] is not present on the control toolbar. The properties of a particular picture may be edited after its

selection via button [Properties] ( ) on the control toolbar.

Saving a template Any drawing may be saved as a template. The template may be later used as the basis (starting status) for new drawings.

The procedure to save a template

1. Open the Paper space gallery.

2. Create a new drawing.

3. Draw and insert everything that should appear on the template.

4. Press button Save template on the toolbar.

Note: In order to make the saved template "active" follow the procedure given in chapter Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings.

Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings Templates may be very useful when a part of the drawing should be present on numerous drawings. See also Creating a new drawing based on a template.

The procedure for creation of a template for drawings

1. Open the Paper space gallery.

2. Create a new drawing.

3. Prepare the part of the drawing that should be repeated on each drawing.

4. Save the drawing as template.

Basic Reference Guide

612

5. Close the Paper space gallery.

6. Use function Setup > Options.

7. Select tab Graphic templates.

8. In the field Overview drawings manager, browse for the file you have saved to the disk.

9. Confirm the settings.

Form now on, whenever a new drawing will be created in the Paper space gallery, it will contain the template drawing.

Note: If the template is supposed to be used not for the Paper space gallery drawings, but for Graphic output (i.e. Print picture function) field Print picture in the Setup > Options dialogue must be adjusted acordingly.

613

Document

Introduction to document The Document is a part of Scia Engineer that enables you to produce output documents. The final Document may consist of:

separate tables,

embedded tables,

pictures,

user-added comments,

included external files,

etc.

The chapter Document comprises three parts that are closely related to each other:

Document window The Document window is the very tool that serves for the creation of above mentioned output documents.

Preview window The Preview window enables the user to look at selected parts of the model in Document-like style.

Table composer The Table composer provides for formatting of tables in both Document and Preview windows.

Document window

Introduction to document window The Document window is a separate window of Scia Engineer. While the graphical window of Scia Engineer displays the drawing of structure, the Document window is capable of displaying drawings together with summarising tables and other user-specified information.

Example of Document window

The Document window in the picture shows fragments of tables of cross-sections and 1D members defined in the structure.

Basic Reference Guide

614

Opening the document window The Document window can be opened in several ways:

in tree menu, open service Document,

on toolbar Project click button [Document] ( ).

When the Document window is opened the Document tree is displayed in the tree menu window.

Document window toolbar

A Export Exports the contents of the document into an external file of selected format.

B Document settings Opens Visual Style dialogue and enables you to change the layout of the current visual style.

C Printer setup Provides for the adjustment of printer.

D Print Prints the contents of the document.

E No pagination The document in the Document window uses no pagination. That is, the tables are shown one after another.

Document

615

F Pagination,

fit page width

The Document window shows a preview of the document including page breaks. The page fits the width of the document window.

G Pagination,

fit whole page

Similar to above, but you can see the page is zoomed so that the Document window shows the whole page.

H Refresh of document

Refreshes the document (may be necessary after some modifications of the Document).

The principle of manual refresh has been introduced in order to speed up the response of the Document.

I Refresh of images Refreshes the images inserted into the document (may be necessary after some modifications of the Document).

The principle of manual refresh has been introduced in order to speed up the response of the Document.

J Fast selection of Visual Style

Selects the active visual style from the list of existing (defined) visual styles.

K Visual Style manager

Opens the Visual styles manager.

L Fast selection of Table Style

Selects the active table style from the list of existing (defined) table styles for the selected table.

M Table composer Opens the Table composer.

N Table manager Opens the Table manager.

Creating the document

Inserting a new item into document The user manually specifies which tables, drawings, etc. will be present in the document.

Default Default components are e.g. user-defined text, external picture, etc.

Project Basic information about the current project.

Libraries Libraries contain e.g. materials, cross-sections, etc. used in the structure.

Sets From this group, load groups, load cases, etc. can be added to the document.

Structure Group structure holds information about the members and nodes of the model.

Load Individual loads may be listed in the document.

Results Result tables form a very important part of the document.

The result tables can only be included from the graphical window.

Steel Design and check values for steel members.

Pipeline Data relating to pipeline design (special module).

Timber Design and check values for timber members.

Concrete Design and check values for concrete members.

Mobile loads Results relating to the calculation with mobile loads.

Mobile loads – input data Input data relating to mobile loads.

Influence lines Calculated influence lines.

Picture Picture from gallery.

Special Some special data.

Note: The list of available groups (sets) of items can vary depending on the type of project and depending on selected functionality.

Basic Reference Guide

616

Each of the above mentioned groups (called sets) contains one or more individual items. It is possible to include into the document either the whole set or only selected items. The procedure is the same – what decides is what you select.

The selection of items inside a particular group can vary according to the type of the project and selected functionality. E.g. if no predefined loads are defined in the project, they are not offered in the list.

Procedure for the insertion of a new section into the document

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. The New document item dialogue is opened. It contains the list of available sets and items.

3. Select the required set and item.

4. Press button Add to add the item into the document.

5. Close the New document item dialogue.

An alternative procedure for the insertion of a new section into the document

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. The New document item dialogue is opened. It contains the list of available sets and items.

3. Select the required set and item.

4. Using a standard Windows Drag&Drop feature, move the selected item into the document tree.

5. Close the New document item dialogue.

Inserting a new item into document from the graphical window A table may be inserted into the document also directly from the graphical window of Scia Engineer. In that case, the table is created for the selected entities. The selection may be controlled by filters.

The procedure to insert a table into the document from the graphical window

1. Display the entities for which you want to insert a table into the document.

2. Select the required entities.

3. Call function Table to document:

a. either using menu function File > Print data > Table to document,

b. or using button [Print] ( ) on toolbar Project and selecting function Table to document,

c. or through the pop-up menu and its function Table to document.

4. The Insert-dialogue is opened on the screen.

5. If required, make necessary adjustments.

6. Confirm with [OK].

7. A new table for the selected entities is inserted into the document.

Insert-dialogue parameters

List of selected or available entities

This part of the Insert dialogue shows all the entities that are available for insertion into the document at this moment.

Just one entity may and must be selected at a time.

Name Specifies the name of the table. It can be changed if required.

Caption Specifies the caption of the table. It can be altered if required.

Visible Specifies whether the table will be visible in the document or not.

Prefer one page If ON, the document will try to put the table on one page, i.e. not to divide it into two pages.

Selection All

All the entities of the type that was selected in the top list will be included in the table.

List

The table will be limited to a finite list of entities. The selection can be modified through the button [Edit].

Wildcard

Only entities meeting the typed "wildcard specification" (e.g. BE*) will be input into the table.

Named selection

If exists, a user-defined named selection can be selected here.

Edit/Wildcard/Named This item extends the previous one.

Document

617

selection

Examples

Assume the following simple planar structure:

It is subject to:

self weight,

line load acting on the top beams and defined by projection (displayed in the picture),

point load in selected nodes defined in a separate load case (not displayed in the picture),

Example 1

No service is opened. All entities are selected. Function Table to document is called.

The program inserts all available information into the document. A dialogue is displayed on the screen where the user may rename individual sections (tables).

Example 2

No service is opened. Line loads are selected. Two nodes are selected. Function Table to document is called.

The program inserts available information for the selected entities into the document. A dialogue is displayed on the screen where the user may rename individual sections (tables).

Basic Reference Guide

618

Example 3

The structure is already calculated. Service Results is opened. Function Internal forces is focused and result-diagrams displayed.

When function Table to document is called, the following table is included into the document.

Inserting a drawing into the document The insertion of a drawing from the graphical window into the document is analogous to the insertion of a table into the document.

When a drawing is being inserted into the document, it is possible adjust parameters controlling the style and size of the final image in the document. Naturally, these parameters can also be adjusted or modified later from the Document. Each picture has its properties accessible in the Document window.

Picture properties

General properties

Name Specifies the name of the table. It can be changed if required.

Caption Specifies the caption of the table. It can be altered if required.

Document

619

Visible Specifies whether the table will be visible in the document or not.

Prefer one page If ON, the document will try to put the table on one page, i.e. not to divide it into two pages.

Size definition The size of the picture can be defined in several ways. Depending on this choice, only some of the following properties are available.

Available options are:

percentage of page height,

scale,

fixed width,

fixed height,

fit in rectangle.

Scale (available for relevant options)

Specifies the scale 1 : X.

Picture width (available for relevant options, informative only)

Available for Scale option only. Shows the width of the picture.

Picture height (available for relevant options, informative only)

Available for Scale option only. Shows the height of the picture.

Percentage of page (available for relevant options)

Specifies the size of the picture as a percentage of the page.

Fit (available for relevant options)

Controls what part of the page the picture occupies and specifies its zoom.

Width (available for relevant options)

Specifies the width of the image.

Height (available for relevant options)

Specifies the height of the image.

Rotate If ON, the picture is rotated by 90° counter clockwise.

3D Image in PDF If ON, the image is exported to PDF as a 3D image and can be rotated and further manipulated in Adobe Reader.

This option requires that appropriate version of Adobe Reader is used (version 8.1.1 or newer).

Even though the PDF 3D control enables the user to adjust display style when the image is viewed in Adobe Reader, it is necessary to have the image rendered in the Document (Display mode = Rendered) if rendered display style is wanted in the final PDF. If the image in the Document is only wired, the PDF 3D control will not receive enough data to render it.

Edit picture The picture can be edited if required.

Picture data

Display mode wired

The picture is rendered using a simple method.

standard

The picture is inserted to the document AS IS in the graphical window using the same rendering options. This option is recommended for most users.

rendered

The picture is fully rendered.

hidden lines

The picture hides outline lines that cannot be seen from the adjusted view point.

hidden lines dashed

Similar to the above, but the hidden lines are drawn as dashed lines.

View point This option opens a dialogue where the view direction and zoom can be easily adjusted.

View parameters Opens a standard view parameters dialogue. View parameters control what components of the structure are displayed and how.

Basic Reference Guide

620

Colour + line settings Opens a standard Palette settings dialogue where e.g. colours of individual components, line style, etc. can be adjusted.

Load colour setup in regen(eration)

If ON and the picture in the document is regenerated, the picture reads current colour settings from the project.

Explanation:

Let us assume that you insert a picture to document. You make no special colour adjustments as you want to have the same colours in your graphical screen and in the document. Later, you change the colours in your project, i.e. the colours in your graphical screen change. If option "Load colour setup in regen(eration)" is OFF, the picture in the document keeps its original colours. However, if option "Load colour setup in regen(eration)" is ON, the picture in the document – when regenerated - reads the current settings from the project and changes its own settings accordingly.

Load units in regen(eration)

This option is analogous to the previous one. This time the units are either preserved or updated from current project settings.

Load activity in regen(eration)

This option is analogous to the previous one. This time activity is either preserved or updated from current project settings.

Text scale factor This item specifies the scale for text in the image.

This parameter may be useful when the picture is intended for large formats (e.g. A0). I such a case the text will be significantly small in comparison with the size of the drawing. It may however happen that the user needs to make a draft printing on smaller format. If this is made without any changes, the text becomes illegible. The same may be true for the preview on the screen. Therefore, it is possible to magnify the text size in order to make the text readable even on smaller formats.

Charset of text This item defines the character set for the text – this option may be especially important for other than western European languages.

Line pattern length This parameter defines the length of "dashes" in dashed lines.

Display GCS icon An icon indicating orientation of global coordinate axes may be placed on the image. Available options are: none, to coordinate system origin, to picture corner.

Performance settings

Exclude object tooltips If ON, all tooltips are removed from the current scene in the graphical window, before it is saved to the image. As a result, when the picture is later edited in the Document or in the Picture gallery, no tooltips are available when selections are made.

This option significantly reduces the size of the image. For a common project, it may reduce the size by 20%.

Default = OFF.

Exclude layers If ON, information about layers is removed from the current scene in the graphical window, before it is saved to the image.

This option significantly reduces the size of the image. For a common project, it may reduce the size by 20%.

Default = ON.

Disable surface OSNAP If ON, information about hidden geometry (i.e. hidden surface lines) is removed from the current scene in the graphical window, before it is saved to the image.

This option dramatically reduces the size of the image. For a common project, it may reduce the size by 50%.

Default = ON.

The procedure for the insertion of a picture from the graphical window into document

1. Display the entities for which you want to insert a table into the document.

2. Adjust the required view and view parameters.

3. Call function Picture to document:

a. either using menu function File > Print picture > Picture to document,

b. or using button [Print picture] ( ) on toolbar Project,

c. or using the pop-up menu function Picture to document (it may be "hidden" in View submenu if some entities are selected).

4. The picture is inserted into the document.

Document

621

Note: Also pictures may be repeated the same way as tables. Thus e.g. a set of pictures showing diagrams of internal forces for individual load cases may be easily created. Just insert a drawing of internal forces into document item Load cases. See chapter Creating the repeating tables for more information.

Inserting a picture from the Picture gallery

Procedure to insert a picture from the Picture gallery

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. In Picture group select From gallery.

3. Press button Add to open the Picture gallery manager.

4. Browse through the available pictures and select those that should be inserted into the document (single or multi-selection can be used).

5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

6. The Insert-item dialogue is opened on the screen.

7. Adjust required parameters and confirm with [OK].

8. Close the New document item dialogue.

Picture parameters

Name Specifies the name of the table. It can be changed if required.

Caption Specifies the caption of the table. It can be altered if required.

Visible Specifies whether the table will be visible in the document or not.

Prefer one page If ON, the document will try to put the table on one page, i.e. not to divide it into two pages.

Size definition The size of the picture can be defined through the scale or in percentages of the page.

Scale Specifies the scale 1 : X.

Picture width Available for Scale option only. Defines the width of the picture.

Picture height Available for Scale option only. Defines the height of the picture.

Percentage of page Specifies the size of the picture as a percentage of the page.

Fit to page Available for Percentage option only. If ON, the picture is stretched to fit the page.

Inserting a new text line

Procedure for the insertion of a user-typed text

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. In Default group select Text line.

3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.

4. Close the New document item dialogue.

5. In the document tree window select the Text line item.

6. The Property window displays its properties.

7. Click button [Edit text].

8. Fill in the editing dialogue: type the caption of the item and the text itself.

9. Confirm the action.

Inserting an external image file

Procedure for the insertion of an external image file

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. In Default group select External Image file.

3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.

4. Close the New document item dialogue.

5. In the document tree window select the External image file item.

6. The Property window displays its properties.

7. Decide whether the file is embedded into the document or self-standing.

Basic Reference Guide

622

a. If option Embed data is ON, the file is copied into the document and the original file may be deleted from the disk. This results in more consistent and independent document, but it becomes larger.

b. If option Embed data is OFF, only a reference to the file is inserted into the document. Once the original file is removed from the disk, or moved to another location, it disappears from the document. This option leads to smaller document, but it is susceptible to re-arrangement of files on the disk.

8. Browse for the file.

9. Adjust its size in Percentage of page.

Inserting an external text file

Procedure for the insertion of an external text file

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. In Default group select External Text file.

3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.

4. Close the New document item dialogue.

5. In the document tree window select the External text file item.

6. The Property window displays its properties.

7. Decide whether the file is embedded into the document or self-standing.

a. If option Embed data is ON, the file is copied into the document and the original file may be deleted from the disk. This results in more consistent and independent document, but it becomes larger.

b. If option Embed data is OFF, only a reference to the file is inserted into the document. Once the original file is removed from the disk, or moved to another location, it disappears from the document. This option leads to smaller document, but it is susceptible to re-arrangement of files on the disk.

8. Browse for the file.

Inserting the end of page

Procedure for the insertion of a page break (End of page)

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. In Default group select Page break.

3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.

4. Close the New document item dialogue.

5. In the document tree window select the Page break item.

6. The Property window displays its properties.

7. Select if the item is printable or not.

8. If required, specify the number of skipped pages.

Inserting the table of contents

Procedure for the insertion of a table of contents

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. In Default group select Table of contents.

3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.

4. Close the New document item dialogue.

Inserting an empty chapter

Procedure for the insertion of an empty chapter

1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].

2. In Default group select Chapter.

3. Press button [Add] to add the item into the document.

4. Close the New document item dialogue.

Creating the advanced documents

Document

623

Creating the repeating tables

Tables for related information included in the document may be repeated and thus provide for sorted arrangement of the data.

The principle of repeating will be explained on an example of load cases and load.

Standard arrangement

Let’s assume that three tables are included into the document:

load cases,

line load,

point load.

If the tables are inserted in a standard way, the document tree looks like:

And the document looks like:

Repeating arrangement

Let’s assume that the user wants the data to be sorted in the following way:

information about the first load case,

loads acting in the first load case,

information about the second load case,

loads acting in the second load case,

etc.

The Document of Scia Engineer provides even for this sophisticated arrangement of information in the document.

Basic Reference Guide

624

The document tree then looks like:

And the document is arranged as shown below.

The procedure for the creation of repeating tables

1. Add the required tables into the document using the standard way. (The tables may be inserted from the graphical window as well.)

2. In the document tree, select the item that should be repeated "under" the master item.

3. Using standard Windows Drag&Drop feature, move the selected item under (or into) the required master. Alternatively you may invoke the document tree pop-up menu and perform function Indent.

4. That’s it.

Note: Even though the chapter is named "repeating tables", it is in fact any document item that can be repeated, e.g. a picture. See the example below. Example Let us assume a three-span continuous beam subjected to: (i) self-weight, (ii) a concentrated force in the middle of the first span, (iii) a concentrated force in the middle of the second span, and (iv) a concentrated force in the middle of the third span. The document tree may be created in the following way:

Document

625

The picture is a diagram of bending moments – displayed in the Results service and "saved" using the Picture to document function. The final document will look like:

Basic Reference Guide

626

Creating multiple documents for the project

Each project can have more than one document. Each of the documents is then treated separately as a single self-standing document.

The procedure for creation of additional documents

1. Open the Document window.

2. At the top right corner of the document tree window click the button [Manager of documents].

3. The Manager of documents is opened on the screen.

4. Use button New to create a new document.

5. Close the Manager of documents.

Note: It is generally recommended to create multiple documents in one project instead of one huge "mastodon". The manipulation with smaller documents is much faster and safer than the necessity to handle hundreds or thousands of pages at a time.

Editing the basic document properties

Manager of documents The Manager of documents is a standard Scia Engineer manages.

To open it, click the button [...] (i.e. Manager of documents) at the top right corner of the document tree window.

You can edit the basic document properties in the Document manager. Or, alternatively, you can edit them directly in the Document property window that is displayed next to the document window.

The document also offers the Document action buttons.

Document

627

Basic document properties Each document has got a set of basic properties.

Name The name is used for an easy identification of the document.

Description It may contain some additional information about the document.

Embed settings

If YES, all the adjustments in the style of tables are stored with the current project. It means that if you share the project with your colleague, when he/she opens it on his/her computer, the layout and style of the tables will be the same as yours.

If NO, the style and layout of tables in the document is stored in ESA PT folder(s) on your computer. It means that if you share the project with your colleague, when he/she opens it on his/her computer, the style and layout will be read from his/her computer and, consequently, may be different from the layout on your computer. On the other hand, the project file is smaller as the formatting information does not have to be stored with it.

Language Specifies the language of the document.

Please note that even if you change the language of the document, there are some texts that remain in the original language, e.g. names of load cases, names of cross-sections, etc.

Pictures alignment

The pictures can be left-aligned, centred, or right-aligned in the page.

Header template

This item specifies the style of the header of the document. If required, the header can be left out completely.

Edit header template

This item opens the Table composer for the currently selected header template.

Title page template

This item specifies the style of the title page of the document. If required, the title page can be left out completely.

Edit title page template

This item opens the Table composer for the currently selected title page template.

Footer template

This item specifies the style of the footer of the document. If required, the footer can be left out completely.

Edit footer template

This item opens the Table composer for the currently selected footer template.

First page number

Specifies the number of the first page.

When several documents are combined together, or when you need to have a special "introduction" prior to the document itself, this item allows for the necessary adjustment.

First chapter number

Specifies the number of the first chapter.

Chapters numbers

Specifies which chapters are numbered.

Let us assume this simple document:

None: There will be no chapters numbers at all.

All: All the chapters will be numbered (including the appropriate level). That is: Load cases, Line forces on beam, Load groups and Combination key will be equipped with a number.

Basic Reference Guide

628

Top level: Only the chapters from the first level will be numbered. In our example, Load cases, Load groups and Combination key will be numbered. Line forces on beam will be without any number. Also the tables with individual load cases will not be numbered.

Chapters descriptions

Similar to Chapters numbers, but affects not only the numbering, but the whole titles of individual chapters.

The properties may be edited in the Manager of documents.

Note: If you want to ensure that all the possible users who open the document from a particular project on their local computers have the same layout of the document, always set option Embed settings to ON. Otherwise, it may happen that different users will get different layout of the document, depending on their local settings.

Adjusting basic document properties

The procedure to adjust the basic properties of a document

1. Open the Document (e.g. through the tree function Document).

2. In the Document tree select the top level item.

3. The Property window shows the basic properties of he document.

4. Make required changes.

5. If required, regenerate the document and it can be printed, exported, or whatever you need.

Document

629

6. Close the document.

Document action buttons The property window of the document (and also the Manager of documents) offer a set of action buttons.

[Refresh of document] The document contents is refreshed.

[Refresh of picture] The images in the document are refreshed.

[Load settings] Settings previously saved into an external file are read.

[Save settings] The current settings are stored into an external file.

[Save template] The current document is saved as a new document template.

Editing the document layout

Introduction to editing of document layout Once the document has been created, it is not supposed to only passively remain AS IS forever. Any time when necessary, the user may edit the document.

It is possible to:

edit the layout of individual tables in the Table composer,

edit properties of individual items in the Property window,

sort individual items of the document,

remove unnecessary tables.

Editing the properties of document items Whenever an item is selected (i.e. highlighted) in the document tree window, the corresponding part of the document is displayed on the screen (i.e. the proper page is shown). Simultaneously the parameters of the selected item are listed in the Property window and may be reviewed or edited. The parameters depend on the type of the selected item. Different parameters will be available for table of result internal forces and different parameters for e.g. an external image file. On the other hand, some of the parameters will be identical as they define the general properties of the document item.

Name Specifies the name of the table. It can be changed if required.

Caption Specifies the caption of the table. It can be altered if required.

Visible Specifies whether the table will be visible in the document or not.

Prefer one page If ON, the document will try to put the table on one page, i.e. not to divide it into two pages.

Selection All

All the entities of the type that was selected in the top list will be included in the table.

List

The table will be limited to a finite list of entities. The selection can be modified through the button [Edit].

Wildcard

Only entities meeting the typed "wildcard specification" (e.g. BE*) will be input into the table.

Named selection

If exists, a user-defined named selection can be selected here.

Edit/Wildcard/Named selection

This item extends the previous one.

Note: There may be additional parameters available for a perticulat document item. These additional parameters are relating to the particular data, e.g. results > internal forces, picture parameters, etc. Meaning of such parameters is usually clear from the context they appear in. The meaning may be also found in the explanation of the appropriate part of the program (e.g. parameters of Result tables can be found in chapter Results).

Sorting the items of the document

Basic Reference Guide

630

The procedure for sorting of items in the document

1. In the document tree window select the item that should be moved to a new position.

2. Press key [Ctrl] and hold it down.

3. Use arrow keys [Up] and [Down] to move the item to its new position within the document tree.

The sorting may also be done using the Drag&Drop feature or via the document-tree pop-up menu.

Deleting the items from the document

The procedure for deletion of an item from the document

1. In the document tree window, select the item that should be deleted.

2. Press key [Delete].

3. The item is removed from the document.

The required item can also be deleted or via the document-tree pop-up menu.

Editing the header A default header is automatically inserted into the document. Its layout and style can be edited using the table composer for the header.

The procedure for the editing of the header

1. Position the mouse cursor inside the document window.

2. Click right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.

3. Select function Header.

4. The table composer opens on the screen.

5. Use it to make the required modifications.

Note: Contrary to other tables inserted into the Document, Header and Footer can be edited in a simplified Table Composer dialogue. In fact, this simplified dialogue opens on the screen by default. If required, the user may swap to full editor.

Editing the footer A default header is automatically inserted into the document.

Its layout and style can be edited using the table composer for the header.

The procedure for the editing of the footer

1. Position the mouse cursor inside the document window.

2. Click right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.

3. Select function Footer.

4. The table composer opens on the screen.

5. Use it to make the required modifications.

Note: Contrary to other tables inserted into the Document, Header and Footer can be edited in a simplified Table Composer dialogue. In fact, this simplified dialogue opens on the screen by default. If required, the user may swap to full editor.

Document-tree pop-up menu The tree window of the document is equipped with a pop-up menu. The menu ofer some basic functions for the management of the layout of the document.

Move up Moves the current item up in the document tree.

Move down Moves the current item down in the document tree.

Indent Indents the current item, that is, it creates a repeating item.

Outdent Outdents the current item. It can be user to remove the repeating items.

Copy Makes a copy of the current item. The item is put next to the original one and can be then moved and/or edited.

The current item can also be copied using Drag-and-Drop approach with simultaneously pressed and held Ctrl key on the keyboard.

Delete Deletes the current item.

Show list of Performs the same function as button [New], i.e. opens a dialogue with a list of

Document

631

insertable items all items (tables) that can be inserted into the document.

Modifying the structure through the document

Editing the geometry in the document table The Document is not only a passive printable representation of the modelled structure and calculated results. The tables in the document may be used for tabular editing of the model.

Editing the nodal co-ordinates

Any co-ordinate of any nodal point of the model may be numerically edited in the document table.

The procedure for the editing of nodal co-ordinates

1. Find in the document the table with co-ordinates of nodal points.

2. Select the node you need to modify.

3. Click the cell with the co-ordinate.

4. Type the new value.

5. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.

Editing the end-nodes of beams

Any of the existing 1D members may be "switched" to a new end-point.

The procedure for the change of beam’s end-node

1. Find in the document the table with 1D members.

2. Select the 1D member you need to modify.

3. Click the cell with the node name.

4. Type the new node name.

5. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.

Editing the beam properties

Also properties of 1D members can be edited in the document, not only the geometry.

The procedure for the change of beam’s properties

1. Find in the document the table with 1D members.

2. Select the 1D member you need to modify.

3. Make the change:

4. If the value may be typed directly, click the cell and type the new value.

5. If the new value can be selected from a list of available options, double click the cell and then use the offered combo box to set the right choice.

6. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.

Note: Changes made in any of the document tables are immediately taken into account.

Editing the additional data in the document table Similarly to geometry, also other data of the model (e.g. supports, hinges, loads, etc.) can be edited from within the document tables.

Editing the model data of the project (e.g. supports)

Any model data can be edited in the appropriate document table.

The procedure for the change of model data

1. Find in the document the table with required model data.

2. Select the entity you need to modify.

3. Make the change:

4. If the value may be typed directly, click the cell and type the new value.

5. If the new value can be selected from a list of available options, double click the cell and then use the offered combo box to set the right choice.

6. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.

Editing the loads

Any loads can be edited in the appropriate document table.

The procedure for the editing of loads

Basic Reference Guide

632

1. Find in the document the table with required loads.

2. Select the load you need to modify.

3. Make the change:

4. If the value may be typed directly, click the cell and type the new value.

5. If the new value can be selected from a list of available options, double click the cell and then use the offered combo box to set the right choice.

6. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.

Note: Changes made in any of the document tables are immediately taken into account.

Previewing the document

Adjusting the document preview The document may be previewed using several pagination modes.

no pagination The document is displayed as a continuous uninterrupted document.

The title page, headers and footers are not displayed.

pagination, fit page width Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The page width fits the width of the screen.

The title page, headers and footers are displayed.

pagination, fit whole page Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The whole page is shown on the screen.

The title page, headers and footers are displayed.

Printing and exporting the document

Adjusting the printing device

The procedure for the adjustment of the printing device

1. In the document window click button [Printer setup] ( ).

2. Make required settings.

3. Confirm with [OK].

Printing the document The printer may be adjusted prior to the printing.

The procedure for printing

1. In the document window click button [Print] ( ).

2. Select required printing device.

3. Set other print parameters.

4. Finish the print.

Exporting the document

The procedure for export of the document

1. In the document window click button [Export] ( ).

2. Select the required format.

3. Select other export options.

4. Finish with button [Export].

Export formats

HTML The document is exported as a separate web page.

TXT The document is exported as a simple text. No drawings, no pictures, and no embedded tables are exported.

RTF The document is exported as a Rich Text Format file. This format is widely used for exchange of files between various programs. Pictures and embedded tables are exported as well. The pictures are included

Document

633

directly into the file.

PDF The document is exported to a file that can be view in the Acrobat Reader that is downloadable for free from the Internet.

XLS The document is exported to a file that can be view and edited in MS Excel.

Parameters and limitations

HTML

Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in your browser associated with HTM files.

Unicode Unicode encoding is used to store the text.

Text

Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in Notepad or other program associated with TXT file.

Unicode Unicode encoding is used to store the text.

RTF

Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in the program associated with RTF files.

Max picture colour depth Defines the quality of pictures

Enable vector pictures Pictures are stored as vector images.

This option works ONLY with MS Word XP, MS Word 2003, or newer. It does not work with MS Word 2000 and older.

PDF

Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in the PDF-format associated program (usually the free-available Adobe reader).

Max pages per file This option can limit the number of pages generated in a single file. If the total number of document pages exceeds the specified number, multiple PDF files are generated.

Example

Let us assume a document occupying 3 pages. Let us assume that Max pages per file is set to 1. Let us assume that the name of the exported PDF file is input as MyExportedDocument.pdf.

After the export into PDF, there are 3 files generated: MyExportedDocument.1.pdf,

MyExportedDocument.2.pdf,

MyExportedDocument.3.pdf.

Each of the generated PDF files contains one page of the document.

Note: It is, of course, clear that in practice you usually specify more than 1 page per document.

Compression of pictures It is possible to selecte a required method of compression. Users without any background knowledge on compressing the graphics are recommended to use the default option.

Double pictures resolution If ON, the quality of pictures is higher, the PDF file is larger.

If OFF, it is the opposite way.

Pictures compression level

Defines the rate of compression. Again, users without any background knowledge on compressing the graphics are recommended to use the default option.

Enable vector pictures If ON, the quality of pictures is better (if possible).

Enable 3D PDF If ON, the pictures that were inserted to the document with option "3D PDF" will be exported to the PDF file as 3D images.

Basic Reference Guide

634

Limitations

The size of the image that can be exported to 3D PDF is limited. A warning message appears when exporting file becomes too big. The user can decide whether to continue and risk a crash of the system or whether to stop and then the received PDF file may contain an incomplete structure. This warning message appears when there is aprox. 16 000 objects in the exported file. It is quite a safe number. Tests showed that crash usually happens at the number of 40 000 objects.

XLS

This export format creates a file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel. What is important, however, is the fact that this export procedure does NOT generate a standard XLS file. In fact, it generates what is called XML Spreadsheet. A whole system of several XML-format files that are stored in the specified output folder and one automatically created subfolder. The extension of the main file is set to XLS, so it can be easily located.

Remember, when you want to copy the exported "XLS" file to another location, you must take the corresponding subfolder as well. Otherwise, the copy of your spreadsheet won’t open.

Parameters

Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in your browser associated with HTM files.

Unicode Unicode encoding is used to store the text.

Refreshing the document

Principle An ideal state would be if everything could be fully automatic and made immediately without any delay. This is even more true with reference to software and its interaction with the user.

Unfortunately, this is only an ideal state that can hardly be achieved in practice. What’s more, sometimes the immediate response to any user’s action can be even undesirable, especially when a set of successive steps is necessary to complete a particular action.

Scia Engineer therefore presents a well-thought-out compromise solution in service Results and also in the Document.

The implemented solution consists of two separate steps:

1. The user can freely select "WHAT" should be displayed and also adjust "HOW" it should be displayed.

2. The user then gives the command "refresh (or display or regenerate) everything NOW".

Refresh of document A refresh of document can be made by means of two separate buttons.

Refresh of document

It refreshes the contents of the document. If necessary, it fills in the tables with appropriate and current data and make the document up-to-date.

Refresh of pictures

It refreshes all the pictures in the document so that they reflect the current state of the project.

Whenever a document is opened, it is displayed in comprised form, i.e. with empty tables and only headings shown. In order to see the full document, [Refresh of document] button must be used.

If any change is made to the contents of the document (e.g. a new table is added, some of the existing tables is removed, etc.) [Refresh of document] button must be used as well in order to regenerate the document.

If a change is made to the model and this change results in a modification of drawings already inserted in the document, [Refresh of picture] button must be used in order to regenerate the pictures.

Example for refresh of Document Let’s assume the same structure as in the Example for Refresh of results.

Let’s create a new document created and insert two tables as shown below.

Document

635

This document will show internal forces in beams for individual load cases sorted by the load cases.

Once the document is created in the above mentioned way, the document window will show the "contents" of the document, but not the numerical values.

Once button [Refresh of document] ( ) is pressed, the document is regenerated and the individual tables are filled in with appropriate numerical data.

Basic Reference Guide

636

The picture above shows a fragment of the whole document.

Preview window

Introduction to preview window The Preview window is a document-like window that can be used for:

tabular preview of selected entities,

tabular editing of the model.

Note: The philosophy and operation principles of the Preview window are identical with those for the Document window. Therefore, the majority of instructions for use of the Document can be applied to the Preview window as well.

Opening the preview window

The procedure for the opening of the Preview window

1. In the graphical window of Scia Engineer select the entities that should be included into the preview.

2. Call function Print / Preview table:

Document

637

a. either using menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview table,

b. or clicking button [Print] ( ) on toolbar Project.

3. The Preview window is opened and appropriate tables are displayed in it.

Note: If the Preview window has been already opened, its contents is replaced with the appropriate new tables.

For more information about selection of entities for the display in the Preview window see chapter Inserting a new section into document from the graphical window.

Adjusting the display style in the preview window The preview window may be formatted:

no pagination The document in the Preview window is displayed as a continuous uninterrupted document.

The title page, headers and footers are not displayed.

pagination, fit page width Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The page width fits the width of the screen.

The title page, headers and footers are displayed as well.

pagination, fit whole page Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The whole page is shown on the screen.

The title page, headers and footers are displayed as well.

Note 1: The layout, style and contents of tables in the Preview window can be adjusted by means of table composer. Note 2: The preview can be supplemented with a header and footer. The formatting of these preview elements is identical with formatting in the document window.

Adjusting the preview window settings Similarly to the document window, the user may specify preview window settings. The procedure and meaning of the parameters are analogous with the settings for the document window.

Exporting the preview The contents of the Preview window can be exported into an external file.

The procedure is analogous to the procedure for exporting from the document window.

Printing the preview The contents of the Preview window can be printed on the connected printing device.

The procedure is analogous to the procedure for printing from the document window.

The printing device may be adjusted the same way as in the document window.

Editing the structure from within the preview window Both the geometry and additional data of the model can be edited numerically in the tables displayed in the Preview window.

The procedure is identical to the procedure for editing of geometry and additional data from within the document tables.

Visual style of the document

Visual style The overall layout of the document (page size, margins, fonts, colours, etc.) is called "Visual Style".

One document can have several visual styles defined. Only one visual style may be selected as the active one. On the other hand, it is simple to swap from one visual style to another. This change effects ONLY the layout of the document page. It has no impact at all on the contents of the document and on the style (let’s say layout) of individual tables and images in the document.

The visual style is kept separately from the layout and contents of tables so that it can be easily copied (distributed) to other computers where Scia Engineer is installed.

This way, it is very simple to have a unified layout of document pages throughout the whole company.

On disk, each visual style is stored in one file. The files use extension .zdx and are stored in folder with table templates.

Note: The .zdx file is of XML format.

The visual styles can be defined and also edited in the Visual Styles Manager.

Basic Reference Guide

638

Visual styles manager The Visual styles manager is a standard Scia Engineer database manager.

You can use it to:

select required visual style for your document,

create a new visual style,

edit the existing visual style,

delete the no-longer-used visual style.

The procedure to open the Visual styles manager

1. Open the Document.

2. Press button [Visual style manager] on the bar at the top of the Document window.

3. The Visual styles manager is opened on the screen.

Adjusting the visual style The visual style can be adjusted in the Visual Style dialogue. The following groups of parameters are available.

Page On this tab the user may define the main properties of a page.

Styles On this tab the user may define the styles used in the document.

Tables On this tab the user may specify the layout of tables in the document.

Options Some advanced options may be set here.

Page

Printer This item defines the printer used for output of document. Any of installed printers can be selected for the output.

"Part of the page" In the combo box, it is possible to choose which part of the sheet is to be adjusted (e.g. body, footer, header, etc.).

For each part of the page the following settings are available.

Padding Defines the padding (free space or gap) between the "frame" (border) of the selected part of the page and the contents (e.g. text) of that part of the page.

Border Defines the thickness and colour of the frame (rectangle) that can be drawn around the selected part of the page.

Margin Defines the outer "gap" around the selected part of the page.

Example: Horizontal padding and margins

The following example demonstrates the practical meaning of padding and margins. The horizontal left padding and horizontal left margin is shown for the "page" and "body".

Document

639

Page

A = left margin (distance between the edge of the sheet and the border)

B = left border (thickness of the border)

C = left padding (distance between the border and the "contents" of the page)

Body

D = left margin (distance between the "contents-edge" of the page and the frame of the body)

E = left border (thickness of the frame of the body)

F = left padding (distance between the border and the "contents" of the body)

Styles

This tab of the dialogue allows for the adjustment of font parameters. The first control element (the combo box) selects the style (e.g. Normal, Table header, etc.). The control elements below then define the properties of that particular style.

Font Specifies the font.

Height Defines the size of letters.

Width Defines the width of letters.

Weight Defines the thickness of letters.

Italic Specifies whether an Italic font should be used.

Underline Underlines the letters.

Colour Sets the colour of texts.

Background If available, defines the background of texts.

Padding Padding is the amount of space around the text, i.e. the gap between the border of individual table cells and the text itself.

"Description and sample texts"

Below the parameters an official description and a short sample text printed in the selected font is attached.

Tables

It is possible to define the format for both table cells and table background.

Lines

Use custom line width The defined format of lines (cell border) is applied.

Do not print any lines No table cell lines are printed.

"Individual lines" A list of all the lines and frames that can be modified follows. The user can adjust his/her favourite values.

Basic Reference Guide

640

Note: For more information see Layout settings.

Background

Use custom background colours

Defined colours are applied.

Do not print any background

The background is not printed. The cells are transparent.

"Colours" The colours for header, even and odd row and for important cell can be adjusted.

Note: The fact that a particular cell is important is defined by the author of the program and it cannot be altered by the user. The user may only change the colour of such a cell.

Break narrow tables to strips

Do not break table to strips

The tables are printed in the document as designed. E.g. even if the table consists of one column only and 100 lines, it is printed "AS IS".

Break table to strips whenever possible

This option may save a considerable amount of paper as it breaks narrow tables into multiple strips and prints individual strips next to each other in order to better utilise the page width.

Use built-in automatic decision algorithm

Similar to the option above, but a built-in algorithm is applied that tries to assess the best division of the table into strips.

Options

Picture colour depth

Defines the colour depth for individual output device.

YES/NO values at tables

The user may select a favourite symbol to stand for YES and NO value in output tables.

Overflowed objects

If an object (e.g. a table) is too wide to fit a page, it is possible to define a ratio of reduction.

Filename for export

Suggest last used The last used filename is offered.

Construct from name of project filename

The filename is derived from the name of the project.

System

Trap Exception This option has no practical meaning for a standard user. It is relevant only for situations when a user cooperates directly with the programmers and they try to trace a specific problem.

Maximum number of pages

Maximum allowable number of pages of the document.

Max size of auto refreshing table

Defines the size of a document table when the table is automatically refreshed. If the table is bigger, its regeneration must be started manually by the user.

The procedure for the adjustment of visual style

1. If it is not the case, open the Document window.

2. Open the Document settings dialogue:

a. either using button

b. or using pop-up menu function Document settings (called Edit styles in some older versions),

Document

641

c. or through the Visual Styles manager.

3. Define the required settings.

4. Confirm the adjustment with [OK].

Note: The default document style may also be pre-adjusted using Scia Engineer function Setup > Document.

Table Manager and Table Composer

Introduction The Document consists of individual document items. One document item can be a table, image, simple text, etc. In this chapter we focus on tables only. Document items are sorted in the document tree.

Each table contains certain data (e.g. information about nodes, 1D members, defined load cases, characteristics of cross-sections, calculated results etc). The layout of the table is called a template. One table can have (and usually really has) several templates defined. Thus, it is possible to choose between (i) brief or detailed table, (ii) horizontal or vertical table, etc.

The developer of Scia Engineer has prepared a set of templates that should cover the common needs of majority of users. On the other hand, it is clear that special situations may require special treatment, it means a special layout of the tables in the document. It is also common that e.g. large companies want to have their documents standardised and therefore, they may require some modification of the default templates or even creation of tailor-made templates reflecting their particular needs or habits.

Scia Engineer offers two tools that may provide for the above-mentioned tasks.

Table Manager

The Table Manager belongs to the extended family of Scia Engineer database managers. It provides for maintenance of table templates.

Table Composer

The Table Composer is an editing tool that can be used to modify the layout of a particular table template.

Manufacturer's versus user's table template

Table templates and OTS files

The introductory chapter mentioned a table template. Each table template has a corresponding file stored in one of the Scia Engineer folders. The exact location depends on the origin of the template. Scia Engineer distinguishes three different origins (or we may say types) of templates: (i) template prepared by the manufacturer, (ii) template prepared by the manufacturer but modified by the user, (iii) template completely created by the user.

All table template files use extension .OTS. The name of each particular OTS file is composed of three parts: (i) prefix (optional), (ii) name of the table, (iii) name of the particular template (in square brackets). For example, the for the Load Case table there are three templates available. Their name is default, Detailed, and Header – see the picture below.

The corresponding OTS files are named:

DataSetScia-EP_LoadCase [default].ots,

DataSetScia-EP_LoadCase [Detailed].ots,

DataSetScia-EP_LoadCase [Header].ots,

where "DataSetScia-EP_" is the prefix, "LoadCase" is the name of the table, and "default" (or "Detailed" or "Header") is the name of the template.

Tip: The full path to the corresponding OTS is shown in the top part of the Table Composer dialogue.

Template prepared by the manufacturer

By default, Scia Engineer is distributed with a set of basic templates for all tables that appear in the document. Even though the manufacturer tried to do its best in the design of the templates, it is inevitable that for some users the predefined layout will not be the right one. Therefore, the distributed templates may be edited if required – see below.

The manufacturer’s templates are stored in folder DocumentTemplates under the folder where Scia Engineer was installed.

Example: Let us assume that Scia Engineer was installed on disk E in folder SciaEsa. The manufacturer’s table templates files are then stored in folder: E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\.

Template prepared by the manufacturer but modified by the user

When the user modifies a manufacturer’s table template, the template file (.OTS) is first copied into the user’s folder. Any modifications done by the user are thus made on the copy of the original template. It is therefore possible to return easily back to the manufacturer’s settings.

Basic Reference Guide

642

The original table template file (the OTS file stored in folder DocumentTemplates under the folder where Scia Engineer was installed) is never altered through the Scia Engineer user interface. It is always preserved in the original form.

Example: Let us assume that Scia Engineer was installed on disk E in folder SciaEsa. The manufacturer’s table templates files are then stored in folder: E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\. When any of the templates is edited, the corresponding OTS file is first copied to the User folder, e.g. C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\User\DocumentTemplates\.

The exact location of the User folder can be specified in the Setup > Options dialogue in the tab sheet Directories.

Note: As soon as the manufacturer’s table template is modified, the icon shown in the Table Manager changes

from to , with the pencil indicating that the template has been changed somehow.

Template completely created by the user

The OTS file corresponding to a table template created by the user is automatically stored in the User folder. The Table

Manager uses a special icon ( ) for such a template.

Example: Let us assume that the User folder was adjusted to C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\User\. Any user-created table template has its corresponding OTS file stored in C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\User\DocumentTemplates\.

The exact location of the User folder can be specified in the Setup > Options dialogue in the tab sheet Directories, see above.

Special table templates for Header, Footer, and Title Page

OTS files corresponding to table templates for header and footer of a document page and for the title page of a document are kept in separate folders under the DocumentTemplates folder.

Example:

Manufacture’s templates:

Footer templates in E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\Footer\,

Header templates in E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\Header\,

Title page templates in E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\TitlePage\.

User templates:

Footer templates in C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\user\DocumentTemplates\Footer\,

Header templates in C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\user\DocumentTemplates\Header\,

Title page templates in C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\user\DocumentTemplates\TitlePage\.

Table Manager

Table Manager dialogue

Description

In the Table Manager the following operations can be done:

Document

643

a new table template can be created for a particular table (i.e. document item),

the existing template can be removed,

the existing template can be modified through the Table Composer,

the existing user-created template can be renamed,

the existing template can be copied.

The Table Composer can be opened only for an existing document item. It means that (i) the document must be already prepared using the available table templates, (ii) the required table must be selected in the document, and (iii) only then the Table Manager can be opened and templates for the selected table can be processed.

The Table Manager also shows the origin of each table. The origin is marked by the icon next to the template name.

tables prepared by the manufacturer and NOT edited at all by the user

tables prepared by the manufacturer BUT already modified by the user

tables created by the user

More information about the origin of the table template can be found in chapter Manufacturer's versus user's table template.

Procedure to open the Table Manager dialogue

1. Open the Document.

2. Select the required table (the document item) in your document window or in the document tree.

3. Open the Table Manager dialogue through the icon Table Manager ( ) on the Document toolbar (located at the top of the document window).

4. The Table Manager dialogue is opened on the screen.

Creating a new table template

The procedure to create a new template

1. Open the Document.

2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.

3. Open the Table Manager.

4. Select the existing template from which the new template should be derived (see Note below).

5. Define the template.

6. Confirm with [OK]. The Table Composer closes.

7. Close the Table Manager.

Note: If a new template is being created, the program offers you not an empty template, but a template that is identical to the template that was selected in the Table Manager list at the moment when function New (template) was invoked. Example:

Let us assume that the Table Manager was opened for Load Case table. Further let us assume that templates shown in the figure above were already defined for this table. Finally, let us assume that the template named mytemplate is selected in the list at the moment when button [New] is pressed. The Table Composer opens on the screen with the settings corresponding to template mytemplate. It is up to the user how much the offered settings will be altered.

Basic Reference Guide

644

Modifying the existing table template

The procedure to modify the existing template

1. Open the Document.

2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.

3. Open the Table Manager.

4. Select the existing template that is to be edited.

5. Press button [Edit]. The Table Composer opens on the screen.

6. Modify the template.

7. Confirm with [OK]. The Table Composer closes.

8. Close the Table Manager.

Renaming the existing user-defined template When a new template is being created, the user may specify its name. Once the Table Composer dialogue for the new template is closed, the name is stored and is not editable in the Table Composer dialogue anymore. Even when the template is later modified, the name cannot be changed.

However, if there is a need to rename the table template, it can be done the following way:

The procedure to rename the existing template

1. Open the Document.

2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.

3. Open the Table Manager.

4. Select the existing template that is to be renamed.

5. Press [F2] on your keyboard or click the template name in the list with the mouse left button – see Note 1 below.

6. The name becomes editable.

7. Rename the template and press [Enter] on your keyboard.

8. That’s it.

Note 1: Either action (pressing [F2] or clicking the name) is a standard MS Windows feature for renaming items in tree controls. Note 2: Only user-created templates can be renamed. It is not possible to rename a manufacturer’s template, even when it was modified by the user.

Deleting the existing table template When you want to delete an existing table template, it is important to realise that ONLY user-defined or user-modified templates can be deleted. The manufacturer’s templates CANNOT be removed.

The statement above may be clearer from the following table.

tables prepared by the manufacturer and NOT edited at all by the user

This type of table template CANNOT be deleted.

tables prepared by the manufacturer BUT already modified by the user

When this type of table template is deleted, the user-copy of the manufacturer’s template is deleted and the manufacturer’s original template is restored.

This change is indicated by the change of the icon

from to .

tables created by the user This type of table template can be freely deleted whenever wanted.

Note: The templates, or to be precise the corresponding OTS files, can also be deleted directly from the User folder on your disk. Read chapter Manufacturer's versus user's table template to learn more about OTS files and their location. Use this method ONLY for table templates whose OTS files are stored in the User folder. Under no circumstances apply this direct deletion to templates stored in folder DocumentTemplates under the folder where Scia Engineer was installed.

In any case, this procedure is recommended ONLY for advanced users of Scia Engineer with a good knowledge of MS Windows.

Document

645

Copying the existing table template

The procedure to create a new template

1. Open the Document.

2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.

3. Open the Table Manager.

4. Select the existing template that is to be copied.

5. Click icon Copy ( ).

6. The template is copied.

7. Close the Table Manager.

Note: This procedure is similar to the creation of a new template, but it does not offer immediate modification of the template.

Selecting the required template for display When the required template has been created or modified using either the Table Manager or Table Composer or both, it can be selected as the active template. It means that the data in the document will be displayed through the selected template.

The procedure to select the required template in the Table Manager

1. In the Document, select the table for which you want to change the template.

2. Open the Table Manager.

3. In the list of defined templates select the required one.

4. Close the Table Manager using button [Close] (not the "cross" button in the top right corner of the dialogue).

The procedure to select the required template in the Document Window

1. In the Document, select the table for which you want to change the template.

2. On the toolbar at the top part of the Document window, use the combox with available templates to select the required one.

Table Composer

Table Composer dialogue

Description

The Table Composer Dialogue allows for a modification of the existing layout of a particular table. In the Table Composer you can:

select quantities will be shown in the table,

specify the order of the quantities,

sort the quantities column-wise or row-wise,

define the font, size, alignment and other text-related parameters,

if possible, specify special properties of certain quantities,

etc. Note: In the Table Composer, it is not possible to create a new layout. This can be done in the Table Manager.

Procedure to open the Table Composer dialogue

1. Open the Document.

2. Select the required table (the document item) in your document window or in the document tree.

3. Open the Table Composer dialogue:

a. either click icon Table Composer ( ) on the Document toolbar (located at the top of the document window).

b. or right click any cell in the required table to invoke the pop-up menu and select function Table Composer (Note: Words "Table Composer" are normally followed by a list of available .

4. The Table Composer dialogue is opened on the screen.

Parameters and controls in the Table Composer dialogue

Basic Reference Guide

646

The Table Composer dialogue contains a vast number of various settings, parameters, lists and other controls. Common users usually do not need to bother with all the options. Therefore the Table Composer dialogue is divided into several tab-sheets. The first one comprises all what a common user may need to make some principal changes to the layout of a particular table. Other tab-sheets then offer advanced settings that may be useful for advanced, painstaking or demanding users or for "administrators" in big companies who prepare the official layout of company documents.

Detailed description of individual tab-sheets is given in separate chapters:

Standard settings,

Advanced settings for table,

Advanced settings for column or row,

Layout settings,

Property settings.

Tip: In the top part of the dialogue, the full path to the corresponding OTS file is shown.

Standard settings

Contents of table

Items in Table This list contains all the items (quantities and formatting commands) that are included into the currently edited table template.

Available items This list offers all available items that can be inserted into the table. The items are divided into three groups.

ESA properties

Available properties corresponding to individual parameters, quantities, result values, etc.

Defined views

The whole defined views (i.e. table templates) for the given table. It means that not only individual items, but even the whole template can be inserted into a table.

For example MyBriefTemplate can contain only the main items. And MyDetailedTemplate can include the same items extended by some other information. This can save the user’s time during the preparation of templates.

User properties

This group comprises mainly formatting items and some general items like date, page number, etc.

[Remove] This button removes the selected item from the list of items in the table. That means, the corresponding value is no longer shown in the table.

[Add] This button adds the item selected from among Available items into the List of items. That means, the selected quantity, template, formatting character, etc. is added to the table and shown in it.

Table

Template name Each template can have a name that simplifies the work eith it.

For renaming the template see chapter Renaming the existing user-defined template.

Table type Horizontal table

Item headers in this type of table are arranged in a vertical column and individual values are arranged horizontally in rows.

Document

647

Vertical table

Item headers in this type of table are arranged in a horizontal row and individual values are arranged vertically in columns.

Simple form

This type is intended for tables inserted into other tables. It does not allow to have headers for individual items in the table.

Fit table to page width This option stretches the table width so that it fits the page. See the two pictures below.

Below, a horizontal table with the option Fit table to page width set to NO.

Below, a horizontal table with the option Fit table to page width set to YES.

Basic Reference Guide

648

Columns / Rows

Caption The caption used in the header of the item.

Alignment The alignment of the item.

No header If ON, the item header is not displayed.

If OFF, the item header is displayed.

Do not aggregate caption at horizontal tables

If Continue Line is used in a horizontal table, the headings are merged into one, e.g. Mx, My, Mz captions are merged (aggregated) into "Mx,y,z". If this format is not suitable, the aggregation of the headings may be suppressed by this option.

Options in this group are related not to the table as a whole, but to each particular item in the table (row or column depending on the orientation of the table – horizontal / vertical).

Example

In order to prepare a vertical table (i.e. one column = one item) without the names of the items (option No header), you must remove the header from all table items.

Let us take the Load case table. By default it look like:

If you open the Table Composer, go item by item in the list of Items in Table, and for each item tick the option No header (see the picture)

Document

649

you obtain the following table of load cases:

Preview

In the Preview window of the dialogue you can see the layout of the table you are modifying.

Note: We are aware of the fact that modification of tables (table templates) in general is a complex and rather complicated matter. Therefore, in order to simplify the task, the basic parameters and controls were extracted to this (default on opening) sheet of the Table Composed dialogue. We believe that these basic parameters are straightforward, easy-to-understand and easy-to-handle. They are sufficient for the vast majority of actions you may require during the modification of table templates. The other tab sheets of the dialogue with advanced parameters and options are intended to be used by advanced users, administrators and specially trained staff.

Examples

User properties

Let’s assume a standard table of nodal points. By default the Properties in table window contains properties:

Name

Coord X

Coord Y

Coord Z

And the table looks like:

Line break

When the Line break property is inserted after the Coord X, the result will be:

Basic Reference Guide

650

The Properties in table window contains properties:

Name

Coord X

Line break

Coord Y

Coord Z

And the table will look like:

Horizontal table

Now assume that the table is changed to a Horizontal table (on Table tab of the dialogue). The Properties in table window contains again only the default properties:

Name

Coord X

Coord Y

Coord Z

The table will look like:

Document

651

Continue line

Finally, let’s add two Line continue properties to the Properties in table window:

Name

Coord X

Line continue

Coord Y

Line continue

Coord Z

The final table will look like:

Basic Reference Guide

652

Simplified Table Composer dialogue Header and footer represent a special type of tables in the Document. They are usually simpler than tables containing input values and results. Therefore, if required, both header and footer can be edited in a simplified Table Composer dialogue. In fact, this simplified dialogue opens by default when editing of the header or footer is activated.

The simplified table composer assumes that the header or footer contain only:

A picture on the left hand side of the page (may be omitted if required).

At maximum five lines and two columns of information shown in a simple table. Individual cells of this table can be separately adjusted – concerning the contents. The legend (cell names) may be shown or omitted.

A picture on the right hand side of the page (may be omitted if required).

In addition, the user may decide whether the line width definition is taken from the current document visual style or whether no lines are printed, and what background colour is used in print.

Of course, if necessary, the user may swap to the full Table Composer dialogue.

Advanced settings

Advanced settings for table

Caption

A user-typed caption can be added above the table. Example: Let us assume that we have a table of load cases:

When we add a caption (e.g. This is my caption on advanced tab sheet), we get

Document

653

The button [...] next to the input box allows for the adjustment of the page style, e.g. the font for the caption can be altered there.

Table style

Automatic style If ON, the style preset by the manufacturer is applied.

If OFF, you can define your own style for each "type" (header, odd line, even line) of table line.

Header style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this particular style will be used for the table header.

The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.

Rotated header If ON, the texts in the header of the table are rotated 90° counter-clockwise to create vertically oriented text. This makes it possible to put more text into the header while keeping the table narrow (e.g. to fit one page).

Odd line style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this particular style will be used for the odd lines in the table.

The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.

Even line style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this particular style will be used for even lines in the table.

The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.

Internal table

This option says that the table will be used as an internal (sub)template for another template. Such a template is not offered among the available templates in the combo box on the document toolbar. It appears only in the list of available items in the Standard settings tab sheet of the Table Composer dialogue.

Advanced settings for column or row

The settings in this tab sheet relate to individual table items.

Items in Table

This list contains all the items (quantities and formatting commands) that are included into the currently edited table template (the same list is in the Standard settings tab sheet).

You need to select the item in this for which the settings are to be changed first, and then you may alter the settings.

Column width

Use default If ON, the default (defined by the manufacturer) column width is applied.

Minimal If the default width is not used, this item specifies the minimal allowable width of the column.

Delta If the default width is not used, and the minimal allowable width of the column (see the parameter above) is not sufficient for the contents of the cell, the width is increased by this Delta.

Line(s)/Row(s) styles

Use table style If ON, the style defined for the whole table is used (defined in Advanced settings for table).

If OFF, you can define your own style for each table lines.

Basic Reference Guide

654

Header style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this particular style will be used for the item header.

The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.

Content style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this particular style will be used for the selected line in the table.

The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.

Picture size

If the item is a picture, you can define the size of it here.

Other

Representation of parametric values

If a property is defined using a parameter, the user may decide whether the document should display the numerical value or the name of the parameter.

Value

The numerical value is printed.

Name

The name of the parameter is printed.

Value (Name)

The value is printed accompanied with the name of the parameter in paranthesis.

Name (Value)

The name of the parameter is printed accompanied with the numerical value in paranthesis.

Contents does not make valid line

Generally, a line is removed from a table if all the cells of the line are empty. In addition, if only cells corresponding to marked columns (i.e. columns with this option ON) hold any information and the other cells of the line are empty, the line is removed as well.

Fixed width If ON, the width of this particular cell is fixed and will not be changed in order to e.g. fit the table to the page, etc.

Layout settings

Lines

Use custom line width The user-defined line parameters (width) are used.

Do not print any lines No lines (cell and table borders) are printed at all.

Use document preset The default settings adjusted in the document setup are used.

Available line types

Some settings are relevant to horizontal tables, some to vertical tables and some to both. The explanation of the individual values is shown in the two pictures below.

Frame around table A

Frame around header B

Frame around body C

Frame around section D

Vertical space between sections

E

Frame around important cell

F

(not shown in the figures)

Line under header G

Document

655

Line between rows H

Line between columns in header

I

Line between columns in body

J

Background

Use custom background colours

The user may specify the colour of individual components of the table: header, odd row, even row, important cell (that a cell is important is defined by the author of the program and it cannot be changed by the user).

Do not print any background

No background is printed at all, just the lines (if defined) around the cells and around the table.

Use document preset The default settings adjusted in the document setup are used.

Available background types

Table header Background colour of table header.

Odd row Background colour of odd rows in the table.

Basic Reference Guide

656

Even row Background colour of even rows in the table.

Important cell Background colour of important cells (that a cell is important is defined by the author of the program and it cannot be changed by the user).

Property settings

Certain items in the table can have specific properties. These can be defined in this tab sheet.

For example, user text has the property of "text", so the "message" can be typed in this tab sheet. Or a picture needs to define the location on the disk and the size. In addition it offers a preview directly in the Property tab sheet.

Sorting the table columns outside the table composer

The order of individual columns in the table can be sorted in the Table composer dialogue. In addition, it is possible to arrange the order of columns even outside the Table composer.

The procedure for rearranging of columns in the table

1. In the Document of Preview window, position the mouse cursor over the heading of the column you want to shift.

2. Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.

3. Select function Move left or Move right, respectively.

4. The table is rearranged accordingly.

Note: This approach is available for vertical tables only.